diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 20:08:27 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 20:08:27 -0700 |
| commit | c54421ee20bf6d4f5a5da5e63000d70dc9ae343c (patch) | |
| tree | 887b41d467ba59c7450c8e8f8d6086d44b3355d3 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-8.txt | 8365 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 133460 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1386555 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/37647-h.htm | 10698 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41033 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 85775 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus019.jpg | bin | 0 -> 72415 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus025.jpg | bin | 0 -> 77143 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus063.jpg | bin | 0 -> 106680 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus125.jpg | bin | 0 -> 87300 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus131.jpg | bin | 0 -> 65961 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus159.jpg | bin | 0 -> 81325 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus211.jpg | bin | 0 -> 68417 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus235.jpg | bin | 0 -> 90023 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus249.jpg | bin | 0 -> 102213 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus311.jpg | bin | 0 -> 104288 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus313.jpg | bin | 0 -> 86378 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus315.jpg | bin | 0 -> 88306 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/illus317.jpg | bin | 0 -> 60786 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647-h/images/title-page.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24333 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647.txt | 8365 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 37647.zip | bin | 0 -> 133465 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
25 files changed, 27444 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/37647-8.txt b/37647-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a90b88 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8365 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country +Fair, by James Otis + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair + + +Author: James Otis + + + +Release Date: October 6, 2011 [eBook #37647] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT +A COUNTRY FAIR*** + + +E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Matthew Wheaton, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 37647-h.htm or 37647-h.zip: + (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37647/37647-h/37647-h.htm) + or + (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37647/37647-h.zip) + + + + + +[Illustration: In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying, "Stop +thief!" at the full strength of his lungs.] + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR + +by + +James Otis + +Author of Toby Tyler Etc. + +Illustrated + + + + + + + +Boston +Charles E. Brown & Co. + +Copyright, 1893, +By Charles E. Brown & Co. + +S. J. Parkhill & Co., Printers +Boston + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + CHAPTER. + I.--A Young Fakir + II.--An Old Fakir + III.--A Friend + IV.--Uncle Nathan + V.--The Fair + VI.--A Clue + VII.--The Clerk + VIII.--The Jewelry Fakir + IX.--A Brave Rescue + X.--An Encounter + XI.--Long Jim + XII.--A Discovery + XIII.--Amateur Detectives + XIV.--The Rendezvous + XV.--Sam's Adventures + XVI.--Missing + XVII.--A Terrible Night + XVIII.--A Narrow Escape + XIX.--The Arrest + XX.--A Proposition + XXI.--With the Burglars + XXII.--A Disaster + XXIII.--A Second Arrest + XXIV.--A Third Arrest + XXV.--On Bail + XXVI.--The Fakirs' Party + XXVII.--In Hiding + XXVIII.--A Failure + XXIX.--The Testimonial + XXX.--The Trial + XXXI.--An Arrival + XXXII.--In Conclusion + + + + +_THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR._ + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +_A YOUNG FAKIR._ + + +"I'm going to try it. Deacon Jones says I can have the right to run both +things for ten dollars, and Uncle Nathan is going to lend me money +enough to get the stock." + +"What scheme have you got in your head now, Teddy Hargreaves?" and Mrs. +Fernald looked over her spectacles at the son of her widowed sister, who +was literally breathless in his excitement. + +"I'm going to run a cane an' knife board at the Peach Bottom fair, and +try to make money enough to pay the debt mother owes on the place." + +"You're crazy--mad as a March hare! The idea of a child like you setting +yourself up to earn three or four hundred dollars, when your father +worked all his life and couldn't get so much together." + +Mrs. Fernald really appeared to be angry, and she really believed there +was good cause why she should lose her temper. The thought that little +Teddy--a "whiflet" she called him--should set up his opinion in such +matters against his elders, and attempt to earn in one season an amount +which Seth Hargreaves had never been able to repay during his thirty-six +years of life, was so preposterous that the good lady looked upon the +boy's assertion as positive proof that he was not only ready but willing +to "fly in the face of Providence." + +"I shall try it all the same," Teddy replied in a most provokingly +matter-of-fact tone, "an' I'm going down to see Uncle Nathan this very +minute." + +"Very well, and I consider it my bounden duty to advise your mother to +keep you in the house until the fair is ended," Aunt Sarah said, as she +took from its peg the well-worn gingham sun-bonnet. + +Teddy had no desire to prolong the conversation, which had been begun +simply because his aunt insisted on knowing where he had been, but +hurried away from the gate on which he had been swinging while Mrs. +Fernald questioned him, as if fearful lest she might try to detain him +until the matter could be settled according to her own ideas of +propriety. + +"I can have the right to run what I want to, every day the fair lasts, +for ten dollars, an' now, if you lend me fifteen, I'll be all right," +the boy cried as he burst into Nathan Hargreaves' store, just as the old +gentleman was adding a trifle more sand to the sugar, in order to +compensate for what might possibly have been spilled by the careless +clerk. + +"Oh, it's fixed, eh? And you're really goin' to turn fakir?" Uncle +Nathan asked, wrinkling his face into the semblance of a laugh, but +remaining silent, as if fearing to waste even such a cheap thing as +mirth. + +"What's a fakir?" + +"A man, or a boy, for that matter, who goes out to sell things as you +count on doin', if I'm fool enough to let you throw away fifteen good +dollars of mine." + +"But you promised to lend me the money." + +"An' I'm going to do it; but that don't make me any less a fool jest +because I'm holdin' to my word. Tell me what you count on doin', an' +then we'll come down to the business end of the scheme." + +"I'll pay the ten dollars I've got to Deacon Jones for the right to run +the games, an' with what you lend me I'm goin' to Waterville an' buy a +whole lot of knives an' canes. There's a storekeeper over there who +promises to sell that kind of goods for less than they cost him." + +"An' he's lyin' when he says it. People don't do business for the fun of +it; but that's neither here nor there so far as our trade is concerned. +I'm goin' to give you the fifteen dollars now--it's a power of money for +a boy of your size, Teddy--, an' if you make anything, as I allow you +will, I'm to have eighteen dollars back; don't forget that part of the +trade." + +"I'll stand to what I agreed, Uncle Nathan, and you shall be paid the +very day the fair closes." + +"Here it is," and with a sigh which was almost a groan Uncle Nathan took +from a fat calfskin wallet three five-dollar bills, adding, as he handed +them to Teddy: "Be careful of it, my boy, for I'm puttin' almost too +much confidence in a child of your size, an' nobody knows how distressed +I'd be if anything happened to prevent your paying it back." + +Teddy placed the money carefully in the inside pocket of his vest, and, +after promising for at least the hundredth time that it should be repaid +by the close of the following week, hurried home confident in the belief +that he was on an extremely short road to wealth. + +Mrs. Hargreaves was by no means as sanguine as her son concerning the +success of the scheme, and actually appeared frightened when Teddy +showed her the money he had received from his Uncle Nathan, who was +reputed to be the "closest-fisted" merchant to be found within a day's +ride of Peach Bottom Run. + +"If you should lose it, Teddy, and be unable to pay him back at the +exact time you promised, it would be the undoing of us, for we could +never expect to get another dollar. I know he is not generous, but have +always believed that if we should be in yet more straitened +circumstances he would give us some assistance. He has neither charity +nor mercy for any one who does not pay a little more than his just +debts--" + +"But I shall give back every cent of this, mother, so don't look as if +you were in such distress. I want to go to Waterville to buy my stock in +the morning, an' am counting on walking. It's only seven miles, an' I'll +save fifty cents by traveling on shanks' mare." + +"I will have breakfast ready by four o'clock; but you must come back on +the stage, Teddy." + +"Yes, if I feel very tired; but I don't know of any easier way to earn a +dollar than by walking both ways." + +The young "fakir" believed he knew exactly what kind and amount of stock +he wished to purchase on the following day, therefore he had no +preparations to make for the journey save to get his limbs in the best +possible condition for the tramp by retiring very early, in order to +"scoop in" plenty of sleep. + +The thought of the success which should attend him in his new venture +kept his eyes open a long while after getting into bed, and when he +finally succeeded in crossing over to the land of Nod, dreams of the +fortune to be made during the coming week visited his brain, and +remained there until his mother's voice summoned him to breakfast. + +The sun had not yet come up from behind the hills when he was trudging +sturdily along over the dusty road, carrying a generous luncheon tied in +a snowy-white napkin, and with his money secured by many pins in the +lining of his cap. + +"Be careful not to lose it, for your Uncle Nathan would never forgive +you," his mother had said, and he cried cheerily, as he walked swiftly +down the lane to the highway: + +"There's no fear of anything like that happening; the bills can't get +away without my knowing it so long as they stay here," and Teddy pulled +his cap yet more closely down on his head. + +In a trifle more than two hours he was at Waterville, wondering why the +stores were not open, no matter how early it was, when such an important +customer as himself came to town. + +Since the merchants were evidently ignorant of his arrival, as was +evidenced by the fact that their places of business yet remained closed, +there was no more profitable occupation for him than to eat a second +breakfast, which he proceeded to do, using a hand-truck on the +depot-platform as a seat. + +The train which left New York on the evening before had arrived some +time previous, and the station was temporarily deserted by all save a +boy of about Teddy's age, who was walking to and fro in an aimless +manner. + +By the time the young "fakir" had finished his second biscuit he noticed +that the stranger was watching him narrowly, and, holding forth the +napkin with its generous store, he asked: + +"Have one?" + +"I don't care if I do," said the boy, carelessly, and he continued: + +"I reckon you live 'round here?" + +"No, I jest come up from Peach Bottom Run, an' am waiting for the stores +to be opened." + +"Why, you're from the same place where the fair is goin' to be held." + +"No; I live at the Run, an' the fair is over to Peach Bottom, most five +miles from my house. Are you goin' there?" + +"I should reckon I was. Why, I'm goin' to help run it." + +"You are?" and Teddy's mouth opened wide in astonishment. + +"Yes, sir-ree, an' you fellers will be jest about crazy when I tell you +what I've come to do." + +"Don't flash it upon us too quick, for we wanter kind of keep our wits +about us till the fun is over." + +The tone of sarcasm in Teddy's voice appeared to nettle the stranger. + +"I've come down here to give away a steamboat what's worth five hundred +dollars." + +"Then there ain't any need for you to go any farther, 'cause I'm willin' +to take it now." + +"If you won't be so smart I'll tell you about it," was the dignified +reply. "There's a firm out in Detroit what's goin' to do that very thing +to the feller that can guess how much she weighs, an' I've been hired to +help the man who is comin' down to Peach Bottom to show off a lot of +boats." + +"What are you goin' to do?" and now Teddy was interested. + +"Row around in the creek while he looks out for the stuff in the fair. +It won't be any more'n fun, an' if you'll come over I'll take you out." + +"I don't s'pose you could help me guess how much the steamer weighs, +could you?" + +"There ain't anybody as can do that, 'cause you see she ain't built yet; +but you can find out all about it by lookin' on the fair grounds for the +circulars what the Davis Boat and Oar Company of Detroit will throw +around, an' if there's somethin' else you wanter know jest ask for Sam +Balderston; all the folks will know me before I've been there very +long." + +"I'm going to work at the fair myself," Teddy replied, and then, in +response to his new friend's questions, he gave him all the particulars +of his proposed venture. + +"I reckon you'll get along all right, an' come out way ahead, if some of +these smart fakirs don't try to get the best of you. Say, why can't I go +to your house, an' stay till it's time to go over to the fair? I'll pay +my way." + +"If mother's willin', I'd like to have you, an' I don't believe she'll +care. Now, I've got to buy my stuff. Where'll I meet you afterward?" + +"I'm goin' with you," Sam said, in a matter-of-fact tone. "I know a good +deal about such things, an' won't see you cheated." + +Teddy hardly thought he was in need of any assistance; but since he did +not want to offend this fellow who was concerned in giving away a +steamboat, he could not well refuse, therefore the two started up the +street together. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +_AN OLD FAKIR._ + + +Sam had very much advice to give during the short walk, and while the +greater portion of it was worthless, there were bits which might be of +value to the young "fakir." + +"Don't buy anything till you have seen all there is in town, an' then +you'll know which is the cheapest," Sam repeated several times, with an +air of wisdom, and Teddy believed this to be a good idea. + +With this object in view the two boys walked from store to store, +examining that particular quality of canes and knives which Teddy +thought would be best suited to his purpose, and Sam had no hesitation +in criticising the goods boldly, until more than one of the clerks lost +his temper entirely and refused to show the full stock. + +"If you go on this way, Sam, we won't get the business done to day, an' +I want to send the stuff down in the stage, which leaves here at three +o'clock." + +"There'll be plenty of time for that; I know what I'm about. Now, if you +had sent your money to me, I'd got you a dandy lot in New York for +almost nothing." + +"Seein's how I didn't even know your name till a couple of hours ago, +there wasn't much chance for me to do that, an' I guess I'll make out +well enough here if you don't keep on raisin' a fuss with the clerks." + +"I won't so much as yip ag'in, if that's the way you look at it. The +question is, which store you're goin' to buy from?" + +"There's a place near the depot that wasn't open when we came past. +Let's go there, an' then I'll make up my mind." + +Sam, feeling a trifle injured because his advice had not been fully +appreciated, said nothing more until they were near the station, and +then, seeing a train approaching, he proposed that they stop for a few +minutes. + +"Jest as likely as not there'll be people on it whom I know goin' to the +fair, an' you want to get acquainted with all the fakirs, so's they'll +help you along now an' then." + +"The stage goes at three." + +"An' it ain't more'n ten now. Come on!" Sam cried, triumphantly, as he +motioned for Teddy to come nearer. + +Sam had already quickened his pace, and Teddy was forced to follow, or +injure the feelings of one whom he believed held a responsible position +in the Peach Bottom exhibition. Among the passengers alighting from the +train as the boys arrived was a man who carried a large package +enveloped in green cloth, and Sam whispered, excitedly: + +"I'll bet that's an old fakir, and if he is we want to let him know who +we are." + +Teddy failed to understand exactly why this was necessary; but his +companion seemed so positive on the point that he remained silent. + +This particular passenger appeared to have plenty of time at his +disposal. He placed his package at one end of the platform, lighted a +pipe, and then walked to and fro as the remainder of the travelers +dispersed. + +"You foller me, an' we'll find out who he is," Sam whispered, when he +thought a fitting opportunity had come, and then advanced boldly toward +the stranger. "Goin' to the fair?" he asked. + +"Yes; what of it?" + +"Nothin', only I s'pose you know you've got to take another train here." + +"If I didn't why would I be loafin' around this dead place?" + +"I jest spoke of it 'cause this feller an' I are goin' there, too," and +Sam waved his hand in the direction where Teddy was standing. + +"I s'pose there'll be other boys besides you at the fair, eh?" + +"But we belong to it. I'm to give a steamboat away, an' he's goin' to +run a cane an' knife board. We're waiting here to buy the stock." + +[Illustration: THE THREE NOTES WERE HANDED TO THE GENEROUS STRANGER.] + +"Oh, you are, eh?" and now the man appeared to be interested. "I reckon +you're goin' to spend as much as a dollar?" + +"One? Why, he's got fifteen, an' the whole of it will be spent before +the stage leaves. We know something about the business an' don't count +on gettin' an outfit for nothing." + +"I thought you was a fakir," the man said, in a more friendly tone, as, +unobserved by the worldly-wise Sam, he made a peculiar gesture to a +stranger immediately in the rear. + +"That's what I am," was the proud reply, "an' I'll make things hum over +at Peach Bottom before I leave the town. You see I thought I'd speak to +you, 'cause all of us fellers should know each other." + +"You're right, an' it's mighty lucky you did strike up an acquaintance, +for I can give you a big lift. I've helped many a boy into the business +when they had money enough to help themselves." + +The last dozen words were spoken in a loud tone, as if for the benefit +of the stranger in the rear; but instead of waiting to hear more the +latter turned abruptly and walked toward the package with a green +covering at the end of the platform. + +"I knew we oughter talk with you." + +"Did you count on buying your stuff in this one-horse town?" the man +asked as Teddy approached, and the latter replied: + +"There wasn't any other place I could go to, 'cause it costs too much +for a ticket to New York." + +"How big a stock do you want?" + +"All I can get for fifteen dollars. Don't you think that will be +enough?" + +"It depends," the stranger replied, reflectively. "If you buy the goods +here you'll have to pay such a big price that it won't be much of a +pile. Now, if--I've got the very thing in mind! You'll remember the day +you saw me if my plan works. I know a fakir here who has a fine layout +that he wants to sell. You can get fifty dollars' worth of stuff +for--well, he asks twenty; but I'll say you are friends of mine, an' the +chances are you can make a trade." + +"That would be a regular snap!" Sam cried, and Teddy's eyes glistened at +the thought of thus procuring a full outfit so cheaply. + +"I'll do what I can for you," the man said, in a patronizing tone. "At +any rate, I'll make him come down in his price, and if there's any +balance it can be paid after the fair has been opened long enough for +you to take in some money." + +"If business is good, I'm willing to do what is right," Teddy replied; +"but I must pay Uncle Nathan first." + +"How much do you owe him?" + +"Fifteen dollars." + +"Why, bless my soul, it'll be a pretty poor fair if you can't make five +times that amount in the first two days." + +"Where can we see the man?" Sam asked, eager that his wonderfully good +trade should be consummated at the earliest possible opportunity. + +"I don't know; but he's somewhere in the town. Give me your cash, an' +I'll hunt him up inside of half an hour. The stuff is right here in the +baggage-room, and you can ship it on the stage without any trouble." + +Just for an instant Teddy hesitated to part with what seemed to him like +an enormous amount of money; but then came the thought that an old fakir +would not wrong a young one--and he considered himself such. After some +little difficulty he succeeded in extracting all the pins, and the three +notes were handed to the generous stranger almost at the same moment +that the green-covered package disappeared from the edge of the platform +simultaneously with the departure of the second stranger. + +"Wait right here for me," the man said, as he put the money in his +pocket. "I've got too much work to do to spend any very great amount of +time hunting you fellows up in case you don't stay in one place." + +After thus cautioning them, the old fakir walked slowly away, and Sam +said: + +"It was lucky you fell in with me, Teddy, for I know how these things +are worked, an' can give you a good many pointers before the fair is +over. Why, you'll have a first-class outfit for about half what it's +worth." + +"Yes, it's a good chance; but I can't see why he didn't take us with him +if he was in a hurry, an' then he wouldn't have had to come back." + +"He's got to do that anyway, for his stuff is here," Sam replied, +pointing toward where he had last seen the man's package; but it was no +longer there. "I guess the baggage-master has taken it in," he added; +"but you needn't be afraid of losin' your money while I'm with you." + +Then Sam occupied his companion's attention by telling of his many +alleged wonderful exploits, and an hour passed before his story was +concluded. + +In the meantime one train had arrived and departed; another was on the +point of leaving the depot, bound for Peach Bottom, when Teddy cried as +he leaped to his feet: + +"See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money!" + +"Where?" + +"On the platform of the front car!" + +Before he could say anything more the train steamed out, leaving the +would-be young fakir staring at it in distress and consternation. + +"Of course it wasn't him," Sam said, confidently, when the last car +had disappeared from view. "The stuff he was goin'to buy for you is here +in the baggage-room, 'cause he said so, an' we'll see him before long." + +[Illustration: "See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money."] + +Teddy's suspicions had been aroused, and he was not easily quieted. The +thought that it was possible he might have lost the money loaned him by +Uncle Nathan was sufficient to cause the liveliest fear, and he said, +decidedly: + +"I'm going to know where that man's baggage went to." + +"How'll you find out?" + +"Ask the baggage-master." + +"Don't make a fool of yourself. It would be nice for an old fakir like +that man to know you thought he'd steal your money." + +"I don't care what he knows, so long as I get my fifteen dollars back." + +Teddy, trembling with apprehension and excitement, went into the +baggage-room and asked there if a green-covered package had been taken +in by any of the attendants. + +No one had seen such an article, and all were positive there was nothing +of the kind remaining in their charge. + +Then he asked if a bundle of canes had been left there, and to this +question there was a most decided negative. + +"The hangers-on at the fairs haven't begun to come yet," the +baggage-master said, "and when they do come, we sha'n't have any of +their stuff to handle, for it will all be transferred across the +platform without being brought in here. What is the matter? Anything +gone wrong?" + +The lump which had been rising in Teddy's throat was now so large that +it was with difficulty he could say: + +"A man has run off with fifteen dollars of mine, an' Uncle Nathan will +jest about kill me!" + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +_A FRIEND._ + + +The baggage-master immediately displayed the utmost sympathy for the +victim of the old fakir's seductive scheme, and Sam was loud in his +denunciations of a brother in the craft who would serve them in such a +shabby manner. + +"You leave him to me, an' I'll show you what can be done," that young +gentleman said, and Teddy replied, reproachfully: + +"I've left too much to you already. If you hadn't thought it was +necessary to make the acquaintance of every fellow who was going to the +fair I'd have my fifteen dollars in my cap now." + +"I'll get them back for you." + +"How?" + +"I can't say jest now; but you wait an' see what I can do." + +Inasmuch as Teddy must account first to his mother and afterward to +Uncle Nathan for that amount, the confident assertion of his friend +failed to give him any mental relief, and he said, quite sharply: + +"You thought it was all right to give the money to him, an' if you +didn't know any more than a country boy who'd never even heard of such +fellows, I can't see how you can do much toward helping." + +At this point the baggage-master, who had been listening to the +conversation, broke in with the sage remark: + +"It's no use for you fellows to fight over what has been done. The money +is gone; there's no doubt about that; but it may be you can get it +back." + +"How?" Teddy asked, eagerly. + +"By notifying the police, and it is possible that they may find your man +long before the fair is ended." + +"But even if they should, how can I pay Uncle Nathan the eighteen +dollars he wants, after givin' Deacon Jones the ten which I promised?" + +"That, of course, is a question I cannot answer," the officer of the +company replied, not unkindly; "but it will certainly be better to get +some of the money back than to lose the whole." + +"Of course it will," Sam said, promptly, after waiting a few seconds +without hearing any reply from Teddy. "Tell us what to do, an' I'll see +to the whole thing." + +"Hello! What kind of a meeting are you holding here?" a cheery voice +cried, and, looking up, the disconsolate Teddy saw a merchant whose +stock he had been examining a short time previous. + +In a few words the baggage-master explained the condition of affairs. + +"Can nothing be done?" the merchant asked. + +"It is barely possible. The fact of the matter is that the two swindlers +left on the last train, and this boy's money has gone with them beyond a +doubt." + +Then the merchant turned to the would-be fakir and asked for further +particulars, which were readily given, the latter saying, as he finished +the sad story: + +"Uncle Nathan is bound to raise a big row, an' I won't be able to help +mother, as I counted on doing; but I s'pose it serves me right." + +"I'm not so sure of that, lad, for all of us are liable to be taken in +at some time or another. It is possible you may make money at the fair, +and I will give you credit to the amount you lost. Go to the store, show +this slip, and get what you think may be needed." + +While speaking the merchant had been writing on a piece of paper torn +from his memorandum book, and when he handed it to Teddy the almost +heartbroken boy read the following words: + + The bearer, Edward Hargreaves, is entitled to credit, thirty + days' time, on all he may need, to the extent of thirty + dollars. + + JOHN REAVES. + +"But I only lost fifteen dollars," Teddy said, as he read the order. + +"I so understood; but you may need more, therefore I have made the +amount sufficiently large. Don't hesitate to buy what is wanted, and +whether you ever find the swindler or not, I feel very positive my bill +will be paid." + +Teddy tried to thank the merchant, but that lump in his throat was still +too near his mouth to admit of many words, and Sam whispered: + +"Don't say anything more about it. You've struck the biggest kind of +luck, and the safest way is to hold your tongue." + +Even had it been possible to speak, Teddy could not have said all that +was in his heart, and before Sam had time to give any further advice the +merchant boarded a train which was just starting for New York, leaving +the young fakir and his newly-made friend to settle matters among +themselves. + +"You're in big luck," the latter said, consolingly. "What's the +difference if you have lost fifteen dollars so long as you know how to +get thirty dollars' worth of goods to start in business?" + +"But this bill will have to be paid, and Uncle Nathan must have his +money; that leaves me forty-five dollars in debt." + +"S'pose'n it does? You're bound to make a good deal more'n that, an' I'm +here to help you through." + +Teddy came very near saying that if Sam had not been there the fifteen +dollars would still be reposing beneath the lining of his cap; but he +succeeded in checking himself, and the reproachful words remained +unspoken. + +At this point in the conversation the baggage-master insisted that +information of the swindler should be given to the police, and, whether +they desired to do so or not, the boys were forced to accompany him to +headquarters. + +Here it is possible their story might have been told without exciting +more than ordinary interest if the name of the kindly-disposed merchant +had not been used; but that was sufficient to awaken a decided interest, +and every detail was written down carefully. + +"We will try to get the money for you," the chief said. "Several of my +men will be at the fair, and if you see this fellow again, information +must be given to them immediately." + +Teddy had but little hope that any good would result by this means, but +he promised faithfully to do as requested, and then the boys were at +liberty to finish the business which had been interrupted so +disastrously. + +So much time had been wasted that it was necessary to move around very +lively in order to have the goods ready before the stage should leave, +and Teddy did a great deal toward expediting matters by explaining to +the clerk at the store on which he had the order for credit exactly +what he proposed to do. + +The young man understood at once the kind of goods which would be +needed, and without listening to the many suggestions made by Sam +selected a good assortment of both knives and canes. + +"Ain't you getting more than thirty dollars' worth?" Teddy asked, as the +clerk continued to add to the pile. + +"I think not. These are all cheap goods, you know, and make a big show +without amounting to any very great value. I will put in cotton cloth +enough for the cane board, and as many rings as you will need unless +business should be very brisk." + +The clerk was bent on making the bill exactly the size of the order, and +when the prices had been figured out Teddy had invested just thirty +dollars in a stock which must bring in a profit of at least fifty per +cent. in order to admit of his paying the debts already contracted. + +The goods were to be put on the stage by the salesman, and there was +nothing further for the boys to do but decide on their manner of +traveling to the Run. + +"After losin' fifteen dollars, I reckon there's only one thing for me to +do," Teddy said, as they left the store. "I'm goin'to walk; but you can +do as you please." + +"S'pose'n we both ride? You're bound to make a pile of money before the +fair is over, an' can afford---- By jinks! There's that fakir now!" + +In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying: "Stop thief!" with the +full strength of his lungs, as he pursued a man carrying a bundle +covered with green cloth. + +Such an appeal was well calculated to arouse every idler in the +immediate vicinity, and before Teddy fully understood what had happened +not less than twenty men and boys were in chase of the stranger, who, +strange to say, had not quickened his pace. + +The thought that it might yet be possible to regain his money lent +unusual speed to the would-be fakir's heels, and he was among the +foremost when the man suddenly halted, turned squarely around, and +asked: + +"What is the matter with you people? Do you want me?" + +"I guess we do," a policeman replied, as he seized the stranger by the +collar. "Somebody yelled for us to stop the thief, and you must be the +man." + +"Who says I am?" was the angry question. + +By this time both Teddy and Sam had discovered the latter's mistake. The +only point of resemblance between this stranger and the one who stole +the money was that both carried packages covered with green cloth; but +while the first bundle was bulky and apparently heavy, this was small +and readily held under the man's arm. + +Sam did not wait to explain matters. Fearing lest he might get into +serious trouble because of the mistake, he slipped quietly away, leaving +Teddy to bear the brunt of the accused's wrath. + +The latter realized that something must be done at once, for the greater +portion of the crowd was looking inquiringly at him, and he said, in a +voice which was far from steady: + +"I didn't do the hollerin'; but a feller who was with me when a man +stole my money thought you must be the one." + +"Where is he?" the stranger asked, advancing threateningly. + +"I don't know. He ran away when he saw it was a mistake." + +The crowd immediately began to disperse. The policeman called down quite +the reverse of blessings on Sam's head, and then walked away, leaving +Teddy and the stranger comparatively alone. + +"I don't know as it does any harm to have a lot of fools chasing a man," +the latter said, "but it might give him a bad name in his work." + +"I'm very sorry, sir, but you see----" + +"I'm not blaming you, my boy, since it was the other fellow who did the +mischief. Tell me how you lost your stuff." + +"My what?" + +"Your stuff--money." + +"Oh!" and Teddy at once gave the stranger a detailed account of all that +had happened, the latter saying, as the story was concluded: + +"I wouldn't be afraid to bet my head that Long Jim was the duck who +played the trick. I know he came here, headed for the fair grounds, and +it's jest about his style of working." + +"Do you think there's any chance I'll get it back?" + +"He shall give up if I see him. I'll be at the fair myself, working a +neat little game, and will see you there." + +With this remark the stranger walked away, and Teddy went toward the +depot once more, feeling quite certain he had made a friend who would +aid him in his new venture. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +_UNCLE NATHAN._ + + +When Teddy reached the depot he was not obliged to hunt very long for +Sam, for that young gentleman crept out from behind a pile of baggage on +seeing his friend was alone, and asked, in a hoarse whisper: + +"What did that feller do to you?" + +"Nothing; but that don't prove we should get out of another scrape so +easily, and you must be careful, or we'll be in no end of trouble before +the fair is ended." + +"I was only tryin' to catch your money." + +"It surely wouldn't have done any harm if you had found out whether that +was the man or not before you started the whole crowd after him." + +"That's right, rub it into a feller when he tries to do you a good +turn," Sam said, sarcastically, and then remembering an instant later +that he proposed to be this boy's guest, he added, "I was only lookin' +out for you, an' so long as there's been no harm done we needn't talk +about it. Do you still mean to walk home?" + +"There's nothing else to be done, if we want to get to the Run to-night, +for the stage left while we were chasing that man." + +This was exactly what he did not want to do; but, under the +circumstances, there was no help for it, and the young gentleman who +expected to form such a prominent portion of the fair set out by the +side of the friend whom he had injured while thinking to do him a favor. + +At the end of a trifle less than three hours, when both were footsore, +hungry, and weary, the boys arrived at Teddy's home, and Mrs. Hargreaves +made the stranger welcome despite the inconvenience caused by his +coming. + +Not until after Sam had retired did Teddy tell his mother of the theft, +and for several moments the widow was in great mental distress; but +finally she viewed the matter in a more cheerful light, and it was +resolved that Uncle Nathan should not be told of the mishap. + +"It would only make him angry," Mrs. Hargreaves said, "and you must pay +him before the merchant who was so kind to you gets his money; but I am +terribly afraid, Teddy, that the whole scheme will be a failure." + +The amateur fakir assured her as best he could, and when they retired +that night both Teddy and his mother were in a comparatively contented +frame of mind. + +The following day was Sunday, on which not even the all engrossing topic +of cane-boards and knives was to be discussed; but before the family had +finished breakfast the arrival of a stranger forced them into worldly +topics. + +The newcomer was none other than the man whom Sam had accused of being +the thief, and he explained the cause of his visit by saying: + +"I have reason to believe that Long Jim, the fakir who got away with +your son's money, will be over here to-night, because the hotels at +Peach Bottom are crowded, and it is possible he may be forced to give up +the stuff." Although not exactly understanding what he meant, the widow +insisted on his coming into the house, and he laid the details of his +plan before Teddy and Sam. + +"I'll hang around here for him," the stranger said, "and you shall say +if he is the man who did you up; after that I'll take a hand in the +business, and it'll be queer if between us all we can't make him do the +square thing, more especially since the rest of his gang haven't come +yet." + +As might be expected, Teddy was excited by the prospect of recovering +the money which he had believed was lost beyond reclaim, and plans were +at once laid to trap the dishonest fakir. + +While this conversation was being carried on Uncle Nathan came in to +learn how his nephew had succeeded in town, and the stranger introduced +himself as Frank Hazelton, a dealer in jewelry, which was to be on +exhibition during the coming week at the fair. + +The old man was delighted to make the stranger's acquaintance, for he +fancied there would be an opportunity for him to take the agency of a +valuable line of goods without the outlay of any money, and in a very +few moments the two were fast friends. + +Uncle Nathan not only monopolized nearly all the conversation, but +insisted on showing Mr. Hazelton around the village, and actually forced +the latter to accompany him, despite the fact that it was Sunday, when +an honest merchant is not supposed to so much as think of business. + +On the following day it would be necessary for those who had purchased +the privilege of doing business on the fair grounds to be present, ready +to select their different sites for working, and very shortly after the +sun sank behind the hills Sam and Teddy retired in order to be ready for +an early start next morning, since the first stage left the Run at +half-past five. + +It lacked fully an hour of that time when the boys were called to +breakfast by Mrs. Hargreaves, and in less than fifteen minutes they were +at the table eating a hearty breakfast, which was interrupted by the +appearance of Uncle Nathan, who looked as if he had not been in bed +since the evening previous. + +"I've been robbed!" he cried, passionately, "and this is what comes of +trying to help my nephew enter a disreputable line of business. I +believe you induced that man to come here, explaining all about my +store, simply that he might act the burglar. And it wouldn't take much +to make me think you had agreed to divide with him the ill-gotten +gains," he added, shaking his fist in the direction of Teddy, who was so +astounded by the news as to be literally incapable of movement. + +"What do you mean, Nathan?" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. + +"Just what I said! My store was robbed last night, and your precious son +knows the thief better than I do!" + +"You mean the man who came here yesterday?" the widow asked, while Teddy +and Sam gazed at the old man in open-mouthed astonishment. + +"Of course I do; who else could it be? Didn't I take him over there +yesterday, and didn't I explain just how difficult it was to deposit +money in a bank, because a man would have to pay a dollar to go to +Waterville an' back, or trust the stage driver to do the business?" + +By this time Teddy had recovered something like composure, and he said, +gravely: + +"We have no means of knowing what you said to Mr. Hazelton, but if you +told him all your business, that is no concern of ours. You insisted on +his going away with you, and we haven't seen him since." + +"But you lied to me about my money." + +"In what way?" + +"You never said a word about its being stolen." + +"If I never said a word I couldn't have told a lie. He has evidently +given the whole story; but what happened in Waterville has nothing to do +with the robbery of your store." + +"Oh, it hasn't, eh? Well, I'm beginning to think it was a job cooked up +by all hands to get the best of me." + +"If it had been," and now Teddy was on his feet, looking the angry old +man squarely in the face, "why wouldn't I have said something about it +in order to make the story seem straighter? A merchant in Waterville +trusted me for the goods I wanted after he heard the money was gone, and +I count on paying you before I do him." + +"Oh, you do, eh? Well, it's mighty doubtful whether you or this precious +friend of yours will ever see the fair, for I'm going to get out a +warrant for the whole lot before I'm done with this thing." + +"Would you arrest Teddy when he has been in this house ever since you +left here yesterday morning?" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. + +"I'll have my money back, and the sooner your smart son tells me where +it is, the sooner he can go about his business; but he must first pay me +back my eighteen dollars." + +"I only borrowed fifteen, Uncle Nathan, and that you will get before +next Wednesday. If you want to arrest me, go ahead; but I promise that +you'll be sorry for it." + +"So you threaten, do you? That's what comes of trying to help an +ungrateful boy! I knew he was going to the bad from the first minute he +talked about having a cane-board," the old man added, as he turned to +the widow, "and I predict that he'll come to no good even if he manages +to get out of this scrape." + +"You thought it was a good idea for me to do as I proposed," Teddy +replied, standing his ground bravely, "and was willing to loan me the +money, provided I would pay you three dollars for the use of fifteen for +one week." + +"That's right; throw in my teeth what I wanted to do in order to help +you along, and call me an old skinflint. I am old enough to expect such +things from such as you." + +"I haven't called you any names, nor do I intend to do so; I only wanted +mother to know the truth of the business between us. Do you really +believe I had any hand in breaking into your store?" + +"If you didn't your friends did, and that amounts to the same thing, as +you'll soon find out. I'll have a warrant issued for the arrest of the +whole crowd, if you don't tell me the truth this very minute." + +"But I don't know anything, Uncle Nathan." + +"I'll have the truth out of you before the day is ended," the old man +cried, angrily, and without saying or doing anything save to shake his +fist in the direction of his nephew and Sam he left the house. + +As yet none of the little party knew the full extent of what had +happened, but before Uncle Nathan was fairly out of the yard a neighbor +came around to tell Mrs. Hargreaves that the old man's store had been +entered by burglars on the night previous, and a large amount of money, +together with the most valuable goods, had been carried away. + +It is not difficult to imagine the consternation which seized upon the +little party after Uncle Nathan's departure. Teddy was so overwhelmed +that it was literally impossible for him to say a word, and Sam shook +like one in an ague fit at the thought that he might be carried off to +jail before it was possible for him to astonish the people by his skill +as an oarsman. + +"You must not think of leaving here until we know what your uncle +proposes to do," Mrs. Hargreaves said, as she returned to the +dining-room after talking with the neighbor. "Of course I know that +neither of you two boys had anything to do with the robbery; but you +must not run away." + +"I've got to leave, no matter what the old fool says," Sam replied. "I +don't know how the folks would get along if I didn't show up, an' it +won't do to disappoint them." + +"Are you going?" Teddy asked, and Sam replied in a voice which trembled +despite all his efforts to make it sound firm: + +"Of course I am. You don't allow I'm such an idiot as to stay till he +can have me arrested, an' if you're sensible, both of us will go." + +"I must stay here, an' lose all my chances of making money," Teddy said, +gloomily. + +"All right, then I'm off, an' after I once get on the fair grounds I'll +bet that old duffer won't get hold of me." + +Sam did not propose to lose any time. He had no baggage, and in a very +few moments after so deciding he was walking up the road over which the +stage would pass, while Teddy, with a heavier heart than he had ever +known before, waited for his uncle to send the officers of the law to +carry him to prison. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +_THE FAIR._ + + +It seemed to Teddy as if everything pleasant in life had departed from +him as he waited for the return of Uncle Nathan accompanied by the +officers of the law, and neither he nor his mother had any idea that the +visit would be long delayed. + +The widow had every proof, even if her heart had not told the truth, +that her son was innocent of the charge which the angry old man made. +She knew both he and Sam remained in the house during the entire day +previous to the robbery, and it would have been almost impossible for +them to have left during the night without her knowledge; but at the +same time it was only reasonable she should be distressed in mind as to +the final outcome of the matter. + +One, two, three hours passed, and yet no arrest had been made. + +Teddy no longer hoped to play the part of fakir at the fair; but yet he +fancied it might be possible to sell his stock, which had already been +forwarded by the stage, to some more fortunate fellow, and in order to +do this it was necessary he should be on the grounds at the earliest +possible hour; but the charge made by his uncle held him a voluntary +prisoner. + +At eight o'clock a neighbor, whose love of gossip was greater than her +desire for housework, came to the garden gate to say that she had just +heard the justice of the peace refuse to issue a warrant for either of +the boys, and she added to this information her belief that it, the +burglary, was a judgment upon Uncle Nathan for presuming to talk +business on the Sabbath. + +When this busybody had departed, Mrs. Hargreaves said, as she re-entered +the house: + +"There is no longer any reason, Teddy, why you shouldn't carry out your +plans. Every one in this village knows where to find you in case a +warrant is granted, which doesn't now seem possible, and it is better to +go ahead as you proposed, knowing that your mother is certain you are +innocent of any wrongdoing." + +Teddy's one desire had been to be on the fair grounds, and when this +advice was given from "a fellow's best friend," he started at once, +saying as he left the house: + +"I'll come back if there's nothing to do; but there's no reason to worry +if you don't see me until Saturday, for I shall stay jest as long as +things run smooth." + +Ten minutes later, while he was trudging along the dusty road with no +other idea than that he would be forced to walk the entire distance, a +friend in a wagon overtook him, proposed that he ride, and before the +fair grounds were reached he had heard all the particulars of the +robbery. + +It appeared that the burglars must have effected an entrance to Uncle +Nathan's store after midnight Saturday, and when the proprietor arrived +on the following morning there was absolutely no clue to the thieves. + +"They must have had a wagon to take away all the old man says he has +lost," Teddy's informant added, as the story was concluded, "and because +of that the justice refused to issue a warrant for the man who slept at +the hotel last night. Of course the idea that you knew anything about it +was all in that old fool's eye." + +"Then nobody has been arrested?" Teddy exclaimed, in surprise. + +"Of course not, an' more than one in town hopes he'll never see hide nor +hair of his goods or money; but between you an' me I don't believe he's +lost half as much as he tries to make out." + +To this last assertion Teddy gave but little heed; the all absorbing +thought in his mind was as to whether he would actually be arrested for +the crime, and this was sufficient to prevent any speculations as to +the amount of loss, or his former dreams of the future. + +Arriving at the fair grounds, he found everything in a state of +confusion. Goods were arriving and being put in place; men were +quarreling for this or that vantage ground, and carpenters were busy in +every direction. + +As a matter of course, he knew that all this would be changed on the +following day when the visitors began to arrive; but, nevertheless, it +gave him a homesick feeling which he could not suppress, and, for a +time, prevented him from attending to his own interests. + +"Hello! What are you sittin' there for?" a voice cried, after he had +remained inactive near the entrance nearly an hour, debating in his own +mind whether or not it would be worth the while to unpack the goods +which he knew were awaiting his call somewhere on the grounds. + +Looking up quickly he saw Sam, self-possessed and jaunty as at the first +moment he met him in Waterville, but wearing an air of considerably more +importance. + +"Have you gone to work yet?" he asked, listlessly. + +"Of course not; there's nothin' for me to do till the folks begin to +come in to see how well I can row a boat. What did the old duffer do?" + +"Do you mean Uncle Nathan?" + +"Of course." + +"He hasn't had anybody arrested yet; but there's no knowin' how soon +he'll begin." + +"He'd better not try it on me," Sam said, with an assumption of +boldness. "I've found a feller here that's goin' to show off rifles, an' +I can borrow as many as I want if he does any funny business." + +"Would you shoot anybody?" + +"You jest stay till an old lunatic comes along sayin' I've helped to rob +him when your mother knows where I was, an' see what I'll do," Sam +replied, in a really bloodthirsty tone as he turned to walk away, and +then, as if reconsidering the matter, he stopped long enough to say, +"Wait here a minute, an' I'll show you a feller what knows a thing or +two." + +Inasmuch as Teddy had no idea of moving from the position he had taken +up near the gate it was not irksome to do as the exhibitor of boats +requested, and without troubling his head as to who this very important +person might be, he remained at the precise spot until Sam returned with +a boy who appeared to be a year or two older than himself. + +"This is Dan Summers, an' he's here to help show off a dandy rifle made +in Chicopee Falls down in Massachusetts, or some such place. He'll help +us out of the scrape if anybody can." + +Dan looked as if this introduction was disagreeable to him rather than +otherwise, and after nodding to Teddy, he said, in an explanatory tone: + +"I'm here to help the man what exhibits goods from the Stevens Arms +Company, that's all; but I don't see how I could be of any help if you +fellers have got in a fuss." + +"Neither do I," Teddy replied, and then to show that no one could aid +him, he told the whole story, including all that Uncle Nathan had said. + +"I wouldn't let that worry me," Dan said, philosophically, when the tale +was ended. "If you want to make any money out of this fair it is time +you was lookin' out for a stand, an' I know of the best place on the +grounds. Come with me now, an' you can get it before the crowd of fakirs +have a chance to take it up." + +Teddy, rather liking the appearance of this boy, resolved to follow his +advice, and signified the same by slipping down from the stack of +exhibits, as he said: + +"Show it to me an' I'll get right to work, for there's forty-five +dollars I've got to pay back, no matter what Uncle Nathan makes up his +mind to do." + +"That's the way to talk," Sam cried, approvingly, and forthwith he +proceeded to take charge of his two acquaintances, resolved that lack of +energy should not prevent him from sharing in their triumphs, if indeed, +they had any. + +Dan professed to have had considerable experience with fairs, and the +manner in which he proceeded to work showed that there had been no +boasting on his part. He selected a spot where nearly all of the +visitors would be forced to pass in order to see the cattle or the +racing, and set about putting up a stand for Teddy in the most approved +manner. + +He ordered Sam here and there to such places as he had seen an +accumulation of lumber, and so well did he work, after borrowing an ax +and a hatchet from a "candy butcher," that it was not yet noon when +Teddy had an inclosure sufficiently large for his purpose; the cloth was +in place and the holes cut for the canes, so that it would be but the +work of a few moments to make everything ready when business should +begin. + +"You can't do the whole thing yourself if there is anything like the +crowd that ought to come," Dan said, "and I advise you to hire a clerk." + +"Where'll I find one?" Teddy asked, helplessly. + +"Take some of the fellers from your own village; but be sure they're +honest, for after business begins there won't be any chance to watch +'em." + +Teddy thought he could find the proper party before the following day, +and then came the question of where they were to sleep. + +"I've got that all fixed," Sam said, confidently. + +"The man what runs the museum in that big tent is a friend of mine, an' +he won't say a word if we stay under the canvas to-night." + +"How long have you known him?" Teddy asked, warned by previous +experience that Sam's statements were not always to be depended upon. + +"I never saw him till this morning; but that don't make no difference so +long as he's willin' for us to stay there." + +"We'll go over an' look around," Dan said, leading the way, and to the +surprise of at least one of the party it was found that Master Sam's +statement was absolutely correct. + +The proprietor of the museum was more than willing to allow the boys to +sleep under his canvas, for the very good reason that they would act as +sentinels in lieu of those he had neglected to hire, and all three went +away in search of a place where they could obtain meals during the +expected five days of excitement and money-making. + +This was even a more simple matter than the first. At a boarding-house +nearly opposite the main entrance to the grounds they could be +accommodated at a reasonable rate, and the preliminaries had been +settled. It only remained now to welcome the visitors, and get from them +as much money as possible. + +Teddy almost forgot the terrible fact that his Uncle Nathan might yet +have him arrested, and Sam acted as if such a thing had never been +possible. + +It is true all three of the boys discussed the possibility of finding +the money which had been stolen from Teddy; but neither thought of +connecting the two crimes as the work of one person. + +During the afternoon Teddy looked around in the hope of seeing the man, +unjustly accused of the theft, who had promised to aid him; but as yet +he had not put in an appearance, and it seemed as if all the choice +places would be taken before he arrived. + +It was anything rather than sport to wander around the almost deserted +grounds, and at an early hour, after partaking of a remarkably poor +supper, the three boys sought the seclusion granted by the mildewed +canvas of the alleged museum of the "world's wonders." + +A goat, a wax baby, two or three snakes, an alligator, and a +contortionist, who was none other than the proprietor of this +magnificent array of "marvels," made up the entire list of curiosities; +but the tent would shelter the young fakirs from the wind and dew, and +it was possible they might sleep as soundly as at home. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +_A CLUE._ + + +Sam and Dan, who had worked at many fairs and been forced to sleep in +far less desirable places, thought it was a rare piece of good fortune +to get such comfortable quarters free; but the prospect of lying on the +ground all night was far from pleasing to Teddy. + +He looked around for some spot softer than another; but there was no +choice, and he said to himself: + +"There's one satisfaction about it, I'm better off on the ground than I +would have been if Uncle Nathan had succeeded in having me arrested and +put in jail." + +This thought caused the interior of the tent to seem less disagreeable, +and he almost persuaded himself that it would be sport to stay all night +in a museum with a real contortionist as host. + +Dan had thrown himself at full length on the ground where he could watch +the proprietor of this "enormous exhibition" cook his supper on an +oil-stove, and Sam, anxious about other people's affairs as usual, +devoted his entire time to asking questions regarding the business. + +"How do you count on gettin' along when the crowds get here? You can't +sell tickets an' act too." + +"I've got a barker an' a clown coming to-morrow; it was no use to pay +'em wages for layin' around when there was nothing to be done but put up +the tent." + +"What's a 'barker?'" Sam asked, in surprise. + +"Why, the man who stands outside an' does the talking, of course." + +Then, his supper having been cooked and eaten, the host amused himself +and his guests by telling of his experience in the show business; +relating stories and talking of the different fakirs he had met. + +"When I started out," he said, "I made up my mind that a fortune could +be made in one season. I bought a fine tent; had lots of performers, +about twenty animals, and a dozen cases of stuffed birds and other +curiosities. We struck hard luck from the sendoff, an' first the woman +with an iron jaw gave me the shake because she got tired of waiting for +the salary that never came. Two of the bears grew so disgusted with the +bad business that they died, and one after another of the people +skipped, till I was pretty nigh alone. A sheriff in Harmer seized the +cases, another levied on my live stock, and it has only taken two +seasons to bring the show down to where you see it." + +This was not pleasing information for Teddy, who was obliged to make +such a large amount of money in order to free himself from debt, and he +asked: + +"Isn't it possible to make money at every fair? I thought the fakirs got +rich in a little while." + +"So did I before I went into the business. A fellow may make a big stake +this week and lose it all at the next stand. If you strike bad weather, +or a crowd that hasn't got any money, it's up-hill work to pull in the +entrance fee. Now, I have to pay a hundred dollars for this privilege, +because I've got a big tent, and it wouldn't be any more if I had a show +to compare with it in size. It'll take a good many ten-cent pieces to +make that up." + +This plain statement of facts caused Teddy to figure how many nickels he +must receive before the capital invested and stolen would be returned, +and the result was far from gratifying. + +"The eighteen dollars which must be given to Uncle Nathan, the thirty I +owe in Waterville, and ten I paid for the privilege of running the +boards makes eleven hundred and sixty five-cent pieces. I'll never see +so many customers as that, and Aunt Sarah was right when she called me a +fool for thinking of going into the business," he said to himself, as +his companions began to make their preparations for the night. + +It is useless to "cry over spilled milk," however, and this he realized +in time to prevent himself from being plunged into the lowest depths of +despondency. It was barely possible business would be exceptionally +good, he argued mentally, and if hard work could accomplish the desired +result he must be successful. + +Dan was already lying down with his head toward the side of the tent and +his feet near the oil-stove, which had been left burning because of the +dampness, and Teddy crawled over by the side of him. Sam had decided to +sleep by the side of his host, probably with the idea that he might +appear to be on terms of greater intimacy, and all hands gave themselves +up to slumber. + +The excitement of the morning and subsequent labor had so tried Teddy +that, despite the hardness of his bed, he fell asleep in a very few +moments, and it was not yet nine o'clock when all the inmates of the +tent, save the goat, and possibly the alligator and snakes, were wrapped +in blissful unconsciousness. + +Half an hour later a terrific yell from Sam caused the remainder of the +party to spring to their feet in alarm. + +"What's the matter?" Dan cried. + +"Somebody has got into the tent and been poundin' me with a club! I'm +pretty near killed." + +The faint glow cast by the oil-stove was not sufficient to illumine any +portion of the tent, and the host made all haste to light a lantern, +after which Dan proceeded to search for the supposed intruder; but +before he had taken a dozen steps the proprietor of the museum burst +into a hearty laugh. + +"Funny, ain't it?" Sam cried, angrily. "I s'pose you'd laugh if I'd been +killed in your old tent!" + +This savage remark appeared to excite the man's mirth rather than check +it, and while he was thus enjoying himself Teddy and Dan stood gazing at +him in surprise. + +It was several minutes before the man could speak, and then he said, as +he pointed to the goat who stood a short distance away calmly munching +some potato parings: + +"That's the fellow who has been beating your friend with a club. I +always let him loose at night, and he has walked over our dying boy." + +Sam insisted that he had been beaten with a club; but on examining his +clothing two spots of fresh earth were found, showing where the animal +had stepped. A hoof-print on the sleeve and another directly on the +breast of his coat comprised the full amount of damage done. + +The boy who had believed himself so dangerously wounded now grew angry, +and, leaping to his feet, declared he would not remain in the tent +another minute unless the goat was tied. + +"There's nothing to prevent your bunking somewhere else," the owner of +the animal replied, quite sharply. + +"Billy always has had the liberty of the tent at night, and I reckon he +won't lose it now." + +Sam started toward the entrance; but before reaching it he realized that +he would be punishing no one but himself, and slowly turned back, saying +as he approached the stove: + +"It's too late to hunt for lodgings now, an' I s'pose I'll have to make +the best of it." + +"I guess you will," the host replied, quietly, and the angry Sam lay +down on the seat of the baggage wagon, to insure himself against another +visit from "Billy." + +This incident had driven the desire for sleep from the eyelids of Teddy +and Dan, and they remained awake some time after the loud breathing of +their companions told that the visit from the goat had been temporarily +effaced from their minds. + +Now Teddy discovered what a hard, uncomfortable bed the bare earth was, +and after tossing about for half an hour, he whispered to Dan: + +"Do you suppose it would be any better in the wagon?" + +"No; you'll get used to it in a little while, and the ground is softer +than a board." + +Teddy was about to reply when the sound of voices from the outside +attracted his attention, and then came the crackle as of a match being +lighted. + +Two or more men had halted near the canvas within a few feet of where +the boys were lying, evidently that they might be sheltered from the +wind while getting their pipes or cigars in working order. + +A moment later both the listeners heard one of the newcomers say: + +"I don't think it will be safe for you to show up very much while we +stay here." + +"Why not? If them boys recognize me it will be an easy matter to +frighten 'em into holdin' their tongues, and there's goin' to be good +pickin's this week." + +"But what's the use of runnin' any risk? We've made a fairly good haul +already, an' it's better to get safe off with that than stick our noses +where it'll be hard work to pull them back." + +Teddy was in the highest possible excitement. In the tone of the second +speaker's voice he recognized the man who had stolen his money, and he +punched Dan with his elbow to assure himself that the latter was +listening. + +"Keep quiet," Dan whispered, and then the conversation on the outside +was continued. + +"I'll take good care to keep shady, an' you see what can be done +to-morrow." + +[Illustration: The boys crept through the flap of the tent and followed +the two men.] + +"Will you promise not to leave the house till after dark?" + +"I thought you had more nerve; but so long as you haven't I reckon I'll +promise, for this is bound to be a fat thing, and I don't want to lose +the whole of it. + +"When these country jays begin to send their stuff home I'll have ours +shipped, an' there's little danger it'll be overhauled, more especially +since the old man couldn't get a warrant for the only one he suspects. +It's a safe bet that Hazelton has a pretty good idea who did the job, +an' if they make trouble for him he'll most likely tell what he thinks." + +"There's no call to be afraid of him after he has worked a couple of +days, for those he ropes in would do all they could to have him +arrested." + +The last portion of this remark was almost indistinguishable, owing to +the fact that the men were walking away, and when the sound of their +footsteps could no longer be heard Teddy said: + +"Those are the men who robbed Uncle Nathan's store, an' I'm certain one +of them got my money." + +"Would you know their voices if you heard them again?" + +"Sure; but why don't we find out where they are going? It wouldn't be a +hard job." + +"Are you willin' to sneak after them?" + +"Of course I am. Come on!" + +The boys arose softly and crept through the flap of the tent without +awakening the sleepers. + +The night was dark and cloudy, and it was impossible to see any very +great distance in either direction; but Dan had taken especial heed to +the course taken by the men, and he started off without hesitation. + +"We ought to have a club or something to protect ourselves in case they +should see us," Teddy whispered. + +"We won't get near enough to let them do much mischief. Do you see two +sparks over there? They are the lighted ends of cigars, an' our men are +behind them." + +Dan quickened his pace; but he had failed to calculate the distance +correctly, and was much nearer the game than he had suspected. + +"Be careful they don't see us," he said, in a low tone, and in another +instant the boys were directly in front of the men. + +Teddy started back in alarm; but he was too late. In an instant the +sparks flashed before his eyes, and he fell to the ground unconscious +just as Dan succeeded in warding off the blow of a fist which was aimed +at him. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +_THE CLERK._ + + +When Teddy recovered from the vicious blow which had rendered him +unconscious he saw Dan lying on the ground beside him, but no one else +was near. + +It was as if they had been fighting with phantoms of the brain, save for +the fact that both bore the most indisputable signs of having been +assaulted by beings of true flesh and blood. + +One of Dan's eyes was closed as if by a violent blow, and Teddy bled +freely from the ear, the crimson fluid telling eloquently of the exact +location of that superior force which had caused so many stars to dance +before his mental vision. + +"We got through with that part of it mighty quick," Dan said, ruefully, +as he rose to his feet. "There wasn't anything slow about the way they +struck out after we made fools of ourselves by running into them, eh?" + +"I don't understand how it all happened. It wasn't more than three +seconds from the time I first saw them before there was a regular set +of fireworks dancing in front of my eyes." + +"It so happens that they saw us first," Dan replied, as he rubbed his +head. "Those men were the thieves, and what I said showed them that we +were on the scent." + +"Where are they now?" + +"You'll have to ask that question of someone else," Dan said, with a +grimace of pain. "The last thing I know was when the tall fellow landed +one square on my nose, and before I recovered both were out of sight. We +have done harm rather than good, for now they know we overheard the +conversation, an' we'll be mighty lucky if this is all we get before the +fair comes to an end." + +"Suppose we tell the police now?" + +"What can you say to them? We heard those men talking about something +which may have had nothing to do with the robbery, and want to have them +arrested. On what grounds will we ask for a warrant? Besides, if Nathan +Hargreaves was my uncle, I would let him fight his own battles." + +"But I owe him eighteen dollars." + +"What of that? He wouldn't take a penny off if you got your head broke +while trying to find his money, and after all that has happened I think +we have good reason to let him severely alone." + +"I'm willing to go back to the tent," Teddy said, as he began to feel +faint, and Dan aided him during the short walk, both staggering as they +came through the flap, meeting their host near the entrance, who asked, +sharply: + +"What has been going on? I counted on helping a party of boys, rather +than giving my tent up to a lot of roughs, as you appear to be." + +In the fewest possible words Dan explained what had happened, and in +addition told all the story of Teddy's losing his money, together with +the accusation made by Uncle Nathan. + +"I'm sorry I said a word," and the proprietor of the museum did really +appear to be grieved. "It makes no difference whether you got a whipping +or not, the guilty parties are here, and you can count on my help in +turning them up." + +"That's what I'm afraid we sha'n't be able to do," Teddy replied; "we +tried our best to-night, and got the worst of it." + +"There is plenty of time between now and Saturday. I'll do all any man +can, an' it'll be strange if we don't get some proof before the fair +closes." + +"How did you know we were out?" Dan asked. + +"I saw you go, and there was no reason why I should kick; but I began to +be afraid you were up to something crooked. Now I know the whole story, +I'll do my best to help you out of the scrape. Go to sleep, and we'll +talk the whole matter over in the morning." + +This was good advice, but not easily followed. Both the boys began to +feel the effects of the blows received from the thieves, and the pain +resulting therefrom was not conducive to repose. + +They did manage to close their eyes in slumber now and then, however, +and when the day broke Mr. Sweet, the proprietor of the museum, was +standing ready to minister to their necessities. + +"You haven't got exactly the right kind of faces to bring very big +business," he said, cheerily; "but I reckon we can make a change in the +general appearance. Use this plentifully as a bath, and before business +opens you'll be respectable members of society." + +It was certainly necessary for them to do something toward improving +their appearance. Teddy's ear was swollen to nearly twice its natural +size, and Dan had an eye which was rapidly blackening. + +Thanks to the application provided by the owner of the museum, these +evidences of a fight were rapidly reduced, and when Sam awoke they +looked little the worse for wear, although he readily discovered that +something serious had happened while he was wrapped in slumber. + +"What has been goin' on?" he asked, suspiciously. + +"Nothing much," Dan replied, with a forced laugh. "The goat walked over +us, and we're kinder used up, that's all. Are you ready to go to +breakfast?" + +It was evident that Sam did not believe this explanation, but since he +said nothing more about it, the two actors in the previous night's +adventures held their peace; therefore it would not be in his power to +betray any secrets. + +Breakfast was eaten at an early hour, and the young fakirs returned to +the grounds in time for Teddy to meet the first visitors. + +Under Dan's instructions he continued to cry out: + +"Here's where you can get a cane or a knife for nothing! Three rings for +five cents, and every time you throw it over the mark you get what you +ring! Three for five, and every cane or knife you ring is yours!" + +It was yet too early for the exhibits to be opened, therefore Teddy had +the assistance of his friends in reclaiming the rings thrown, and after +nearly four dollars had been taken in with a loss only of a ten cent +cane, the amateur fakir began to understand that it would be necessary +for him to have a clerk. + +"You're bound to do a good business this week," Dan said, at about eight +o'clock. "Sam and I must go now to attend to our own work, an' if you +see some fellow who can be trusted, I advise you to hire him, or +there'll be considerable trade lost, for when these people want to spend +their money they won't wait for you to hunt up assistants." + +"Yes, I reckon there's more'n a thousand who are jest aching to see how +I can row in one of them dandy boats," Master Sam added; "but if you get +into any kind of a scrape, an' don't know how to get out, come to me. +I'll see you through, no matter how good business is." + +These two friends and advisers had hardly left him when a particular +chum from the Run came up, and knowing he could be trusted, Teddy +immediately made a trade for his services. + +Tim Jones accepted the offer of ten cents on each dollar which might be +taken in, and straightway engaged himself as Teddy's clerk, promising +faithfully to account for every penny he should receive. + +"I know you are honest," the proprietor of the board said to his friend, +"and I want you to help me on the square, so I'm willing to give a fair +price, for I may have to be away a good deal of the time." + +"You mean that Nathan Hargreaves is goin' to have you arrested?" + +"Why do you say that?" + +"Because he's tellin' around town at the Run that you know who robbed +his store, an' says he'll have a warrant out, if he has to go to +Waterville for it." + +"That is where he's making a great big mistake, Tim; but if he should do +anything of the kind I expect you to do your best here," and Teddy spoke +very solemnly, for he really believed his uncle would succeed in having +him arrested. "I don't know positively who broke into his store; but Dan +an' I heard enough last night to make us believe we can find the thieves +if we have time to work it out." + +"I'd let him hustle to get the stuff, if it was my pudding," Tim replied +with emphasis, and then as a party of young fellows bent on spending +money approached the board he began to cry, as lustily as might have +been expected from any old fakir: + +"Here's where you get 'em, three rings for a nickel, and every cane or +knife you ring is yours; all for the small sum of five cents!" + +Convinced that he had a capable clerk, who was willing to work hard in +order to earn an additional percentage, Teddy contented himself with +making change for the rush of customers, which continued unabated until +nearly ten o'clock and then came a lull, when he was able to watch the +other fakirs around him. + +Up to this point business had continued in the most promising manner, +and if it held out as well there would be no difficulty in his paying +all the money he owed, even although there might be no very large +profit. + +"I only want to get out square," he said to himself, while nursing his +injured ear; but this experience led him to believe it was possible to +do very much toward helping his mother, and already had he begun to +dream of large returns, despite the fifteen dollars out of which he had +been swindled. + +It was just when his customers had gone to other parts of the ground, +and after Teddy had figured up the amount of money taken in, showing +that there was nearly eight dollars in the treasury with an offset only +of one twenty-cent knife and two ten-cent canes lost, that the young +fakir saw Hazelton standing some distance away beckoning to him. + +"Look out sharp for things, Tim," he cried, as he vaulted over the +railing and ran to the side of the man whom he believed to be a friend. + +"Did anything happen last night?" the latter asked. + +Teddy told him the whole story, keeping back not one incident. + +"I heard quite so much in the hotel where I board. It is Long Jim and +his partner who have done the job of which both you and I are accused. +As for your uncle, he isn't worth a minute's thought; but I'm going to +get to work, an' what he says may go against me, so you and I must turn +those fellows up if we can." + +"Ain't your business honest?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"Well, when we come right down to dots, I don't suppose it is. Watch me +when I leave here, and you'll have a chance to judge for yourself. I +may want to leave my satchel with you for a while, and I reckon you're +willing to take care of it?" + +"Of course I am. I'll do anything you ask." + +"Better wait and see the game first, but don't forget that we've got to +turn up the two men who whipped you and your friend last night, or stand +the chance of being hauled up for the robbery ourselves." + +"Did you say anything to Uncle Nathan to make him think you would break +into his store?" + +"No; I only played him for a jay, as you shall see me do with two or +three hundred of these smart fellows here, and he jumped down on me +because there was no one else on whom to fasten the crime. I've got to +go, now. Don't forget to hurry back to your cane-board when you see I'm +getting through with my first stand, for I want to leave my stuff with +somebody whom I can trust." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +_THE JEWELRY FAKIR._ + + +Teddy's curiosity regarding the kind of business which Hazelton proposed +to do was so great that, for the time being, he forgot his own venture +in watching this supposed friend. + +The jewelry fakir disappeared amid the crowd for a few moments, +reappearing in a carriage drawn by a fancifully decorated horse, and the +gaudy trappings caused the sightseers to stop, believing something +interesting or curious was to be seen. + +Hazelton introduced himself as an agent for a large manufacturing +company, and proposed to dispose of "samples" of their goods in a manner +which would be satisfactory to all. He began by throwing away great +numbers of cheap rings made to imitate gold, and as the boys scrambled +for them he complained that the older members of the throng--those +people whom he particularly wished should test the merits of his +wares--were getting nothing. + +"I can change that," he said, after hesitating a moment, as if to devise +some plan. Then holding up half a dozen pairs of cuff-buttons, he +continued: "I am allowed to give away only six of these. What gentleman +will advance twenty-five cents for one of these sets, knowing the money +will be returned to him? By that means I shall place the goods where +they will do the most good." + +In a short time the necessary number of purchasers was found, each +having paid a quarter of a dollar, and then, with great ostentation, the +fakir returned to every one the money he had given. + +A similar performance was gone through with in the case of ten seal +rings, and by that time the crowd were in a state of high excitement, +for they were getting supposedly valuable goods by simply loaning this +agent their money for a short time. + +The fakir then held up a lot of watch-chains, asking who would give him +a dollar for one, but in this instance he made no mention of returning +the money. + +Believing these also were to be given away, every man scrambled to pass +up his dollar before the supply should be exhausted, and fully two +hundred dollars was taken in by the generous "agent." Then, as the +demand ceased, Hazelton produced from his valise what appeared to be a +heavy gold watch. + +Wrapping it in paper, and attaching it to a chain, he cried: + +"Who wants to take another, and receive as a present what I have +fastened to the end of it; but on the condition that this paper shall +not be removed until I give permission?" + +A young fellow standing near Teddy made all possible haste to pass the +fakir a dollar and receive the prize. + +Then the remainder of the crowd clamored for more to be put up in the +same manner, and Hazelton disposed of at least a hundred before the +clamorous throng could be appeased. + +While this was being done Teddy saw the young fellow slyly remove the +paper and examine his goods. A look of anger and disappointment +overspread his face as a cheap, empty locket, fashioned on the outside +something like the case of a watch, was revealed to view. Twenty cents +would have been an extravagantly high price for what he had paid a +dollar; but it was possible the agent would return the money as he had +done in the previous cases, and the victimized fellow held his peace. + +Hazelton was now ready to take a hurried departure. No more dollars were +passed up, and quickly seizing the reins, he said: + +"I have not represented these goods to be gold; but they are a fine +imitation, and Mr. Nathan Hargreaves, of Peach Bottom Run, will probably +act as my agent for the sale of them. You can get what may be wanted +from him if you need any more." + +The last words were hardly spoken before he drove quickly through the +throng, leaving his dupes in a daze, from which they did not recover +until he was lost to view. + +Now Teddy understood what the "Give-Away" game was, and he also knew +that it was far from being honest, although Hazelton had really made no +promises which he did not fulfill. + +Some of the victims were angry, and vowed to flog "that feller within an +inch of his life" before sunset; others bore their loss philosophically, +and turned away with the remark that the fakir was "a cute one," while +the majority hastened off lest they should be suspected of being +victims. + +Teddy returned to his cane-board feeling sad because he had been so +mistaken in this particular man, and had hardly reached there when +Hazelton, on foot, came from the side of the fair grounds opposite where +he had disappeared, saying hurriedly, as he handed the boy a black +satchel somewhat resembling a sample case: + +"Look out for this! All my money is in it." + +Without waiting for an answer the man was gone, and the young fakir was +in no slight distress at being the custodian of so much wealth. + +After considerable discussion with Tim he decided to leave it behind the +cane-board where it would be screened from view, and then a crowd of +customers suddenly appearing, he was so busy during the next half hour +that he hardly had time to think of that which had been intrusted to his +keeping. + +Not until trade grew dull once more did Hazelton appear, looking +decidedly well pleased with himself, and, standing where the passers-by +could not hear, he asked: + +"Well, what do you think of the give-away game now?" + +"It looks to me like a swindle," Teddy replied, bluntly. "The things you +sold were not worth half what you got for them." + +"Six cents apiece for the chains, and five for the lockets is what I pay +by the quantity," the fakir said, with a laugh. + +"But you made the people think they were getting real watches." + +"I was mighty careful to say nothing of the kind. They thought they saw +a watch, and I told them I would make each purchaser a present of what +was on the chain. Their idea was to get the best of me, and in that I +didn't lose very much. It's a case of setting a thief to catch a thief, +and the smartest man comes out ahead." + +"But why did you leave all the money with me?" + +"Because it sometimes happens that my customers make a kick, and try to +get back their stuff by force, so I don't carry much cash in my pockets +while I am on the fair grounds." + +"Of course you are all through now. You can't expect to do the same +thing over again." + +"That's exactly what I shall do in about an hour, only in a different +portion of the inclosure, and you'll see that I can catch just as many +suckers as before." + +Then, in order to be rid of the satchel, for it seemed as if he was +really concerned in the swindle so long as it remained in his keeping, +Teddy said he wanted to see what Dan and Sam were doing. + +"Go ahead; I'll stay near by where I can keep an eye on the stuff, so +you needn't let that worry you." + +As a matter of fact, the boy was not eager to leave his place of +business; but having said so, it was necessary to go, or let Hazelton +understand exactly why the remark had been made. + +Cautioning Tim to "keep his eyes open for trade," he walked across the +grounds to the building where Dan was employed, and found that young +gentleman displaying the good qualities of a peculiar-looking weapon. + +"This is the Model Pocket Rifle," Dan was saying to a party of +gentlemen. "The shoulder-rest is detachable, and you can buy an +effective weapon for a trifle over fifteen dollars, as---- Hello, Teddy, +how's business?" he added, suddenly, on observing his friend, and the +two had an opportunity for conversation, while the curious ones were +examining the rifle. + +Teddy gave a brief account of what had already been done, and then +asked: + +"Can't you get off a few minutes and go with me to see what Sam is +doing?" + +It was not difficult for Dan to get a short leave of absence, and the +two went directly to the creek where their acquaintance, who proposed to +make himself the central figure of the fair, was rowing around in a +jaunty looking craft. + +Sam wore a sailor's shirt, turned away at the throat, and tied with a +black silk handkerchief, while on the breast of the garment was worked +the name "Davis Boat and Oar Co., Detroit, Mich." The same legend being +printed in gold on the band of his straw hat. + +Sam had evidently been expecting his friends, for he espied them before +they reached the shore, and, rowing to the bank, insisted they should +take a sail. + +"Come on, it's all right," he said. "It don't make any difference +whether I carry passengers or not so long as the boat is kept goin', an' +I want to show you somethin' fine in the way of rowin'." + +Neither of the boys cared very much about accepting the invitation; but +he was so persistent that they finally stepped on board as the easiest +manner of settling the matter. + +"I tell you what it is, fellers," he said, as he pulled out into the +stream, "I'm jest makin' things hum around here. These folks have never +seen any kind of style put into rowin', an' I'm knockin' their eyes +out." + +"Don't give it to them too strong, or they may want to keep you here as +an ornament after the fair closes, and then the rest of the world would +suffer," Dan said, with a laugh, and Sam replied: + +"You fellers can make fun; but what I say is straight," and then he made +preparations for giving an exhibition. "Watch me now, an' you'll learn a +thing or two about boats." + +During the next ten minutes he pulled as if in a race, first up and then +down the stream, until sheer lack of breath forced him to stop. + +"I hope you haven't set the keel on fire," Dan said, solicitously. +"There's no question but that you made good time, though I'm inclined to +think the build of the boat had considerable to do with the speed. This +one looks as if she would row herself." + +"That's all you know about it. If I hadn't been a first-class hand +at----" + +"See there!" Teddy cried, excitedly, as he pointed toward the shore. +"That's the man who got my fifteen dollars. Pull in, Sam, an' pull for +all you are worth!" + +The oarsman delayed only long enough to gaze in the direction indicated, +where he saw the old fakir whom they had met with such great loss at +Waterville, and then he bent himself to the task. + +"Do you believe it will be safe to tackle him after last night?" Dan +asked. + +"I'm going to, and if he don't get away from me I'll ask some of the +crowd to help me have him arrested," Teddy replied, grimly. + +The little craft was a considerable distance from the shore. Sam was so +excited that he only thought of landing in the shortest possible space +of time, and instead of keeping a lookout for other boats, rowed +vigorously, as if he were the only oarsman on the stream. + +Teddy and Dan sat motionless, with their eyes fixed on the man, and thus +it happened that no one on board saw a double ender, in which were three +ladies and two gentlemen, come around a bend in the creek directly in +Sam's course. + +There was a shout from the bank, three shrill screams of terror, and +then a crash as the two craft came together with terrific force. + +The occupants of both boats were thrown into the water as the frail +timbers were splintered, and the spectators on the bank acted as if +panic-stricken. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +_A BRAVE RESCUE._ + + +Sam was a fairly good swimmer, and as soon as he found himself in the +water he struck out for the shore, paying no attention to any one else +until he had assured his own safety. + +One of the gentlemen in the other craft did the same selfish thing, +while the other, unable to help even himself, was trying to keep his +head above water by resting his chin on an oar and piece of planking. + +The women were in imminent danger of being drowned, for there was no +other boat near at hand which could be sent to the rescue, and the +throng of spectators was in that unreasoning state of fear and +excitement which prevents people from being of any service at such a +time. + +When Teddy and Dan came to the surface after having been thrown from +their seats, they were within a few feet of each other, and the latter +asked: + +"Can you swim?" + +"Yes; don't pay any attention to me, but do what you can toward saving +those women." + +"Will you help me?" + +"Of course; but I can't take care of more than one." + +Both boats had disappeared, and nothing save a few fragments showed +where they had gone down. + +Teddy thought only of aiding the struggling women, for there was no +question that the man with the oar could take care of himself, at least +until those on the bank should be sufficiently composed to do something +effective, and he swam to the nearest struggling being, clasping her +firmly under one arm as he said: + +"Don't make a row; but keep perfectly quiet, an' I'll take you ashore." + +Half-unconscious as she was, the woman attempted to grasp him by the +neck, and for several seconds he had all he could do to prevent her from +choking him to death; but after two or three kicks judiciously +administered, he succeeded in making her understand that her life as +well as his own depended upon her remaining passive, and from that +moment all went well. + +The employees of the company which had the boats on exhibition flung +into the water several life-saving arrangements of cork and canvas, and +by dint of much persuading he induced her to trust to one of these while +he went to the assistance of Dan, who had been carried beneath the +surface more than once by the struggles of the woman whom he was trying +to save. + +By this time a boat was brought up from around the point, and as these +two helpless ones were taken on board both the boys swam to the rescue +of the last of the party who had sunk beneath the surface for the third +time. + +Teddy, now nearly exhausted by his efforts, was the first to grasp her; +but if it had not been for Dan the struggle would have been useless, +since his strength was so far spent that he could not have brought her +above the water unaided. + +By their united efforts, however, she was taken on board the boat in a +state of unconsciousness, and they made their way to the shore cheered +by the shouts of the assembled multitude. + +Weak, almost exhausted beyond the power to stand upright, they landed a +few seconds in advance of the craft, and the reception received was +enough to have nerved stronger men to a semblance of strength. + +It was not until they were in the private apartments allotted to the +Davis Company that either fully understood how weak he was, and then +willing hands aided them to recuperate. + +Hot flannels, warm drinks, and dry clothes were contributed by the +different exhibitors, until, as Teddy said, they looked like "circus +clowns;" but they were in fairly good bodily condition, and it appeared +as if the involuntary bath had done them no real injury. + +Outside the building the people were shouting themselves hoarse in +praise of the two boys who had saved three lives, and Sam stood bowing +acknowledgments as if he had been the chief actor in the thrilling +scene. + +The difference between the real and the pretended life-savers was +readily understood, however, when Dan and Teddy made their appearance, +looking decidedly the worse for their struggles, and the cheers which +went up would have been ample reward for the most praise-loving person +in the world. + +They looked like anything rather than reputable employees as they +appeared in the borrowed garments; but as Teddy said, they couldn't stay +in the building until their clothes were dried, and it was absolutely +necessary he should attend to his business. + +Dan's duties necessitated his remaining near the creek; but Teddy was +forced to go back to his cane-board, and the crowd which followed him +was good evidence of the money he would make. + +During two hours after he returned from this thrilling adventure the +cane-board had more customers than could conveniently be attended to, +and it is safe to say that he then handled a larger amount than he had +ever before seen. + +"At this rate it won't take long to square up things, and you shall have +a fair portion of the profits, Tim," he said, when there was an +opportunity for him to speak with his clerk without being overheard by +the customers. + +"It's a lucky thing for us that them boats were smashed," Tim said, +devoutly, as he handed his employer half a dollar to change. "We might +have stood here with our tongues hangin' out all day an' never seen a +quarter of this money if you hadn't known how to swim." + +"You are right to a certain extent; but I can't take all the credit of +this spurt, because more than half the people are trying to get a cane +for nothing." + +"In the same way they thought to swindle Mr. Hazelton out of a watch," Tim +replied, with a smile; "but we won't fight about what brings trade so +long as it comes with the cash." + +Up to this time Teddy had no very definite idea of how much money had +been taken in, and he was thinking it would be a good idea to ascertain, +when a gruff, familiar voice from the rear asked: + +"Are the wages of sin as much as they should be?" + +Turning quickly he saw Uncle Nathan, and replied: + +"I don't know exactly what they should be; but, perhaps, you do." + +"Whatever I may know now, I remember that it was not allowed I should +insult my elders either by plainly spoken words or insinuations," the +old man said, sternly. + +"Neither would I have done such a thing if you had not given me the +provocation; but when I promised to pay three dollars for the use of +fifteen one week, you did not seem to think that amount would be the +wages of sin." + +"At the time I had no idea you would conspire with others to rob me of +my hard-earned savings." + +"You know very well, Uncle Nathan, that I haven't done any such thing. +On the night your store was robbed I staid in the house, and hadn't left +it when you came to tell us the news." + +"Every person of your class has some such excuse ready in case of an +emergency; but that kind of talk will not do with me. If you meant to do +the square thing, why was I not told you lost the money I lent you?" + +"Because I knew you would raise an awful row, thinking possibly it would +not be paid back." + +"Have I yet any assurance that it will be?" the old man asked, in a +fury. + +"Do you need it now?" + +"I always need my own." + +"And in this case, if I pay you at once, do you think it right to charge +me three dollars for the use of fifteen lent two days ago?" + +"That was what you promised, and the world gauges a man by the way he +keeps his word." + +"I owe the storekeeper in Waterville thirty dollars; but I told him you +must be paid first, and so you shall." + +"Then give me the money now," Uncle Nathan snarled. + +"That is exactly what I am willing to do," Teddy replied, calmly; "but +if you can't trust me I have reason to be suspicious of you, so give me +a receipt for the amount, and the matter can be settled." + +The old man literally glared at his nephew for an instant, and then, +eager to have the cash in his possession, he wrote a receipt, handing it +to the young fakir, as he said, angrily: + +"Now, let me see if you can settle the bill." + +Since the mishap on the creek, where Teddy had covered himself with +glory, business had been so good that he had more than twice that +amount, and, emptying the contents of his money bag on a board, he +proceeded to select the required sum. + +Uncle Nathan watched him jealously, his eyes twinkling enviously, and +when the money was placed in his hand he counted it twice over before +delivering up the written acknowledgment. + +"Are you certain all this has been honestly earned, Teddy?" he asked, +gravely. + +"How else could I have got it?" + +"There are many ways. While I would not be willing to take my oath to +it, several of these ten-cent pieces look very much like those I lost +night before last." + +"Do you mean to say I had anything to do with robbing your store?" and +now that this particular debt had been canceled Teddy felt very brave. + +"I know that such an amount of money has not been earned honestly, and, +what is more, my eyes have been opened to the character of your +friends." + +"If you mean Mr. Hazelton, he is as much your friend as mine, for you +were with him all day Sunday." + +"That is exactly who I do mean," Uncle Nathan replied, with provoking +deliberation. "I have seen his method of doing business since I came +into this fair, and know he is nothing more than a deliberate swindler." + +"But one with whom you were perfectly willing to go into partnership," a +voice in the rear of Teddy cried sharply, and the jewelry fakir stepped +directly in front of Uncle Nathan. "I told you exactly how I worked, and +you offered to put up even money with me, growing angry when I said you +would be of no use in the business. If it is swindling, you were mighty +eager to have a hand in the same business." + +"I don't want to talk with you," Uncle Nathan said, as he put Teddy's +eighteen dollars carefully in his pocket. + +"Then why do you come around here trying to bully this boy? He had no +idea of what I was going to do until he saw me work, while you +understood the whole plan. Make any trouble for him, and I will get up +here and tell every person who comes along that you wanted to be my +partner." + +"Do it," the old man said, angrily. "After having cheated so many people +out of their money, who will believe a word you say?" + +At the same time, however, Uncle Nathan took good care to leave this +particular spot, and Hazelton stepped to the rear of the board where he +could talk privately with Teddy. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +_AN ENCOUNTER._ + + +First of all, the jewelry fakir wanted to hear the particulars of the +accident on the lake, and Teddy began by telling him the primary cause +of the trouble. + +"I reckon all three of us lost our heads when we saw that man; I know I +did and we were so eager to get on shore that we paid no attention to +anything else. Have you seen him?" + +"Who? Long Jim? No; but the boys say he is here somewhere running the +swinging ball game." + +"What is that?" + +"A wooden ball is swung on two short uprights about eight inches apart, +and between them, in the center, stands a small peg. You pay ten cents +for the privilege of swinging the ball, and if it hits the peg when it +comes back after leaving your hand, you get a dollar." + +"I should think that would be easy enough to do." + +"Well, don't try it with such an idea or you'll go broke mighty quick. +It looks simple; but it isn't accomplished very often." + +"Have you done anything since I left here?" + +"Yes, and scooped in as much as I had any right to expect. I don't want +to spoil to-morrow's business, so sha'n't make another pitch, but will +spend my time trying to find Jim." + +"What good can that do?" + +"I still count on making him give back your fifteen dollars, if nothing +more. I reckon your Uncle Nathan won't try again to get a warrant out +for us, and so I sha'n't bother my head about learning anything +regarding the robbery." + +"He'll make things just as disagreeable as he can; there's no question +about that." + +"Well, let him, and we'll see who comes out ahead. Trade is beginning to +pick up, and you'd better attend to your customers." + +Hazelton walked away, and from that moment until nearly nightfall Teddy +had all the business both he and his clerk could attend to. + +Nearly every one had something to say about the accident on the creek, +and the young fakir was forced to tell the story over and over again, +until he really got tired of repeating the details. + +When nearly all of the visitors had left the grounds Teddy made up his +cash account, and the sum total surprised both himself and Tim. + +Including the amount paid Uncle Nathan he had taken in fifty-five +dollars and twenty cents. Ten per cent. of this was paid to the clerk, +and he found himself possessed of the magnificent sum of thirty-one +dollars and seventy cents. + +"At this rate we shall be rich before the end of the week," he said, in +a tone of satisfaction. + +"That's a fact; but it don't seem right for me to take so much," Tim +replied, as he wrapped the five dollars and a half which had been given +him in his handkerchief. + +"That was the agreement, an' we'll stick to it." + +"But when you promised ten cents on every dollar neither of us believed +trade would be half so good." + +"You're right; I thought if we got one-third as much business would be +booming; but that has nothing to do with our bargain. You've hung right +on here, without even stopping for anything to eat, an' are entitled to +what you've been paid. Everybody says there'll be a bigger crowd +to-morrow, an' so we stand a chance to make considerable more. Are you +going home to-night, or do you count on staying here?" + +"I've got to let the folks know where I am, for when I left it was +allowed I'd be back by sunset. To-morrow I'll come prepared to stay the +rest of the week." + +"There'll be plenty of stages running, an' you can afford to ride both +ways after this day's work. I want to send some of this money home to +mother, for it ain't safe to carry so much around with me." + +"Am I to take it?" + +"Yes, an' you can tell her all that has happened. Ask her to come over +Thursday, an' see for herself that we're getting rich." + +Twenty-five dollars was tied in a bundle with many wrappings of paper, +and Tim started off, looking almost afraid at being the custodian of so +much wealth. + +It was necessary Teddy should pack up his entire stock until next +morning, and this he proceeded to do as soon as he was alone. Mr. Sweet +had given him permission to bring his goods into the museum tent, and +his only trouble was how everything could be carried without assistance. +Before he was ready for departure, however, Sam came up, and the +question of transportation was settled. + +"Well, how do you feel now?" Teddy asked, cheerily, for the knowledge +that he had already taken in nearly enough to pay his debts caused him +to feel very jolly. + +"I allers get the worst of everything," Sam replied, disconsolately. +"You an' Dan made a big strike when you tumbled into the water, an' I've +had a blowin' up; come mighty near losin' my job into the bargain." + +"Why?" + +"'Cause the boss says that I was careless an' reckless, an' that I +couldn't earn enough in a month to pay for the two boats I've smashed." + +"Are they lost entirely?" + +"No, of course not. We pulled 'em out a little while ago, an' it cost so +very much to fix both. The folks in the other boat were as much to blame +as me." + +"They certainly were not keeping any better lookout, and, as a matter of +fact, I suppose I'm more at fault than any one else, for if I hadn't +sung out about the fakir it wouldn't have happened." + +"That's what I told the boss; but he's chuck full of foolish talk about +the bravery he says you an' Dan showed, an' is tryin' to get up what he +calls a testimonial for you." + +"A what?" Teddy cried, in surprise. + +"I heard him say testimonial; but if you know what that means you can go +to the head." + +"I don't, and I hope it won't amount to anything. I've been paid enough +for what was done by the boom it gave my business." + +"Of course, you an' Dan are bound to have the best end of it." + +"Why didn't you stop an' do the same thing?" + +"'Cause I had sense enough to look out for myself first." + +"But you know how to swim." + +"What of that? It's mighty risky catchin' hold of people in the water, +an' I don't mean to take any chances. How much have you made to-day?" + +When Teddy told him, the expert in rowing looked decidedly envious. + +"You've got all that money in one day?" + +"Yes; but I sent the most of it home to mother." + +"It's funny what luck some folks have, when them as knows the business +twice as well don't much more'n earn their salt," Sam said, as if to +himself, and before he could continue Dan arrived. + +He wore his own clothes, and carried those Teddy had left in the +boat-house. + +"These were dry, so I brought 'em up. You needn't carry back the ones +you borrowed till to-morrow, so Sam's boss says." + +Then Dan asked concerning business, and by the time all three had +finished discussing this very important matter the knives and canes were +packed ready for removal. + +Each boy took a load, carried it to the tent where Mr. Sweet was +figuring up his receipts for the day, and then went to supper, returning +half an hour later so tired that there was no desire on the part of +either to do anything other than sleep. + +The proprietor of the museum was in very good spirits. He had taken in +one hundred and six dollars and eighty cents, and said, in a tone of +satisfaction: + +"I reckon this fair will pan out all right. Trade is bound to be better +to-morrow, and Thursday is always the biggest of the week. I hear you +boys have been distinguishing yourselves. Tell me about it." + +Dan related the incident of the day very modestly, interrupted now and +then by Sam, who was eager to pose as a hero also, and Mr. Sweet +expressed himself as being well satisfied with their behavior. + +"Chasing a thief and getting a whipping in the night, and then saving +the lives of three people the next day is record enough for one week, so +you'd better not try for any more adventures," he said, with a laugh. + +Now that the incident of the previous night had been spoken of so +openly, it was necessary Sam's curiosity should be satisfied, and Dan +was forced to tell the story. + +While he was doing so, and listening to the oarsman's comments, Teddy +had an opportunity to see the "barker" and clown who arrived that +morning. Neither was a very prepossessing-looking man. They were lying +on the ground some distance from the boys, as if bent on minding their +own business, and there was no real reason for an unfavorable opinion +concerning them. + +But little time was spent in conversation on this evening. Every one was +thoroughly tired, and each sought for a soft spot on which to pass the +night. + +As before, Sam crawled up on the wagon to be out of harm's way when the +goat should be unfastened, while Dan and Teddy lay down in very nearly +the same place as before. + +"I don't fancy we shall hear many secrets between now and morning, no +matter how many men come around here to talk," the former said, +laughingly. "It won't take me two minutes to fall asleep, and the noise +that can awaken me then will have to be very great." + +Teddy's only reply was a yawn, and in even less time than Dan had +mentioned he was wrapped in slumber. + +Shortly after the proprietor of the exhibition began to make his +preparations for retiring, and the clown asked: + +"How did that row start this afternoon?" + +"Half a dozen of the village toughs tried to get in without paying, and +I had to polish one of 'em off," the barker replied. + +"You must have done it pretty quick, for when I got out there the thing +was over," Mr. Sweet said. + +"The fellow was more than half-drunk, an' it wasn't a very big job. They +threaten to come back and clean the whole show out." + +"Yes, I've heard such threats made before; but never lost much sleep +worrying about it." + +Ten minutes later all the human occupants of the tent were enjoying a +well-earned rest, and the goat had about concluded it would be a +profitless job to prospect for anything more to eat, when the sound of +footsteps could have been heard from the outside. + +Had Mr. Sweet been awake he would have decided that these late visitors +were trying to find the flap of the tent, for they walked cautiously +around the canvas twice, and then a sharp knife was thrust through the +fabric. + +An instant later Sam awoke his companion with a yell that would have +done credit to any Indian. + +Some one had given him such a blow as sent him from the seat to the +ground, and the remainder of the party leaped to their feet only to be +confronted by a large party of half-drunken toughs who had come to +avenge the insult received during the afternoon. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +_LONG JIM_. + + +Teddy's first thought when he was awakened by Sam's yells was that the +officers of the law were coming to arrest him for the robbery committed +at Uncle Nathan's store; but in a very few seconds he understood that +this was not the case. + +He and Dan had been sleeping some distance from the remainder of the +company; therefore, when the hand-to-hand struggle began they were out +of it entirely, and owing to the darkness could not be seen by the +assailants; but Sam's cries served to show the mob where he was, and one +after another pounded him when they failed to find any of the other +occupants. + +While one might have counted twenty Teddy and Dan stood motionless, +undecided as to what should be done, while the din caused by the +combatants and the screaming boy were almost deafening, and then the +latter said: + +"We've got to take a hand in this row, Teddy. Mr. Sweet has given us the +chance to sleep here, and the least we can do is to help as much as +possible, for it appears to me that his men are getting the worst of +it." + +A broken tent-peg was lying on the ground near at hand, and Dan added, +as he seized it: + +"Try to light one of the lanterns so we can see which is an enemy, and +then sail in." + +It seemed to Teddy as if he would never be able to follow these +instructions. He had plenty of matches; but in his excitement one after +another was extinguished until he fancied half an hour must have elapsed +before the wick was ignited. + +The faint glow of light served to show one of the intruders Teddy's +form, and the latter had but just succeeded in hanging the lantern on +the center-pole when it became necessary to defend himself. + +The drunken bully made a lunge at him, which he managed to avoid by +jumping aside, and in another instant he had seized the man by the +waist, doing his best to throw him. + +From this moment Teddy knew nothing more of the row than that portion in +which he was immediately concerned. He was able to prevent the man from +striking by hugging close to his body, and the two swayed here and there +in the effort to gain the mastery. Now and then they came in contact +with the other combatants, one or both receiving a chance blow, but no +especial injury was done to either. + +Had the man been sober, Teddy must have been overcome in a very short +time; but as he was far from being steady on his feet the odds were +about even, and the boy succeeded in holding his own until the others +had retreated or been so disabled that it was no longer possible for +them to continue the assault. + +Fully thirty minutes had elapsed from the time Sam first sounded the +alarm before the occupants of the tent could count themselves as +victors, and then Mr. Sweet and the clown pulled Teddy's adversary away, +throwing him bodily out of the tent after administering summary +punishment. + +During all this time the other exhibitors who intended to sleep on the +grounds had been gathering around the canvas, but no one cared to risk +his precious body by entering until it was certain the battle had been +ended. + +Then the tent was filled with sympathizing friends, who endeavored to +ascertain the amount of injury done, but were interrupted in the work by +the proprietor, who cried, angrily: + +"Clear out of here, every mother's son! You didn't dare to come in when +it would have been possible to help us, and there's no need of you now. +We were attacked by a crowd of men from the town, who proposed to clean +the show out because we wouldn't let them in free, and that's all there +is to it." + +Not until the last visitor had unwillingly departed did the little +party pay any attention to their wounds, and then the result of the +engagement was ascertained. + +The barker had a broken nose, but it would not prevent him from doing a +full share of talking on the following day. The clown's eye looked +rather bad, and Mr. Sweet's cheek had been cut, but these were only +trifling mishaps. Teddy had come out of the affray comparatively +uninjured; Dan showed nothing worse than a bruise under the left ear, +and while Sam appeared to be unscathed, he declared that he had been +pounded until every inch of his body felt like jelly. + +"You squealed fairly well for a fellow who was so badly done up," Mr. +Sweet said, with a laugh, as he proceeded to dress the barker's wounded +nose, "and I reckon you'll be all right by morning. Light some of the +other lanterns so I can see what I'm about, and during the remainder of +the night we'll stand guard, for no one can say how soon those +scoundrels may attempt to pay us a second visit, although I think they +had a full dose this time." + +How the assailants had fared no one was able to form a very good +opinion. The general belief among the occupants of the tent, however, +was that they had received such severe punishment that there would be no +further attack on this night, at least. + +When the wounds had been dressed, Mr. Sweet said, as he took up a +position near the flap: + +"You fellows had better try to go to sleep now. I'll keep awake for a +while, and then call some one to relieve me. Dan, can't you borrow one +of those queer-looking rifles you are exhibiting, and bring it with you +to-morrow night?" + +"I might get the one I use for shooting at a target; but you wouldn't +think of trying to kill a man, would you, Mr. Sweet?" + +"I could do a good deal toward scaring them, and if a crowd insisted on +forcing an entrance, I'd take mighty good care that one would carry away +a bullet to remember me by." + +"I'll bring the rifle," Dan replied, and Teddy whispered: + +"When I came here to run a cane-board I didn't count on being obliged to +do any fighting." + +"I don't reckon there'll be much more here. The managers of the fair +will see to it that those fellows are put where they can't do any +additional mischief, for the exhibitors must be protected, and we shall +be safe enough, except something else comes up to make a row." + +Then the sore, tired party lay down in search of slumber once more, and, +strange as it may seem after the exciting events, all save the sentinel +were soon wrapped again in slumber. + +Each in turn was aroused to do his share of guard duty before morning +came; but no enemy appeared, and at sunrise the three boys went across +the grounds to the boarding-house, where, as Dan said: "The price was +twice as big as the breakfast." + +Teddy had his place of business ready for the reception of customers +before the first stage-load of visitors arrived, and when Tim came he +had already taken in nearly a dollar. + +"What's the news?" he asked, as the clerk appeared, looking radiant and +happy at the thought of earning as much money as on the previous day. + +"Your mother was pretty nigh wild when I told her what we took in +yesterday, an' says she'll be here sure on Thursday. There's no more +news of your Uncle Nathan's goods, an' he's still tryin' to have you +arrested; but your mother says not to be afraid, 'cause she has talked +with a lawyer, an' don't think there'll be any trouble. I told the folks +at home that the old skinflint made you pay three dollars interest on +the money what was stole, an' everybody in town will know it before +night." + +Tim was forced to stop his story to wait upon a party of young gentlemen +who were eager to get dollar canes for five cents, and the booths +adjoining Teddy's place of business had not yet been opened when he +announced that there were four dollars in the money box. + +"We're bound to have a big day," Tim said, confidently. "The band from +the Run is comin' over this mornin', an' if the city people hear about +it you bet they'll jest crowd in to hear the music. There'll be [----] +of the boys to see you, but take my advice an' don't let 'em have any +rings on credit, for I wouldn't trust the best of the whole lot at fair +time. I'm goin' to stay till Friday; do you s'pose that man will let me +sleep in his tent with you fellers?" + +Teddy promised to inquire, and then advised Tim to have a look at the +grounds before business began to be rushing, and the clerk was glad to +take advantage of the proposition. + +He started off with the air of one who owned the entire inclosure, and +was hardly lost to view amid the fast-gathering throng when Teddy was +literally dazed by seeing Long Jim, the very man who had robbed him in +Waterville, lounging along toward his stand. + +Not until the fakir stood directly in front of the boy did he appear to +recognize him, and then he would have turned quickly away but for the +latter's cry: + +"Somebody hold that man till I get a constable! He stole my money." + +Realizing that a flight across the grounds with hundreds of men and boys +crying "Stop thief!" in full pursuit would be disastrous, Long Jim +turned to face his young accuser. + +"What do you mean by saying such a thing?" he asked, angrily. "If you +wasn't so small I'd make you eat the words." + +"I was big enough for you to steal from, and I want my money." + +It was only natural that a crowd should gather after such an accusation, +and Long Jim looked around for some means of escape, but, realizing that +he could not well get away while so many were near, he stepped close to +Teddy, as he whispered: + +"If you say another word I'll smash your face, you young whelp! Hold +your tongue if you want to leave here alive." + +"I'll say exactly what's true. Give me my money, or I'll find some one +to have you arrested!" + +"The boy is a liar, and, what is more, has just robbed his uncle's +store, if what they say over at the Run be true," the fakir said, +excitedly, as he turned to face the crowd. "I don't want to hurt him; +but I won't be insulted by a thief, so the best thing for me to do is to +leave." + +Saying this, he walked deliberately away, and the curious ones, who a +moment previous had been friendly to Teddy, began to sympathize with the +man. + +"Don't let him off!" the boy cried, starting to follow, and then +remembering that he would be forced to leave his wares at the mercy of +the crowd, turned back, while Long Jim continued straight across the +grounds unmolested. + +"It looks like it was a case of the pot calling the kettle black," an +old farmer said, and his immediate circle of friends laughed heartily, +while the younger portion of the crowd gazed earnestly at Teddy, +believing they saw before them a fullfledged burglar. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +_A DISCOVERY._ + + +With feelings of mingled anger, vexation and disappointment, Teddy stood +silent and motionless for several moments after Long Jim disappeared, +striving to keep the tears from his eyes. + +It seemed hard enough to be swindled out of fifteen dollars, but to be +held up as a thief by the very man who had done him the wrong, and to be +stared at as a criminal by the curious, was an aggravation of +misfortune. + +Just for one instant he made up his mind to tell the whole story to the +bystanders, but before there was time for him to speak he realized that +many of them would think he was trying to shield himself by an untruth +against just accusations, therefore he remained quiet, not making the +slightest effort to influence trade. + +Fortunately he was soon aroused from this very disagreeable frame of +mind by a very pleasing incident. + +The band from the Run arrived, and to the young fakir's surprise marched +directly to his booth, the leader saying, in a tone sufficiently loud to +be heard by every one in the immediate vicinity as the musicians halted +about ten feet away: + +"We have been hired to play on the grounds to-day, Teddy, and left home +half an hour earlier than the specified time for the sole purpose of +giving you a serenade to show that, whatever your uncle may say, the +folks at the Run are positive there isn't a shadow of truth in his +ridiculous story. We know what you are working for, and intend to help +you along as much as possible." + +Then the musicians began to play, while, as a matter of course, every +one who came up wanted to know why the band was there instead of on the +stand built for its especial accommodation, and there were people enough +who had heard the leader's remarks to explain matters to the newcomers. + +The immediate result was that instead of believing him to be a burglar, +the same ones who fancied a few moments previous that he looked guilty, +were now quite positive he was a victim. + +Tim arrived while the serenade was in progress, and when Teddy explained +the situation, he exclaimed, gleefully: + +"Well, by jinks! This jest knocks the spots outer everything! Trade will +hum after this, or I'm a duffer." + +And the clerk's prediction was verified in a very short time. + +When the musicians had concluded the concert they laid aside their +instruments, and during the next ten minutes every man of them threw +rings at the canes or knives so rapidly that both Teddy and his +assistant had all they could do to wait upon the throng. + +Then, giving the signal for the march to be resumed, the leader said to +the young fakir: + +"Don't get discouraged, my boy, no matter what happens. If you have any +trouble it can't last long, for you've plenty of friends at the Run, and +after what happened here yesterday there should be a good many on the +grounds." + +The kind-hearted musicians marched away without giving Teddy an +opportunity to thank them, and as if to atone for their previously +spoken harsh words the bystanders devoted themselves with unusual zest +to the task of winning a cane worth a dollar by an outlay of five cents. + +It was nearly an hour before trade began to grow dull again, and both +the boys were quite willing to rest a few moments. + +"At this rate we stand a chance of getting rich before the fair closes," +Teddy exclaimed, in a tone of satisfaction. "I wonder what Uncle Nathan +would have said if he'd been here to hear the leader?" + +"I'll tell you," a disagreeable but familiar sounding voice replied from +the rear of the stand where its owner had been concealed by an adjoining +booth, and Nathan Hargreaves stalked into view with a comically tragic +air. "Things have come to a pretty pass when a man's own relations, an' +them as he has set up in business with his own hard-earned money, try to +bring scorn and reproach upon him. You are a snake in the grass, Teddy +Hargreaves, an' not content with helpin' rob me, concoct such a +disgraceful scene as I have jest witnessed." + +"What could I have had to do with it?" Teddy cried, in surprise. "I +didn't know they were going to give me a lift." + +"Of course you did; I ain't blind if I am such a fool as to put you in +the way of makin' so much money. There wasn't a man in that band who'd +have countenanced the speech the leader made if you hadn't been workin' +on their sympathies. But your race won't be much longer. Don't think +that I've stopped all proceedings, for it may be that you're shoved into +jail this very day unless you make a clean breast of the whole thing." + +"I've got nothing to tell simply because I don't know anything; but I +believe the same man who took my fifteen dollars robbed your store. Dan +and I heard him and another fellow talking, and in trying to find out +something for your benefit got knocked down." + +"What did they say? Who are they?" the old man asked, eagerly, his +bearing toward Teddy changing very suddenly. "Tell me! Tell your poor, +old uncle, who'll be mighty near the poor-house, if he don't get his own +again." + +This appeal touched Teddy's heart immediately, but Tim said, half to +himself, taking good care Uncle Nathan should hear him, however: + +"More'n a hundred robberies like that wouldn't make him poor. Why, down +at the Run folks say you'd hardly miss what's been taken." + +"Those who make that kind of talk are only shiftless people with never a +dollar of their own, consequently they don't know the value of one," the +old man cried, angrily. "It's all very well for a set of loafers who are +mad with me because I wouldn't give them credit to say such things. Do +you suppose I'd spend my time runnin' around the country huntin' for the +thieves if I hadn't lost a power of money?" + +"You'd be willin' to run pretty far if there was a nickel at the end of +the road," Tim retorted, but before he could say anything more Teddy +motioned for him to be silent. + +"Are you goin' to tell me who the robbers are?" Uncle Nathan asked, in a +wheedling tone, as he turned once more toward his nephew. + +"I don't know the men whom I suspect, except by sight, but it's more +than possible we may find out enough to warrant their arrest before the +fair closes." + +The old man insisted on knowing at once, and alternately coaxed and +threatened, but all to no purpose. + +Teddy positively refused to make a statement until he had more proof, +and recognizing the fact that he might hurt his own cause by insisting, +Uncle Nathan said, in a most affectionate tone: + +"I must go now, Teddy, but I'll see you again before night. If you'll do +all you can to help find them scoundrels I'll never say that you had +anything to do with the crime." + +"You'd no business to make any such talk, for you knew it was impossible +for me to take any hand in it, even if I'd wanted to be a thief." + +"There's a good deal of circumstantial evidence," the old man said, +solemnly, as he turned to leave, "an' it stands you in hand to do all a +boy can to clear your own skirts. I'm goin' to give you a chance, an' +promise there won't be any arrest made to-day at all events." + +"There's a good reason why you promise that," Tim cried, angrily, as +Uncle Nathan walked away. "You tried mighty hard, but couldn't get a +warrant, an' there ain't a justice of the peace between here an' +Waterville as would grant one without any other evidence than what you +can say." + +"Don't make him angry, Tim. He's feeling bad about his money, an' you +can't blame him for trying to find out who has got it." + +"I don't blame him for that, but what I'm kickin' about is that he +keeps naggin' at you when there's no reason for it." + +"Most likely he thinks there is." + +"He can't; it's only the wretched old skinflint's way of gettin' even +with the world, an' so he picks on a feller what he believes can't +strike back." + +"I wish I could find out who the robbers are, and where the goods have +been hidden." + +"Well, I don't. It serves him right to lose 'em, an'---- Hello! here +comes that feller what helps exhibit the rifles! I wonder what he wants +at this time of day, jest when business is beginnin' to be rushin'." + +Dan was evidently in a high state of excitement, for he forced his way +through the crowds, regardless of possible injury to himself or others, +and did not slacken speed until he stood in front of the cane-board, +breathless and panting. + +"What's up?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"The fakir who got your money, an' another man, who I think is the same +one we heard talkin' outside the tent, have jest bought a boat from the +Davis Company. Sam saw 'em, an' ran over to tell me while the bargain +was bein' made. He's watchin' down there till we can get back." + +"I don't believe it would do any good for me to say another word to Long +Jim. He went past here this mornin', an' I only made a bad matter worse +by trying to make him give back what he stole." + +"We ain't countin' on doin' that, but I believe they're gettin' ready to +cart away the goods what were stole from your Uncle Nathan. Perhaps we +can foller without bein' seen, an' get on to the whole snap. Could you +get off for the balance of the day?" + +And now Teddy was quite as excited as Dan. + +"Yes, an' so can Sam." + +"Are you goin' to help find his goods after all that old duffer has +threatened?" Tim asked, impatiently. + +"I'll do what I can," was the decided reply. "Do you think you will be +able to get along alone to-day?" + +"I could do it easy enough by hirin' a boy to pick up the rings, but I +hate to see you make a fool of yourself, Teddy." + +"You'll think different later. Come on, Dan. I'll be back as soon as I +can, Tim," and then the young fakir urged his friend in the direction of +the creek. + +"It won't do to go anywhere near the boat-house," Dan said. "Sam is up +the bank a long piece where the willows hide him. He's keepin' his eye +on the craft they bought, so it can't be taken away without his seein' +it." + +By mingling with the crowd it was possible to make their way to the +desired spot without being seen, save by those with whom they came into +immediate contact, and in a few moments the watcher was joined by his +friends. + +"Now I want you fellers to let me manage this case," Sam said, +pompously. "I know more 'bout detective business than both of you put +together, an' if you'd only told me what was up the other night we'd had +the whole thing settled." + +"Have you seen the men?" Dan asked, impatiently. + +"Lots of times. The old fakir is loafin' around close by the landin', +an' the other one must 'a gone off for somethin'. The Davis Company told +me I could take any of the boats, an' the minute the thieves start we'll +jump right on their trail." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +_AMATEUR DETECTIVES._ + + +It was fated that the thrilling work of running down and capturing the +thieves should not be begun until after considerable delay. + +"Now, I wonder what he is up to?" Dan said, when it was no longer +possible to see the supposed burglar. + +"Why is it that you can't let me do this thing?" Sam asked, angrily. "If +you keep meddlin' we'll never fix matters." + +"I don't see that I'm interfering," Dan replied, in surprise. + +The three boys watched this one particular boat in silence for ten +minutes or more, seeing Long Jim now and then, and just as they believed +he was about to step on board the man walked toward the exhibition +buildings, and was soon lost to view amid the throng of people. + +"You was gettin' ready, too, I could tell that by your eye." + +"I'll have to give in that you're the smartest feller in this section of +the country, Sam, an' that's a fact." + +"Of course it is," the amateur detective replied, complacently, thinking +Dan's sarcasm was really praise. "If I have my own way I can turn up the +biggest thief that ever walked on two legs; but you mustn't bother me, +or things may go wrong." + +If the matter had not been so serious to him Teddy would have laughed +long and often at the dignity and superior knowledge assumed by this +fellow, who, since he made his acquaintance, had done nothing more +difficult than to get himself into trouble; but, under the +circumstances, he was so deeply interested in the outcome of the +business that there was no room in his mind for mirth. + +"Dan," he said, "let you and I walk around two or three minutes. We'll +stay close by so that Sam can give us the signal in case the men show +up, and we may find Hazelton." + +"Don't tell him what we're doin'," the amateur detective cried, sharply. + +"Why not?" + +"'Cause it's likely he'll want to meddle with our business, an' then my +work will be spoiled." + +"I won't say a word to him until after seeing you again," Teddy replied +as he led Dan away, and added when they were where it would be +impossible for Sam to hear them: "See here, it's foolish for us to think +of trying to follow those men if he's to be allowed to make a fool of +himself. With him believing he's the greatest detective in the country, +something wrong is sure to happen, an' we may never get another chance +of finding out about the burglary." + +"Don't fret about that," Dan replied, confidently. "It won't do any harm +to let him swell a little now while he's keeping watch; but when the +real work begins it won't take long to sit on him." + +"Then there will be a row." + +"I'll attend to his case; but I don't think there'll be anything for us +to do yet awhile. The men are evidently in no hurry to leave, and most +likely intend to wait till the crowd begins to go." + +"Then why should all three of us stay on watch?" + +"We won't. Go back to your cane-board, and I'll tell Sam to come for you +when the burglars put in an appearance. He'll have time to do that, an' +while he's gettin' a boat ready you can come for me." + +"Will it be safe to trust him?" + +"Yes, indeed," Dan replied, with a laugh. "He's havin' an awful good +time thinkin' he's the greatest detective in the world, and couldn't be +hired to leave that clump of willows so long as the men keep out of +sight." + +Teddy was not so confident, and insisted on going back with Dan while +the arrangement was made. + +When the matter was explained Sam appeared to be perfectly satisfied. + +"That's all right," he said, readily. "I can see to this thing alone; +but I'll let you fellers know the minute anything happens. Don't tell +any of the constables what I'm up to, or they'll want to have a finger +in the pie." + +Convinced that he would be informed of any change in the situation, +Teddy returned to the cane-board just in time to aid Tim in attending to +a rush of customers who were spending their money liberally. + +"What made you come back?" the clerk asked, in surprise. "I've hired a +feller for a quarter to pick up rings, an' am gettin' along first rate." + +Teddy briefly explained the condition of affairs, and then there was +little opportunity for conversation until considerably past noon, when +trade dropped off very decidedly for a while. + +In order that he might have a glimpse of the other fakirs and rest +himself at the same time, Tim was sent to see if Sam was yet at his +self-selected post of duty, and Teddy took advantage of the opportunity +to ascertain the amount of his receipts. + +To his great surprise he found nearly forty dollars in the money-box, +and from this he took thirty with which to pay the merchant in +Waterville who had given him credit for his stock. + +"It has turned out to be a mighty good venture, even if Aunt Sarah was +so sure I'd make a fool of myself by tryin' it. All the money I make now +will be clear profit, and it looks as if I'd be able to help mother +quite a bit." + +[Illustration: "They're getting ready to start!" he said, breathlessly.] + +"Well, how is business?" a voice asked, in a cheery tone, and, looking +up, Teddy saw his sole remaining creditor. + +"I'm glad you've come," he cried, bundling the thirty dollars up in a +piece of paper. "I'd jest counted this out for you, an' when you take it +I'll be free from debt." + +"But I don't want the money," the merchant replied. "I only came around +to see if you were successful." + +"I've already made more than I reckoned on, an' it'll be a favor if you +take this, 'cause I don't like to have so much around." + +Then Teddy explained the condition of his business affairs, not +forgetting to tell of the accusation made against him by his Uncle +Nathan, and the merchant said, as he concluded: + +"I heard the whole story, my boy, and have already talked with Mr. +Hargreaves, whom I met a few moments ago. I do not think he can do +anything to you, because you have made many friends here. The money I +will take, as it is not well to keep it where it might be stolen; but +can give you no receipt until I get home." + +"That'll be all right," Teddy replied, contentedly; "you trusted me with +the goods, an' it would be funny if I couldn't wait for a receipted +bill. It's through you that I've had the chance to make so much, an' I +want you to know I feel grateful." + +"I believe that, and am more than pleased to have put you in the way of +getting a start in the world. Come to see me when the fair closes, and +it is possible I may show you an opportunity of learning to be a +merchant on a large scale, rather than a fakir whose method of getting a +living is very precarious, regardless of the fact that he sometimes +makes very great profits." + +It can be readily understood that Teddy accepted the invitation, and +then, trade commencing once more, the gentleman walked away, leaving the +proprietor of the cane-board with the pleasing consciousness that he was +free from debt, and with quite a large amount of money in his mother's +keeping. + +Tim returned very shortly after the merchant's departure, and reported +that Sam was still on duty. + +"The boat hasn't been moved nor have the men showed up again," he said. +"That feller acts as if he thought he was bigger than the President. He +told me he could be the greatest detective that ever lived if it wasn't +that folks made him show off at rowin' 'cause he had so much style about +him. I don't think he's so very wonderful; but, of course, I never saw +many out an' out detectives." + +"And you don't see one when you met him. I'm sure he'll get Dan an' me +in trouble before this thing is ended." + +"Then why don't you let him go off alone? That's what I'd do with such a +chump." + +"I can't, because----" + +The sentence was not concluded, for at that moment Dan came up at full +speed. + +"They're gettin' ready to start!" he said, breathlessly. "I saw 'em go +by the buildin', an' run over to tell Sam that I'd fetch you. Our boat +is a long distance up the creek, an' we'll have to hurry, or run the +chance of missing their craft." + +There was no delay on Teddy's part, despite the misgivings he had +regarding Sam. + +One parting injunction to Tim on the subject of business, and then he +followed Dan at full speed toward the creek on such a course as would +bring them fully a quarter of a mile above the boat-house outside the +fair grounds. + +Sam had made everything ready for the journey by the time they arrived, +and was so excited that he could no longer speak of his own wonderful +powers as a thief-catcher. + +"One of you fellers had better row while I steer," he said, seating +himself in the stern sheets and taking the tiller-ropes. "If they see +the way I handle the oars they'll know exactly who's after them, an' +then the game'll be up." + +"Don't worry yourself about that," Dan replied, calmly. "Neither Teddy +nor I knows anything about a boat, except it may be to steer, so you'll +have to hump yourself." + +Sam grumbled considerably about taking so many risks; but he finally +moved over to the bow and his companions took their seats aft. + +"I won't put any style to it, an', perhaps, that'll keep 'em from +knowin' I'm on their trail," he said, and immediately began rowing in +such a bungling fashion that Dan said, sharply: + +"Look here, if you're goin' to pull this boat, do it, or we'll go back. +At this rate, you'll have everybody at the fair watching to see what +kind of chumps have been allowed to risk their lives. We've got no time +to spare, either; for we must get on the other side of the creek where +it will be possible to watch the men without getting too near." + +"I'll take care of that part of the business," Sam replied, loftily, and +Dan immediately put into operation his plan of "sitting" on the amateur +detective. + +"You do your share, and that will be enough. Teddy and I propose to take +a hand in this ourselves." + +"Then I might as well go back." + +"You can, if you want to." + +It so chanced that he had no such desire, and with the air of one whose +feelings have been deeply wounded he rowed steadily on, Dan steering, +until they were where it was possible to have a full view of a long +stretch of the creek. + +[Illustration: "There they are!" Teddy said.] + +"There they are!" Teddy said, pointing down stream to where a boat was +being pulled close to the left bank. "They have stopped, and it looks as +if something was being taken on board!" + +"It is a portion of the goods they stole!" Dan cried. "Stop rowing, Sam, +and if nothing happens we'll soon know where the whole lot is to be +hidden." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +_THE RENDEZVOUS._ + + +That Dan's surmise was correct could be seen a few moments after, while +the boys, partially concealed by the overhanging bank, watched the +proceedings with but little danger of being discovered. + +On the shore were a number of packages in a cart, and these the supposed +burglars loaded into the boat with the utmost haste. + +If this lot comprised all that had been taken from Uncle Nathan his loss +must have been greater than he stated, and Teddy said, after watching +several moments in silence: + +"I reckon this is only part of what they took; but I'm puzzled to know +how it could have been brought so far. The idea of carting goods over +here to find a place in which to hide them is a queer one, when all the +thieves had to do was slip down the river in a skiff, an' before morning +they'd be beyond reach of the officers." + +It surely was strange that the men should have done so much useless +labor, and the only solution to the apparent mystery was offered by Sam, +who said, with an air of superior wisdom: + +"They've done it to throw me off the scent. That fakir we saw in +Waterville must have known who I was." + +"How does it happen he had the nerve to come here when he knew you +counted on showing the people who visited this fair your skill in +rowing?" Dan asked, with a laugh. + +"I reckon he didn't think I was tellin' the truth." + +It was useless to attempt to make Sam acquainted with himself. He had +such a remarkable idea of his own abilities, despite the scrapes he was +constantly getting into, that the most eloquent orator would have been +unable to convince him he was anything more than a very egotistical boy, +with little save his vanity to recommend him to the notice of the +general public. + +In five minutes the boat at the opposite bank had received as much of a +cargo as her owners wished to carry, and then the men began to row +leisurely down the river. + +"Now, go slow, Sam, and don't turn around to look, or they may suspect +we are following them," Dan said, warningly. "I'll keep you posted about +what they are doing, and you can tell us afterward what ought to have +been done. Pull moderately, for we don't want to get very near while it +is light enough for them to see us." + +The chase was not a long one. By keeping the boat's head to the bank and +moving leisurely as boys who were bent only on pleasure might have +done, the pursuers evidently caused no suspicions as to their purpose, +and after about a mile had been traversed the burglars turned up a +narrow waterway which led to a barn or shed built on the meadows for the +storing of marsh hay. + +There were plenty of ditches near at hand into which the amateur +detectives could run their craft unobserved, and as the pursued left the +creek Dan steered into one of these. + +Here their heads hardly came above the bank, and all three could see the +men carrying their cargo to the building. + +"We've got 'em now," said Sam, triumphantly, as the first of the +packages was taken on shore, "an' the sooner we nab both the better." + +"How do you intend to set about such a job?" Teddy asked. + +"Go right up an' tell 'em we've been on their track." + +"And in less than two minutes you would get a worse pounding than the +toughs gave you last night." + +Sam appeared to realize the truth of this statement, for he had no +further suggestions to offer, and Dan said, after some reflection: + +"I think the best thing we can do will be to go back to the fair. If +those fellows find us here the jig will be up; but it isn't likely +they've got the whole of their plunder with them, and intend to come +here again. We'll talk with some one and find out a good plan, or keep +our eyes peeled to learn what they mean to do with the goods. If they +propose simply to hide them until there is a chance to get the lot away +safely, we shall have the key to the situation an' can take plenty of +time deciding what should be done." + +Sam did not again propose to make any attempt at intimidating the men, +and Teddy thought Dan's scheme a wise one. + +"They'll come here more than once before the week is ended; you know +they spoke of moving the stuff when the exhibitors got ready to leave, +an' we'd better go back to the grounds before those fellows have +finished their work." + +Sam pulled out of the water-course into the creek without a murmur; but +when they were on the way back, and he felt at liberty to display his +true "style," courage returned. + +"I knew you fellers wasn't any good on detective work," he said, +scornfully. "If I'd had charge of the case we should have them men tied +hand an' foot in the bottom of this boat." + +"How would you have got 'em there?" Dan asked. + +"That's my business. Jest because I've let you into this thing there's +no reason why I should give all my secrets away, is there?" + +"Not a bit of it, an' you keep them locked up in your heart, for if +Teddy an' I knew the plans we might get into a bad scrape." + +"Well, what are you goin' to do now?" + +"Nothing until after we have talked with those who know more than we do +about such things." + +Sam immediately relapsed into silence. His superior knowledge had been +scorned, and he proposed to let his companions understand that he was +not pleased with them. + +By the time the boys reached the bend in the creek they could see the +boat in which were Long Jim and his companion, half a mile behind, and +Dan said: + +"Those fellows don't know me. When we land you and Sam had better keep +out of sight, while I try to find out where they go after striking the +fair ground." + +"All right. It's time I helped Tim, an' you'll come to the cane-board if +there is anything to tell." + +"So I don't amount to anything, eh?" Sam asked, sulkily. + +"Of course you do; but it would be foolish to make a show of yourself to +Long Jim, who would remember you. Keep rowing around in the boat as if +you were at work, and there'll be no chance for suspicion." + +By this time the little craft was at the landing stage of the +boat-house, and two of the party leaped out, leaving the third feeling +that he had been unjustly deprived of a very large portion of his +rights. + +"If them fellers think they're goin' to get the best of me they're +makin' a big mistake, an' I'll show 'em so before night. They don't know +any more about bein' detectives than a cat; but both will be mightily +surprised before mornin', or I'm mistaken." + +Then, instead of rowing around the creek as Dan had suggested, Sam +pulled out into the middle of the stream, looking wondrous wise and +determined as he awaited the coming of those whose secret he had +partially discovered. + +Meanwhile Teddy and Dan, without the slightest suspicion of what their +friend proposed to do, separated at the landing stage, the former making +all haste to reach his cane-board, where he found Tim doing a thriving +business, and standing near by was Hazelton. + +"Where have you been?" the jewelry fakir asked, solicitously. "I've come +here two or three times without finding you, and had almost begun to +believe old Nathan succeeded in getting a warrant." + +Teddy was undecided as to whether he should tell this acquaintance of +all he had seen or not; but, after some deliberation, and in view of the +fact that he also had been accused of the burglary, concluded to do so. + +"We've found out where Long Jim is hiding the stuff he stole from my +uncle," he said, and then explained what had been done during the last +hour. + +Hazelton was surprised that so much information had been gained; but he +was able to cause Teddy an equal amount of astonishment. + +"I don't believe the packages you saw came from the old man's store. I +heard, about two hours ago, that a store here in town was robbed last +night, and it isn't dead sure, after your uncle's accusations, and what +I have done on the fair grounds, that I sha'n't be arrested on +suspicion. Most likely the goods taken down the creek were stolen here; +but I don't understand why those fellows should work so boldly." + +"Probably they think, as one of them said the other night, while so many +articles are being carried to and fro." + +"Very likely that may be true, and now comes the question of what shall +be done regarding the information you have gained. I stand in a mighty +delicate position, and, quite naturally, want to save myself, if +possible, for even an arrest when there is little or no proof, ain't to +be contemplated calmly." + +"You ought to know better than I how we should go to work. Dan an' I +thought there would be plenty of time, for if those fellows were going +to skip very soon they wouldn't have taken the trouble to carry the +stuff down there, where it could not be gotten away quickly." + +"I'll think the matter over, Teddy, and come back here in a couple of +hours," Hazelton said, after a moment's thought. + +"Don't tell anyone what you found out until after seeing me again." + +This conversation had been carried on at the rear of the cane-board, +where the customers could not overhear it, and when the jewelry fakir +walked toward the exhibition building it was necessary to satisfy Tim's +curiosity regarding what had been accomplished. + +"I don't s'pose it's any of my business," the latter said, when Teddy +concluded the story; "but I wouldn't be afraid to bet all I shall earn +this week that you'll have trouble with that feller before the scrape is +over. He knows so awful much that somethin' tough is bound to happen." + +Teddy did not think there was any good cause for alarm, more especially +since he felt confident Dan would keep an eye on the oarsman, and during +the next two hours he thought of nothing save earning money, for +customers were plenty, and even with the assistance of the boy Tim had +engaged it was all he and his clerk could do to wait upon those who were +anxious to win a cane or knife. + +Now and then some of the other fakirs would visit him; but, as a rule, +all were so busy that there was little time for the exchange of +compliments, and even the cry of "Three rings for five cents, with the +chance to get a dollar cane or knife for nothing!" was not needed to +stimulate trade. + +It was two hours from the time of his return when Dan came up looking +decidedly uneasy, and Teddy did not stop to make change for the man who +had just patronized him, before he asked, hurriedly: + +"Now, what's up?" + +"Sam is missing." + +"What do you mean? How can that be?" + +"He was to row around the creek near the landing; but for the last hour +no one has seen him, and, what is more, the boat can't be found. Long +Jim an' his friend haven't come ashore, as near as I can make out, an' +it looks to me as if that foolish Sam has got into trouble through +trying to play detective." + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +_SAM'S ADVENTURES._ + + +In order to explain Sam's absence, and one or two other incidents in +their regular sequence, it is necessary to go back to the moment when, +his friends having landed, the amateur detective was left to his own +devices. + +His first impulse was to report his arrival to the manager of the boat +exhibit, and then go about his routine duties, but before this very +proper plan could be carried into effect he chanced to see Hazelton on +the shore. + +"Now, what's he layin' around there for?" Sam asked of himself. "I'll +bet Dan or Teddy has given the whole snap away, an' he's come to pull in +the burglars. It's a mighty mean trick for them to play after I've +worked the case so far that there's nothing to do but nab 'em. He'll get +all the praise, an' folks won't know the job was managed by me." + +The longer Sam thought of this apparent ingratitude and treachery on the +part of Teddy and Dan the more angry he grew, and it did not require +many moments' thought for him to succeed in convincing himself that he +had been very shabbily treated. + +Continuing to talk to himself, or rather at the tiller, on which his +eyes were fixed, he added: + +"Folks have said so much about their savin' them women from drownin', +when I mighter done the same thing if I'd been willin' to make a fool of +myself, that they want to scoop in everything; but I could stop this +little game by jest goin' ahead on my own hook. If I sneaked down the +creek an' brought back the stuff them men have been hidin' people would +begin to know how much I understand about detective work." + +This appeared in his mind as the most brilliant scheme he had ever +conceived, and in a very few seconds Sam decided that it should be +carried into effect. + +First, and with no very well-defined idea of why such a course was +necessary, he rowed cautiously to and fro past the landing stage, +scrutinizing closely every face he saw, and mentally hugging himself +because of the excitement which would be caused by his return with the +stolen property. + +Then he turned the boat, and began to row down the creek, stopping every +few seconds to gaze around in such a mysterious manner that the +suspicions of any one who observed him would have been instantly +aroused. + +In this manner, which he believed the only true way for a first-class +detective to approach his prey, Sam had rowed less than half a mile when +he saw Long Jim and his companion returning. + +Now the time had come when true cunning was necessary, and the amateur +detective began to display it by pulling the boat sharply around, +heading her for an indentation on the opposite shore. + +Here he ran her bow aground, and lying at full length in the bottom, +peered out at the men in the most stealthy manner. + +They had already taken notice of his erratic movements, and now regarded +him intently, but, without checking the headway of their own craft, in a +few minutes were beyond sight around the bend. + +"There," Sam said, with a long-drawn breath of relief, as he arose to a +sitting posture, "if Teddy an' Dan had been here them fellers would have +tumbled to the whole racket, but I've put 'em off the scent, an' will +have plenty of time to do my work." + +He pulled out from the shore once more, gazed long and earnestly up and +down the creek, and then, in the same ridiculous manner as before, +continued the journey. + +The trip which should have consumed no more than an hour even with the +most indolent oarsman, was not completed until twice that time had +elapsed, and then fully fifteen minutes were spent by this very cautious +boy in landing. + +He pulled his boat up high out of the water, and, in order to conceal +her, heaped such a pile of dry grass on top of her that it must have +attracted the attention of any one passing, more especially those who +were familiar with the creek. + +This done he went toward the barn after the fashion of an old-time stage +villain, halting at the slightest sound, and peering in every direction, +fancying himself surrounded by foes. + +Not until he had circled completely around the barn twice did he venture +to enter, and then, much to his disappointment, there was nothing to be +seen. The building appeared to be absolutely empty, and even his eagle +eye failed to discover any traces of recent occupancy. + +"Well, this is mighty funny," he said, with a sigh of disappointment. +"Them fellers surely brought a lot of stuff in here, but they must have +carried it out again." + +Having expended so much labor and time in reaching this place, he did +not intend to return until after making a thorough search, however, and +to this end he investigated one possible hiding-place after another, +pulling up the boards of the rude flooring, and peering into places +where nothing larger than a mouse could have been hidden. + +During this time the burglars were returning with all possible speed. +Sam's actions, both as he came down the creek, and also while screening +himself from view, were so suspicious that, guilty as the men were, they +immediately concluded what was very near the truth. + +Long Jim recognized the boy as having been with Teddy when the bargain +for the imaginary cane-board was made, and instead of returning to the +fair grounds the two watched, from a point of vantage on the bank, until +Master Sam had landed. + +His purpose was now evident, and it was necessary the burglars should +resort to desperate measures to prevent the loss of their ill-gotten +gains as well as to save themselves from imprisonment. + +When they arrived where it was possible to look into the barn, Sam was +on his knees scraping away the dirt which appeared to have been recently +disturbed, and they heard him say in a tone of exultation: + +"I've got to it at last, an' now we'll see what Teddy an' Dan have to +say when I flash the whole lot of stuff up with nobody to help me. I +reckon----" + +He did not finish the sentence, for at that moment Long Jim stepped +directly in front of him, as he asked: + +"Did you leave anything here, my son?" + +"No--I--I--that is--you see----" + +Sam was so frightened that he could not say another word. It seemed as +if his tongue was swollen to twice its natural size, while his throat +was parched and dry, and to make bad matters worse, he had entirely +neglected to invent a plausible excuse for his presence there in case of +an interruption. + +"I asked if you'd left anything here?" Long Jim repeated, very mildly. + +"Well--well---- You see I jest come down to--to---- I thought, perhaps, +I might find something, but it's time I was gettin' back to the fair, +'cause the folks will be needin' me." + +As he spoke he attempted to back toward the door, but before taking half +a dozen steps a cry of fear burst from his lips, for a heavy hand was +laid with no gentle force on his shirt collar, and he staggered forward +helplessly. + +"That's an invitation for you to hold on a bit, an' have a little +conversation with two gentlemen who are mighty curious to know why you +came here," Long Jim said, grimly. "You're goin' to tell us the whole +partic'lars, or there won't be enough left of you to be seen under a +microscope." + +Sam made no reply. He was literally dazed with fear, and just at that +moment he thought the life of a detective very disagreeable. + +"Come, speak up, an' be quick about it," the man cried, fiercely. "We've +got no time to waste on sich cubs as you, an' in about two minutes +you'll get worse'n we served out the other night." + +"That wasn't me follerin' you from the museum tent," Sam said, quickly, +thinking possibly this fact might work in his favor. + +"Who was it?" + +"Teddy an' Dan." + +"Who is Dan?" + +"A feller who works for the Stevens Arms Company up at the fair." + +"Why did they follow us?" + +"Teddy wanted to get back the money he gave you to buy a cane-board +with." + +"If he knows what's wise for him he'll stop any such rackets, or he may +get more'n he bargains for." + +Then the second man, who still held firmly to Sam's collar, asked, as he +shook his prisoner vigorously: + +"How did you know we had been here?" + +"Us fellers saw you come down in a boat." + +"So all three are in the secret, eh?" + +Sam's only thought was that he might possibly save his own skin, and he +replied in the affirmative, although he must have known that by such +answer he was destroying his friends' chances of recovering the goods. + +"Where are the fools now?" Long Jim asked, angrily. + +"Up at the fair." + +"What do they intend to do?" + +"Get somebody to arrest you." + +"Then we've got to skip mighty lively, Phil," and Long Jim looked up at +his companion. + +"Yes; but if my advice had been follered we wouldn't be in this scrape. +You was the only one the cubs knew, an' by keepin' out of sight we +mighter finished the work that's been laid out. You're so pig-headed +that a yoke of oxen couldn't keep you in hidin'." + +"There's no use fightin' about it now; for we've got to get a move on us +in short order. It won't do to let this boy have a chance to give the +alarm." + +"Of course not. Lash him up somewhere so he can't make a noise, an' his +chums will come before he starves to death." + +"Don't do that!" Sam cried, in an agony of terror. "I won't say a word +about your catchin' me here, an' I'll do anything you say." + +"Oh, you're a nice plum to make promises, ain't you. It didn't take much +persuadin' to make you go back on your friends, an' that's enough to +show whether you can be trusted. Get the rope out of the boat, Phil, an' +then we'll make ready for a long jump." + +Phil obeyed, grumbling as he went because his partner had refused to +take his advice, thus plunging both of them into danger, and Long Jim +turned his attention to the prisoner once more. + +"Before we leave this part of the country for good I'm goin' to give you +somethin' to remember us by so's you won't go 'round stickin' your nose +into other people's business agin." + +"What are you goin' to do?" Sam asked, his face growing even paler than +before. + +"Give you the worst floggin' a boy ever had. I'd do it now if there +wasn't so much work to be got through." + +Sam had sufficient sense to know that all his pleadings for mercy would +be in vain, and he held his peace until Phil returned with a long coil +of rope which had been used as a boat's painter. + +One of the beams at the end of the barn served as a post to which to +lash the prisoner, and here the amateur detective was made fast in such +a skillful manner that he could not so much as move his arms. + +"Shall we gag him now?" Phil asked, and Long Jim replied: + +"No, there's time enough. + +"He can't make any one hear if he yells his best, an' I've got a little +business to settle before he's trussed up for good." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +_MISSING._ + + +When Dan informed Teddy that Sam was missing, and suggested the +possibility of the burglars having gotten him in their power, both the +boys were decidedly alarmed; but the matter ceased to appear as serious +after it had been discussed in all its bearings. + +"Long Jim wouldn't have dared to spirit him away when there are so many +people around," Teddy said, after a long silence, during which he was +trying to imagine what Sam might have done. "Besides, what would be the +good of taking him if we were left behind?" + +"Perhaps they count on hauling us in, too." + +"That isn't to be thought of for a moment. They don't want to burden +themselves with a lot of boys when every effort must be made to get the +stolen property out of this section of the country before they are +discovered." + +"I'll allow all that sounds reasonable, but where is Sam?" + +"Of course I don't know. Do you think he would dare to go down the +river again after we landed?" + +"No, indeed; he's too much of a coward for that. If there's been any +funny business it was done when the men got back." + +"Then we have no need to worry, for there are hundreds of people on the +bank of the creek all the time, an' Sam would know enough to yell if +anybody tried to steal him." + +The idea that the amateur detective might be stolen seemed so comical to +Dan that he gave way to mirth, and what had promised to be a most +sorrowful visit speedily became a merry one. + +"He had permission to remain away from the exhibition building during +the rest of the day," Teddy finally said, "an' most likely he's goin' to +take advantage of it by roaming around the grounds, exercising his +detective faculties. He'll turn up at the museum to-night all right, +with a big yarn to tell about his supposed adventures." + +"I reckon you're right; but I did get a little rattled when his boss +asked me where he was. I'll come back this way when it's time to go to +supper." + +"Wait a minute. I'm mighty hungry now, an' business has been so good +that I can afford to treat to sandwiches an' lemonade, if you'll go with +me over to the grand stand. I'll bring you back something, Tim," he +added, as he leaped over the railing. + +Dan said he could remain away half an hour from the rifle exhibit, and +Teddy was now so easy in mind concerning money matters that he resolved +to have thirty minutes of sport. + +The boys first made a tour of that portion of the grounds where the +fakirs were congregated, stopping a moment to see the whip dealer +lashing a pine stake to show the quality of his goods, and then watching +the "Great African Dodger," who thrust his woolly head through an +aperture in a canvas screen for all those to throw balls at who were +inclined to pay the price. + +Then they stopped at the "envelope game," where were spread on a stand a +large collection of cheap, gaudy goods, each bearing a printed number, +every one supposed to correspond with those contained in a box of +envelopes, and this fakir was doing a big business, as was shown by the +fact that he could afford to hire a barker, who cried continually at the +full strength of his lungs: + +"Come up now, and try your luck! Here's where we have all prizes and no +blanks! Ten cents buys an envelope, with the privilege of drawing for +yourself, so there can be no job put up against you, and every number +calls for some one of the many valuable articles in the layout. Here's a +gentleman who spends only ten cents and gets a pair of those beautiful, +triple-plated, double-expansion, fine pure metal cuff buttons, worth two +dollars at some stores!" + +"Come on!" Dan said, impatiently. "That fellow is almost as big a snide +as Hazelton." + +"How do you make that out? I can see a lot of things that cost more than +a dollar. Look at the silver watch, and the revolver." + +"That may be all very well; but no one except a fellow who is interested +in the business gets any of those articles." + +"You can select any envelope you choose." + +"That's right; but the ones with the numbers calling for the big prizes +are lying flat in the box where nobody can get them. If you should +accuse the man of cheating he would turn the whole thing upside down, +and then, of course, they could be found. Here comes a fellow who I know +is cappin' for that fakir. Watch how he does it." + +The apparent stranger approached the stand, and after some talk as to +how the game was run, invested ten cents. + +The man did not open the envelope he drew; but handed it to the fakir, +who, pretending to look at the card it contained, shouted: + +"Number fifty-four. The gentleman has drawn that beautiful solid silver +watch worth fifty dollars, and I will give him thirty for his bargain." + +The stranger showed his prize to the crowd that clustered around him, +and business was increased wonderfully, for it had apparently been +proven that the game was conducted fairly. + +"Now watch him," Dan said, as the stranger walked away with his prize +ostentatiously displayed, and the two boys followed a short distance +off, until they saw him halt behind a booth, where he turned the article +won over to a barker who had approached. + +"That's the way it is done," Dan said, "and when we come back you'll see +the same watch on the layout." + +Teddy was rapidly being initiated in the tricks of the fakirs, and the +more he saw the more firmly was he resolved not to follow the business +longer than the present week, although he believed his own game to be an +honest one. + +The cheap jewelry dealer; the man who had been selling the remnants of a +stock of knives made by a manufacturer who "had bankrupted himself by +putting into them too expensive material;" the fakir with the dolls +which were to be knocked down by balls thrown from a certain distance, +with a prize of one cigar if the customer could tumble two over, and the +peanut-candy dealer were visited in turn, and then the boys were +attracted by the sound of Hazelton's voice. + +He was plying his peculiar trade again, and by the appearance of the +crowd was meeting with great success. + +"Let's see how he gets out of it this time," Teddy suggested, and Dan +agreed. + +The fakir had arrived at that point where he was giving away the +supposed watches, and the boys listened until they saw his preparations +for departure. + +"What beats me is how he gets clear every time," Dan whispered. "I +should think after he had swindled four or five hundred, some of them +would lay for a chance to get even with him." + +"He says they do, an' that's why he left his satchel with me." + +Hazelton recognized the boys just as he was telling that Nathan +Hargreaves might possibly act as his agent after the close of the fair, +and nodded pleasantly, as he gathered up the reins; but this was one of +the occasions when he was not to be allowed to go scot free. + +Two stalwart-looking fellows were standing near the head of the horse, +and when the fakir would have driven off they seized the bridle, one of +them shouting: + +"Come down with that money! This is the second time I've seen you do us +countrymen up to-day, and now you've got to square things." + +Hazelton swung his whip around, striking the speaker full in the face, +and causing the horse to plunge and rear, but yet the fellows kept their +hold. + +The whip was pulled from the fakir's hand, and in an instant it appeared +as if a riot had begun. Those who had been content to keep secret the +fact of having been swindled now grew bold as they saw there was a +leader in the movement, and more than a hundred leaped forward to seize +the representative of the alleged jewelry manufacturers. + +"He'll be killed!" Teddy shouted, and would have attempted to go to the +assistance of the man who had been kind to him, despite the fact that he +could not have aided him in any way against so many; but for the fact +that Dan pulled him back, as he shouted: + +"Can't you see that it would be fifty to one if you should go in that +crowd? We couldn't help him, and what's the use of gettin' a big lickin' +for nothing? Besides, what would become of your business if the people +here thought you were his partner?" + +Before Dan ceased speaking Teddy realized how useless would be any +effort of his, and he remained passive, trying to get a glimpse of the +ill-fated fakir. + +The numbers who beset him completely hid Hazelton from view. The +carriage had been overturned by the first desperate rush of the victims, +and the horse was clearing a space around himself by the free use of his +heels. + +"They'll commit murder!" Teddy cried. + +"I don't believe it'll be quite as bad as that; but he won't be likely +to give away any more lockets while this fair lasts." + +As a matter of fact, Hazelton was not left to fight the battle alone. +Like every other fakir engaged in that peculiar business, he had several +partners whose duty it was to mingle with the crowd for the purpose of +intimidating any who might be disposed to make trouble, and these had +closed in upon him, while some of the more timid spectators shouted for +the constables. + +[Illustration: "Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold +of us it'll be a bad job all around!"] + +Once Teddy caught a glimpse of the unfortunate man; his glossy hat was +gone, his clothing torn, and his face covered with blood. + +"I can see him now!" he cried, "and it looks as if they had about used +him up, for----" + +Before he could finish the sentence a stranger rushed toward him, and +showing the familiar black satchel in his hand, said hurriedly: + +"Get out of here with that. Hazelton will see you some time this +evening. Don't stop a minute!" + +Before the boy could reply the stranger was forcing his way through the +struggling, yelling crowd, in order to aid his partner, and Teddy said +in dismay: + +"Now we are in a muss. Here is all his money, an' if anybody sees us +with it we'll have a tough time." + +"You can't throw it away, an' we must sneak off," Dan said, and the +expression on his face told how distressed he was that such a +responsibility had been thrust upon them. + +"Shall we go back to the stand?" + +"No, that would never do, for then they would be sure to vent their +anger on you. Go up to the museum; Mr. Sweet knows Hazelton, an' may be +willin' to help him by keeping the satchel till the row is over." + +These words had been spoken as the boys were trying to make their way +through the fringe of spectators which had hemmed them in since the +fight began, and after some difficulty they succeeded; but at the same +moment one of the combatants, who had received more than his share of +punishment, emerged close by their side. + +He saw Hazelton's satchel, and recognized it. + +"Come here, fellows! two little villains are making off with the money! +That's what we want!" + +He at once started in pursuit, as did several others, and Dan cried, as +he helped carry the burden: + +"Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold of us it'll be +a bad job all around!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +_A TERRIBLE NIGHT._ + + +At just about the same moment when Teddy and Dan were running with +Hazelton's money at full speed toward the museum tent, with the chance +of escape very much against them, Sam was in a decidedly painful frame +of mind. + +After he had been securely tied the two men conversed in low tones for +several minutes, and then, as if having arrived at some definite +conclusion, began to make preparations for leaving the place. + +At the same spot where Sam had been interrupted while scraping away the +dirt they proceeded to dig with a shovel which Phil procured from +somewhere outside the building, and during this labor the prisoner could +hear fragments of the conversation. + +Once Long Jim ceased his work long enough to say: + +"When you come to look at the matter quietly it doesn't seem as if we'd +got into sich a very bad scrape. You can manage to bring the rest of +the stuff down the creek between now an' Friday mornin' and I've got a +plan for givin' anybody who may come after us a good clue to the boy's +disappearance." + +Phil made some remark which Sam could not hear, and his companion +replied in a louder tone: + +"It can all be done so's to make folks think we've gone up the creek, +an' we've got to lay low for a while, which won't be a hard job while +the weather is warm." + +"But I don't like the idea of totin' that cub with us so long." + +"I'll take care of him, an' will make him earn his board, or somethin's +bound to break." + +From this time until several packages were unearthed Sam could hear +nothing; but what had already been said was sufficient to convince him +that he was to have a very unpleasant experience, and for at least the +hundredth time he fervently wished he had never so much as heard of +detective work. + +After the goods had been brought to light the earth was replaced in the +excavation and pounded down carefully. Then fully half an hour was spent +digging in different places, probably for the purpose of misleading any +one who might come there in search of plunder, for Phil said in a tone +of satisfaction as he ceased the apparently aimless labor: + +"It'll take at least a day before all of these suspicious looking spots +have been investigated, an' in the meanwhile, unless we're chumps, we +shall know what's goin' on. I'll take one load to the boat; make sure +the coast is clear, an' then the three of us can carry the balance. Have +the boy ready for a quick move, an' see to it that he can't give an +alarm." + +"I'll knock his head off if he so much as thinks of such a thing," and +as Phil disappeared with a portion of the plunder Long Jim began to +unfasten Sam's bonds, saying as he did so: + +"We've made up our minds to hold you with us a few days 'cause you're +sich jolly company. If you obey orders an' keep your mouth shut there's +a chance of gettin' outer this scrape mighty easy; but I'd slit your +throat in a jiffy if you tried to give us the slip or made any noise." + +Sam made no reply; but his captor could see very plainly that the boy +was nearly paralyzed with fright, and it was safe to infer he would +follow the instructions given to the letter. + +Phil returned in a very short time and reported: + +"The coast is clear. There's not a craft to be seen on the creek, an' we +can leave without danger." + +The rope had been removed from Sam's limbs, and Long Jim proceeded to +load him down with bundles until he staggered under the weight. + +"Now, see that you walk a chalk line," the burglar said, fiercely. +"Foller Phil, an' I'll keep behind to make sure there are no tricks +played. Remember what I promised!" + +The men could carry the remainder of the goods in one load, and the +three went out of the barn hurriedly, Sam not daring to so much as lift +his eyes from the ground lest Long Jim's threat should be carried into +execution. + +Arriving at the water's edge the boat was loaded, the prisoner ordered +to take his place at the oars, and then the final preparations were +made. + +Phil uncovered the boat in which Sam had come, launched and overturned +her. Then taking the hat from the unresisting boy's head, threw it far +out in the channel, afterward giving the little craft a shove which sent +her a long distance from the shore. Next the two oars were sent after +the hat, and Phil said with a laugh: + +"The current ain't very strong; but with the aid of the wind I reckon +that stuff will drift up to the fair grounds before dark." + +Sam's despair was already so great that it did not seem as if it could +be increased; but the last vestige of hope fled when he realized that +these things had been done in order to make it appear as if he were +dead. + +"Teddy and Dan won't think of huntin' for me after the boat is found," +he thought, "an' these men are sure to kill me before this scrape is +over!" + +The two burglars seated themselves comfortably in the stern-sheets, the +packages being placed at the bow to trim the craft properly, and Long +Jim said, sternly: + +"You've been showin' off your skill as an oarsman for two or three days, +an' we want you to do it now. Put in your best licks, for it'll be tough +if we don't get through the water mighty fast." + +Even Sam's worst enemy would have pitied him at this moment. No galley +slave chained to his seat could have been more utterly helpless, and he +exerted himself to the utmost in order to please those who professed to +be so willing to punish or kill. + +Every stroke of the oars took them farther away from the fair grounds, +and each puff of wind carried the evidences of the prisoner's death +nearer the only ones who might take the trouble to search for him. + +Not until fully an hour had passed did the burglars give any sign of a +desire to end the journey, and then Long Jim said: + +"We must be six miles from the fair grounds by this time, an' that is as +far as you'll want to pull to-night, Phil. There should be plenty of +good hidin'-places in this bit of woods, an' I think we'd better haul +up." + +"All right. Steer her into that ditch over there, an' we'll look +around." + +Thus far in his experience as a detective this was the only thing Sam +had had for which to be thankful. His arms were so tired that it seemed +as if he could not have pulled another stroke, and his clothes were +literally wet from the perspiration that came from his body. + +Phil went ashore, leaving his companion to watch the almost exhausted +prisoner, and in a few moments the former shouted: + +"Load that cub up, an' bring him over here. This is a capital place to +locate in for a couple of days." + +Staggering under the heavy burden Long Jim placed on his shoulders the +amateur detective was forced on through the underbrush in advance of his +captor until the two arrived at a perfect tangle of cedars. + +Phil returned to the boat for the remainder of the goods, and all the +plunder was placed inside the thicket where the foliage was so dense +that one might have passed within a few feet of the spot and not had any +suspicion men were hidden there. + +A tiny brook ran past one side of the hiding-place, and Sam took +advantage of the opportunity to check his raging thirst while the men +were laying plans for the future. + +"I'll go back soon after sunset," Phil said, as he lighted his pipe and +proceeded to make himself comfortable. "We can leave the boy here to +look out for the stuff, an' you'd better come with me up to the barn +so's to learn if any one visits the place. I shall be back before +morning, an' you can let me know if the coast is clear." + +"Shall you try to finish the job we were talkin' about?" + +"No; things are so hot jest now that it won't pay to take any more risks +than are absolutely necessary. What we want is to get out of this +portion of the country as soon as possible." + +"All right. I'll leave you to manage the rest of the business, an' +promise to follow orders." + +"I think it's about time you said that, Jim. If my plans had been +carried out in the first place we wouldn't be in sich a muss; but could +be havin' the cream of the pickin's at the fair." + +"Well, what's the use of harpin' on that all the time? The thing has +been done, an' we've got to make the best of it. Do you think it'll be +safe to leave this cub here alone while we're away?" + +"It will be when I get through with him," was the grim reply, and Sam, +terrified by the vagueness of this remark, more even than he had been by +the plain language previously used, cried, piteously: + +"Please don't leave me here alone to-night! I'll pull the boat, an' do +everything you say, without so much as yippin'." + +"Them as starts out in the detective business have to take what comes, +'specially when their own foolishness brings it about. You joined our +party of your own accord, my son, an' must put up with what we choose to +give." + +Sam said nothing more. He was reaping what he had sowed, and decided +that matters could not be much worse even if he was caught trying to +escape, therefore he resolved to take desperate chances in an effort to +give his captors the slip. + +There was no opportunity to make the attempt, on this night at least, +for when Phil had finished smoking he proceeded in a very methodical +manner to secure the prisoner. + +Sam was ordered to seat himself on the ground, with his back to the +trunk of a cedar-tree, and he was fastened skillfully, with his elbows +tied back in such a manner that he could not bring his hands together. +Both feet were bound, and then, with a sudden movement, Phil forced the +boy's mouth open, shoving into it a short piece of pine wood about an +inch and a half in diameter. + +This was secured in such a manner that the prisoner could not free +himself from the uncomfortable bridle, neither would it be possible for +him to make the slightest outcry. + +"Now, don't shout for help while we are gone, an' unless the bears eat +you up we shall meet again about daybreak," Phil said, with a coarse +laugh as he and Jim went out of the thicket toward the creek. + +Poor Sam had never thought of the possibility that there might be bears +in this section of the country until the burglar suggested it, and he +was so terrified as not to realize it was impossible there could be any +dangerous animals in such a thickly-settled portion of the State. + +Therefore, in addition to the danger to be apprehended from his captors, +he had constantly before his mind this new cause for fear. The rustling +of the leaves, the flight of a bird as it sought a perch for the night, +or the soughing of the wind among the branches were to him so many +proofs that a violent death would be his before morning. + +If the beginning of the hours of darkness was so terrible it can well be +fancied how he suffered before another day dawned. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +_A NARROW ESCAPE._ + + +Neither Teddy nor Dan had any hope of reaching the museum tent before +their pursuers could overtake them, and although both knew what might be +the result if they were taken with the jewelry fakir's money and goods +in their possession, they did not for a moment think of abandoning the +property. + +The cries of those in the rear attracted the attention of the spectators +elsewhere on the grounds, and without waiting to learn the cause of the +trouble hundreds of men and boys joined in the chase, all shouting at +the full strength of their lungs: + +"Stop thief! Stop thief!" + +The distance to be traversed was nearly a quarter of a mile; but the +many turns the boys were forced to make in order to avoid those who were +ready to capture them doubled this, and they were yet very far from the +goal when a burly, red-faced man jumped in front of them. + +It seemed as if capture was inevitable; but Teddy resorted to the last +means of defense, and was successful. + +Letting go his hold of the satchel he lowered his head, leaped forward +with full force, striking the officious stranger full in the stomach. + +The man, not anticipating such an attack at a moment when he almost had +his hands upon the supposed thieves, was bowled over like a nine-pin, +and, jumping quickly aside, Teddy caught hold of the satchel once more. + +By this time both the boys were so nearly winded that speech was well +nigh impossible; but Dan managed to gasp admiringly: + +"You're a dandy, old fellow," and then, with one supreme effort, +increased his pace a trifle. + +It was fortunate that there were no spectators in front of Mr. Sweet's +tent when the boys came in sight of it. The barker was lounging in a +chair outside, and on catching a glimpse of the boys recognized them +immediately. + +The crowd in pursuit would have told a duller man than he professed to +be that there had been some serious trouble, and, running to meet the +boys as if to intercept them, he cried: + +"Circle around the canvas, an' crawl underneath, so's that gang won't +see where you've gone!" + +The fugitives understood the scheme at once, and making a short detour +as if to avoid him, dashed under the guy-ropes at one end, gaining the +interior of the tent before the pursuers arrived. + +Mr. Sweet had just started toward the flap to ascertain the cause of the +commotion when the boys entered, and, thinking himself about to be +attacked, leaped quickly back as he seized an ironbound stake. + +"Oh, it's you, eh?" he said, on recognizing the intruders. "What's up? +Are you the thieves they're yellin' for?" + +Teddy was hardly able to speak; but he held up the satchel, as he +panted: + +"Hazelton's--they're killin' him--he--wants--this--saved." + +"Yes, I understand it now. Jump into the wagon an' get under the stuff +there. I'll take the valise. Them kind of fakirs are bound to come to +grief sooner or later, an' honest people get into a muss tryin' to help +'em. I'd like to see the fair where them kinds of games wasn't allowed; +but don't s'pose I ever shall, although it's always promised." + +While Mr. Sweet had been grumbling, and at the same time concealing the +satchel under the box containing the snakes, the boys were doing their +best to hide themselves beneath the litter of ropes and canvas which had +been carelessly thrown into the wagon. + +In the meantime the pursuers came up, discovered the unpleasant fact +that the fugitives were no longer in sight, and began to parley with the +barker. + +"I tried to catch 'em," the boys heard the latter say; "but they got +around the tent before I had time to find out what the matter was." + +"They've gone inside!" one of the crowd shouted. "Don't let's allow +swindlers to get the best of us so easy!" + +"That's the way to talk!" another cried. "We'll have 'em out if the show +has to come down!" + +At this moment Mr. Sweet, looking calm and undisturbed, emerged from the +flap. + +"Bring out them boys, or down comes your tent!" a man yelled. + +"I reckon the wisest plan for you to pursue is to wait till I find out +what all this means," the proprietor of the museum said loudly, at the +same time beckoning the barker and the clown to his side. "It looks to +me as if this was the same gang who came here last night tryin' to clean +us out, an' warrants for their arrest are in the hands of the constables +now. I paid one hundred dollars for the privilege of exhibitin' here, +an' that means I'm to have all the protection the managers of this fair +and the authorities of the town can give me. I've warned you off; but if +you still want to finish up the work of last night, an' the constables +don't come in time, there are three of us here who are good for twice +that number of your gang, an' when a man gets a tap over the head with +one of these he's not in it any longer!" + +Mr. Sweet flourished the heavy stake as he spoke, and his employes +showed that they were armed in the same manner. + +"We didn't come to disturb you," one of the crowd said, in a milder +tone, as the greater number fell back before the threats made of +invoking the aid of the law. "All we want is a valise two boys brought +here, for in it is quite a pile of our money." + +"How did they get it from you?" the proprietor of the museum asked for +the purpose of gaining time in the hope the constables would put in an +appearance. + +"We were swindled by a jewelry agent, an' are goin' to get back our +own." + +"Oh, you are, eh? Well, I haven't got the stuff; but if you allow +yourselves to be swindled, will you help matters by turning thieves? You +can sue the man who has done you up; but there's a penalty for stealing, +as you will find out if you keep on in this way." + +The less impetuous among the pursuers understood that the showman was +speaking only the truth, and, now that they had an opportunity for +reflection, began to be ashamed of the part they were playing. One by +one walked away without making any further remonstrance, and in a short +time only a dozen or so remained in front of the tent. + +All these were young men, and several had been drinking, therefore the +danger was not yet past. + +"You stand here and brain the first man who attempts to enter," Mr. +Sweet said, as he disappeared inside the tent. Then hurrying to where +Teddy and Dan were hidden, he whispered: + +"It may be possible that in order to avoid a row I shall be obliged to +let this gang in. There is no one behind the canvas, and you can slip +out readily. Go directly back where you belong, an' if anybody accuses +you of being the boys who brought away the valise deny it. I'm goin' to +make a big bluff about lookin' for constables, an' the minute you hear +me talking, move lively." + +"What about Hazelton's money?" Teddy asked. + +"He'll find it here when he dares to come for it." + +An instant later the fugitives heard him say from the outside: + +"I propose to call for help in case you very respectable young gentleman +should take a notion to break in and steal." + +"All we ask is that you'll turn out them boys," one of the party +replied, angrily, "for, whether it's stealing or not, we're bound to +have that fakir's money." + +"That part of it is nothing to me. There are no boys inside, an' if you +want to go in one at a time, so there'll be no chance of gettin' the +best of me an' destroyin' my property, I don't think there'll be any +objection made." + +"Now's our time before they come?" Dan whispered, as he slipped softly +down from the wagon, and Teddy followed. + +It was but the work of a moment to raise the canvas and step out. There +was absolutely no one in sight. The tent had been erected near the edge +of the grounds, and there was nothing in the vicinity to attract the +sightseers. + +"We'll get over the fence, an' come in through the main gate. It's +better to pay for admission than to let people suspect we were the ones +who have been chased." + +"Go on; I'll stay close at your heels." + +Five minutes later they were walking along the dusty road looking as +innocent as possible, and feeling comparatively safe. + +"Do you suppose any one will know us?" Teddy asked after they had +trudged some distance in silence. + +"There can't be much danger of that. All the crowd saw were our backs, +and, besides, after those fellows cool off they'll be ashamed of +themselves. I don't reckon you'll have any trouble; but I may get it hot +from the boss because I've been away so long." + +"I guess there won't be much danger of that; but if anything should +happen come to my stand. After what has happened I reckon I can afford +to whack up with you on some of the profits, especially since every one +says to-morrow is to be such a big day. Where do you suppose Hazelton +is?" + +"He must have had a chance to get off when the men started for us; but +I'll bet he don't look as nice as he did this morning." + +By this time the boys were at the ticket-office, and, paying the price +of admission, they walked into the inclosure without attracting the +slightest attention. + +On the way to his place of business Teddy chanced to think of the errand +on which they had started out, and he bought a generous supply of +sandwiches for Dan, Tim, and himself. + +When the two arrived at the cane-board business was at its height, and +the clerk and his assistant were having quite as much as they could do +to attend to the customers. + +This saved Teddy the necessity of entering into any explanation while +strangers were near, and he immediately went to work, not having an idle +moment until nearly nightfall, when the greater portion of the visitors +had departed. + +"Where did you and Dan go that you staid away so long?" Tim asked as he +and Teddy began to pack up the stock of canes and knives. + +"Oh, it's a long story; I'll tell you all about it while we are eating +supper," Teddy replied, with a significant look in the direction of the +assistant. + +Tim understood that there was some secret regarding the matter, and he +at once proceeded to get rid of a possible eavesdropper by saying to the +assistant: + +"Here's the money I promised. There's no need of your stayin' any +longer." + +"Shall I come to work in the morning?" + +Tim looked toward his employer, and the latter said: + +"Yes, of course, if it is pleasant weather. Everybody says there'll be a +bigger crowd than ever, an' I reckon we shall have work enough for all +hands." + +The boy had but just taken his departure when Dan approached, looking +very mournful. + +"Have you been bounced?" Teddy cried, excitedly. + +"Not a bit of it; but look here," and Dan held up a straw hat. "That's +poor Sam's! His boat has been found bottom up, an' this, with one of the +oars, was fished out of the creek a few moments ago. While we were +talking rough about him the poor boy was drowning!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +_THE ARREST._ + + +Teddy was dazed by the tidings and apparent proof of Sam's death. +Without being able to explain why, it seemed as if the amateur detective +was not the sort of a boy who might be expected to depart this life +suddenly, and the news saddened him wonderfully. + +"Just think," he said, "the poor fellow wouldn't try to save the women +because of the danger of approaching a drowning person, and in such a +short time he himself is at the bottom of the creek." + +"If he has got any folks some word ought to be sent to them." + +"I never heard him say whether he had or not. Will any one search for +the body?" + +"The man who represents the Davis Company says he will have men out in +the morning, if it is possible to hire any; if not, there will be plenty +wanting a job by Saturday, and he can then get all he wants. It's bound +to be a long search, for there's no telling where the boat capsized." + +Nothing save Sam's untimely fate was spoken of during the time they were +packing up the goods and carrying them to the tent, and then Mr. Sweet, +after having been told the sad news, said, without commenting upon it: + +"You boys had better go to supper now, an' get back before dark, for +there's no knowin' but that some of those fellows who called on me may +be waiting to take their revenge out on you." + +"How did you get rid of them?" Dan asked. + +"That part of it was as easy as rollin' off a log, after you boys were +out of sight. I let 'em in one at a time, an' the chumps never tumbled +to the fact that you had gone under the canvas. They came to the +conclusion you must have climbed over the fence, an' we didn't take the +trouble to show them the mistake. It was a close shave, though. At one +time, when I was talkin' so loud about stealing, I thought we'd have the +toughest kind of a row." + +"Is the money all right?" + +"It's jest where I left it, an' won't be touched till he comes to claim +it, unless you boys want to take charge of the property." + +"Indeed we don't," Teddy replied, quickly. "I've had all I want of such +caretaking." + +"Then go to supper, an' hurry back." + +The boys waited only long enough to stow their goods in the wagon, and +then Mr. Sweet's advice was acted upon. + +As a matter of course Tim wanted to know what the proprietor of the +museum had been talking about, and as they were walking across the +grounds Teddy told the whole story, concluding by saying: + +"It was a little the worst scrape I ever got into; but after the money +had been placed in our hands, and the man who left it went off, we +couldn't do different from what we did." + +"That Hazelton had no business to get you into such a row," Tim replied, +indignantly. "Why didn't he hang on to the stuff, an' take his lickin' +like a man?" + +"I don't think he knew it was to be given to us. The fellow who did it +had seen him leave the satchel with us once, most likely, an' when there +was danger of being robbed, believed we could look out for it again. +It's the last time such a thing will happen, for I'm going to tell +Hazelton that I don't want to be mixed up in his business." + +At this point Dan changed the subject of conversation by speculating +upon the way in which Sam met his death, and this topic was such a +mournful one that nothing else was thought of until the party returned +to the tent once more. + +Then came the question of how much money had been taken in during the +day, and after figuring up the amount he had spent, Teddy reckoned the +cash on hand, announcing the result as follows: + +"Countin' what I paid out, we've taken sixty-one dollars an' seventy +cents since morning. It don't seem reasonable, but a feller has to +believe it after seein' the money." + +"You'll have a much better trade to-morrow, if it is fair, and you're +not recognized as one of the boys who helped to get Hazelton's money +away," Mr. Sweet said, cheerily. "I predict that the receipts will +figure up hard on to a hundred dollars." + +Teddy gasped like a person who is suddenly submerged in cold water at +the thought of earning so much, and he realized that if such should be +the case he would be able to assist his mother very materially. + +"I'll pay you, Tim, before I get so dazzled as to forget it," he said, +with a laugh, and the clerk felt almost as rich as his employer when he +received six dollars and seventeen cents for a day's labor which came +very near being sport. + +"I only wish the fair held on for six months," he said gleefully. "It +seems too bad that there are only two days more, for Saturday never +counts." + +"You can go to the Holtown fair, and try it for yourself. I'll give you +what stock we have left on hand." + +"Then I'll do it," Tim replied, emphatically, and straightway he began +to speculate as to the enormous amount of money he would earn. + +Teddy tied his money in as compact a package as possible, intending to +give it to his mother when she should arrive on the morrow, and Mr. +Sweet had advised that all hands "turn in" early, when the flap was +raised, admitting a man who appeared to be covered with adhesive plaster +and bandages. + +Not until the newcomer had approached within the circle of light cast by +the lantern did the occupants of the tent recognize him as the jewelry +fakir, and Teddy cried in surprise: + +"Why, Mr. Hazelton! We didn't expect to see you to-night!" + +"Did you think I was dead?" + +"It looked as if you would be killed for a certainty, and you did get +pretty well done up." + +"Yes; as the reports of the prize fights put it, 'I'm badly disfigured, +but still in the ring.' Was the money taken away all right?" + +"Mr. Sweet has hidden it." + +"And how did you come out of the scrape?" + +"If it hadn't been for the folks here we should have fared about the +same as you did." + +"I'm sorry, my boy, that you were dragged into the matter, and it +wouldn't have happened if I'd understood what Kelly was going to do. He +knew you could be trusted, and so turned it over; but it was a mean +situation to put you in." + +"It wasn't pleasant for any of us," Mr. Sweet said; "but you can thank +the boys for hanging on to the bag as if it had been their own. Most +fellows of their age would have dropped it long before reaching here. +How did you get off?" + +"When the cry was raised that the money had gone the greater portion of +the crowd started in pursuit, an' my partners and I managed to hold our +own until a couple of constables came up. They took charge of the team, +and gave us a chance to slip through the gates." + +"What are you going to do now? Try it to-morrow?" + +"With this face? Well, I should say not. There is a fellow here who has +bought my right to the privilege, and I shall leave Peach Bottom early +in the morning." + +"That's about the best thing you can do, and I'd advise that you don't +spend much time out of doors until then." + +"I'm not intending to. It was necessary to come here, and, unless you +object, I'll stay a while so's they will have time to sober up a bit." + +"You're welcome to what we've got, even if I don't like your way of +doing business." + +"I want to straighten matters with the boys, and if they----" + +Hazelton did not finish the sentence, for at that moment the canvas flap +was pushed aside and a man entered with an unmistakable air of +authority. + +"Hold on there, friend," Mr. Sweet shouted. "We don't allow visitors at +this time of night." + +"I understand that, but reckon you won't make any very big kick when I +tell you that I'm one of the deputy sheriffs of this county, and have +come to serve a warrant." + +"On whom?" + +"Frank Hazelton, who claims to be an agent for a firm of jewelry +manufacturers. I believe you're the man," he added, approaching the +disfigured fakir. + +"You've got that part of it straight enough, but what am I to be +arrested for?" + +"You are suspected of being concerned in the burglary which was +committed in this town last night." + +Hazelton did not express nearly as much surprise as the boys, who were +really dazed by the announcement. + +"So Hargreaves has finally succeeded," the fakir said half to himself, +and the officer replied, quickly: + +"This has nothing to do with old Nathan's affair, although it does look +as if the two burglaries were committed by the same person." + +Hazelton remained silent several seconds, during which time the sheriff +waited patiently for him to say he was ready to go, and then he asked: + +"Can I speak to one of these boys in private. It has nothing to do with +the charge, but I want him to aid me in getting a good lawyer." + +"I am sorry to say I must hear all that is talked about, however +trifling it may be." + +"Well, I don't suppose it can make much difference," and without rising +from his seat, Hazelton continued, "Teddy, you believe I had nothing to +do with this thing?" + +"I can tell what I heard those----" + +"Don't tell anything yet a while; at least, not now. I want you to do +this for me: After the fair closes go to that merchant who was so kind +to you, and explain to him the whole affair, including your suspicions. +Ask him to direct you to the best attorney in the county; get all the +money from Mr. Sweet that may be needed, and pay the lawyer's fee. Send +him to me as soon afterward as possible. It is nothing more serious than +lying in jail a few days, and that won't be such a great hardship, now +I've got this face on me." + +"Shall I----" + +"There is no need of saying anything more," Hazelton interrupted, +fearing the boy was about to speak of the money the proprietor of the +museum had hidden. "The merchant will understand and advise if you tell +him everything--that is, I think he will; but in case he refuses, talk +with some one else whom you can trust." + +As he finished speaking the fakir arose to his feet, motioned to the +officer, and walked directly out of the tent without so much as bidding +the others goodby. + +No one spoke until after he had been absent several minutes, and then +Teddy asked, with a long-drawn sigh: + +"Do you think he will come out all right, Mr. Sweet?" + +"That's hard to say, for I don't know how much proof they may have +against him. It's his business that has done a great deal toward +inducing a magistrate to issue the warrant, for once a man shows himself +to be a swindler, anything else can readily be believed of him." + +"But what about his money?" Dan asked. + +"That is to be handed over to Teddy." + +"What have I got to do with it?" the boy asked, in amazement. + +"He told us that as plainly as he dared to talk before the officer, and +we'll count it out, after which his stock in trade shall be buried, for +I want nothing to do with it." + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +_A PROPOSITION._ + + +Teddy had the most decided objections to taking charge of Hazelton's +money, and for several reasons. In the first place he did not want to +have the responsibility, and again, the fact of its being in his +possession seemed to make him a partner in the business. + +Mr. Sweet was determined, however. He insisted that Hazelton had stated +this as plainly as was possible under the circumstances, and, despite +the boy's protests, immediately began the transfer. + +"It shall be done in such a way that he can't accuse you of having taken +any," the proprietor said, as he pulled the satchel from its +hiding-place and broke the lock open with a hatchet. "We'll count it in +the presence of all hands, and each one shall give Teddy a written +statement of how much was found." + +An exclamation of surprise burst from Tim's lips as the receptacle was +spread out on the ground, for it appeared to be literally crammed with +money. + +Mr. Sweet separated the silver from the bank notes, spreading both on +the ground where they could be seen by every person present, and then he +counted them slowly, taking care that the spectators were following his +every movement. + +"I make it three hundred an' forty-eight dollars," he announced. "If +there's anybody here who ain't sure that's right, say so now." + +Each member of the party had seen the amount counted, and agreed with +the result as declared by Mr. Sweet, who forthwith wrote the following: + + We, the undersigned, have seen a valise belonging to Frank + Hazelton broken open, and certify that three hundred and + forty-eight dollars, the only money found therein, was handed + by Jacob Sweet to Edward Hargreaves in conformance with the + orders, as we understood them, from the said Frank Hazelton. + +"Now I want every one to sign that," Mr. Sweet said, as he handed his +lead-pencil first to the barker, "and then Teddy and I will have some +proof of the amount." + +It required quite a while for all to conform with the wishes of the +proprietor of the museum, owing to the fact that several of the party +were far from being skillful penmen, but the task was finally +accomplished, and as the money was handed to Teddy, the latter asked, +ruefully: + +"What shall I do with it? I'm afraid of losing so much." + +"That's a risk Hazelton is bound to take. Fasten it in your clothes +somehow, an' be sure you don't get into any row where it can be stolen." + +By the aid of many pins, and with the assistance of both Dan and Tim, +Teddy finally succeeded in disposing of the money about his person in +such a way that it was not an unusual burden, and then Mr. Sweet +insisted that all hands should try to get some rest in order to be fresh +for the supposedly enormous amount of work to be done on the following +day. + +Teddy lay down on the ground with the others, but it was many hours +before his eyes were closed in slumber. Sam's untimely death, the +guardianship of so much money, and his own business affairs all served +to keep his eyes open until nearly midnight, when he fell into a sleep +so troubled by frightful dreams that it was far from being restful. + +It seemed as if he had but just lost consciousness when Mr. Sweet +aroused him with the information that the "big" day of the fair was +breaking. + +"Turn out an' get your breakfast before sunrise, for on this morning the +early bird will pick up many a penny while the lazy ones are yet in bed, +an' fakirs must make hay when the sun shines." + +Teddy was on his feet in an instant, and half an hour later, having +broken his fast, he was at the booth with his clerk and Dan, the latter +volunteering his assistance until the exhibition buildings should be +opened. + +The proprietor of the museum had advised him well; the receipts of the +cane and knife boards were nearly five dollars before more than half of +the booths were in condition for trade, because the trains were running +unusually early in order to accommodate the crowds, and when Dan felt +obliged to leave, business was so good that the proprietor, clerk, and +assistant were all working industriously. + +"If I can get off I'll see you about noon," Dan said, as he walked away, +and Teddy replied: + +"Be sure to come, for mother will be here, and I want you to meet her." + +From that time until nine o'clock the crowd increased in numbers, and as +Teddy said during a lull in business, "it seemed as if the grounds were +so full that no more could get in." + +When Mrs. Hargreaves arrived her son could pay little attention to her, +but he proposed that she should amuse herself by looking at the +different exhibits until nearly noon, when he stated that he would take +an hour off, no matter how great a rush of customers might be around his +booth. + +"I earned sixty dollars yesterday, an' before night I'll have a hundred +more, so there's little doubt that this week's work as a fakir will +enable me to pay all you owe on the house," he whispered, triumphantly, +and his mother walked away, hardly daring to believe what Teddy had told +her. + +During the next hour it seemed as if a steady stream of money was +flowing into the box, and Teddy was feeling confident that Mr. Sweet's +prediction would prove to be correct, when the one especial man he +wanted to see came up with a folded paper in his hand. + +It was the merchant from Waterville, and he said, as he handed the +document to the boy: + +"Here is the receipted bill, and I am more than glad to see you doing so +well." + +"Can I talk with you for five minutes?" Teddy asked, hardly noticing the +paper as he put it in his pocket. + +"As long as you want to. What is the matter? Running out of stock?" + +"Oh, no, your clerk made such a good selection for me that I've got all +I shall need. This is something more important." + +Then Teddy hurriedly told the merchant how and where he had first met +Hazelton; explained fully what the latter's business was; of the +accusations made by Uncle Nathan; what he and Dan had heard and seen, +and concluded by repeating the request made by the fakir as he was led +away to jail. + +"Are you willing to do anything for him?" the boy asked, as his story +was finished. + +"I can't say it is a matter which appeals very strongly to my +sympathies, because of the swindles he perpetrated, but if it is an +unjust accusation something should be done to help him. The one lawyer +above all others who can be of assistance came over with me this +morning. I will see him, and later in the day you shall have a call from +us." + +"Before you go I wish you would take this money," Teddy said, earnestly. +"It is too large an amount for me to carry around, and it will be safe +with you." + +The merchant consented to take charge of Hazelton's ill-gotten gains, +and Teddy felt decidedly relieved when the cash was in another's +keeping, and he had nothing of more value than an acknowledgment of the +same to look after. + +"In this matter I shall recognize no other order than yours," the +merchant said when the transaction was concluded, "and if the fakir +should succeed in regaining his liberty he must come to you for the +necessary document. + +"I don't care how it is fixed so long as the money is not in my hands," +Teddy replied, in a tone of satisfaction, and then he was called upon to +attend to another rush of customers, every one of whom was eager to be +waited upon first. + +Another hour passed, and it was more evident than before that Mr. Sweet +had been correct when he stated the sum which should be taken in at the +cane-board. + +Teddy, having breakfasted early, was so hungry that he was on the point +of going out to buy a supply of sandwiches, when another visitor +arrived. + +This was no less a personage than Uncle Nathan, and he greeted his +nephew with the utmost cordiality, as he said: + +"It looks to me as if you were makin' a power of money here, Teddy. I +had no idea these triflin' games would so attract the people." + +Glad to be on pleasant terms with the old man once more, Teddy stated +that they had been at work very hard since the first train arrived, and +concluded by saying: + +"I took over sixty dollars yesterday, and Mr. Sweet says it'll come near +to a hundred to-day." + +"Sixty dollars!" the old man cried. "Are you telling me the truth, Teddy +Hargreaves?" + +"Of course I am, an' I've got the money in my pocket to prove it." + +"Why, at this rate you'll soon be a rich man, for you don't seem to lose +much of the stock." + +"We buy a good many canes or knives back. When a man puts a ring over +one that he don't want we take it in, and give him five more chances. In +that way there is very little goes out compared to the amount of money +received." + +Uncle Nathan looked around at the players for a moment, and then in a +very confidential tone he whispered: + +"See here, Teddy, don't you want a partner? I'll pay for the stock you +bought, an'----" + +"I've already done that out of yesterday's receipts," Teddy cried. "All +the bills are settled, an' what comes in now is clear profit." + +"But suppose I stood here an' called up the people I know, don't you +think it would make business better?" + +"And if it should, do you think we could attend to more customers? Every +minute I talk with you is so much money lost, for the other fellers +can't pick up rings an' make change fast enough." + +"Does that mean you don't want to go into business with me?" the old man +asked, angrily. + +"No; but it means that there would be no reason for doing such a thing. +I've got no debts, an' there are more customers than can be attended to +on so small a board. If you'd made the proposition last Monday it would +have been different, but now you can't expect me, after taking all the +risk, to divide after the work has been done." + +"Who lent you the money to start, Teddy Hargreaves?" Uncle Nathan cried, +his face growing purple with rage. + +"You did." + +"And how have you repaid such generosity? How----" + +"I gave you three dollars for the use of fifteen two days," was the +prompt reply. + +"But how have you repaid me for remaining inactive after my money was +stolen?" + +"That was something which did not concern me, therefore I had nothing to +repay." + +"It has a great deal to do with you, as shall be shown before this day +is ended, unless you consent to take me as an equal partner in this +enterprise. Your friend in crime has been arrested, and I can swear that +he turned over to you his ill-gotten gains. One word from me at this +time and you will be in the same prison." + +The fact of his having been threatened before made Teddy bold, and he +said, quietly: + +"I won't pay you for holding your tongue, Uncle Nathan, so do whatever +you choose." + +"I will inform the authorities of all I have learned this morning, and +we shall see what the result will be," the old man cried, in a fury, as +he walked away, and despite the bold bearing he had assumed Teddy firmly +believed that if the magistrate who issued the warrant for Hazelton's +arrest should know he was in possession of the fakir's money, he would +be brought before a bar of justice to explain matters. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +WITH THE BURGLARS. + + +It is well to look in upon Sam during his enforced vigil of Wednesday +night. + +For at least two hours after the burglars had departed he thought of +nothing save that he would soon be killed, and, perhaps, devoured by +wild animals. Then the pain in his jaw and limbs became so great, owing +to the tightly bound cords and his inability to move, that his +sufferings overcame the fear to a certain extent, and he had not even +the poor consolation of being able to give vent to an audible groan. + +Notwithstanding the mental and bodily torture he did sleep occasionally +during the night, which appeared to be of twenty-four hours' duration, +and never had he heard a sweeter sound than when his captors approached, +the hum of their voices reaching him before the noise of their +footsteps. + +The burglars were laden with packages of what appeared to be +merchandise, and by the faint light of the coming day Sam could see +that they looked heated and tired. + +"Well, how's our detective?" Long Jim asked, with a laugh, as he threw +himself on the ground by the boy's side. "Has he decided to arrest his +victims, or will he give them a little show of leaving the country?" + +As a matter of course Sam could not make any reply; but the expression +in his eyes must have told of the suffering which he was forced to +endure, for Phil said, as he began to untie the rope holding the gag in +place: + +"There's no need of keepin' him trussed up any longer, an' I reckon +it'll be a relief to have a chance to use his tongue once more." + +Even when he was free the prisoner was unable to do more than roll upon +his side. His limbs were so stiff and cramped that he had no power over +them, and he could not have risen to his feet just at that moment if his +life had depended upon it. + +Jim seemed to think all this was very comical, for he laughed loudly at +the prisoner's helplessness, and suggested that if he intended to follow +the business of a detective to practice remaining in one position in +order to avoid such a complete collapse when fortune should again be so +unkind to him as she had been in this particular case. + +When the burglar's mirth finally ceased the two men lighted their pipes, +and proceeded to enjoy a season of repose after so much fatiguing work, +while Sam was left to recover as best he might. + +Fully half an hour elapsed before he succeeded in crawling to the brook +where he quenched his thirst, and then his one desire was for sleep. + +Stretched out on the ground within a few feet of his captors the +blissful unconsciousness of slumber came upon him, and the sun was high +in the heavens before he awoke. + +Long Jim was seated on the turf, his back against a tree, and a quantity +of food spread out in front of him; but Phil was not in sight. + +"Well, it strikes me you've been takin' things mighty comfortable," the +man said, with a grunt. "Don't give yourself so far over to a life of +pleasure as to forget that I promised to give you the greatest floggin' +of your life before we part, for then you won't be so much surprised +when it comes." + +The sight of the food caused Sam to realize how very hungry he was, and, +regardless of the subject introduced by Jim, he asked, timidly: + +"Can't I have somethin' to eat?" + +"I don't think you can, my son. In the first place you haven't earned +it, an' then, again, my partner an' I may need all the grub we've got on +hand." + +Then, as if reconsidering his determination, the man selected two small +crackers, tossing them to Sam as he cut a slice of boiled ham for +himself. + +"That's more'n you deserve," he said, as the prisoner began to devour +them eagerly; "so don't count on gettin' another bite to-day." + +Sam literally devoured the food, and then went once more to the brook to +wash down the dry repast. + +It seemed as if the crackers increased rather than satisfied his hunger, +and he watched Jim eagerly as the latter finished a generous meal of +meat, cheese, and hard-boiled eggs. + +The burglar lighted his pipe, and paid no attention to the hungry boy, +who now had ample time for reflection. + +He remembered that this was the important day of the fair, and pictured +to himself Teddy and Dan at their work enjoying themselves at the same +time they were making money. Then he thought of what he might be doing +if the detective fever had not taken so firm a hold upon him, and, +despite all efforts to prevent it, the tears coursed down his cheeks, +plowing wide furrows in the dirt with which his face was encrusted. + +This painful revery was not prolonged. Shortly before noon Phil came +into the hiding-place, his face wearing an expression of entire +satisfaction. + +"I reckon we needn't be afraid any one will be here lookin' for us now +our detective has been drowned," he exclaimed. + +"What's up?" Jim asked. + +"Hazelton, the fakir, has been arrested for the burglary at Peach +Bottom, an' men are draggin' the creek to find the body of the boy who +worked for the Davis Boat Company." + +Sam actually shuddered at the thought that people were looking for his +corpse, and it gave him an "uncanny" feeling, this idea that he was +numbered with the dead. + +"When was the arrest made?" Jim asked. + +"Last night. Old Nathan from the Run says the fakir turned over a lot of +money to the boy who was goin' to buy your cane-board, an' it looks very +much as if he would be locked up with the man whom people believe is his +partner." + +"Nothin' said about what the cubs saw at the barn?" + +"Not a word." + +"Then we can count on havin' the balance of this week in which to leave +the country." + +"As much as that, if not more. Another load will get the stuff together; +but I've been thinkin' we'd better bury it here, an' not try to move a +thing for a month or two." + +"In that case we'd be obliged to take that specimen along," and Jim +pointed with a contemptuous gesture toward Sam. "It wouldn't do to let +go of him while there was a chance of his givin' the game away." + +"I'll 'tend to that part of it, an' guarantee he won't be in condition +to make us much trouble," Phil said so confidently that Sam began to +shake as with an ague fit, for it seemed positive to him this burglar +had decided upon his murder. + +"If things were so comfortable like why don't you try to make a dollar, +for I reckon there's a big crowd at the fair?" + +"The grounds are packed; but it ain't exactly safe to do much business," +and Phil told of the assault upon Hazelton. "The whole boilin' of 'em +now think everybody's tryin' to work some swindle," he added, "an' the +consequence is that it would go hard with any feller who should slip up. +We've done enough for one week, an' I'd rather not take chances till +this stuff is off our hands." + +"Do you count on goin' back agin to-day?" + +"What's the use?" + +"I only asked, for you're managin' this whole thing now." + +"My idea was to sneak up alone to-night; take on the balance of the +stuff, an' then lay low till Saturday evenin', when we'll make the big +break." + +"It's goin' to be mighty dull business sittin' here with nothin' to do," +Jim replied, in a tone of complaint. + +"I don't see how we can fix it much quicker, unless we go to-morrow, +while there are so many around." + +It was evident Jim did not relish the idea of leaving everything to his +companion, and the latter so understood the expression on his friend's +face, for he said, angrily: + +"You're cookin' up some foolish scheme now, an' in spite of all I can do +to prevent it we'll probably succeed in gettin' nabbed before matters +are arranged as they should be." + +"Oh, you're too smart, that's what ails you. Take all the soft snaps, +an' leave me here to suck my thumbs without even the chance of movin' +around." + +"If you think it's sich a snap to row up there an' back, why don't you +try your hand." + +"That's jest what I'm willin' to do. Anything's better'n stayin' here, +an' I'd like you to have a taste of it." + +Sam, who was expecting each moment to see the thieves come to blows, +understood at once that this arrangement did not please Phil; but he +made no further objection than to say: + +"If you wasn't so blamed careless I'd like to have you do a share of the +hard work; but it's ten to one you'll contrive to let everybody know you +are there." + +"I may not be so all-fired smart as you think you are, but I ain't quite +a fool. Why, I've managed bigger things than this when you was around +beggin' for something' to eat, 'cause you was too chicken-hearted to do +this kind of work." + +"You'd better not say too much; I've stuck by you when worse men would +have a' given you the cold shake, an' don't intend to take any guff, +especially since I've had sich hard work to get us out of the scrape you +jumped into." + +"I shall talk, an' if you don't want to listen, there are plenty of +places to lay off in outside of this." + +Then the two thieves glared at each other several moments in silence, +and finally Phil said, with a mirthless laugh: + +"We won't fight till this job is finished. Go an' get the balance of the +stuff, an' we'll make a break whenever you are ready; but after one pull +up an' back there'll be somebody besides me who'll think it hard work." + +Then, in order to heal the breach which had opened between them, Phil +produced a suspicious looking black bottle from his pocket, and handed +it without comment to his partner. + +"Why didn't you bring this out before, an' then, perhaps, the business +would 'a' looked different?" Jim growled, as he drank long and deep; +"but it won't make any difference about my goin' up the creek." + +"That's all right; I'm satisfied." + +As the two men began to drink a great hope sprang up in Sam's heart that +they would become so stupefied by the liquor that he might make his +escape. They had not thought it necessary to replace the bonds +which had cost him so much suffering, and at the first signs of +unconsciousness he resolved to make one dash for liberty, either by +taking to the boat, or attempting to make his way toward the fair +grounds on that side of the creek. + +There was no such good fortune in store for the prisoner, however. The +men drank themselves into the most friendly humor, and then the supply +of liquor was exhausted. + +After advising Jim not to start until sunset, Phil lay down to sleep, +and Sam thought it wise to feign slumber also, lest the wakeful burglar +should take it into his head to administer the promised flogging in +order to pass the time more agreeably. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +_A DISASTER._ + + +Teddy was decidedly uncomfortable in mind after Uncle Nathan departed. +By a combination of circumstances which could not well have been +avoided, he had been made to appear as a confederate of Hazelton, and if +all the facts concerning his relations with the fakir should become +known public opinion would he against him. + +He did not allow these forebodings to interfere with business, however. +Customers were plenty; the nickels were coming in as rapidly as he could +make change, and Tim had no hesitancy in saying that Mr. Sweet had set +their receipts of one day considerably too low. + +"We've done twice as much as we did yesterday at this time, an' I'm +countin' on gettin' twelve or fifteen dollars as my share of this day's +work." + +"It looks as though you wouldn't be disappointed, and that's a fact. I +wish I knew where we could get a few more canes, for we've lost quite a +good many this morning." + +"There's no time to go to Waterville; but we can shorten the board by +putting the uprights closer together, an' that'll make the layout look +all right. Here comes your mother, an' if you want to go off with her +I'll promise to keep things goin' here." + +That was exactly what Teddy did want to do. He felt that it was +necessary she should know the true condition of affairs, and he could +not talk with her confidentially near the cane-board, therefore when she +came up he proposed that they walk toward the grand stand, where the +Waterville band was doing its best to put in the shade the performances +of the musicians from the Run. + +"You are looking worried, Teddy," Mrs. Hargreaves said, as they moved +away in the proposed direction. "What is the matter? Isn't business as +good as you expected?" + +"It is a great deal better; but Uncle Nathan has been here again, and +this time I'm afraid it is in his power to do me some harm." + +Then Teddy told his mother all that had happened, explaining in detail +the suspicions which might be aroused against him, and she was quite as +disturbed as he when the recital was finished. + +"I will talk with him myself," she said, after some thought. + +"Don't do anything of the kind, for then he will be worse than ever, +thinking he can frighten me into giving half of all I have made, and +that I won't do, no matter how many warrants he gets out." + +"But Teddy, don't you think----" + +Mrs. Hargreaves was interrupted by a cry from a half-intoxicated man who +halted directly in front of the young fakir, and shouted to some of his +companions in the rear: + +"Here he is! This is the sneak who helped take that jewelry swindler's +money away. I saw him then, an' can swear to his face." + +As a matter of course the tone as well as the words was sufficient to +attract a crowd in this place where the throng was so dense that one +could only make his way from one portion of the grounds to the other +with the greatest difficulty, and for a moment, while Teddy stood unable +to decide what should be said or done, every person looked at him +threateningly. + +"His partner has been arrested, an' we'll serve him in the same way," +the man continued, as he advanced toward the boy. + +"Why do you want to talk to me like that?" Teddy cried, looking around +in vain for a friend. "There are plenty of people here who know me, for +I live down at the Run, an' never swindled anybody." + +"That's a lie!" the man replied, fiercely, seizing the boy by the +collar. + +"It's the truth!" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. "I'm his mother, and we have +lived at the Run ever since he was born. Deacon Jones is our neighbor, +and he can answer for the truth of it." + +[Illustration: "I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance"] + +"I'll see whether he can or not," and the bully was about to drag Teddy +away, aided by his half-intoxicated friend, when a familiar voice from +the outskirts of the crowd cried: + +"Hold on there! What are you about?" + +"I've caught the feller what sneaked away the jewelry swindler's money, +an' am goin' to put him with his partner." + +"You are going to take your hand off his collar this instant, or get +yourself into trouble," and the merchant from Waterville forced his way +through the throng until he stood by Teddy's side. + +"Is that you, Mr. Reaves?" the bully asked, in surprise. "Well, you +don't want to interfere in this business, for the boy is a bad one all +the way through. He was deep enough to get the best of us yesterday; but +he won't be so lucky now." + +"I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance of mine whom I would +trust a good deal sooner than some whom I see now." + +"But you are makin' a big mistake, Mr. Reaves, for I saw him makin' off +with the valise where our money had been put." + +It was evident the bully had considerable respect for the merchant, for +he released his hold on Teddy; but was determined that the boy's +alleged character should be made known to all in the vicinity. + +"I happen to know all about that affair," Mr. Reaves replied, as he led +Teddy and his mother out of the throng, "and if you want the full +particulars of the affair come to my store when you are more sober than +now." + +A very large number of those present were acquainted with the merchant, +and for the majority his statement was sufficient to absolve Teddy of +wrongdoing; but a few, among whom were the intoxicated party and his +friends, vowed to sift the matter more thoroughly before the fair came +to an end. + +Mrs. Hargreaves was terribly excited, and at once insisted that Teddy +should go home with her immediately, regardless of how much money he was +making; but Mr. Reaves said in a matter-of-fact tone, as if such +incidents were of everyday occurrence: + +"It would be foolish for him to do that, more especially since it would +be a tacit acknowledgment of guilt, and, besides, his business here is +too valuable to be abandoned simply because a drunken rowdy chooses to +make trouble. I was on my way to see him; I have found a lawyer who will +under-take Hazelton's case, and he can at the same time give Teddy some +good advice." + +Then the merchant introduced Mr. Harvey as the most prominent attorney +in the county, and, offering Mrs. Hargreaves his arm, added: + +"We will go toward the cane-board, and give them an opportunity to talk. + +"There is a great deal to be said which cannot interest us, and when +they are done we shall be readily found." + +The widow could do no less than comply, and as soon as they were +comparatively alone the lawyer said to Teddy: + +"Now, I want you to begin and tell me the whole story from the time your +money was stolen until this minute. Don't omit any particulars because +you may chance to think they are not important; but give every detail, +and thus I shall be made acquainted with your own case as well as that +of Hazelton." + +Teddy obeyed this command to the letter. He dwelt upon the most minute +transaction or trifling movement at sufficient length to give the +listener a clear idea of all that had happened, and laid bare his own +business affairs, even to the extent of making the lawyer acquainted +with the amount of receipts each day. + +"I don't suppose it makes any difference what I think," he said, in +conclusion; "but I am almost certain Mr. Hazelton did not have anything +to do with the robbery, and even if I had suspected him, that which Dan +and I heard while we were in the museum tent would have convinced me +that the men whom we saw on the creek are the thieves." + +"I believe as you do, my boy, and will send a man to the barn you speak +of this very night, although so much time has now elapsed that I have no +hope of finding anything criminating. However, regardless of what may +happen, I believe we can show that the fakir was not the guilty party, +and, to guard against a possible attack by your uncle, it will be +necessary to know exactly where we can get bail in case you should be +arrested." + +"Then he can take me to jail?" Teddy asked, with quivering lips. + +"If he proves what he claims to know there is no question that he will +be able to cause your arrest; but whether he can send you to prison is +an entirely different matter. I would now like to have a talk with Mr. +Reaves, and shall see you before I leave the grounds. Do not be +frightened; but continue your business as usual, and in a few moments I +will give you full particulars as to what must be done in the event +anything happens." + +Teddy understood this to be an intimation that the interview was at an +end, and he started toward the cane-board, the lawyer asking as he +followed him: + +"How shall I find your friend Dan?" + +"Go down to the exhibit of the J. Stevens Arms and Tool Company in that +yellow-roofed building, and you will see him showing model pocket +rifles. I will go with you if you think there is any chance of missing +him." + +"I can find him without difficulty. Do not leave your place of business +until after I have seen you again." + +By this time they had arrived at the cane-board, where Mrs. Hargreaves, +looking decidedly relieved in mind, was talking with Mr. Reaves. + +The lawyer invited the merchant to accompany him, and as the two walked +away Mrs. Hargreaves said: + +"After talking with Mr. Reaves I will take back what I proposed +regarding taking you home. It is not possible that anything but the +right shall conquer in a case like this, and I believe you will come out +all right, as a boy should who has always been as obedient and loving as +you. It is time for me to be going now; but I will come back again in +the morning." + +"Then take this money with you, for I don't want any more in my pockets +than is absolutely necessary," and Teddy counted out the contents of the +box which served him as a "safe." + +There was but little time for any lengthy leave-taking. The customers +were plenty; Tim and his assistant had been working several hours +without cessation, and Teddy felt that it was his duty to relieve them. + +"You can trust Mr. Reaves, whatever happens," his mother said, as she +kissed him goodby, "and I shall be back to-morrow to learn if you are +all right." + +"Don't worry about me," Teddy replied, cheerily. "Uncle Nathan can't +have everything his own way, and he will soon discover that fact." + +It seemed to Teddy that his mother had but just left him, when a party +of young men who had been talking in an apparently friendly manner +directly in front of his place of business, suddenly began to quarrel, +and before he was aware of what had happened his booth was overturned, +and a fierce battle being waged upon the ground which he fancied +belonged temporarily to him because of the money paid to the managers of +the fair as rent. + +Canes, knives, rings, and timbers were thrown violently about, and, +while trying to save the property, Teddy and his clerk received several +severe blows intended for some of the combatants. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +_A SECOND ARREST._ + + +When the fight began Teddy's first thought was that it had been +prearranged by some one who wanted to do him an injury without taking +the chances of being arrested on a charge of malicious mischief. + +Tim believed it to be a scheme for robbing the money box, and while the +combatants were struggling close around him he emptied the contents into +his trousers pockets, regardless of the chance blows received meanwhile. + +That both were wrong in their conjectures could be told later, as the +fight assumed the proportions of a small riot, and the battle ground was +soon shifted to an open space in front of the exhibition buildings. + +It was nothing more than a causeless row such as is often witnessed at +fairs where intoxicating beverages are sold, and which start from +comparatively nothing, illustrating the proverb: "See what a great fire +a little spark can kindle." + +"This is goin' to knock our hundred dollars in the head," Tim said, +ruefully, as he began to gather up the scattered stock when the +combatants had surged to and fro until they were some distance from the +wrecked cane-board. "It'll take an hour to straighten things out, an' +all that time will be the same as lost." + +"It might be worse," Teddy replied, philosophically, "and, besides, we +shouldn't be able to do any business while that row is going on. If you +hadn't thought of the money it might have been lost, for there were so +many close around me that I couldn't get at the box." + +"Oh, if you want to pick somethin' good out of the trouble, I'll help. +This will give us a chance to shorten the board so the stock won't look +quite so small." + +The young fakirs were ready for business in considerably less time than +they had fancied would be the case. Nearly every one on the grounds was +attracted by the riot, and among those who came to the scene of the +conflict was Dan. + +Instead of watching the struggling, yelling throng, he helped Teddy and +Tim restore the booth to order, and with such aid as the assistant could +give the work was done very quickly. + +Before the spectators had quieted down sufficiently to turn their +attention to sport once more everything was ready for business, and when +the constables had taken the ringleaders in the fight away, money began +once more to roll into Teddy's coffers. + +Before Dan returned to his own work he heard of all that had occurred +since morning, and his comments on Uncle Nathan's behavior were more +forcible than polite. + +"He's an old fool what oughter be rode on a rail till he can't see, an' +I'm goin' over to the Run before I start for home jest to give the +duffer a piece of my mind." + +"I don't believe that would do either you or him any good," Teddy +replied, laughingly. + +"I don't know what effect it'll have on him; but I'll feel a mighty +sight better. He shows himself to be the worst swindler on the grounds +when he tries to scare you into givin' him half you've made, for that's +what his talk means." + +"If he don't do any worse than threaten I won't say a word; but he's so +mad there's no knowin' what'll happen." + +"The lawyer will see that you pull through all right; but if trouble +should come, be sure to send for me. I'll manage to get off somehow." + +With this assurance Dan hurried back to the exhibition buildings, and +Teddy was free to assist Tim in waiting upon the customers. + +During the remainder of the afternoon the young fakirs had quite as much +as they could attend to, and then, just as trade had so fallen off that +Tim could wait upon the customers alone with the aid of the assistant, +Teddy received a call from Mr. Harvey, the lawyer. + +"Come here behind the booth where we can talk without being overheard," +he said, peremptorily, and the boy obeyed at once, asking before the +attorney had time to speak: + +"Do you know if Uncle Nathan is goin' to do anything?" + +"He is certainly trying very hard, and in case he should succeed in +getting a warrant, you will demand of the officer who serves it to be +taken directly to Deacon Jones. Mr. Reaves and I have just had a talk +with him, and in our absence he will render such assistance as you may +require." + +"That sounds as if you believed Uncle Nathan would be able to do as he +threatened." + +"It is well to be prepared for any emergency, since no man can say +exactly what may happen. During the night two constables will go to the +barn on the marshes where you saw the burglars carry some of the goods, +although I do not think any good is liable to result from the visit, for +the men have probably been frightened away by this time. Enough may be +found, however, to prove the truth of your story, and that will be +sufficient to give the thick-headed authorities an inkling that their +judgment as to who the burglars are is not infallible." + +"Have you seen Mr. Hazelton yet?" + +"No; but I shall call on him before going home. The best thing which +could happen now for all concerned would be the arrest of the man you +call Long Jim, and to that end both you and Dan must keep a sharp +lookout, for it is barely possible he may be bold enough to come on the +grounds again." + +"But what could we do in case we did see him?" + +"Follow him quietly until you meet a constable, and then insist that he +be arrested for swindling you out of fifteen dollars. There is not +sufficient proof to connect him with the robbery here or at the Run; but +I will take care that he is held long enough as a common swindler to +enable us to sift the other matter. Let me see, you said Dan was with +you at the time of the transaction in Waterville?" + +"No; it was poor Sam, and now that he is dead I'm the only one who saw +Long Jim there. Do you know if they have found Sam's body?" + +"I think not; men have been dragging the creek all day, and the +probabilities now are that some time will elapse before it can be +recovered. I want you to be very careful during the remainder of to-day +and to-night. Go to the tent where you sleep before dark, and do not +venture outside under any provocation, no matter what message may be +brought." + +"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"Nothing particular; I am only taking precautions, that is all. I shall +be here to-morrow, and will see you then." + +The lawyer turned to go, and had just passed out from behind the end of +the booth when Teddy seized his arm, pulling him back very suddenly. +"There's Long Jim now!" he whispered, excitedly. "See! That man over +there by the striking machine!" + +It was indeed the burglar whose partner had warned him against visiting +the fair, or even showing himself in the vicinity during the daytime. It +could be plainly seen that he was decidedly under the influence of +liquor, and he swaggered to and fro as if in his drunken brain was the +idea that no one would dare cause him trouble. + +"Are you certain there is no mistake?" the lawyer asked, as he watched +the man. + +"I'd be able to recognize him anywhere, no matter how he was dressed, +an' so would Dan, for Sam an' me pointed him out two or three times." + +"Then the hardest portion of our work is finished. I shall have him +arrested on the charge of swindling you, and can arrange it without the +formality of first getting a warrant. It is now more necessary than ever +that you should remain where I can find you readily at any hour of the +day or night." + +"Except when I go for supper, I'll be here or in the tent," Teddy +replied, and then there was no further opportunity for conversation. + +Long Jim had started leisurely, and on anything rather than a straight +course, toward the grand stand, and Mr. Harvey followed so near that he +could have placed his hand on the burglar's shoulder. + +Teddy watched until the two were lost to view amid the throng, and then +said to himself, with a sigh: + +"I'll bet the lawyer can't find a constable, an' that Long Jim gets +clear somehow. But what I don't understand is how he dares to come +here." + +He would have run down to tell Dan of the startling news had it not been +for Mr. Harvey's injunction to remain in the places designated, and he +was so nervous that only with the greatest difficulty could he wait upon +an impatient customer. + +An hour passed, and nothing had been heard from either the lawyer or the +burglar. + +The visitors remained later on this day than usual; but the tardy ones +were departing, and it was with a decided sense of relief that Teddy +began to pack up his stock for the night. Dan arrived before the work +was finished, and his excitement was great when he learned of what had +happened. + +"Can't we go somewhere to find out if the man was arrested?" he asked, +eagerly. + +"I promised to be on hand in case the lawyer should want me." + +"Then we'll get the stuff to the tent, go to supper, an' afterward I'll +snoop 'round to hear the news." + +All hands worked rapidly, and in ten minutes the three boys were at the +boarding-house, eating as if each moment were of the utmost importance, +when they overheard a conversation between two men at the next table +which caused them no slight degree of relief and pleasure: + +"Who was that drunken fellow Constable Ford lugged off this evening?" +one of the men asked, and the other replied: + +"A man who swindled a boy over at Waterville out of fifteen dollars." + +"I didn't see any boy in the crowd." + +"He wasn't there. Lawyer Harvey recognized the fellow, and insisted on +his arrest, sayin' that the 'Squire already knew about the case." + +"I thought at first it might be some one who had been robbing the stores +around here." + +"Oh, the burglar has been caught already, an' laid in jail since +yesterday." + +"But he was only arrested on suspicion." + +"There'll be proof enough to convict him, I reckon, an' if there isn't +he ought to be sent to jail for six months because of what he has done +on the grounds." + +Then the conversation was changed to a subject in which the boys had no +interest, and Dan whispered to Teddy: + +"That settles Long Jim, an' now if your lawyer is as smart as he appears +to be it won't take long to show that Hazelton didn't have anything to +do with the burglar tryin' to get me in jail," Teddy replied, with a +sigh. + +"Of course it will. Things are turning out all right after all, an' if +poor Sam hadn't been drowned we'd have a reg'lar celebration to-night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +_A THIRD ARREST._ + + +When the boys returned to the museum tent from supper they had a long +and interesting story to tell Mr. Sweet; but to their surprise, after +the recital was concluded, he said calmly: + +"I knew all of that except about the burglar's arrest." + +"Why, how did you hear it?" Dan asked. + +"The lawyer an' the merchant have been over here twice since noon, +pumpin' me about Hazelton, an' tryin' to find out how you boys have +behaved yourselves." + +"Why did they want to know anything about us?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"So's to make sure your stories were straight. When men like them take +hold of a thing they don't want to run any chances of bein' fooled. What +has been done about Sam?" + +Dan could best answer this question, and he replied: + +"The body hasn't been found; but I heard the manager of the Davis Boat +Company's exhibit say that he should keep men at the work of draggin' +the creek till the work was finished. I can't get through my head how he +happened to capsize the craft, for she didn't seem to be cranky." + +"That is something none of us will ever know," Mr. Sweet replied, +solemnly, and then, as if to change the mournful subject, he asked: "How +did business pan out to-day, Teddy?" + +"I'll count up. We must have come pretty near to what you predicted; but +we would have done a great deal better if it hadn't been for the big +row. That made us lose at least an hour, to say nothin' of havin' six +canes broken just when we needed every one in order to make a good +show." + +Then Teddy and Tim emptied the contents of their pockets on a piece of +canvas, and the other occupants of the tent waited patiently for the +result to be announced. + +"It's ninety-four dollars and forty-five cents," the former said, after +counting the money twice as if doubtful of the first result. "That's a +big sum of money, but there's no chance of a mistake." + +"You can figure that the row cost you six dollars," Mr. Sweet replied, +puffing vigorously at his pipe. "I haven't been 'tendin' out on fairs +these eight years without bein' able to name the amount of such a +business as yours." + +"We'd have had twenty-five more but for that row," Tim said, decidedly. + +"You're wrong there, my boy," and the proprietor of the museum wore an +air of one who "knows it all." "That is about as much as two boys can +take in, an' you don't want to kick, for I've seen lots of fakirs come +on to a fair ground with a better cane-board than yours an' not get +expenses. Be thankful for what you've earned, an' hope that you can pay +expenses to-morrow, for there won't be any too much money floatin' +around after such a business as we've had to-day." + +"I'm more than satisfied," Teddy replied, as he set aside the amount due +Tim, and the latter appeared to be more than contented with having +earned nine dollars and forty-four cents so easily. + +"You can suck your thumbs from now out," the barker said, +philosophically, "for the backbone of trade has been broken, an' the +Peach Bottom fair is already numbered with the things of the past." + +"Don't you think we'll do anything more?" Teddy asked. + +"Oh, yes, there'll be a little to pick up until to-morrow night, but it +won't amount to anything near like what has already been done, although +it'll be clear profit." + +"Since I am more than satisfied, there's no chance of being +disappointed," Teddy replied, and at that moment the head of a stranger +appeared between the flaps of canvas. + +"Is there a boy named Teddy here?" the newcomer asked. + +"Well, what do you want of him?" and Mr. Sweet sprang to his feet as if +anticipating trouble. + +"Nothing more than what Hazelton wanted me to say," was the reply, as +the stranger entered, evidently thinking his search was at an end. + +"And what is that?" the proprietor of the museum asked, motioning Teddy +to remain silent. + +"There's no need of all this secrecy with me, for I'm Hazelton's partner +in everything except the give-away game," the stranger said, with a +laugh. "It appears a man has been arrested by a party whom this boy +Teddy knows, and I'm to say that he is to come to jail very early +to-morrow morning." + +Even now Mr. Sweet's suspicions were not allayed, and he asked, +cautiously: + +"Could you tell me what he's wanted for?" + +"Lawyer Harvey will be there, and is going to talk with him where +Hazelton can hear what is said." + +"Is that all?" + +"Everything; and if you see the boy, can I depend on your repeating the +message?" + +"Under the circumstances there can be no harm in taking every +precaution," the proprietor of the museum replied, "and if your errand +is finished, I may as well say that this is the boy Teddy whom Hazelton +sent you to see." + +"That's all right; there was no need of pointing him out; but since you +have done so, I simply want to ask if he can spare the time to do as +Hazelton and the lawyer wish?" + +"Of course I can," and now Teddy spoke for himself. "Say that if nothing +happens I'll be there." + +"Have you heard whether your uncle has succeeded in getting a warrant?" +the stranger asked. + +"No; but Mr. Harvey seemed to think he might be able to do so, and I +don't want to make any promises that can't be carried out." + +"Then I'll count on your being there, but since leaving the jail I've +heard enough to warrant my advising you to remain under cover to-night." + +"Why?" + +"Those fellows who started the fight when you got away with the money +are swearing vengeance. I don't think it's likely they'll attack the +tent, for, owing to the representations made by the lawyer, there'll be +a big force of constables on duty to-night; but if you should venture +outside the grounds it might be impossible to keep any engagement in the +future." + +"I wasn't thinkin' of leaving here," Teddy replied; but the mere fact +that he ought not do so made him feel very uncomfortable. + +"I couldn't be in any worse fix if I had committed some big crime," he +said, bitterly, "and it is tough to feel like a criminal when a fellow +is only trying to earn honest money." + +"It isn't the rule that honest people fare the best," the stranger +replied, with a laugh; "but I hope you'll come out on the top of the +heap. At all events, my business here is finished and I'll go." + +The folds of canvas dropped behind him, and Mr. Sweet said, musingly: + +"It beats all how you boys have succeeded in getting yourselves mixed up +in this affair. If I didn't know all the circumstances I'd say there +must be some fire where there is so much smoke." + +"The smoke isn't of our makin', an' Teddy's uncle can be blamed for the +most of it," Dan said, angrily. "I only wish he was here to know my +opinion of him." + +"Are you talkin' about me?" Uncle Nathan asked, as he pushed aside the +canvas and entered without so much as asking permission. + +"That's exactly what I was doing," Dan replied, without any show of +fear, "an' if you've been sneakin' 'round to listen, there's no need of +my tellin' over ag'in jest what I think of a man who tries to frighten +an honest boy into givin' up half of what he has made." + +"An honest boy?" the old man repeated, with a sneer, and Teddy whispered +to his friend: + +"Don't say anything to make him angry, for I'll only get the worst of +it." + +"Of course you will," Uncle Nathan replied, having overheard the words. +"When an ungrateful wretch like you conspires to rob the hand that has +fed him he must expect to get the worst of it." + +"I never took from you the value of a cent," Teddy said, stoutly, and +Dan cried as he sprang to his feet: + +"If there has been any attempt at robbery, you're the guilty one, for +you've tried to steal half the money he made by threatening to have him +arrested if he didn't divide his profits." + +"That was only a business proposition," the old man replied, not in the +least abashed, "and he has aided others in stealing from me." + +"What do you want here?" Mr. Sweet cried, angrily. "This is my tent; I +have paid for the privilege of putting it upon these grounds, and have +the right to prevent such old hypocrites as you from entering without +paying an admission." + +"Look out that you do not come within reach of the law," Uncle Nathan +replied, threateningly, stepping back quickly, as if expecting an +attack. "I am here armed with the right to take this boy, and shall +exercise it despite all that may be said. Come in, Mr. Officer." + +In response to this call a constable entered, and Teddy's heart sank +within him, for he understood that the long-deferred arrest was about to +be made. + +"There is your prisoner," the old man said, vindictively, as he +pointed to the boy, "and the sooner you take him to jail where he +belongs the sooner we shall be rid of a viper." + +[Illustration: As the constable approached him, Teddy said, "I demand to +be first taken to Deacon Jones!"] + +Teddy's grief and fear were so great that he could not speak, and even +Dan appeared to have been made dumb by this show of authority; but Mr. +Sweet was somewhat accustomed to such scenes, and he demanded: + +"Show me the warrant. I do not propose to let any one be taken out of my +tent by such an old reprobate as that until I am satisfied it is done +under the sanction of the law." + +"Convince yourself," Uncle Nathan replied, as the constable held out a +folded document. "That will show under what authority we act." + +Sweet read it carefully, and handed it to the officer as he said to the +old man: + +"This shows that the constable has the right to take Teddy to prison; +but as certain as there will be a sun in the sky to-morrow so certain +will I aid him in making you suffer for doing this thing. You know he +had nothing to do with the burglary committed at your store, and have +only had this issued in the hope of defrauding him of what he has earned +honestly." + +"Talk is cheap," Uncle Nathan said, impatiently. "Officer, take your +prisoner away unless you count on stayin' here all night." + +The short parley between the proprietor of the museum and the accuser +gave Teddy time to think of what the lawyer had said, and he added, as +the constable approached him: + +"I demand to be first carried to Deacon Jones'." + +"Now what kind of a bee have you got in your bonnet?" the old man cried, +displaying both surprise and fear. "I say you are to go to jail, an' +that settles it." + +"If he wants to see the deacon I'm bound to take him there," the +constable said. + +"Who's been makin' sich foolish talk to you?" Uncle Nathan screamed. + +"Lawyer Harvey told me what the law was, an' I don't intend to get into +any fuss by deprivin' a prisoner of his rights," was the stolid reply. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +ON BAIL. + + +When Uncle Nathan learned that the celebrated lawyer had made +preparations for this move on his part he was literally beside himself +with rage, and vowed that the warrant should be served and the prisoner +taken to jail immediately, or he would see to it that the constable was +deprived of his commission without delay. + +"I've served the warrant," the man said, quietly, "an' now the prisoner +is in my custody. You have no more to say what shall be done with him +than that goat, so shut your mouth." + +"I'll shut yours so close it won't be opened again for a month!" the old +man screamed. "Do as I tell you, or take the consequences." + +"And I'm goin' to give you the same advice," Mr. Sweet cried, as he +advanced toward Uncle Nathan threateningly. "Now the boy has been +arrested, you are an intruder here, an' I'll give you thirty seconds in +which to get out; after that we'll make an example of such a reprobate." + +"I'll go when I get ready, an' not a minute before. Lay a hand on me +an' I'll have a warrant for you." + +"If you can get it, well and good. I now order you out for the last +time. In thirty seconds I'll guarantee you won't be in condition to +walk." + +While their employer had been speaking the barker and the clown silently +ranged themselves by his side, ready for any commands which might be +given, and the infuriated old man had sufficient sense left to let him +understand it would be unsafe to linger. + +"I'll serve you out before this thing is ended," he cried, shaking his +fist in impotent rage as he went toward the flap, and Dan, who could +control himself no longer, replied: + +"You'd better begin on me, for I'm goin' to tell this thing to everybody +who comes to the fair to-morrow, an' from what I've heard it wouldn't +take much coaxin' to get the band from the Run up here, so's I could +sing it. You're havin' a good time now; but there'll be a different side +to the matter to-morrow." + +Mr. Sweet had followed Uncle Nathan so closely, literally turning him +out, that he could not reply while inside the canvas; but once in the +open air, he made threats that would have frightened any one who did not +know the motive by which they had been inspired. + +Meanwhile the constable appeared disposed to take matters in the most +comfortable manner. He asked Teddy why he wished to see Deacon Jones, +and the boy said: + +"I don't know; but Mr. Harvey told me that if anything happened to-night +I was to see the deacon." + +"Then we'll go there. Are you ready?" + +Teddy thought of his money, and, fearing lest it might be taken from +him, asked if he could hand something to Mr. Sweet. + +"I think not," was the undecided reply. "The deacon will know, an' +whatever he says I'll stand by." + +"Don't bother about anything just now," the proprietor of the museum +said. "We'll all go with you, an' there'll be plenty of time to make +necessary arrangements before you're taken to jail." + +Although the lawyer had assured him he could be involved in no serious +trouble, the mere fact that he was under arrest sufficed to make Teddy +wretched, and like one under sentence of death, he prepared to accompany +the constable. + +Dan and Tim intended to join the party, as was shown by their remaining +very close to the prisoner, and only the barker and the clown were left +to care for the tent. + +Uncle Nathan was met on the outside, and he immediately began to insist +that the boy be taken to jail at once; but the officer paid no attention +to his ravings. + +"If you don't hold your tongue I'll knock the whole top of your head +off," Mr. Sweet whispered, brandishing his fists in the most threatening +manner, and the old man cried, excitedly: + +"Mr. Officer, I call upon you to bear witness that this man is +threatening my life, and insist that you protect me from insult." + +"I've nothing to do with you," the constable replied, with a laugh. "The +warrant has been served, an' all you've got to do is hold your horses +till the case is called up in court." + +"Wait till I get home once more, an' then we'll see that he's got a good +deal to do with the case," Tim cried. "I'll spend every minute from then +for a week tellin' the folks that he only did this to make Teddy give up +half of what he made, an' it'll be a pretty poor kind of a chump who'll +do any more tradin' at his store." + +Uncle Nathan stepped toward the boy who had spoken so boldly as if he +would inflict the direst punishment then and there; but he probably +realized that this would prejudice his case, and contented himself by +saying: + +"We'll see whether the people at the Run will believe a couple of boys +who have been in league with burglars, for you mustn't forget, Tim +Jones, that I have proof you helped Teddy to carry away the burglar's +money." + +"If it'll do you any good I'll own up to the fact now," the boy +replied. "It can't be so bad to do that as it is to arrest your own +nephew because he won't give you half his money." + +"Don't say anything more," Teddy whispered to his friend. "It's only +makin' matters worse, an' he's got the upper hand of us all jest now." + +"I don't know whether he has or not," the valiant Tim replied; "but at +the same time it'll do him a world of good to let him hear the truth." + +At this point Uncle Nathan appeared to understand that he was not coming +out victor in this battle of tongues, and he wisely held his peace, +saying not another word until the little party arrived at the home of +Deacon Jones. + +The manager of the fair was resting after a particularly hard day's +work. More than one of the citizens of Peach Bottom had openly said he +was responsible for the riot by allowing liquor to be sold on the +grounds, and his greeting of the visitors was not calculated to assure +the frightened Teddy. + +"Well, what do you want?" he cried, roughly, as they entered his +library. "If it's anything concerning the fair I won't open my mouth. A +man can't be driven to death with work and then disturbed at all hours +of the night, simply to give the fools in this town a chance to make +trouble." + +"All I know about it is that I arrested this boy, and he insisted on +being brought to you, saying it was Lawyer Harvey's advice," the +constable began, and the angry deacon immediately began to appear +interested. + +"Is this your nephew, Nathan?" he asked of the old man, who now had a +smirk of confidence on his face. + +"I'm sorry he is, deacon, an' after I set him up in business he goes +ag'in me by givin' information to burglars, who rob me." + +"And you have had him arrested?" + +"I felt obliged to in the interest of society." + +"That's a lie," Mr. Sweet interrupted, angrily. "He tried to make the +boy pay him half he earned on the fair grounds, and has done this thing +only because Teddy refused." + +"We won't go into the details of the case, because I am not a +magistrate," the deacon replied, with a majestic wave of the hand. "Mr. +Officer, tell the 'Squire that I am prepared to go bail to any amount, +and ask if the business can't be conducted here, for I'm too tired to go +out of doors unless it is absolutely necessary." + +"What?" the old man screamed. "Will you answer for that little villain's +appearance at court?" + +"That's what I said, Nathan. This affair is none of my business other +than I have stated; but I must say you are goin' a leetle too far, not +only in my opinion, but in that of others, an' it may prove a costly job +for somebody before it's finished." + +The old man was literally speechless. + +He could not understand why the deacon should have turned against him so +suddenly, and the last words made him decidedly uneasy. + +He was not to be silenced without a struggle, however. After the first +surprise had died away he said, with a comical assumption of dignity: + +"I will see whether I'm to be browbeaten in this manner. The 'Squire +does not dare to release the boy on bail, and I shall tell him so." + +With these words he left the house hurriedly, and the constable said to +the deacon: + +"If you will write a line to the 'Squire, saying that you're ready to go +bail, I do not think there will be any necessity of troubling you again +to-night." + +This suggestion was immediately acted upon, and the weary manager of the +fair penned the following words: + + I am ready to enter security to any amount for the appearance + at court of Edward Hargreaves, and if you should not consider + my bond sufficient, I am empowered to say that John Reaves, of + Waterville, will add his name, therefore there can be no good + reason for committing him to jail, since we are both + responsible for the prisoner until the bond can be executed. + + A. JONES. + +Having received this the constable departed with the prisoner and his +friends, and once on the outside he said, confidently: + +"The matter is settled, no matter how much old Nathan may rave. Both Mr. +Reaves an' the deacon have got the 'Squire by the nose, and he must +dance to their fiddlin'." + +That this assertion was correct Teddy realized a few moments later when +he was ushered into the 'Squire's dining-room, and the latter, without +paying the slightest attention to the prisoner, said to the officer: + +"I have just heard that you served the warrant I issued, and then took +the boy to Deacon Jones' house. Is that correct?" + +"Straight as a string, 'Squire. Lawyer Harvey told him if anything +happened to go there, an' I thought he had a right to look up bail +before being lugged off to jail. Here's what the deacon's got to say +about it." + +The 'Squire took the paper which the officer held out, and after reading +it, said benignly: + +"You were quite correct in doing what you did, Mr. Constable. This is +quite sufficient guarantee that he will be produced when wanted, and you +may let him go. Give me the papers, and I will indorse them." + +After this formality had been gone through with the constable said to +Mr. Sweet: + +"That settles the matter so far as Teddy is concerned, and with such men +as the deacon, Mr. Reaves, and Lawyer Harvey to back him, I don't +believe old Nathan will make any too much out of this job." + +"You are free to go where you please," the 'Squire added, and the young +fakir with his friends left the house, wondering very much at the amount +of influence which, unsolicited, had been exerted in Teddy's behalf. + +As for the boy himself, he was far from feeling comfortable in mind. +Unless the burglary could be brought home to Long Jim it did not seem +possible that Hazelton could be set free, and this last was absolutely +necessary in order to establish his own innocence. + +It was a great consolation for him to be with such good friends, +however, and each in turn tried to cheer him, but without success until +Mr. Sweet said: + +"There's no question of your getting out of the scrape with flying +colors, and to celebrate I'm goin' to give a regular dinner party to +every decent fakir on the grounds. Come over, boys, an' help me get +ready. Business has been so good to-day that I can afford to indulge in +a little extravagance." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +_THE FAKIRS' PARTY._ + + +The idea of a party in the museum tent, where there would be no guests +save fakirs, struck Teddy as being very comical, and he laughed heartily +despite the fact that he was still virtually a prisoner in the meshes of +the law; but at the same time he did not think Mr. Sweet was really in +earnest when he made the proposition. + +It was not many moments, however, before he understood that the party +was to be given in the most elaborate manner possible. + +On arriving at the tent Mr. Sweet sent the bouncer out with invitations +to such of the fakirs as remained on the grounds all night, or lived in +the immediate vicinity, and at the same time the clown started for the +town in order to purchase refreshments. + +"Now, you boys are to take right hold an' help the best you know how," +the proprietor of the museum said as he pulled off his coat and vest +preparatory to making ready for the feast. "If them as comes want to sit +down it must be on the ground, owing to the lack of chairs, therefore +it don't make much difference if the table is a trifle high." + +[Illustration: "We have only one knife," said Mr. Sweet, to the +amusement of the boys, "and it must serve for all hands."] + +To the surprise of the boys he proceeded to convert the wagon into a +"festal board" by first pulling it into the center of the tent, and then +removing the sides. Over the floor of this newspapers were spread, and +two plates, three forks, one knife, and four tin dippers were placed on +the impromptu cloth. + +"The provisions will be cut ready for eating," Mr. Sweet explained, "so +one knife must serve for all hands, and it won't hurt any of the crowd +if they're obliged to take turns using the dippers." + +The clown returned before the guests began to assemble. He brought cold +sausage, sliced ham, cold fried potatoes, sweet crackers, cake, pie, and +a quantity of lemons and sugar. + +Contrary to his expectations, Mr. Sweet did not think this assortment +sufficient for the kind of a dinner he proposed to give, and the +messenger was forced to return in search of cheese, pickled pig's feet, +sardines, and milk for the coffee. + +Matters were in a decided state of confusion when the first of the +guests arrived. Mr. Sweet, not troubled by the absence of dishes, had +placed the various articles on the wagon-table in the brown paper +coverings as they had been received, and it was upon his skill as a +maker of coffee that he based his reputation as a host. + +Therefore everything was neglected for this one important thing, and the +proprietor was standing over the oil stove with a look of grave +responsibility on his face when the owner of the envelope game and his +assistant arrived. + +"The boys will take care of you," he said, hurriedly, bending over the +huge pot to inhale the odor, in order to know exactly how the berries +were adapting themselves to the infusion, and, much to his surprise, +Teddy found himself the one especial feature of the party. + +All on the ground had evidently heard of his arrest, for each new +arrival asked concerning the events of the evening, and, what was more +to the purpose, so far as he was concerned, all seemed to think his +troubles were only temporary. + +"You'll come out of it all right," the manager of the largest sandwich +booth said, confidently, as he entered with his hat on one side of his +head and a cigar held in his mouth at an angle of forty-five degrees. "I +heard of your uncle last year, when he tried to make trouble for a +friend of mine in the spittoon game, an' you can bet your bottom dollar +that the people here are not going to take much stock in what he says." + +"It seems they did, so far as to issue a warrant for my arrest," Teddy +replied, with a mirthless smile. + +"But that won't amount to anything. I hear you have got John Reaves as +a friend, an' he comes pretty near runnin' things to suit himself in +Peach Bottom. He helped my friend out of the scrape your uncle put him +into, an' folks say there's no love lost between him an' Nathan +Hargreaves." + +"I want to get out of my trouble simply on the ground that I am not +guilty," Teddy replied. "If I am charged with aiding burglars, there's +precious little consolation in being set free simply because people do +not like the man who made the charge." + +"Nobody believes you guilty, and for the matter of that I'm certain +Hazelton had nothing to do with the job. His game ain't exactly square; +but he don't go around breaking into stores." + +Teddy was on the point of telling that Long Jim had been arrested +because of the burglaries committed; but he remembered in time that this +fact was as yet a secret, and remained silent. + +The man who leased the only "Great African Dodger" was the next to +arrive, and he also seemed to think it necessary to condole with the +young fakir in his troubles, as did the remainder of the guests, and by +the time all were assembled Teddy began to think his experience was only +such as every other person in the tent had undergone at some time in his +career. + +"You see this is the way the matter stands," the whip man said, +confidentially, while Mr. Sweet was bending all his energies to mixing +the lemonade. "People think fakirs are the worst class of men in the +world, whereas, if the matter was sifted right down, they'd find the +class as a whole was honest because they couldn't afford to be +otherwise. I'm not talking now about those who run strong games, like +Hazelton; but ourselves who do a legitimate business. You've got canes +an' knives to sell, while I deal in whips; now all we want is a fair +show to dispose of our goods, an' we know everything must be done on the +square, or there's bound to be trouble sooner or later, consequently we +keep straight, an' take all the abuse which those who have come to +swindle the folks deserve. Why, what, I ask you, would the managers of +these fairs do if they couldn't get us to come up with our money for +privileges? They couldn't pay expenses, an' that's the whole amount of +the story. They run after us, an' yet when we come there's the same old +howl about swindlers." + +The man talked until he was literally forced to stop for lack of breath, +and Teddy had not so much as spoken; but proved a good listener, which +was all his condoler appeared to expect of him. + +When the clown returned with the last installment of eatables there was +nothing to prevent the assembled crowd from partaking of Mr. Sweet's +hospitality. The coffee was done to a turn; the lemonade was neither too +sour nor too sweet, and the proprietor of the museum summoned his +guests to the feast by saying: + +"Now turn to an' fill yourselves up. It ain't often I do this sort of +thing; but somehow or other I've got a reg'lar admiration for our +cane-board fakir, an' after comin' out as he has to-night it seems only +right we should kinder spread ourselves. There's no liquor in the tent, +which is as it should be, for I'm a temperance man, an' them as wants it +can make hogs of themselves somewhere else. Take hold hearty, an' +remember that this layout is in honor of them as did a good turn to the +whole gang by savin' the lives of the women what would likely have +drowned if there hadn't been any fakirs in the country." + +This was an unusually long speech for the proprietor of the museum, and +when it was ended he set an example to his guests by attacking the +eatables as if he had not indulged in a square meal since the fair was +opened. + +Each person present imitated him, and Tim whispered to Teddy, when his +mouth was so full of cake that it was only with the greatest difficulty +his words could be understood: + +"This is what I call a great snap, an' when I've been fakin' at the +fairs long enough to get some money ahead I'll give fellers like us a +good chance to fill up, the same as Mr. Sweet has done." + +Dan was equally enthusiastic. In all his experience, which extended +over two years at the very least, he declared that he had never seen so +much done for a boy, and concluded by saying: + +"There's no question, Teddy, but that you're a big gun here, an' I'll +advise you to keep right on in this business." + +"I've had enough of it," was the reply. "Such times as these are very +nice; but think of what may happen when I'm brought up for trial. Who +knows but Uncle Nathan can succeed in makin' folks think I'm guilty of +helpin' the burglars, an' then what'll be the consequences?" + +"I know he can't do anything of the kind, an' that's enough," was the +confident reply; but yet it failed to satisfy the boy who had been bound +over to appear at court. + +The entire party appeared to be having the jolliest kind of a jolly +time; but ever before Teddy's mental vision came the picture of himself +in prison, and even the fact that Long Jim had been arrested failed to +render him confident as to the final result. + +Again and again was he called upon to reply as one after another wished +him good luck in the case, and the amount of lemonade which was consumed +on each occasion caused the clown to make a third visit to the town in +order to purchase the wherewithal to satisfy the demands of the guests. + +It was nearly midnight when the last of the revelers departed and the +boys were called upon to help set the interior of the tent to rights. + +"It hasn't been sich a bad time after all," Mr. Sweet said, musingly, as +Teddy and Dan aided him in wheeling the wagon into place. "A man can +remember an evening like this with pleasure, when liquor has been kept +out of the bill of fare, an' who shall say that we're not better off +than if our legs were so tangled as to make walking an impossibility?" + +The barker's red nose was slightly elevated, much as if its owner could +explain why spirits were superior to lemon-juice and water; but Mr. +Sweet's question remained unanswered, and the party set about making the +final preparations for the night. + +"Poor Sam ain't here to be troubled by the goat, so we can set him +loose," the proprietor of the museum said as he unfastened the rope from +the neck of his pet. + +"He'll have a great time pickin' up odds an' ends between now an' +daylight, an' then feel so lazy that it'll be hard work to make him do +his tricks." + +"Do you suppose Uncle Nathan will be around in the morning?" Teddy asked +as he lay down by the side of Dan and Tim. + +"Not a bit of it; he got sich a dose to-night that I don't count on +seem' him ag'in till this fair is ended, an' then I'm going to take a +trip over to the Run for the express purpose of givin' him a piece of +my mind." + +"But suppose he should come, what shall I say?" + +"Pay no attention to the old fool, an' above all, don't let him trap you +into talking. Mr. Harvey will be here to-morrow, an' he can post you +better than ever I could." + +"Don't fuss about the thing at all," Dan replied, philosophically. +"There's plenty here who know you hadn't anything to do with the +burglaries, an' he won't have as much as a friend by the time the trial +is ended." + +"Dan comes pretty nigh being right," Mr. Sweet added, "an' now I want +all hands to go to sleep, for there's one more day of this fair, an' we +need to be somewhere near fresh, because to-morrow the dollars won't +tumble without a good deal of coaxing. Good-night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +_IN HIDING._ + + +That the incidents may be related as nearly as possible in the order of +their occurrence it is time to return to the spot where the burglars are +in hiding. + +It will be remembered that we last saw Sam after Phil had fallen asleep, +and he was feigning unconsciousness lest Long Jim, having nothing else +to do, should take it into his ugly head to administer the promised +flogging. + +Although Sam's eyes were apparently closed, he took good care to keep +strict watch on the burglar; but for what seemed a very long time he saw +nothing to cause any apprehensions, and was just on the point of going +to sleep in reality when Jim asked, as he gave the boy a vicious kick on +the side: + +"Where's the grub?" + +"I don't know. You put it away after finishing your dinner." + +"Oh, I remember now," and the burglar, still considerably more than half +stupefied by the amount of liquor he had drunk, arose to his feet so +unsteadily that it seemed as if only the lightest touch would be +necessary to send him headlong. + +After a short search the man found that which he wanted, and proceeded +to make a hearty meal, regardless of the hungry glances which the boy +bestowed upon him. + +"Don't think I'm goin' to give you any," he said, with a leer, as he +concluded the repast, "You're lucky to be alive, an' that's enough for +sich a duffer. I'll put this stuff back, an' you'll have every bone in +your body broken if you so much as smell of it." + +Sam made no reply. He had already learned that there are very many times +when silence is indeed "golden." + +"I've made up my mind to see what can be done at the fair," Jim said, as +he lighted his pipe with great deliberation. "Phil thinks he's the only +smart man in the world, an' it's time to show him what a mistake he's +been makin' all his life. Why don't you say something?" he cried, +angrily, as Sam continued silent. + +"I don't know what you want me to say. If you're goin' that settles it; +I sha'n't be any better off." + +"You can stake your life on that, for while I'm a gentleman an' behave +myself as such, Phil is a reg'lar brute, an' will make things mighty +uncomfortable for a sneak like you." + +Sam thought, but was very careful not to say, that it was hardly +possible for a boy to have a worse master than the alleged gentleman in +front of him, and the burglar continued, as he arose to his feet: + +"I want to leave without wakin' Phil, but you must do it as soon as I +push off from the shore, for we don't intend to give you a chance of +slipping away. I shall watch mighty close, an' if he isn't on his feet +before I'm a dozen yards out into the creek you'll get a reminder from +this," and the man ostentatiously displayed a revolver. + +"I don't count on runnin' off," Sam, replied, thoroughly frightened by +the threat. "I can stay here till you get ready to let me go, because +I've got to, an' I'm not sich a fool as to git into any worse scrape." + +"Now you're talkin' somethin' like sense, an' if you keep on in this way +I'll see to it that you don't have any harder time than a detective +oughter expect; Phil will be on his ear when he knows I've gone, an' you +must tell me all he says. Remember that if he isn't on his feet before +I've got beyond range, I'll use your head for a target." + +With this threat the burglar staggered out of the thicket, and Sam began +to speculate as to whether he should make one supreme effort to escape +before his other captor awakened. + +A second glance at the weapon decided him in the negative, however, and +he meekly stepped to the edge of the woods in order to obey the +instructions given. + +Despite Jim's apparent intoxication he watched the boy closely, still +holding the revolver ready for use, and after pushing the boat into the +stream he cried: + +"Now go ahead, an' let me see him in about two minutes, or I'll fill you +full of bullets." + +If Sam had been a brave boy he would have made a dash for liberty at +this moment; but he was in nearly every sense of the word a coward, and +obeyed the order literally. + +"Who's there?" Phil asked, angrily, as the boy shook him vigorously. + +"Jim told me to make you get up, or he'd shoot," Sam replied, meekly. + +"Make me get up? What time is it?" + +"I don't know; but it doesn't seem to be more than three o'clock." + +"Where's Jim?" + +"Jest startin' for the fair grounds, an' if you don't show yourself +pretty soon he's sure to shoot me." + +"There wouldn't be any particular harm in that, for you deserve it; but +it can't be possible the fool is goin' to show himself in daylight when +more than one is lookin' for him." + +"That's what he said," and Sam, fearing lest the half-drunken burglar +would begin his pistol practice, seated himself behind the largest tree +that might protect him from the bullets. + +Now that Phil was awake, he did not lose any further time in talking, +but ran out to where he could command a view of the creek, and once more +Sam had an opportunity for escape which he did not dare to embrace. + +"Come back here, an' don't make a fool of yourself," Jim's partner +cried, angrily, as he saw the man pulling leisurely from the bank. + +"What's crawlin' on you? Don't I know my business?" + +"Not if you count on goin' up there before dark." + +"That's jest what I intend to do, so don't screech so much." + +"Come back, I tell you, or it'll be all up for both of us!" + +"I've been in this business long enough to know it," was the reply, as +Jim continued to row, increasing each instant the distance between +himself and the shore. + +"Now, don't spoil a good thing," Phil said, pleadingly, and, +understanding that this conversation might be continued for a short +time, Sam plucked up sufficient courage to make an attack upon the +provisions. + +He took from the general store a large piece of cheese, some crackers +and as much meat as he believed would suffice to make a hearty meal, +after which he hid the lot near the tree behind which he was hiding. + +Then he crept back to his former position, and listened to the +conversation between his captors. + +Phil alternately coaxed and threatened his partner; but all to no +purpose, as could be told by the tones of the latter's voice while he +pulled up stream, and the baffled burglar returned to the camping place +absolutely furious with rage. + +"This comes of my bein' so foolish as to bring that fool liquor," he +said half to himself. "It's mighty lucky he didn't know I had more than +one bottle." + +Then he took from one of his pockets a second flask, refreshing himself +with a portion of the contents before asking: + +"What did he say to you?" + +"Nothin' except that he was goin' up to the fair," Sam replied, timidly. + +"But what made him tell you to waken me?" + +"I s'pose that was so I couldn't have a chance to run away." + +"What else did he say?" + +"That I was to tell him jest how you took his leavin'." + +"Well, if he's lucky enough to get back, tell him I said he was the +biggest fool that ever walked on two legs. Them chums of your'n are sure +to spot him, an' it's ten to one he's pinched before sunset." + +Sam did not understand what the man meant by the term "pinched," but +under the circumstances he hardly thought it safe to inquire, and the +angry burglar continued: + +"We'll make ready to get out of this if he isn't back by daylight, an' +while there's nothin' else to do you'd better put that stuff under +ground, for there's no knowin' now when we'll be able to take it away." + +The spade was near at hand ready for use, and while Phil alternately +smoked and drank from the bottle, Sam set about burying the plunder. + +This man was quite as hard a taskmaster as the one who had just +departed, and the boy was forced to work as he had probably never done +before, until sufficient of an excavation had been made to conceal the +goods. + +Under the direction of the burglar Sam covered the different packages +with earth; did his best to hide all traces of his work, and when it was +so dark that he could no longer see to move about was allowed to rest. + +During this time Phil had been drinking and smoking, with the result +that he could hardly speak plainly when the task was accomplished, and +so intoxicated did he appear to be that Sam thought it safe to eat the +food he had concealed. + +"Keep on talkin' so's I'll know where you are, or on goes the ropes an' +gag again," Phil cried, and the boy obeyed, repeating over and over the +same words in order to satisfy his suspicious captor. + +After eating a hearty meal, Sam succeeded in mustering sufficient +courage to admit of his thinking about attempting to escape. + +From the manner in which the burglar spoke he knew it could not be very +much longer before the man would be so completely under the influence of +liquor as to render him helpless, and he said to himself: + +"If I could get the rope around his hands an' legs I'd soon be out of +this place." + +"What's that you are saying?" Phil cried, angrily. + +"Nothin'; I was only doin' as you told me, talkin' so's you'd know where +I was." + +"I'll save all that trouble," and the man lurched to his feet as he +picked up the rope. + +"Please don't tie me ag'in," Sam pleaded. "I won't try to git away." + +"I'll go bail that you don't after I'm through with you. Put out your +hands." + +Phil was yet capable of mischief, even though his brain was clouded, and +Sam did not dare to disobey. + +He suffered himself to be tied without making any remonstrance, and as +the burglar staggered to his former resting place, the boy tested the +bonds. + +Previously he had been lashed in such a manner that it was impossible to +move hand or foot, but now he soon realized that he could do both, and +the happy thought came that he might free himself with but little +difficulty if a favorable opportunity for escape should present itself. + +"Now you're fixed," Phil said, half to himself, "an' I may as well take +things comfortable till we're certain that that fool of a Jim is +settled." + +"Are you goin' to leave here to-night?" Sam asked, more for the purpose +of learning how far the man was on the road to intoxication than for +information. + +"If he ain't here by twelve o'clock we'll know the jig is up, an' skip +so's to be out of the way before any one can come sneakin' around for +the stuff." + +"Then if Jim isn't back by that time, an' he keeps on drinkin', I'll +take all the chances," Sam said to himself, and from that instant he +strained every nerve to learn how nearly the burglar had succeeded in +making a worse brute of himself than nature intended. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +_A FAILURE._ + + +Tired though Teddy was, a long time elapsed after the conclusion of the +fakirs' feast before he could close his eyes in slumber. + +Now that the excitement of the party had died away, the fact that he was +a prisoner, suffered to remain outside the prison only because men of +wealth were willing to guarantee he would respond to the call of the +court, came into his mind even more vividly than at the time of the +arrest, and despite all the words of cheer which had been spoken he +really began to believe Uncle Nathan could show plausible proof of his +guilt. + +Under almost any other circumstances he would have speculated upon what +should be done with the large amount of money he had already earned, and +rejoiced at the thought that he could supply his mother with what she +might need for the present, at all events. + +The profits of the cane and knife boards were hardly thought of on this +night while the one painful fact stood before him so prominently and +menacingly. + +His companions had been asleep many hours before slumber visited his +eyelids, and so heavy was his heart even while in dreamland that he +awoke with the first dawn of day, and aroused the others to the last +day's work they would be called upon to do at the Peach Bottom fair +during the present season. + +"Why is it that you have turned out so early?" Mr. Sweet asked, in a +sleepy tone, rising to his feet as the only effectual method of driving +the drowsiness from his eyelids. + +"I sha'n't feel much like sleeping till I know how the case is coming +out," Teddy replied, sadly. + +"There is no need to worry with such friends as you have got. Put it +right out of your mind until business closes to-night, for there's a big +pile of work to be done if you expect to make much money." + +"I wish I could," Teddy said, with a long-drawn sigh as he aroused Tim +and Dan. + +Half an hour later the three boys were eating what it was believed would +be their last meal in the very unsatisfactory boarding-house, and +Teddy's place of business was the first opened on that morning. + +There were no more early visitors; but the fakirs who had been present +at the feast on the evening previous gathered around, all appearing +very eager to spend money, and trade was as lively as it had been on any +other morning. + +The crowd bought rings and threw them recklessly until each man had +spent considerably more than a dollar, when Teddy suddenly realized that +this sudden passion for canes only arose from a desire to aid him. Then +he said, decidedly: + +"There's no need of you fellows doin' this. I know you want to see me +out of the scrape; but I've made a lot of money already, an' don't want +to take yours." + +"You can't have too much, my boy," one of them said with a laugh, "and +we want to see you go away with a pile. Trade has been boomin' for all +hands, an' it would be kinder rough if we couldn't have a little fun now +the fair is the same as over." + +This did not satisfy Teddy, and he continued to expostulate against the +generosity; but all to no purpose. The fakirs played until a sufficient +number of visitors had arrived to warrant their opening the other +booths, and then Tim and Teddy were left alone, Dan having started for +the exhibition building some time previous. + +Until ten o'clock there was no more than work enough to keep one boy +moderately busy, and Teddy experienced a deep sense of relief as Mr. +Harvey came up to the stand with a cheery "good morning." + +"I hear that your Uncle Nathan succeeded in carrying out his threat," +the visitor said, as if speaking about what was a very trifling matter. + +"Yes, sir; an' do you think he can send me to prison?" + +"Not a bit of it. You are under bail, and I venture to predict that he +will not carry it to court, for he has sufficient sense to know it may +prove a very expensive job. We sent our men to the barn on the marshes +last night." + +"What did you find?" Teddy asked, eagerly. + +"More than I expected. There were no goods in the building, but some +have evidently been buried there, and this fact, together with the +evidence that boats have been drawn up on the shore recently, proves +your story as to what was seen when you boys followed the two men to be +correct." + +"The other fellow has run away, I suppose." + +"I think he is yet in the immediate vicinity, otherwise Jim would be +willing to talk." + +"Have you seen him since he was arrested?" + +"I have just come from the jail. I told him of the evidence we already +had to connect him with the burglary, and that we should push him hard +in the interest of you and Hazelton. He understands that there is an +opportunity to turn State's witness, but he absolutely refuses to speak +on any subject. Therefore I fancy his partner has not yet got away." + +"Then there has been no good done in arresting him," Teddy said, +mournfully. + +"That is where you are making a mistake. I have prepared an affidavit +for you and Dan to swear to, and shall endeavor to have a warrant issued +at once charging him with burglary, so he can't give us the slip in case +he gets clear in the matter of swindling." + +"Do you want Dan an' I now?" + +"Yes; go after him. I will only keep you ten or fifteen minutes." + +Teddy turned to go toward the exhibition buildings, but halted an +instant to ask: + +"Have you seen my uncle this morning?" + +"No, but I shall do so later in the day, and after we have a little +conversation I do not think he will be so eager to see you in prison." + +The lawyer's confident manner had very much to do with taking the load +of sorrow from Teddy's mind, and he looked almost cheerful as he asked +of the manager of the Stevens exhibit that Dan be allowed to accompany +him, explaining the reason for making the request. + +"Of course he can go," the gentleman replied, readily. "Trade won't be +so good to-day but that he can be spared as well as not, and even if it +was rushing, he should have permission to leave." + +When the boys were at the cane-board once more Mr. Harvey hurried them +away to the magistrate's office, and there a long document was read, +which described in detail all they had seen on the day when Sam first +gave an exhibition of his skill as a detective. + +They marveled not a little that the lawyer should have remembered so +well every trifling incident. Nothing, however apparently unimportant, +had escaped him, and, as Dan said: + +"It is written down better than if he had really been with us." + +This document was sworn to and signed by both, after which Mr. Harvey +told them that they might return to work, adding as he turned to Teddy: + +"The man who has been arrested on your complaint will have a hearing +to-morrow, and it is absolutely necessary you should be at this office +as early as nine o'clock. I don't know whether Dan will be allowed to +tell what he has heard Sam say regarding the matter, but he had better +come with you." + +"I'll be on hand," the young fakir replied. "Do you know when I'm to be +tried?" + +"That case won't come up for some time in view of the evidence your +lawyer is collecting," the 'Squire said. + +"Don't worry about it, for I think the real burglars will soon be +caught." + +"An' does Mr. Hazelton have to stay in jail all the time?" + +"There is no other way out of it, since he hasn't got friends who can go +bail for him." + +Teddy wanted very much to ask permission to see the prisoner, but +inasmuch as he was accused of being equally guilty with the fakir it +hardly seemed just the proper thing to make the request, and he left the +office, followed by Dan, who said, as they gained the open air: + +"You ain't goin' to have half so much trouble as you think, Teddy. +Anybody can see that even the 'Squire is on your side, although he did +issue the warrant, an' the proof must be mighty strong to make any of +'em believe you did anything against the old miser. But this keeps us +here on the grounds another day, doesn't it?" + +"Yes, an' if Mr. Sweet packs up his tent to-night, we'll have to hunt +for a place to sleep in the village." + +"That don't worry me very much. I've made a good week's work out of the +fair, an' can afford to spend a little money." + +"I shall pay all the bills, of course," Teddy replied, quickly. "It +wouldn't be any more'n right because you are goin' to stay to help me." + +Dan was quite positive he would pay his own bills, and his companion +equally certain he should not; but there was little chance for +discussion, since they had arrived opposite the grand stand by this +time, and were hailed by Deacon Jones, who looked as if he considered +himself the one important personage on the grounds as he said: + +"I want both of you boys to be here at exactly two o'clock. Don't fail +to come, no matter how much business you may have on hand." + +"What's the matter?" Teddy asked, immediately thinking some new trouble +threatened him. + +"There will be plenty of time for explanation after you get here," was +the mysterious reply, and then the deacon signified that the interview +was at an end by turning to speak with some gentlemen who had been +watching the boys closely. + +"What do you suppose is up now?" Teddy asked with a sigh, and Dan +replied, mournfully: + +"I'm sure I don't know," but in his own mind he was convinced that the +deacon intended to surrender the boy whose surety he had appeared +willing to become on the evening previous. + +Teddy was so disturbed by dismal forebodings that Dan was very careful +to hide his suspicions, since it could do only harm to discuss them, and +the two parted, feeling as if Uncle Nathan had outwitted Mr. Harvey. + +On retuning to his place of business Teddy did not have the heart to +wait upon the customers, and after telling Tim what had been said to +him, he added: + +"I can't work; it's no use to try. There must have been something new +come up, an' I won't be able to show that I'm innocent of robbing the +store." + +Dan could give him no consolation, for he also felt that matters were +approaching a dangerous crisis, and he simply said: + +"Loaf around, old fellow, an' I'll look out for the work here. Try to +put it out of your mind, for things won't be made better by worryin' +over 'em." + +Just at this moment Teddy's mother arrived. She had heard all the +particulars concerning the arrest and subsequent release, therefore +began at once to sympathize with her son. + +"Then you know what the deacon is goin' to do?" Teddy asked. + +This was something of which Mrs. Hargreaves was ignorant, but upon being +told, appeared even more distressed than her son, thus increasing +instead of lightening his troubles. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +_THE TESTIMONIAL._ + + +It was impossible for Teddy to follow Tim's advice to "loaf around." + +His heart was so full of sorrow that his greatest desire was to go where +those who might believe he had been a partner of the burglars could not +see him; but since that was impossible, if he intended to obey the +deacon's injunctions and present himself at the grand stand at the +specified time, the next best thing was to remain behind the booth where +his mother tried her best to cheer him. + +"It can't be possible that anything to your disadvantage has occurred, +Teddy," she said as she held his hand for mutual sympathy. "Mr. Reaves +would have sent me word at once if that had happened." + +"Perhaps he doesn't know about it. Uncle Nathan may have been talking +with the deacon again, an' turned him against me." + +"I don't believe it would be possible for him to do such a thing. His +reputation is not so good that people could put faith in all he says, +more especially in regard to this case." + +"Then if he didn't do it some one else has, an' that makes it all the +worse," Teddy replied, as he tried to force back the tears. + +At this moment the sorrowing ones were startled by hearing the voice of +the man whom they had every reason to call their enemy, and an instant +later Uncle Nathan stood before them. + +"Well," he said in what sounded more like a snarl than anything else, +"you see the old skinflint did jest what he promised, an' he'll see to +it that the deacon don't stay on your bail very long unless I get my +rights." + +"What do you mean by your rights?" Mrs. Hargreaves asked. + +"I lent this ungrateful boy the money to start him in a business where +he's made more in a week than I ever could in a year. Then he helped +people to rob me, an' after all that I made what any man must call a +fair offer. See how much I've lost by him, an' then think of my offerin' +to straighten everything out by goin' in as his partner." + +"Why didn't you do this before the fair opened?" + +"I couldn't tell how it would turn out," the old man began, and then +realizing that he was admitting something to his discredit, he added, +quickly, "I mean I hadn't lost my money then, an' never suspected how he +would wrong me." + +It seemed as if these last words drove Teddy to desperation, and he no +longer-remembered the respect due to age. + +"Look here," he cried, angrily, rising, and standing directly in front +of Uncle Nathan, "if you believe I'm a burglar, you can't want to be my +partner. It was only after the fact of my having made considerable money +was known that you offered any trade. If the venture had been a losing +one you are the last person who would have taken hold of it. Now I'm +under arrest on a charge made by you, who know I am innocent, an' we'll +put an end to all this talk. Don't come where my mother and I am; do the +very worst you can, an' some day I'll have my innings." + +"You threaten, eh?" + +"That's exactly what I'm doing. I have leased this piece of ground until +to-morrow, and warn you that it'll be mighty uncomfortable if you show +your nose here again. Go now an' go quick!" + +"That's right, Teddy," Tim shouted in a tone of delight from the +opposite side of the booth. "Give it to him hot, an' I'll do my share. +If you don't want to tackle the job till after the trial, say the word +an' I'll sail in, for it gives me a pain to see him around." + +Teddy made no reply to this generous offer; but Uncle Nathan stepped +back very quickly as if fearing an immediate attack. + +"You won't be so bold to-morrow," he snarled, shaking his fist in +impotent rage, and then he disappeared from view amid the crowd that had +begun to gather. + +Both Teddy and his clerk thought it very singular that business should +be so good on this day, when the majority of the other fakirs were +comparatively idle, and also in view of what had been said against the +proprietor of the cane-board. + +Yet the people gathered around by scores, all intent on patronizing the +boys, and at the same time embracing every opportunity to display their +good will. + +Teddy and his mother remained partially screened from the gaze of the +curious until nearly two o'clock, when Dan, looking decidedly troubled, +arrived. + +"I suppose we've got to go to the grand stand an' find out what the +deacon wants," he said, mournfully. "My boss told me that we must be +there on time, an' we might as well start." + +"I want to have it over as soon as possible," Teddy replied. "Nothin' +that comes can be any worse than waitin' here thinkin' of what may +happen." + +The two boys walked either side of Mrs. Hargreaves as they went to meet +the deacon, and it seemed very much as if the majority of the people +present knew what was about to occur, for the sad-visaged party was +followed by crowds of the visitors as they walked steadily onward. + +It was exactly two o'clock when they arrived at the stairway leading to +the grand stand, and there they were met by the leader of the band from +the Run, who said with a mysterious manner as he opened a gate leading +to the track in front of the judges' stand: + +"You are to come this way." + +"Where's the deacon?" Teddy asked. + +"Waiting for you." + +Without further explanation the musician led the three to a spot where +all could see them, and to the intense surprise of the sorrowful-looking +party, the throng assembled on the benches greeted them with the most +hearty applause. + +"You are to come with me, Mrs. Hargreaves," the conductor said, as he +escorted her to one of the front seats, and Teddy and Dan stood as if +stupefied, gazing in dismay at the sea of faces in front of them. + +Before the boys had sufficiently recovered from their bewilderment to be +able to speculate upon what was to happen Deacon Jones came down the +steps until he reached a place where all could see him and there began a +speech which caused at least two of that assemblage to gaze at him in +open-mouthed astonishment. + +The manager of the fair did not intend to neglect any opportunity of +making himself conspicuous, and he delivered an eloquent address, +looking first at the boys and then at the audience, which cannot be +given here because of lack of space. + +He first explained to the spectators that Teddy had taken upon himself +the business of fakir simply that he might aid his widowed mother. Then +he detailed the loss of the fifteen dollars, and finally broached the +one important matter, that of the scene on the creek, when the three +women were rescued from drowning. + +By this time the cheeks of Teddy and Dan were flaming red, and if he had +been charging them with the most atrocious crimes they could not have +looked more guilty or uncomfortable. + +"As you all know," he said, in conclusion, "we have met here to see +bravery and a spirit of self-sacrifice rewarded. On behalf of the ladies +whose lives were saved by these little heroes I am about to present +Edward Hargreaves and Daniel Summers with one hundred dollars each. In +addition to that amount the managers of the fair and several gentlemen +who do not care to have their names made public, have made up a purse of +one hundred and eighty dollars to be divided equally between them. It is +most gratifying to me that I have been selected as the instrument +through whom this testimonial is presented, and in behalf of my brother +officers as well as myself I will state that these brave boys have the +freedom of the grounds whenever the Peach Bottom fair is open." + +As he concluded, the deacon walked with a majestic bearing down to the +bewildered boys, presented each with a well-filled pocketbook and then +waved his hand as a signal for the band, every member of which did his +best to make the music heard above the rounds of applause intended for +the blushing fakirs. + +In the meantime the people came down from the benches to congratulate +the life-savers, and for fully an hour the two were forced to remain +there listening to words of praise which they felt were not warranted by +their exploit on the creek. + +Among the most welcome of these enthusiastic visitors was Jacob Sweet, +and he said, heartily: + +"I heard of this little performance jest in time to get here before that +long-winded speech was begun; but what pleases me the most is that I was +ahead of the whole gang, an' started our little blow-out when it wasn't +known you had so many friends. I'll see you to-night, of course, an' I +must go now, for the bouncer has been around tellin' that you've been +sleepin' in my tent, an' I count on a good payin' crowd this afternoon." + +It was considerably past three o'clock when the boys and Mrs. Hargreaves +returned to the cane-board, looking very much different than when they +left it, and Tim cried as they came up: + +"I've heard all about it, an' what I want to know is, where was old +Nathan while that speechifyin' was goin' on?" + +"I saw him when we first arrived," Mrs. Hargreaves replied, "but he left +a few moments later, although I have no doubt that he remained where he +could hear all that was said without being seen." + +"That's where he was wise. It wouldn't be very pleasant for him to show +himself now, 'cause everybody is down on him after what the deacon +said." + +Dan was obliged to return to his duties, and he whispered to Teddy +before leaving: + +"I tell you what it is, old feller, this has been a reg'lar puddin' for +us, an' I'd give a good deal to see another jest like it." + +"You're all right, but I expect after this Uncle Nathan will be so mad +he'll make me a pile of trouble." + +"Don't worry about that; his claws are cut now. I'll be back in time to +go to supper." + +When he departed Teddy had an opportunity to say a few words to his +mother before she returned home on the stage, which was advertised to +leave at four o'clock, and while he did this all thought of being under +arrest was put far from his mind because of the joy at what he was now +able to perform. + +"Never mind what happens to me," he whispered. "I've now got nearly +money enough to pay off all we owe, an' it has been earned honestly, +too, although I believe they paid a big price for what Dan an' I did on +the creek." + +"I'm thinking more of the praise you earned than the money, Teddy. It +was very sweet to hear the deacon say so much to you before all those +people." + +"Then both of us will be awfully jolly to-night, an' to-morrow I'll be +home, an' bring Dan with me." + +"Invite him to stay just as long as he wishes, and I will have a nice +supper ready when the last stage arrives." + +Teddy gave his mother nearly all the money he had, including the +"testimonial," and as she walked away he said to Tim: + +"I'm willin' to be arrested, an' put into jail a good many days for the +sake of being able to help her as I can do now." + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +_THE TRIAL._ + + +It was only natural that both Teddy and Dan should feel highly elated +after this public expression of admiration which culminated in the +presentation of the purse, but they immediately returned to attend to +their several duties when the ceremonies were finished. + +Dan went back to the exhibition as if he had done nothing worth +remembering, and in less than half an hour from the time the deacon +concluded his flowery speech it would have required a very ardent +student of humanity to discover that anything out of the natural course +of events had taken place. + +At the cane-board Teddy waited upon his customers as before, and without +the slightest sign of having been honored by the magnates of the fair, +while Dan fired at the target as if he had been a boy with no other +claim upon the public's attention than his ability to hit a mark. + +Yet it must be confessed that both experienced a very pleasing sense of +having satisfied the public, and each, in his own peculiar way, knew he +had risen a little above the average boy. + +There can be no question that any one placed in the same position must +have felt gratified by the many expressions of friendship and good-will +with which these two were literally overwhelmed, and it would have been +more than could be expected of human nature had they remained unmoved +under the extravagant flattery which was showered upon them immediately +after the close of Deacon Jones' speech. + +Although there was not quite as much money flowing into the box as on +the day previous, Teddy was more than pleased with the receipts, because +every penny seemed to express just such an amount of good-will. + +Until nearly nightfall he remained at the booth, answering questions +upon the same subject till it seemed to have been worn threadbare, and +then, however great his desire to earn money, he felt a positive sense +of relief that his connection with the Peach Bottom fair had finally +come to an end. + +"This is the last time you an' I will pack up the stuff," he said to Tim +as they put into condition for removal the cane and knife boards. "I +promised to give you all that was left, and you're more than welcome to +it." + +"But you surely don't mean to give me the whole lot," Tim cried in +surprise. + +"That's exactly what I'm going to do, and I sincerely hope when you make +a stand you'll meet with the same good friends I have here." + +"I can't take these things unless you'll allow me to pay something +toward what they cost." + +"Look here, Tim," Teddy said, earnestly, "you have shown yourself to be +a friend of mine, an' every cent that has come in here you've accounted +for. Now, whatever may happen, I'm through bein' a fakir; but if you +want to follow the business, I can only hope you'll come out all right. +We'll carry this to Mr. Sweet's tent, an' I'll only be so much the +better pleased, and in case you don't, I'm bound to help you in every +way. Besides, I promised to pay a certain percentage on the profits; +that is yet to be settled." + +"It never will be," Tim replied in the most decided tone. "If I take +these goods I've got more than a fair share, an' won't listen to +anything else." + +"Very well, we'll leave it that way. You now own everything, an' I owe +you lots of good-will." + +On this basis the remnants of the two boards were packed up for removal, +and when they were about to take the goods to Mr. Sweet's tent Dan +arrived. + +"How much business did you do to-day?" he asked. + +Teddy delayed sufficiently long to count the receipts, and then +replied: + +"Forty-one dollars and fifteen cents. That gives Tim four-eleven, an' I +get more than would have been the case but for the testimonial this +afternoon. The folks crowded around to see me, rather than to get the +canes, an' so business has picked up better than any one expected." + +"It don't make any difference how the money came in so long as you have +got it," Dan replied, philosophically, "an' now the question is what are +we to do for supper, since we paid our bill at the boarding-house this +afternoon?" + +"Have you got any idea?" + +"Of course, or else I wouldn't have asked the question. Let's invite Mr. +Sweet, the bouncer, and the clown to some restaurant down town, an' try +to give them as good a time as we had last night." + +This proposition met with Teddy's approval, and the party was made up as +he suggested, the cost being divided between the two boys who had been +the recipients of the public testimonial. + +Not until a late hour in the evening did these festivities come to an +end, and then the party retired to the museum tent, where they remained +undisturbed until the present season of the Peach Bottom fair had come +to an end. + +It was an unusually late hour for fakirs to arise when Mr. Sweet +awakened the boys as he said: + +"Turn out now, lads, an' get your stuff ready for removal. I'm sorry to +part company, but we can't stay here forever, an' the museum must be +forty miles the other side of Waterville by Monday morning." + +Dan had completed and been paid for his work with the Stevens Company, +therefore he had nothing to do; Teddy no longer claimed any interest in +the canes and knives left over from the week's work; consequently he was +free to go where he pleased, and Tim had his goods in such a condition +that they could be removed at any moment, which prevented him from +feeling any anxiety regarding the future. + +Thus it was that all three of the boys were at liberty to assist the +proprietor of the museum, and this they did with a will until the +arrival of Lawyer Harvey caused them to think of what had almost been +forgotten in the bustle and confusion of breaking camp. + +"We are due at the 'Squire's office at nine o'clock, and it is time you +boys were getting over that way," he said, briskly; "our case won't come +up to-day, but it has been decided to give Hazelton a hearing, and I am +very much afraid he's going to get the worst of it." + +"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, anxiously. + +"Well, you see I have not been able to get any information in addition +to what you boys furnished, and there seems little doubt that the +'Squire must perforce bind him over for trial. The fact that he has +deliberately swindled so many people will work against him, and we can +do very little to save him." + +"What will be the result of his being bound over?" Teddy asked. + +"He must remain in jail, unless he can get bail, until next fall." + +"But that in itself will be a terrible punishment." + +"True; yet it cannot be avoided. If he had worked honestly the case +would be different; but now he will be fortunate even to get out in the +fall." + +"Yet Uncle Nathan says I am equally guilty." + +"We can easily show you had nothing to do with the robbery, and that is +our only care this morning." + +"What about Long Jim?" + +"He remains silent, refusing to answer the simplest questions, and +unless he speaks Hazelton must be bound over; the 'Squire can pursue no +other course." + +Believing as they did that Hazelton was innocent of the charge upon +which he had been arrested, both Teddy and Dan felt it was a great +hardship for the fakir to remain so long in prison; but since it was +beyond their power to give him any relief, neither expressed an opinion +other than has been recorded. + +Mr. Harvey had come for them to accompany him to the Squire's office, +and since there was nothing to detain them they set out, after first +bidding Mr. Sweet a cordial 'goodby, for he had announced his intention +of leaving Peach Bottom on the noon train. + +"I shall see one or both of you at some time in the future," he said, +with considerable feeling, "an' there'll be no complaint to make if I +never fall in with worse boys." + +The bouncer and the clown also had something to say in the form of an +adieu, and when the boys left the proprietor of the alleged wonderful +museum it was like parting with an old friend, for he had shown himself +to be a "very present help in time of trouble." + +Tim did not propose to start for the Run until his companions had +concluded their business; his goods were packed ready for removal, and +there was nothing better for him to do than accompany them to the +court-room where it seemed as if all they might say would result only in +a long term of imprisonment for Hazelton before he could be tried on the +baseless charge brought against him, simply because of the disreputable +business in which he was engaged. + +Mr. Harvey had little or nothing to say during the walk to the 'Squire's +office, and arriving there the jewelry fakir was seen looking thoroughly +despondent. + +"Can I speak with him?" Teddy asked the lawyer. "What do you want to +say?" + +"Nothing in particular, except to tell him how bad I feel because we +could do nothing to clear him." + +"Very well; but do not talk long, for it may prejudice your own case. +The people whom he has swindled are here to see that some form of +punishment is meted out to him, and it can do you no good to be seen +acting as a consoler." + +This possibility troubled Teddy very little since he was confident of +his own innocence, and he approached the prisoner as he said: + +"I wish I could do something, Mr. Hazelton, to prove you as innocent as +I believe you to be." + +"There's no need of that, my boy. I've put you in a hole already, and +you've done more for me than some others who call themselves friends." + +"I know it was Long Jim who committed the burglary; but how can it be +proven now?" + +"There was only one way, and that was to catch the real thieves with +their plunder. Mr. Harvey tells me his attempt was a failure, an' it +wouldn't surprise me if I was not only remanded for trial, but received +a sentence for something of which I am absolutely innocent. I don't +profess to be very good, my boy, as you may understand after seeing me +work on the fair grounds; but I never yet descended to do such things as +I am charged with now." + +"I am certain of that," and Teddy pressed the prisoner's hand in token +of friendship, "and only wish it was possible to aid you." + +"You have already done more than my partners did," was the grateful +reply, and then further conversation was prevented as the 'Squire called +the assembly to order. + +It was not a regular court of law; but one would have thought it the +most dignified judicial body in the country had he seen the air with +which the 'Squire took his seat at the head of the long table as he +called the case. + +"That settles Hazelton," Dan whispered as Teddy left the prisoner and +rejoined his friends. "Somebody has got to suffer in order to make the +law come out square, an' he's the feller what'll have to stand the brunt +of everything." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +_AN ARRIVAL._ + + +Lawyer Harvey did not neglect anything which might work to the advantage +of his client; but in the face of the evidence his efforts appeared to +be in vain. + +Uncle Nathan, who arrived just as the case was called, swore to the fact +that Hazelton had been in his store on the Sunday afternoon prior to the +robbery, and that he had told the prisoner of his keeping large amounts +of money in the building, because of the difficulty and expense of +sending the cash to the Waterville bank. + +He also testified that Hazelton seemed unusually interested in +everything pertaining to the store, and asked many questions relative to +his (the witness') habits, such as the time when business usually began, +how late he remained in the building at night, as well as several other +things which now seemed as if the information had been sought simply for +the purpose of knowing when would be the safest time to commit the +crime. + +"How much did you lose?" Mr. Harvey asked. + +"I don't know for certain; but I stand willin' to give fifty dollars if +the goods can be recovered, an' if my nephew would tell all he +knows----" + +"That will do, Mr. Hargreaves," the lawyer said, sharply. "Teddy is not +under examination, and until he is we do not care to hear your opinion +concerning him." + +"I reckon I can tell what I want to, can't I, 'Squire?" + +"You must confine yourself to this particular case. As to whether there +is sufficient evidence to bind the prisoner over does not concern the +charge against your nephew, at least not to the extent of your telling +what you think." + +"I thought, perhaps, if he heard me say I'd give fifty dollars to know +where the goods were, an' knew I'd swear to it, he might confess, for he +has shown himself to be powerful fond of a dollar." + +"That appears to be a peculiarity of some of his relatives," Mr. Harvey +said, dryly, and at this remark the spectators laughed heartily, while +the old man growled: + +"I didn't come here to be told that I was a miser; but it seems even men +who call themselves gentlemen think sich things are all right." + +"If you have no other evidence to give we will not detain you," the +lawyer said, sharply; and as Uncle Nathan returned to his chair near the +door the proprietor of the hotel at the Run was called upon to testify. + +What he said was in favor of the prisoner rather than otherwise. + +He swore to the fact that the prisoner spent the night on which the +burglary was committed at his house; that he pretended to retire at an +early hour, and started for Peach Bottom on the first stage. + +Under Mr. Harvey's skillful cross-examination the landlord admitted that +unless a man got out of the window he could not have left the house +without the knowledge of the watchman, who kept the keys and remained in +the office all night. It was also shown that Hazelton brought and +carried away with him, so far as was known at the hotel, nothing but a +small traveling satchel. + +Then several people from the Run were called to prove that the fakir was +really in the town on this particular Sunday, and the driver of the +stage testified that the prisoner rode with him the entire distance to +Peach Bottom. The landlord of the hotel where Hazelton boarded during +the fair week, or so much of it as he was at liberty, swore to the fact +that the prisoner had never brought any quantity of baggage to his +house, and appeared to be very regular in his habits. So far as he (the +landlord) knew, the fakir remained in his room nearly all the time, +except while on the exhibition grounds. + +This ended the testimony, and Mr. Harvey argued that there was really +no evidence to connect the prisoner with the crime. + +"That he conducted a game which could hardly be called honest is +admitted," he said; "but it has nothing to do with the case. Prejudice +should not be allowed to take the place of facts, and I insist that my +client be released." + +"I reckon there's sufficient ground for suspicion," the 'Squire replied, +"an' I don't see any other way out of it. A jury must decide, an' I +shall hold him in the sum of three thousand----" + +At this moment the dignity of the court received a severe shock, as a +most unseemly disturbance suddenly occurred at the door, and the 'Squire +paused to learn who was so bold as to disturb the representative of the +law at the very instant when he was delivering an opinion. + +"It's nobody but a boy," Uncle Nathan replied as he held the door firmly +closed, while the would-be visitor kicked so vigorously as to threaten +the destruction of the panels. + +"Bring him in here, an' we'll see whether such a row can be kicked up in +a court of law with impunity." + +"Better let me throw him into the street," Uncle Nathan snarled. + +"Mr. Constable, bring that boy before me," the 'Squire said, sternly, +and an instant later, to the consternation of all those who had seen +him, the boy who was supposed to have been drowned two days before +entered, looking decidedly the worse for having existed so long without +water and soap. + +"Why, it's Sam, an' he ain't dead!" Teddy cried as he rose to his feet. + +"Of course I ain't; but it wouldn't been many days before I turned into +a corpse if I hadn't got away from them thieves," the amateur detective +replied. + +"Who are you, an' what do you want here?" the 'Squire asked, sternly, as +he rapped on the table for the spectators to remain silent. + +"Why, I'm Sam Balderston, the feller who come to the fair to work for +the Davis Boat an' Oar Company of Detroit, an' if what Long Jim told me +was true, folks have been tryin' to find me in the creek." + +"This is the boy who was reported to have been drowned on the day when +those lads," here the lawyer pointed to Teddy and Dan, "claim to have +seen two men carrying goods into an old barn on the marshes. I fancy he +can give us information relative to the true burglars." + +"You bet I can," and now that he was the central figure in the scene, +all Sam's old assurance returned. "If you mean the fellers what broke +into Teddy's uncle's store, I can flash one of them up. The other come +to the fair an' didn't get back, so Phil thought he was arrested." + +"Who do you mean by the other fellow?" Mr. Harvey asked. + +"Why, Long Jim, the same man what swindled Teddy out of his fifteen +dollars at Waterville." + +"Have you been with him since your disappearance?" + +"Most of the time he hung around, an' then ag'in Phil was there." + +"Who is Phil?" + +"Long Jim's partner. They've got a slat of stuff what has been stole +'round here, an' I know where all of it is." + +"Tell the 'Squire the whole story." + +This was Sam's opportunity, and, in order to cover himself with glory, +he slaughtered the truth in the most shocking manner. + +"Well," he said, in a consequential way, "when Dan an' me an' Teddy saw +the thieves carryin' stuff down to that old barn I wanted to rush in an' +arrest both; but the other fellows was scared an' come ashore to talk +with Hazelton so's he'd tell 'em what to do. Then I jes' made up my mind +to carry on the job myself, an' went back." + +"Where?" the 'Squire asked. + +"To the barn to get the stuff. While I was diggin' it up the men come +back, an' the minute they saw who was on their trail they got +frightened." + +"And who was on their trail?" the 'Squire interrupted. + +"Why, me, of course. They rushed in, an' I had the awfullest row; but it +was two to one, an' so I got the worst of it. They had to work mighty +hard before gettin' me tired, an' then all the stuff was dug up an' put +in the boat. My craft was upset an' sent adrift, so's to make it look as +if I was dead, an' we went down the creek six or seven miles, where we +hid in the woods. Phil came back here after more goods what had been +stolen, an' they was goin' to skip the country, when there was a big +row, an' Long Jim allowed he'd come to the fair once more. Phil was mad, +an' got pretty drunk, an' after that I had my innings. I turned to an' +lashed him up same's I'd been; but we had an' awful fight. It takes +more'n one man to git away with me." + +"Where is this fellow now?" the 'Squire interrupted again. + +"Down the creek, tied up so's he can't hardly breathe, an' he must be +pretty near sober by this time." + +"If he was very drunk I do not understand how he could have fought so +hard." + +"Well, he did; but I got the best of him, an' what's more, I know where +all the stuff that's been stolen is hid." + +"Mr. Constable, bring into court the prisoner who is charged with +swindling, and let us see if this extraordinary boy can identify him," +the 'Squire said, with an unusual amount of dignity. + +"If it's Long Jim, you bet I can," Sam said, as he turned toward the +spectators that they might have a good opportunity of seeing such a +wonderful detective as he claimed to be. + +Teddy and Dan could hardly control their impatience to speak privately +with Sam. As a matter of course, they understood that he was +embellishing the story, and both were eager to make him tell the exact +truth. + +Just at that moment, however, Sam had no time to spend on ordinary boys. +He had come out of a bad scrape with apparently flying colors, and +intended to enjoy his triumph to the utmost before sinking back to his +rightful plane. + +The jail was near at hand, and Sam had not exhibited himself as much as +he desired when Long Jim was brought in. + +On seeing the boy the burglar gave a start of surprise, and allowed the +incriminating question to escape his lips: + +"Has Phil been pinched, too?" + +"I took care of that business, an' we'll bring him in some time to-day. +Say, what about that awful lickin' you was goin' to give me?" + +"I'll cut your throat before this job is finished," was the angry reply, +and there was no longer any necessity of asking Sam if he recognized the +prisoner. + +"You say you can show us the stolen goods, and the other burglar is +where the officers can get him?" Mr. Harvey asked. + +"That's just what I can do," Sam replied, proudly. + +"Then you will have earned fifty dollars, for Mr. Hargreaves has +promised, even sworn, that he will pay that amount for the return of his +property," Mr. Harvey continued. + +"He might as well give me the money now, for I'm ready to turn the stuff +up, an' when there's more big detective work to be done, come to me." + +"I don't know about payin' any reward till I'm certain the little +villain isn't one of the thieves himself, an' is doin' this to swindle +me," Uncle Nathan cried, quickly. + +"He shall have the reward if the story is true," the 'Squire replied. +"You can't go back on what you've sworn to, an' must pay up. Mr. +Constable, get two or three men an' go with this boy. Don't lose sight +of him for a minute until he has given all the information in his +power." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +_IN CONCLUSION._ + + +Sam was led away before either Teddy or Dan could speak privately with +him; but they went at once to congratulate Hazelton on his apparently +happy escape, and, in response to Mr. Harvey's request, the 'Squire +said: + +"The prisoner can remain here, or in your custody, until the party +returns. If the boy has told the truth there is nothing for me to do but +discharge him, and I am really glad that he has come out so +fortunately." + +"Don't think I'll ever forget what you've done for me," Hazelton +whispered to Teddy. + +"But it isn't me at all. Sam seems to have fixed everything." + +"I've got an idea that I know pretty near the truth of the whole story, +never mind how he tells it. At all events, we've no reason to complain, +for if the goods and the other burglar are found, we are out of our +trouble. Your uncle's charges can't hold after that." + +It was, as Teddy now realized for the first time, a happy conclusion to +the troubles of both, and his heart was lighter than it had been at any +time since the accusation was made. + +There was no question that those who had gone with Sam would be absent +several hours, and the little party in the court-room had more time at +their disposal than could well be occupied by the discussion of their +affairs. + +After the different phases of the case had been gone over in detail, +Hazelton asked Teddy: + +"How did you come out at the fair?" + +"I haven't figured up; but I know I've made a good deal, an' it must be +almost enough, countin' the money Deacon Jones gave us, to pay the debt +on the place." + +Until this moment Teddy had had so much on his mind that the principal +cause of his turning fakir was absent from his mind; but now, with +nothing better to do, he began to count up the week's work, announcing +the result a few moments later by saying: + +"I took in two hundred an' fifty-two dollars an' fifty cents during the +week. Out of that must come the money I lost at Waterville, what I paid +Uncle Nathan, the privilege, the money I paid Mr. Reaves for the stock, +Tim's wages, an' my board. That leaves one hundred an' forty-five +dollars an' ninety-eight cents. With what came in from the testimonial +I'll have enough to pay off the debt on the house, an' pretty near +eight dollars for myself, which is what I call a big week's work." + +"I'm glad you have made it," Hazelton replied, heartily. "There is a +little matter between you an' I which yet remains to be settled, and +when that has been done you should be considerably better off." + +"I don't want you to do a thing," Teddy said, quickly. "So many people +have helped me since the fair opened that it seems as if I was nothing +more or less than a beggar." + +"You come very far from deserving that title," the fakir replied, and +then the entrance of Mr. Reaves interrupted the conversation. After +talking with the lawyer, the merchant said to Teddy: + +"I am more than pleased to learn that you will be freed from all your +troubles in a short time. Next week I shall be in need of a clerk, and +if you wish to take the situation it shall be left open until you are +ready to go to work. The wages are six dollars a week for the first +year, with an increase as soon as you can earn it, and I will really be +pleased to have you in my employ." + +"I'd like to come," Teddy replied; "but it don't seem just right to +leave mother." + +"There is no necessity of doing so. You can ride back and forth on the +stage, unless your mother should decide, as I think she will eventually, +to make her home in Waterville." + +"If she approves of the plan I'll come to work next week." + +"Make it two weeks, so that there'll be plenty of time to arrange +matters, and I will expect you," the merchant replied in a tone which +showed that he was more than satisfied with the arrangement. "I only +came over to see if you needed any assistance; but Mr. Harvey says +you'll soon be free from the charge your uncle made, therefore I will go +back at once." + +About an hour after the merchant departed Sam and the constables +returned with Phil and the stolen goods. + +The amateur detective was in the best possible spirits, and now that the +burglar had been apprehended through his assistance the boy felt +absolutely certain he was the greatest detective in the country. + +As a matter of course, there was nothing the 'Squire could do save +discharge Hazelton from custody, and after Mr. Harvey had given his word +that he would take care Sam should appear when wanted as a witness, the +boy rejoined his friends, saying as he did so: + +"If you fellers had done as I wanted you'd be way up now, the same as I +am. Of course, I don't blame you for being afraid; but when you go out +on such work the only way is to hold on." + +"I wonder how long you'd have held on if the men hadn't made you stay +with them?" Dan asked. + +"Who told you that?" Sam said. "If I staid, it was because I knowed it +wouldn't be long until I got the upper hand of the gang, an I've done +it." + +Before the party separated, and while Uncle Nathan was identifying the +goods which had been stolen from him, Mr. Harvey insisted that the +reward should be paid, and although it was very much like drawing a +tooth, the old man was finally induced to make his word good. + +"It's a pile of money, but I earned it," Sam said, as he tucked Uncle +Nathan's grudgingly bestowed cash in his trousers pocket. "There ain't +many 'round this part of the country who could have done what I did, an' +it's only right detectives should be well paid." + +Then, with many protestations of friendship, the lawyer started for +home, after returning to Hazelton the money which Teddy had given Mr. +Reaves for safekeeping, and the fakir said as he walked out of the +court-room with the four boys: + +"Now, I want you to come with me, until my business is settled, and then +I'll shake the dust of Peach Bottom from my feet in the shortest +possible time." + +Not understanding what he meant, the boys accompanied him to the nearest +jewelry store, and there he bought two silver watches, which he +presented to Teddy and Dan, as he said: + +"These are only to remind you that I am grateful for what has been done. +It isn't much of a present; but it will suffice to show I'm not +ungrateful. Some time in the future I may meet you again, and then the +full debt shall be paid if I'm solid enough to do it." + +He was gone almost before the astonished boys could thank him, and with +his departure this story should properly be concluded, since Teddy has +made his last appearance as a fakir. + +A few more words, and "the end" shall be written. + +Sam, still believing himself especially designed for a detective, is yet +displaying his "style" as an oarsman in the employ of the Davis Boat and +Oar Company, and he believes he has guessed the weight of the yacht +which is so soon to be given away. + +Dan accepted an offer from Mr. Reaves last week, and he and Teddy are +learning the same business, both looking forward to the time when they +shall own a store equally as large. + +Uncle Nathan is still at the Run, but his trade has decreased very +materially, and Hazelton has not been seen since the day he left Peach +Bottom; but it is quite possible that when the fair opens this season +all the fakirs may again meet the country boy who made such a successful +venture at the country fair. + + + [THE END.] + + + +[Illustration: 53 STATE ST. + 19 KILBY ST.] + + +CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON. + +RIDPATH'S UNITED STATES. + +Cloth 3.75 Sheep 5.00 Half Morocco 6.00 + +Size of Volumes 7-1/2 × 10-1/4 Inches. + + +[Illustration: THE UNITED STATES A HISTORY +JOHN CLARK RIDPATH L.L.D.] + +_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._ + +FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE +PUBLISHERS. + + +CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS BOSTON. + +HALL'S IRELAND, 3 VOLS. IN 1. + +Cloth 3.75 Sheep 5.00 Half Morocco 6.00 + +Size of Volumes 7 1/2 × 10 1/4 Inches. + + +[Illustration: IRELAND ITS HISTORY SCENERY AND PEOPLE] + +_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._ + +FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE +PUBLISHERS. + + +CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON. + +MISS PARLOA'S COOK BOOK. + +Cloth, silver and black Side and Back 1.25 + +Size of Volumes 5-1/4 × 7-3/4 Inches. + + +[Illustration: MISS PARLOA'S COOK BOOK] + +_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._ + + +FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE +PUBLISHERS. + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +Transcriber's Note: + +[----] denotes a word missing in the original text. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A +COUNTRY FAIR*** + + +******* This file should be named 37647-8.txt or 37647-8.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/7/6/4/37647 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/37647-8.zip b/37647-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8ee8bd --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-8.zip diff --git a/37647-h.zip b/37647-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8701be --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h.zip diff --git a/37647-h/37647-h.htm b/37647-h/37647-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7fd22f --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/37647-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,10698 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair, by James Otis</title> + <style type="text/css"> + + blockquote { + text-align:justify; + } + + body { + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + } + + .booktitle { + letter-spacing:3px; + } + + .centered { + text-align:center; + font-weight:bold; + } + + div.centered { + text-align:center; + } + + div.centered table { + margin-left:auto; + margin-right:auto; + text-align:left; + } + + .figcenter { + padding:1em; + text-align:center; + font-size:0.8em; + border:none; + margin:auto; + text-indent:1em; + } + + .h1 { + font-size:2em; + margin:.67em 0; + } + + .h1, + .h2, + .h3, + .h5, + .h6 { + font-weight:bolder; + text-align:center; + text-indent:0; + } + + h1, + h2, + h3, + h5, + h6 { + text-align:center; + } + + .h2 { + font-size:1.5em; + margin:.75em 0; + } + + .h3 { + font-size:1.17em; + margin:.83em 0; + } + + .h5 { + font-size:.83em; + margin:1.5em 0 ; + } + + h5 { + margin-bottom:1%; + margin-top:1%; + } + + .h6 { + font-size:.75em; + margin:1.67em 0; + } + + hr.chapter { + margin-top:6em; + margin-bottom:4em; + } + + p { + text-align:justify; + margin-top:.75em; + margin-bottom:.75em; + text-indent:0; + } + + p.author { + text-align:right; + margin-right:10%; + } + + p.caption { + text-indent:0; + text-align:center; + font-weight:bold; + margin-bottom:2em; + } + + p.spacer { + margin-top:2em; + margin-bottom:3em; + } + + .pagenum { +/* visibility:hidden; remove comment out to hide page numbers */ + position:absolute; + right:2%; + font-size:75%; + color:gray; + background-color:inherit; + text-align:right; + text-indent:0; + font-style:normal; + font-weight:normal; + font-variant:normal; + } + + .smcap { + font-variant:small-caps; + } + + .tdl { + text-align:left; + } + + .tdr { + text-align:right; + padding-right:1em; + } + + .tdrfirst { + text-align:right; + padding-right:1em; + font-size:80%; + } + + .topbox { + margin-left:15%; + margin-right:15%; + margin-top:5%; + margin-bottom:5%; + padding:1em; + color:black; + border:2px solid black; + } + + .trnote { + margin-left:15%; + margin-right:15%; + margin-top:5%; + margin-bottom:5%; + padding:1em; + background-color:#f6f2f2; + color:black; + border:1px dotted black; + } + + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 85%;} + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country +Fair, by James Otis</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair</p> +<p>Author: James Otis</p> +<p>Release Date: October 6, 2011 [eBook #37647]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Matthew Wheaton,<br /> + and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> + +<div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="400" height="602" alt="Cover" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair<br /> +James Otis</p> + +<p class="spacer"> </p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus002.jpg" width="600" height="489" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying, "Stop thief!" +at the full strength of his lungs.</p> + +<p class="spacer"> </p> + +<div class="topbox"> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> +<img src="images/title-page.jpg" width="400" height="567" alt="" /> +</div> +</div> + +<h1 class="booktitle">The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair</h1> + +<p class="h2">By James Otis<br /> +<br /> +Author of Toby Tyler Etc.<br /> +<br /> +<span class="smcap">Illustrated</span><br /> +<br /><br /><br /> +Boston<br /> +Charles E. Brown & Co.</p> + +<p class="spacer"> </p> + +<p class="h5">Copyright, 1893,<br /> +<span class="smcap">By Charles E. Brown & Co.</span></p> + +<p class="spacer"> </p> + +<p class="h6">S. J. PARKHILL & CO., PRINTERS<br /> +BOSTON</p> + +<p class="spacer"> </p> + +<p class="h3">CONTENTS.</p> + +<div class="centered"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> + <tr> + <td class="tdrfirst">CHAPTER.</td> + <td class="tdl"> </td> + <td class="tdrfirst">PAGE.</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_I">I</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Young Fakir</td> + <td class="tdr">9</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_II">II</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">An Old Fakir</td> + <td class="tdr">18</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_III">III</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Friend</td> + <td class="tdr">27</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">IV</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">Uncle Nathan</td> + <td class="tdr">36</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_V">V</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Fair</td> + <td class="tdr">45</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">VI</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Clue</td> + <td class="tdr">54</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">VII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Clerk</td> + <td class="tdr">63</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">VIII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Jewelry Fakir</td> + <td class="tdr">72</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">IX</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Brave Rescue</td> + <td class="tdr">81</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_X">X</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">An Encounter</td> + <td class="tdr">90</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">XI</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">Long Jim</td> + <td class="tdr">99</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">XII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Discovery</td> + <td class="tdr">108</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">XIII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">Amateur Detectives</td> + <td class="tdr">117</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">XIV</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Rendezvous</td> + <td class="tdr">126</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">XV</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">Sam's Adventures</td> + <td class="tdr">135</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">XVI</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">Missing</td> + <td class="tdr">144</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">XVII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Terrible Night</td> + <td class="tdr">153</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">XVIII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Narrow Escape</td> + <td class="tdr">162</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">XIX</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Arrest</td> + <td class="tdr">171</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XX">XX</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Proposition</td> + <td class="tdr">180</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">XXI</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">With the Burglars</td> + <td class="tdr">189</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">XXII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Disaster</td> + <td class="tdr">198</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII">XXIII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Second Arrest</td> + <td class="tdr">207</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV">XXIV</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Third Arrest</td> + <td class="tdr">216</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXV">XXV</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">On Bail</td> + <td class="tdr">225</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI">XXVI</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Fakirs' Party</td> + <td class="tdr">234</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII">XXVII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">In Hiding</td> + <td class="tdr">243</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII">XXVIII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">A Failure</td> + <td class="tdr">252</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX">XXIX</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Testimonial</td> + <td class="tdr">261</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXX">XXX</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">The Trial</td> + <td class="tdr">270</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI">XXXI</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">An Arrival</td> + <td class="tdr">279</td> + </tr> + <tr> + <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXII">XXXII</a>.</td> + <td class="tdl">In Conclusion</td> + <td class="tdr">288</td> + </tr> +</table></div> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum">[9]</span></p> + +<p class="h2"><i>THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR.</i></p> +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_I" ></a>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A YOUNG FAKIR.</i></p> + +<p>"I'm going to try it. Deacon Jones says I can +have the right to run both things for ten dollars, +and Uncle Nathan is going to lend me money +enough to get the stock."</p> + +<p>"What scheme have you got in your head now, +Teddy Hargreaves?" and Mrs. Fernald looked over +her spectacles at the son of her widowed sister, who +was literally breathless in his excitement.</p> + +<p>"I'm going to run a cane an' knife board at the +Peach Bottom fair, and try to make money enough +to pay the debt mother owes on the place."</p> + +<p>"You're crazy—mad as a March hare! The idea +of a child like you setting yourself up to earn three<span class="pagenum">[10]</span> +or four hundred dollars, when your father worked +all his life and couldn't get so much together."</p> + +<p>Mrs. Fernald really appeared to be angry, and she +really believed there was good cause why she +should lose her temper. The thought that little +Teddy—a "whiflet" she called him—should set up +his opinion in such matters against his elders, and +attempt to earn in one season an amount which +Seth Hargreaves had never been able to repay during +his thirty-six years of life, was so preposterous +that the good lady looked upon the boy's assertion +as positive proof that he was not only ready but +willing to "fly in the face of Providence."</p> + +<p>"I shall try it all the same," Teddy replied in a +most provokingly matter-of-fact tone, "an' I'm going +down to see Uncle Nathan this very minute."</p> + +<p>"Very well, and I consider it my bounden duty +to advise your mother to keep you in the house until +the fair is ended," Aunt Sarah said, as she took +from its peg the well-worn gingham sun-bonnet.</p> + +<p>Teddy had no desire to prolong the conversation, +which had been begun simply because his aunt insisted +on knowing where he had been, but hurried +away from the gate on which he had been swinging +while Mrs. Fernald questioned him, as if fearful +lest she might try to detain him until the matter +could be settled according to her own ideas of propriety.</p> + +<p>"I can have the right to run what I want to,<span class="pagenum">[11]</span> +every day the fair lasts, for ten dollars, an' now, if +you lend me fifteen, I'll be all right," the boy cried +as he burst into Nathan Hargreaves' store, just as +the old gentleman was adding a trifle more sand to +the sugar, in order to compensate for what might +possibly have been spilled by the careless clerk.</p> + +<p>"Oh, it's fixed, eh? And you're really goin' to +turn fakir?" Uncle Nathan asked, wrinkling his +face into the semblance of a laugh, but remaining +silent, as if fearing to waste even such a cheap +thing as mirth.</p> + +<p>"What's a fakir?"</p> + +<p>"A man, or a boy, for that matter, who goes out +to sell things as you count on doin', if I'm fool +enough to let you throw away fifteen good dollars +of mine."</p> + +<p>"But you promised to lend me the money."</p> + +<p>"An' I'm going to do it; but that don't make me +any less a fool jest because I'm holdin' to my word. +Tell me what you count on doin', an' then we'll +come down to the business end of the scheme."</p> + +<p>"I'll pay the ten dollars I've got to Deacon Jones +for the right to run the games, an' with what you +lend me I'm goin' to Waterville an' buy a whole lot +of knives an' canes. There's a storekeeper over +there who promises to sell that kind of goods for +less than they cost him."</p> + +<p>"An' he's lyin' when he says it. People don't do +business for the fun of it; but that's neither here<span class="pagenum">[12]</span> +nor there so far as our trade is concerned. I'm goin' +to give you the fifteen dollars now—it's a power of +money for a boy of your size, Teddy—, an' if you +make anything, as I allow you will, I'm to have +eighteen dollars back; don't forget that part of the +trade."</p> + +<p>"I'll stand to what I agreed, Uncle Nathan, and +you shall be paid the very day the fair closes."</p> + +<p>"Here it is," and with a sigh which was almost a +groan Uncle Nathan took from a fat calfskin wallet +three five-dollar bills, adding, as he handed +them to Teddy: "Be careful of it, my boy, for I'm +puttin' almost too much confidence in a child of +your size, an' nobody knows how distressed I'd be +if anything happened to prevent your paying it +back."</p> + +<p>Teddy placed the money carefully in the inside +pocket of his vest, and, after promising for at least +the hundredth time that it should be repaid by the +close of the following week, hurried home confident +in the belief that he was on an extremely short +road to wealth.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Hargreaves was by no means as sanguine as +her son concerning the success of the scheme, and +actually appeared frightened when Teddy showed +her the money he had received from his Uncle +Nathan, who was reputed to be the "closest-fisted" +merchant to be found within a day's ride of Peach +Bottom Run.<span class="pagenum">[13]</span></p> + +<p>"If you should lose it, Teddy, and be unable to +pay him back at the exact time you promised, it +would be the undoing of us, for we could never expect +to get another dollar. I know he is not generous, +but have always believed that if we should be +in yet more straitened circumstances he would +give us some assistance. He has neither charity +nor mercy for any one who does not pay a little +more than his just debts—"</p> + +<p>"But I shall give back every cent of this, mother, +so don't look as if you were in such distress. I want +to go to Waterville to buy my stock in the morning, +an' am counting on walking. It's only seven +miles, an' I'll save fifty cents by traveling on +shanks' mare."</p> + +<p>"I will have breakfast ready by four o'clock; but +you must come back on the stage, Teddy."</p> + +<p>"Yes, if I feel very tired; but I don't know of +any easier way to earn a dollar than by walking +both ways."</p> + +<p>The young "fakir" believed he knew exactly +what kind and amount of stock he wished to purchase +on the following day, therefore he had no +preparations to make for the journey save to get +his limbs in the best possible condition for the +tramp by retiring very early, in order to "scoop in" +plenty of sleep.</p> + +<p>The thought of the success which should attend +him in his new venture kept his eyes open a long<span class="pagenum">[14]</span> +while after getting into bed, and when he finally +succeeded in crossing over to the land of Nod, +dreams of the fortune to be made during the coming +week visited his brain, and remained there until +his mother's voice summoned him to breakfast.</p> + +<p>The sun had not yet come up from behind the +hills when he was trudging sturdily along over the +dusty road, carrying a generous luncheon tied in a +snowy-white napkin, and with his money secured +by many pins in the lining of his cap.</p> + +<p>"Be careful not to lose it, for your Uncle Nathan +would never forgive you," his mother had said, and +he cried cheerily, as he walked swiftly down the +lane to the highway:</p> + +<p>"There's no fear of anything like that happening; +the bills can't get away without my knowing +it so long as they stay here," and Teddy pulled his +cap yet more closely down on his head.</p> + +<p>In a trifle more than two hours he was at Waterville, +wondering why the stores were not open, no +matter how early it was, when such an important +customer as himself came to town.</p> + +<p>Since the merchants were evidently ignorant of +his arrival, as was evidenced by the fact that their +places of business yet remained closed, there was +no more profitable occupation for him than to eat a +second breakfast, which he proceeded to do, using +a hand-truck on the depot-platform as a seat.</p> + +<p>The train which left New York on the evening<span class="pagenum">[15]</span> +before had arrived some time previous, and the +station was temporarily deserted by all save a boy +of about Teddy's age, who was walking to and fro +in an aimless manner.</p> + +<p>By the time the young "fakir" had finished his +second biscuit he noticed that the stranger was +watching him narrowly, and, holding forth the +napkin with its generous store, he asked:</p> + +<p>"Have one?"</p> + +<p>"I don't care if I do," said the boy, carelessly, +and he continued:</p> + +<p>"I reckon you live 'round here?"</p> + +<p>"No, I jest come up from Peach Bottom Run, an' +am waiting for the stores to be opened."</p> + +<p>"Why, you're from the same place where the fair +is goin' to be held."</p> + +<p>"No; I live at the Run, an' the fair is over to +Peach Bottom, most five miles from my house. Are +you goin' there?"</p> + +<p>"I should reckon I was. Why, I'm goin' to help +run it."</p> + +<p>"You are?" and Teddy's mouth opened wide in +astonishment.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir-ree, an' you fellers will be jest about +crazy when I tell you what I've come to do."</p> + +<p>"Don't flash it upon us too quick, for we wanter +kind of keep our wits about us till the fun is over."</p> + +<p>The tone of sarcasm in Teddy's voice appeared to +nettle the stranger.<span class="pagenum">[16]</span></p> + +<p>"I've come down here to give away a steamboat +what's worth five hundred dollars."</p> + +<p>"Then there ain't any need for you to go any +farther, 'cause I'm willin' to take it now."</p> + +<p>"If you won't be so smart I'll tell you about it," +was the dignified reply. "There's a firm out in Detroit +what's goin' to do that very thing to the feller +that can guess how much she weighs, an' I've been +hired to help the man who is comin' down to Peach +Bottom to show off a lot of boats."</p> + +<p>"What are you goin' to do?" and now Teddy was +interested.</p> + +<p>"Row around in the creek while he looks out for +the stuff in the fair. It won't be any more'n fun, +an' if you'll come over I'll take you out."</p> + +<p>"I don't s'pose you could help me guess how +much the steamer weighs, could you?"</p> + +<p>"There ain't anybody as can do that, 'cause you +see she ain't built yet; but you can find out all +about it by lookin' on the fair grounds for the circulars +what the Davis Boat and Oar Company of +Detroit will throw around, an' if there's somethin' +else you wanter know jest ask for Sam Balderston; +all the folks will know me before I've been there +very long."</p> + +<p>"I'm going to work at the fair myself," Teddy replied, +and then, in response to his new friend's +questions, he gave him all the particulars of his +proposed venture.<span class="pagenum">[17]</span></p> + +<p>"I reckon you'll get along all right, an' come out +way ahead, if some of these smart fakirs don't try +to get the best of you. Say, why can't I go to your +house, an' stay till it's time to go over to the fair? +I'll pay my way."</p> + +<p>"If mother's willin', I'd like to have you, an' I +don't believe she'll care. Now, I've got to buy my +stuff. Where'll I meet you afterward?"</p> + +<p>"I'm goin' with you," Sam said, in a matter-of-fact +tone. "I know a good deal about such things, +an' won't see you cheated."</p> + +<p>Teddy hardly thought he was in need of any assistance; +but since he did not want to offend this +fellow who was concerned in giving away a steamboat, +he could not well refuse, therefore the two +started up the street together.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[18]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>AN OLD FAKIR.</i></p> + +<p>Sam had very much advice to give during the +short walk, and while the greater portion of it +was worthless, there were bits which might be of +value to the young "fakir."</p> + +<p>"Don't buy anything till you have seen all there +is in town, an' then you'll know which is the cheapest," +Sam repeated several times, with an air of +wisdom, and Teddy believed this to be a good +idea.</p> + +<p>With this object in view the two boys walked +from store to store, examining that particular quality +of canes and knives which Teddy thought +would be best suited to his purpose, and Sam had +no hesitation in criticising the goods boldly, until +more than one of the clerks lost his temper entirely +and refused to show the full stock.</p> + +<p>"If you go on this way, Sam, we won't get the +business done to day, an' I want to send the stuff +down in the stage, which leaves here at three +o'clock."</p> + +<p>"There'll be plenty of time for that; I know what +I'm about. Now, if you had sent your money to me,<span class="pagenum">[19]</span> +I'd got you a dandy lot in New York for almost +nothing."</p> + +<p>"Seein's how I didn't even know your name till a +couple of hours ago, there wasn't much chance for +me to do that, an' I guess I'll make out well enough +here if you don't keep on raisin' a fuss with the +clerks."</p> + +<p>"I won't so much as yip ag'in, if that's the way +you look at it. The question is, which store you're +goin' to buy from?"</p> + +<p>"There's a place near the depot that wasn't open +when we came past. Let's go there, an' then I'll +make up my mind."</p> + +<p>Sam, feeling a trifle injured because his advice +had not been fully appreciated, said nothing more +until they were near the station, and then, seeing a +train approaching, he proposed that they stop for a +few minutes.</p> + +<p>"Jest as likely as not there'll be people on it +whom I know goin' to the fair, an' you want to get +acquainted with all the fakirs, so's they'll help you +along now an' then."</p> + +<p>"The stage goes at three."</p> + +<p>"An' it ain't more'n ten now. Come on!" Sam +cried, triumphantly, as he motioned for Teddy to +come nearer.</p> + +<p>Sam had already quickened his pace, and Teddy +was forced to follow, or injure the feelings of one +whom he believed held a responsible position in the<span class="pagenum">[20]</span> +Peach Bottom exhibition. Among the passengers +alighting from the train as the boys arrived was a +man who carried a large package enveloped in +green cloth, and Sam whispered, excitedly:</p> + +<p>"I'll bet that's an old fakir, and if he is we want +to let him know who we are."</p> + +<p>Teddy failed to understand exactly why this was +necessary; but his companion seemed so positive on +the point that he remained silent.</p> + +<p>This particular passenger appeared to have plenty +of time at his disposal. He placed his package at +one end of the platform, lighted a pipe, and then +walked to and fro as the remainder of the travelers +dispersed.</p> + +<p>"You foller me, an' we'll find out who he is," +Sam whispered, when he thought a fitting opportunity +had come, and then advanced boldly toward +the stranger. "Goin' to the fair?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes; what of it?"</p> + +<p>"Nothin', only I s'pose you know you've got to +take another train here."</p> + +<p>"If I didn't why would I be loafin' around this +dead place?"</p> + +<p>"I jest spoke of it 'cause this feller an' I are goin' +there, too," and Sam waved his hand in the direction +where Teddy was standing.</p> + +<p>"I s'pose there'll be other boys besides you at the +fair, eh?"</p> + +<p>"But we belong to it. I'm to give a steamboat +<span class="pagenum">[21]</span>away, an' he's goin' to run a cane an' knife board. +We're waiting here to buy the stock."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus019.jpg" width="600" height="415" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">THE THREE NOTES WERE HANDED TO THE GENEROUS STRANGER.</p> + +<p>"Oh, you are, eh?" and now the man appeared to +be interested. "I reckon you're goin' to spend as +much as a dollar?"</p> + +<p>"One? Why, he's got fifteen, an' the whole of it +will be spent before the stage leaves. We know +something about the business an' don't count on +gettin' an outfit for nothing."</p> + +<p>"I thought you was a fakir," the man said, in a +more friendly tone, as, unobserved by the worldly-wise +Sam, he made a peculiar gesture to a stranger +immediately in the rear.</p> + +<p>"That's what I am," was the proud reply, "an' +I'll make things hum over at Peach Bottom before +I leave the town. You see I thought I'd speak to +you, 'cause all of us fellers should know each +other."</p> + +<p>"You're right, an' it's mighty lucky you did +strike up an acquaintance, for I can give you a big +lift. I've helped many a boy into the business when +they had money enough to help themselves."</p> + +<p>The last dozen words were spoken in a loud tone, +as if for the benefit of the stranger in the rear; but +instead of waiting to hear more the latter turned +abruptly and walked toward the package with a +green covering at the end of the platform.</p> + +<p>"I knew we oughter talk with you."</p> + +<p>"Did you count on buying your stuff in this one-horse<span class="pagenum">[22]</span> +town?" the man asked as Teddy approached, +and the latter replied:</p> + +<p>"There wasn't any other place I could go to, +'cause it costs too much for a ticket to New York."</p> + +<p>"How big a stock do you want?"</p> + +<p>"All I can get for fifteen dollars. Don't you think +that will be enough?"</p> + +<p>"It depends," the stranger replied, reflectively. +"If you buy the goods here you'll have to pay such +a big price that it won't be much of a pile. Now, if—I've +got the very thing in mind! You'll remember +the day you saw me if my plan works. I know +a fakir here who has a fine layout that he wants to +sell. You can get fifty dollars' worth of stuff for—well, +he asks twenty; but I'll say you are friends +of mine, an' the chances are you can make a trade."</p> + +<p>"That would be a regular snap!" Sam cried, and +Teddy's eyes glistened at the thought of thus procuring +a full outfit so cheaply.</p> + +<p>"I'll do what I can for you," the man said, in a +patronizing tone. "At any rate, I'll make him come +down in his price, and if there's any balance it can +be paid after the fair has been opened long enough +for you to take in some money."</p> + +<p>"If business is good, I'm willing to do what is +right," Teddy replied; "but I must pay Uncle Nathan +first."</p> + +<p>"How much do you owe him?"</p> + +<p>"Fifteen dollars."<span class="pagenum">[23]</span></p> + +<p>"Why, bless my soul, it'll be a pretty poor fair if +you can't make five times that amount in the first +two days."</p> + +<p>"Where can we see the man?" Sam asked, eager +that his wonderfully good trade should be consummated +at the earliest possible opportunity.</p> + +<p>"I don't know; but he's somewhere in the town. +Give me your cash, an' I'll hunt him up inside of +half an hour. The stuff is right here in the baggage-room, +and you can ship it on the stage without +any trouble."</p> + +<p>Just for an instant Teddy hesitated to part with +what seemed to him like an enormous amount of +money; but then came the thought that an old fakir +would not wrong a young one—and he considered +himself such. After some little difficulty he succeeded +in extracting all the pins, and the three +notes were handed to the generous stranger almost +at the same moment that the green-covered package +disappeared from the edge of the platform +simultaneously with the departure of the second +stranger.</p> + +<p>"Wait right here for me," the man said, as he put +the money in his pocket. "I've got too much work +to do to spend any very great amount of time hunting +you fellows up in case you don't stay in one +place."</p> + +<p>After thus cautioning them, the old fakir walked +slowly away, and Sam said:<span class="pagenum">[24]</span></p> + +<p>"It was lucky you fell in with me, Teddy, for I +know how these things are worked, an' can give +you a good many pointers before the fair is over. +Why, you'll have a first-class outfit for about half +what it's worth."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it's a good chance; but I can't see why he +didn't take us with him if he was in a hurry, an' +then he wouldn't have had to come back."</p> + +<p>"He's got to do that anyway, for his stuff is +here," Sam replied, pointing toward where he had +last seen the man's package; but it was no longer +there. "I guess the baggage-master has taken it +in," he added; "but you needn't be afraid of losin' +your money while I'm with you."</p> + +<p>Then Sam occupied his companion's attention by +telling of his many alleged wonderful exploits, +and an hour passed before his story was concluded.</p> + +<p>In the meantime one train had arrived and departed; +another was on the point of leaving the +depot, bound for Peach Bottom, when Teddy cried +as he leaped to his feet:</p> + +<p>"See! I'm certain that's the man who has got +my money!"</p> + +<p>"Where?"</p> + +<p>"On the platform of the front car!"</p> + +<p>Before he could say anything more the train +steamed out, leaving the would-be young fakir +staring at it in distress and consternation.</p> + +<p>"Of course it wasn't him," Sam said, confidently, +<span class="pagenum">[25]</span>when the last car had disappeared from view. +"The stuff he was goin'to buy for you is here in +the baggage-room, 'cause he said so, an' we'll see +him before long."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus025.jpg" width="600" height="444" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">"See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money."</p> + +<p>Teddy's suspicions had been aroused, and he was +not easily quieted. The thought that it was possible +he might have lost the money loaned him by +Uncle Nathan was sufficient to cause the liveliest +fear, and he said, decidedly:</p> + +<p>"I'm going to know where that man's baggage +went to."</p> + +<p>"How'll you find out?"</p> + +<p>"Ask the baggage-master."</p> + +<p>"Don't make a fool of yourself. It would be nice +for an old fakir like that man to know you thought +he'd steal your money."</p> + +<p>"I don't care what he knows, so long as I get my +fifteen dollars back."</p> + +<p>Teddy, trembling with apprehension and excitement, +went into the baggage-room and asked +there if a green-covered package had been taken in +by any of the attendants.</p> + +<p>No one had seen such an article, and all were positive +there was nothing of the kind remaining in +their charge.</p> + +<p>Then he asked if a bundle of canes had been left +there, and to this question there was a most decided +negative.</p> + +<p>"The hangers-on at the fairs haven't begun to<span class="pagenum">[26]</span> +come yet," the baggage-master said, "and when +they do come, we sha'n't have any of their stuff to +handle, for it will all be transferred across the platform +without being brought in here. What is the +matter? Anything gone wrong?"</p> + +<p>The lump which had been rising in Teddy's +throat was now so large that it was with difficulty +he could say:</p> + +<p>"A man has run off with fifteen dollars of mine, +an' Uncle Nathan will jest about kill me!"</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[27]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A FRIEND.</i></p> + +<p>The baggage-master immediately displayed the +utmost sympathy for the victim of the old fakir's +seductive scheme, and Sam was loud in his denunciations +of a brother in the craft who would serve +them in such a shabby manner.</p> + +<p>"You leave him to me, an' I'll show you what +can be done," that young gentleman said, and +Teddy replied, reproachfully:</p> + +<p>"I've left too much to you already. If you hadn't +thought it was necessary to make the acquaintance +of every fellow who was going to the fair I'd +have my fifteen dollars in my cap now."</p> + +<p>"I'll get them back for you."</p> + +<p>"How?"</p> + +<p>"I can't say jest now; but you wait an' see what +I can do."</p> + +<p>Inasmuch as Teddy must account first to his +mother and afterward to Uncle Nathan for that +amount, the confident assertion of his friend failed +to give him any mental relief, and he said, quite +sharply:<span class="pagenum">[28]</span></p> + +<p>"You thought it was all right to give the money +to him, an' if you didn't know any more than a +country boy who'd never even heard of such fellows, +I can't see how you can do much toward +helping."</p> + +<p>At this point the baggage-master, who had been +listening to the conversation, broke in with the +sage remark:</p> + +<p>"It's no use for you fellows to fight over what +has been done. The money is gone; there's no +doubt about that; but it may be you can get it +back."</p> + +<p>"How?" Teddy asked, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"By notifying the police, and it is possible that +they may find your man long before the fair is +ended."</p> + +<p>"But even if they should, how can I pay Uncle +Nathan the eighteen dollars he wants, after givin' +Deacon Jones the ten which I promised?"</p> + +<p>"That, of course, is a question I cannot answer," +the officer of the company replied, not unkindly; +"but it will certainly be better to get some of the +money back than to lose the whole."</p> + +<p>"Of course it will," Sam said, promptly, after +waiting a few seconds without hearing any reply +from Teddy. "Tell us what to do, an' I'll see to the +whole thing."</p> + +<p>"Hello! What kind of a meeting are you holding +here?" a cheery voice cried, and, looking up, the<span class="pagenum">[29]</span> +disconsolate Teddy saw a merchant whose stock +he had been examining a short time previous.</p> + +<p>In a few words the baggage-master explained the +condition of affairs.</p> + +<p>"Can nothing be done?" the merchant asked.</p> + +<p>"It is barely possible. The fact of the matter is +that the two swindlers left on the last train, and +this boy's money has gone with them beyond a +doubt."</p> + +<p>Then the merchant turned to the would-be fakir +and asked for further particulars, which were +readily given, the latter saying, as he finished the +sad story:</p> + +<p>"Uncle Nathan is bound to raise a big row, an' I +won't be able to help mother, as I counted on doing; +but I s'pose it serves me right."</p> + +<p>"I'm not so sure of that, lad, for all of us are liable +to be taken in at some time or another. It is +possible you may make money at the fair, and I +will give you credit to the amount you lost. Go to +the store, show this slip, and get what you think +may be needed."</p> + +<p>While speaking the merchant had been writing +on a piece of paper torn from his memorandum +book, and when he handed it to Teddy the almost +heartbroken boy read the following words:</p> + +<blockquote><p>The bearer, Edward Hargreaves, is entitled to +credit, thirty days' time, on all he may need, to the +extent of thirty dollars.</p> + +<p class="smcap author">John Reaves.</p> +</blockquote> + +<p><span class="pagenum">[30]</span></p> + +<p>"But I only lost fifteen dollars," Teddy said, as +he read the order.</p> + +<p>"I so understood; but you may need more, therefore +I have made the amount sufficiently large. +Don't hesitate to buy what is wanted, and whether +you ever find the swindler or not, I feel very positive +my bill will be paid."</p> + +<p>Teddy tried to thank the merchant, but that lump +in his throat was still too near his mouth to admit +of many words, and Sam whispered:</p> + +<p>"Don't say anything more about it. You've +struck the biggest kind of luck, and the safest way +is to hold your tongue."</p> + +<p>Even had it been possible to speak, Teddy could +not have said all that was in his heart, and before +Sam had time to give any further advice the merchant +boarded a train which was just starting for +New York, leaving the young fakir and his newly-made +friend to settle matters among themselves.</p> + +<p>"You're in big luck," the latter said, consolingly. +"What's the difference if you have lost fifteen dollars +so long as you know how to get thirty dollars' +worth of goods to start in business?"</p> + +<p>"But this bill will have to be paid, and Uncle +Nathan must have his money; that leaves me +forty-five dollars in debt."</p> + +<p>"S'pose'n it does? You're bound to make a good +deal more'n that, an' I'm here to help you through."</p> + +<p>Teddy came very near saying that if Sam had not<span class="pagenum">[31]</span> +been there the fifteen dollars would still be reposing +beneath the lining of his cap; but he succeeded +in checking himself, and the reproachful words +remained unspoken.</p> + +<p>At this point in the conversation the baggage-master +insisted that information of the swindler +should be given to the police, and, whether they +desired to do so or not, the boys were forced to accompany +him to headquarters.</p> + +<p>Here it is possible their story might have been +told without exciting more than ordinary interest +if the name of the kindly-disposed merchant had +not been used; but that was sufficient to awaken a +decided interest, and every detail was written down +carefully.</p> + +<p>"We will try to get the money for you," the +chief said. "Several of my men will be at the fair, +and if you see this fellow again, information must +be given to them immediately."</p> + +<p>Teddy had but little hope that any good would +result by this means, but he promised faithfully +to do as requested, and then the boys were at liberty +to finish the business which had been interrupted +so disastrously.</p> + +<p>So much time had been wasted that it was necessary +to move around very lively in order to have +the goods ready before the stage should leave, and +Teddy did a great deal toward expediting matters +by explaining to the clerk at the store on which he<span class="pagenum">[32]</span> +had the order for credit exactly what he proposed +to do.</p> + +<p>The young man understood at once the kind of +goods which would be needed, and without listening +to the many suggestions made by Sam selected +a good assortment of both knives and canes.</p> + +<p>"Ain't you getting more than thirty dollars' +worth?" Teddy asked, as the clerk continued to add +to the pile.</p> + +<p>"I think not. These are all cheap goods, you +know, and make a big show without amounting to +any very great value. I will put in cotton cloth +enough for the cane board, and as many rings as +you will need unless business should be very brisk."</p> + +<p>The clerk was bent on making the bill exactly the +size of the order, and when the prices had been +figured out Teddy had invested just thirty dollars in +a stock which must bring in a profit of at least +fifty per cent. in order to admit of his paying the +debts already contracted.</p> + +<p>The goods were to be put on the stage by the +salesman, and there was nothing further for the +boys to do but decide on their manner of traveling +to the Run.</p> + +<p>"After losin' fifteen dollars, I reckon there's only +one thing for me to do," Teddy said, as they left the +store. "I'm goin'to walk; but you can do as you +please."</p> + +<p>"S'pose'n we both ride? You're bound to make a<span class="pagenum">[33]</span> +pile of money before the fair is over, an' can +afford—— By jinks! There's that fakir now!"</p> + +<p>In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying: +"Stop thief!" with the full strength of his lungs, as +he pursued a man carrying a bundle covered with +green cloth.</p> + +<p>Such an appeal was well calculated to arouse +every idler in the immediate vicinity, and before +Teddy fully understood what had happened not +less than twenty men and boys were in chase of +the stranger, who, strange to say, had not quickened +his pace.</p> + +<p>The thought that it might yet be possible to regain +his money lent unusual speed to the would-be +fakir's heels, and he was among the foremost when +the man suddenly halted, turned squarely around, +and asked:</p> + +<p>"What is the matter with you people? Do you +want me?"</p> + +<p>"I guess we do," a policeman replied, as he seized +the stranger by the collar. "Somebody yelled +for us to stop the thief, and you must be the +man."</p> + +<p>"Who says I am?" was the angry question.</p> + +<p>By this time both Teddy and Sam had discovered +the latter's mistake. The only point of resemblance +between this stranger and the one who stole the +money was that both carried packages covered +with green cloth; but while the first bundle was<span class="pagenum">[34]</span> +bulky and apparently heavy, this was small and +readily held under the man's arm.</p> + +<p>Sam did not wait to explain matters. Fearing +lest he might get into serious trouble because of +the mistake, he slipped quietly away, leaving Teddy +to bear the brunt of the accused's wrath.</p> + +<p>The latter realized that something must be done +at once, for the greater portion of the crowd was +looking inquiringly at him, and he said, in a voice +which was far from steady:</p> + +<p>"I didn't do the hollerin'; but a feller who was +with me when a man stole my money thought you +must be the one."</p> + +<p>"Where is he?" the stranger asked, advancing +threateningly.</p> + +<p>"I don't know. He ran away when he saw it was +a mistake."</p> + +<p>The crowd immediately began to disperse. The +policeman called down quite the reverse of blessings +on Sam's head, and then walked away, +leaving Teddy and the stranger comparatively +alone.</p> + +<p>"I don't know as it does any harm to have a lot +of fools chasing a man," the latter said, "but it +might give him a bad name in his work."</p> + +<p>"I'm very sorry, sir, but you see——"</p> + +<p>"I'm not blaming you, my boy, since it was the +other fellow who did the mischief. Tell me how +you lost your stuff."<span class="pagenum">[35]</span></p> + +<p>"My what?"</p> + +<p>"Your stuff—money."</p> + +<p>"Oh!" and Teddy at once gave the stranger a +detailed account of all that had happened, the latter +saying, as the story was concluded:</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't be afraid to bet my head that Long +Jim was the duck who played the trick. I know he +came here, headed for the fair grounds, and it's +jest about his style of working."</p> + +<p>"Do you think there's any chance I'll get it +back?"</p> + +<p>"He shall give up if I see him. I'll be at the fair +myself, working a neat little game, and will see +you there."</p> + +<p>With this remark the stranger walked away, and +Teddy went toward the depot once more, feeling +quite certain he had made a friend who would aid +him in his new venture.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[36]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>UNCLE NATHAN.</i></p> + +<p>When Teddy reached the depot he was not +obliged to hunt very long for Sam, for that +young gentleman crept out from behind a pile of +baggage on seeing his friend was alone, and asked, +in a hoarse whisper:</p> + +<p>"What did that feller do to you?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing; but that don't prove we should get out +of another scrape so easily, and you must be careful, +or we'll be in no end of trouble before the fair +is ended."</p> + +<p>"I was only tryin' to catch your money."</p> + +<p>"It surely wouldn't have done any harm if you +had found out whether that was the man or not +before you started the whole crowd after him."</p> + +<p>"That's right, rub it into a feller when he tries to +do you a good turn," Sam said, sarcastically, and +then remembering an instant later that he proposed +to be this boy's guest, he added, "I was only lookin' +out for you, an' so long as there's been no harm +done we needn't talk about it. Do you still mean +to walk home?"<span class="pagenum">[37]</span></p> + +<p>"There's nothing else to be done, if we want to +get to the Run to-night, for the stage left while we +were chasing that man."</p> + +<p>This was exactly what he did not want to do; +but, under the circumstances, there was no help +for it, and the young gentleman who expected to +form such a prominent portion of the fair set out +by the side of the friend whom he had injured +while thinking to do him a favor.</p> + +<p>At the end of a trifle less than three hours, when +both were footsore, hungry, and weary, the boys +arrived at Teddy's home, and Mrs. Hargreaves +made the stranger welcome despite the inconvenience +caused by his coming.</p> + +<p>Not until after Sam had retired did Teddy tell +his mother of the theft, and for several moments +the widow was in great mental distress; but finally +she viewed the matter in a more cheerful light, and +it was resolved that Uncle Nathan should not be +told of the mishap.</p> + +<p>"It would only make him angry," Mrs. Hargreaves +said, "and you must pay him before the +merchant who was so kind to you gets his money; +but I am terribly afraid, Teddy, that the whole +scheme will be a failure."</p> + +<p>The amateur fakir assured her as best he could, +and when they retired that night both Teddy and +his mother were in a comparatively contented +frame of mind.<span class="pagenum">[38]</span></p> + +<p>The following day was Sunday, on which not +even the all engrossing topic of cane-boards and +knives was to be discussed; but before the family +had finished breakfast the arrival of a stranger +forced them into worldly topics.</p> + +<p>The newcomer was none other than the man +whom Sam had accused of being the thief, and he +explained the cause of his visit by saying:</p> + +<p>"I have reason to believe that Long Jim, the +fakir who got away with your son's money, will be +over here to-night, because the hotels at Peach +Bottom are crowded, and it is possible he may be +forced to give up the stuff." Although not exactly +understanding what he meant, the widow insisted +on his coming into the house, and he laid the details +of his plan before Teddy and Sam.</p> + +<p>"I'll hang around here for him," the stranger +said, "and you shall say if he is the man who did +you up; after that I'll take a hand in the business, +and it'll be queer if between us all we can't make +him do the square thing, more especially since the +rest of his gang haven't come yet."</p> + +<p>As might be expected, Teddy was excited by the +prospect of recovering the money which he had +believed was lost beyond reclaim, and plans were +at once laid to trap the dishonest fakir.</p> + +<p>While this conversation was being carried on +Uncle Nathan came in to learn how his nephew had +succeeded in town, and the stranger introduced<span class="pagenum">[39]</span> +himself as Frank Hazelton, a dealer in jewelry, +which was to be on exhibition during the coming +week at the fair.</p> + +<p>The old man was delighted to make the stranger's +acquaintance, for he fancied there would be an opportunity +for him to take the agency of a valuable +line of goods without the outlay of any money, and +in a very few moments the two were fast friends.</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan not only monopolized nearly all the +conversation, but insisted on showing Mr. Hazelton +around the village, and actually forced the latter +to accompany him, despite the fact that it was +Sunday, when an honest merchant is not supposed +to so much as think of business.</p> + +<p>On the following day it would be necessary for +those who had purchased the privilege of doing +business on the fair grounds to be present, ready +to select their different sites for working, and very +shortly after the sun sank behind the hills Sam +and Teddy retired in order to be ready for an early +start next morning, since the first stage left the +Run at half-past five.</p> + +<p>It lacked fully an hour of that time when the +boys were called to breakfast by Mrs. Hargreaves, +and in less than fifteen minutes they were at the +table eating a hearty breakfast, which was interrupted +by the appearance of Uncle Nathan, who +looked as if he had not been in bed since the evening +previous.<span class="pagenum">[40]</span></p> + +<p>"I've been robbed!" he cried, passionately, "and +this is what comes of trying to help my nephew +enter a disreputable line of business. I believe you +induced that man to come here, explaining all about +my store, simply that he might act the burglar. +And it wouldn't take much to make me think you +had agreed to divide with him the ill-gotten gains," +he added, shaking his fist in the direction of Teddy, +who was so astounded by the news as to be literally +incapable of movement.</p> + +<p>"What do you mean, Nathan?" Mrs. Hargreaves +cried.</p> + +<p>"Just what I said! My store was robbed last +night, and your precious son knows the thief better +than I do!"</p> + +<p>"You mean the man who came here yesterday?" +the widow asked, while Teddy and Sam gazed at +the old man in open-mouthed astonishment.</p> + +<p>"Of course I do; who else could it be? Didn't I +take him over there yesterday, and didn't I explain +just how difficult it was to deposit money in a bank, +because a man would have to pay a dollar to go to +Waterville an' back, or trust the stage driver to do +the business?"</p> + +<p>By this time Teddy had recovered something like +composure, and he said, gravely:</p> + +<p>"We have no means of knowing what you said to +Mr. Hazelton, but if you told him all your business, +that is no concern of ours. You insisted on his going<span class="pagenum">[41]</span> +away with you, and we haven't seen him since."</p> + +<p>"But you lied to me about my money."</p> + +<p>"In what way?"</p> + +<p>"You never said a word about its being stolen."</p> + +<p>"If I never said a word I couldn't have told a lie. +He has evidently given the whole story; but what +happened in Waterville has nothing to do with the +robbery of your store."</p> + +<p>"Oh, it hasn't, eh? Well, I'm beginning to think +it was a job cooked up by all hands to get the best +of me."</p> + +<p>"If it had been," and now Teddy was on his feet, +looking the angry old man squarely in the face, +"why wouldn't I have said something about it in +order to make the story seem straighter? A merchant +in Waterville trusted me for the goods I +wanted after he heard the money was gone, and I +count on paying you before I do him."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you do, eh? Well, it's mighty doubtful +whether you or this precious friend of yours will +ever see the fair, for I'm going to get out a warrant +for the whole lot before I'm done with this thing."</p> + +<p>"Would you arrest Teddy when he has been in +this house ever since you left here yesterday morning?" +Mrs. Hargreaves cried.</p> + +<p>"I'll have my money back, and the sooner your +smart son tells me where it is, the sooner he can +go about his business; but he must first pay me +back my eighteen dollars."<span class="pagenum">[42]</span></p> + +<p>"I only borrowed fifteen, Uncle Nathan, and that +you will get before next Wednesday. If you want +to arrest me, go ahead; but I promise that you'll +be sorry for it."</p> + +<p>"So you threaten, do you? That's what comes of +trying to help an ungrateful boy! I knew he was +going to the bad from the first minute he talked +about having a cane-board," the old man added, as +he turned to the widow, "and I predict that he'll +come to no good even if he manages to get out of +this scrape."</p> + +<p>"You thought it was a good idea for me to do as +I proposed," Teddy replied, standing his ground +bravely, "and was willing to loan me the money, +provided I would pay you three dollars for the use +of fifteen for one week."</p> + +<p>"That's right; throw in my teeth what I wanted +to do in order to help you along, and call me an old +skinflint. I am old enough to expect such things +from such as you."</p> + +<p>"I haven't called you any names, nor do I intend +to do so; I only wanted mother to know the truth +of the business between us. Do you really believe +I had any hand in breaking into your store?"</p> + +<p>"If you didn't your friends did, and that amounts +to the same thing, as you'll soon find out. I'll have +a warrant issued for the arrest of the whole crowd, +if you don't tell me the truth this very minute."</p> + +<p>"But I don't know anything, Uncle Nathan."<span class="pagenum">[43]</span></p> + +<p>"I'll have the truth out of you before the day is +ended," the old man cried, angrily, and without +saying or doing anything save to shake his fist in +the direction of his nephew and Sam he left the house.</p> + +<p>As yet none of the little party knew the full extent +of what had happened, but before Uncle +Nathan was fairly out of the yard a neighbor came +around to tell Mrs. Hargreaves that the old man's +store had been entered by burglars on the night +previous, and a large amount of money, together +with the most valuable goods, had been carried away.</p> + +<p>It is not difficult to imagine the consternation +which seized upon the little party after Uncle +Nathan's departure. Teddy was so overwhelmed +that it was literally impossible for him to say a +word, and Sam shook like one in an ague fit at the +thought that he might be carried off to jail before +it was possible for him to astonish the people by +his skill as an oarsman.</p> + +<p>"You must not think of leaving here until we +know what your uncle proposes to do," Mrs. Hargreaves +said, as she returned to the dining-room +after talking with the neighbor. "Of course I know +that neither of you two boys had anything to do +with the robbery; but you must not run away."</p> + +<p>"I've got to leave, no matter what the old fool +says," Sam replied. "I don't know how the folks +would get along if I didn't show up, an' it won't do +to disappoint them."<span class="pagenum">[44]</span></p> + +<p>"Are you going?" Teddy asked, and Sam replied +in a voice which trembled despite all his efforts to +make it sound firm:</p> + +<p>"Of course I am. You don't allow I'm such an +idiot as to stay till he can have me arrested, an' if +you're sensible, both of us will go."</p> + +<p>"I must stay here, an' lose all my chances of +making money," Teddy said, gloomily.</p> + +<p>"All right, then I'm off, an' after I once get on +the fair grounds I'll bet that old duffer won't get +hold of me."</p> + +<p>Sam did not propose to lose any time. He had no +baggage, and in a very few moments after so deciding +he was walking up the road over which the +stage would pass, while Teddy, with a heavier heart +than he had ever known before, waited for his +uncle to send the officers of the law to carry him to +prison.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[45]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE FAIR.</i></p> + +<p>It seemed to Teddy as if everything pleasant in +life had departed from him as he waited for the +return of Uncle Nathan accompanied by the officers +of the law, and neither he nor his mother had any +idea that the visit would be long delayed.</p> + +<p>The widow had every proof, even if her heart had +not told the truth, that her son was innocent of the +charge which the angry old man made. She knew +both he and Sam remained in the house during the +entire day previous to the robbery, and it would +have been almost impossible for them to have left +during the night without her knowledge; but at the +same time it was only reasonable she should be distressed +in mind as to the final outcome of the matter.</p> + +<p>One, two, three hours passed, and yet no arrest +had been made.</p> + +<p>Teddy no longer hoped to play the part of fakir +at the fair; but yet he fancied it might be possible +to sell his stock, which had already been forwarded +by the stage, to some more fortunate fellow, and<span class="pagenum">[46]</span> +in order to do this it was necessary he should be on +the grounds at the earliest possible hour; but the +charge made by his uncle held him a voluntary +prisoner.</p> + +<p>At eight o'clock a neighbor, whose love of gossip +was greater than her desire for housework, came +to the garden gate to say that she had just heard +the justice of the peace refuse to issue a warrant +for either of the boys, and she added to this information +her belief that it, the burglary, was a judgment +upon Uncle Nathan for presuming to talk +business on the Sabbath.</p> + +<p>When this busybody had departed, Mrs. Hargreaves +said, as she re-entered the house:</p> + +<p>"There is no longer any reason, Teddy, why you +shouldn't carry out your plans. Every one in this +village knows where to find you in case a warrant +is granted, which doesn't now seem possible, and +it is better to go ahead as you proposed, knowing +that your mother is certain you are innocent of any +wrongdoing."</p> + +<p>Teddy's one desire had been to be on the fair +grounds, and when this advice was given from "a +fellow's best friend," he started at once, saying as +he left the house:</p> + +<p>"I'll come back if there's nothing to do; but +there's no reason to worry if you don't see me until +Saturday, for I shall stay jest as long as things run +smooth."<span class="pagenum">[47]</span></p> + +<p>Ten minutes later, while he was trudging along +the dusty road with no other idea than that he +would be forced to walk the entire distance, a +friend in a wagon overtook him, proposed that he +ride, and before the fair grounds were reached +he had heard all the particulars of the robbery.</p> + +<p>It appeared that the burglars must have effected +an entrance to Uncle Nathan's store after midnight +Saturday, and when the proprietor arrived on the +following morning there was absolutely no clue to +the thieves.</p> + +<p>"They must have had a wagon to take away all +the old man says he has lost," Teddy's informant +added, as the story was concluded, "and because of +that the justice refused to issue a warrant for the +man who slept at the hotel last night. Of course +the idea that you knew anything about it was all in +that old fool's eye."</p> + +<p>"Then nobody has been arrested?" Teddy exclaimed, +in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Of course not, an' more than one in town hopes +he'll never see hide nor hair of his goods or money; +but between you an' me I don't believe he's lost +half as much as he tries to make out."</p> + +<p>To this last assertion Teddy gave but little heed; +the all absorbing thought in his mind was as to +whether he would actually be arrested for the +crime, and this was sufficient to prevent any speculations<span class="pagenum">[48]</span> +as to the amount of loss, or his former +dreams of the future.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the fair grounds, he found everything +in a state of confusion. Goods were arriving +and being put in place; men were quarreling for +this or that vantage ground, and carpenters were +busy in every direction.</p> + +<p>As a matter of course, he knew that all this would +be changed on the following day when the visitors +began to arrive; but, nevertheless, it gave him a +homesick feeling which he could not suppress, and, +for a time, prevented him from attending to his +own interests.</p> + +<p>"Hello! What are you sittin' there for?" a +voice cried, after he had remained inactive near +the entrance nearly an hour, debating in his own +mind whether or not it would be worth the while +to unpack the goods which he knew were awaiting +his call somewhere on the grounds.</p> + +<p>Looking up quickly he saw Sam, self-possessed +and jaunty as at the first moment he met him in +Waterville, but wearing an air of considerably +more importance.</p> + +<p>"Have you gone to work yet?" he asked, listlessly.</p> + +<p>"Of course not; there's nothin' for me to do till +the folks begin to come in to see how well I can +row a boat. What did the old duffer do?"</p> + +<p>"Do you mean Uncle Nathan?"<span class="pagenum">[49]</span></p> + +<p>"Of course."</p> + +<p>"He hasn't had anybody arrested yet; but there's +no knowin' how soon he'll begin."</p> + +<p>"He'd better not try it on me," Sam said, with +an assumption of boldness. "I've found a feller +here that's goin' to show off rifles, an' I can borrow +as many as I want if he does any funny business."</p> + +<p>"Would you shoot anybody?"</p> + +<p>"You jest stay till an old lunatic comes along +sayin' I've helped to rob him when your mother +knows where I was, an' see what I'll do," Sam +replied, in a really bloodthirsty tone as he turned +to walk away, and then, as if reconsidering the +matter, he stopped long enough to say, "Wait here +a minute, an' I'll show you a feller what knows a +thing or two."</p> + +<p>Inasmuch as Teddy had no idea of moving from +the position he had taken up near the gate it was +not irksome to do as the exhibitor of boats requested, +and without troubling his head as to who +this very important person might be, he remained +at the precise spot until Sam returned with a boy +who appeared to be a year or two older than himself.</p> + +<p>"This is Dan Summers, an' he's here to help show +off a dandy rifle made in Chicopee Falls down in +Massachusetts, or some such place. He'll help us +out of the scrape if anybody can."</p> + +<p>Dan looked as if this introduction was disagreeable<span class="pagenum">[50]</span> +to him rather than otherwise, and after nodding +to Teddy, he said, in an explanatory tone:</p> + +<p>"I'm here to help the man what exhibits goods +from the Stevens Arms Company, that's all; but I +don't see how I could be of any help if you fellers +have got in a fuss."</p> + +<p>"Neither do I," Teddy replied, and then to show +that no one could aid him, he told the whole story, +including all that Uncle Nathan had said.</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't let that worry me," Dan said, philosophically, +when the tale was ended. "If you want +to make any money out of this fair it is time you +was lookin' out for a stand, an' I know of the best +place on the grounds. Come with me now, an' +you can get it before the crowd of fakirs have a +chance to take it up."</p> + +<p>Teddy, rather liking the appearance of this boy, +resolved to follow his advice, and signified the +same by slipping down from the stack of exhibits, +as he said:</p> + +<p>"Show it to me an' I'll get right to work, for +there's forty-five dollars I've got to pay back, no +matter what Uncle Nathan makes up his mind to +do."</p> + +<p>"That's the way to talk," Sam cried, approvingly, +and forthwith he proceeded to take charge of his +two acquaintances, resolved that lack of energy +should not prevent him from sharing in their triumphs, +if indeed, they had any.<span class="pagenum">[51]</span></p> + +<p>Dan professed to have had considerable experience +with fairs, and the manner in which he proceeded +to work showed that there had been no +boasting on his part. He selected a spot where +nearly all of the visitors would be forced to pass in +order to see the cattle or the racing, and set about +putting up a stand for Teddy in the most approved +manner.</p> + +<p>He ordered Sam here and there to such places as +he had seen an accumulation of lumber, and so well +did he work, after borrowing an ax and a hatchet +from a "candy butcher," that it was not yet noon +when Teddy had an inclosure sufficiently large for +his purpose; the cloth was in place and the holes +cut for the canes, so that it would be but the work +of a few moments to make everything ready when +business should begin.</p> + +<p>"You can't do the whole thing yourself if there +is anything like the crowd that ought to come," +Dan said, "and I advise you to hire a clerk."</p> + +<p>"Where'll I find one?" Teddy asked, helplessly.</p> + +<p>"Take some of the fellers from your own village; +but be sure they're honest, for after business begins +there won't be any chance to watch 'em."</p> + +<p>Teddy thought he could find the proper party +before the following day, and then came the question +of where they were to sleep.</p> + +<p>"I've got that all fixed," Sam said, confidently.</p> + +<p>"The man what runs the museum in that big<span class="pagenum">[52]</span> +tent is a friend of mine, an' he won't say a word +if we stay under the canvas to-night."</p> + +<p>"How long have you known him?" Teddy asked, +warned by previous experience that Sam's statements +were not always to be depended upon.</p> + +<p>"I never saw him till this morning; but that +don't make no difference so long as he's willin' for +us to stay there."</p> + +<p>"We'll go over an' look around," Dan said, leading +the way, and to the surprise of at least one of +the party it was found that Master Sam's statement +was absolutely correct.</p> + +<p>The proprietor of the museum was more than +willing to allow the boys to sleep under his canvas, +for the very good reason that they would act as +sentinels in lieu of those he had neglected to hire, +and all three went away in search of a place where +they could obtain meals during the expected five +days of excitement and money-making.</p> + +<p>This was even a more simple matter than the +first. At a boarding-house nearly opposite the +main entrance to the grounds they could be accommodated +at a reasonable rate, and the preliminaries +had been settled. It only remained now to welcome +the visitors, and get from them as much money as +possible.</p> + +<p>Teddy almost forgot the terrible fact that his +Uncle Nathan might yet have him arrested, and +Sam acted as if such a thing had never been possible.<span class="pagenum">[53]</span></p> + +<p>It is true all three of the boys discussed the possibility +of finding the money which had been stolen +from Teddy; but neither thought of connecting the +two crimes as the work of one person.</p> + +<p>During the afternoon Teddy looked around in +the hope of seeing the man, unjustly accused of the +theft, who had promised to aid him; but as yet he +had not put in an appearance, and it seemed as if +all the choice places would be taken before he +arrived.</p> + +<p>It was anything rather than sport to wander +around the almost deserted grounds, and at an +early hour, after partaking of a remarkably poor +supper, the three boys sought the seclusion granted +by the mildewed canvas of the alleged museum of +the "world's wonders."</p> + +<p>A goat, a wax baby, two or three snakes, an alligator, +and a contortionist, who was none other than +the proprietor of this magnificent array of "marvels," +made up the entire list of curiosities; but the +tent would shelter the young fakirs from the wind +and dew, and it was possible they might sleep as +soundly as at home.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[54]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A CLUE.</i></p> + +<p>Sam and Dan, who had worked at many fairs and +been forced to sleep in far less desirable places, +thought it was a rare piece of good fortune to get +such comfortable quarters free; but the prospect +of lying on the ground all night was far from pleasing +to Teddy.</p> + +<p>He looked around for some spot softer than +another; but there was no choice, and he said to +himself:</p> + +<p>"There's one satisfaction about it, I'm better off +on the ground than I would have been if Uncle +Nathan had succeeded in having me arrested and +put in jail."</p> + +<p>This thought caused the interior of the tent to +seem less disagreeable, and he almost persuaded +himself that it would be sport to stay all night in a +museum with a real contortionist as host.</p> + +<p>Dan had thrown himself at full length on the +ground where he could watch the proprietor of this<span class="pagenum">[55]</span> +"enormous exhibition" cook his supper on an oil-stove, +and Sam, anxious about other people's affairs +as usual, devoted his entire time to asking questions +regarding the business.</p> + +<p>"How do you count on gettin' along when the +crowds get here? You can't sell tickets an' act too."</p> + +<p>"I've got a barker an' a clown coming to-morrow; +it was no use to pay 'em wages for layin' +around when there was nothing to be done but put +up the tent."</p> + +<p>"What's a 'barker?'" Sam asked, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Why, the man who stands outside an' does the +talking, of course."</p> + +<p>Then, his supper having been cooked and eaten, +the host amused himself and his guests by telling +of his experience in the show business; relating +stories and talking of the different fakirs he had +met.</p> + +<p>"When I started out," he said, "I made up my +mind that a fortune could be made in one season. I +bought a fine tent; had lots of performers, about +twenty animals, and a dozen cases of stuffed birds +and other curiosities. We struck hard luck from +the sendoff, an' first the woman with an iron jaw +gave me the shake because she got tired of waiting +for the salary that never came. Two of the bears +grew so disgusted with the bad business that they +died, and one after another of the people skipped, +till I was pretty nigh alone. A sheriff in Harmer<span class="pagenum">[56]</span> +seized the cases, another levied on my live stock, +and it has only taken two seasons to bring the show +down to where you see it."</p> + +<p>This was not pleasing information for Teddy, +who was obliged to make such a large amount of +money in order to free himself from debt, and he +asked:</p> + +<p>"Isn't it possible to make money at every fair? I +thought the fakirs got rich in a little while."</p> + +<p>"So did I before I went into the business. A fellow +may make a big stake this week and lose it all +at the next stand. If you strike bad weather, or a +crowd that hasn't got any money, it's up-hill work +to pull in the entrance fee. Now, I have to pay a +hundred dollars for this privilege, because I've +got a big tent, and it wouldn't be any more if I had +a show to compare with it in size. It'll take a good +many ten-cent pieces to make that up."</p> + +<p>This plain statement of facts caused Teddy to +figure how many nickels he must receive before +the capital invested and stolen would be returned, +and the result was far from gratifying.</p> + +<p>"The eighteen dollars which must be given to +Uncle Nathan, the thirty I owe in Waterville, and +ten I paid for the privilege of running the boards +makes eleven hundred and sixty five-cent pieces. +I'll never see so many customers as that, and Aunt +Sarah was right when she called me a fool for +thinking of going into the business," he said to himself,<span class="pagenum">[57]</span> +as his companions began to make their preparations +for the night.</p> + +<p>It is useless to "cry over spilled milk," however, +and this he realized in time to prevent himself from +being plunged into the lowest depths of despondency. +It was barely possible business would be exceptionally +good, he argued mentally, and if hard +work could accomplish the desired result he must +be successful.</p> + +<p>Dan was already lying down with his head +toward the side of the tent and his feet near the +oil-stove, which had been left burning because of +the dampness, and Teddy crawled over by the side +of him. Sam had decided to sleep by the side of his +host, probably with the idea that he might appear +to be on terms of greater intimacy, and all hands +gave themselves up to slumber.</p> + +<p>The excitement of the morning and subsequent +labor had so tried Teddy that, despite the hardness +of his bed, he fell asleep in a very few moments, +and it was not yet nine o'clock when all the inmates +of the tent, save the goat, and possibly the +alligator and snakes, were wrapped in blissful unconsciousness.</p> + +<p>Half an hour later a terrific yell from Sam caused +the remainder of the party to spring to their feet in +alarm.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" Dan cried.</p> + +<p>"Somebody has got into the tent and been<span class="pagenum">[58]</span> +poundin' me with a club! I'm pretty near +killed."</p> + +<p>The faint glow cast by the oil-stove was not sufficient +to illumine any portion of the tent, and the +host made all haste to light a lantern, after which +Dan proceeded to search for the supposed intruder; +but before he had taken a dozen steps the proprietor +of the museum burst into a hearty laugh.</p> + +<p>"Funny, ain't it?" Sam cried, angrily. "I s'pose +you'd laugh if I'd been killed in your old tent!"</p> + +<p>This savage remark appeared to excite the man's +mirth rather than check it, and while he was thus +enjoying himself Teddy and Dan stood gazing at +him in surprise.</p> + +<p>It was several minutes before the man could +speak, and then he said, as he pointed to the goat +who stood a short distance away calmly munching +some potato parings:</p> + +<p>"That's the fellow who has been beating your +friend with a club. I always let him loose at night, +and he has walked over our dying boy."</p> + +<p>Sam insisted that he had been beaten with a club; +but on examining his clothing two spots of fresh +earth were found, showing where the animal had +stepped. A hoof-print on the sleeve and another +directly on the breast of his coat comprised the full +amount of damage done.</p> + +<p>The boy who had believed himself so dangerously +wounded now grew angry, and, leaping to his feet,<span class="pagenum">[59]</span> +declared he would not remain in the tent another +minute unless the goat was tied.</p> + +<p>"There's nothing to prevent your bunking somewhere +else," the owner of the animal replied, quite +sharply.</p> + +<p>"Billy always has had the liberty of the tent at +night, and I reckon he won't lose it now."</p> + +<p>Sam started toward the entrance; but before +reaching it he realized that he would be punishing +no one but himself, and slowly turned back, saying +as he approached the stove:</p> + +<p>"It's too late to hunt for lodgings now, an' I +s'pose I'll have to make the best of it."</p> + +<p>"I guess you will," the host replied, quietly, and +the angry Sam lay down on the seat of the baggage +wagon, to insure himself against another visit +from "Billy."</p> + +<p>This incident had driven the desire for sleep from +the eyelids of Teddy and Dan, and they remained +awake some time after the loud breathing of their +companions told that the visit from the goat had +been temporarily effaced from their minds.</p> + +<p>Now Teddy discovered what a hard, uncomfortable +bed the bare earth was, and after tossing +about for half an hour, he whispered to Dan:</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose it would be any better in the +wagon?"</p> + +<p>"No; you'll get used to it in a little while, and +the ground is softer than a board."<span class="pagenum">[60]</span></p> + +<p>Teddy was about to reply when the sound of +voices from the outside attracted his attention, and +then came the crackle as of a match being lighted.</p> + +<p>Two or more men had halted near the canvas +within a few feet of where the boys were lying, +evidently that they might be sheltered from the +wind while getting their pipes or cigars in working +order.</p> + +<p>A moment later both the listeners heard one of +the newcomers say:</p> + +<p>"I don't think it will be safe for you to show up +very much while we stay here."</p> + +<p>"Why not? If them boys recognize me it will be +an easy matter to frighten 'em into holdin' their +tongues, and there's goin' to be good pickin's this +week."</p> + +<p>"But what's the use of runnin' any risk? We've +made a fairly good haul already, an' it's better to +get safe off with that than stick our noses where +it'll be hard work to pull them back."</p> + +<p>Teddy was in the highest possible excitement. In +the tone of the second speaker's voice he recognized +the man who had stolen his money, and he punched +Dan with his elbow to assure himself that the latter +was listening.</p> + +<p>"Keep quiet," Dan whispered, and then the conversation +on the outside was continued.</p> + +<p>"I'll take good care to keep shady, an' you see +what can be done to-morrow."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus063.jpg" width="600" height="527" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">The boys crept through the flap of the tent and followed the two men.</p> + +<span class="pagenum">[61]</span> + +<p>"Will you promise not to leave the house till after +dark?"</p> + +<p>"I thought you had more nerve; but so long as +you haven't I reckon I'll promise, for this is bound +to be a fat thing, and I don't want to lose the +whole of it.</p> + +<p>"When these country jays begin to send their +stuff home I'll have ours shipped, an' there's little +danger it'll be overhauled, more especially since +the old man couldn't get a warrant for the only one +he suspects. It's a safe bet that Hazelton has a +pretty good idea who did the job, an' if they make +trouble for him he'll most likely tell what he +thinks."</p> + +<p>"There's no call to be afraid of him after he has +worked a couple of days, for those he ropes in +would do all they could to have him arrested."</p> + +<p>The last portion of this remark was almost indistinguishable, +owing to the fact that the men were +walking away, and when the sound of their footsteps +could no longer be heard Teddy said:</p> + +<p>"Those are the men who robbed Uncle Nathan's +store, an' I'm certain one of them got my money."</p> + +<p>"Would you know their voices if you heard them +again?"</p> + +<p>"Sure; but why don't we find out where they are +going? It wouldn't be a hard job."</p> + +<p>"Are you willin' to sneak after them?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I am. Come on!"<span class="pagenum">[62]</span></p> + +<p>The boys arose softly and crept through the flap +of the tent without awakening the sleepers.</p> + +<p>The night was dark and cloudy, and it was impossible +to see any very great distance in either +direction; but Dan had taken especial heed to the +course taken by the men, and he started off without +hesitation.</p> + +<p>"We ought to have a club or something to protect +ourselves in case they should see us," Teddy +whispered.</p> + +<p>"We won't get near enough to let them do much +mischief. Do you see two sparks over there? They +are the lighted ends of cigars, an' our men are +behind them."</p> + +<p>Dan quickened his pace; but he had failed to +calculate the distance correctly, and was much +nearer the game than he had suspected.</p> + +<p>"Be careful they don't see us," he said, in a low +tone, and in another instant the boys were directly +in front of the men.</p> + +<p>Teddy started back in alarm; but he was too late. +In an instant the sparks flashed before his eyes, +and he fell to the ground unconscious just as Dan +succeeded in warding off the blow of a fist which +was aimed at him.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[63]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE CLERK.</i></p> + +<p>When Teddy recovered from the vicious blow +which had rendered him unconscious he saw +Dan lying on the ground beside him, but no one else +was near.</p> + +<p>It was as if they had been fighting with phantoms +of the brain, save for the fact that both bore the +most indisputable signs of having been assaulted +by beings of true flesh and blood.</p> + +<p>One of Dan's eyes was closed as if by a violent +blow, and Teddy bled freely from the ear, the crimson +fluid telling eloquently of the exact location of +that superior force which had caused so many stars +to dance before his mental vision.</p> + +<p>"We got through with that part of it mighty +quick," Dan said, ruefully, as he rose to his feet. +"There wasn't anything slow about the way they +struck out after we made fools of ourselves by running +into them, eh?"</p> + +<p>"I don't understand how it all happened. It +wasn't more than three seconds from the time I<span class="pagenum">[64]</span> +first saw them before there was a regular set of +fireworks dancing in front of my eyes."</p> + +<p>"It so happens that they saw us first," Dan replied, +as he rubbed his head. "Those men were the +thieves, and what I said showed them that we were +on the scent."</p> + +<p>"Where are they now?"</p> + +<p>"You'll have to ask that question of someone +else," Dan said, with a grimace of pain. "The last +thing I know was when the tall fellow landed one +square on my nose, and before I recovered both +were out of sight. We have done harm rather than +good, for now they know we overheard the conversation, +an' we'll be mighty lucky if this is all we +get before the fair comes to an end."</p> + +<p>"Suppose we tell the police now?"</p> + +<p>"What can you say to them? We heard those +men talking about something which may have had +nothing to do with the robbery, and want to have +them arrested. On what grounds will we ask for a +warrant? Besides, if Nathan Hargreaves was my +uncle, I would let him fight his own battles."</p> + +<p>"But I owe him eighteen dollars."</p> + +<p>"What of that? He wouldn't take a penny off +if you got your head broke while trying to find his +money, and after all that has happened I think we +have good reason to let him severely alone."</p> + +<p>"I'm willing to go back to the tent," Teddy said, +as he began to feel faint, and Dan aided him during<span class="pagenum">[65]</span> +the short walk, both staggering as they came +through the flap, meeting their host near the entrance, +who asked, sharply:</p> + +<p>"What has been going on? I counted on helping +a party of boys, rather than giving my tent up to a +lot of roughs, as you appear to be."</p> + +<p>In the fewest possible words Dan explained what +had happened, and in addition told all the story of +Teddy's losing his money, together with the accusation +made by Uncle Nathan.</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry I said a word," and the proprietor of +the museum did really appear to be grieved. "It +makes no difference whether you got a whipping +or not, the guilty parties are here, and you can +count on my help in turning them up."</p> + +<p>"That's what I'm afraid we sha'n't be able to +do," Teddy replied; "we tried our best to-night, +and got the worst of it."</p> + +<p>"There is plenty of time between now and Saturday. +I'll do all any man can, an' it'll be strange if +we don't get some proof before the fair closes."</p> + +<p>"How did you know we were out?" Dan asked.</p> + +<p>"I saw you go, and there was no reason why I +should kick; but I began to be afraid you were up +to something crooked. Now I know the whole +story, I'll do my best to help you out of the scrape. +Go to sleep, and we'll talk the whole matter over +in the morning."</p> + +<p>This was good advice, but not easily followed.<span class="pagenum">[66]</span> +Both the boys began to feel the effects of the blows +received from the thieves, and the pain resulting +therefrom was not conducive to repose.</p> + +<p>They did manage to close their eyes in slumber +now and then, however, and when the day broke +Mr. Sweet, the proprietor of the museum, was +standing ready to minister to their necessities.</p> + +<p>"You haven't got exactly the right kind of faces +to bring very big business," he said, cheerily; "but +I reckon we can make a change in the general appearance. +Use this plentifully as a bath, and before +business opens you'll be respectable members +of society."</p> + +<p>It was certainly necessary for them to do something +toward improving their appearance. Teddy's +ear was swollen to nearly twice its natural size, +and Dan had an eye which was rapidly blackening.</p> + +<p>Thanks to the application provided by the owner +of the museum, these evidences of a fight were rapidly +reduced, and when Sam awoke they looked +little the worse for wear, although he readily discovered +that something serious had happened while +he was wrapped in slumber.</p> + +<p>"What has been goin' on?" he asked, suspiciously.</p> + +<p>"Nothing much," Dan replied, with a forced +laugh. "The goat walked over us, and we're kinder +used up, that's all. Are you ready to go to breakfast?"<span class="pagenum">[67]</span></p> + +<p>It was evident that Sam did not believe this explanation, +but since he said nothing more about it, +the two actors in the previous night's adventures +held their peace; therefore it would not be in his +power to betray any secrets.</p> + +<p>Breakfast was eaten at an early hour, and the +young fakirs returned to the grounds in time for +Teddy to meet the first visitors.</p> + +<p>Under Dan's instructions he continued to cry out:</p> + +<p>"Here's where you can get a cane or a knife for +nothing! Three rings for five cents, and every +time you throw it over the mark you get what you +ring! Three for five, and every cane or knife you +ring is yours!"</p> + +<p>It was yet too early for the exhibits to be opened, +therefore Teddy had the assistance of his friends in +reclaiming the rings thrown, and after nearly four +dollars had been taken in with a loss only of a ten +cent cane, the amateur fakir began to understand +that it would be necessary for him to have a +clerk.</p> + +<p>"You're bound to do a good business this week," +Dan said, at about eight o'clock. "Sam and I must +go now to attend to our own work, an' if you see +some fellow who can be trusted, I advise you to +hire him, or there'll be considerable trade lost, for +when these people want to spend their money they +won't wait for you to hunt up assistants."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I reckon there's more'n a thousand who<span class="pagenum">[68]</span> +are jest aching to see how I can row in one of them +dandy boats," Master Sam added; "but if you get +into any kind of a scrape, an' don't know how to +get out, come to me. I'll see you through, no matter +how good business is."</p> + +<p>These two friends and advisers had hardly left +him when a particular chum from the Run came +up, and knowing he could be trusted, Teddy immediately +made a trade for his services.</p> + +<p>Tim Jones accepted the offer of ten cents on each +dollar which might be taken in, and straightway +engaged himself as Teddy's clerk, promising faithfully +to account for every penny he should receive.</p> + +<p>"I know you are honest," the proprietor of the +board said to his friend, "and I want you to help +me on the square, so I'm willing to give a fair price, +for I may have to be away a good deal of the time."</p> + +<p>"You mean that Nathan Hargreaves is goin' to +have you arrested?"</p> + +<p>"Why do you say that?"</p> + +<p>"Because he's tellin' around town at the Run +that you know who robbed his store, an' says he'll +have a warrant out, if he has to go to Waterville +for it."</p> + +<p>"That is where he's making a great big mistake, +Tim; but if he should do anything of the kind I expect +you to do your best here," and Teddy spoke +very solemnly, for he really believed his uncle<span class="pagenum">[69]</span> +would succeed in having him arrested. "I don't +know positively who broke into his store; but Dan +an' I heard enough last night to make us believe +we can find the thieves if we have time to work it +out."</p> + +<p>"I'd let him hustle to get the stuff, if it was my +pudding," Tim replied with emphasis, and then as +a party of young fellows bent on spending money +approached the board he began to cry, as lustily as +might have been expected from any old fakir:</p> + +<p>"Here's where you get 'em, three rings for a +nickel, and every cane or knife you ring is yours; +all for the small sum of five cents!"</p> + +<p>Convinced that he had a capable clerk, who was +willing to work hard in order to earn an additional +percentage, Teddy contented himself with making +change for the rush of customers, which continued +unabated until nearly ten o'clock and then came a +lull, when he was able to watch the other fakirs +around him.</p> + +<p>Up to this point business had continued in the +most promising manner, and if it held out as well +there would be no difficulty in his paying all the +money he owed, even although there might be no +very large profit.</p> + +<p>"I only want to get out square," he said to himself, +while nursing his injured ear; but this experience +led him to believe it was possible to do very +much toward helping his mother, and already had<span class="pagenum">[70]</span> +he begun to dream of large returns, despite the fifteen +dollars out of which he had been swindled.</p> + +<p>It was just when his customers had gone to other +parts of the ground, and after Teddy had figured +up the amount of money taken in, showing that there +was nearly eight dollars in the treasury with an +offset only of one twenty-cent knife and two ten-cent +canes lost, that the young fakir saw Hazelton +standing some distance away beckoning to +him.</p> + +<p>"Look out sharp for things, Tim," he cried, as he +vaulted over the railing and ran to the side of the +man whom he believed to be a friend.</p> + +<p>"Did anything happen last night?" the latter +asked.</p> + +<p>Teddy told him the whole story, keeping back not +one incident.</p> + +<p>"I heard quite so much in the hotel where I +board. It is Long Jim and his partner who have +done the job of which both you and I are accused. +As for your uncle, he isn't worth a minute's +thought; but I'm going to get to work, an' what he +says may go against me, so you and I must turn +those fellows up if we can."</p> + +<p>"Ain't your business honest?" Teddy asked, in +surprise.</p> + +<p>"Well, when we come right down to dots, I don't +suppose it is. Watch me when I leave here, and +you'll have a chance to judge for yourself. I may<span class="pagenum">[71]</span> +want to leave my satchel with you for a while, and +I reckon you're willing to take care of it?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I am. I'll do anything you ask."</p> + +<p>"Better wait and see the game first, but don't +forget that we've got to turn up the two men who +whipped you and your friend last night, or stand +the chance of being hauled up for the robbery ourselves."</p> + +<p>"Did you say anything to Uncle Nathan to make +him think you would break into his store?"</p> + +<p>"No; I only played him for a jay, as you shall see +me do with two or three hundred of these smart +fellows here, and he jumped down on me because +there was no one else on whom to fasten the crime. +I've got to go, now. Don't forget to hurry back to +your cane-board when you see I'm getting through +with my first stand, for I want to leave my stuff +with somebody whom I can trust."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[72]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE JEWELRY FAKIR.</i></p> + +<p>Teddy's curiosity regarding the kind of business +which Hazelton proposed to do was so great that, +for the time being, he forgot his own venture in +watching this supposed friend.</p> + +<p>The jewelry fakir disappeared amid the crowd for +a few moments, reappearing in a carriage drawn +by a fancifully decorated horse, and the gaudy +trappings caused the sightseers to stop, believing +something interesting or curious was to be seen.</p> + +<p>Hazelton introduced himself as an agent for a +large manufacturing company, and proposed to dispose +of "samples" of their goods in a manner which +would be satisfactory to all. He began by throwing +away great numbers of cheap rings made to imitate +gold, and as the boys scrambled for them he complained +that the older members of the throng—those +people whom he particularly wished should test the +merits of his wares—were getting nothing.</p> + +<p>"I can change that," he said, after hesitating a +moment, as if to devise some plan. Then holding +up half a dozen pairs of cuff-buttons, he continued:<span class="pagenum">[73]</span> +"I am allowed to give away only six of these. +What gentleman will advance twenty-five cents for +one of these sets, knowing the money will be returned +to him? By that means I shall place the +goods where they will do the most good."</p> + +<p>In a short time the necessary number of purchasers +was found, each having paid a quarter of a dollar, +and then, with great ostentation, the fakir returned +to every one the money he had given.</p> + +<p>A similar performance was gone through with in +the case of ten seal rings, and by that time the +crowd were in a state of high excitement, for they +were getting supposedly valuable goods by simply +loaning this agent their money for a short time.</p> + +<p>The fakir then held up a lot of watch-chains, asking +who would give him a dollar for one, but in this +instance he made no mention of returning the +money.</p> + +<p>Believing these also were to be given away, every +man scrambled to pass up his dollar before the supply +should be exhausted, and fully two hundred +dollars was taken in by the generous "agent." +Then, as the demand ceased, Hazelton produced +from his valise what appeared to be a heavy gold +watch.</p> + +<p>Wrapping it in paper, and attaching it to a chain, +he cried:</p> + +<p>"Who wants to take another, and receive as a +present what I have fastened to the end of it; but<span class="pagenum">[74]</span> +on the condition that this paper shall not be removed +until I give permission?"</p> + +<p>A young fellow standing near Teddy made all +possible haste to pass the fakir a dollar and receive +the prize.</p> + +<p>Then the remainder of the crowd clamored for +more to be put up in the same manner, and Hazelton +disposed of at least a hundred before the +clamorous throng could be appeased.</p> + +<p>While this was being done Teddy saw the young +fellow slyly remove the paper and examine his +goods. A look of anger and disappointment overspread +his face as a cheap, empty locket, fashioned +on the outside something like the case of a watch, +was revealed to view. Twenty cents would have +been an extravagantly high price for what he had +paid a dollar; but it was possible the agent would +return the money as he had done in the previous +cases, and the victimized fellow held his peace.</p> + +<p>Hazelton was now ready to take a hurried departure. +No more dollars were passed up, and quickly +seizing the reins, he said:</p> + +<p>"I have not represented these goods to be gold; +but they are a fine imitation, and Mr. Nathan Hargreaves, +of Peach Bottom Run, will probably act as +my agent for the sale of them. You can get what +may be wanted from him if you need any more."</p> + +<p>The last words were hardly spoken before he +drove quickly through the throng, leaving his dupes<span class="pagenum">[75]</span> +in a daze, from which they did not recover until he +was lost to view.</p> + +<p>Now Teddy understood what the "Give-Away" +game was, and he also knew that it was far from +being honest, although Hazelton had really made +no promises which he did not fulfill.</p> + +<p>Some of the victims were angry, and vowed to +flog "that feller within an inch of his life" before +sunset; others bore their loss philosophically, and +turned away with the remark that the fakir was "a +cute one," while the majority hastened off lest they +should be suspected of being victims.</p> + +<p>Teddy returned to his cane-board feeling sad because +he had been so mistaken in this particular +man, and had hardly reached there when Hazelton, +on foot, came from the side of the fair grounds opposite +where he had disappeared, saying hurriedly, +as he handed the boy a black satchel somewhat resembling +a sample case:</p> + +<p>"Look out for this! All my money is in it."</p> + +<p>Without waiting for an answer the man was +gone, and the young fakir was in no slight distress +at being the custodian of so much wealth.</p> + +<p>After considerable discussion with Tim he decided +to leave it behind the cane-board where it +would be screened from view, and then a crowd of +customers suddenly appearing, he was so busy during +the next half hour that he hardly had time to +think of that which had been intrusted to his keeping.<span class="pagenum">[76]</span></p> + +<p>Not until trade grew dull once more did Hazelton +appear, looking decidedly well pleased with himself, +and, standing where the passers-by could not +hear, he asked:</p> + +<p>"Well, what do you think of the give-away game +now?"</p> + +<p>"It looks to me like a swindle," Teddy replied, +bluntly. "The things you sold were not worth half +what you got for them."</p> + +<p>"Six cents apiece for the chains, and five for the +lockets is what I pay by the quantity," the fakir +said, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>"But you made the people think they were getting +real watches."</p> + +<p>"I was mighty careful to say nothing of the kind. +They thought they saw a watch, and I told them I +would make each purchaser a present of what was +on the chain. Their idea was to get the best of me, +and in that I didn't lose very much. It's a case of +setting a thief to catch a thief, and the smartest +man comes out ahead."</p> + +<p>"But why did you leave all the money with me?"</p> + +<p>"Because it sometimes happens that my customers +make a kick, and try to get back their stuff by +force, so I don't carry much cash in my pockets +while I am on the fair grounds."</p> + +<p>"Of course you are all through now. You can't +expect to do the same thing over again."</p> + +<p>"That's exactly what I shall do in about an hour<span class="pagenum">[77]</span>, +only in a different portion of the inclosure, and +you'll see that I can catch just as many suckers +as before."</p> + +<p>Then, in order to be rid of the satchel, for it +seemed as if he was really concerned in the swindle +so long as it remained in his keeping, Teddy +said he wanted to see what Dan and Sam were +doing.</p> + +<p>"Go ahead; I'll stay near by where I can keep an +eye on the stuff, so you needn't let that worry you."</p> + +<p>As a matter of fact, the boy was not eager to +leave his place of business; but having said so, it +was necessary to go, or let Hazelton understand +exactly why the remark had been made.</p> + +<p>Cautioning Tim to "keep his eyes open for trade," +he walked across the grounds to the building where +Dan was employed, and found that young gentleman +displaying the good qualities of a peculiar-looking +weapon.</p> + +<p>"This is the Model Pocket Rifle," Dan was saying +to a party of gentlemen. "The shoulder-rest is detachable, +and you can buy an effective weapon for +a trifle over fifteen dollars, as—— Hello, Teddy, +how's business?" he added, suddenly, on observing +his friend, and the two had an opportunity for conversation, +while the curious ones were examining +the rifle.</p> + +<p>Teddy gave a brief account of what had already +been done, and then asked:<span class="pagenum">[78]</span></p> + +<p>"Can't you get off a few minutes and go with me +to see what Sam is doing?"</p> + +<p>It was not difficult for Dan to get a short leave of +absence, and the two went directly to the creek +where their acquaintance, who proposed to make +himself the central figure of the fair, was rowing +around in a jaunty looking craft.</p> + +<p>Sam wore a sailor's shirt, turned away at the +throat, and tied with a black silk handkerchief, +while on the breast of the garment was worked +the name "Davis Boat and Oar Co., Detroit, Mich." +The same legend being printed in gold on the band +of his straw hat.</p> + +<p>Sam had evidently been expecting his friends, for +he espied them before they reached the shore, and, +rowing to the bank, insisted they should take a sail.</p> + +<p>"Come on, it's all right," he said. "It don't make +any difference whether I carry passengers or not so +long as the boat is kept goin', an' I want to show +you somethin' fine in the way of rowin'."</p> + +<p>Neither of the boys cared very much about accepting +the invitation; but he was so persistent +that they finally stepped on board as the easiest +manner of settling the matter.</p> + +<p>"I tell you what it is, fellers," he said, as he +pulled out into the stream, "I'm jest makin' things +hum around here. These folks have never seen any +kind of style put into rowin', an' I'm knockin' their +eyes out."<span class="pagenum">[79]</span></p> + +<p>"Don't give it to them too strong, or they may +want to keep you here as an ornament after the fair +closes, and then the rest of the world would suffer," +Dan said, with a laugh, and Sam replied:</p> + +<p>"You fellers can make fun; but what I say is +straight," and then he made preparations for giving +an exhibition. "Watch me now, an' you'll learn a +thing or two about boats."</p> + +<p>During the next ten minutes he pulled as if in a +race, first up and then down the stream, until sheer +lack of breath forced him to stop.</p> + +<p>"I hope you haven't set the keel on fire," Dan +said, solicitously. "There's no question but that +you made good time, though I'm inclined to think +the build of the boat had considerable to do with the +speed. This one looks as if she would row herself."</p> + +<p>"That's all you know about it. If I hadn't been a +first-class hand at——"</p> + +<p>"See there!" Teddy cried, excitedly, as he pointed +toward the shore. "That's the man who got my +fifteen dollars. Pull in, Sam, an' pull for all you +are worth!"</p> + +<p>The oarsman delayed only long enough to gaze in +the direction indicated, where he saw the old fakir +whom they had met with such great loss at Waterville, +and then he bent himself to the task.</p> + +<p>"Do you believe it will be safe to tackle him after +last night?" Dan asked.</p> + +<p>"I'm going to, and if he don't get away from me<span class="pagenum">[80]</span> +I'll ask some of the crowd to help me have him arrested," +Teddy replied, grimly.</p> + +<p>The little craft was a considerable distance from +the shore. Sam was so excited that he only thought +of landing in the shortest possible space of time, +and instead of keeping a lookout for other boats, +rowed vigorously, as if he were the only oarsman on +the stream.</p> + +<p>Teddy and Dan sat motionless, with their eyes +fixed on the man, and thus it happened that no one +on board saw a double ender, in which were three +ladies and two gentlemen, come around a bend in +the creek directly in Sam's course.</p> + +<p>There was a shout from the bank, three shrill +screams of terror, and then a crash as the two +craft came together with terrific force.</p> + +<p>The occupants of both boats were thrown into the +water as the frail timbers were splintered, and the +spectators on the bank acted as if panic-stricken.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[81]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A BRAVE RESCUE.</i></p> + +<p>Sam was a fairly good swimmer, and as soon as +he found himself in the water he struck out for +the shore, paying no attention to any one else until +he had assured his own safety.</p> + +<p>One of the gentlemen in the other craft did the +same selfish thing, while the other, unable to help +even himself, was trying to keep his head above +water by resting his chin on an oar and piece of +planking.</p> + +<p>The women were in imminent danger of being +drowned, for there was no other boat near at hand +which could be sent to the rescue, and the throng of +spectators was in that unreasoning state of fear +and excitement which prevents people from being +of any service at such a time.</p> + +<p>When Teddy and Dan came to the surface after +having been thrown from their seats, they were +within a few feet of each other, and the latter +asked:</p> + +<p>"Can you swim?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; don't pay any attention to me, but do +what you can toward saving those women."<span class="pagenum">[82]</span></p> + +<p>"Will you help me?"</p> + +<p>"Of course; but I can't take care of more than +one."</p> + +<p>Both boats had disappeared, and nothing save +a few fragments showed where they had gone +down.</p> + +<p>Teddy thought only of aiding the struggling +women, for there was no question that the man +with the oar could take care of himself, at least +until those on the bank should be sufficiently composed +to do something effective, and he swam to +the nearest struggling being, clasping her firmly +under one arm as he said:</p> + +<p>"Don't make a row; but keep perfectly quiet, an' +I'll take you ashore."</p> + +<p>Half-unconscious as she was, the woman attempted +to grasp him by the neck, and for several +seconds he had all he could do to prevent her from +choking him to death; but after two or three kicks +judiciously administered, he succeeded in making +her understand that her life as well as his own depended +upon her remaining passive, and from that +moment all went well.</p> + +<p>The employees of the company which had the +boats on exhibition flung into the water several life-saving +arrangements of cork and canvas, and by +dint of much persuading he induced her to trust to +one of these while he went to the assistance of Dan, +who had been carried beneath the surface more<span class="pagenum">[83]</span> +than once by the struggles of the woman whom +he was trying to save.</p> + +<p>By this time a boat was brought up from around +the point, and as these two helpless ones were taken +on board both the boys swam to the rescue of the +last of the party who had sunk beneath the surface +for the third time.</p> + +<p>Teddy, now nearly exhausted by his efforts, was +the first to grasp her; but if it had not been for Dan +the struggle would have been useless, since his +strength was so far spent that he could not have +brought her above the water unaided.</p> + +<p>By their united efforts, however, she was taken +on board the boat in a state of unconsciousness, +and they made their way to the shore cheered by +the shouts of the assembled multitude.</p> + +<p>Weak, almost exhausted beyond the power to +stand upright, they landed a few seconds in advance +of the craft, and the reception received was +enough to have nerved stronger men to a semblance +of strength.</p> + +<p>It was not until they were in the private apartments +allotted to the Davis Company that either +fully understood how weak he was, and then willing +hands aided them to recuperate.</p> + +<p>Hot flannels, warm drinks, and dry clothes were +contributed by the different exhibitors, until, as +Teddy said, they looked like "circus clowns;" but +they were in fairly good bodily condition, and it<span class="pagenum">[84]</span> +appeared as if the involuntary bath had done them +no real injury.</p> + +<p>Outside the building the people were shouting +themselves hoarse in praise of the two boys who +had saved three lives, and Sam stood bowing +acknowledgments as if he had been the chief actor +in the thrilling scene.</p> + +<p>The difference between the real and the pretended +life-savers was readily understood, however, +when Dan and Teddy made their appearance, looking +decidedly the worse for their struggles, and +the cheers which went up would have been ample +reward for the most praise-loving person in the +world.</p> + +<p>They looked like anything rather than reputable +employees as they appeared in the borrowed garments; +but as Teddy said, they couldn't stay in the +building until their clothes were dried, and it was +absolutely necessary he should attend to his business.</p> + +<p>Dan's duties necessitated his remaining near the +creek; but Teddy was forced to go back to his cane-board, +and the crowd which followed him was good +evidence of the money he would make.</p> + +<p>During two hours after he returned from this +thrilling adventure the cane-board had more customers +than could conveniently be attended to, +and it is safe to say that he then handled a larger +amount than he had ever before seen.<span class="pagenum">[85]</span></p> + +<p>"At this rate it won't take long to square up +things, and you shall have a fair portion of the +profits, Tim," he said, when there was an opportunity +for him to speak with his clerk without being +overheard by the customers.</p> + +<p>"It's a lucky thing for us that them boats were +smashed," Tim said, devoutly, as he handed his +employer half a dollar to change. "We might +have stood here with our tongues hangin' out all +day an' never seen a quarter of this money if you +hadn't known how to swim."</p> + +<p>"You are right to a certain extent; but I can't +take all the credit of this spurt, because more than +half the people are trying to get a cane for nothing."</p> + +<p>"In the same way they thought to swindle Mr. +Hazelton out of a watch," Tim replied, with a smile; +"but we won't fight about what brings trade so +long as it comes with the cash."</p> + +<p>Up to this time Teddy had no very definite idea +of how much money had been taken in, and he was +thinking it would be a good idea to ascertain, when +a gruff, familiar voice from the rear asked:</p> + +<p>"Are the wages of sin as much as they should +be?"</p> + +<p>Turning quickly he saw Uncle Nathan, and +replied:</p> + +<p>"I don't know exactly what they should be; but, +perhaps, you do."<span class="pagenum">[86]</span></p> + +<p>"Whatever I may know now, I remember that +it was not allowed I should insult my elders either +by plainly spoken words or insinuations," the old +man said, sternly.</p> + +<p>"Neither would I have done such a thing if you +had not given me the provocation; but when I +promised to pay three dollars for the use of fifteen +one week, you did not seem to think that amount +would be the wages of sin."</p> + +<p>"At the time I had no idea you would conspire +with others to rob me of my hard-earned savings."</p> + +<p>"You know very well, Uncle Nathan, that I +haven't done any such thing. On the night your +store was robbed I staid in the house, and hadn't +left it when you came to tell us the news."</p> + +<p>"Every person of your class has some such +excuse ready in case of an emergency; but that +kind of talk will not do with me. If you meant to +do the square thing, why was I not told you lost +the money I lent you?"</p> + +<p>"Because I knew you would raise an awful row, +thinking possibly it would not be paid back."</p> + +<p>"Have I yet any assurance that it will be?" the +old man asked, in a fury.</p> + +<p>"Do you need it now?"</p> + +<p>"I always need my own."</p> + +<p>"And in this case, if I pay you at once, do you +think it right to charge me three dollars for the +use of fifteen lent two days ago?"<span class="pagenum">[87]</span></p> + +<p>"That was what you promised, and the world +gauges a man by the way he keeps his word."</p> + +<p>"I owe the storekeeper in Waterville thirty dollars; +but I told him you must be paid first, and so +you shall."</p> + +<p>"Then give me the money now," Uncle Nathan +snarled.</p> + +<p>"That is exactly what I am willing to do," Teddy +replied, calmly; "but if you can't trust me I have +reason to be suspicious of you, so give me a receipt +for the amount, and the matter can be settled."</p> + +<p>The old man literally glared at his nephew for an +instant, and then, eager to have the cash in his +possession, he wrote a receipt, handing it to the +young fakir, as he said, angrily:</p> + +<p>"Now, let me see if you can settle the bill."</p> + +<p>Since the mishap on the creek, where Teddy had +covered himself with glory, business had been so +good that he had more than twice that amount, +and, emptying the contents of his money bag on a +board, he proceeded to select the required sum.</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan watched him jealously, his eyes +twinkling enviously, and when the money was +placed in his hand he counted it twice over before +delivering up the written acknowledgment.</p> + +<p>"Are you certain all this has been honestly +earned, Teddy?" he asked, gravely.</p> + +<p>"How else could I have got it?"</p> + +<p>"There are many ways. While I would not be<span class="pagenum">[88]</span> +willing to take my oath to it, several of these ten-cent +pieces look very much like those I lost night +before last."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean to say I had anything to do with +robbing your store?" and now that this particular +debt had been canceled Teddy felt very brave.</p> + +<p>"I know that such an amount of money has not +been earned honestly, and, what is more, my eyes +have been opened to the character of your friends."</p> + +<p>"If you mean Mr. Hazelton, he is as much your +friend as mine, for you were with him all day Sunday."</p> + +<p>"That is exactly who I do mean," Uncle Nathan +replied, with provoking deliberation. "I have seen +his method of doing business since I came into this +fair, and know he is nothing more than a deliberate +swindler."</p> + +<p>"But one with whom you were perfectly willing +to go into partnership," a voice in the rear of Teddy +cried sharply, and the jewelry fakir stepped directly +in front of Uncle Nathan. "I told you exactly +how I worked, and you offered to put up even +money with me, growing angry when I said you +would be of no use in the business. If it is swindling, +you were mighty eager to have a hand in the +same business."</p> + +<p>"I don't want to talk with you," Uncle Nathan +said, as he put Teddy's eighteen dollars carefully +in his pocket.<span class="pagenum">[89]</span></p> + +<p>"Then why do you come around here trying to +bully this boy? He had no idea of what I was +going to do until he saw me work, while you understood +the whole plan. Make any trouble for him, +and I will get up here and tell every person who +comes along that you wanted to be my partner."</p> + +<p>"Do it," the old man said, angrily. "After having +cheated so many people out of their money, +who will believe a word you say?"</p> + +<p>At the same time, however, Uncle Nathan took +good care to leave this particular spot, and Hazelton +stepped to the rear of the board where he could +talk privately with Teddy.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[90]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>AN ENCOUNTER.</i></p> + +<p>First of all, the jewelry fakir wanted to hear the +particulars of the accident on the lake, and +Teddy began by telling him the primary cause of the +trouble.</p> + +<p>"I reckon all three of us lost our heads when we +saw that man; I know I did and we were so eager +to get on shore that we paid no attention to anything +else. Have you seen him?"</p> + +<p>"Who? Long Jim? No; but the boys say he is +here somewhere running the swinging ball game."</p> + +<p>"What is that?"</p> + +<p>"A wooden ball is swung on two short uprights +about eight inches apart, and between them, in the +center, stands a small peg. You pay ten cents for +the privilege of swinging the ball, and if it hits the +peg when it comes back after leaving your hand, +you get a dollar."</p> + +<p>"I should think that would be easy enough to do."</p> + +<p>"Well, don't try it with such an idea or you'll go +broke mighty quick. It looks simple; but it isn't +accomplished very often."<span class="pagenum">[91]</span></p> + +<p>"Have you done anything since I left here?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and scooped in as much as I had any right +to expect. I don't want to spoil to-morrow's business, +so sha'n't make another pitch, but will spend +my time trying to find Jim."</p> + +<p>"What good can that do?"</p> + +<p>"I still count on making him give back your +fifteen dollars, if nothing more. I reckon your +Uncle Nathan won't try again to get a warrant out +for us, and so I sha'n't bother my head about learning +anything regarding the robbery."</p> + +<p>"He'll make things just as disagreeable as he +can; there's no question about that."</p> + +<p>"Well, let him, and we'll see who comes out +ahead. Trade is beginning to pick up, and you'd +better attend to your customers."</p> + +<p>Hazelton walked away, and from that moment +until nearly nightfall Teddy had all the business +both he and his clerk could attend to.</p> + +<p>Nearly every one had something to say about the +accident on the creek, and the young fakir was +forced to tell the story over and over again, until +he really got tired of repeating the details.</p> + +<p>When nearly all of the visitors had left the +grounds Teddy made up his cash account, and the +sum total surprised both himself and Tim.</p> + +<p>Including the amount paid Uncle Nathan he had +taken in fifty-five dollars and twenty cents. Ten +per cent. of this was paid to the clerk, and he found<span class="pagenum">[92]</span> +himself possessed of the magnificent sum of thirty-one +dollars and seventy cents.</p> + +<p>"At this rate we shall be rich before the end of +the week," he said, in a tone of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>"That's a fact; but it don't seem right for me +to take so much," Tim replied, as he wrapped the +five dollars and a half which had been given him +in his handkerchief.</p> + +<p>"That was the agreement, an' we'll stick to it."</p> + +<p>"But when you promised ten cents on every dollar +neither of us believed trade would be half so +good."</p> + +<p>"You're right; I thought if we got one-third as +much business would be booming; but that has +nothing to do with our bargain. You've hung right +on here, without even stopping for anything to eat, +an' are entitled to what you've been paid. Everybody +says there'll be a bigger crowd to-morrow, +an' so we stand a chance to make considerable +more. Are you going home to-night, or do you +count on staying here?"</p> + +<p>"I've got to let the folks know where I am, for +when I left it was allowed I'd be back by sunset. +To-morrow I'll come prepared to stay the rest of +the week."</p> + +<p>"There'll be plenty of stages running, an' you +can afford to ride both ways after this day's work. +I want to send some of this money home to mother, +for it ain't safe to carry so much around with me."<span class="pagenum">[93]</span></p> + +<p>"Am I to take it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, an' you can tell her all that has happened. +Ask her to come over Thursday, an' see for herself +that we're getting rich."</p> + +<p>Twenty-five dollars was tied in a bundle with +many wrappings of paper, and Tim started off, +looking almost afraid at being the custodian of so +much wealth.</p> + +<p>It was necessary Teddy should pack up his entire +stock until next morning, and this he proceeded to +do as soon as he was alone. Mr. Sweet had given +him permission to bring his goods into the museum +tent, and his only trouble was how everything +could be carried without assistance. Before he was +ready for departure, however, Sam came up, and +the question of transportation was settled.</p> + +<p>"Well, how do you feel now?" Teddy asked, +cheerily, for the knowledge that he had already +taken in nearly enough to pay his debts caused him +to feel very jolly.</p> + +<p>"I allers get the worst of everything," Sam replied, +disconsolately. "You an' Dan made a big +strike when you tumbled into the water, an' I've +had a blowin' up; come mighty near losin' my job +into the bargain."</p> + +<p>"Why?"</p> + +<p>"'Cause the boss says that I was careless an' +reckless, an' that I couldn't earn enough in a +month to pay for the two boats I've smashed."<span class="pagenum">[94]</span></p> + +<p>"Are they lost entirely?"</p> + +<p>"No, of course not. We pulled 'em out a little +while ago, an' it cost so very much to fix both. +The folks in the other boat were as much to blame +as me."</p> + +<p>"They certainly were not keeping any better +lookout, and, as a matter of fact, I suppose I'm +more at fault than any one else, for if I hadn't +sung out about the fakir it wouldn't have happened."</p> + +<p>"That's what I told the boss; but he's chuck full +of foolish talk about the bravery he says you an' +Dan showed, an' is tryin' to get up what he calls +a testimonial for you."</p> + +<p>"A what?" Teddy cried, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"I heard him say testimonial; but if you know +what that means you can go to the head."</p> + +<p>"I don't, and I hope it won't amount to anything. +I've been paid enough for what was done by the +boom it gave my business."</p> + +<p>"Of course, you an' Dan are bound to have the +best end of it."</p> + +<p>"Why didn't you stop an' do the same thing?"</p> + +<p>"'Cause I had sense enough to look out for myself +first."</p> + +<p>"But you know how to swim."</p> + +<p>"What of that? It's mighty risky catchin' hold +of people in the water, an' I don't mean to take any +chances. How much have you made to-day?"<span class="pagenum">[95]</span></p> + +<p>When Teddy told him, the expert in rowing +looked decidedly envious.</p> + +<p>"You've got all that money in one day?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but I sent the most of it home to mother."</p> + +<p>"It's funny what luck some folks have, when +them as knows the business twice as well don't +much more'n earn their salt," Sam said, as if to +himself, and before he could continue Dan arrived.</p> + +<p>He wore his own clothes, and carried those Teddy +had left in the boat-house.</p> + +<p>"These were dry, so I brought 'em up. You +needn't carry back the ones you borrowed till to-morrow, +so Sam's boss says."</p> + +<p>Then Dan asked concerning business, and by the +time all three had finished discussing this very important +matter the knives and canes were packed +ready for removal.</p> + +<p>Each boy took a load, carried it to the tent where +Mr. Sweet was figuring up his receipts for the day, +and then went to supper, returning half an hour +later so tired that there was no desire on the part of +either to do anything other than sleep.</p> + +<p>The proprietor of the museum was in very good +spirits. He had taken in one hundred and six dollars +and eighty cents, and said, in a tone of satisfaction:</p> + +<p>"I reckon this fair will pan out all right. Trade +is bound to be better to-morrow, and Thursday is +always the biggest of the week. I hear you boys<span class="pagenum">[96]</span> +have been distinguishing yourselves. Tell me about +it."</p> + +<p>Dan related the incident of the day very modestly, +interrupted now and then by Sam, who was +eager to pose as a hero also, and Mr. Sweet expressed +himself as being well satisfied with their +behavior.</p> + +<p>"Chasing a thief and getting a whipping in the +night, and then saving the lives of three people +the next day is record enough for one week, so +you'd better not try for any more adventures," he +said, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>Now that the incident of the previous night had +been spoken of so openly, it was necessary Sam's +curiosity should be satisfied, and Dan was forced +to tell the story.</p> + +<p>While he was doing so, and listening to the oarsman's +comments, Teddy had an opportunity to see +the "barker" and clown who arrived that morning. +Neither was a very prepossessing-looking man. +They were lying on the ground some distance from +the boys, as if bent on minding their own business, +and there was no real reason for an unfavorable +opinion concerning them.</p> + +<p>But little time was spent in conversation on this +evening. Every one was thoroughly tired, and each +sought for a soft spot on which to pass the night.</p> + +<p>As before, Sam crawled up on the wagon to be +out of harm's way when the goat should be unfastened,<span class="pagenum">[97]</span> +while Dan and Teddy lay down in very +nearly the same place as before.</p> + +<p>"I don't fancy we shall hear many secrets +between now and morning, no matter how many +men come around here to talk," the former said, +laughingly. "It won't take me two minutes to fall +asleep, and the noise that can awaken me then will +have to be very great."</p> + +<p>Teddy's only reply was a yawn, and in even less +time than Dan had mentioned he was wrapped in +slumber.</p> + +<p>Shortly after the proprietor of the exhibition +began to make his preparations for retiring, and +the clown asked:</p> + +<p>"How did that row start this afternoon?"</p> + +<p>"Half a dozen of the village toughs tried to get in +without paying, and I had to polish one of 'em off," +the barker replied.</p> + +<p>"You must have done it pretty quick, for when I +got out there the thing was over," Mr. Sweet said.</p> + +<p>"The fellow was more than half-drunk, an' it +wasn't a very big job. They threaten to come back +and clean the whole show out."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I've heard such threats made before; but +never lost much sleep worrying about it."</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later all the human occupants of the +tent were enjoying a well-earned rest, and the goat +had about concluded it would be a profitless job to +prospect for anything more to eat, when the sound<span class="pagenum">[98]</span> +of footsteps could have been heard from the outside.</p> + +<p>Had Mr. Sweet been awake he would have decided +that these late visitors were trying to find the +flap of the tent, for they walked cautiously around +the canvas twice, and then a sharp knife was thrust +through the fabric.</p> + +<p>An instant later Sam awoke his companion with +a yell that would have done credit to any Indian.</p> + +<p>Some one had given him such a blow as sent him +from the seat to the ground, and the remainder of +the party leaped to their feet only to be confronted +by a large party of half-drunken toughs who had +come to avenge the insult received during the afternoon.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[99]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>LONG JIM</i>.</p> + +<p>Teddy's first thought when he was awakened by +Sam's yells was that the officers of the law were +coming to arrest him for the robbery committed at +Uncle Nathan's store; but in a very few seconds he +understood that this was not the case.</p> + +<p>He and Dan had been sleeping some distance +from the remainder of the company; therefore, +when the hand-to-hand struggle began they were +out of it entirely, and owing to the darkness could +not be seen by the assailants; but Sam's cries +served to show the mob where he was, and one after +another pounded him when they failed to find any +of the other occupants.</p> + +<p>While one might have counted twenty Teddy and +Dan stood motionless, undecided as to what should +be done, while the din caused by the combatants +and the screaming boy were almost deafening, and +then the latter said:</p> + +<p>"We've got to take a hand in this row, Teddy. +Mr. Sweet has given us the chance to sleep here, +and the least we can do is to help as much as possible,<span class="pagenum">[100]</span> +for it appears to me that his men are getting +the worst of it."</p> + +<p>A broken tent-peg was lying on the ground near +at hand, and Dan added, as he seized it:</p> + +<p>"Try to light one of the lanterns so we can see +which is an enemy, and then sail in."</p> + +<p>It seemed to Teddy as if he would never be able +to follow these instructions. He had plenty of +matches; but in his excitement one after another +was extinguished until he fancied half an hour +must have elapsed before the wick was ignited.</p> + +<p>The faint glow of light served to show one of the +intruders Teddy's form, and the latter had but just +succeeded in hanging the lantern on the center-pole +when it became necessary to defend himself.</p> + +<p>The drunken bully made a lunge at him, which +he managed to avoid by jumping aside, and in another +instant he had seized the man by the waist, +doing his best to throw him.</p> + +<p>From this moment Teddy knew nothing more of +the row than that portion in which he was immediately +concerned. He was able to prevent the man +from striking by hugging close to his body, and the +two swayed here and there in the effort to gain the +mastery. Now and then they came in contact with +the other combatants, one or both receiving a +chance blow, but no especial injury was done to +either.</p> + +<p>Had the man been sober, Teddy must have been<span class="pagenum">[101]</span> +overcome in a very short time; but as he was far +from being steady on his feet the odds were about +even, and the boy succeeded in holding his own until +the others had retreated or been so disabled that +it was no longer possible for them to continue the +assault.</p> + +<p>Fully thirty minutes had elapsed from the time +Sam first sounded the alarm before the occupants of +the tent could count themselves as victors, and then +Mr. Sweet and the clown pulled Teddy's adversary +away, throwing him bodily out of the tent after administering +summary punishment.</p> + +<p>During all this time the other exhibitors who intended +to sleep on the grounds had been gathering +around the canvas, but no one cared to risk his +precious body by entering until it was certain the +battle had been ended.</p> + +<p>Then the tent was filled with sympathizing +friends, who endeavored to ascertain the amount of +injury done, but were interrupted in the work by +the proprietor, who cried, angrily:</p> + +<p>"Clear out of here, every mother's son! You +didn't dare to come in when it would have been +possible to help us, and there's no need of you now. +We were attacked by a crowd of men from the +town, who proposed to clean the show out because +we wouldn't let them in free, and that's all there is +to it."</p> + +<p>Not until the last visitor had unwillingly departed<span class="pagenum">[102]</span> +did the little party pay any attention to their +wounds, and then the result of the engagement was +ascertained.</p> + +<p>The barker had a broken nose, but it would not +prevent him from doing a full share of talking on +the following day. The clown's eye looked rather +bad, and Mr. Sweet's cheek had been cut, but these +were only trifling mishaps. Teddy had come out of +the affray comparatively uninjured; Dan showed +nothing worse than a bruise under the left ear, and +while Sam appeared to be unscathed, he declared +that he had been pounded until every inch of his +body felt like jelly.</p> + +<p>"You squealed fairly well for a fellow who was +so badly done up," Mr. Sweet said, with a laugh, as +he proceeded to dress the barker's wounded nose, +"and I reckon you'll be all right by morning. Light +some of the other lanterns so I can see what I'm +about, and during the remainder of the night we'll +stand guard, for no one can say how soon those +scoundrels may attempt to pay us a second visit, +although I think they had a full dose this +time."</p> + +<p>How the assailants had fared no one was able to +form a very good opinion. The general belief +among the occupants of the tent, however, was +that they had received such severe punishment that +there would be no further attack on this night, at +least.<span class="pagenum">[103]</span></p> + +<p>When the wounds had been dressed, Mr. Sweet +said, as he took up a position near the flap:</p> + +<p>"You fellows had better try to go to sleep now. +I'll keep awake for a while, and then call some one +to relieve me. Dan, can't you borrow one of those +queer-looking rifles you are exhibiting, and bring +it with you to-morrow night?"</p> + +<p>"I might get the one I use for shooting at a target; +but you wouldn't think of trying to kill a man, +would you, Mr. Sweet?"</p> + +<p>"I could do a good deal toward scaring them, and +if a crowd insisted on forcing an entrance, I'd take +mighty good care that one would carry away a bullet +to remember me by."</p> + +<p>"I'll bring the rifle," Dan replied, and Teddy +whispered:</p> + +<p>"When I came here to run a cane-board I didn't +count on being obliged to do any fighting."</p> + +<p>"I don't reckon there'll be much more here. The +managers of the fair will see to it that those fellows +are put where they can't do any additional mischief, +for the exhibitors must be protected, and we +shall be safe enough, except something else comes +up to make a row."</p> + +<p>Then the sore, tired party lay down in search of +slumber once more, and, strange as it may seem +after the exciting events, all save the sentinel were +soon wrapped again in slumber.</p> + +<p>Each in turn was aroused to do his share of<span class="pagenum">[104]</span> +guard duty before morning came; but no enemy +appeared, and at sunrise the three boys went across +the grounds to the boarding-house, where, as Dan +said: "The price was twice as big as the breakfast."</p> + +<p>Teddy had his place of business ready for the reception +of customers before the first stage-load of +visitors arrived, and when Tim came he had already +taken in nearly a dollar.</p> + +<p>"What's the news?" he asked, as the clerk appeared, +looking radiant and happy at the thought of +earning as much money as on the previous day.</p> + +<p>"Your mother was pretty nigh wild when I told +her what we took in yesterday, an' says she'll be +here sure on Thursday. There's no more news of +your Uncle Nathan's goods, an' he's still tryin' to +have you arrested; but your mother says not to be +afraid, 'cause she has talked with a lawyer, an' +don't think there'll be any trouble. I told the folks +at home that the old skinflint made you pay three +dollars interest on the money what was stole, an' +everybody in town will know it before night."</p> + +<p>Tim was forced to stop his story to wait upon a +party of young gentlemen who were eager to get +dollar canes for five cents, and the booths adjoining +Teddy's place of business had not yet been +opened when he announced that there were four +dollars in the money box.</p> + +<p>"We're bound to have a big day," Tim said, confidently.<span class="pagenum">[105]</span> +"The band from the Run is comin' over this +mornin', an' if the city people hear about it you bet +they'll jest crowd in to hear the music. There'll be +[——] of the boys to see you, but take my advice +an' don't let 'em have any rings on credit, for I +wouldn't trust the best of the whole lot at fair time. +I'm goin' to stay till Friday; do you s'pose that +man will let me sleep in his tent with you fellers?"</p> + +<p>Teddy promised to inquire, and then advised Tim +to have a look at the grounds before business began +to be rushing, and the clerk was glad to take advantage +of the proposition.</p> + +<p>He started off with the air of one who owned the +entire inclosure, and was hardly lost to view amid +the fast-gathering throng when Teddy was literally +dazed by seeing Long Jim, the very man who +had robbed him in Waterville, lounging along toward +his stand.</p> + +<p>Not until the fakir stood directly in front of the +boy did he appear to recognize him, and then he +would have turned quickly away but for the latter's +cry:</p> + +<p>"Somebody hold that man till I get a constable! +He stole my money."</p> + +<p>Realizing that a flight across the grounds with +hundreds of men and boys crying "Stop thief!" in +full pursuit would be disastrous, Long Jim turned +to face his young accuser.</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by saying such a thing?" he<span class="pagenum">[106]</span> +asked, angrily. "If you wasn't so small I'd make +you eat the words."</p> + +<p>"I was big enough for you to steal from, and I +want my money."</p> + +<p>It was only natural that a crowd should gather +after such an accusation, and Long Jim looked +around for some means of escape, but, realizing +that he could not well get away while so many were +near, he stepped close to Teddy, as he whispered:</p> + +<p>"If you say another word I'll smash your face, +you young whelp! Hold your tongue if you want to +leave here alive."</p> + +<p>"I'll say exactly what's true. Give me my +money, or I'll find some one to have you arrested!"</p> + +<p>"The boy is a liar, and, what is more, has just +robbed his uncle's store, if what they say over at +the Run be true," the fakir said, excitedly, as he +turned to face the crowd. "I don't want to hurt +him; but I won't be insulted by a thief, so the best +thing for me to do is to leave."</p> + +<p>Saying this, he walked deliberately away, and the +curious ones, who a moment previous had been +friendly to Teddy, began to sympathize with the +man.</p> + +<p>"Don't let him off!" the boy cried, starting to follow, +and then remembering that he would be forced +to leave his wares at the mercy of the crowd, turned +back, while Long Jim continued straight across the +grounds unmolested.<span class="pagenum">[107]</span></p> + +<p>"It looks like it was a case of the pot calling the +kettle black," an old farmer said, and his immediate +circle of friends laughed heartily, while the +younger portion of the crowd gazed earnestly at +Teddy, believing they saw before them a fullfledged +burglar.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[108]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A DISCOVERY.</i></p> + +<p>With feelings of mingled anger, vexation and +disappointment, Teddy stood silent and motionless +for several moments after Long Jim disappeared, +striving to keep the tears from his eyes.</p> + +<p>It seemed hard enough to be swindled out of fifteen +dollars, but to be held up as a thief by the very +man who had done him the wrong, and to be stared +at as a criminal by the curious, was an aggravation +of misfortune.</p> + +<p>Just for one instant he made up his mind to tell +the whole story to the bystanders, but before there +was time for him to speak he realized that many of +them would think he was trying to shield himself +by an untruth against just accusations, therefore +he remained quiet, not making the slightest effort to +influence trade.</p> + +<p>Fortunately he was soon aroused from this very +disagreeable frame of mind by a very pleasing incident.</p> + +<p>The band from the Run arrived, and to the young +fakir's surprise marched directly to his booth, the +leader saying, in a tone sufficiently loud to be<span class="pagenum">[109]</span> +heard by every one in the immediate vicinity as +the musicians halted about ten feet away:</p> + +<p>"We have been hired to play on the grounds to-day, +Teddy, and left home half an hour earlier than +the specified time for the sole purpose of giving you +a serenade to show that, whatever your uncle may +say, the folks at the Run are positive there isn't a +shadow of truth in his ridiculous story. We know +what you are working for, and intend to help you +along as much as possible."</p> + +<p>Then the musicians began to play, while, as a +matter of course, every one who came up wanted to +know why the band was there instead of on the +stand built for its especial accommodation, and +there were people enough who had heard the leader's +remarks to explain matters to the newcomers.</p> + +<p>The immediate result was that instead of believing +him to be a burglar, the same ones who fancied +a few moments previous that he looked guilty, were +now quite positive he was a victim.</p> + +<p>Tim arrived while the serenade was in progress, +and when Teddy explained the situation, he exclaimed, +gleefully:</p> + +<p>"Well, by jinks! This jest knocks the spots outer +everything! Trade will hum after this, or I'm a +duffer."</p> + +<p>And the clerk's prediction was verified in a very +short time.</p> + +<p>When the musicians had concluded the concert<span class="pagenum">[110]</span> +they laid aside their instruments, and during the +next ten minutes every man of them threw rings at +the canes or knives so rapidly that both Teddy and +his assistant had all they could do to wait upon the +throng.</p> + +<p>Then, giving the signal for the march to be resumed, +the leader said to the young fakir:</p> + +<p>"Don't get discouraged, my boy, no matter what +happens. If you have any trouble it can't last long, +for you've plenty of friends at the Run, and after +what happened here yesterday there should be a +good many on the grounds."</p> + +<p>The kind-hearted musicians marched away without +giving Teddy an opportunity to thank them, +and as if to atone for their previously spoken harsh +words the bystanders devoted themselves with +unusual zest to the task of winning a cane worth a +dollar by an outlay of five cents.</p> + +<p>It was nearly an hour before trade began to grow +dull again, and both the boys were quite willing to +rest a few moments.</p> + +<p>"At this rate we stand a chance of getting rich +before the fair closes," Teddy exclaimed, in a tone +of satisfaction. "I wonder what Uncle Nathan +would have said if he'd been here to hear the +leader?"</p> + +<p>"I'll tell you," a disagreeable but familiar sounding +voice replied from the rear of the stand where +its owner had been concealed by an adjoining booth,<span class="pagenum">[111]</span> +and Nathan Hargreaves stalked into view with a +comically tragic air. "Things have come to a pretty +pass when a man's own relations, an' them as he +has set up in business with his own hard-earned +money, try to bring scorn and reproach upon him. +You are a snake in the grass, Teddy Hargreaves, +an' not content with helpin' rob me, concoct such a +disgraceful scene as I have jest witnessed."</p> + +<p>"What could I have had to do with it?" Teddy +cried, in surprise. "I didn't know they were going +to give me a lift."</p> + +<p>"Of course you did; I ain't blind if I am such a +fool as to put you in the way of makin' so much +money. There wasn't a man in that band who'd +have countenanced the speech the leader made if +you hadn't been workin' on their sympathies. But +your race won't be much longer. Don't think that +I've stopped all proceedings, for it may be that +you're shoved into jail this very day unless you +make a clean breast of the whole thing."</p> + +<p>"I've got nothing to tell simply because I don't +know anything; but I believe the same man who +took my fifteen dollars robbed your store. Dan and +I heard him and another fellow talking, and in trying +to find out something for your benefit got +knocked down."</p> + +<p>"What did they say? Who are they?" the old +man asked, eagerly, his bearing toward Teddy +changing very suddenly. "Tell me! Tell your poor,<span class="pagenum">[112]</span> +old uncle, who'll be mighty near the poor-house, if +he don't get his own again."</p> + +<p>This appeal touched Teddy's heart immediately, +but Tim said, half to himself, taking good care Uncle +Nathan should hear him, however:</p> + +<p>"More'n a hundred robberies like that wouldn't +make him poor. Why, down at the Run folks say +you'd hardly miss what's been taken."</p> + +<p>"Those who make that kind of talk are only shiftless +people with never a dollar of their own, consequently +they don't know the value of one," the old +man cried, angrily. "It's all very well for a set of +loafers who are mad with me because I wouldn't +give them credit to say such things. Do you suppose +I'd spend my time runnin' around the country +huntin' for the thieves if I hadn't lost a power of +money?"</p> + +<p>"You'd be willin' to run pretty far if there was a +nickel at the end of the road," Tim retorted, but before +he could say anything more Teddy motioned +for him to be silent.</p> + +<p>"Are you goin' to tell me who the robbers are?" +Uncle Nathan asked, in a wheedling tone, as he +turned once more toward his nephew.</p> + +<p>"I don't know the men whom I suspect, except +by sight, but it's more than possible we may find +out enough to warrant their arrest before the fair +closes."</p> + +<p>The old man insisted on knowing at once, and alternately<span class="pagenum">[113]</span> +coaxed and threatened, but all to no purpose.</p> + +<p>Teddy positively refused to make a statement until +he had more proof, and recognizing the fact that +he might hurt his own cause by insisting, Uncle +Nathan said, in a most affectionate tone:</p> + +<p>"I must go now, Teddy, but I'll see you again before +night. If you'll do all you can to help find +them scoundrels I'll never say that you had anything +to do with the crime."</p> + +<p>"You'd no business to make any such talk, +for you knew it was impossible for me to take any +hand in it, even if I'd wanted to be a thief."</p> + +<p>"There's a good deal of circumstantial evidence," +the old man said, solemnly, as he turned to leave, +"an' it stands you in hand to do all a boy can to +clear your own skirts. I'm goin' to give you a +chance, an' promise there won't be any arrest made +to-day at all events."</p> + +<p>"There's a good reason why you promise that," +Tim cried, angrily, as Uncle Nathan walked away. +"You tried mighty hard, but couldn't get a warrant, +an' there ain't a justice of the peace between +here an' Waterville as would grant one without any +other evidence than what you can say."</p> + +<p>"Don't make him angry, Tim. He's feeling bad +about his money, an' you can't blame him for trying +to find out who has got it."</p> + +<p>"I don't blame him for that, but what I'm kickin'<span class="pagenum">[114]</span> +about is that he keeps naggin' at you when there's +no reason for it."</p> + +<p>"Most likely he thinks there is."</p> + +<p>"He can't; it's only the wretched old skinflint's +way of gettin' even with the world, an' so he picks +on a feller what he believes can't strike back."</p> + +<p>"I wish I could find out who the robbers are, and +where the goods have been hidden."</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't. It serves him right to lose 'em, +an'—— Hello! here comes that feller what helps +exhibit the rifles! I wonder what he wants at this +time of day, jest when business is beginnin' to be +rushin'."</p> + +<p>Dan was evidently in a high state of excitement, +for he forced his way through the crowds, regardless +of possible injury to himself or others, and did +not slacken speed until he stood in front of the +cane-board, breathless and panting.</p> + +<p>"What's up?" Teddy asked, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"The fakir who got your money, an' another +man, who I think is the same one we heard talkin' +outside the tent, have jest bought a boat from the +Davis Company. Sam saw 'em, an' ran over to tell +me while the bargain was bein' made. He's +watchin' down there till we can get back."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe it would do any good for me to +say another word to Long Jim. He went past here +this mornin', an' I only made a bad matter worse +by trying to make him give back what he stole."<span class="pagenum">[115]</span></p> + +<p>"We ain't countin' on doin' that, but I believe +they're gettin' ready to cart away the goods what +were stole from your Uncle Nathan. Perhaps we +can foller without bein' seen, an' get on to the whole +snap. Could you get off for the balance of the day?"</p> + +<p>And now Teddy was quite as excited as Dan.</p> + +<p>"Yes, an' so can Sam."</p> + +<p>"Are you goin' to help find his goods after all that +old duffer has threatened?" Tim asked, impatiently.</p> + +<p>"I'll do what I can," was the decided reply. "Do +you think you will be able to get along alone to-day?"</p> + +<p>"I could do it easy enough by hirin' a boy to pick +up the rings, but I hate to see you make a fool of +yourself, Teddy."</p> + +<p>"You'll think different later. Come on, Dan. I'll +be back as soon as I can, Tim," and then the young +fakir urged his friend in the direction of the creek.</p> + +<p>"It won't do to go anywhere near the boat-house," +Dan said. "Sam is up the bank a long piece +where the willows hide him. He's keepin' his eye +on the craft they bought, so it can't be taken away +without his seein' it."</p> + +<p>By mingling with the crowd it was possible to +make their way to the desired spot without being +seen, save by those with whom they came into immediate +contact, and in a few moments the watcher +was joined by his friends.</p> + +<p>"Now I want you fellers to let me manage this<span class="pagenum">[116]</span> +case," Sam said, pompously. "I know more 'bout +detective business than both of you put together, +an' if you'd only told me what was up the other +night we'd had the whole thing settled."</p> + +<p>"Have you seen the men?" Dan asked, impatiently.</p> + +<p>"Lots of times. The old fakir is loafin' around +close by the landin', an' the other one must 'a gone +off for somethin'. The Davis Company told me I +could take any of the boats, an' the minute the +thieves start we'll jump right on their trail."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[117]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>AMATEUR DETECTIVES.</i></p> + +<p>It was fated that the thrilling work of running +down and capturing the thieves should not be +begun until after considerable delay.</p> + +<p>"Now, I wonder what he is up to?" Dan said, +when it was no longer possible to see the supposed +burglar.</p> + +<p>"Why is it that you can't let me do this thing?" +Sam asked, angrily. "If you keep meddlin' we'll +never fix matters."</p> + +<p>"I don't see that I'm interfering," Dan replied, in +surprise.</p> + +<p>The three boys watched this one particular boat +in silence for ten minutes or more, seeing Long +Jim now and then, and just as they believed he +was about to step on board the man walked toward +the exhibition buildings, and was soon lost to view +amid the throng of people.</p> + +<p>"You was gettin' ready, too, I could tell that by +your eye."</p> + +<p>"I'll have to give in that you're the smartest +feller in this section of the country, Sam, an' that's +a fact."<span class="pagenum">[118]</span></p> + +<p>"Of course it is," the amateur detective replied, +complacently, thinking Dan's sarcasm was really +praise. "If I have my own way I can turn up the +biggest thief that ever walked on two legs; but you +mustn't bother me, or things may go wrong."</p> + +<p>If the matter had not been so serious to him +Teddy would have laughed long and often at the +dignity and superior knowledge assumed by this +fellow, who, since he made his acquaintance, had +done nothing more difficult than to get himself into +trouble; but, under the circumstances, he was so +deeply interested in the outcome of the business +that there was no room in his mind for mirth.</p> + +<p>"Dan," he said, "let you and I walk around two +or three minutes. We'll stay close by so that Sam +can give us the signal in case the men show up, and +we may find Hazelton."</p> + +<p>"Don't tell him what we're doin'," the amateur +detective cried, sharply.</p> + +<p>"Why not?"</p> + +<p>"'Cause it's likely he'll want to meddle with our +business, an' then my work will be spoiled."</p> + +<p>"I won't say a word to him until after seeing you +again," Teddy replied as he led Dan away, and +added when they were where it would be impossible +for Sam to hear them: "See here, it's foolish for +us to think of trying to follow those men if he's to +be allowed to make a fool of himself. With him +believing he's the greatest detective in the country,<span class="pagenum">[119]</span> +something wrong is sure to happen, an' we may +never get another chance of finding out about the +burglary."</p> + +<p>"Don't fret about that," Dan replied, confidently. +"It won't do any harm to let him swell a little now +while he's keeping watch; but when the real work +begins it won't take long to sit on him."</p> + +<p>"Then there will be a row."</p> + +<p>"I'll attend to his case; but I don't think there'll +be anything for us to do yet awhile. The men are +evidently in no hurry to leave, and most likely +intend to wait till the crowd begins to go."</p> + +<p>"Then why should all three of us stay on watch?"</p> + +<p>"We won't. Go back to your cane-board, and I'll +tell Sam to come for you when the burglars put in +an appearance. He'll have time to do that, an' +while he's gettin' a boat ready you can come for +me."</p> + +<p>"Will it be safe to trust him?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed," Dan replied, with a laugh. "He's +havin' an awful good time thinkin' he's the greatest +detective in the world, and couldn't be hired to +leave that clump of willows so long as the men +keep out of sight."</p> + +<p>Teddy was not so confident, and insisted on going +back with Dan while the arrangement was made.</p> + +<p>When the matter was explained Sam appeared to +be perfectly satisfied.</p> + +<p>"That's all right," he said, readily. "I can see<span class="pagenum">[120]</span> +to this thing alone; but I'll let you fellers know +the minute anything happens. Don't tell any of +the constables what I'm up to, or they'll want to +have a finger in the pie."</p> + +<p>Convinced that he would be informed of any +change in the situation, Teddy returned to the +cane-board just in time to aid Tim in attending to +a rush of customers who were spending their money +liberally.</p> + +<p>"What made you come back?" the clerk asked, +in surprise. "I've hired a feller for a quarter to +pick up rings, an' am gettin' along first rate."</p> + +<p>Teddy briefly explained the condition of affairs, +and then there was little opportunity for conversation +until considerably past noon, when trade +dropped off very decidedly for a while.</p> + +<p>In order that he might have a glimpse of the +other fakirs and rest himself at the same time, +Tim was sent to see if Sam was yet at his self-selected +post of duty, and Teddy took advantage of +the opportunity to ascertain the amount of his +receipts.</p> + +<p>To his great surprise he found nearly forty dollars +in the money-box, and from this he took thirty +with which to pay the merchant in Waterville who +had given him credit for his stock.</p> + +<p>"It has turned out to be a mighty good venture, +even if Aunt Sarah was so sure I'd make a fool of +myself by tryin' it. All the money I make now will +<span class="pagenum">[121]</span>be clear profit, and it looks as if I'd be able to help +mother quite a bit."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus125.jpg" width="600" height="506" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">"They're getting ready to start!" he said, breathlessly.</p> + +<p>"Well, how is business?" a voice asked, in a +cheery tone, and, looking up, Teddy saw his sole +remaining creditor.</p> + +<p>"I'm glad you've come," he cried, bundling the +thirty dollars up in a piece of paper. "I'd jest +counted this out for you, an' when you take it I'll +be free from debt."</p> + +<p>"But I don't want the money," the merchant +replied. "I only came around to see if you were +successful."</p> + +<p>"I've already made more than I reckoned on, an' +it'll be a favor if you take this, 'cause I don't like +to have so much around."</p> + +<p>Then Teddy explained the condition of his business +affairs, not forgetting to tell of the accusation +made against him by his Uncle Nathan, and the +merchant said, as he concluded:</p> + +<p>"I heard the whole story, my boy, and have +already talked with Mr. Hargreaves, whom I met a +few moments ago. I do not think he can do anything +to you, because you have made many friends +here. The money I will take, as it is not well to +keep it where it might be stolen; but can give you +no receipt until I get home."</p> + +<p>"That'll be all right," Teddy replied, contentedly; +"you trusted me with the goods, an' it would be +funny if I couldn't wait for a receipted bill. It's<span class="pagenum">[122]</span> +through you that I've had the chance to make so +much, an' I want you to know I feel grateful."</p> + +<p>"I believe that, and am more than pleased to +have put you in the way of getting a start in the +world. Come to see me when the fair closes, and it +is possible I may show you an opportunity of learning +to be a merchant on a large scale, rather than +a fakir whose method of getting a living is very +precarious, regardless of the fact that he sometimes +makes very great profits."</p> + +<p>It can be readily understood that Teddy accepted +the invitation, and then, trade commencing once +more, the gentleman walked away, leaving the +proprietor of the cane-board with the pleasing consciousness +that he was free from debt, and with +quite a large amount of money in his mother's +keeping.</p> + +<p>Tim returned very shortly after the merchant's +departure, and reported that Sam was still on +duty.</p> + +<p>"The boat hasn't been moved nor have the men +showed up again," he said. "That feller acts as if +he thought he was bigger than the President. He +told me he could be the greatest detective that ever +lived if it wasn't that folks made him show off at +rowin' 'cause he had so much style about him. I +don't think he's so very wonderful; but, of course, +I never saw many out an' out detectives."</p> + +<p>"And you don't see one when you met him. I'm<span class="pagenum">[123]</span> +sure he'll get Dan an' me in trouble before this +thing is ended."</p> + +<p>"Then why don't you let him go off alone? That's +what I'd do with such a chump."</p> + +<p>"I can't, because——"</p> + +<p>The sentence was not concluded, for at that +moment Dan came up at full speed.</p> + +<p>"They're gettin' ready to start!" he said, breathlessly. +"I saw 'em go by the buildin', an' run over +to tell Sam that I'd fetch you. Our boat is a long +distance up the creek, an' we'll have to hurry, or +run the chance of missing their craft."</p> + +<p>There was no delay on Teddy's part, despite the +misgivings he had regarding Sam.</p> + +<p>One parting injunction to Tim on the subject of +business, and then he followed Dan at full speed +toward the creek on such a course as would bring +them fully a quarter of a mile above the boat-house +outside the fair grounds.</p> + +<p>Sam had made everything ready for the journey +by the time they arrived, and was so excited that +he could no longer speak of his own wonderful +powers as a thief-catcher.</p> + +<p>"One of you fellers had better row while I steer," +he said, seating himself in the stern sheets and +taking the tiller-ropes. "If they see the way I +handle the oars they'll know exactly who's after +them, an' then the game'll be up."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry yourself about that," Dan replied,<span class="pagenum">[124]</span> +calmly. "Neither Teddy nor I knows anything +about a boat, except it may be to steer, so you'll +have to hump yourself."</p> + +<p>Sam grumbled considerably about taking so +many risks; but he finally moved over to the bow +and his companions took their seats aft.</p> + +<p>"I won't put any style to it, an', perhaps, that'll +keep 'em from knowin' I'm on their trail," he said, +and immediately began rowing in such a bungling +fashion that Dan said, sharply:</p> + +<p>"Look here, if you're goin' to pull this boat, do +it, or we'll go back. At this rate, you'll have everybody +at the fair watching to see what kind of +chumps have been allowed to risk their lives. +We've got no time to spare, either; for we must +get on the other side of the creek where it will be +possible to watch the men without getting too +near."</p> + +<p>"I'll take care of that part of the business," Sam +replied, loftily, and Dan immediately put into operation +his plan of "sitting" on the amateur detective.</p> + +<p>"You do your share, and that will be enough. +Teddy and I propose to take a hand in this ourselves."</p> + +<p>"Then I might as well go back."</p> + +<p>"You can, if you want to."</p> + +<p>It so chanced that he had no such desire, and +with the air of one whose feelings have been deeply +wounded he rowed steadily on, Dan steering, until +<span class="pagenum">[125]</span>they were where it was possible to have a full view +of a long stretch of the creek.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus131.jpg" width="600" height="383" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">THE BOYS WATCHING THE SUPPOSED BURGLARS<br />"There they are!" Teddy said.</p> + +<p>"There they are!" Teddy said, pointing down +stream to where a boat was being pulled close to +the left bank. "They have stopped, and it looks as +if something was being taken on board!"</p> + +<p>"It is a portion of the goods they stole!" Dan +cried. "Stop rowing, Sam, and if nothing happens +we'll soon know where the whole lot is to be hidden."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[126]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE RENDEZVOUS.</i></p> + +<p>That Dan's surmise was correct could be seen a +few moments after, while the boys, partially concealed +by the overhanging bank, watched the proceedings +with but little danger of being discovered.</p> + +<p>On the shore were a number of packages in a +cart, and these the supposed burglars loaded into +the boat with the utmost haste.</p> + +<p>If this lot comprised all that had been taken from +Uncle Nathan his loss must have been greater than +he stated, and Teddy said, after watching several +moments in silence:</p> + +<p>"I reckon this is only part of what they took; but +I'm puzzled to know how it could have been +brought so far. The idea of carting goods over here +to find a place in which to hide them is a queer one, +when all the thieves had to do was slip down the +river in a skiff, an' before morning they'd be +beyond reach of the officers."</p> + +<p>It surely was strange that the men should have +done so much useless labor, and the only solution +to the apparent mystery was offered by Sam, who +said, with an air of superior wisdom:<span class="pagenum">[127]</span></p> + +<p>"They've done it to throw me off the scent. That +fakir we saw in Waterville must have known who +I was."</p> + +<p>"How does it happen he had the nerve to come +here when he knew you counted on showing the +people who visited this fair your skill in rowing?" +Dan asked, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>"I reckon he didn't think I was tellin' the truth."</p> + +<p>It was useless to attempt to make Sam acquainted +with himself. He had such a remarkable idea of +his own abilities, despite the scrapes he was constantly +getting into, that the most eloquent orator +would have been unable to convince him he was +anything more than a very egotistical boy, with +little save his vanity to recommend him to the +notice of the general public.</p> + +<p>In five minutes the boat at the opposite bank had +received as much of a cargo as her owners wished +to carry, and then the men began to row leisurely +down the river.</p> + +<p>"Now, go slow, Sam, and don't turn around to +look, or they may suspect we are following them," +Dan said, warningly. "I'll keep you posted about +what they are doing, and you can tell us afterward +what ought to have been done. Pull moderately, +for we don't want to get very near while it is light +enough for them to see us."</p> + +<p>The chase was not a long one. By keeping the +boat's head to the bank and moving leisurely as<span class="pagenum">[128]</span> +boys who were bent only on pleasure might have +done, the pursuers evidently caused no suspicions +as to their purpose, and after about a mile had been +traversed the burglars turned up a narrow waterway +which led to a barn or shed built on the meadows +for the storing of marsh hay.</p> + +<p>There were plenty of ditches near at hand into +which the amateur detectives could run their craft +unobserved, and as the pursued left the creek Dan +steered into one of these.</p> + +<p>Here their heads hardly came above the bank, +and all three could see the men carrying their cargo +to the building.</p> + +<p>"We've got 'em now," said Sam, triumphantly, +as the first of the packages was taken on shore, +"an' the sooner we nab both the better."</p> + +<p>"How do you intend to set about such a job?" +Teddy asked.</p> + +<p>"Go right up an' tell 'em we've been on their +track."</p> + +<p>"And in less than two minutes you would get a +worse pounding than the toughs gave you last +night."</p> + +<p>Sam appeared to realize the truth of this statement, +for he had no further suggestions to offer, +and Dan said, after some reflection:</p> + +<p>"I think the best thing we can do will be to go +back to the fair. If those fellows find us here the +jig will be up; but it isn't likely they've got the<span class="pagenum">[129]</span> +whole of their plunder with them, and intend to +come here again. We'll talk with some one and +find out a good plan, or keep our eyes peeled to +learn what they mean to do with the goods. If +they propose simply to hide them until there is a +chance to get the lot away safely, we shall have +the key to the situation an' can take plenty of time +deciding what should be done."</p> + +<p>Sam did not again propose to make any attempt +at intimidating the men, and Teddy thought Dan's +scheme a wise one.</p> + +<p>"They'll come here more than once before the +week is ended; you know they spoke of moving the +stuff when the exhibitors got ready to leave, an' +we'd better go back to the grounds before those +fellows have finished their work."</p> + +<p>Sam pulled out of the water-course into the creek +without a murmur; but when they were on the +way back, and he felt at liberty to display his true +"style," courage returned.</p> + +<p>"I knew you fellers wasn't any good on detective +work," he said, scornfully. "If I'd had charge of +the case we should have them men tied hand an' +foot in the bottom of this boat."</p> + +<p>"How would you have got 'em there?" Dan +asked.</p> + +<p>"That's my business. Jest because I've let you +into this thing there's no reason why I should give +all my secrets away, is there?"<span class="pagenum">[130]</span></p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it, an' you keep them locked up in +your heart, for if Teddy an' I knew the plans we +might get into a bad scrape."</p> + +<p>"Well, what are you goin' to do now?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing until after we have talked with those +who know more than we do about such things."</p> + +<p>Sam immediately relapsed into silence. His superior +knowledge had been scorned, and he proposed +to let his companions understand that he was not +pleased with them.</p> + +<p>By the time the boys reached the bend in the +creek they could see the boat in which were Long +Jim and his companion, half a mile behind, and +Dan said:</p> + +<p>"Those fellows don't know me. When we land +you and Sam had better keep out of sight, while I +try to find out where they go after striking the fair +ground."</p> + +<p>"All right. It's time I helped Tim, an' you'll +come to the cane-board if there is anything to tell."</p> + +<p>"So I don't amount to anything, eh?" Sam asked, +sulkily.</p> + +<p>"Of course you do; but it would be foolish to +make a show of yourself to Long Jim, who would +remember you. Keep rowing around in the boat as +if you were at work, and there'll be no chance for +suspicion."</p> + +<p>By this time the little craft was at the landing +stage of the boat-house, and two of the party leaped<span class="pagenum">[131]</span> +out, leaving the third feeling that he had been unjustly +deprived of a very large portion of his rights.</p> + +<p>"If them fellers think they're goin' to get the +best of me they're makin' a big mistake, an' I'll +show 'em so before night. They don't know any +more about bein' detectives than a cat; but both +will be mightily surprised before mornin', or I'm +mistaken."</p> + +<p>Then, instead of rowing around the creek as +Dan had suggested, Sam pulled out into the middle +of the stream, looking wondrous wise and determined +as he awaited the coming of those whose +secret he had partially discovered.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile Teddy and Dan, without the slightest +suspicion of what their friend proposed to do, separated +at the landing stage, the former making all +haste to reach his cane-board, where he found Tim +doing a thriving business, and standing near by +was Hazelton.</p> + +<p>"Where have you been?" the jewelry fakir +asked, solicitously. "I've come here two or three +times without finding you, and had almost begun +to believe old Nathan succeeded in getting a warrant."</p> + +<p>Teddy was undecided as to whether he should tell +this acquaintance of all he had seen or not; but, +after some deliberation, and in view of the fact +that he also had been accused of the burglary, concluded +to do so.<span class="pagenum">[132]</span></p> + +<p>"We've found out where Long Jim is hiding the +stuff he stole from my uncle," he said, and then +explained what had been done during the last +hour.</p> + +<p>Hazelton was surprised that so much information +had been gained; but he was able to cause Teddy +an equal amount of astonishment.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe the packages you saw came from +the old man's store. I heard, about two hours ago, +that a store here in town was robbed last night, +and it isn't dead sure, after your uncle's accusations, +and what I have done on the fair grounds, +that I sha'n't be arrested on suspicion. Most likely +the goods taken down the creek were stolen here; +but I don't understand why those fellows should +work so boldly."</p> + +<p>"Probably they think, as one of them said the +other night, while so many articles are being carried +to and fro."</p> + +<p>"Very likely that may be true, and now comes +the question of what shall be done regarding the +information you have gained. I stand in a mighty +delicate position, and, quite naturally, want to save +myself, if possible, for even an arrest when there is +little or no proof, ain't to be contemplated calmly."</p> + +<p>"You ought to know better than I how we should +go to work. Dan an' I thought there would be +plenty of time, for if those fellows were going to +skip very soon they wouldn't have taken the trouble<span class="pagenum">[133]</span> +to carry the stuff down there, where it could +not be gotten away quickly."</p> + +<p>"I'll think the matter over, Teddy, and come +back here in a couple of hours," Hazelton said, +after a moment's thought.</p> + +<p>"Don't tell anyone what you found out until +after seeing me again."</p> + +<p>This conversation had been carried on at the rear +of the cane-board, where the customers could not +overhear it, and when the jewelry fakir walked +toward the exhibition building it was necessary to +satisfy Tim's curiosity regarding what had been +accomplished.</p> + +<p>"I don't s'pose it's any of my business," the +latter said, when Teddy concluded the story; "but +I wouldn't be afraid to bet all I shall earn this week +that you'll have trouble with that feller before the +scrape is over. He knows so awful much that somethin' +tough is bound to happen."</p> + +<p>Teddy did not think there was any good cause for +alarm, more especially since he felt confident Dan +would keep an eye on the oarsman, and during the +next two hours he thought of nothing save earning +money, for customers were plenty, and even with +the assistance of the boy Tim had engaged it was +all he and his clerk could do to wait upon those +who were anxious to win a cane or knife.</p> + +<p>Now and then some of the other fakirs would +visit him; but, as a rule, all were so busy that there<span class="pagenum">[134]</span> +was little time for the exchange of compliments, +and even the cry of "Three rings for five cents, +with the chance to get a dollar cane or knife for +nothing!" was not needed to stimulate trade.</p> + +<p>It was two hours from the time of his return when +Dan came up looking decidedly uneasy, and Teddy +did not stop to make change for the man who had +just patronized him, before he asked, hurriedly:</p> + +<p>"Now, what's up?"</p> + +<p>"Sam is missing."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean? How can that be?"</p> + +<p>"He was to row around the creek near the landing; +but for the last hour no one has seen him, and, +what is more, the boat can't be found. Long Jim +an' his friend haven't come ashore, as near as I +can make out, an' it looks to me as if that foolish +Sam has got into trouble through trying to play +detective."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[135]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>SAM'S ADVENTURES.</i></p> + +<p>In order to explain Sam's absence, and one or two +other incidents in their regular sequence, it is necessary +to go back to the moment when, his friends +having landed, the amateur detective was left to his +own devices.</p> + +<p>His first impulse was to report his arrival to the +manager of the boat exhibit, and then go about his +routine duties, but before this very proper plan +could be carried into effect he chanced to see Hazelton +on the shore.</p> + +<p>"Now, what's he layin' around there for?" Sam +asked of himself. "I'll bet Dan or Teddy has given +the whole snap away, an' he's come to pull in the +burglars. It's a mighty mean trick for them to play +after I've worked the case so far that there's nothing +to do but nab 'em. He'll get all the praise, an' +folks won't know the job was managed by me."</p> + +<p>The longer Sam thought of this apparent ingratitude +and treachery on the part of Teddy and +Dan the more angry he grew, and it did not require +many moments' thought for him to succeed in convincing<span class="pagenum">[136]</span> +himself that he had been very shabbily +treated.</p> + +<p>Continuing to talk to himself, or rather at the tiller, +on which his eyes were fixed, he added:</p> + +<p>"Folks have said so much about their savin' them +women from drownin', when I mighter done the +same thing if I'd been willin' to make a fool of myself, +that they want to scoop in everything; but I +could stop this little game by jest goin' ahead on +my own hook. If I sneaked down the creek an' +brought back the stuff them men have been hidin' +people would begin to know how much I understand +about detective work."</p> + +<p>This appeared in his mind as the most brilliant +scheme he had ever conceived, and in a very few +seconds Sam decided that it should be carried into +effect.</p> + +<p>First, and with no very well-defined idea of why +such a course was necessary, he rowed cautiously +to and fro past the landing stage, scrutinizing +closely every face he saw, and mentally hugging +himself because of the excitement which would be +caused by his return with the stolen property.</p> + +<p>Then he turned the boat, and began to row down +the creek, stopping every few seconds to gaze +around in such a mysterious manner that the suspicions +of any one who observed him would have +been instantly aroused.</p> + +<p>In this manner, which he believed the only true<span class="pagenum">[137]</span> +way for a first-class detective to approach his prey, +Sam had rowed less than half a mile when he saw +Long Jim and his companion returning.</p> + +<p>Now the time had come when true cunning was +necessary, and the amateur detective began to display +it by pulling the boat sharply around, heading +her for an indentation on the opposite shore.</p> + +<p>Here he ran her bow aground, and lying at full +length in the bottom, peered out at the men in the +most stealthy manner.</p> + +<p>They had already taken notice of his erratic +movements, and now regarded him intently, but, +without checking the headway of their own craft, +in a few minutes were beyond sight around the +bend.</p> + +<p>"There," Sam said, with a long-drawn breath of +relief, as he arose to a sitting posture, "if Teddy an' +Dan had been here them fellers would have tumbled +to the whole racket, but I've put 'em off the scent, +an' will have plenty of time to do my work."</p> + +<p>He pulled out from the shore once more, gazed +long and earnestly up and down the creek, and +then, in the same ridiculous manner as before, continued +the journey.</p> + +<p>The trip which should have consumed no more +than an hour even with the most indolent oarsman, +was not completed until twice that time had elapsed, +and then fully fifteen minutes were spent by this +very cautious boy in landing.<span class="pagenum">[138]</span></p> + +<p>He pulled his boat up high out of the water, and, +in order to conceal her, heaped such a pile of dry +grass on top of her that it must have attracted the +attention of any one passing, more especially those +who were familiar with the creek.</p> + +<p>This done he went toward the barn after the fashion +of an old-time stage villain, halting at the slightest +sound, and peering in every direction, fancying +himself surrounded by foes.</p> + +<p>Not until he had circled completely around the +barn twice did he venture to enter, and then, much +to his disappointment, there was nothing to be +seen. The building appeared to be absolutely +empty, and even his eagle eye failed to discover +any traces of recent occupancy.</p> + +<p>"Well, this is mighty funny," he said, with a sigh +of disappointment. "Them fellers surely brought a +lot of stuff in here, but they must have carried it +out again."</p> + +<p>Having expended so much labor and time in +reaching this place, he did not intend to return until +after making a thorough search, however, and to +this end he investigated one possible hiding-place +after another, pulling up the boards of the rude +flooring, and peering into places where nothing +larger than a mouse could have been hidden.</p> + +<p>During this time the burglars were returning +with all possible speed. Sam's actions, both as he +came down the creek, and also while screening<span class="pagenum">[139]</span> +himself from view, were so suspicious that, guilty +as the men were, they immediately concluded what +was very near the truth.</p> + +<p>Long Jim recognized the boy as having been with +Teddy when the bargain for the imaginary cane-board +was made, and instead of returning to the +fair grounds the two watched, from a point of +vantage on the bank, until Master Sam had landed.</p> + +<p>His purpose was now evident, and it was necessary +the burglars should resort to desperate measures +to prevent the loss of their ill-gotten gains as +well as to save themselves from imprisonment.</p> + +<p>When they arrived where it was possible to look +into the barn, Sam was on his knees scraping away +the dirt which appeared to have been recently disturbed, +and they heard him say in a tone of exultation:</p> + +<p>"I've got to it at last, an' now we'll see what +Teddy an' Dan have to say when I flash the +whole lot of stuff up with nobody to help me. I +reckon——"</p> + +<p>He did not finish the sentence, for at that moment +Long Jim stepped directly in front of him, as he +asked:</p> + +<p>"Did you leave anything here, my son?"</p> + +<p>"No—I—I—that is—you see——"</p> + +<p>Sam was so frightened that he could not say another +word. It seemed as if his tongue was swollen +to twice its natural size, while his throat was<span class="pagenum">[140]</span> +parched and dry, and to make bad matters worse, +he had entirely neglected to invent a plausible excuse +for his presence there in case of an interruption.</p> + +<p>"I asked if you'd left anything here?" Long Jim +repeated, very mildly.</p> + +<p>"Well—well—— You see I jest come down to—to—— I +thought, perhaps, I might find something, +but it's time I was gettin' back to the fair, 'cause +the folks will be needin' me."</p> + +<p>As he spoke he attempted to back toward the +door, but before taking half a dozen steps a cry of +fear burst from his lips, for a heavy hand was laid +with no gentle force on his shirt collar, and he +staggered forward helplessly.</p> + +<p>"That's an invitation for you to hold on a bit, +an' have a little conversation with two gentlemen +who are mighty curious to know why you came +here," Long Jim said, grimly. "You're goin' to +tell us the whole partic'lars, or there won't be +enough left of you to be seen under a microscope."</p> + +<p>Sam made no reply. He was literally dazed with +fear, and just at that moment he thought the life +of a detective very disagreeable.</p> + +<p>"Come, speak up, an' be quick about it," the man +cried, fiercely. "We've got no time to waste on +sich cubs as you, an' in about two minutes you'll +get worse'n we served out the other night."</p> + +<p>"That wasn't me follerin' you from the museum<span class="pagenum">[141]</span> +tent," Sam said, quickly, thinking possibly this fact +might work in his favor.</p> + +<p>"Who was it?"</p> + +<p>"Teddy an' Dan."</p> + +<p>"Who is Dan?"</p> + +<p>"A feller who works for the Stevens Arms Company +up at the fair."</p> + +<p>"Why did they follow us?"</p> + +<p>"Teddy wanted to get back the money he gave +you to buy a cane-board with."</p> + +<p>"If he knows what's wise for him he'll stop any +such rackets, or he may get more'n he bargains +for."</p> + +<p>Then the second man, who still held firmly to +Sam's collar, asked, as he shook his prisoner vigorously:</p> + +<p>"How did you know we had been here?"</p> + +<p>"Us fellers saw you come down in a boat."</p> + +<p>"So all three are in the secret, eh?"</p> + +<p>Sam's only thought was that he might possibly +save his own skin, and he replied in the affirmative, +although he must have known that by such answer +he was destroying his friends' chances of recovering +the goods.</p> + +<p>"Where are the fools now?" Long Jim asked, +angrily.</p> + +<p>"Up at the fair."</p> + +<p>"What do they intend to do?"</p> + +<p>"Get somebody to arrest you."<span class="pagenum">[142]</span></p> + +<p>"Then we've got to skip mighty lively, Phil," +and Long Jim looked up at his companion.</p> + +<p>"Yes; but if my advice had been follered we +wouldn't be in this scrape. You was the only one +the cubs knew, an' by keepin' out of sight we +mighter finished the work that's been laid out. +You're so pig-headed that a yoke of oxen couldn't +keep you in hidin'."</p> + +<p>"There's no use fightin' about it now; for we've +got to get a move on us in short order. It won't do +to let this boy have a chance to give the alarm."</p> + +<p>"Of course not. Lash him up somewhere so he +can't make a noise, an' his chums will come before +he starves to death."</p> + +<p>"Don't do that!" Sam cried, in an agony of terror. +"I won't say a word about your catchin' me here, +an' I'll do anything you say."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you're a nice plum to make promises, ain't +you. It didn't take much persuadin' to make you +go back on your friends, an' that's enough to show +whether you can be trusted. Get the rope out of +the boat, Phil, an' then we'll make ready for a long +jump."</p> + +<p>Phil obeyed, grumbling as he went because his +partner had refused to take his advice, thus plunging +both of them into danger, and Long Jim turned +his attention to the prisoner once more.</p> + +<p>"Before we leave this part of the country for +good I'm goin' to give you somethin' to remember<span class="pagenum">[143]</span> +us by so's you won't go 'round stickin' your nose +into other people's business agin."</p> + +<p>"What are you goin' to do?" Sam asked, his face +growing even paler than before.</p> + +<p>"Give you the worst floggin' a boy ever had. I'd +do it now if there wasn't so much work to be got +through."</p> + +<p>Sam had sufficient sense to know that all his +pleadings for mercy would be in vain, and he held +his peace until Phil returned with a long coil of +rope which had been used as a boat's painter.</p> + +<p>One of the beams at the end of the barn served as +a post to which to lash the prisoner, and here the +amateur detective was made fast in such a skillful +manner that he could not so much as move his +arms.</p> + +<p>"Shall we gag him now?" Phil asked, and Long +Jim replied:</p> + +<p>"No, there's time enough.</p> + +<p>"He can't make any one hear if he yells his best, +an' I've got a little business to settle before he's +trussed up for good."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[144]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>MISSING.</i></p> + +<p>When Dan informed Teddy that Sam was missing, +and suggested the possibility of the burglars +having gotten him in their power, both the +boys were decidedly alarmed; but the matter ceased +to appear as serious after it had been discussed in +all its bearings.</p> + +<p>"Long Jim wouldn't have dared to spirit him +away when there are so many people around," +Teddy said, after a long silence, during which he +was trying to imagine what Sam might have done. +"Besides, what would be the good of taking him if +we were left behind?"</p> + +<p>"Perhaps they count on hauling us in, too."</p> + +<p>"That isn't to be thought of for a moment. They +don't want to burden themselves with a lot of boys +when every effort must be made to get the stolen +property out of this section of the country before +they are discovered."</p> + +<p>"I'll allow all that sounds reasonable, but where +is Sam?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I don't know. Do you think he would<span class="pagenum">[145]</span> +dare to go down the river again after we landed?"</p> + +<p>"No, indeed; he's too much of a coward for that. +If there's been any funny business it was done +when the men got back."</p> + +<p>"Then we have no need to worry, for there are +hundreds of people on the bank of the creek all the +time, an' Sam would know enough to yell if anybody +tried to steal him."</p> + +<p>The idea that the amateur detective might be +stolen seemed so comical to Dan that he gave way +to mirth, and what had promised to be a most sorrowful +visit speedily became a merry one.</p> + +<p>"He had permission to remain away from the +exhibition building during the rest of the day," +Teddy finally said, "an' most likely he's goin' to +take advantage of it by roaming around the +grounds, exercising his detective faculties. He'll +turn up at the museum to-night all right, with a +big yarn to tell about his supposed adventures."</p> + +<p>"I reckon you're right; but I did get a little rattled +when his boss asked me where he was. I'll +come back this way when it's time to go to supper."</p> + +<p>"Wait a minute. I'm mighty hungry now, an' +business has been so good that I can afford to treat +to sandwiches an' lemonade, if you'll go with me +over to the grand stand. I'll bring you back something, +Tim," he added, as he leaped over the railing.</p> + +<p>Dan said he could remain away half an hour from<span class="pagenum">[146]</span> +the rifle exhibit, and Teddy was now so easy in +mind concerning money matters that he resolved +to have thirty minutes of sport.</p> + +<p>The boys first made a tour of that portion of the +grounds where the fakirs were congregated, stopping +a moment to see the whip dealer lashing a +pine stake to show the quality of his goods, and +then watching the "Great African Dodger," who +thrust his woolly head through an aperture in a +canvas screen for all those to throw balls at who +were inclined to pay the price.</p> + +<p>Then they stopped at the "envelope game," where +were spread on a stand a large collection of cheap, +gaudy goods, each bearing a printed number, every +one supposed to correspond with those contained +in a box of envelopes, and this fakir was doing a +big business, as was shown by the fact that he +could afford to hire a barker, who cried continually +at the full strength of his lungs:</p> + +<p>"Come up now, and try your luck! Here's where +we have all prizes and no blanks! Ten cents buys +an envelope, with the privilege of drawing for +yourself, so there can be no job put up against you, +and every number calls for some one of the many +valuable articles in the layout. Here's a gentleman +who spends only ten cents and gets a pair of +those beautiful, triple-plated, double-expansion, +fine pure metal cuff buttons, worth two dollars at +some stores!"<span class="pagenum">[147]</span></p> + +<p>"Come on!" Dan said, impatiently. "That fellow +is almost as big a snide as Hazelton."</p> + +<p>"How do you make that out? I can see a lot of +things that cost more than a dollar. Look at the +silver watch, and the revolver."</p> + +<p>"That may be all very well; but no one except a +fellow who is interested in the business gets any of +those articles."</p> + +<p>"You can select any envelope you choose."</p> + +<p>"That's right; but the ones with the numbers +calling for the big prizes are lying flat in the box +where nobody can get them. If you should accuse +the man of cheating he would turn the whole thing +upside down, and then, of course, they could be +found. Here comes a fellow who I know is cappin' +for that fakir. Watch how he does it."</p> + +<p>The apparent stranger approached the stand, and +after some talk as to how the game was run, invested +ten cents.</p> + +<p>The man did not open the envelope he drew; but +handed it to the fakir, who, pretending to look at +the card it contained, shouted:</p> + +<p>"Number fifty-four. The gentleman has drawn +that beautiful solid silver watch worth fifty dollars, +and I will give him thirty for his bargain."</p> + +<p>The stranger showed his prize to the crowd that +clustered around him, and business was increased +wonderfully, for it had apparently been proven +that the game was conducted fairly.<span class="pagenum">[148]</span></p> + +<p>"Now watch him," Dan said, as the stranger +walked away with his prize ostentatiously displayed, +and the two boys followed a short distance +off, until they saw him halt behind a booth, where +he turned the article won over to a barker who had +approached.</p> + +<p>"That's the way it is done," Dan said, "and when +we come back you'll see the same watch on the layout."</p> + +<p>Teddy was rapidly being initiated in the tricks of +the fakirs, and the more he saw the more firmly +was he resolved not to follow the business longer +than the present week, although he believed his +own game to be an honest one.</p> + +<p>The cheap jewelry dealer; the man who had been +selling the remnants of a stock of knives made by a +manufacturer who "had bankrupted himself by +putting into them too expensive material;" the +fakir with the dolls which were to be knocked down +by balls thrown from a certain distance, with a +prize of one cigar if the customer could tumble two +over, and the peanut-candy dealer were visited in +turn, and then the boys were attracted by the sound +of Hazelton's voice.</p> + +<p>He was plying his peculiar trade again, and by +the appearance of the crowd was meeting with +great success.</p> + +<p>"Let's see how he gets out of it this time," Teddy +suggested, and Dan agreed.<span class="pagenum">[149]</span></p> + +<p>The fakir had arrived at that point where he was +giving away the supposed watches, and the boys +listened until they saw his preparations for departure.</p> + +<p>"What beats me is how he gets clear every time," +Dan whispered. "I should think after he had +swindled four or five hundred, some of them would +lay for a chance to get even with him."</p> + +<p>"He says they do, an' that's why he left his +satchel with me."</p> + +<p>Hazelton recognized the boys just as he was telling +that Nathan Hargreaves might possibly act as +his agent after the close of the fair, and nodded +pleasantly, as he gathered up the reins; but this +was one of the occasions when he was not to be +allowed to go scot free.</p> + +<p>Two stalwart-looking fellows were standing near +the head of the horse, and when the fakir would +have driven off they seized the bridle, one of them +shouting:</p> + +<p>"Come down with that money! This is the second +time I've seen you do us countrymen up to-day, and +now you've got to square things."</p> + +<p>Hazelton swung his whip around, striking the +speaker full in the face, and causing the horse to +plunge and rear, but yet the fellows kept their hold.</p> + +<p>The whip was pulled from the fakir's hand, and +in an instant it appeared as if a riot had begun. +Those who had been content to keep secret the fact<span class="pagenum">[150]</span> +of having been swindled now grew bold as they +saw there was a leader in the movement, and more +than a hundred leaped forward to seize the representative +of the alleged jewelry manufacturers.</p> + +<p>"He'll be killed!" Teddy shouted, and would have +attempted to go to the assistance of the man who +had been kind to him, despite the fact that he could +not have aided him in any way against so many; +but for the fact that Dan pulled him back, as he +shouted:</p> + +<p>"Can't you see that it would be fifty to one if you +should go in that crowd? We couldn't help him, +and what's the use of gettin' a big lickin' for nothing? +Besides, what would become of your business +if the people here thought you were his partner?"</p> + +<p>Before Dan ceased speaking Teddy realized how +useless would be any effort of his, and he remained +passive, trying to get a glimpse of the ill-fated +fakir.</p> + +<p>The numbers who beset him completely hid Hazelton +from view. The carriage had been overturned +by the first desperate rush of the victims, +and the horse was clearing a space around himself +by the free use of his heels.</p> + +<p>"They'll commit murder!" Teddy cried.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe it'll be quite as bad as that; but +he won't be likely to give away any more lockets +while this fair lasts."</p> + +<p>As a matter of fact, Hazelton was not left to +<span class="pagenum">[151]</span>fight the battle alone. Like every other fakir +engaged in that peculiar business, he had several +partners whose duty it was to mingle with the +crowd for the purpose of intimidating any who +might be disposed to make trouble, and these had +closed in upon him, while some of the more timid +spectators shouted for the constables.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus159.jpg" width="600" height="512" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">"Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold of us it'll be a bad job all around!"</p> + +<p>Once Teddy caught a glimpse of the unfortunate +man; his glossy hat was gone, his clothing torn, +and his face covered with blood.</p> + +<p>"I can see him now!" he cried, "and it looks as +if they had about used him up, for——"</p> + +<p>Before he could finish the sentence a stranger +rushed toward him, and showing the familiar black +satchel in his hand, said hurriedly:</p> + +<p>"Get out of here with that. Hazelton will see +you some time this evening. Don't stop a minute!"</p> + +<p>Before the boy could reply the stranger was forcing +his way through the struggling, yelling crowd, +in order to aid his partner, and Teddy said in dismay:</p> + +<p>"Now we are in a muss. Here is all his money, +an' if anybody sees us with it we'll have a tough +time."</p> + +<p>"You can't throw it away, an' we must sneak +off," Dan said, and the expression on his face told +how distressed he was that such a responsibility +had been thrust upon them.</p> + +<p>"Shall we go back to the stand?"<span class="pagenum">[152]</span></p> + +<p>"No, that would never do, for then they would be +sure to vent their anger on you. Go up to the +museum; Mr. Sweet knows Hazelton, an' may be +willin' to help him by keeping the satchel till the +row is over."</p> + +<p>These words had been spoken as the boys were +trying to make their way through the fringe of +spectators which had hemmed them in since the +fight began, and after some difficulty they +succeeded; but at the same moment one of the +combatants, who had received more than his +share of punishment, emerged close by their +side.</p> + +<p>He saw Hazelton's satchel, and recognized it.</p> + +<p>"Come here, fellows! two little villains are making +off with the money! That's what we want!"</p> + +<p>He at once started in pursuit, as did several +others, and Dan cried, as he helped carry the burden:</p> + +<p>"Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they +get hold of us it'll be a bad job all around!"</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[153]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A TERRIBLE NIGHT.</i></p> + +<p>At just about the same moment when Teddy and +Dan were running with Hazelton's money at +full speed toward the museum tent, with the chance +of escape very much against them, Sam was in a decidedly +painful frame of mind.</p> + +<p>After he had been securely tied the two men +conversed in low tones for several minutes, and +then, as if having arrived at some definite conclusion, +began to make preparations for leaving the +place.</p> + +<p>At the same spot where Sam had been interrupted +while scraping away the dirt they proceeded +to dig with a shovel which Phil procured +from somewhere outside the building, and during +this labor the prisoner could hear fragments of the +conversation.</p> + +<p>Once Long Jim ceased his work long enough to +say:</p> + +<p>"When you come to look at the matter quietly it +doesn't seem as if we'd got into sich a very bad +scrape. You can manage to bring the rest of the<span class="pagenum">[154]</span> +stuff down the creek between now an' Friday +mornin' and I've got a plan for givin' anybody who +may come after us a good clue to the boy's disappearance."</p> + +<p>Phil made some remark which Sam could not +hear, and his companion replied in a louder tone:</p> + +<p>"It can all be done so's to make folks think we've +gone up the creek, an' we've got to lay low for a +while, which won't be a hard job while the weather +is warm."</p> + +<p>"But I don't like the idea of totin' that cub with +us so long."</p> + +<p>"I'll take care of him, an' will make him earn his +board, or somethin's bound to break."</p> + +<p>From this time until several packages were unearthed +Sam could hear nothing; but what had +already been said was sufficient to convince him +that he was to have a very unpleasant experience, +and for at least the hundredth time he fervently +wished he had never so much as heard of detective +work.</p> + +<p>After the goods had been brought to light the +earth was replaced in the excavation and pounded +down carefully. Then fully half an hour was spent +digging in different places, probably for the purpose +of misleading any one who might come there +in search of plunder, for Phil said in a tone of satisfaction +as he ceased the apparently aimless labor:</p> + +<p>"It'll take at least a day before all of these suspicious<span class="pagenum">[155]</span> +looking spots have been investigated, an' +in the meanwhile, unless we're chumps, we shall +know what's goin' on. I'll take one load to the +boat; make sure the coast is clear, an' then the +three of us can carry the balance. Have the boy +ready for a quick move, an' see to it that he can't +give an alarm."</p> + +<p>"I'll knock his head off if he so much as thinks +of such a thing," and as Phil disappeared with a portion +of the plunder Long Jim began to unfasten +Sam's bonds, saying as he did so:</p> + +<p>"We've made up our minds to hold you with us +a few days 'cause you're sich jolly company. If +you obey orders an' keep your mouth shut there's +a chance of gettin' outer this scrape mighty easy; +but I'd slit your throat in a jiffy if you tried to give +us the slip or made any noise."</p> + +<p>Sam made no reply; but his captor could see +very plainly that the boy was nearly paralyzed +with fright, and it was safe to infer he would follow +the instructions given to the letter.</p> + +<p>Phil returned in a very short time and reported:</p> + +<p>"The coast is clear. There's not a craft to be seen +on the creek, an' we can leave without danger."</p> + +<p>The rope had been removed from Sam's limbs, +and Long Jim proceeded to load him down with +bundles until he staggered under the weight.</p> + +<p>"Now, see that you walk a chalk line," the burglar +said, fiercely. "Foller Phil, an' I'll keep behind<span class="pagenum">[156]</span> +to make sure there are no tricks played. Remember +what I promised!"</p> + +<p>The men could carry the remainder of the goods +in one load, and the three went out of the barn hurriedly, +Sam not daring to so much as lift his eyes +from the ground lest Long Jim's threat should be +carried into execution.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the water's edge the boat was loaded, +the prisoner ordered to take his place at the oars, +and then the final preparations were made.</p> + +<p>Phil uncovered the boat in which Sam had come, +launched and overturned her. Then taking the +hat from the unresisting boy's head, threw it far +out in the channel, afterward giving the little craft +a shove which sent her a long distance from the +shore. Next the two oars were sent after the hat, +and Phil said with a laugh:</p> + +<p>"The current ain't very strong; but with the aid +of the wind I reckon that stuff will drift up to the +fair grounds before dark."</p> + +<p>Sam's despair was already so great that it did not +seem as if it could be increased; but the last vestige +of hope fled when he realized that these things +had been done in order to make it appear as if he +were dead.</p> + +<p>"Teddy and Dan won't think of huntin' for me +after the boat is found," he thought, "an' these +men are sure to kill me before this scrape is over!"</p> + +<p>The two burglars seated themselves comfortably<span class="pagenum">[157]</span> +in the stern-sheets, the packages being placed at +the bow to trim the craft properly, and Long Jim +said, sternly:</p> + +<p>"You've been showin' off your skill as an oarsman +for two or three days, an' we want you to do +it now. Put in your best licks, for it'll be tough +if we don't get through the water mighty fast."</p> + +<p>Even Sam's worst enemy would have pitied him +at this moment. No galley slave chained to his +seat could have been more utterly helpless, and +he exerted himself to the utmost in order to please +those who professed to be so willing to punish or +kill.</p> + +<p>Every stroke of the oars took them farther away +from the fair grounds, and each puff of wind carried +the evidences of the prisoner's death nearer +the only ones who might take the trouble to search +for him.</p> + +<p>Not until fully an hour had passed did the burglars +give any sign of a desire to end the journey, +and then Long Jim said:</p> + +<p>"We must be six miles from the fair grounds by +this time, an' that is as far as you'll want to pull +to-night, Phil. There should be plenty of good +hidin'-places in this bit of woods, an' I think we'd +better haul up."</p> + +<p>"All right. Steer her into that ditch over there, +an' we'll look around."</p> + +<p>Thus far in his experience as a detective this was<span class="pagenum">[158]</span> +the only thing Sam had had for which to be thankful. +His arms were so tired that it seemed as if he +could not have pulled another stroke, and his +clothes were literally wet from the perspiration +that came from his body.</p> + +<p>Phil went ashore, leaving his companion to +watch the almost exhausted prisoner, and in a few +moments the former shouted:</p> + +<p>"Load that cub up, an' bring him over here. +This is a capital place to locate in for a couple of +days."</p> + +<p>Staggering under the heavy burden Long Jim +placed on his shoulders the amateur detective was +forced on through the underbrush in advance of +his captor until the two arrived at a perfect tangle +of cedars.</p> + +<p>Phil returned to the boat for the remainder of the +goods, and all the plunder was placed inside the +thicket where the foliage was so dense that one +might have passed within a few feet of the spot +and not had any suspicion men were hidden there.</p> + +<p>A tiny brook ran past one side of the hiding-place, +and Sam took advantage of the opportunity +to check his raging thirst while the men were laying +plans for the future.</p> + +<p>"I'll go back soon after sunset," Phil said, as he +lighted his pipe and proceeded to make himself +comfortable. "We can leave the boy here to look +out for the stuff, an' you'd better come with me up<span class="pagenum">[159]</span> +to the barn so's to learn if any one visits the place. +I shall be back before morning, an' you can let me +know if the coast is clear."</p> + +<p>"Shall you try to finish the job we were talkin' +about?"</p> + +<p>"No; things are so hot jest now that it won't pay +to take any more risks than are absolutely necessary. +What we want is to get out of this portion of +the country as soon as possible."</p> + +<p>"All right. I'll leave you to manage the rest of +the business, an' promise to follow orders."</p> + +<p>"I think it's about time you said that, Jim. If +my plans had been carried out in the first place we +wouldn't be in sich a muss; but could be havin' +the cream of the pickin's at the fair."</p> + +<p>"Well, what's the use of harpin' on that all the +time? The thing has been done, an' we've got to +make the best of it. Do you think it'll be safe to +leave this cub here alone while we're away?"</p> + +<p>"It will be when I get through with him," was +the grim reply, and Sam, terrified by the vagueness +of this remark, more even than he had been by the +plain language previously used, cried, piteously:</p> + +<p>"Please don't leave me here alone to-night! I'll +pull the boat, an' do everything you say, without +so much as yippin'."</p> + +<p>"Them as starts out in the detective business +have to take what comes, 'specially when their +own foolishness brings it about. You joined our<span class="pagenum">[160]</span> +party of your own accord, my son, an' must put up +with what we choose to give."</p> + +<p>Sam said nothing more. He was reaping what +he had sowed, and decided that matters could not +be much worse even if he was caught trying to +escape, therefore he resolved to take desperate +chances in an effort to give his captors the slip.</p> + +<p>There was no opportunity to make the attempt, +on this night at least, for when Phil had finished +smoking he proceeded in a very methodical manner +to secure the prisoner.</p> + +<p>Sam was ordered to seat himself on the ground, +with his back to the trunk of a cedar-tree, and he +was fastened skillfully, with his elbows tied back +in such a manner that he could not bring his hands +together. Both feet were bound, and then, with a +sudden movement, Phil forced the boy's mouth +open, shoving into it a short piece of pine wood +about an inch and a half in diameter.</p> + +<p>This was secured in such a manner that the prisoner +could not free himself from the uncomfortable +bridle, neither would it be possible for him to make +the slightest outcry.</p> + +<p>"Now, don't shout for help while we are gone, +an' unless the bears eat you up we shall meet +again about daybreak," Phil said, with a coarse +laugh as he and Jim went out of the thicket toward +the creek.</p> + +<p>Poor Sam had never thought of the possibility<span class="pagenum">[161]</span> +that there might be bears in this section of the +country until the burglar suggested it, and he was +so terrified as not to realize it was impossible there +could be any dangerous animals in such a thickly-settled +portion of the State.</p> + +<p>Therefore, in addition to the danger to be apprehended +from his captors, he had constantly before +his mind this new cause for fear. The rustling of +the leaves, the flight of a bird as it sought a perch +for the night, or the soughing of the wind among the +branches were to him so many proofs that a violent +death would be his before morning.</p> + +<p>If the beginning of the hours of darkness was so +terrible it can well be fancied how he suffered +before another day dawned.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[162]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A NARROW ESCAPE.</i></p> + +<p>Neither Teddy nor Dan had any hope of reaching +the museum tent before their pursuers +could overtake them, and although both knew what +might be the result if they were taken with the +jewelry fakir's money and goods in their possession, +they did not for a moment think of abandoning the +property.</p> + +<p>The cries of those in the rear attracted the attention +of the spectators elsewhere on the grounds, +and without waiting to learn the cause of the trouble +hundreds of men and boys joined in the chase, +all shouting at the full strength of their lungs:</p> + +<p>"Stop thief! Stop thief!"</p> + +<p>The distance to be traversed was nearly a quarter +of a mile; but the many turns the boys were forced +to make in order to avoid those who were ready to +capture them doubled this, and they were yet very +far from the goal when a burly, red-faced man +jumped in front of them.<span class="pagenum">[163]</span></p> + +<p>It seemed as if capture was inevitable; but Teddy +resorted to the last means of defense, and was successful.</p> + +<p>Letting go his hold of the satchel he lowered his +head, leaped forward with full force, striking the +officious stranger full in the stomach.</p> + +<p>The man, not anticipating such an attack at a +moment when he almost had his hands upon the +supposed thieves, was bowled over like a nine-pin, +and, jumping quickly aside, Teddy caught hold of +the satchel once more.</p> + +<p>By this time both the boys were so nearly winded +that speech was well nigh impossible; but Dan +managed to gasp admiringly:</p> + +<p>"You're a dandy, old fellow," and then, with one +supreme effort, increased his pace a trifle.</p> + +<p>It was fortunate that there were no spectators in +front of Mr. Sweet's tent when the boys came in +sight of it. The barker was lounging in a chair +outside, and on catching a glimpse of the boys +recognized them immediately.</p> + +<p>The crowd in pursuit would have told a duller +man than he professed to be that there had been +some serious trouble, and, running to meet the boys +as if to intercept them, he cried:</p> + +<p>"Circle around the canvas, an' crawl underneath, +so's that gang won't see where you've gone!"</p> + +<p>The fugitives understood the scheme at once, and +making a short detour as if to avoid him, dashed<span class="pagenum">[164]</span> +under the guy-ropes at one end, gaining the interior +of the tent before the pursuers arrived.</p> + +<p>Mr. Sweet had just started toward the flap to +ascertain the cause of the commotion when the +boys entered, and, thinking himself about to be +attacked, leaped quickly back as he seized an ironbound +stake.</p> + +<p>"Oh, it's you, eh?" he said, on recognizing the +intruders. "What's up? Are you the thieves +they're yellin' for?"</p> + +<p>Teddy was hardly able to speak; but he held up +the satchel, as he panted:</p> + +<p>"Hazelton's—they're killin' him—he—wants—this—saved."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I understand it now. Jump into the +wagon an' get under the stuff there. I'll take the +valise. Them kind of fakirs are bound to come to +grief sooner or later, an' honest people get into a +muss tryin' to help 'em. I'd like to see the fair +where them kinds of games wasn't allowed; but +don't s'pose I ever shall, although it's always +promised."</p> + +<p>While Mr. Sweet had been grumbling, and at the +same time concealing the satchel under the box +containing the snakes, the boys were doing their +best to hide themselves beneath the litter of ropes +and canvas which had been carelessly thrown into +the wagon.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the pursuers came up, discovered<span class="pagenum">[165]</span> +the unpleasant fact that the fugitives were no +longer in sight, and began to parley with the +barker.</p> + +<p>"I tried to catch 'em," the boys heard the latter +say; "but they got around the tent before I had +time to find out what the matter was."</p> + +<p>"They've gone inside!" one of the crowd shouted. +"Don't let's allow swindlers to get the best of us +so easy!"</p> + +<p>"That's the way to talk!" another cried. "We'll +have 'em out if the show has to come down!"</p> + +<p>At this moment Mr. Sweet, looking calm and undisturbed, +emerged from the flap.</p> + +<p>"Bring out them boys, or down comes your tent!" +a man yelled.</p> + +<p>"I reckon the wisest plan for you to pursue is to +wait till I find out what all this means," the proprietor +of the museum said loudly, at the same time +beckoning the barker and the clown to his side. +"It looks to me as if this was the same gang who +came here last night tryin' to clean us out, an' warrants +for their arrest are in the hands of the constables +now. I paid one hundred dollars for the +privilege of exhibitin' here, an' that means I'm to +have all the protection the managers of this fair +and the authorities of the town can give me. I've +warned you off; but if you still want to finish up +the work of last night, an' the constables don't come +in time, there are three of us here who are good for<span class="pagenum">[166]</span> +twice that number of your gang, an' when a man +gets a tap over the head with one of these he's not +in it any longer!"</p> + +<p>Mr. Sweet flourished the heavy stake as he spoke, +and his employes showed that they were armed in +the same manner.</p> + +<p>"We didn't come to disturb you," one of the +crowd said, in a milder tone, as the greater number +fell back before the threats made of invoking the +aid of the law. "All we want is a valise two boys +brought here, for in it is quite a pile of our +money."</p> + +<p>"How did they get it from you?" the proprietor +of the museum asked for the purpose of gaining +time in the hope the constables would put in an +appearance.</p> + +<p>"We were swindled by a jewelry agent, an' are +goin' to get back our own."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you are, eh? Well, I haven't got the stuff; +but if you allow yourselves to be swindled, will you +help matters by turning thieves? You can sue the +man who has done you up; but there's a penalty +for stealing, as you will find out if you keep on in +this way."</p> + +<p>The less impetuous among the pursuers understood +that the showman was speaking only the +truth, and, now that they had an opportunity for reflection, +began to be ashamed of the part they were +playing. One by one walked away without making<span class="pagenum">[167]</span> +any further remonstrance, and in a short time only +a dozen or so remained in front of the tent.</p> + +<p>All these were young men, and several had been +drinking, therefore the danger was not yet past.</p> + +<p>"You stand here and brain the first man who +attempts to enter," Mr. Sweet said, as he disappeared +inside the tent. Then hurrying to where +Teddy and Dan were hidden, he whispered:</p> + +<p>"It may be possible that in order to avoid a row +I shall be obliged to let this gang in. There is no +one behind the canvas, and you can slip out readily. +Go directly back where you belong, an' if +anybody accuses you of being the boys who brought +away the valise deny it. I'm goin' to make a big +bluff about lookin' for constables, an' the minute +you hear me talking, move lively."</p> + +<p>"What about Hazelton's money?" Teddy asked.</p> + +<p>"He'll find it here when he dares to come for it."</p> + +<p>An instant later the fugitives heard him say from +the outside:</p> + +<p>"I propose to call for help in case you very +respectable young gentleman should take a notion +to break in and steal."</p> + +<p>"All we ask is that you'll turn out them boys," +one of the party replied, angrily, "for, whether it's +stealing or not, we're bound to have that fakir's +money."</p> + +<p>"That part of it is nothing to me. There are no +boys inside, an' if you want to go in one at a time,<span class="pagenum">[168]</span> +so there'll be no chance of gettin' the best of me an' +destroyin' my property, I don't think there'll be +any objection made."</p> + +<p>"Now's our time before they come?" Dan whispered, +as he slipped softly down from the wagon, +and Teddy followed.</p> + +<p>It was but the work of a moment to raise the +canvas and step out. There was absolutely no one +in sight. The tent had been erected near the edge +of the grounds, and there was nothing in the vicinity +to attract the sightseers.</p> + +<p>"We'll get over the fence, an' come in through +the main gate. It's better to pay for admission +than to let people suspect we were the ones who +have been chased."</p> + +<p>"Go on; I'll stay close at your heels."</p> + +<p>Five minutes later they were walking along the +dusty road looking as innocent as possible, and +feeling comparatively safe.</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose any one will know us?" Teddy +asked after they had trudged some distance in +silence.</p> + +<p>"There can't be much danger of that. All the +crowd saw were our backs, and, besides, after those +fellows cool off they'll be ashamed of themselves. +I don't reckon you'll have any trouble; but I may +get it hot from the boss because I've been away so +long."</p> + +<p>"I guess there won't be much danger of that;<span class="pagenum">[169]</span> +but if anything should happen come to my stand. +After what has happened I reckon I can afford to +whack up with you on some of the profits, especially +since every one says to-morrow is to be such a big +day. Where do you suppose Hazelton is?"</p> + +<p>"He must have had a chance to get off when the +men started for us; but I'll bet he don't look as +nice as he did this morning."</p> + +<p>By this time the boys were at the ticket-office, +and, paying the price of admission, they walked into +the inclosure without attracting the slightest attention.</p> + +<p>On the way to his place of business Teddy +chanced to think of the errand on which they had +started out, and he bought a generous supply of +sandwiches for Dan, Tim, and himself.</p> + +<p>When the two arrived at the cane-board business +was at its height, and the clerk and his assistant +were having quite as much as they could do to +attend to the customers.</p> + +<p>This saved Teddy the necessity of entering into +any explanation while strangers were near, and +he immediately went to work, not having an idle +moment until nearly nightfall, when the greater +portion of the visitors had departed.</p> + +<p>"Where did you and Dan go that you staid away +so long?" Tim asked as he and Teddy began to +pack up the stock of canes and knives.</p> + +<p>"Oh, it's a long story; I'll tell you all about it<span class="pagenum">[170]</span> +while we are eating supper," Teddy replied, with a +significant look in the direction of the assistant.</p> + +<p>Tim understood that there was some secret +regarding the matter, and he at once proceeded to +get rid of a possible eavesdropper by saying to the +assistant:</p> + +<p>"Here's the money I promised. There's no need +of your stayin' any longer."</p> + +<p>"Shall I come to work in the morning?"</p> + +<p>Tim looked toward his employer, and the latter +said:</p> + +<p>"Yes, of course, if it is pleasant weather. Everybody +says there'll be a bigger crowd than ever, an' +I reckon we shall have work enough for all hands."</p> + +<p>The boy had but just taken his departure when +Dan approached, looking very mournful.</p> + +<p>"Have you been bounced?" Teddy cried, excitedly.</p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it; but look here," and Dan held up +a straw hat. "That's poor Sam's! His boat has been +found bottom up, an' this, with one of the oars, +was fished out of the creek a few moments ago. +While we were talking rough about him the poor +boy was drowning!"</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[171]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE ARREST.</i></p> + +<p>Teddy was dazed by the tidings and apparent +proof of Sam's death. Without being able to explain +why, it seemed as if the amateur detective +was not the sort of a boy who might be expected +to depart this life suddenly, and the news saddened +him wonderfully.</p> + +<p>"Just think," he said, "the poor fellow wouldn't +try to save the women because of the danger of +approaching a drowning person, and in such a +short time he himself is at the bottom of the creek."</p> + +<p>"If he has got any folks some word ought to be +sent to them."</p> + +<p>"I never heard him say whether he had or not. +Will any one search for the body?"</p> + +<p>"The man who represents the Davis Company +says he will have men out in the morning, if it is +possible to hire any; if not, there will be plenty +wanting a job by Saturday, and he can then get +all he wants. It's bound to be a long search, for +there's no telling where the boat capsized."</p> + +<p>Nothing save Sam's untimely fate was spoken of +during the time they were packing up the goods<span class="pagenum">[172]</span> +and carrying them to the tent, and then Mr. Sweet, +after having been told the sad news, said, without +commenting upon it:</p> + +<p>"You boys had better go to supper now, an' get +back before dark, for there's no knowin' but that +some of those fellows who called on me may be +waiting to take their revenge out on you."</p> + +<p>"How did you get rid of them?" Dan asked.</p> + +<p>"That part of it was as easy as rollin' off a log, +after you boys were out of sight. I let 'em in one +at a time, an' the chumps never tumbled to the fact +that you had gone under the canvas. They came to +the conclusion you must have climbed over the +fence, an' we didn't take the trouble to show them +the mistake. It was a close shave, though. At one +time, when I was talkin' so loud about stealing, I +thought we'd have the toughest kind of a row."</p> + +<p>"Is the money all right?"</p> + +<p>"It's jest where I left it, an' won't be touched +till he comes to claim it, unless you boys want to +take charge of the property."</p> + +<p>"Indeed we don't," Teddy replied, quickly. "I've +had all I want of such caretaking."</p> + +<p>"Then go to supper, an' hurry back."</p> + +<p>The boys waited only long enough to stow their +goods in the wagon, and then Mr. Sweet's advice +was acted upon.</p> + +<p>As a matter of course Tim wanted to know what +the proprietor of the museum had been talking<span class="pagenum">[173]</span> +about, and as they were walking across the grounds +Teddy told the whole story, concluding by saying:</p> + +<p>"It was a little the worst scrape I ever got into; +but after the money had been placed in our hands, +and the man who left it went off, we couldn't do +different from what we did."</p> + +<p>"That Hazelton had no business to get you into +such a row," Tim replied, indignantly. "Why +didn't he hang on to the stuff, an' take his lickin' +like a man?"</p> + +<p>"I don't think he knew it was to be given to us. +The fellow who did it had seen him leave the +satchel with us once, most likely, an' when there +was danger of being robbed, believed we could look +out for it again. It's the last time such a thing will +happen, for I'm going to tell Hazelton that I don't +want to be mixed up in his business."</p> + +<p>At this point Dan changed the subject of conversation +by speculating upon the way in which Sam +met his death, and this topic was such a mournful +one that nothing else was thought of until the party +returned to the tent once more.</p> + +<p>Then came the question of how much money had +been taken in during the day, and after figuring +up the amount he had spent, Teddy reckoned the +cash on hand, announcing the result as follows:</p> + +<p>"Countin' what I paid out, we've taken sixty-one +dollars an' seventy cents since morning. It don't<span class="pagenum">[174]</span> +seem reasonable, but a feller has to believe it after +seein' the money."</p> + +<p>"You'll have a much better trade to-morrow, +if it is fair, and you're not recognized as one of the +boys who helped to get Hazelton's money away," +Mr. Sweet said, cheerily. "I predict that the receipts +will figure up hard on to a hundred dollars."</p> + +<p>Teddy gasped like a person who is suddenly +submerged in cold water at the thought of earning +so much, and he realized that if such should be the +case he would be able to assist his mother very +materially.</p> + +<p>"I'll pay you, Tim, before I get so dazzled as to +forget it," he said, with a laugh, and the clerk felt +almost as rich as his employer when he received +six dollars and seventeen cents for a day's labor +which came very near being sport.</p> + +<p>"I only wish the fair held on for six months," he +said gleefully. "It seems too bad that there are +only two days more, for Saturday never counts."</p> + +<p>"You can go to the Holtown fair, and try it for +yourself. I'll give you what stock we have left on +hand."</p> + +<p>"Then I'll do it," Tim replied, emphatically, and +straightway he began to speculate as to the enormous +amount of money he would earn.</p> + +<p>Teddy tied his money in as compact a package as +possible, intending to give it to his mother when +she should arrive on the morrow, and Mr. Sweet<span class="pagenum">[175]</span> +had advised that all hands "turn in" early, when +the flap was raised, admitting a man who appeared +to be covered with adhesive plaster and bandages.</p> + +<p>Not until the newcomer had approached within +the circle of light cast by the lantern did the occupants +of the tent recognize him as the jewelry fakir, +and Teddy cried in surprise:</p> + +<p>"Why, Mr. Hazelton! We didn't expect to see +you to-night!"</p> + +<p>"Did you think I was dead?"</p> + +<p>"It looked as if you would be killed for a certainty, +and you did get pretty well done up."</p> + +<p>"Yes; as the reports of the prize fights put it, 'I'm +badly disfigured, but still in the ring.' Was the +money taken away all right?"</p> + +<p>"Mr. Sweet has hidden it."</p> + +<p>"And how did you come out of the scrape?"</p> + +<p>"If it hadn't been for the folks here we should +have fared about the same as you did."</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry, my boy, that you were dragged into +the matter, and it wouldn't have happened if I'd +understood what Kelly was going to do. He knew +you could be trusted, and so turned it over; but it +was a mean situation to put you in."</p> + +<p>"It wasn't pleasant for any of us," Mr. Sweet +said; "but you can thank the boys for hanging on +to the bag as if it had been their own. Most fellows +of their age would have dropped it long before +reaching here. How did you get off?"<span class="pagenum">[176]</span></p> + +<p>"When the cry was raised that the money had +gone the greater portion of the crowd started in +pursuit, an' my partners and I managed to hold +our own until a couple of constables came up. They +took charge of the team, and gave us a chance to +slip through the gates."</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do now? Try it to-morrow?"</p> + +<p>"With this face? Well, I should say not. There +is a fellow here who has bought my right to the +privilege, and I shall leave Peach Bottom early in +the morning."</p> + +<p>"That's about the best thing you can do, and I'd +advise that you don't spend much time out of doors +until then."</p> + +<p>"I'm not intending to. It was necessary to come +here, and, unless you object, I'll stay a while so's +they will have time to sober up a bit."</p> + +<p>"You're welcome to what we've got, even if I +don't like your way of doing business."</p> + +<p>"I want to straighten matters with the boys, and +if they——"</p> + +<p>Hazelton did not finish the sentence, for at that +moment the canvas flap was pushed aside and a +man entered with an unmistakable air of authority.</p> + +<p>"Hold on there, friend," Mr. Sweet shouted. "We +don't allow visitors at this time of night."</p> + +<p>"I understand that, but reckon you won't make +any very big kick when I tell you that I'm one of<span class="pagenum">[177]</span> +the deputy sheriffs of this county, and have come +to serve a warrant."</p> + +<p>"On whom?"</p> + +<p>"Frank Hazelton, who claims to be an agent for a +firm of jewelry manufacturers. I believe you're the +man," he added, approaching the disfigured fakir.</p> + +<p>"You've got that part of it straight enough, but +what am I to be arrested for?"</p> + +<p>"You are suspected of being concerned in the +burglary which was committed in this town last +night."</p> + +<p>Hazelton did not express nearly as much surprise +as the boys, who were really dazed by the announcement.</p> + +<p>"So Hargreaves has finally succeeded," the fakir +said half to himself, and the officer replied, quickly:</p> + +<p>"This has nothing to do with old Nathan's affair, +although it does look as if the two burglaries were +committed by the same person."</p> + +<p>Hazelton remained silent several seconds, during +which time the sheriff waited patiently for him to +say he was ready to go, and then he asked:</p> + +<p>"Can I speak to one of these boys in private. It +has nothing to do with the charge, but I want him +to aid me in getting a good lawyer."</p> + +<p>"I am sorry to say I must hear all that is talked +about, however trifling it may be."</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't suppose it can make much difference," +and without rising from his seat, Hazelton<span class="pagenum">[178]</span> +continued, "Teddy, you believe I had nothing to do +with this thing?"</p> + +<p>"I can tell what I heard those——"</p> + +<p>"Don't tell anything yet a while; at least, not +now. I want you to do this for me: After the fair +closes go to that merchant who was so kind to you, +and explain to him the whole affair, including your +suspicions. Ask him to direct you to the best attorney +in the county; get all the money from Mr. +Sweet that may be needed, and pay the lawyer's +fee. Send him to me as soon afterward as possible. +It is nothing more serious than lying in jail a few +days, and that won't be such a great hardship, now +I've got this face on me."</p> + +<p>"Shall I——"</p> + +<p>"There is no need of saying anything more," Hazelton +interrupted, fearing the boy was about to +speak of the money the proprietor of the museum +had hidden. "The merchant will understand and +advise if you tell him everything—that is, I think +he will; but in case he refuses, talk with some one +else whom you can trust."</p> + +<p>As he finished speaking the fakir arose to his +feet, motioned to the officer, and walked directly +out of the tent without so much as bidding the others +goodby.</p> + +<p>No one spoke until after he had been absent several +minutes, and then Teddy asked, with a long-drawn +sigh:<span class="pagenum">[179]</span></p> + +<p>"Do you think he will come out all right, Mr. +Sweet?"</p> + +<p>"That's hard to say, for I don't know how much +proof they may have against him. It's his business +that has done a great deal toward inducing a magistrate +to issue the warrant, for once a man shows +himself to be a swindler, anything else can readily +be believed of him."</p> + +<p>"But what about his money?" Dan asked.</p> + +<p>"That is to be handed over to Teddy."</p> + +<p>"What have I got to do with it?" the boy asked, +in amazement.</p> + +<p>"He told us that as plainly as he dared to talk before +the officer, and we'll count it out, after which +his stock in trade shall be buried, for I want nothing +to do with it."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[180]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A PROPOSITION.</i></p> + +<p>Teddy had the most decided objections to taking +charge of Hazelton's money, and for several +reasons. In the first place he did not want to have +the responsibility, and again, the fact of its being in +his possession seemed to make him a partner in the +business.</p> + +<p>Mr. Sweet was determined, however. He insisted +that Hazelton had stated this as plainly as was possible +under the circumstances, and, despite the boy's +protests, immediately began the transfer.</p> + +<p>"It shall be done in such a way that he can't accuse +you of having taken any," the proprietor said, +as he pulled the satchel from its hiding-place and +broke the lock open with a hatchet. "We'll count +it in the presence of all hands, and each one shall +give Teddy a written statement of how much was +found."</p> + +<p>An exclamation of surprise burst from Tim's lips +as the receptacle was spread out on the ground, for +it appeared to be literally crammed with money.</p> + +<p>Mr. Sweet separated the silver from the bank<span class="pagenum">[181]</span> +notes, spreading both on the ground where they +could be seen by every person present, and then he +counted them slowly, taking care that the spectators +were following his every movement.</p> + +<p>"I make it three hundred an' forty-eight dollars," +he announced. "If there's anybody here who ain't +sure that's right, say so now."</p> + +<p>Each member of the party had seen the amount +counted, and agreed with the result as declared by +Mr. Sweet, who forthwith wrote the following:</p> + +<blockquote><p>We, the undersigned, have seen a valise belonging +to Frank Hazelton broken open, and certify +that three hundred and forty-eight dollars, the only +money found therein, was handed by Jacob Sweet +to Edward Hargreaves in conformance with the orders, +as we understood them, from the said Frank +Hazelton.</p></blockquote> + +<p>"Now I want every one to sign that," Mr. Sweet +said, as he handed his lead-pencil first to the barker, +"and then Teddy and I will have some proof of the +amount."</p> + +<p>It required quite a while for all to conform with +the wishes of the proprietor of the museum, owing +to the fact that several of the party were far from +being skillful penmen, but the task was finally accomplished, +and as the money was handed to Teddy, +the latter asked, ruefully:</p> + +<p>"What shall I do with it? I'm afraid of losing so +much."</p> + +<p>"That's a risk Hazelton is bound to take. Fasten<span class="pagenum">[182]</span> +it in your clothes somehow, an' be sure you don't +get into any row where it can be stolen."</p> + +<p>By the aid of many pins, and with the assistance +of both Dan and Tim, Teddy finally succeeded in +disposing of the money about his person in such a +way that it was not an unusual burden, and then Mr. +Sweet insisted that all hands should try to get some +rest in order to be fresh for the supposedly enormous +amount of work to be done on the following +day.</p> + +<p>Teddy lay down on the ground with the others, +but it was many hours before his eyes were closed +in slumber. Sam's untimely death, the guardianship +of so much money, and his own business affairs +all served to keep his eyes open until nearly midnight, +when he fell into a sleep so troubled by frightful +dreams that it was far from being restful.</p> + +<p>It seemed as if he had but just lost consciousness +when Mr. Sweet aroused him with the information +that the "big" day of the fair was breaking.</p> + +<p>"Turn out an' get your breakfast before sunrise, for +on this morning the early bird will pick up many a +penny while the lazy ones are yet in bed, an' fakirs +must make hay when the sun shines."</p> + +<p>Teddy was on his feet in an instant, and half an +hour later, having broken his fast, he was at the +booth with his clerk and Dan, the latter volunteering +his assistance until the exhibition buildings +should be opened.<span class="pagenum">[183]</span></p> + +<p>The proprietor of the museum had advised him +well; the receipts of the cane and knife boards were +nearly five dollars before more than half of the +booths were in condition for trade, because the +trains were running unusually early in order to accommodate +the crowds, and when Dan felt obliged +to leave, business was so good that the proprietor, +clerk, and assistant were all working industriously.</p> + +<p>"If I can get off I'll see you about noon," Dan +said, as he walked away, and Teddy replied:</p> + +<p>"Be sure to come, for mother will be here, and I +want you to meet her."</p> + +<p>From that time until nine o'clock the crowd increased +in numbers, and as Teddy said during a lull +in business, "it seemed as if the grounds were so +full that no more could get in."</p> + +<p>When Mrs. Hargreaves arrived her son could pay +little attention to her, but he proposed that she +should amuse herself by looking at the different exhibits +until nearly noon, when he stated that he +would take an hour off, no matter how great a rush +of customers might be around his booth.</p> + +<p>"I earned sixty dollars yesterday, an' before +night I'll have a hundred more, so there's little +doubt that this week's work as a fakir will enable +me to pay all you owe on the house," he whispered, +triumphantly, and his mother walked away, +hardly daring to believe what Teddy had told her.</p> + +<p>During the next hour it seemed as if a steady<span class="pagenum">[184]</span> +stream of money was flowing into the box, and +Teddy was feeling confident that Mr. Sweet's prediction +would prove to be correct, when the one +especial man he wanted to see came up with a +folded paper in his hand.</p> + +<p>It was the merchant from Waterville, and he +said, as he handed the document to the boy:</p> + +<p>"Here is the receipted bill, and I am more than +glad to see you doing so well."</p> + +<p>"Can I talk with you for five minutes?" Teddy +asked, hardly noticing the paper as he put it in his +pocket.</p> + +<p>"As long as you want to. What is the matter? +Running out of stock?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, no, your clerk made such a good selection +for me that I've got all I shall need. This is something +more important."</p> + +<p>Then Teddy hurriedly told the merchant how and +where he had first met Hazelton; explained fully +what the latter's business was; of the accusations +made by Uncle Nathan; what he and Dan had +heard and seen, and concluded by repeating the request +made by the fakir as he was led away to jail.</p> + +<p>"Are you willing to do anything for him?" the +boy asked, as his story was finished.</p> + +<p>"I can't say it is a matter which appeals very +strongly to my sympathies, because of the swindles +he perpetrated, but if it is an unjust accusation +something should be done to help him. The one<span class="pagenum">[185]</span> +lawyer above all others who can be of assistance +came over with me this morning. I will see him, +and later in the day you shall have a call from us."</p> + +<p>"Before you go I wish you would take this +money," Teddy said, earnestly. "It is too large an +amount for me to carry around, and it will be safe +with you."</p> + +<p>The merchant consented to take charge of Hazelton's +ill-gotten gains, and Teddy felt decidedly relieved +when the cash was in another's keeping, and +he had nothing of more value than an acknowledgment +of the same to look after.</p> + +<p>"In this matter I shall recognize no other order +than yours," the merchant said when the transaction +was concluded, "and if the fakir should succeed +in regaining his liberty he must come to you +for the necessary document.</p> + +<p>"I don't care how it is fixed so long as the money +is not in my hands," Teddy replied, in a tone of satisfaction, +and then he was called upon to attend to +another rush of customers, every one of whom was +eager to be waited upon first.</p> + +<p>Another hour passed, and it was more evident +than before that Mr. Sweet had been correct when +he stated the sum which should be taken in at the +cane-board.</p> + +<p>Teddy, having breakfasted early, was so hungry +that he was on the point of going out to buy a supply +of sandwiches, when another visitor arrived.<span class="pagenum">[186]</span></p> + +<p>This was no less a personage than Uncle Nathan, +and he greeted his nephew with the utmost cordiality, +as he said:</p> + +<p>"It looks to me as if you were makin' a power of +money here, Teddy. I had no idea these triflin' +games would so attract the people."</p> + +<p>Glad to be on pleasant terms with the old man +once more, Teddy stated that they had been at +work very hard since the first train arrived, and +concluded by saying:</p> + +<p>"I took over sixty dollars yesterday, and Mr. +Sweet says it'll come near to a hundred to-day."</p> + +<p>"Sixty dollars!" the old man cried. "Are you +telling me the truth, Teddy Hargreaves?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I am, an' I've got the money in my +pocket to prove it."</p> + +<p>"Why, at this rate you'll soon be a rich man, for +you don't seem to lose much of the stock."</p> + +<p>"We buy a good many canes or knives back. +When a man puts a ring over one that he don't +want we take it in, and give him five more chances. +In that way there is very little goes out compared +to the amount of money received."</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan looked around at the players for a +moment, and then in a very confidential tone he +whispered:</p> + +<p>"See here, Teddy, don't you want a partner? I'll +pay for the stock you bought, an'——"<span class="pagenum">[187]</span></p> + +<p>"I've already done that out of yesterday's receipts," +Teddy cried. "All the bills are settled, an' +what comes in now is clear profit."</p> + +<p>"But suppose I stood here an' called up the people +I know, don't you think it would make business +better?"</p> + +<p>"And if it should, do you think we could attend +to more customers? Every minute I talk with you +is so much money lost, for the other fellers can't +pick up rings an' make change fast enough."</p> + +<p>"Does that mean you don't want to go into business +with me?" the old man asked, angrily.</p> + +<p>"No; but it means that there would be no reason +for doing such a thing. I've got no debts, an' there +are more customers than can be attended to on so +small a board. If you'd made the proposition last +Monday it would have been different, but now you +can't expect me, after taking all the risk, to divide +after the work has been done."</p> + +<p>"Who lent you the money to start, Teddy Hargreaves?" +Uncle Nathan cried, his face growing +purple with rage.</p> + +<p>"You did."</p> + +<p>"And how have you repaid such generosity? +How——"</p> + +<p>"I gave you three dollars for the use of fifteen +two days," was the prompt reply.</p> + +<p>"But how have you repaid me for remaining inactive +after my money was stolen?"<span class="pagenum">[188]</span></p> + +<p>"That was something which did not concern me, +therefore I had nothing to repay."</p> + +<p>"It has a great deal to do with you, as shall be +shown before this day is ended, unless you consent +to take me as an equal partner in this enterprise. +Your friend in crime has been arrested, and I can +swear that he turned over to you his ill-gotten +gains. One word from me at this time and you will +be in the same prison."</p> + +<p>The fact of his having been threatened before +made Teddy bold, and he said, quietly:</p> + +<p>"I won't pay you for holding your tongue, Uncle +Nathan, so do whatever you choose."</p> + +<p>"I will inform the authorities of all I have learned +this morning, and we shall see what the result will +be," the old man cried, in a fury, as he walked +away, and despite the bold bearing he had assumed +Teddy firmly believed that if the magistrate who issued +the warrant for Hazelton's arrest should know +he was in possession of the fakir's money, he would +be brought before a bar of justice to explain matters.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[189]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h2> + +<p class="h3">WITH THE BURGLARS.</p> + +<p>It is well to look in upon Sam during his enforced +vigil of Wednesday night.</p> + +<p>For at least two hours after the burglars had departed +he thought of nothing save that he would +soon be killed, and, perhaps, devoured by wild animals. +Then the pain in his jaw and limbs became +so great, owing to the tightly bound cords and his +inability to move, that his sufferings overcame the +fear to a certain extent, and he had not even the +poor consolation of being able to give vent to an +audible groan.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the mental and bodily torture +he did sleep occasionally during the night, which +appeared to be of twenty-four hours' duration, +and never had he heard a sweeter sound than +when his captors approached, the hum of their +voices reaching him before the noise of their footsteps.</p> + +<p>The burglars were laden with packages of what +appeared to be merchandise, and by the faint light<span class="pagenum">[190]</span> +of the coming day Sam could see that they looked +heated and tired.</p> + +<p>"Well, how's our detective?" Long Jim asked, +with a laugh, as he threw himself on the ground by +the boy's side. "Has he decided to arrest his victims, +or will he give them a little show of leaving +the country?"</p> + +<p>As a matter of course Sam could not make any +reply; but the expression in his eyes must have told +of the suffering which he was forced to endure, for +Phil said, as he began to untie the rope holding the +gag in place:</p> + +<p>"There's no need of keepin' him trussed up any +longer, an' I reckon it'll be a relief to have a chance +to use his tongue once more."</p> + +<p>Even when he was free the prisoner was unable +to do more than roll upon his side. His limbs were +so stiff and cramped that he had no power over +them, and he could not have risen to his feet just +at that moment if his life had depended upon it.</p> + +<p>Jim seemed to think all this was very comical, for +he laughed loudly at the prisoner's helplessness, +and suggested that if he intended to follow the +business of a detective to practice remaining in one +position in order to avoid such a complete collapse +when fortune should again be so unkind to him as +she had been in this particular case.</p> + +<p>When the burglar's mirth finally ceased the two +men lighted their pipes, and proceeded to enjoy a<span class="pagenum">[191]</span> +season of repose after so much fatiguing work, +while Sam was left to recover as best he might.</p> + +<p>Fully half an hour elapsed before he succeeded in +crawling to the brook where he quenched his thirst, +and then his one desire was for sleep.</p> + +<p>Stretched out on the ground within a few feet of +his captors the blissful unconsciousness of slumber +came upon him, and the sun was high in the heavens +before he awoke.</p> + +<p>Long Jim was seated on the turf, his back against +a tree, and a quantity of food spread out in front of +him; but Phil was not in sight.</p> + +<p>"Well, it strikes me you've been takin' things +mighty comfortable," the man said, with a grunt. +"Don't give yourself so far over to a life of pleasure +as to forget that I promised to give you the greatest +floggin' of your life before we part, for then you +won't be so much surprised when it comes."</p> + +<p>The sight of the food caused Sam to realize how +very hungry he was, and, regardless of the subject +introduced by Jim, he asked, timidly:</p> + +<p>"Can't I have somethin' to eat?"</p> + +<p>"I don't think you can, my son. In the first +place you haven't earned it, an' then, again, my +partner an' I may need all the grub we've got on +hand."</p> + +<p>Then, as if reconsidering his determination, the +man selected two small crackers, tossing them to +Sam as he cut a slice of boiled ham for himself.<span class="pagenum">[192]</span></p> + +<p>"That's more'n you deserve," he said, as the +prisoner began to devour them eagerly; "so don't +count on gettin' another bite to-day."</p> + +<p>Sam literally devoured the food, and then went +once more to the brook to wash down the dry +repast.</p> + +<p>It seemed as if the crackers increased rather +than satisfied his hunger, and he watched Jim +eagerly as the latter finished a generous meal of +meat, cheese, and hard-boiled eggs.</p> + +<p>The burglar lighted his pipe, and paid no attention +to the hungry boy, who now had ample time +for reflection.</p> + +<p>He remembered that this was the important day +of the fair, and pictured to himself Teddy and Dan +at their work enjoying themselves at the same +time they were making money. Then he thought +of what he might be doing if the detective fever +had not taken so firm a hold upon him, and, despite +all efforts to prevent it, the tears coursed down his +cheeks, plowing wide furrows in the dirt with +which his face was encrusted.</p> + +<p>This painful revery was not prolonged. Shortly +before noon Phil came into the hiding-place, his +face wearing an expression of entire satisfaction.</p> + +<p>"I reckon we needn't be afraid any one will be +here lookin' for us now our detective has been +drowned," he exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"What's up?" Jim asked.<span class="pagenum">[193]</span></p> + +<p>"Hazelton, the fakir, has been arrested for the +burglary at Peach Bottom, an' men are draggin' +the creek to find the body of the boy who worked +for the Davis Boat Company."</p> + +<p>Sam actually shuddered at the thought that people +were looking for his corpse, and it gave him an +"uncanny" feeling, this idea that he was numbered +with the dead.</p> + +<p>"When was the arrest made?" Jim asked.</p> + +<p>"Last night. Old Nathan from the Run says the +fakir turned over a lot of money to the boy who +was goin' to buy your cane-board, an' it looks very +much as if he would be locked up with the man +whom people believe is his partner."</p> + +<p>"Nothin' said about what the cubs saw at the +barn?"</p> + +<p>"Not a word."</p> + +<p>"Then we can count on havin' the balance of this +week in which to leave the country."</p> + +<p>"As much as that, if not more. Another load will +get the stuff together; but I've been thinkin' we'd +better bury it here, an' not try to move a thing for +a month or two."</p> + +<p>"In that case we'd be obliged to take that specimen +along," and Jim pointed with a contemptuous +gesture toward Sam. "It wouldn't do to let go of +him while there was a chance of his givin' the +game away."</p> + +<p>"I'll 'tend to that part of it, an' guarantee he<span class="pagenum">[194]</span> +won't be in condition to make us much trouble," +Phil said so confidently that Sam began to shake +as with an ague fit, for it seemed positive to him +this burglar had decided upon his murder.</p> + +<p>"If things were so comfortable like why don't +you try to make a dollar, for I reckon there's a big +crowd at the fair?"</p> + +<p>"The grounds are packed; but it ain't exactly +safe to do much business," and Phil told of the +assault upon Hazelton. "The whole boilin' of 'em +now think everybody's tryin' to work some swindle," +he added, "an' the consequence is that it +would go hard with any feller who should slip up. +We've done enough for one week, an' I'd rather +not take chances till this stuff is off our hands."</p> + +<p>"Do you count on goin' back agin to-day?"</p> + +<p>"What's the use?"</p> + +<p>"I only asked, for you're managin' this whole +thing now."</p> + +<p>"My idea was to sneak up alone to-night; take +on the balance of the stuff, an' then lay low till +Saturday evenin', when we'll make the big break."</p> + +<p>"It's goin' to be mighty dull business sittin' here +with nothin' to do," Jim replied, in a tone of complaint.</p> + +<p>"I don't see how we can fix it much quicker, +unless we go to-morrow, while there are so many +around."</p> + +<p>It was evident Jim did not relish the idea of<span class="pagenum">[195]</span> +leaving everything to his companion, and the latter +so understood the expression on his friend's face, +for he said, angrily:</p> + +<p>"You're cookin' up some foolish scheme now, +an' in spite of all I can do to prevent it we'll probably +succeed in gettin' nabbed before matters are +arranged as they should be."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you're too smart, that's what ails you. +Take all the soft snaps, an' leave me here to suck +my thumbs without even the chance of movin' +around."</p> + +<p>"If you think it's sich a snap to row up there an' +back, why don't you try your hand."</p> + +<p>"That's jest what I'm willin' to do. Anything's +better'n stayin' here, an' I'd like you to have a +taste of it."</p> + +<p>Sam, who was expecting each moment to see the +thieves come to blows, understood at once that this +arrangement did not please Phil; but he made no +further objection than to say:</p> + +<p>"If you wasn't so blamed careless I'd like to have +you do a share of the hard work; but it's ten to one +you'll contrive to let everybody know you are +there."</p> + +<p>"I may not be so all-fired smart as you think you +are, but I ain't quite a fool. Why, I've managed +bigger things than this when you was around beggin' +for something' to eat, 'cause you was too +chicken-hearted to do this kind of work."<span class="pagenum">[196]</span></p> + +<p>"You'd better not say too much; I've stuck by +you when worse men would have a' given you the +cold shake, an' don't intend to take any guff, especially +since I've had sich hard work to get us out +of the scrape you jumped into."</p> + +<p>"I shall talk, an' if you don't want to listen, there +are plenty of places to lay off in outside of this."</p> + +<p>Then the two thieves glared at each other several +moments in silence, and finally Phil said, with a +mirthless laugh:</p> + +<p>"We won't fight till this job is finished. Go an' +get the balance of the stuff, an' we'll make a break +whenever you are ready; but after one pull up an' +back there'll be somebody besides me who'll think +it hard work."</p> + +<p>Then, in order to heal the breach which had +opened between them, Phil produced a suspicious +looking black bottle from his pocket, and handed it +without comment to his partner.</p> + +<p>"Why didn't you bring this out before, an' then, +perhaps, the business would 'a' looked different?" +Jim growled, as he drank long and deep; "but it +won't make any difference about my goin' up the +creek."</p> + +<p>"That's all right; I'm satisfied."</p> + +<p>As the two men began to drink a great hope +sprang up in Sam's heart that they would become +so stupefied by the liquor that he might make his +escape. They had not thought it necessary to<span class="pagenum">[197]</span> +replace the bonds which had cost him so much +suffering, and at the first signs of unconsciousness +he resolved to make one dash for liberty, either by +taking to the boat, or attempting to make his way +toward the fair grounds on that side of the creek.</p> + +<p>There was no such good fortune in store for the +prisoner, however. The men drank themselves +into the most friendly humor, and then the supply +of liquor was exhausted.</p> + +<p>After advising Jim not to start until sunset, Phil +lay down to sleep, and Sam thought it wise to feign +slumber also, lest the wakeful burglar should take +it into his head to administer the promised flogging +in order to pass the time more agreeably.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[198]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A DISASTER.</i></p> + +<p>Teddy was decidedly uncomfortable in mind +after Uncle Nathan departed. By a combination +of circumstances which could not well have been +avoided, he had been made to appear as a confederate +of Hazelton, and if all the facts concerning +his relations with the fakir should become known +public opinion would he against him.</p> + +<p>He did not allow these forebodings to interfere +with business, however. Customers were plenty; +the nickels were coming in as rapidly as he could +make change, and Tim had no hesitancy in saying +that Mr. Sweet had set their receipts of one day +considerably too low.</p> + +<p>"We've done twice as much as we did yesterday +at this time, an' I'm countin' on gettin' twelve or +fifteen dollars as my share of this day's work."</p> + +<p>"It looks as though you wouldn't be disappointed, +and that's a fact. I wish I knew where +we could get a few more canes, for we've lost quite +a good many this morning."</p> + +<p>"There's no time to go to Waterville; but we<span class="pagenum">[199]</span> +can shorten the board by putting the uprights +closer together, an' that'll make the layout look all +right. Here comes your mother, an' if you want to +go off with her I'll promise to keep things goin' +here."</p> + +<p>That was exactly what Teddy did want to do. +He felt that it was necessary she should know the +true condition of affairs, and he could not talk with +her confidentially near the cane-board, therefore +when she came up he proposed that they walk +toward the grand stand, where the Waterville +band was doing its best to put in the shade the +performances of the musicians from the Run.</p> + +<p>"You are looking worried, Teddy," Mrs. Hargreaves +said, as they moved away in the proposed +direction. "What is the matter? Isn't business as +good as you expected?"</p> + +<p>"It is a great deal better; but Uncle Nathan has +been here again, and this time I'm afraid it is in his +power to do me some harm."</p> + +<p>Then Teddy told his mother all that had happened, +explaining in detail the suspicions which +might be aroused against him, and she was quite +as disturbed as he when the recital was finished.</p> + +<p>"I will talk with him myself," she said, after +some thought.</p> + +<p>"Don't do anything of the kind, for then he will +be worse than ever, thinking he can frighten me +into giving half of all I have made, and that I<span class="pagenum">[200]</span> +won't do, no matter how many warrants he gets +out."</p> + +<p>"But Teddy, don't you think——"</p> + +<p>Mrs. Hargreaves was interrupted by a cry from a +half-intoxicated man who halted directly in front +of the young fakir, and shouted to some of his companions +in the rear:</p> + +<p>"Here he is! This is the sneak who helped take +that jewelry swindler's money away. I saw him +then, an' can swear to his face."</p> + +<p>As a matter of course the tone as well as the +words was sufficient to attract a crowd in this +place where the throng was so dense that one could +only make his way from one portion of the grounds +to the other with the greatest difficulty, and for a +moment, while Teddy stood unable to decide what +should be said or done, every person looked at him +threateningly.</p> + +<p>"His partner has been arrested, an' we'll serve +him in the same way," the man continued, as he +advanced toward the boy.</p> + +<p>"Why do you want to talk to me like that?" +Teddy cried, looking around in vain for a friend. +"There are plenty of people here who know me, for +I live down at the Run, an' never swindled anybody."</p> + +<p>"That's a lie!" the man replied, fiercely, seizing +the boy by the collar.</p> + +<p>"It's the truth!" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. "I'm +<span class="pagenum">[201]</span>his mother, and we have lived at the Run ever +since he was born. Deacon Jones is our neighbor, +and he can answer for the truth of it."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus211.jpg" width="600" height="413" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">"I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance"</p> + +<p>"I'll see whether he can or not," and the bully +was about to drag Teddy away, aided by his half-intoxicated +friend, when a familiar voice from the +outskirts of the crowd cried:</p> + +<p>"Hold on there! What are you about?"</p> + +<p>"I've caught the feller what sneaked away the +jewelry swindler's money, an' am goin' to put him +with his partner."</p> + +<p>"You are going to take your hand off his collar +this instant, or get yourself into trouble," and the +merchant from Waterville forced his way through +the throng until he stood by Teddy's side.</p> + +<p>"Is that you, Mr. Reaves?" the bully asked, in +surprise. "Well, you don't want to interfere in +this business, for the boy is a bad one all the +way through. He was deep enough to get the +best of us yesterday; but he won't be so lucky +now."</p> + +<p>"I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance +of mine whom I would trust a good deal +sooner than some whom I see now."</p> + +<p>"But you are makin' a big mistake, Mr. Reaves, +for I saw him makin' off with the valise where our +money had been put."</p> + +<p>It was evident the bully had considerable respect +for the merchant, for he released his hold on Teddy;<span class="pagenum">[202]</span> +but was determined that the boy's alleged character +should be made known to all in the vicinity.</p> + +<p>"I happen to know all about that affair," Mr. +Reaves replied, as he led Teddy and his mother out +of the throng, "and if you want the full particulars +of the affair come to my store when you are more +sober than now."</p> + +<p>A very large number of those present were acquainted +with the merchant, and for the majority +his statement was sufficient to absolve Teddy of +wrongdoing; but a few, among whom were the +intoxicated party and his friends, vowed to sift the +matter more thoroughly before the fair came to an +end.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Hargreaves was terribly excited, and at +once insisted that Teddy should go home with her +immediately, regardless of how much money he +was making; but Mr. Reaves said in a matter-of-fact +tone, as if such incidents were of everyday +occurrence:</p> + +<p>"It would be foolish for him to do that, more +especially since it would be a tacit acknowledgment +of guilt, and, besides, his business here is too +valuable to be abandoned simply because a drunken +rowdy chooses to make trouble. I was on my way +to see him; I have found a lawyer who will under-take +Hazelton's case, and he can at the same time +give Teddy some good advice."</p> + +<p>Then the merchant introduced Mr. Harvey as the<span class="pagenum">[203]</span> +most prominent attorney in the county, and, offering +Mrs. Hargreaves his arm, added:</p> + +<p>"We will go toward the cane-board, and give +them an opportunity to talk.</p> + +<p>"There is a great deal to be said which cannot +interest us, and when they are done we shall be +readily found."</p> + +<p>The widow could do no less than comply, and as +soon as they were comparatively alone the lawyer +said to Teddy:</p> + +<p>"Now, I want you to begin and tell me the whole +story from the time your money was stolen until +this minute. Don't omit any particulars because +you may chance to think they are not important; +but give every detail, and thus I shall be made +acquainted with your own case as well as that of +Hazelton."</p> + +<p>Teddy obeyed this command to the letter. He +dwelt upon the most minute transaction or trifling +movement at sufficient length to give the listener +a clear idea of all that had happened, and laid bare +his own business affairs, even to the extent of making +the lawyer acquainted with the amount of +receipts each day.</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose it makes any difference what I +think," he said, in conclusion; "but I am almost +certain Mr. Hazelton did not have anything to do +with the robbery, and even if I had suspected him, +that which Dan and I heard while we were in the<span class="pagenum">[204]</span> +museum tent would have convinced me that the +men whom we saw on the creek are the thieves."</p> + +<p>"I believe as you do, my boy, and will send a man +to the barn you speak of this very night, although +so much time has now elapsed that I have no hope +of finding anything criminating. However, regardless +of what may happen, I believe we can show +that the fakir was not the guilty party, and, to +guard against a possible attack by your uncle, it +will be necessary to know exactly where we can +get bail in case you should be arrested."</p> + +<p>"Then he can take me to jail?" Teddy asked, +with quivering lips.</p> + +<p>"If he proves what he claims to know there is no +question that he will be able to cause your +arrest; but whether he can send you to prison is +an entirely different matter. I would now like to +have a talk with Mr. Reaves, and shall see you +before I leave the grounds. Do not be frightened; +but continue your business as usual, and in a few +moments I will give you full particulars as to what +must be done in the event anything happens."</p> + +<p>Teddy understood this to be an intimation that +the interview was at an end, and he started toward +the cane-board, the lawyer asking as he followed +him:</p> + +<p>"How shall I find your friend Dan?"</p> + +<p>"Go down to the exhibit of the J. Stevens Arms +and Tool Company in that yellow-roofed building,<span class="pagenum">[205]</span> +and you will see him showing model pocket rifles. +I will go with you if you think there is any chance +of missing him."</p> + +<p>"I can find him without difficulty. Do not leave +your place of business until after I have seen you +again."</p> + +<p>By this time they had arrived at the cane-board, +where Mrs. Hargreaves, looking decidedly relieved +in mind, was talking with Mr. Reaves.</p> + +<p>The lawyer invited the merchant to accompany +him, and as the two walked away Mrs. Hargreaves +said:</p> + +<p>"After talking with Mr. Reaves I will take back +what I proposed regarding taking you home. It +is not possible that anything but the right shall +conquer in a case like this, and I believe you will +come out all right, as a boy should who has always +been as obedient and loving as you. It is time for +me to be going now; but I will come back again in +the morning."</p> + +<p>"Then take this money with you, for I don't +want any more in my pockets than is absolutely +necessary," and Teddy counted out the contents of +the box which served him as a "safe."</p> + +<p>There was but little time for any lengthy leave-taking. +The customers were plenty; Tim and his +assistant had been working several hours without +cessation, and Teddy felt that it was his duty to +relieve them.<span class="pagenum">[206]</span></p> + +<p>"You can trust Mr. Reaves, whatever happens," +his mother said, as she kissed him goodby, "and I +shall be back to-morrow to learn if you are all +right."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry about me," Teddy replied, cheerily. +"Uncle Nathan can't have everything his own +way, and he will soon discover that fact."</p> + +<p>It seemed to Teddy that his mother had but just +left him, when a party of young men who had been +talking in an apparently friendly manner directly +in front of his place of business, suddenly began to +quarrel, and before he was aware of what had happened +his booth was overturned, and a fierce battle +being waged upon the ground which he fancied +belonged temporarily to him because of the money +paid to the managers of the fair as rent.</p> + +<p>Canes, knives, rings, and timbers were thrown +violently about, and, while trying to save the property, +Teddy and his clerk received several severe +blows intended for some of the combatants.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[207]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A SECOND ARREST.</i></p> + +<p>When the fight began Teddy's first thought +was that it had been prearranged by some +one who wanted to do him an injury without taking +the chances of being arrested on a charge of malicious +mischief.</p> + +<p>Tim believed it to be a scheme for robbing the +money box, and while the combatants were struggling +close around him he emptied the contents +into his trousers pockets, regardless of the chance +blows received meanwhile.</p> + +<p>That both were wrong in their conjectures could +be told later, as the fight assumed the proportions +of a small riot, and the battle ground was soon +shifted to an open space in front of the exhibition +buildings.</p> + +<p>It was nothing more than a causeless row such +as is often witnessed at fairs where intoxicating +beverages are sold, and which start from comparatively +nothing, illustrating the proverb: "See what +a great fire a little spark can kindle."</p> + +<p>"This is goin' to knock our hundred dollars in the<span class="pagenum">[208]</span> +head," Tim said, ruefully, as he began to gather up +the scattered stock when the combatants had +surged to and fro until they were some distance +from the wrecked cane-board. "It'll take an hour +to straighten things out, an' all that time will be the +same as lost."</p> + +<p>"It might be worse," Teddy replied, philosophically, +"and, besides, we shouldn't be able to do any +business while that row is going on. If you hadn't +thought of the money it might have been lost, for +there were so many close around me that I couldn't +get at the box."</p> + +<p>"Oh, if you want to pick somethin' good out of +the trouble, I'll help. This will give us a chance to +shorten the board so the stock won't look quite so +small."</p> + +<p>The young fakirs were ready for business in +considerably less time than they had fancied would +be the case. Nearly every one on the grounds was +attracted by the riot, and among those who came +to the scene of the conflict was Dan.</p> + +<p>Instead of watching the struggling, yelling +throng, he helped Teddy and Tim restore the booth +to order, and with such aid as the assistant could +give the work was done very quickly.</p> + +<p>Before the spectators had quieted down sufficiently +to turn their attention to sport once more +everything was ready for business, and when the +constables had taken the ringleaders in the fight<span class="pagenum">[209]</span> +away, money began once more to roll into Teddy's +coffers.</p> + +<p>Before Dan returned to his own work he heard +of all that had occurred since morning, and his +comments on Uncle Nathan's behavior were more +forcible than polite.</p> + +<p>"He's an old fool what oughter be rode on a rail +till he can't see, an' I'm goin' over to the Run before +I start for home jest to give the duffer a piece +of my mind."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe that would do either you or him +any good," Teddy replied, laughingly.</p> + +<p>"I don't know what effect it'll have on him; but +I'll feel a mighty sight better. He shows himself to +be the worst swindler on the grounds when he tries +to scare you into givin' him half you've made, for +that's what his talk means."</p> + +<p>"If he don't do any worse than threaten I won't +say a word; but he's so mad there's no knowin' +what'll happen."</p> + +<p>"The lawyer will see that you pull through all +right; but if trouble should come, be sure to send +for me. I'll manage to get off somehow."</p> + +<p>With this assurance Dan hurried back to the +exhibition buildings, and Teddy was free to assist +Tim in waiting upon the customers.</p> + +<p>During the remainder of the afternoon the young +fakirs had quite as much as they could attend to, +and then, just as trade had so fallen off that Tim<span class="pagenum">[210]</span> +could wait upon the customers alone with the aid +of the assistant, Teddy received a call from Mr. +Harvey, the lawyer.</p> + +<p>"Come here behind the booth where we can talk +without being overheard," he said, peremptorily, +and the boy obeyed at once, asking before the attorney +had time to speak:</p> + +<p>"Do you know if Uncle Nathan is goin' to do anything?"</p> + +<p>"He is certainly trying very hard, and in case he +should succeed in getting a warrant, you will demand +of the officer who serves it to be taken directly +to Deacon Jones. Mr. Reaves and I have +just had a talk with him, and in our absence he will +render such assistance as you may require."</p> + +<p>"That sounds as if you believed Uncle Nathan +would be able to do as he threatened."</p> + +<p>"It is well to be prepared for any emergency, +since no man can say exactly what may happen. +During the night two constables will go to the barn +on the marshes where you saw the burglars carry +some of the goods, although I do not think any +good is liable to result from the visit, for the men +have probably been frightened away by this time. +Enough may be found, however, to prove the truth +of your story, and that will be sufficient to give the +thick-headed authorities an inkling that their judgment +as to who the burglars are is not infallible."</p> + +<p>"Have you seen Mr. Hazelton yet?"<span class="pagenum">[211]</span></p> + +<p>"No; but I shall call on him before going home. +The best thing which could happen now for all concerned +would be the arrest of the man you call +Long Jim, and to that end both you and Dan must +keep a sharp lookout, for it is barely possible he +may be bold enough to come on the grounds again."</p> + +<p>"But what could we do in case we did see him?"</p> + +<p>"Follow him quietly until you meet a constable, +and then insist that he be arrested for swindling +you out of fifteen dollars. There is not sufficient +proof to connect him with the robbery here or at +the Run; but I will take care that he is held long +enough as a common swindler to enable us to sift +the other matter. Let me see, you said Dan was +with you at the time of the transaction in Waterville?"</p> + +<p>"No; it was poor Sam, and now that he is dead +I'm the only one who saw Long Jim there. Do you +know if they have found Sam's body?"</p> + +<p>"I think not; men have been dragging the creek +all day, and the probabilities now are that some +time will elapse before it can be recovered. I want +you to be very careful during the remainder of to-day +and to-night. Go to the tent where you sleep +before dark, and do not venture outside under any +provocation, no matter what message may be +brought."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Nothing particular; I am only taking precautions,<span class="pagenum">[212]</span> +that is all. I shall be here to-morrow, and +will see you then."</p> + +<p>The lawyer turned to go, and had just passed out +from behind the end of the booth when Teddy +seized his arm, pulling him back very suddenly. +"There's Long Jim now!" he whispered, excitedly. +"See! That man over there by the striking +machine!"</p> + +<p>It was indeed the burglar whose partner had +warned him against visiting the fair, or even showing +himself in the vicinity during the daytime. It +could be plainly seen that he was decidedly under +the influence of liquor, and he swaggered to and +fro as if in his drunken brain was the idea that no +one would dare cause him trouble.</p> + +<p>"Are you certain there is no mistake?" the lawyer +asked, as he watched the man.</p> + +<p>"I'd be able to recognize him anywhere, no matter +how he was dressed, an' so would Dan, for Sam +an' me pointed him out two or three times."</p> + +<p>"Then the hardest portion of our work is finished. +I shall have him arrested on the charge of swindling +you, and can arrange it without the formality +of first getting a warrant. It is now more necessary +than ever that you should remain where I can +find you readily at any hour of the day or night."</p> + +<p>"Except when I go for supper, I'll be here or in +the tent," Teddy replied, and then there was no +further opportunity for conversation.<span class="pagenum">[213]</span></p> + +<p>Long Jim had started leisurely, and on anything +rather than a straight course, toward the grand +stand, and Mr. Harvey followed so near that he +could have placed his hand on the burglar's +shoulder.</p> + +<p>Teddy watched until the two were lost to view +amid the throng, and then said to himself, with a +sigh:</p> + +<p>"I'll bet the lawyer can't find a constable, an' +that Long Jim gets clear somehow. But what I +don't understand is how he dares to come here."</p> + +<p>He would have run down to tell Dan of the startling +news had it not been for Mr. Harvey's injunction +to remain in the places designated, and he was +so nervous that only with the greatest difficulty +could he wait upon an impatient customer.</p> + +<p>An hour passed, and nothing had been heard +from either the lawyer or the burglar.</p> + +<p>The visitors remained later on this day than +usual; but the tardy ones were departing, and it +was with a decided sense of relief that Teddy began +to pack up his stock for the night. Dan arrived +before the work was finished, and his excitement +was great when he learned of what had happened.</p> + +<p>"Can't we go somewhere to find out if the man +was arrested?" he asked, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"I promised to be on hand in case the lawyer +should want me."</p> + +<p>"Then we'll get the stuff to the tent, go to supper,<span class="pagenum">[214]</span> +an' afterward I'll snoop 'round to hear the +news."</p> + +<p>All hands worked rapidly, and in ten minutes the +three boys were at the boarding-house, eating +as if each moment were of the utmost importance, +when they overheard a conversation between two +men at the next table which caused them no slight +degree of relief and pleasure:</p> + +<p>"Who was that drunken fellow Constable Ford +lugged off this evening?" one of the men asked, and +the other replied:</p> + +<p>"A man who swindled a boy over at Waterville +out of fifteen dollars."</p> + +<p>"I didn't see any boy in the crowd."</p> + +<p>"He wasn't there. Lawyer Harvey recognized +the fellow, and insisted on his arrest, sayin' that +the 'Squire already knew about the case."</p> + +<p>"I thought at first it might be some one who had +been robbing the stores around here."</p> + +<p>"Oh, the burglar has been caught already, an' +laid in jail since yesterday."</p> + +<p>"But he was only arrested on suspicion."</p> + +<p>"There'll be proof enough to convict him, I +reckon, an' if there isn't he ought to be sent to jail +for six months because of what he has done on the +grounds."</p> + +<p>Then the conversation was changed to a subject +in which the boys had no interest, and Dan whispered +to Teddy:<span class="pagenum">[215]</span></p> + +<p>"That settles Long Jim, an' now if your lawyer +is as smart as he appears to be it won't take long +to show that Hazelton didn't have anything to do +with the burglar tryin' to get me in jail," Teddy +replied, with a sigh.</p> + +<p>"Of course it will. Things are turning out all +right after all, an' if poor Sam hadn't been drowned +we'd have a reg'lar celebration to-night."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[216]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A THIRD ARREST.</i></p> + +<p>When the boys returned to the museum tent +from supper they had a long and interesting +story to tell Mr. Sweet; but to their surprise, after +the recital was concluded, he said calmly:</p> + +<p>"I knew all of that except about the burglar's +arrest."</p> + +<p>"Why, how did you hear it?" Dan asked.</p> + +<p>"The lawyer an' the merchant have been over +here twice since noon, pumpin' me about Hazelton, +an' tryin' to find out how you boys have behaved +yourselves."</p> + +<p>"Why did they want to know anything about +us?" Teddy asked, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"So's to make sure your stories were straight. +When men like them take hold of a thing they +don't want to run any chances of bein' fooled. +What has been done about Sam?"</p> + +<p>Dan could best answer this question, and he replied:</p> + +<p>"The body hasn't been found; but I heard the +manager of the Davis Boat Company's exhibit say<span class="pagenum">[217]</span> +that he should keep men at the work of draggin' +the creek till the work was finished. I can't get +through my head how he happened to capsize the +craft, for she didn't seem to be cranky."</p> + +<p>"That is something none of us will ever know," +Mr. Sweet replied, solemnly, and then, as if to +change the mournful subject, he asked: "How did +business pan out to-day, Teddy?"</p> + +<p>"I'll count up. We must have come pretty near +to what you predicted; but we would have done a +great deal better if it hadn't been for the big row. +That made us lose at least an hour, to say nothin' +of havin' six canes broken just when we needed +every one in order to make a good show."</p> + +<p>Then Teddy and Tim emptied the contents of +their pockets on a piece of canvas, and the other +occupants of the tent waited patiently for the result +to be announced.</p> + +<p>"It's ninety-four dollars and forty-five cents," the +former said, after counting the money twice as if +doubtful of the first result. "That's a big sum of +money, but there's no chance of a mistake."</p> + +<p>"You can figure that the row cost you six dollars," +Mr. Sweet replied, puffing vigorously at his +pipe. "I haven't been 'tendin' out on fairs these +eight years without bein' able to name the amount +of such a business as yours."</p> + +<p>"We'd have had twenty-five more but for that +row," Tim said, decidedly.<span class="pagenum">[218]</span></p> + +<p>"You're wrong there, my boy," and the proprietor +of the museum wore an air of one who "knows +it all." "That is about as much as two boys can +take in, an' you don't want to kick, for I've seen +lots of fakirs come on to a fair ground with a better +cane-board than yours an' not get expenses. Be +thankful for what you've earned, an' hope that you +can pay expenses to-morrow, for there won't be any +too much money floatin' around after such a business +as we've had to-day."</p> + +<p>"I'm more than satisfied," Teddy replied, as he +set aside the amount due Tim, and the latter appeared +to be more than contented with having +earned nine dollars and forty-four cents so easily.</p> + +<p>"You can suck your thumbs from now out," the +barker said, philosophically, "for the backbone +of trade has been broken, an' the Peach Bottom +fair is already numbered with the things of the +past."</p> + +<p>"Don't you think we'll do anything more?" Teddy +asked.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, there'll be a little to pick up until to-morrow +night, but it won't amount to anything +near like what has already been done, although +it'll be clear profit."</p> + +<p>"Since I am more than satisfied, there's no chance +of being disappointed," Teddy replied, and at that +moment the head of a stranger appeared between +the flaps of canvas.<span class="pagenum">[219]</span></p> + +<p>"Is there a boy named Teddy here?" the newcomer +asked.</p> + +<p>"Well, what do you want of him?" and Mr. Sweet +sprang to his feet as if anticipating trouble.</p> + +<p>"Nothing more than what Hazelton wanted me +to say," was the reply, as the stranger entered, evidently +thinking his search was at an end.</p> + +<p>"And what is that?" the proprietor of the museum +asked, motioning Teddy to remain silent.</p> + +<p>"There's no need of all this secrecy with me, for +I'm Hazelton's partner in everything except the +give-away game," the stranger said, with a laugh. +"It appears a man has been arrested by a party +whom this boy Teddy knows, and I'm to say that +he is to come to jail very early to-morrow morning."</p> + +<p>Even now Mr. Sweet's suspicions were not allayed, +and he asked, cautiously:</p> + +<p>"Could you tell me what he's wanted for?"</p> + +<p>"Lawyer Harvey will be there, and is going to +talk with him where Hazelton can hear what is +said."</p> + +<p>"Is that all?"</p> + +<p>"Everything; and if you see the boy, can I depend +on your repeating the message?"</p> + +<p>"Under the circumstances there can be no harm +in taking every precaution," the proprietor of the +museum replied, "and if your errand is finished, +I may as well say that this is the boy Teddy whom +Hazelton sent you to see."<span class="pagenum">[220]</span></p> + +<p>"That's all right; there was no need of pointing +him out; but since you have done so, I simply want +to ask if he can spare the time to do as Hazelton +and the lawyer wish?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I can," and now Teddy spoke for +himself. "Say that if nothing happens I'll be +there."</p> + +<p>"Have you heard whether your uncle has succeeded +in getting a warrant?" the stranger asked.</p> + +<p>"No; but Mr. Harvey seemed to think he might +be able to do so, and I don't want to make any +promises that can't be carried out."</p> + +<p>"Then I'll count on your being there, but since +leaving the jail I've heard enough to warrant my +advising you to remain under cover to-night."</p> + +<p>"Why?"</p> + +<p>"Those fellows who started the fight when you +got away with the money are swearing vengeance. +I don't think it's likely they'll attack the tent, for, +owing to the representations made by the lawyer, +there'll be a big force of constables on duty to-night; +but if you should venture outside the grounds +it might be impossible to keep any engagement in +the future."</p> + +<p>"I wasn't thinkin' of leaving here," Teddy replied; +but the mere fact that he ought not do so +made him feel very uncomfortable.</p> + +<p>"I couldn't be in any worse fix if I had committed +some big crime," he said, bitterly, "and it is tough<span class="pagenum">[221]</span> +to feel like a criminal when a fellow is only trying +to earn honest money."</p> + +<p>"It isn't the rule that honest people fare the best," +the stranger replied, with a laugh; "but I hope +you'll come out on the top of the heap. At all +events, my business here is finished and I'll go."</p> + +<p>The folds of canvas dropped behind him, and Mr. +Sweet said, musingly:</p> + +<p>"It beats all how you boys have succeeded in +getting yourselves mixed up in this affair. If I +didn't know all the circumstances I'd say there +must be some fire where there is so much smoke."</p> + +<p>"The smoke isn't of our makin', an' Teddy's uncle +can be blamed for the most of it," Dan said, +angrily. "I only wish he was here to know my +opinion of him."</p> + +<p>"Are you talkin' about me?" Uncle Nathan asked, +as he pushed aside the canvas and entered without +so much as asking permission.</p> + +<p>"That's exactly what I was doing," Dan replied, +without any show of fear, "an' if you've been +sneakin' 'round to listen, there's no need of my +tellin' over ag'in jest what I think of a man who +tries to frighten an honest boy into givin' up half +of what he has made."</p> + +<p>"An honest boy?" the old man repeated, with a +sneer, and Teddy whispered to his friend:</p> + +<p>"Don't say anything to make him angry, for I'll +only get the worst of it."<span class="pagenum">[222]</span></p> + +<p>"Of course you will," Uncle Nathan replied, +having overheard the words. "When an ungrateful +wretch like you conspires to rob the hand that +has fed him he must expect to get the worst of it."</p> + +<p>"I never took from you the value of a cent," +Teddy said, stoutly, and Dan cried as he sprang to +his feet:</p> + +<p>"If there has been any attempt at robbery, you're +the guilty one, for you've tried to steal half the +money he made by threatening to have him +arrested if he didn't divide his profits."</p> + +<p>"That was only a business proposition," the old +man replied, not in the least abashed, "and he +has aided others in stealing from me."</p> + +<p>"What do you want here?" Mr. Sweet cried, +angrily. "This is my tent; I have paid for the +privilege of putting it upon these grounds, and have +the right to prevent such old hypocrites as you +from entering without paying an admission."</p> + +<p>"Look out that you do not come within reach of +the law," Uncle Nathan replied, threateningly, +stepping back quickly, as if expecting an attack. +"I am here armed with the right to take this boy, +and shall exercise it despite all that may be said. +Come in, Mr. Officer."</p> + +<p>In response to this call a constable entered, and +Teddy's heart sank within him, for he understood +that the long-deferred arrest was about to be made.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum">[223]</span></p><p>"There is your prisoner," the old man said, vindictively, +as he pointed to the boy, "and the sooner +you take him to jail where he belongs the sooner +we shall be rid of a viper."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus235.jpg" width="600" height="477" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">As the constable approached him, Teddy said, "I demand to be first taken to Deacon Jones!"</p> + +<p>Teddy's grief and fear were so great that he could +not speak, and even Dan appeared to have been +made dumb by this show of authority; but Mr. +Sweet was somewhat accustomed to such scenes, +and he demanded:</p> + +<p>"Show me the warrant. I do not propose to let +any one be taken out of my tent by such an old +reprobate as that until I am satisfied it is done under +the sanction of the law."</p> + +<p>"Convince yourself," Uncle Nathan replied, as +the constable held out a folded document. "That +will show under what authority we act."</p> + +<p>Sweet read it carefully, and handed it to the +officer as he said to the old man:</p> + +<p>"This shows that the constable has the right to +take Teddy to prison; but as certain as there will +be a sun in the sky to-morrow so certain will I aid +him in making you suffer for doing this thing. +You know he had nothing to do with the burglary +committed at your store, and have only had this +issued in the hope of defrauding him of what he +has earned honestly."</p> + +<p>"Talk is cheap," Uncle Nathan said, impatiently. +"Officer, take your prisoner away unless you count +on stayin' here all night."</p> + +<p>The short parley between the proprietor of the<span class="pagenum">[224]</span> +museum and the accuser gave Teddy time to think +of what the lawyer had said, and he added, as the +constable approached him:</p> + +<p>"I demand to be first carried to Deacon Jones'."</p> + +<p>"Now what kind of a bee have you got in your +bonnet?" the old man cried, displaying both surprise +and fear. "I say you are to go to jail, an' +that settles it."</p> + +<p>"If he wants to see the deacon I'm bound to take +him there," the constable said.</p> + +<p>"Who's been makin' sich foolish talk to you?" +Uncle Nathan screamed.</p> + +<p>"Lawyer Harvey told me what the law was, an' I +don't intend to get into any fuss by deprivin' a +prisoner of his rights," was the stolid reply.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[225]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h2> + +<p class="h3">ON BAIL.</p> + +<p>When Uncle Nathan learned that the celebrated +lawyer had made preparations for this +move on his part he was literally beside himself +with rage, and vowed that the warrant should be +served and the prisoner taken to jail immediately, +or he would see to it that the constable was deprived +of his commission without delay.</p> + +<p>"I've served the warrant," the man said, quietly, +"an' now the prisoner is in my custody. You have +no more to say what shall be done with him than +that goat, so shut your mouth."</p> + +<p>"I'll shut yours so close it won't be opened again +for a month!" the old man screamed. "Do as I +tell you, or take the consequences."</p> + +<p>"And I'm goin' to give you the same advice," +Mr. Sweet cried, as he advanced toward Uncle +Nathan threateningly. "Now the boy has been +arrested, you are an intruder here, an' I'll give you +thirty seconds in which to get out; after that we'll +make an example of such a reprobate."</p> + +<p>"I'll go when I get ready, an' not a minute before.<span class="pagenum">[226]</span> +Lay a hand on me an' I'll have a warrant for +you."</p> + +<p>"If you can get it, well and good. I now order +you out for the last time. In thirty seconds I'll +guarantee you won't be in condition to walk."</p> + +<p>While their employer had been speaking the +barker and the clown silently ranged themselves +by his side, ready for any commands which might +be given, and the infuriated old man had sufficient +sense left to let him understand it would be unsafe +to linger.</p> + +<p>"I'll serve you out before this thing is ended," he +cried, shaking his fist in impotent rage as he went +toward the flap, and Dan, who could control himself +no longer, replied:</p> + +<p>"You'd better begin on me, for I'm goin' to tell +this thing to everybody who comes to the fair to-morrow, +an' from what I've heard it wouldn't take +much coaxin' to get the band from the Run up here, +so's I could sing it. You're havin' a good time now; +but there'll be a different side to the matter to-morrow."</p> + +<p>Mr. Sweet had followed Uncle Nathan so closely, +literally turning him out, that he could not reply +while inside the canvas; but once in the open air, +he made threats that would have frightened any +one who did not know the motive by which they +had been inspired.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile the constable appeared disposed to<span class="pagenum">[227]</span> +take matters in the most comfortable manner. He +asked Teddy why he wished to see Deacon Jones, +and the boy said:</p> + +<p>"I don't know; but Mr. Harvey told me that if +anything happened to-night I was to see the deacon."</p> + +<p>"Then we'll go there. Are you ready?"</p> + +<p>Teddy thought of his money, and, fearing lest +it might be taken from him, asked if he could hand +something to Mr. Sweet.</p> + +<p>"I think not," was the undecided reply. "The +deacon will know, an' whatever he says I'll stand by."</p> + +<p>"Don't bother about anything just now," the +proprietor of the museum said. "We'll all go with +you, an' there'll be plenty of time to make necessary +arrangements before you're taken to jail."</p> + +<p>Although the lawyer had assured him he could +be involved in no serious trouble, the mere fact +that he was under arrest sufficed to make Teddy +wretched, and like one under sentence of death, he +prepared to accompany the constable.</p> + +<p>Dan and Tim intended to join the party, as was +shown by their remaining very close to the prisoner, +and only the barker and the clown were left +to care for the tent.</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan was met on the outside, and he +immediately began to insist that the boy be taken +to jail at once; but the officer paid no attention to +his ravings.<span class="pagenum">[228]</span></p> + +<p>"If you don't hold your tongue I'll knock the +whole top of your head off," Mr. Sweet whispered, +brandishing his fists in the most threatening manner, +and the old man cried, excitedly:</p> + +<p>"Mr. Officer, I call upon you to bear witness that +this man is threatening my life, and insist that you +protect me from insult."</p> + +<p>"I've nothing to do with you," the constable +replied, with a laugh. "The warrant has been +served, an' all you've got to do is hold your horses +till the case is called up in court."</p> + +<p>"Wait till I get home once more, an' then we'll +see that he's got a good deal to do with the case," +Tim cried. "I'll spend every minute from then for +a week tellin' the folks that he only did this to +make Teddy give up half of what he made, an' it'll +be a pretty poor kind of a chump who'll do any +more tradin' at his store."</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan stepped toward the boy who had +spoken so boldly as if he would inflict the direst +punishment then and there; but he probably realized +that this would prejudice his case, and contented +himself by saying:</p> + +<p>"We'll see whether the people at the Run will +believe a couple of boys who have been in league +with burglars, for you mustn't forget, Tim Jones, +that I have proof you helped Teddy to carry away +the burglar's money."</p> + +<p>"If it'll do you any good I'll own up to the fact<span class="pagenum">[229]</span> +now," the boy replied. "It can't be so bad to do +that as it is to arrest your own nephew because he +won't give you half his money."</p> + +<p>"Don't say anything more," Teddy whispered to +his friend. "It's only makin' matters worse, an' +he's got the upper hand of us all jest now."</p> + +<p>"I don't know whether he has or not," the valiant +Tim replied; "but at the same time it'll do him a +world of good to let him hear the truth."</p> + +<p>At this point Uncle Nathan appeared to understand +that he was not coming out victor in this +battle of tongues, and he wisely held his peace, +saying not another word until the little party +arrived at the home of Deacon Jones.</p> + +<p>The manager of the fair was resting after a +particularly hard day's work. More than one of +the citizens of Peach Bottom had openly said he +was responsible for the riot by allowing liquor to +be sold on the grounds, and his greeting of the visitors +was not calculated to assure the frightened +Teddy.</p> + +<p>"Well, what do you want?" he cried, roughly, as +they entered his library. "If it's anything concerning +the fair I won't open my mouth. A man +can't be driven to death with work and then disturbed +at all hours of the night, simply to give the +fools in this town a chance to make trouble."</p> + +<p>"All I know about it is that I arrested this boy, +and he insisted on being brought to you, saying<span class="pagenum">[230]</span> +it was Lawyer Harvey's advice," the constable +began, and the angry deacon immediately began +to appear interested.</p> + +<p>"Is this your nephew, Nathan?" he asked of the +old man, who now had a smirk of confidence on +his face.</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry he is, deacon, an' after I set him up +in business he goes ag'in me by givin' information +to burglars, who rob me."</p> + +<p>"And you have had him arrested?"</p> + +<p>"I felt obliged to in the interest of society."</p> + +<p>"That's a lie," Mr. Sweet interrupted, angrily. +"He tried to make the boy pay him half he earned +on the fair grounds, and has done this thing only +because Teddy refused."</p> + +<p>"We won't go into the details of the case, because +I am not a magistrate," the deacon replied, with a +majestic wave of the hand. "Mr. Officer, tell the +'Squire that I am prepared to go bail to any +amount, and ask if the business can't be conducted +here, for I'm too tired to go out of doors unless it is +absolutely necessary."</p> + +<p>"What?" the old man screamed. "Will you +answer for that little villain's appearance at court?"</p> + +<p>"That's what I said, Nathan. This affair is none +of my business other than I have stated; but I +must say you are goin' a leetle too far, not only in +my opinion, but in that of others, an' it may prove +a costly job for somebody before it's finished."<span class="pagenum">[231]</span></p> + +<p>The old man was literally speechless.</p> + +<p>He could not understand why the deacon should +have turned against him so suddenly, and the last +words made him decidedly uneasy.</p> + +<p>He was not to be silenced without a struggle, +however. After the first surprise had died away +he said, with a comical assumption of dignity:</p> + +<p>"I will see whether I'm to be browbeaten in +this manner. The 'Squire does not dare to release +the boy on bail, and I shall tell him so."</p> + +<p>With these words he left the house hurriedly, +and the constable said to the deacon:</p> + +<p>"If you will write a line to the 'Squire, saying +that you're ready to go bail, I do not think there +will be any necessity of troubling you again to-night."</p> + +<p>This suggestion was immediately acted upon, +and the weary manager of the fair penned the following +words:</p> + +<blockquote><p>I am ready to enter security to any amount for +the appearance at court of Edward Hargreaves, +and if you should not consider my bond sufficient, +I am empowered to say that John Reaves, of Waterville, +will add his name, therefore there can be no +good reason for committing him to jail, since we +are both responsible for the prisoner until the bond +can be executed.</p> + +<p class="author smcap">A. Jones</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>Having received this the constable departed with +the prisoner and his friends, and once on the outside +he said, confidently:<span class="pagenum">[232]</span></p> + +<p>"The matter is settled, no matter how much old +Nathan may rave. Both Mr. Reaves an' the deacon +have got the 'Squire by the nose, and he must +dance to their fiddlin'."</p> + +<p>That this assertion was correct Teddy realized a +few moments later when he was ushered into the +'Squire's dining-room, and the latter, without paying +the slightest attention to the prisoner, said to +the officer:</p> + +<p>"I have just heard that you served the warrant I +issued, and then took the boy to Deacon Jones' +house. Is that correct?"</p> + +<p>"Straight as a string, 'Squire. Lawyer Harvey +told him if anything happened to go there, an' I +thought he had a right to look up bail before being +lugged off to jail. Here's what the deacon's got to +say about it."</p> + +<p>The 'Squire took the paper which the officer held +out, and after reading it, said benignly:</p> + +<p>"You were quite correct in doing what you did, +Mr. Constable. This is quite sufficient guarantee +that he will be produced when wanted, and you +may let him go. Give me the papers, and I will +indorse them."</p> + +<p>After this formality had been gone through with +the constable said to Mr. Sweet:</p> + +<p>"That settles the matter so far as Teddy is concerned, +and with such men as the deacon, Mr. +Reaves, and Lawyer Harvey to back him, I don't<span class="pagenum">[233]</span> +believe old Nathan will make any too much out of +this job."</p> + +<p>"You are free to go where you please," the +'Squire added, and the young fakir with his friends +left the house, wondering very much at the amount +of influence which, unsolicited, had been exerted +in Teddy's behalf.</p> + +<p>As for the boy himself, he was far from feeling +comfortable in mind. Unless the burglary could be +brought home to Long Jim it did not seem possible +that Hazelton could be set free, and this last was +absolutely necessary in order to establish his own +innocence.</p> + +<p>It was a great consolation for him to be with such +good friends, however, and each in turn tried to +cheer him, but without success until Mr. Sweet +said:</p> + +<p>"There's no question of your getting out of the +scrape with flying colors, and to celebrate I'm goin' +to give a regular dinner party to every decent +fakir on the grounds. Come over, boys, an' help +me get ready. Business has been so good to-day +that I can afford to indulge in a little extravagance."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[234]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE FAKIRS' PARTY.</i></p> + +<p>The idea of a party in the museum tent, where +there would be no guests save fakirs, struck +Teddy as being very comical, and he laughed heartily +despite the fact that he was still virtually a prisoner +in the meshes of the law; but at the same time +he did not think Mr. Sweet was really in earnest +when he made the proposition.</p> + +<p>It was not many moments, however, before he +understood that the party was to be given in the +most elaborate manner possible.</p> + +<p>On arriving at the tent Mr. Sweet sent the +bouncer out with invitations to such of the fakirs as +remained on the grounds all night, or lived in the +immediate vicinity, and at the same time the clown +started for the town in order to purchase refreshments.</p> + +<p>"Now, you boys are to take right hold an' help +the best you know how," the proprietor of the +museum said as he pulled off his coat and vest +preparatory to making ready for the feast. "If +them as comes want to sit down it must be on the +ground, owing to the lack of chairs, therefore it +<span class="pagenum">[235]</span>don't make much difference if the table is a trifle +high."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/illus249.jpg" width="600" height="525" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">"We have only one knife," said Mr. Sweet, to the amusement of the boys, "and it must serve for all hands."</p> + +<p>To the surprise of the boys he proceeded to convert +the wagon into a "festal board" by first pulling +it into the center of the tent, and then removing +the sides. Over the floor of this newspapers were +spread, and two plates, three forks, one knife, and +four tin dippers were placed on the impromptu +cloth.</p> + +<p>"The provisions will be cut ready for eating," +Mr. Sweet explained, "so one knife must serve for +all hands, and it won't hurt any of the crowd if +they're obliged to take turns using the dippers."</p> + +<p>The clown returned before the guests began to +assemble. He brought cold sausage, sliced ham, +cold fried potatoes, sweet crackers, cake, pie, and +a quantity of lemons and sugar.</p> + +<p>Contrary to his expectations, Mr. Sweet did not +think this assortment sufficient for the kind of a +dinner he proposed to give, and the messenger was +forced to return in search of cheese, pickled pig's +feet, sardines, and milk for the coffee.</p> + +<p>Matters were in a decided state of confusion +when the first of the guests arrived. Mr. Sweet, +not troubled by the absence of dishes, had placed +the various articles on the wagon-table in the +brown paper coverings as they had been received, +and it was upon his skill as a maker of coffee that +he based his reputation as a host.<span class="pagenum">[236]</span></p> + +<p>Therefore everything was neglected for this one +important thing, and the proprietor was standing +over the oil stove with a look of grave responsibility +on his face when the owner of the envelope +game and his assistant arrived.</p> + +<p>"The boys will take care of you," he said, hurriedly, +bending over the huge pot to inhale the +odor, in order to know exactly how the berries +were adapting themselves to the infusion, and, +much to his surprise, Teddy found himself the one +especial feature of the party.</p> + +<p>All on the ground had evidently heard of his +arrest, for each new arrival asked concerning the +events of the evening, and, what was more to the +purpose, so far as he was concerned, all seemed to +think his troubles were only temporary.</p> + +<p>"You'll come out of it all right," the manager of +the largest sandwich booth said, confidently, as he +entered with his hat on one side of his head and a +cigar held in his mouth at an angle of forty-five +degrees. "I heard of your uncle last year, when he +tried to make trouble for a friend of mine in the +spittoon game, an' you can bet your bottom dollar +that the people here are not going to take much +stock in what he says."</p> + +<p>"It seems they did, so far as to issue a warrant +for my arrest," Teddy replied, with a mirthless +smile.</p> + +<p>"But that won't amount to anything. I hear you<span class="pagenum">[237]</span> +have got John Reaves as a friend, an' he comes +pretty near runnin' things to suit himself in Peach +Bottom. He helped my friend out of the scrape +your uncle put him into, an' folks say there's no +love lost between him an' Nathan Hargreaves."</p> + +<p>"I want to get out of my trouble simply on the +ground that I am not guilty," Teddy replied. "If +I am charged with aiding burglars, there's precious +little consolation in being set free simply because +people do not like the man who made the charge."</p> + +<p>"Nobody believes you guilty, and for the matter +of that I'm certain Hazelton had nothing to do +with the job. His game ain't exactly square; but +he don't go around breaking into stores."</p> + +<p>Teddy was on the point of telling that Long Jim +had been arrested because of the burglaries committed; +but he remembered in time that this fact +was as yet a secret, and remained silent.</p> + +<p>The man who leased the only "Great African +Dodger" was the next to arrive, and he also seemed +to think it necessary to condole with the young +fakir in his troubles, as did the remainder of the +guests, and by the time all were assembled Teddy +began to think his experience was only such as +every other person in the tent had undergone at +some time in his career.</p> + +<p>"You see this is the way the matter stands," +the whip man said, confidentially, while Mr. Sweet +was bending all his energies to mixing the lemonade.<span class="pagenum">[238]</span> +"People think fakirs are the worst class of +men in the world, whereas, if the matter was sifted +right down, they'd find the class as a whole was +honest because they couldn't afford to be otherwise. +I'm not talking now about those who run +strong games, like Hazelton; but ourselves who +do a legitimate business. You've got canes an' +knives to sell, while I deal in whips; now all we +want is a fair show to dispose of our goods, an' +we know everything must be done on the square, +or there's bound to be trouble sooner or later, consequently +we keep straight, an' take all the abuse +which those who have come to swindle the folks +deserve. Why, what, I ask you, would the managers +of these fairs do if they couldn't get us to +come up with our money for privileges? They +couldn't pay expenses, an' that's the whole amount +of the story. They run after us, an' yet when we +come there's the same old howl about swindlers."</p> + +<p>The man talked until he was literally forced to +stop for lack of breath, and Teddy had not so much +as spoken; but proved a good listener, which was +all his condoler appeared to expect of him.</p> + +<p>When the clown returned with the last installment +of eatables there was nothing to prevent the +assembled crowd from partaking of Mr. Sweet's +hospitality. The coffee was done to a turn; the +lemonade was neither too sour nor too sweet, and<span class="pagenum">[239]</span> +the proprietor of the museum summoned his guests +to the feast by saying:</p> + +<p>"Now turn to an' fill yourselves up. It ain't often +I do this sort of thing; but somehow or other I've +got a reg'lar admiration for our cane-board fakir, +an' after comin' out as he has to-night it seems +only right we should kinder spread ourselves. +There's no liquor in the tent, which is as it should +be, for I'm a temperance man, an' them as wants +it can make hogs of themselves somewhere else. +Take hold hearty, an' remember that this layout is +in honor of them as did a good turn to the whole +gang by savin' the lives of the women what would +likely have drowned if there hadn't been any fakirs +in the country."</p> + +<p>This was an unusually long speech for the proprietor +of the museum, and when it was ended he +set an example to his guests by attacking the eatables +as if he had not indulged in a square meal +since the fair was opened.</p> + +<p>Each person present imitated him, and Tim whispered +to Teddy, when his mouth was so full of cake +that it was only with the greatest difficulty his +words could be understood:</p> + +<p>"This is what I call a great snap, an' when I've +been fakin' at the fairs long enough to get some +money ahead I'll give fellers like us a good chance +to fill up, the same as Mr. Sweet has done."</p> + +<p>Dan was equally enthusiastic. In all his experience,<span class="pagenum">[240]</span> +which extended over two years at the very +least, he declared that he had never seen so much +done for a boy, and concluded by saying:</p> + +<p>"There's no question, Teddy, but that you're a +big gun here, an' I'll advise you to keep right on in +this business."</p> + +<p>"I've had enough of it," was the reply. "Such +times as these are very nice; but think of what +may happen when I'm brought up for trial. Who +knows but Uncle Nathan can succeed in makin' +folks think I'm guilty of helpin' the burglars, an' +then what'll be the consequences?"</p> + +<p>"I know he can't do anything of the kind, an' +that's enough," was the confident reply; but yet it +failed to satisfy the boy who had been bound over +to appear at court.</p> + +<p>The entire party appeared to be having the +jolliest kind of a jolly time; but ever before Teddy's +mental vision came the picture of himself in +prison, and even the fact that Long Jim had been +arrested failed to render him confident as to the +final result.</p> + +<p>Again and again was he called upon to reply as +one after another wished him good luck in the case, +and the amount of lemonade which was consumed +on each occasion caused the clown to make a third +visit to the town in order to purchase the wherewithal +to satisfy the demands of the guests.</p> + +<p>It was nearly midnight when the last of the<span class="pagenum">[241]</span> +revelers departed and the boys were called upon to +help set the interior of the tent to rights.</p> + +<p>"It hasn't been sich a bad time after all," Mr. +Sweet said, musingly, as Teddy and Dan aided him +in wheeling the wagon into place. "A man can +remember an evening like this with pleasure, when +liquor has been kept out of the bill of fare, an' who +shall say that we're not better off than if our legs +were so tangled as to make walking an impossibility?"</p> + +<p>The barker's red nose was slightly elevated, +much as if its owner could explain why spirits +were superior to lemon-juice and water; but Mr. +Sweet's question remained unanswered, and the +party set about making the final preparations for +the night.</p> + +<p>"Poor Sam ain't here to be troubled by the goat, +so we can set him loose," the proprietor of the +museum said as he unfastened the rope from the +neck of his pet.</p> + +<p>"He'll have a great time pickin' up odds an' ends +between now an' daylight, an' then feel so lazy +that it'll be hard work to make him do his tricks."</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose Uncle Nathan will be around in +the morning?" Teddy asked as he lay down by +the side of Dan and Tim.</p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it; he got sich a dose to-night that +I don't count on seem' him ag'in till this fair is +ended, an' then I'm going to take a trip over to the<span class="pagenum">[242]</span> +Run for the express purpose of givin' him a piece +of my mind."</p> + +<p>"But suppose he should come, what shall I say?"</p> + +<p>"Pay no attention to the old fool, an' above all, +don't let him trap you into talking. Mr. Harvey +will be here to-morrow, an' he can post you better +than ever I could."</p> + +<p>"Don't fuss about the thing at all," Dan replied, +philosophically. "There's plenty here who know +you hadn't anything to do with the burglaries, an' +he won't have as much as a friend by the time the +trial is ended."</p> + +<p>"Dan comes pretty nigh being right," Mr. Sweet +added, "an' now I want all hands to go to sleep, for +there's one more day of this fair, an' we need to be +somewhere near fresh, because to-morrow the dollars +won't tumble without a good deal of coaxing. +Good-night."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[243]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>IN HIDING.</i></p> + +<p>That the incidents may be related as nearly as +possible in the order of their occurrence it is +time to return to the spot where the burglars are in +hiding.</p> + +<p>It will be remembered that we last saw Sam after +Phil had fallen asleep, and he was feigning unconsciousness +lest Long Jim, having nothing else to +do, should take it into his ugly head to administer +the promised flogging.</p> + +<p>Although Sam's eyes were apparently closed, he +took good care to keep strict watch on the burglar; +but for what seemed a very long time he saw +nothing to cause any apprehensions, and was just +on the point of going to sleep in reality when Jim +asked, as he gave the boy a vicious kick on the +side:</p> + +<p>"Where's the grub?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know. You put it away after finishing +your dinner."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I remember now," and the burglar, still +considerably more than half stupefied by the +amount of liquor he had drunk, arose to his feet so<span class="pagenum">[244]</span> +unsteadily that it seemed as if only the lightest +touch would be necessary to send him headlong.</p> + +<p>After a short search the man found that which he +wanted, and proceeded to make a hearty meal, regardless +of the hungry glances which the boy +bestowed upon him.</p> + +<p>"Don't think I'm goin' to give you any," he said, +with a leer, as he concluded the repast, "You're +lucky to be alive, an' that's enough for sich a +duffer. I'll put this stuff back, an' you'll have +every bone in your body broken if you so much as +smell of it."</p> + +<p>Sam made no reply. He had already learned +that there are very many times when silence is indeed +"golden."</p> + +<p>"I've made up my mind to see what can be done +at the fair," Jim said, as he lighted his pipe with +great deliberation. "Phil thinks he's the only +smart man in the world, an' it's time to show him +what a mistake he's been makin' all his life. Why +don't you say something?" he cried, angrily, as +Sam continued silent.</p> + +<p>"I don't know what you want me to say. If +you're goin' that settles it; I sha'n't be any better +off."</p> + +<p>"You can stake your life on that, for while I'm a +gentleman an' behave myself as such, Phil is a +reg'lar brute, an' will make things mighty uncomfortable +for a sneak like you."<span class="pagenum">[245]</span></p> + +<p>Sam thought, but was very careful not to say, +that it was hardly possible for a boy to have a +worse master than the alleged gentleman in front +of him, and the burglar continued, as he arose to +his feet:</p> + +<p>"I want to leave without wakin' Phil, but you +must do it as soon as I push off from the shore, for +we don't intend to give you a chance of slipping +away. I shall watch mighty close, an' if he isn't +on his feet before I'm a dozen yards out into the +creek you'll get a reminder from this," and the +man ostentatiously displayed a revolver.</p> + +<p>"I don't count on runnin' off," Sam, replied, +thoroughly frightened by the threat. "I can stay +here till you get ready to let me go, because I've +got to, an' I'm not sich a fool as to git into any +worse scrape."</p> + +<p>"Now you're talkin' somethin' like sense, an' if +you keep on in this way I'll see to it that you don't +have any harder time than a detective oughter +expect; Phil will be on his ear when he knows I've +gone, an' you must tell me all he says. Remember +that if he isn't on his feet before I've got beyond +range, I'll use your head for a target."</p> + +<p>With this threat the burglar staggered out of the +thicket, and Sam began to speculate as to whether +he should make one supreme effort to escape before +his other captor awakened.</p> + +<p>A second glance at the weapon decided him in the<span class="pagenum">[246]</span> +negative, however, and he meekly stepped to the +edge of the woods in order to obey the instructions +given.</p> + +<p>Despite Jim's apparent intoxication he watched +the boy closely, still holding the revolver ready +for use, and after pushing the boat into the stream +he cried:</p> + +<p>"Now go ahead, an' let me see him in about two +minutes, or I'll fill you full of bullets."</p> + +<p>If Sam had been a brave boy he would have made +a dash for liberty at this moment; but he was in +nearly every sense of the word a coward, and +obeyed the order literally.</p> + +<p>"Who's there?" Phil asked, angrily, as the boy +shook him vigorously.</p> + +<p>"Jim told me to make you get up, or he'd shoot," +Sam replied, meekly.</p> + +<p>"Make me get up? What time is it?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know; but it doesn't seem to be more +than three o'clock."</p> + +<p>"Where's Jim?"</p> + +<p>"Jest startin' for the fair grounds, an' if you +don't show yourself pretty soon he's sure to shoot +me."</p> + +<p>"There wouldn't be any particular harm in that, +for you deserve it; but it can't be possible the fool +is goin' to show himself in daylight when more than +one is lookin' for him."</p> + +<p>"That's what he said," and Sam, fearing lest the<span class="pagenum">[247]</span> +half-drunken burglar would begin his pistol practice, +seated himself behind the largest tree that +might protect him from the bullets.</p> + +<p>Now that Phil was awake, he did not lose any +further time in talking, but ran out to where he +could command a view of the creek, and once more +Sam had an opportunity for escape which he did +not dare to embrace.</p> + +<p>"Come back here, an' don't make a fool of yourself," +Jim's partner cried, angrily, as he saw the +man pulling leisurely from the bank.</p> + +<p>"What's crawlin' on you? Don't I know my business?"</p> + +<p>"Not if you count on goin' up there before dark."</p> + +<p>"That's jest what I intend to do, so don't screech +so much."</p> + +<p>"Come back, I tell you, or it'll be all up for both +of us!"</p> + +<p>"I've been in this business long enough to know +it," was the reply, as Jim continued to row, increasing +each instant the distance between himself and +the shore.</p> + +<p>"Now, don't spoil a good thing," Phil said, pleadingly, +and, understanding that this conversation +might be continued for a short time, Sam plucked +up sufficient courage to make an attack upon the +provisions.</p> + +<p>He took from the general store a large piece of +cheese, some crackers and as much meat as he believed<span class="pagenum">[248]</span> +would suffice to make a hearty meal, after +which he hid the lot near the tree behind which he +was hiding.</p> + +<p>Then he crept back to his former position, and +listened to the conversation between his captors.</p> + +<p>Phil alternately coaxed and threatened his partner; +but all to no purpose, as could be told by the +tones of the latter's voice while he pulled up stream, +and the baffled burglar returned to the camping +place absolutely furious with rage.</p> + +<p>"This comes of my bein' so foolish as to bring +that fool liquor," he said half to himself. "It's +mighty lucky he didn't know I had more than one +bottle."</p> + +<p>Then he took from one of his pockets a second +flask, refreshing himself with a portion of the contents +before asking:</p> + +<p>"What did he say to you?"</p> + +<p>"Nothin' except that he was goin' up to the fair," +Sam replied, timidly.</p> + +<p>"But what made him tell you to waken me?"</p> + +<p>"I s'pose that was so I couldn't have a chance to +run away."</p> + +<p>"What else did he say?"</p> + +<p>"That I was to tell him jest how you took his +leavin'."</p> + +<p>"Well, if he's lucky enough to get back, tell him +I said he was the biggest fool that ever walked on +two legs. Them chums of your'n are sure to spot<span class="pagenum">[249]</span> +him, an' it's ten to one he's pinched before sunset."</p> + +<p>Sam did not understand what the man meant by +the term "pinched," but under the circumstances +he hardly thought it safe to inquire, and the angry +burglar continued:</p> + +<p>"We'll make ready to get out of this if he isn't +back by daylight, an' while there's nothin' else to +do you'd better put that stuff under ground, for +there's no knowin' now when we'll be able to take +it away."</p> + +<p>The spade was near at hand ready for use, and +while Phil alternately smoked and drank from the +bottle, Sam set about burying the plunder.</p> + +<p>This man was quite as hard a taskmaster as the +one who had just departed, and the boy was forced +to work as he had probably never done before, until +sufficient of an excavation had been made to conceal +the goods.</p> + +<p>Under the direction of the burglar Sam covered +the different packages with earth; did his best to +hide all traces of his work, and when it was so dark +that he could no longer see to move about was allowed +to rest.</p> + +<p>During this time Phil had been drinking and +smoking, with the result that he could hardly speak +plainly when the task was accomplished, and so intoxicated +did he appear to be that Sam thought it +safe to eat the food he had concealed.</p> + +<p>"Keep on talkin' so's I'll know where you are, or<span class="pagenum">[250]</span> +on goes the ropes an' gag again," Phil cried, and +the boy obeyed, repeating over and over the same +words in order to satisfy his suspicious captor.</p> + +<p>After eating a hearty meal, Sam succeeded in +mustering sufficient courage to admit of his thinking +about attempting to escape.</p> + +<p>From the manner in which the burglar spoke he +knew it could not be very much longer before the +man would be so completely under the influence of +liquor as to render him helpless, and he said to himself:</p> + +<p>"If I could get the rope around his hands an' legs +I'd soon be out of this place."</p> + +<p>"What's that you are saying?" Phil cried, angrily.</p> + +<p>"Nothin'; I was only doin' as you told me, +talkin' so's you'd know where I was."</p> + +<p>"I'll save all that trouble," and the man lurched +to his feet as he picked up the rope.</p> + +<p>"Please don't tie me ag'in," Sam pleaded. "I +won't try to git away."</p> + +<p>"I'll go bail that you don't after I'm through with +you. Put out your hands."</p> + +<p>Phil was yet capable of mischief, even though his +brain was clouded, and Sam did not dare to disobey.</p> + +<p>He suffered himself to be tied without making +any remonstrance, and as the burglar staggered to +his former resting place, the boy tested the bonds.<span class="pagenum">[251]</span></p> + +<p>Previously he had been lashed in such a manner +that it was impossible to move hand or foot, but +now he soon realized that he could do both, and the +happy thought came that he might free himself +with but little difficulty if a favorable opportunity +for escape should present itself.</p> + +<p>"Now you're fixed," Phil said, half to himself, +"an' I may as well take things comfortable till +we're certain that that fool of a Jim is settled."</p> + +<p>"Are you goin' to leave here to-night?" Sam +asked, more for the purpose of learning how far the +man was on the road to intoxication than for information.</p> + +<p>"If he ain't here by twelve o'clock we'll know +the jig is up, an' skip so's to be out of the way before +any one can come sneakin' around for the +stuff."</p> + +<p>"Then if Jim isn't back by that time, an' he +keeps on drinkin', I'll take all the chances," Sam +said to himself, and from that instant he strained +every nerve to learn how nearly the burglar had +succeeded in making a worse brute of himself than +nature intended.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[252]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>A FAILURE.</i></p> + +<p>Tired though Teddy was, a long time elapsed +after the conclusion of the fakirs' feast before +he could close his eyes in slumber.</p> + +<p>Now that the excitement of the party had died +away, the fact that he was a prisoner, suffered to +remain outside the prison only because men of +wealth were willing to guarantee he would respond +to the call of the court, came into his mind even +more vividly than at the time of the arrest, and despite +all the words of cheer which had been spoken +he really began to believe Uncle Nathan could show +plausible proof of his guilt.</p> + +<p>Under almost any other circumstances he would +have speculated upon what should be done with the +large amount of money he had already earned, and +rejoiced at the thought that he could supply his +mother with what she might need for the present, +at all events.</p> + +<p>The profits of the cane and knife boards were +hardly thought of on this night while the one painful<span class="pagenum">[253]</span> +fact stood before him so prominently and menacingly.</p> + +<p>His companions had been asleep many hours before +slumber visited his eyelids, and so heavy was +his heart even while in dreamland that he awoke +with the first dawn of day, and aroused the +others to the last day's work they would be called +upon to do at the Peach Bottom fair during the +present season.</p> + +<p>"Why is it that you have turned out so early?" +Mr. Sweet asked, in a sleepy tone, rising to his feet +as the only effectual method of driving the drowsiness +from his eyelids.</p> + +<p>"I sha'n't feel much like sleeping till I know how +the case is coming out," Teddy replied, sadly.</p> + +<p>"There is no need to worry with such friends as +you have got. Put it right out of your mind until +business closes to-night, for there's a big pile of +work to be done if you expect to make much +money."</p> + +<p>"I wish I could," Teddy said, with a long-drawn +sigh as he aroused Tim and Dan.</p> + +<p>Half an hour later the three boys were eating +what it was believed would be their last meal in +the very unsatisfactory boarding-house, and +Teddy's place of business was the first opened on +that morning.</p> + +<p>There were no more early visitors; but the fakirs +who had been present at the feast on the evening<span class="pagenum">[254]</span> +previous gathered around, all appearing very eager +to spend money, and trade was as lively as it had +been on any other morning.</p> + +<p>The crowd bought rings and threw them recklessly +until each man had spent considerably more +than a dollar, when Teddy suddenly realized that +this sudden passion for canes only arose from a desire +to aid him. Then he said, decidedly:</p> + +<p>"There's no need of you fellows doin' this. I +know you want to see me out of the scrape; but +I've made a lot of money already, an' don't want +to take yours."</p> + +<p>"You can't have too much, my boy," one of them +said with a laugh, "and we want to see you go +away with a pile. Trade has been boomin' for all +hands, an' it would be kinder rough if we couldn't +have a little fun now the fair is the same as over."</p> + +<p>This did not satisfy Teddy, and he continued to +expostulate against the generosity; but all to no +purpose. The fakirs played until a sufficient number +of visitors had arrived to warrant their opening +the other booths, and then Tim and Teddy were left +alone, Dan having started for the exhibition building +some time previous.</p> + +<p>Until ten o'clock there was no more than work +enough to keep one boy moderately busy, and Teddy +experienced a deep sense of relief as Mr. Harvey +came up to the stand with a cheery "good morning."</p> + +<p>"I hear that your Uncle Nathan succeeded in<span class="pagenum">[255]</span> +carrying out his threat," the visitor said, as if +speaking about what was a very trifling matter.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir; an' do you think he can send me to +prison?"</p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it. You are under bail, and I venture +to predict that he will not carry it to court, for +he has sufficient sense to know it may prove a very +expensive job. We sent our men to the barn on the +marshes last night."</p> + +<p>"What did you find?" Teddy asked, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"More than I expected. There were no goods in +the building, but some have evidently been buried +there, and this fact, together with the evidence that +boats have been drawn up on the shore recently, +proves your story as to what was seen when you +boys followed the two men to be correct."</p> + +<p>"The other fellow has run away, I suppose."</p> + +<p>"I think he is yet in the immediate vicinity, +otherwise Jim would be willing to talk."</p> + +<p>"Have you seen him since he was arrested?"</p> + +<p>"I have just come from the jail. I told him of the +evidence we already had to connect him with the +burglary, and that we should push him hard in the +interest of you and Hazelton. He understands that +there is an opportunity to turn State's witness, but +he absolutely refuses to speak on any subject. +Therefore I fancy his partner has not yet got away."</p> + +<p>"Then there has been no good done in arresting +him," Teddy said, mournfully.<span class="pagenum">[256]</span></p> + +<p>"That is where you are making a mistake. I have +prepared an affidavit for you and Dan to swear to, +and shall endeavor to have a warrant issued at +once charging him with burglary, so he can't give +us the slip in case he gets clear in the matter of +swindling."</p> + +<p>"Do you want Dan an' I now?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; go after him. I will only keep you ten or +fifteen minutes."</p> + +<p>Teddy turned to go toward the exhibition buildings, +but halted an instant to ask:</p> + +<p>"Have you seen my uncle this morning?"</p> + +<p>"No, but I shall do so later in the day, and after +we have a little conversation I do not think he will +be so eager to see you in prison."</p> + +<p>The lawyer's confident manner had very much to +do with taking the load of sorrow from Teddy's +mind, and he looked almost cheerful as he asked of +the manager of the Stevens exhibit that Dan be +allowed to accompany him, explaining the reason +for making the request.</p> + +<p>"Of course he can go," the gentleman replied, +readily. "Trade won't be so good to-day but that +he can be spared as well as not, and even if it was +rushing, he should have permission to leave."</p> + +<p>When the boys were at the cane-board once +more Mr. Harvey hurried them away to the magistrate's +office, and there a long document was read, +which described in detail all they had seen on the<span class="pagenum">[257]</span> +day when Sam first gave an exhibition of his skill +as a detective.</p> + +<p>They marveled not a little that the lawyer should +have remembered so well every trifling incident. +Nothing, however apparently unimportant, had escaped +him, and, as Dan said:</p> + +<p>"It is written down better than if he had really +been with us."</p> + +<p>This document was sworn to and signed by both, +after which Mr. Harvey told them that they might +return to work, adding as he turned to Teddy:</p> + +<p>"The man who has been arrested on your complaint +will have a hearing to-morrow, and it is absolutely +necessary you should be at this office as +early as nine o'clock. I don't know whether Dan +will be allowed to tell what he has heard Sam say +regarding the matter, but he had better come with +you."</p> + +<p>"I'll be on hand," the young fakir replied. "Do +you know when I'm to be tried?"</p> + +<p>"That case won't come up for some time in view +of the evidence your lawyer is collecting," the +'Squire said.</p> + +<p>"Don't worry about it, for I think the real burglars +will soon be caught."</p> + +<p>"An' does Mr. Hazelton have to stay in jail all +the time?"</p> + +<p>"There is no other way out of it, since he hasn't +got friends who can go bail for him."<span class="pagenum">[258]</span></p> + +<p>Teddy wanted very much to ask permission to see +the prisoner, but inasmuch as he was accused of +being equally guilty with the fakir it hardly +seemed just the proper thing to make the request, +and he left the office, followed by Dan, who said, as +they gained the open air:</p> + +<p>"You ain't goin' to have half so much trouble as +you think, Teddy. Anybody can see that even the +'Squire is on your side, although he did issue the +warrant, an' the proof must be mighty strong to +make any of 'em believe you did anything against +the old miser. But this keeps us here on the grounds +another day, doesn't it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, an' if Mr. Sweet packs up his tent to-night, +we'll have to hunt for a place to sleep in the village."</p> + +<p>"That don't worry me very much. I've made a +good week's work out of the fair, an' can afford to +spend a little money."</p> + +<p>"I shall pay all the bills, of course," Teddy replied, +quickly. "It wouldn't be any more'n right +because you are goin' to stay to help me."</p> + +<p>Dan was quite positive he would pay his own bills, +and his companion equally certain he should not; +but there was little chance for discussion, since +they had arrived opposite the grand stand by this +time, and were hailed by Deacon Jones, who looked +as if he considered himself the one important personage +on the grounds as he said:<span class="pagenum">[259]</span></p> + +<p>"I want both of you boys to be here at exactly +two o'clock. Don't fail to come, no matter how +much business you may have on hand."</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" Teddy asked, immediately +thinking some new trouble threatened him.</p> + +<p>"There will be plenty of time for explanation +after you get here," was the mysterious reply, and +then the deacon signified that the interview was at +an end by turning to speak with some gentlemen +who had been watching the boys closely.</p> + +<p>"What do you suppose is up now?" Teddy asked +with a sigh, and Dan replied, mournfully:</p> + +<p>"I'm sure I don't know," but in his own mind he +was convinced that the deacon intended to surrender +the boy whose surety he had appeared willing +to become on the evening previous.</p> + +<p>Teddy was so disturbed by dismal forebodings +that Dan was very careful to hide his suspicions, +since it could do only harm to discuss them, and the +two parted, feeling as if Uncle Nathan had outwitted +Mr. Harvey.</p> + +<p>On retuning to his place of business Teddy did +not have the heart to wait upon the customers, and +after telling Tim what had been said to him, he +added:</p> + +<p>"I can't work; it's no use to try. There must +have been something new come up, an' I won't be +able to show that I'm innocent of robbing the +store."<span class="pagenum">[260]</span></p> + +<p>Dan could give him no consolation, for he also +felt that matters were approaching a dangerous +crisis, and he simply said:</p> + +<p>"Loaf around, old fellow, an' I'll look out for the +work here. Try to put it out of your mind, for +things won't be made better by worryin' over 'em."</p> + +<p>Just at this moment Teddy's mother arrived. She +had heard all the particulars concerning the arrest +and subsequent release, therefore began at once to +sympathize with her son.</p> + +<p>"Then you know what the deacon is goin' to do?" +Teddy asked.</p> + +<p>This was something of which Mrs. Hargreaves +was ignorant, but upon being told, appeared even +more distressed than her son, thus increasing instead +of lightening his troubles.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[261]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE TESTIMONIAL.</i></p> + +<p>It was impossible for Teddy to follow Tim's advice +to "loaf around."</p> + +<p>His heart was so full of sorrow that his greatest +desire was to go where those who might believe he +had been a partner of the burglars could not see +him; but since that was impossible, if he intended +to obey the deacon's injunctions and present himself +at the grand stand at the specified time, the +next best thing was to remain behind the booth +where his mother tried her best to cheer him.</p> + +<p>"It can't be possible that anything to your disadvantage +has occurred, Teddy," she said as she +held his hand for mutual sympathy. "Mr. Reaves +would have sent me word at once if that had happened."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps he doesn't know about it. Uncle +Nathan may have been talking with the deacon +again, an' turned him against me."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe it would be possible for him to +do such a thing. His reputation is not so good that<span class="pagenum">[262]</span> +people could put faith in all he says, more especially +in regard to this case."</p> + +<p>"Then if he didn't do it some one else has, an' +that makes it all the worse," Teddy replied, as he +tried to force back the tears.</p> + +<p>At this moment the sorrowing ones were startled +by hearing the voice of the man whom they had +every reason to call their enemy, and an instant +later Uncle Nathan stood before them.</p> + +<p>"Well," he said in what sounded more like a +snarl than anything else, "you see the old skinflint +did jest what he promised, an' he'll see to it that +the deacon don't stay on your bail very long unless +I get my rights."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by your rights?" Mrs. Hargreaves +asked.</p> + +<p>"I lent this ungrateful boy the money to start +him in a business where he's made more in a week +than I ever could in a year. Then he helped people +to rob me, an' after all that I made what any man +must call a fair offer. See how much I've lost by +him, an' then think of my offerin' to straighten +everything out by goin' in as his partner."</p> + +<p>"Why didn't you do this before the fair opened?"</p> + +<p>"I couldn't tell how it would turn out," the old +man began, and then realizing that he was admitting +something to his discredit, he added, quickly, +"I mean I hadn't lost my money then, an' never +suspected how he would wrong me."<span class="pagenum">[263]</span></p> + +<p>It seemed as if these last words drove Teddy to +desperation, and he no longer-remembered the +respect due to age.</p> + +<p>"Look here," he cried, angrily, rising, and standing +directly in front of Uncle Nathan, "if you believe +I'm a burglar, you can't want to be my +partner. It was only after the fact of my having +made considerable money was known that you +offered any trade. If the venture had been a losing +one you are the last person who would have taken +hold of it. Now I'm under arrest on a charge +made by you, who know I am innocent, an' we'll +put an end to all this talk. Don't come where my +mother and I am; do the very worst you can, an' +some day I'll have my innings."</p> + +<p>"You threaten, eh?"</p> + +<p>"That's exactly what I'm doing. I have leased +this piece of ground until to-morrow, and warn you +that it'll be mighty uncomfortable if you show your +nose here again. Go now an' go quick!"</p> + +<p>"That's right, Teddy," Tim shouted in a tone of +delight from the opposite side of the booth. "Give +it to him hot, an' I'll do my share. If you don't +want to tackle the job till after the trial, say the +word an' I'll sail in, for it gives me a pain to see +him around."</p> + +<p>Teddy made no reply to this generous offer; but +Uncle Nathan stepped back very quickly as if +fearing an immediate attack.<span class="pagenum">[264]</span></p> + +<p>"You won't be so bold to-morrow," he snarled, +shaking his fist in impotent rage, and then he disappeared +from view amid the crowd that had begun +to gather.</p> + +<p>Both Teddy and his clerk thought it very singular +that business should be so good on this day, when +the majority of the other fakirs were comparatively +idle, and also in view of what had been said against +the proprietor of the cane-board.</p> + +<p>Yet the people gathered around by scores, all +intent on patronizing the boys, and at the same +time embracing every opportunity to display their +good will.</p> + +<p>Teddy and his mother remained partially screened +from the gaze of the curious until nearly two +o'clock, when Dan, looking decidedly troubled, +arrived.</p> + +<p>"I suppose we've got to go to the grand stand an' +find out what the deacon wants," he said, mournfully. +"My boss told me that we must be there on +time, an' we might as well start."</p> + +<p>"I want to have it over as soon as possible," +Teddy replied. "Nothin' that comes can be any +worse than waitin' here thinkin' of what may +happen."</p> + +<p>The two boys walked either side of Mrs. Hargreaves +as they went to meet the deacon, and it +seemed very much as if the majority of the people +present knew what was about to occur, for the sad-visaged<span class="pagenum">[265]</span> +party was followed by crowds of the visitors +as they walked steadily onward.</p> + +<p>It was exactly two o'clock when they arrived at +the stairway leading to the grand stand, and there +they were met by the leader of the band from the +Run, who said with a mysterious manner as he +opened a gate leading to the track in front of the +judges' stand:</p> + +<p>"You are to come this way."</p> + +<p>"Where's the deacon?" Teddy asked.</p> + +<p>"Waiting for you."</p> + +<p>Without further explanation the musician led the +three to a spot where all could see them, and to +the intense surprise of the sorrowful-looking party, +the throng assembled on the benches greeted them +with the most hearty applause.</p> + +<p>"You are to come with me, Mrs. Hargreaves," +the conductor said, as he escorted her to one of the +front seats, and Teddy and Dan stood as if stupefied, +gazing in dismay at the sea of faces in front +of them.</p> + +<p>Before the boys had sufficiently recovered from +their bewilderment to be able to speculate upon +what was to happen Deacon Jones came down the +steps until he reached a place where all could see +him and there began a speech which caused at +least two of that assemblage to gaze at him in open-mouthed +astonishment.</p> + +<p>The manager of the fair did not intend to neglect<span class="pagenum">[266]</span> +any opportunity of making himself conspicuous, +and he delivered an eloquent address, looking first +at the boys and then at the audience, which cannot +be given here because of lack of space.</p> + +<p>He first explained to the spectators that Teddy +had taken upon himself the business of fakir simply +that he might aid his widowed mother. Then he +detailed the loss of the fifteen dollars, and finally +broached the one important matter, that of the +scene on the creek, when the three women were +rescued from drowning.</p> + +<p>By this time the cheeks of Teddy and Dan were +flaming red, and if he had been charging them with +the most atrocious crimes they could not have +looked more guilty or uncomfortable.</p> + +<p>"As you all know," he said, in conclusion, "we +have met here to see bravery and a spirit of self-sacrifice +rewarded. On behalf of the ladies whose +lives were saved by these little heroes I am about to +present Edward Hargreaves and Daniel Summers +with one hundred dollars each. In addition to that +amount the managers of the fair and several gentlemen +who do not care to have their names made +public, have made up a purse of one hundred and +eighty dollars to be divided equally between them. +It is most gratifying to me that I have been selected +as the instrument through whom this testimonial +is presented, and in behalf of my brother officers as +well as myself I will state that these brave boys<span class="pagenum">[267]</span> +have the freedom of the grounds whenever the +Peach Bottom fair is open."</p> + +<p>As he concluded, the deacon walked with a majestic +bearing down to the bewildered boys, presented +each with a well-filled pocketbook and then +waved his hand as a signal for the band, every +member of which did his best to make the music +heard above the rounds of applause intended for the +blushing fakirs.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the people came down from the +benches to congratulate the life-savers, and for +fully an hour the two were forced to remain there +listening to words of praise which they felt were +not warranted by their exploit on the creek.</p> + +<p>Among the most welcome of these enthusiastic +visitors was Jacob Sweet, and he said, heartily:</p> + +<p>"I heard of this little performance jest in time to +get here before that long-winded speech was begun; +but what pleases me the most is that I was +ahead of the whole gang, an' started our little blow-out +when it wasn't known you had so many +friends. I'll see you to-night, of course, an' I must +go now, for the bouncer has been around tellin' that +you've been sleepin' in my tent, an' I count on a +good payin' crowd this afternoon."</p> + +<p>It was considerably past three o'clock when the +boys and Mrs. Hargreaves returned to the cane-board, +looking very much different than when they +left it, and Tim cried as they came up:<span class="pagenum">[268]</span></p> + +<p>"I've heard all about it, an' what I want to know +is, where was old Nathan while that speechifyin' +was goin' on?"</p> + +<p>"I saw him when we first arrived," Mrs. Hargreaves +replied, "but he left a few moments later, +although I have no doubt that he remained where +he could hear all that was said without being seen."</p> + +<p>"That's where he was wise. It wouldn't be very +pleasant for him to show himself now, 'cause everybody +is down on him after what the deacon said."</p> + +<p>Dan was obliged to return to his duties, and he +whispered to Teddy before leaving:</p> + +<p>"I tell you what it is, old feller, this has been a +reg'lar puddin' for us, an' I'd give a good deal to +see another jest like it."</p> + +<p>"You're all right, but I expect after this Uncle +Nathan will be so mad he'll make me a pile of +trouble."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry about that; his claws are cut now. +I'll be back in time to go to supper."</p> + +<p>When he departed Teddy had an opportunity to +say a few words to his mother before she returned +home on the stage, which was advertised to leave +at four o'clock, and while he did this all thought of +being under arrest was put far from his mind because +of the joy at what he was now able to perform.</p> + +<p>"Never mind what happens to me," he whispered. +"I've now got nearly money enough to pay off all<span class="pagenum">[269]</span> +we owe, an' it has been earned honestly, too, although +I believe they paid a big price for what Dan +an' I did on the creek."</p> + +<p>"I'm thinking more of the praise you earned than +the money, Teddy. It was very sweet to hear the +deacon say so much to you before all those people."</p> + +<p>"Then both of us will be awfully jolly to-night, +an' to-morrow I'll be home, an' bring Dan with +me."</p> + +<p>"Invite him to stay just as long as he wishes, and +I will have a nice supper ready when the last stage +arrives."</p> + +<p>Teddy gave his mother nearly all the money he +had, including the "testimonial," and as she walked +away he said to Tim:</p> + +<p>"I'm willin' to be arrested, an' put into jail a good +many days for the sake of being able to help her as +I can do now."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[270]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXX"></a>CHAPTER XXX.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>THE TRIAL.</i></p> + +<p>It was only natural that both Teddy and Dan +should feel highly elated after this public expression +of admiration which culminated in the presentation +of the purse, but they immediately returned +to attend to their several duties when the ceremonies +were finished.</p> + +<p>Dan went back to the exhibition as if he had done +nothing worth remembering, and in less than half +an hour from the time the deacon concluded his +flowery speech it would have required a very +ardent student of humanity to discover that anything +out of the natural course of events had taken +place.</p> + +<p>At the cane-board Teddy waited upon his customers +as before, and without the slightest sign of +having been honored by the magnates of the fair, +while Dan fired at the target as if he had been a +boy with no other claim upon the public's attention +than his ability to hit a mark.</p> + +<p>Yet it must be confessed that both experienced a +very pleasing sense of having satisfied the public,<span class="pagenum">[271]</span> +and each, in his own peculiar way, knew he had +risen a little above the average boy.</p> + +<p>There can be no question that any one placed +in the same position must have felt gratified by the +many expressions of friendship and good-will with +which these two were literally overwhelmed, and it +would have been more than could be expected of +human nature had they remained unmoved under +the extravagant flattery which was showered upon +them immediately after the close of Deacon Jones' +speech.</p> + +<p>Although there was not quite as much money +flowing into the box as on the day previous, Teddy +was more than pleased with the receipts, because +every penny seemed to express just such an amount +of good-will.</p> + +<p>Until nearly nightfall he remained at the booth, +answering questions upon the same subject till it +seemed to have been worn threadbare, and then, +however great his desire to earn money, he felt a +positive sense of relief that his connection with the +Peach Bottom fair had finally come to an end.</p> + +<p>"This is the last time you an' I will pack up the +stuff," he said to Tim as they put into condition for +removal the cane and knife boards. "I promised to +give you all that was left, and you're more than +welcome to it."</p> + +<p>"But you surely don't mean to give me the whole +lot," Tim cried in surprise.<span class="pagenum">[272]</span></p> + +<p>"That's exactly what I'm going to do, and I sincerely +hope when you make a stand you'll meet +with the same good friends I have here."</p> + +<p>"I can't take these things unless you'll allow me +to pay something toward what they cost."</p> + +<p>"Look here, Tim," Teddy said, earnestly, "you +have shown yourself to be a friend of mine, an' +every cent that has come in here you've accounted +for. Now, whatever may happen, I'm through bein' +a fakir; but if you want to follow the business, I +can only hope you'll come out all right. We'll carry +this to Mr. Sweet's tent, an' I'll only be so much +the better pleased, and in case you don't, I'm bound +to help you in every way. Besides, I promised to +pay a certain percentage on the profits; that is yet +to be settled."</p> + +<p>"It never will be," Tim replied in the most decided +tone. "If I take these goods I've got more +than a fair share, an' won't listen to anything +else."</p> + +<p>"Very well, we'll leave it that way. You now +own everything, an' I owe you lots of good-will."</p> + +<p>On this basis the remnants of the two boards were +packed up for removal, and when they were about +to take the goods to Mr. Sweet's tent Dan arrived.</p> + +<p>"How much business did you do to-day?" he +asked.</p> + +<p>Teddy delayed sufficiently long to count the receipts, +and then replied:<span class="pagenum">[273]</span></p> + +<p>"Forty-one dollars and fifteen cents. That gives +Tim four-eleven, an' I get more than would have +been the case but for the testimonial this afternoon. +The folks crowded around to see me, rather +than to get the canes, an' so business has picked up +better than any one expected."</p> + +<p>"It don't make any difference how the money +came in so long as you have got it," Dan replied, +philosophically, "an' now the question is what are +we to do for supper, since we paid our bill at the +boarding-house this afternoon?"</p> + +<p>"Have you got any idea?"</p> + +<p>"Of course, or else I wouldn't have asked the +question. Let's invite Mr. Sweet, the bouncer, and +the clown to some restaurant down town, an' try to +give them as good a time as we had last night."</p> + +<p>This proposition met with Teddy's approval, and +the party was made up as he suggested, the cost +being divided between the two boys who had been +the recipients of the public testimonial.</p> + +<p>Not until a late hour in the evening did these festivities +come to an end, and then the party retired +to the museum tent, where they remained undisturbed +until the present season of the Peach Bottom +fair had come to an end.</p> + +<p>It was an unusually late hour for fakirs to arise +when Mr. Sweet awakened the boys as he said:</p> + +<p>"Turn out now, lads, an' get your stuff ready for +removal. I'm sorry to part company, but we can't<span class="pagenum">[274]</span> +stay here forever, an' the museum must be forty +miles the other side of Waterville by Monday morning."</p> + +<p>Dan had completed and been paid for his work +with the Stevens Company, therefore he had nothing +to do; Teddy no longer claimed any interest in +the canes and knives left over from the week's +work; consequently he was free to go where he +pleased, and Tim had his goods in such a condition +that they could be removed at any moment, which +prevented him from feeling any anxiety regarding +the future.</p> + +<p>Thus it was that all three of the boys were at liberty +to assist the proprietor of the museum, and +this they did with a will until the arrival of Lawyer +Harvey caused them to think of what had almost +been forgotten in the bustle and confusion of breaking +camp.</p> + +<p>"We are due at the 'Squire's office at nine o'clock, +and it is time you boys were getting over that way," +he said, briskly; "our case won't come up to-day, +but it has been decided to give Hazelton a hearing, +and I am very much afraid he's going to get the +worst of it."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Well, you see I have not been able to get any information +in addition to what you boys furnished, +and there seems little doubt that the 'Squire +must perforce bind him over for trial. The fact<span class="pagenum">[275]</span> +that he has deliberately swindled so many people +will work against him, and we can do very little to +save him."</p> + +<p>"What will be the result of his being bound +over?" Teddy asked.</p> + +<p>"He must remain in jail, unless he can get bail, +until next fall."</p> + +<p>"But that in itself will be a terrible punishment."</p> + +<p>"True; yet it cannot be avoided. If he had +worked honestly the case would be different; but +now he will be fortunate even to get out in the fall."</p> + +<p>"Yet Uncle Nathan says I am equally guilty."</p> + +<p>"We can easily show you had nothing to do with +the robbery, and that is our only care this morning."</p> + +<p>"What about Long Jim?"</p> + +<p>"He remains silent, refusing to answer the simplest +questions, and unless he speaks Hazelton +must be bound over; the 'Squire can pursue no other +course."</p> + +<p>Believing as they did that Hazelton was innocent +of the charge upon which he had been arrested, +both Teddy and Dan felt it was a great hardship +for the fakir to remain so long in prison; but since +it was beyond their power to give him any relief, +neither expressed an opinion other than has been +recorded.</p> + +<p>Mr. Harvey had come for them to accompany +him to the Squire's office, and since there was nothing<span class="pagenum">[276]</span> +to detain them they set out, after first bidding +Mr. Sweet a cordial 'goodby, for he had announced +his intention of leaving Peach Bottom on +the noon train.</p> + +<p>"I shall see one or both of you at some time in the +future," he said, with considerable feeling, "an' +there'll be no complaint to make if I never fall in +with worse boys."</p> + +<p>The bouncer and the clown also had something to +say in the form of an adieu, and when the boys left +the proprietor of the alleged wonderful museum it +was like parting with an old friend, for he had +shown himself to be a "very present help in time +of trouble."</p> + +<p>Tim did not propose to start for the Run until his +companions had concluded their business; his goods +were packed ready for removal, and there was +nothing better for him to do than accompany them +to the court-room where it seemed as if all they might +say would result only in a long term of imprisonment +for Hazelton before he could be tried on the +baseless charge brought against him, simply because +of the disreputable business in which he was +engaged.</p> + +<p>Mr. Harvey had little or nothing to say during +the walk to the 'Squire's office, and arriving there +the jewelry fakir was seen looking thoroughly despondent.</p> + +<p>"Can I speak with him?" Teddy asked the lawyer.<span class="pagenum">[277]</span> +"What do you want to say?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing in particular, except to tell him how +bad I feel because we could do nothing to clear +him."</p> + +<p>"Very well; but do not talk long, for it may prejudice +your own case. The people whom he has +swindled are here to see that some form of punishment +is meted out to him, and it can do you no good +to be seen acting as a consoler."</p> + +<p>This possibility troubled Teddy very little since +he was confident of his own innocence, and he approached +the prisoner as he said:</p> + +<p>"I wish I could do something, Mr. Hazelton, to +prove you as innocent as I believe you to be."</p> + +<p>"There's no need of that, my boy. I've put you in +a hole already, and you've done more for me than +some others who call themselves friends."</p> + +<p>"I know it was Long Jim who committed the +burglary; but how can it be proven now?"</p> + +<p>"There was only one way, and that was to catch +the real thieves with their plunder. Mr. Harvey +tells me his attempt was a failure, an' it wouldn't +surprise me if I was not only remanded for trial, +but received a sentence for something of which I +am absolutely innocent. I don't profess to be very +good, my boy, as you may understand after seeing +me work on the fair grounds; but I never yet descended +to do such things as I am charged with +now."<span class="pagenum">[278]</span></p> + +<p>"I am certain of that," and Teddy pressed the +prisoner's hand in token of friendship, "and only +wish it was possible to aid you."</p> + +<p>"You have already done more than my partners +did," was the grateful reply, and then further conversation +was prevented as the 'Squire called the +assembly to order.</p> + +<p>It was not a regular court of law; but one would +have thought it the most dignified judicial body in +the country had he seen the air with which the +'Squire took his seat at the head of the long table +as he called the case.</p> + +<p>"That settles Hazelton," Dan whispered as Teddy +left the prisoner and rejoined his friends. "Somebody +has got to suffer in order to make the law +come out square, an' he's the feller what'll have to +stand the brunt of everything."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[279]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>AN ARRIVAL.</i></p> + +<p>Lawyer Harvey did not neglect anything +which might work to the advantage of his +client; but in the face of the evidence his efforts +appeared to be in vain.</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan, who arrived just as the case was +called, swore to the fact that Hazelton had been in +his store on the Sunday afternoon prior to the robbery, +and that he had told the prisoner of his keeping +large amounts of money in the building, because +of the difficulty and expense of sending the +cash to the Waterville bank.</p> + +<p>He also testified that Hazelton seemed unusually +interested in everything pertaining to the store, and +asked many questions relative to his (the witness') +habits, such as the time when business usually began, +how late he remained in the building at night, +as well as several other things which now seemed +as if the information had been sought simply for +the purpose of knowing when would be the safest +time to commit the crime.</p> + +<p>"How much did you lose?" Mr. Harvey asked.<span class="pagenum">[280]</span></p> + +<p>"I don't know for certain; but I stand willin' to +give fifty dollars if the goods can be recovered, an' +if my nephew would tell all he knows——"</p> + +<p>"That will do, Mr. Hargreaves," the lawyer said, +sharply. "Teddy is not under examination, and +until he is we do not care to hear your opinion concerning +him."</p> + +<p>"I reckon I can tell what I want to, can't I, +'Squire?"</p> + +<p>"You must confine yourself to this particular +case. As to whether there is sufficient evidence to +bind the prisoner over does not concern the charge +against your nephew, at least not to the extent of +your telling what you think."</p> + +<p>"I thought, perhaps, if he heard me say I'd give +fifty dollars to know where the goods were, an' +knew I'd swear to it, he might confess, for he has +shown himself to be powerful fond of a dollar."</p> + +<p>"That appears to be a peculiarity of some of his +relatives," Mr. Harvey said, dryly, and at this remark +the spectators laughed heartily, while the old +man growled:</p> + +<p>"I didn't come here to be told that I was a miser; +but it seems even men who call themselves gentlemen +think sich things are all right."</p> + +<p>"If you have no other evidence to give we will +not detain you," the lawyer said, sharply; and as +Uncle Nathan returned to his chair near the door<span class="pagenum">[281]</span> +the proprietor of the hotel at the Run was called +upon to testify.</p> + +<p>What he said was in favor of the prisoner rather +than otherwise.</p> + +<p>He swore to the fact that the prisoner spent the +night on which the burglary was committed at his +house; that he pretended to retire at an early hour, +and started for Peach Bottom on the first stage.</p> + +<p>Under Mr. Harvey's skillful cross-examination +the landlord admitted that unless a man got out of +the window he could not have left the house without +the knowledge of the watchman, who kept the +keys and remained in the office all night. It was +also shown that Hazelton brought and carried away +with him, so far as was known at the hotel, nothing +but a small traveling satchel.</p> + +<p>Then several people from the Run were called to +prove that the fakir was really in the town on this +particular Sunday, and the driver of the stage testified +that the prisoner rode with him the entire distance +to Peach Bottom. The landlord of the hotel +where Hazelton boarded during the fair week, or so +much of it as he was at liberty, swore to the fact +that the prisoner had never brought any quantity of +baggage to his house, and appeared to be very regular +in his habits. So far as he (the landlord) knew, +the fakir remained in his room nearly all the time, +except while on the exhibition grounds.</p> + +<p>This ended the testimony, and Mr. Harvey argued<span class="pagenum">[282]</span> +that there was really no evidence to connect the +prisoner with the crime.</p> + +<p>"That he conducted a game which could hardly +be called honest is admitted," he said; "but it has +nothing to do with the case. Prejudice should not +be allowed to take the place of facts, and I insist +that my client be released."</p> + +<p>"I reckon there's sufficient ground for suspicion," +the 'Squire replied, "an' I don't see any other way +out of it. A jury must decide, an' I shall hold him +in the sum of three thousand——"</p> + +<p>At this moment the dignity of the court received +a severe shock, as a most unseemly disturbance suddenly +occurred at the door, and the 'Squire paused to +learn who was so bold as to disturb the representative +of the law at the very instant when he was delivering +an opinion.</p> + +<p>"It's nobody but a boy," Uncle Nathan replied as +he held the door firmly closed, while the would-be +visitor kicked so vigorously as to threaten the destruction +of the panels.</p> + +<p>"Bring him in here, an' we'll see whether such a +row can be kicked up in a court of law with impunity."</p> + +<p>"Better let me throw him into the street," Uncle +Nathan snarled.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Constable, bring that boy before me," the +'Squire said, sternly, and an instant later, to the +consternation of all those who had seen him, the<span class="pagenum">[283]</span> +boy who was supposed to have been drowned two +days before entered, looking decidedly the worse +for having existed so long without water and soap.</p> + +<p>"Why, it's Sam, an' he ain't dead!" Teddy cried +as he rose to his feet.</p> + +<p>"Of course I ain't; but it wouldn't been many +days before I turned into a corpse if I hadn't got +away from them thieves," the amateur detective replied.</p> + +<p>"Who are you, an' what do you want here?" the +'Squire asked, sternly, as he rapped on the table for +the spectators to remain silent.</p> + +<p>"Why, I'm Sam Balderston, the feller who come +to the fair to work for the Davis Boat an' Oar Company +of Detroit, an' if what Long Jim told me was +true, folks have been tryin' to find me in the +creek."</p> + +<p>"This is the boy who was reported to have been +drowned on the day when those lads," here the lawyer +pointed to Teddy and Dan, "claim to have seen +two men carrying goods into an old barn on the +marshes. I fancy he can give us information relative +to the true burglars."</p> + +<p>"You bet I can," and now that he was the central +figure in the scene, all Sam's old assurance returned. +"If you mean the fellers what broke into +Teddy's uncle's store, I can flash one of them up. +The other come to the fair an' didn't get back, so +Phil thought he was arrested."<span class="pagenum">[284]</span></p> + +<p>"Who do you mean by the other fellow?" Mr. +Harvey asked.</p> + +<p>"Why, Long Jim, the same man what swindled +Teddy out of his fifteen dollars at Waterville."</p> + +<p>"Have you been with him since your disappearance?"</p> + +<p>"Most of the time he hung around, an' then ag'in +Phil was there."</p> + +<p>"Who is Phil?"</p> + +<p>"Long Jim's partner. They've got a slat of stuff +what has been stole 'round here, an' I know where +all of it is."</p> + +<p>"Tell the 'Squire the whole story."</p> + +<p>This was Sam's opportunity, and, in order to cover +himself with glory, he slaughtered the truth in the +most shocking manner.</p> + +<p>"Well," he said, in a consequential way, "when +Dan an' me an' Teddy saw the thieves carryin' stuff +down to that old barn I wanted to rush in an' arrest +both; but the other fellows was scared an' +come ashore to talk with Hazelton so's he'd tell 'em +what to do. Then I jes' made up my mind to carry +on the job myself, an' went back."</p> + +<p>"Where?" the 'Squire asked.</p> + +<p>"To the barn to get the stuff. While I was diggin' +it up the men come back, an' the minute they saw +who was on their trail they got frightened."</p> + +<p>"And who was on their trail?" the 'Squire interrupted.<span class="pagenum">[285]</span></p> + +<p>"Why, me, of course. They rushed in, an' I had +the awfullest row; but it was two to one, an' so I +got the worst of it. They had to work mighty hard +before gettin' me tired, an' then all the stuff was +dug up an' put in the boat. My craft was upset an' +sent adrift, so's to make it look as if I was dead, an' +we went down the creek six or seven miles, where +we hid in the woods. Phil came back here after +more goods what had been stolen, an' they was goin' +to skip the country, when there was a big row, +an' Long Jim allowed he'd come to the fair once +more. Phil was mad, an' got pretty drunk, an' +after that I had my innings. I turned to an' lashed +him up same's I'd been; but we had an' awful fight. +It takes more'n one man to git away with me."</p> + +<p>"Where is this fellow now?" the 'Squire interrupted +again.</p> + +<p>"Down the creek, tied up so's he can't hardly +breathe, an' he must be pretty near sober by this +time."</p> + +<p>"If he was very drunk I do not understand how +he could have fought so hard."</p> + +<p>"Well, he did; but I got the best of him, an' +what's more, I know where all the stuff that's been +stolen is hid."</p> + +<p>"Mr. Constable, bring into court the prisoner who +is charged with swindling, and let us see if this extraordinary +boy can identify him," the 'Squire said, +with an unusual amount of dignity.<span class="pagenum">[286]</span></p> + +<p>"If it's Long Jim, you bet I can," Sam said, as he +turned toward the spectators that they might have +a good opportunity of seeing such a wonderful detective +as he claimed to be.</p> + +<p>Teddy and Dan could hardly control their impatience +to speak privately with Sam. As a matter of +course, they understood that he was embellishing +the story, and both were eager to make him tell the +exact truth.</p> + +<p>Just at that moment, however, Sam had no time +to spend on ordinary boys. He had come out of a +bad scrape with apparently flying colors, and intended +to enjoy his triumph to the utmost before +sinking back to his rightful plane.</p> + +<p>The jail was near at hand, and Sam had not exhibited +himself as much as he desired when Long +Jim was brought in.</p> + +<p>On seeing the boy the burglar gave a start of surprise, +and allowed the incriminating question to escape +his lips:</p> + +<p>"Has Phil been pinched, too?"</p> + +<p>"I took care of that business, an' we'll bring him +in some time to-day. Say, what about that awful +lickin' you was goin' to give me?"</p> + +<p>"I'll cut your throat before this job is finished," +was the angry reply, and there was no longer any +necessity of asking Sam if he recognized the prisoner.</p> + +<p>"You say you can show us the stolen goods, and<span class="pagenum">[287]</span> +the other burglar is where the officers can get him?" +Mr. Harvey asked.</p> + +<p>"That's just what I can do," Sam replied, proudly.</p> + +<p>"Then you will have earned fifty dollars, for Mr. +Hargreaves has promised, even sworn, that he will +pay that amount for the return of his property," +Mr. Harvey continued.</p> + +<p>"He might as well give me the money now, for +I'm ready to turn the stuff up, an' when there's +more big detective work to be done, come to me."</p> + +<p>"I don't know about payin' any reward till I'm +certain the little villain isn't one of the thieves himself, +an' is doin' this to swindle me," Uncle Nathan +cried, quickly.</p> + +<p>"He shall have the reward if the story is true," +the 'Squire replied. "You can't go back on what +you've sworn to, an' must pay up. Mr. Constable, +get two or three men an' go with this boy. Don't +lose sight of him for a minute until he has given all +the information in his power."</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<span class="pagenum">[288]</span> + +<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXXII.</h2> + +<p class="h3"><i>IN CONCLUSION.</i></p> + +<p>Sam was led away before either Teddy or Dan +could speak privately with him; but they went +at once to congratulate Hazelton on his apparently +happy escape, and, in response to Mr. Harvey's request, +the 'Squire said:</p> + +<p>"The prisoner can remain here, or in your custody, +until the party returns. If the boy has told +the truth there is nothing for me to do but discharge +him, and I am really glad that he has come out so +fortunately."</p> + +<p>"Don't think I'll ever forget what you've done for +me," Hazelton whispered to Teddy.</p> + +<p>"But it isn't me at all. Sam seems to have fixed +everything."</p> + +<p>"I've got an idea that I know pretty near the +truth of the whole story, never mind how he tells +it. At all events, we've no reason to complain, for +if the goods and the other burglar are found, we +are out of our trouble. Your uncle's charges can't +hold after that."</p> + +<p>It was, as Teddy now realized for the first time, a<span class="pagenum">[289]</span> +happy conclusion to the troubles of both, and his +heart was lighter than it had been at any time since +the accusation was made.</p> + +<p>There was no question that those who had gone +with Sam would be absent several hours, and +the little party in the court-room had more time at +their disposal than could well be occupied by the +discussion of their affairs.</p> + +<p>After the different phases of the case had been +gone over in detail, Hazelton asked Teddy:</p> + +<p>"How did you come out at the fair?"</p> + +<p>"I haven't figured up; but I know I've made a +good deal, an' it must be almost enough, countin' +the money Deacon Jones gave us, to pay the debt +on the place."</p> + +<p>Until this moment Teddy had had so much on his +mind that the principal cause of his turning fakir +was absent from his mind; but now, with nothing +better to do, he began to count up the week's work, +announcing the result a few moments later by saying:</p> + +<p>"I took in two hundred an' fifty-two dollars an' +fifty cents during the week. Out of that must come +the money I lost at Waterville, what I paid Uncle +Nathan, the privilege, the money I paid Mr. Reaves +for the stock, Tim's wages, an' my board. That +leaves one hundred an' forty-five dollars an' ninety-eight +cents. With what came in from the testimonial +I'll have enough to pay off the debt on the house,<span class="pagenum">[290]</span> +an' pretty near eight dollars for myself, which is +what I call a big week's work."</p> + +<p>"I'm glad you have made it," Hazelton replied, +heartily. "There is a little matter between you an' +I which yet remains to be settled, and when that +has been done you should be considerably better +off."</p> + +<p>"I don't want you to do a thing," Teddy said, +quickly. "So many people have helped me since +the fair opened that it seems as if I was nothing +more or less than a beggar."</p> + +<p>"You come very far from deserving that title," +the fakir replied, and then the entrance of Mr. +Reaves interrupted the conversation. After talking +with the lawyer, the merchant said to Teddy:</p> + +<p>"I am more than pleased to learn that you will be +freed from all your troubles in a short time. Next +week I shall be in need of a clerk, and if you wish +to take the situation it shall be left open until you +are ready to go to work. The wages are six dollars +a week for the first year, with an increase as soon +as you can earn it, and I will really be pleased to +have you in my employ."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to come," Teddy replied; "but it don't +seem just right to leave mother."</p> + +<p>"There is no necessity of doing so. You can ride +back and forth on the stage, unless your mother +should decide, as I think she will eventually, to +make her home in Waterville."<span class="pagenum">[291]</span></p> + +<p>"If she approves of the plan I'll come to work +next week."</p> + +<p>"Make it two weeks, so that there'll be plenty of +time to arrange matters, and I will expect you," the +merchant replied in a tone which showed that he +was more than satisfied with the arrangement. "I +only came over to see if you needed any assistance; +but Mr. Harvey says you'll soon be free from the +charge your uncle made, therefore I will go back +at once."</p> + +<p>About an hour after the merchant departed Sam +and the constables returned with Phil and the stolen +goods.</p> + +<p>The amateur detective was in the best possible +spirits, and now that the burglar had been apprehended +through his assistance the boy felt absolutely +certain he was the greatest detective in the +country.</p> + +<p>As a matter of course, there was nothing the +'Squire could do save discharge Hazelton from custody, +and after Mr. Harvey had given his word that +he would take care Sam should appear when wanted +as a witness, the boy rejoined his friends, saying as +he did so:</p> + +<p>"If you fellers had done as I wanted you'd be way +up now, the same as I am. Of course, I don't blame +you for being afraid; but when you go out on such +work the only way is to hold on."</p> + +<p>"I wonder how long you'd have held on if the<span class="pagenum">[292]</span> +men hadn't made you stay with them?" Dan asked.</p> + +<p>"Who told you that?" Sam said. "If I staid, it +was because I knowed it wouldn't be long until I +got the upper hand of the gang, an I've done it."</p> + +<p>Before the party separated, and while Uncle +Nathan was identifying the goods which had been +stolen from him, Mr. Harvey insisted that the reward +should be paid, and although it was very much +like drawing a tooth, the old man was finally induced +to make his word good.</p> + +<p>"It's a pile of money, but I earned it," Sam said, +as he tucked Uncle Nathan's grudgingly bestowed +cash in his trousers pocket. "There ain't many +'round this part of the country who could have done +what I did, an' it's only right detectives should be +well paid."</p> + +<p>Then, with many protestations of friendship, the +lawyer started for home, after returning to Hazelton +the money which Teddy had given Mr. Reaves +for safekeeping, and the fakir said as he walked +out of the court-room with the four boys:</p> + +<p>"Now, I want you to come with me, until my business +is settled, and then I'll shake the dust of +Peach Bottom from my feet in the shortest possible +time."</p> + +<p>Not understanding what he meant, the boys accompanied +him to the nearest jewelry store, and +there he bought two silver watches, which he presented +to Teddy and Dan, as he said:<span class="pagenum">[293]</span></p> + +<p>"These are only to remind you that I am grateful +for what has been done. It isn't much of a present; +but it will suffice to show I'm not ungrateful. Some +time in the future I may meet you again, and then +the full debt shall be paid if I'm solid enough to do +it."</p> + +<p>He was gone almost before the astonished boys +could thank him, and with his departure this story +should properly be concluded, since Teddy has +made his last appearance as a fakir.</p> + +<p>A few more words, and "the end" shall be written.</p> + +<p>Sam, still believing himself especially designed +for a detective, is yet displaying his "style" as an +oarsman in the employ of the Davis Boat and Oar +Company, and he believes he has guessed the +weight of the yacht which is so soon to be given +away.</p> + +<p>Dan accepted an offer from Mr. Reaves last week, +and he and Teddy are learning the same business, +both looking forward to the time when they shall +own a store equally as large.</p> + +<p>Uncle Nathan is still at the Run, but his trade has +decreased very materially, and Hazelton has not +been seen since the day he left Peach Bottom; but +it is quite possible that when the fair opens this season +all the fakirs may again meet the country boy +who made such a successful venture at the country +fair.</p> + +<p class="h3">[THE END.]</p> + +<p class="spacer"> </p> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 584px;"> +<img src="images/illus311.jpg" width="584" height="600" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">53 STATE ST.<br />19 KILBY ST.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<p class="h2">CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Ridpath's United States.</span></p> + +<p>Cloth <b>3.75</b> Sheep <b>5.00</b> Half Morocco <b>6.00</b></p> + +<p>Size of Volumes 7-1/2 × 10-1/4 Inches.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 544px;"> +<img src="images/illus313.jpg" width="544" height="600" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption">THE UNITED STATES A HISTORY<br />JOHN CLARK RIDPATH L.L.D.</p> + +<p><i>Fac-simile Volume Reduced.</i></p> + +<p>FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE PUBLISHERS.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<p class="h2">CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS BOSTON.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Hall's Ireland, 3 Vols. In 1.</span></p> + +<p>Cloth <b>3.75</b> Sheep <b>5.00</b> Half Morocco <b>6.00</b></p> + +<p>Size of Volumes 7 1/2 × 10 1/4 Inches.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 545px;"> +<img src="images/illus315.jpg" width="545" height="600" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption smcap">Ireland Its History Scenery and People</p> + +<p><i>Fac-simile Volume Reduced.</i></p> + +<p>FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE PUBLISHERS.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<p class="h2">CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Miss Parloa's Cook Book.</span></p> + +<p>Cloth, silver and black Side and Back <b>1.25</b></p> + +<p>Size of Volumes 5-1/4 × 7-3/4 Inches.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 410px;"> +<img src="images/illus317.jpg" width="410" height="600" alt="" /> +</div> + +<p class="caption smcap">Miss Parloa's & Appledore Cook Book</p> + +<p><i>Fac-simile Volume Reduced.</i></p> + +<p>FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE PUBLISHERS.</p> + +<hr class="chapter" /> + +<div class="trnote"> +<h2>Transcriber's Note:</h2> + +<p>[——] denotes a word missing in the original text.</p> +</div> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 37647-h.txt or 37647-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/7/6/4/37647">http://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/6/4/37647</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/37647-h/images/cover.jpg b/37647-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1be8996 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus002.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b0ea65 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus002.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus019.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus019.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d76fd7b --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus019.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus025.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus025.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a851f01 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus025.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus063.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus063.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed611c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus063.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus125.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus125.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9dfc2d --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus125.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus131.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus131.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bc239b --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus131.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus159.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus159.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd48315 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus159.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus211.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus211.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..43e58b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus211.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus235.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus235.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d68a2c --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus235.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus249.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus249.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..200843e --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus249.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus311.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus311.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a584ac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus311.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus313.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus313.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..508964a --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus313.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus315.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus315.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2d2d4f --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus315.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/illus317.jpg b/37647-h/images/illus317.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..70c6c61 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/illus317.jpg diff --git a/37647-h/images/title-page.jpg b/37647-h/images/title-page.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..979eb3e --- /dev/null +++ b/37647-h/images/title-page.jpg diff --git a/37647.txt b/37647.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb9a0b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8365 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country +Fair, by James Otis + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Adventures of a Country Boy at a Country Fair + + +Author: James Otis + + + +Release Date: October 6, 2011 [eBook #37647] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT +A COUNTRY FAIR*** + + +E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Matthew Wheaton, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 37647-h.htm or 37647-h.zip: + (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37647/37647-h/37647-h.htm) + or + (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/37647/37647-h.zip) + + + + + +[Illustration: In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying, "Stop +thief!" at the full strength of his lungs.] + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR + +by + +James Otis + +Author of Toby Tyler Etc. + +Illustrated + + + + + + + +Boston +Charles E. Brown & Co. + +Copyright, 1893, +By Charles E. Brown & Co. + +S. J. Parkhill & Co., Printers +Boston + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + CHAPTER. + I.--A Young Fakir + II.--An Old Fakir + III.--A Friend + IV.--Uncle Nathan + V.--The Fair + VI.--A Clue + VII.--The Clerk + VIII.--The Jewelry Fakir + IX.--A Brave Rescue + X.--An Encounter + XI.--Long Jim + XII.--A Discovery + XIII.--Amateur Detectives + XIV.--The Rendezvous + XV.--Sam's Adventures + XVI.--Missing + XVII.--A Terrible Night + XVIII.--A Narrow Escape + XIX.--The Arrest + XX.--A Proposition + XXI.--With the Burglars + XXII.--A Disaster + XXIII.--A Second Arrest + XXIV.--A Third Arrest + XXV.--On Bail + XXVI.--The Fakirs' Party + XXVII.--In Hiding + XXVIII.--A Failure + XXIX.--The Testimonial + XXX.--The Trial + XXXI.--An Arrival + XXXII.--In Conclusion + + + + +_THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A COUNTRY FAIR._ + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +_A YOUNG FAKIR._ + + +"I'm going to try it. Deacon Jones says I can have the right to run both +things for ten dollars, and Uncle Nathan is going to lend me money +enough to get the stock." + +"What scheme have you got in your head now, Teddy Hargreaves?" and Mrs. +Fernald looked over her spectacles at the son of her widowed sister, who +was literally breathless in his excitement. + +"I'm going to run a cane an' knife board at the Peach Bottom fair, and +try to make money enough to pay the debt mother owes on the place." + +"You're crazy--mad as a March hare! The idea of a child like you setting +yourself up to earn three or four hundred dollars, when your father +worked all his life and couldn't get so much together." + +Mrs. Fernald really appeared to be angry, and she really believed there +was good cause why she should lose her temper. The thought that little +Teddy--a "whiflet" she called him--should set up his opinion in such +matters against his elders, and attempt to earn in one season an amount +which Seth Hargreaves had never been able to repay during his thirty-six +years of life, was so preposterous that the good lady looked upon the +boy's assertion as positive proof that he was not only ready but willing +to "fly in the face of Providence." + +"I shall try it all the same," Teddy replied in a most provokingly +matter-of-fact tone, "an' I'm going down to see Uncle Nathan this very +minute." + +"Very well, and I consider it my bounden duty to advise your mother to +keep you in the house until the fair is ended," Aunt Sarah said, as she +took from its peg the well-worn gingham sun-bonnet. + +Teddy had no desire to prolong the conversation, which had been begun +simply because his aunt insisted on knowing where he had been, but +hurried away from the gate on which he had been swinging while Mrs. +Fernald questioned him, as if fearful lest she might try to detain him +until the matter could be settled according to her own ideas of +propriety. + +"I can have the right to run what I want to, every day the fair lasts, +for ten dollars, an' now, if you lend me fifteen, I'll be all right," +the boy cried as he burst into Nathan Hargreaves' store, just as the old +gentleman was adding a trifle more sand to the sugar, in order to +compensate for what might possibly have been spilled by the careless +clerk. + +"Oh, it's fixed, eh? And you're really goin' to turn fakir?" Uncle +Nathan asked, wrinkling his face into the semblance of a laugh, but +remaining silent, as if fearing to waste even such a cheap thing as +mirth. + +"What's a fakir?" + +"A man, or a boy, for that matter, who goes out to sell things as you +count on doin', if I'm fool enough to let you throw away fifteen good +dollars of mine." + +"But you promised to lend me the money." + +"An' I'm going to do it; but that don't make me any less a fool jest +because I'm holdin' to my word. Tell me what you count on doin', an' +then we'll come down to the business end of the scheme." + +"I'll pay the ten dollars I've got to Deacon Jones for the right to run +the games, an' with what you lend me I'm goin' to Waterville an' buy a +whole lot of knives an' canes. There's a storekeeper over there who +promises to sell that kind of goods for less than they cost him." + +"An' he's lyin' when he says it. People don't do business for the fun of +it; but that's neither here nor there so far as our trade is concerned. +I'm goin' to give you the fifteen dollars now--it's a power of money for +a boy of your size, Teddy--, an' if you make anything, as I allow you +will, I'm to have eighteen dollars back; don't forget that part of the +trade." + +"I'll stand to what I agreed, Uncle Nathan, and you shall be paid the +very day the fair closes." + +"Here it is," and with a sigh which was almost a groan Uncle Nathan took +from a fat calfskin wallet three five-dollar bills, adding, as he handed +them to Teddy: "Be careful of it, my boy, for I'm puttin' almost too +much confidence in a child of your size, an' nobody knows how distressed +I'd be if anything happened to prevent your paying it back." + +Teddy placed the money carefully in the inside pocket of his vest, and, +after promising for at least the hundredth time that it should be repaid +by the close of the following week, hurried home confident in the belief +that he was on an extremely short road to wealth. + +Mrs. Hargreaves was by no means as sanguine as her son concerning the +success of the scheme, and actually appeared frightened when Teddy +showed her the money he had received from his Uncle Nathan, who was +reputed to be the "closest-fisted" merchant to be found within a day's +ride of Peach Bottom Run. + +"If you should lose it, Teddy, and be unable to pay him back at the +exact time you promised, it would be the undoing of us, for we could +never expect to get another dollar. I know he is not generous, but have +always believed that if we should be in yet more straitened +circumstances he would give us some assistance. He has neither charity +nor mercy for any one who does not pay a little more than his just +debts--" + +"But I shall give back every cent of this, mother, so don't look as if +you were in such distress. I want to go to Waterville to buy my stock in +the morning, an' am counting on walking. It's only seven miles, an' I'll +save fifty cents by traveling on shanks' mare." + +"I will have breakfast ready by four o'clock; but you must come back on +the stage, Teddy." + +"Yes, if I feel very tired; but I don't know of any easier way to earn a +dollar than by walking both ways." + +The young "fakir" believed he knew exactly what kind and amount of stock +he wished to purchase on the following day, therefore he had no +preparations to make for the journey save to get his limbs in the best +possible condition for the tramp by retiring very early, in order to +"scoop in" plenty of sleep. + +The thought of the success which should attend him in his new venture +kept his eyes open a long while after getting into bed, and when he +finally succeeded in crossing over to the land of Nod, dreams of the +fortune to be made during the coming week visited his brain, and +remained there until his mother's voice summoned him to breakfast. + +The sun had not yet come up from behind the hills when he was trudging +sturdily along over the dusty road, carrying a generous luncheon tied in +a snowy-white napkin, and with his money secured by many pins in the +lining of his cap. + +"Be careful not to lose it, for your Uncle Nathan would never forgive +you," his mother had said, and he cried cheerily, as he walked swiftly +down the lane to the highway: + +"There's no fear of anything like that happening; the bills can't get +away without my knowing it so long as they stay here," and Teddy pulled +his cap yet more closely down on his head. + +In a trifle more than two hours he was at Waterville, wondering why the +stores were not open, no matter how early it was, when such an important +customer as himself came to town. + +Since the merchants were evidently ignorant of his arrival, as was +evidenced by the fact that their places of business yet remained closed, +there was no more profitable occupation for him than to eat a second +breakfast, which he proceeded to do, using a hand-truck on the +depot-platform as a seat. + +The train which left New York on the evening before had arrived some +time previous, and the station was temporarily deserted by all save a +boy of about Teddy's age, who was walking to and fro in an aimless +manner. + +By the time the young "fakir" had finished his second biscuit he noticed +that the stranger was watching him narrowly, and, holding forth the +napkin with its generous store, he asked: + +"Have one?" + +"I don't care if I do," said the boy, carelessly, and he continued: + +"I reckon you live 'round here?" + +"No, I jest come up from Peach Bottom Run, an' am waiting for the stores +to be opened." + +"Why, you're from the same place where the fair is goin' to be held." + +"No; I live at the Run, an' the fair is over to Peach Bottom, most five +miles from my house. Are you goin' there?" + +"I should reckon I was. Why, I'm goin' to help run it." + +"You are?" and Teddy's mouth opened wide in astonishment. + +"Yes, sir-ree, an' you fellers will be jest about crazy when I tell you +what I've come to do." + +"Don't flash it upon us too quick, for we wanter kind of keep our wits +about us till the fun is over." + +The tone of sarcasm in Teddy's voice appeared to nettle the stranger. + +"I've come down here to give away a steamboat what's worth five hundred +dollars." + +"Then there ain't any need for you to go any farther, 'cause I'm willin' +to take it now." + +"If you won't be so smart I'll tell you about it," was the dignified +reply. "There's a firm out in Detroit what's goin' to do that very thing +to the feller that can guess how much she weighs, an' I've been hired to +help the man who is comin' down to Peach Bottom to show off a lot of +boats." + +"What are you goin' to do?" and now Teddy was interested. + +"Row around in the creek while he looks out for the stuff in the fair. +It won't be any more'n fun, an' if you'll come over I'll take you out." + +"I don't s'pose you could help me guess how much the steamer weighs, +could you?" + +"There ain't anybody as can do that, 'cause you see she ain't built yet; +but you can find out all about it by lookin' on the fair grounds for the +circulars what the Davis Boat and Oar Company of Detroit will throw +around, an' if there's somethin' else you wanter know jest ask for Sam +Balderston; all the folks will know me before I've been there very +long." + +"I'm going to work at the fair myself," Teddy replied, and then, in +response to his new friend's questions, he gave him all the particulars +of his proposed venture. + +"I reckon you'll get along all right, an' come out way ahead, if some of +these smart fakirs don't try to get the best of you. Say, why can't I go +to your house, an' stay till it's time to go over to the fair? I'll pay +my way." + +"If mother's willin', I'd like to have you, an' I don't believe she'll +care. Now, I've got to buy my stuff. Where'll I meet you afterward?" + +"I'm goin' with you," Sam said, in a matter-of-fact tone. "I know a good +deal about such things, an' won't see you cheated." + +Teddy hardly thought he was in need of any assistance; but since he did +not want to offend this fellow who was concerned in giving away a +steamboat, he could not well refuse, therefore the two started up the +street together. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +_AN OLD FAKIR._ + + +Sam had very much advice to give during the short walk, and while the +greater portion of it was worthless, there were bits which might be of +value to the young "fakir." + +"Don't buy anything till you have seen all there is in town, an' then +you'll know which is the cheapest," Sam repeated several times, with an +air of wisdom, and Teddy believed this to be a good idea. + +With this object in view the two boys walked from store to store, +examining that particular quality of canes and knives which Teddy +thought would be best suited to his purpose, and Sam had no hesitation +in criticising the goods boldly, until more than one of the clerks lost +his temper entirely and refused to show the full stock. + +"If you go on this way, Sam, we won't get the business done to day, an' +I want to send the stuff down in the stage, which leaves here at three +o'clock." + +"There'll be plenty of time for that; I know what I'm about. Now, if you +had sent your money to me, I'd got you a dandy lot in New York for +almost nothing." + +"Seein's how I didn't even know your name till a couple of hours ago, +there wasn't much chance for me to do that, an' I guess I'll make out +well enough here if you don't keep on raisin' a fuss with the clerks." + +"I won't so much as yip ag'in, if that's the way you look at it. The +question is, which store you're goin' to buy from?" + +"There's a place near the depot that wasn't open when we came past. +Let's go there, an' then I'll make up my mind." + +Sam, feeling a trifle injured because his advice had not been fully +appreciated, said nothing more until they were near the station, and +then, seeing a train approaching, he proposed that they stop for a few +minutes. + +"Jest as likely as not there'll be people on it whom I know goin' to the +fair, an' you want to get acquainted with all the fakirs, so's they'll +help you along now an' then." + +"The stage goes at three." + +"An' it ain't more'n ten now. Come on!" Sam cried, triumphantly, as he +motioned for Teddy to come nearer. + +Sam had already quickened his pace, and Teddy was forced to follow, or +injure the feelings of one whom he believed held a responsible position +in the Peach Bottom exhibition. Among the passengers alighting from the +train as the boys arrived was a man who carried a large package +enveloped in green cloth, and Sam whispered, excitedly: + +"I'll bet that's an old fakir, and if he is we want to let him know who +we are." + +Teddy failed to understand exactly why this was necessary; but his +companion seemed so positive on the point that he remained silent. + +This particular passenger appeared to have plenty of time at his +disposal. He placed his package at one end of the platform, lighted a +pipe, and then walked to and fro as the remainder of the travelers +dispersed. + +"You foller me, an' we'll find out who he is," Sam whispered, when he +thought a fitting opportunity had come, and then advanced boldly toward +the stranger. "Goin' to the fair?" he asked. + +"Yes; what of it?" + +"Nothin', only I s'pose you know you've got to take another train here." + +"If I didn't why would I be loafin' around this dead place?" + +"I jest spoke of it 'cause this feller an' I are goin' there, too," and +Sam waved his hand in the direction where Teddy was standing. + +"I s'pose there'll be other boys besides you at the fair, eh?" + +"But we belong to it. I'm to give a steamboat away, an' he's goin' to +run a cane an' knife board. We're waiting here to buy the stock." + +[Illustration: THE THREE NOTES WERE HANDED TO THE GENEROUS STRANGER.] + +"Oh, you are, eh?" and now the man appeared to be interested. "I reckon +you're goin' to spend as much as a dollar?" + +"One? Why, he's got fifteen, an' the whole of it will be spent before +the stage leaves. We know something about the business an' don't count +on gettin' an outfit for nothing." + +"I thought you was a fakir," the man said, in a more friendly tone, as, +unobserved by the worldly-wise Sam, he made a peculiar gesture to a +stranger immediately in the rear. + +"That's what I am," was the proud reply, "an' I'll make things hum over +at Peach Bottom before I leave the town. You see I thought I'd speak to +you, 'cause all of us fellers should know each other." + +"You're right, an' it's mighty lucky you did strike up an acquaintance, +for I can give you a big lift. I've helped many a boy into the business +when they had money enough to help themselves." + +The last dozen words were spoken in a loud tone, as if for the benefit +of the stranger in the rear; but instead of waiting to hear more the +latter turned abruptly and walked toward the package with a green +covering at the end of the platform. + +"I knew we oughter talk with you." + +"Did you count on buying your stuff in this one-horse town?" the man +asked as Teddy approached, and the latter replied: + +"There wasn't any other place I could go to, 'cause it costs too much +for a ticket to New York." + +"How big a stock do you want?" + +"All I can get for fifteen dollars. Don't you think that will be +enough?" + +"It depends," the stranger replied, reflectively. "If you buy the goods +here you'll have to pay such a big price that it won't be much of a +pile. Now, if--I've got the very thing in mind! You'll remember the day +you saw me if my plan works. I know a fakir here who has a fine layout +that he wants to sell. You can get fifty dollars' worth of stuff +for--well, he asks twenty; but I'll say you are friends of mine, an' the +chances are you can make a trade." + +"That would be a regular snap!" Sam cried, and Teddy's eyes glistened at +the thought of thus procuring a full outfit so cheaply. + +"I'll do what I can for you," the man said, in a patronizing tone. "At +any rate, I'll make him come down in his price, and if there's any +balance it can be paid after the fair has been opened long enough for +you to take in some money." + +"If business is good, I'm willing to do what is right," Teddy replied; +"but I must pay Uncle Nathan first." + +"How much do you owe him?" + +"Fifteen dollars." + +"Why, bless my soul, it'll be a pretty poor fair if you can't make five +times that amount in the first two days." + +"Where can we see the man?" Sam asked, eager that his wonderfully good +trade should be consummated at the earliest possible opportunity. + +"I don't know; but he's somewhere in the town. Give me your cash, an' +I'll hunt him up inside of half an hour. The stuff is right here in the +baggage-room, and you can ship it on the stage without any trouble." + +Just for an instant Teddy hesitated to part with what seemed to him like +an enormous amount of money; but then came the thought that an old fakir +would not wrong a young one--and he considered himself such. After some +little difficulty he succeeded in extracting all the pins, and the three +notes were handed to the generous stranger almost at the same moment +that the green-covered package disappeared from the edge of the platform +simultaneously with the departure of the second stranger. + +"Wait right here for me," the man said, as he put the money in his +pocket. "I've got too much work to do to spend any very great amount of +time hunting you fellows up in case you don't stay in one place." + +After thus cautioning them, the old fakir walked slowly away, and Sam +said: + +"It was lucky you fell in with me, Teddy, for I know how these things +are worked, an' can give you a good many pointers before the fair is +over. Why, you'll have a first-class outfit for about half what it's +worth." + +"Yes, it's a good chance; but I can't see why he didn't take us with him +if he was in a hurry, an' then he wouldn't have had to come back." + +"He's got to do that anyway, for his stuff is here," Sam replied, +pointing toward where he had last seen the man's package; but it was no +longer there. "I guess the baggage-master has taken it in," he added; +"but you needn't be afraid of losin' your money while I'm with you." + +Then Sam occupied his companion's attention by telling of his many +alleged wonderful exploits, and an hour passed before his story was +concluded. + +In the meantime one train had arrived and departed; another was on the +point of leaving the depot, bound for Peach Bottom, when Teddy cried as +he leaped to his feet: + +"See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money!" + +"Where?" + +"On the platform of the front car!" + +Before he could say anything more the train steamed out, leaving the +would-be young fakir staring at it in distress and consternation. + +"Of course it wasn't him," Sam said, confidently, when the last car +had disappeared from view. "The stuff he was goin'to buy for you is here +in the baggage-room, 'cause he said so, an' we'll see him before long." + +[Illustration: "See! I'm certain that's the man who has got my money."] + +Teddy's suspicions had been aroused, and he was not easily quieted. The +thought that it was possible he might have lost the money loaned him by +Uncle Nathan was sufficient to cause the liveliest fear, and he said, +decidedly: + +"I'm going to know where that man's baggage went to." + +"How'll you find out?" + +"Ask the baggage-master." + +"Don't make a fool of yourself. It would be nice for an old fakir like +that man to know you thought he'd steal your money." + +"I don't care what he knows, so long as I get my fifteen dollars back." + +Teddy, trembling with apprehension and excitement, went into the +baggage-room and asked there if a green-covered package had been taken +in by any of the attendants. + +No one had seen such an article, and all were positive there was nothing +of the kind remaining in their charge. + +Then he asked if a bundle of canes had been left there, and to this +question there was a most decided negative. + +"The hangers-on at the fairs haven't begun to come yet," the +baggage-master said, "and when they do come, we sha'n't have any of +their stuff to handle, for it will all be transferred across the +platform without being brought in here. What is the matter? Anything +gone wrong?" + +The lump which had been rising in Teddy's throat was now so large that +it was with difficulty he could say: + +"A man has run off with fifteen dollars of mine, an' Uncle Nathan will +jest about kill me!" + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +_A FRIEND._ + + +The baggage-master immediately displayed the utmost sympathy for the +victim of the old fakir's seductive scheme, and Sam was loud in his +denunciations of a brother in the craft who would serve them in such a +shabby manner. + +"You leave him to me, an' I'll show you what can be done," that young +gentleman said, and Teddy replied, reproachfully: + +"I've left too much to you already. If you hadn't thought it was +necessary to make the acquaintance of every fellow who was going to the +fair I'd have my fifteen dollars in my cap now." + +"I'll get them back for you." + +"How?" + +"I can't say jest now; but you wait an' see what I can do." + +Inasmuch as Teddy must account first to his mother and afterward to +Uncle Nathan for that amount, the confident assertion of his friend +failed to give him any mental relief, and he said, quite sharply: + +"You thought it was all right to give the money to him, an' if you +didn't know any more than a country boy who'd never even heard of such +fellows, I can't see how you can do much toward helping." + +At this point the baggage-master, who had been listening to the +conversation, broke in with the sage remark: + +"It's no use for you fellows to fight over what has been done. The money +is gone; there's no doubt about that; but it may be you can get it +back." + +"How?" Teddy asked, eagerly. + +"By notifying the police, and it is possible that they may find your man +long before the fair is ended." + +"But even if they should, how can I pay Uncle Nathan the eighteen +dollars he wants, after givin' Deacon Jones the ten which I promised?" + +"That, of course, is a question I cannot answer," the officer of the +company replied, not unkindly; "but it will certainly be better to get +some of the money back than to lose the whole." + +"Of course it will," Sam said, promptly, after waiting a few seconds +without hearing any reply from Teddy. "Tell us what to do, an' I'll see +to the whole thing." + +"Hello! What kind of a meeting are you holding here?" a cheery voice +cried, and, looking up, the disconsolate Teddy saw a merchant whose +stock he had been examining a short time previous. + +In a few words the baggage-master explained the condition of affairs. + +"Can nothing be done?" the merchant asked. + +"It is barely possible. The fact of the matter is that the two swindlers +left on the last train, and this boy's money has gone with them beyond a +doubt." + +Then the merchant turned to the would-be fakir and asked for further +particulars, which were readily given, the latter saying, as he finished +the sad story: + +"Uncle Nathan is bound to raise a big row, an' I won't be able to help +mother, as I counted on doing; but I s'pose it serves me right." + +"I'm not so sure of that, lad, for all of us are liable to be taken in +at some time or another. It is possible you may make money at the fair, +and I will give you credit to the amount you lost. Go to the store, show +this slip, and get what you think may be needed." + +While speaking the merchant had been writing on a piece of paper torn +from his memorandum book, and when he handed it to Teddy the almost +heartbroken boy read the following words: + + The bearer, Edward Hargreaves, is entitled to credit, thirty + days' time, on all he may need, to the extent of thirty + dollars. + + JOHN REAVES. + +"But I only lost fifteen dollars," Teddy said, as he read the order. + +"I so understood; but you may need more, therefore I have made the +amount sufficiently large. Don't hesitate to buy what is wanted, and +whether you ever find the swindler or not, I feel very positive my bill +will be paid." + +Teddy tried to thank the merchant, but that lump in his throat was still +too near his mouth to admit of many words, and Sam whispered: + +"Don't say anything more about it. You've struck the biggest kind of +luck, and the safest way is to hold your tongue." + +Even had it been possible to speak, Teddy could not have said all that +was in his heart, and before Sam had time to give any further advice the +merchant boarded a train which was just starting for New York, leaving +the young fakir and his newly-made friend to settle matters among +themselves. + +"You're in big luck," the latter said, consolingly. "What's the +difference if you have lost fifteen dollars so long as you know how to +get thirty dollars' worth of goods to start in business?" + +"But this bill will have to be paid, and Uncle Nathan must have his +money; that leaves me forty-five dollars in debt." + +"S'pose'n it does? You're bound to make a good deal more'n that, an' I'm +here to help you through." + +Teddy came very near saying that if Sam had not been there the fifteen +dollars would still be reposing beneath the lining of his cap; but he +succeeded in checking himself, and the reproachful words remained +unspoken. + +At this point in the conversation the baggage-master insisted that +information of the swindler should be given to the police, and, whether +they desired to do so or not, the boys were forced to accompany him to +headquarters. + +Here it is possible their story might have been told without exciting +more than ordinary interest if the name of the kindly-disposed merchant +had not been used; but that was sufficient to awaken a decided interest, +and every detail was written down carefully. + +"We will try to get the money for you," the chief said. "Several of my +men will be at the fair, and if you see this fellow again, information +must be given to them immediately." + +Teddy had but little hope that any good would result by this means, but +he promised faithfully to do as requested, and then the boys were at +liberty to finish the business which had been interrupted so +disastrously. + +So much time had been wasted that it was necessary to move around very +lively in order to have the goods ready before the stage should leave, +and Teddy did a great deal toward expediting matters by explaining to +the clerk at the store on which he had the order for credit exactly +what he proposed to do. + +The young man understood at once the kind of goods which would be +needed, and without listening to the many suggestions made by Sam +selected a good assortment of both knives and canes. + +"Ain't you getting more than thirty dollars' worth?" Teddy asked, as the +clerk continued to add to the pile. + +"I think not. These are all cheap goods, you know, and make a big show +without amounting to any very great value. I will put in cotton cloth +enough for the cane board, and as many rings as you will need unless +business should be very brisk." + +The clerk was bent on making the bill exactly the size of the order, and +when the prices had been figured out Teddy had invested just thirty +dollars in a stock which must bring in a profit of at least fifty per +cent. in order to admit of his paying the debts already contracted. + +The goods were to be put on the stage by the salesman, and there was +nothing further for the boys to do but decide on their manner of +traveling to the Run. + +"After losin' fifteen dollars, I reckon there's only one thing for me to +do," Teddy said, as they left the store. "I'm goin'to walk; but you can +do as you please." + +"S'pose'n we both ride? You're bound to make a pile of money before the +fair is over, an' can afford---- By jinks! There's that fakir now!" + +In an instant Sam was off at full speed, crying: "Stop thief!" with the +full strength of his lungs, as he pursued a man carrying a bundle +covered with green cloth. + +Such an appeal was well calculated to arouse every idler in the +immediate vicinity, and before Teddy fully understood what had happened +not less than twenty men and boys were in chase of the stranger, who, +strange to say, had not quickened his pace. + +The thought that it might yet be possible to regain his money lent +unusual speed to the would-be fakir's heels, and he was among the +foremost when the man suddenly halted, turned squarely around, and +asked: + +"What is the matter with you people? Do you want me?" + +"I guess we do," a policeman replied, as he seized the stranger by the +collar. "Somebody yelled for us to stop the thief, and you must be the +man." + +"Who says I am?" was the angry question. + +By this time both Teddy and Sam had discovered the latter's mistake. The +only point of resemblance between this stranger and the one who stole +the money was that both carried packages covered with green cloth; but +while the first bundle was bulky and apparently heavy, this was small +and readily held under the man's arm. + +Sam did not wait to explain matters. Fearing lest he might get into +serious trouble because of the mistake, he slipped quietly away, leaving +Teddy to bear the brunt of the accused's wrath. + +The latter realized that something must be done at once, for the greater +portion of the crowd was looking inquiringly at him, and he said, in a +voice which was far from steady: + +"I didn't do the hollerin'; but a feller who was with me when a man +stole my money thought you must be the one." + +"Where is he?" the stranger asked, advancing threateningly. + +"I don't know. He ran away when he saw it was a mistake." + +The crowd immediately began to disperse. The policeman called down quite +the reverse of blessings on Sam's head, and then walked away, leaving +Teddy and the stranger comparatively alone. + +"I don't know as it does any harm to have a lot of fools chasing a man," +the latter said, "but it might give him a bad name in his work." + +"I'm very sorry, sir, but you see----" + +"I'm not blaming you, my boy, since it was the other fellow who did the +mischief. Tell me how you lost your stuff." + +"My what?" + +"Your stuff--money." + +"Oh!" and Teddy at once gave the stranger a detailed account of all that +had happened, the latter saying, as the story was concluded: + +"I wouldn't be afraid to bet my head that Long Jim was the duck who +played the trick. I know he came here, headed for the fair grounds, and +it's jest about his style of working." + +"Do you think there's any chance I'll get it back?" + +"He shall give up if I see him. I'll be at the fair myself, working a +neat little game, and will see you there." + +With this remark the stranger walked away, and Teddy went toward the +depot once more, feeling quite certain he had made a friend who would +aid him in his new venture. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +_UNCLE NATHAN._ + + +When Teddy reached the depot he was not obliged to hunt very long for +Sam, for that young gentleman crept out from behind a pile of baggage on +seeing his friend was alone, and asked, in a hoarse whisper: + +"What did that feller do to you?" + +"Nothing; but that don't prove we should get out of another scrape so +easily, and you must be careful, or we'll be in no end of trouble before +the fair is ended." + +"I was only tryin' to catch your money." + +"It surely wouldn't have done any harm if you had found out whether that +was the man or not before you started the whole crowd after him." + +"That's right, rub it into a feller when he tries to do you a good +turn," Sam said, sarcastically, and then remembering an instant later +that he proposed to be this boy's guest, he added, "I was only lookin' +out for you, an' so long as there's been no harm done we needn't talk +about it. Do you still mean to walk home?" + +"There's nothing else to be done, if we want to get to the Run to-night, +for the stage left while we were chasing that man." + +This was exactly what he did not want to do; but, under the +circumstances, there was no help for it, and the young gentleman who +expected to form such a prominent portion of the fair set out by the +side of the friend whom he had injured while thinking to do him a favor. + +At the end of a trifle less than three hours, when both were footsore, +hungry, and weary, the boys arrived at Teddy's home, and Mrs. Hargreaves +made the stranger welcome despite the inconvenience caused by his +coming. + +Not until after Sam had retired did Teddy tell his mother of the theft, +and for several moments the widow was in great mental distress; but +finally she viewed the matter in a more cheerful light, and it was +resolved that Uncle Nathan should not be told of the mishap. + +"It would only make him angry," Mrs. Hargreaves said, "and you must pay +him before the merchant who was so kind to you gets his money; but I am +terribly afraid, Teddy, that the whole scheme will be a failure." + +The amateur fakir assured her as best he could, and when they retired +that night both Teddy and his mother were in a comparatively contented +frame of mind. + +The following day was Sunday, on which not even the all engrossing topic +of cane-boards and knives was to be discussed; but before the family had +finished breakfast the arrival of a stranger forced them into worldly +topics. + +The newcomer was none other than the man whom Sam had accused of being +the thief, and he explained the cause of his visit by saying: + +"I have reason to believe that Long Jim, the fakir who got away with +your son's money, will be over here to-night, because the hotels at +Peach Bottom are crowded, and it is possible he may be forced to give up +the stuff." Although not exactly understanding what he meant, the widow +insisted on his coming into the house, and he laid the details of his +plan before Teddy and Sam. + +"I'll hang around here for him," the stranger said, "and you shall say +if he is the man who did you up; after that I'll take a hand in the +business, and it'll be queer if between us all we can't make him do the +square thing, more especially since the rest of his gang haven't come +yet." + +As might be expected, Teddy was excited by the prospect of recovering +the money which he had believed was lost beyond reclaim, and plans were +at once laid to trap the dishonest fakir. + +While this conversation was being carried on Uncle Nathan came in to +learn how his nephew had succeeded in town, and the stranger introduced +himself as Frank Hazelton, a dealer in jewelry, which was to be on +exhibition during the coming week at the fair. + +The old man was delighted to make the stranger's acquaintance, for he +fancied there would be an opportunity for him to take the agency of a +valuable line of goods without the outlay of any money, and in a very +few moments the two were fast friends. + +Uncle Nathan not only monopolized nearly all the conversation, but +insisted on showing Mr. Hazelton around the village, and actually forced +the latter to accompany him, despite the fact that it was Sunday, when +an honest merchant is not supposed to so much as think of business. + +On the following day it would be necessary for those who had purchased +the privilege of doing business on the fair grounds to be present, ready +to select their different sites for working, and very shortly after the +sun sank behind the hills Sam and Teddy retired in order to be ready for +an early start next morning, since the first stage left the Run at +half-past five. + +It lacked fully an hour of that time when the boys were called to +breakfast by Mrs. Hargreaves, and in less than fifteen minutes they were +at the table eating a hearty breakfast, which was interrupted by the +appearance of Uncle Nathan, who looked as if he had not been in bed +since the evening previous. + +"I've been robbed!" he cried, passionately, "and this is what comes of +trying to help my nephew enter a disreputable line of business. I +believe you induced that man to come here, explaining all about my +store, simply that he might act the burglar. And it wouldn't take much +to make me think you had agreed to divide with him the ill-gotten +gains," he added, shaking his fist in the direction of Teddy, who was so +astounded by the news as to be literally incapable of movement. + +"What do you mean, Nathan?" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. + +"Just what I said! My store was robbed last night, and your precious son +knows the thief better than I do!" + +"You mean the man who came here yesterday?" the widow asked, while Teddy +and Sam gazed at the old man in open-mouthed astonishment. + +"Of course I do; who else could it be? Didn't I take him over there +yesterday, and didn't I explain just how difficult it was to deposit +money in a bank, because a man would have to pay a dollar to go to +Waterville an' back, or trust the stage driver to do the business?" + +By this time Teddy had recovered something like composure, and he said, +gravely: + +"We have no means of knowing what you said to Mr. Hazelton, but if you +told him all your business, that is no concern of ours. You insisted on +his going away with you, and we haven't seen him since." + +"But you lied to me about my money." + +"In what way?" + +"You never said a word about its being stolen." + +"If I never said a word I couldn't have told a lie. He has evidently +given the whole story; but what happened in Waterville has nothing to do +with the robbery of your store." + +"Oh, it hasn't, eh? Well, I'm beginning to think it was a job cooked up +by all hands to get the best of me." + +"If it had been," and now Teddy was on his feet, looking the angry old +man squarely in the face, "why wouldn't I have said something about it +in order to make the story seem straighter? A merchant in Waterville +trusted me for the goods I wanted after he heard the money was gone, and +I count on paying you before I do him." + +"Oh, you do, eh? Well, it's mighty doubtful whether you or this precious +friend of yours will ever see the fair, for I'm going to get out a +warrant for the whole lot before I'm done with this thing." + +"Would you arrest Teddy when he has been in this house ever since you +left here yesterday morning?" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. + +"I'll have my money back, and the sooner your smart son tells me where +it is, the sooner he can go about his business; but he must first pay me +back my eighteen dollars." + +"I only borrowed fifteen, Uncle Nathan, and that you will get before +next Wednesday. If you want to arrest me, go ahead; but I promise that +you'll be sorry for it." + +"So you threaten, do you? That's what comes of trying to help an +ungrateful boy! I knew he was going to the bad from the first minute he +talked about having a cane-board," the old man added, as he turned to +the widow, "and I predict that he'll come to no good even if he manages +to get out of this scrape." + +"You thought it was a good idea for me to do as I proposed," Teddy +replied, standing his ground bravely, "and was willing to loan me the +money, provided I would pay you three dollars for the use of fifteen for +one week." + +"That's right; throw in my teeth what I wanted to do in order to help +you along, and call me an old skinflint. I am old enough to expect such +things from such as you." + +"I haven't called you any names, nor do I intend to do so; I only wanted +mother to know the truth of the business between us. Do you really +believe I had any hand in breaking into your store?" + +"If you didn't your friends did, and that amounts to the same thing, as +you'll soon find out. I'll have a warrant issued for the arrest of the +whole crowd, if you don't tell me the truth this very minute." + +"But I don't know anything, Uncle Nathan." + +"I'll have the truth out of you before the day is ended," the old man +cried, angrily, and without saying or doing anything save to shake his +fist in the direction of his nephew and Sam he left the house. + +As yet none of the little party knew the full extent of what had +happened, but before Uncle Nathan was fairly out of the yard a neighbor +came around to tell Mrs. Hargreaves that the old man's store had been +entered by burglars on the night previous, and a large amount of money, +together with the most valuable goods, had been carried away. + +It is not difficult to imagine the consternation which seized upon the +little party after Uncle Nathan's departure. Teddy was so overwhelmed +that it was literally impossible for him to say a word, and Sam shook +like one in an ague fit at the thought that he might be carried off to +jail before it was possible for him to astonish the people by his skill +as an oarsman. + +"You must not think of leaving here until we know what your uncle +proposes to do," Mrs. Hargreaves said, as she returned to the +dining-room after talking with the neighbor. "Of course I know that +neither of you two boys had anything to do with the robbery; but you +must not run away." + +"I've got to leave, no matter what the old fool says," Sam replied. "I +don't know how the folks would get along if I didn't show up, an' it +won't do to disappoint them." + +"Are you going?" Teddy asked, and Sam replied in a voice which trembled +despite all his efforts to make it sound firm: + +"Of course I am. You don't allow I'm such an idiot as to stay till he +can have me arrested, an' if you're sensible, both of us will go." + +"I must stay here, an' lose all my chances of making money," Teddy said, +gloomily. + +"All right, then I'm off, an' after I once get on the fair grounds I'll +bet that old duffer won't get hold of me." + +Sam did not propose to lose any time. He had no baggage, and in a very +few moments after so deciding he was walking up the road over which the +stage would pass, while Teddy, with a heavier heart than he had ever +known before, waited for his uncle to send the officers of the law to +carry him to prison. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +_THE FAIR._ + + +It seemed to Teddy as if everything pleasant in life had departed from +him as he waited for the return of Uncle Nathan accompanied by the +officers of the law, and neither he nor his mother had any idea that the +visit would be long delayed. + +The widow had every proof, even if her heart had not told the truth, +that her son was innocent of the charge which the angry old man made. +She knew both he and Sam remained in the house during the entire day +previous to the robbery, and it would have been almost impossible for +them to have left during the night without her knowledge; but at the +same time it was only reasonable she should be distressed in mind as to +the final outcome of the matter. + +One, two, three hours passed, and yet no arrest had been made. + +Teddy no longer hoped to play the part of fakir at the fair; but yet he +fancied it might be possible to sell his stock, which had already been +forwarded by the stage, to some more fortunate fellow, and in order to +do this it was necessary he should be on the grounds at the earliest +possible hour; but the charge made by his uncle held him a voluntary +prisoner. + +At eight o'clock a neighbor, whose love of gossip was greater than her +desire for housework, came to the garden gate to say that she had just +heard the justice of the peace refuse to issue a warrant for either of +the boys, and she added to this information her belief that it, the +burglary, was a judgment upon Uncle Nathan for presuming to talk +business on the Sabbath. + +When this busybody had departed, Mrs. Hargreaves said, as she re-entered +the house: + +"There is no longer any reason, Teddy, why you shouldn't carry out your +plans. Every one in this village knows where to find you in case a +warrant is granted, which doesn't now seem possible, and it is better to +go ahead as you proposed, knowing that your mother is certain you are +innocent of any wrongdoing." + +Teddy's one desire had been to be on the fair grounds, and when this +advice was given from "a fellow's best friend," he started at once, +saying as he left the house: + +"I'll come back if there's nothing to do; but there's no reason to worry +if you don't see me until Saturday, for I shall stay jest as long as +things run smooth." + +Ten minutes later, while he was trudging along the dusty road with no +other idea than that he would be forced to walk the entire distance, a +friend in a wagon overtook him, proposed that he ride, and before the +fair grounds were reached he had heard all the particulars of the +robbery. + +It appeared that the burglars must have effected an entrance to Uncle +Nathan's store after midnight Saturday, and when the proprietor arrived +on the following morning there was absolutely no clue to the thieves. + +"They must have had a wagon to take away all the old man says he has +lost," Teddy's informant added, as the story was concluded, "and because +of that the justice refused to issue a warrant for the man who slept at +the hotel last night. Of course the idea that you knew anything about it +was all in that old fool's eye." + +"Then nobody has been arrested?" Teddy exclaimed, in surprise. + +"Of course not, an' more than one in town hopes he'll never see hide nor +hair of his goods or money; but between you an' me I don't believe he's +lost half as much as he tries to make out." + +To this last assertion Teddy gave but little heed; the all absorbing +thought in his mind was as to whether he would actually be arrested for +the crime, and this was sufficient to prevent any speculations as to +the amount of loss, or his former dreams of the future. + +Arriving at the fair grounds, he found everything in a state of +confusion. Goods were arriving and being put in place; men were +quarreling for this or that vantage ground, and carpenters were busy in +every direction. + +As a matter of course, he knew that all this would be changed on the +following day when the visitors began to arrive; but, nevertheless, it +gave him a homesick feeling which he could not suppress, and, for a +time, prevented him from attending to his own interests. + +"Hello! What are you sittin' there for?" a voice cried, after he had +remained inactive near the entrance nearly an hour, debating in his own +mind whether or not it would be worth the while to unpack the goods +which he knew were awaiting his call somewhere on the grounds. + +Looking up quickly he saw Sam, self-possessed and jaunty as at the first +moment he met him in Waterville, but wearing an air of considerably more +importance. + +"Have you gone to work yet?" he asked, listlessly. + +"Of course not; there's nothin' for me to do till the folks begin to +come in to see how well I can row a boat. What did the old duffer do?" + +"Do you mean Uncle Nathan?" + +"Of course." + +"He hasn't had anybody arrested yet; but there's no knowin' how soon +he'll begin." + +"He'd better not try it on me," Sam said, with an assumption of +boldness. "I've found a feller here that's goin' to show off rifles, an' +I can borrow as many as I want if he does any funny business." + +"Would you shoot anybody?" + +"You jest stay till an old lunatic comes along sayin' I've helped to rob +him when your mother knows where I was, an' see what I'll do," Sam +replied, in a really bloodthirsty tone as he turned to walk away, and +then, as if reconsidering the matter, he stopped long enough to say, +"Wait here a minute, an' I'll show you a feller what knows a thing or +two." + +Inasmuch as Teddy had no idea of moving from the position he had taken +up near the gate it was not irksome to do as the exhibitor of boats +requested, and without troubling his head as to who this very important +person might be, he remained at the precise spot until Sam returned with +a boy who appeared to be a year or two older than himself. + +"This is Dan Summers, an' he's here to help show off a dandy rifle made +in Chicopee Falls down in Massachusetts, or some such place. He'll help +us out of the scrape if anybody can." + +Dan looked as if this introduction was disagreeable to him rather than +otherwise, and after nodding to Teddy, he said, in an explanatory tone: + +"I'm here to help the man what exhibits goods from the Stevens Arms +Company, that's all; but I don't see how I could be of any help if you +fellers have got in a fuss." + +"Neither do I," Teddy replied, and then to show that no one could aid +him, he told the whole story, including all that Uncle Nathan had said. + +"I wouldn't let that worry me," Dan said, philosophically, when the tale +was ended. "If you want to make any money out of this fair it is time +you was lookin' out for a stand, an' I know of the best place on the +grounds. Come with me now, an' you can get it before the crowd of fakirs +have a chance to take it up." + +Teddy, rather liking the appearance of this boy, resolved to follow his +advice, and signified the same by slipping down from the stack of +exhibits, as he said: + +"Show it to me an' I'll get right to work, for there's forty-five +dollars I've got to pay back, no matter what Uncle Nathan makes up his +mind to do." + +"That's the way to talk," Sam cried, approvingly, and forthwith he +proceeded to take charge of his two acquaintances, resolved that lack of +energy should not prevent him from sharing in their triumphs, if indeed, +they had any. + +Dan professed to have had considerable experience with fairs, and the +manner in which he proceeded to work showed that there had been no +boasting on his part. He selected a spot where nearly all of the +visitors would be forced to pass in order to see the cattle or the +racing, and set about putting up a stand for Teddy in the most approved +manner. + +He ordered Sam here and there to such places as he had seen an +accumulation of lumber, and so well did he work, after borrowing an ax +and a hatchet from a "candy butcher," that it was not yet noon when +Teddy had an inclosure sufficiently large for his purpose; the cloth was +in place and the holes cut for the canes, so that it would be but the +work of a few moments to make everything ready when business should +begin. + +"You can't do the whole thing yourself if there is anything like the +crowd that ought to come," Dan said, "and I advise you to hire a clerk." + +"Where'll I find one?" Teddy asked, helplessly. + +"Take some of the fellers from your own village; but be sure they're +honest, for after business begins there won't be any chance to watch +'em." + +Teddy thought he could find the proper party before the following day, +and then came the question of where they were to sleep. + +"I've got that all fixed," Sam said, confidently. + +"The man what runs the museum in that big tent is a friend of mine, an' +he won't say a word if we stay under the canvas to-night." + +"How long have you known him?" Teddy asked, warned by previous +experience that Sam's statements were not always to be depended upon. + +"I never saw him till this morning; but that don't make no difference so +long as he's willin' for us to stay there." + +"We'll go over an' look around," Dan said, leading the way, and to the +surprise of at least one of the party it was found that Master Sam's +statement was absolutely correct. + +The proprietor of the museum was more than willing to allow the boys to +sleep under his canvas, for the very good reason that they would act as +sentinels in lieu of those he had neglected to hire, and all three went +away in search of a place where they could obtain meals during the +expected five days of excitement and money-making. + +This was even a more simple matter than the first. At a boarding-house +nearly opposite the main entrance to the grounds they could be +accommodated at a reasonable rate, and the preliminaries had been +settled. It only remained now to welcome the visitors, and get from them +as much money as possible. + +Teddy almost forgot the terrible fact that his Uncle Nathan might yet +have him arrested, and Sam acted as if such a thing had never been +possible. + +It is true all three of the boys discussed the possibility of finding +the money which had been stolen from Teddy; but neither thought of +connecting the two crimes as the work of one person. + +During the afternoon Teddy looked around in the hope of seeing the man, +unjustly accused of the theft, who had promised to aid him; but as yet +he had not put in an appearance, and it seemed as if all the choice +places would be taken before he arrived. + +It was anything rather than sport to wander around the almost deserted +grounds, and at an early hour, after partaking of a remarkably poor +supper, the three boys sought the seclusion granted by the mildewed +canvas of the alleged museum of the "world's wonders." + +A goat, a wax baby, two or three snakes, an alligator, and a +contortionist, who was none other than the proprietor of this +magnificent array of "marvels," made up the entire list of curiosities; +but the tent would shelter the young fakirs from the wind and dew, and +it was possible they might sleep as soundly as at home. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +_A CLUE._ + + +Sam and Dan, who had worked at many fairs and been forced to sleep in +far less desirable places, thought it was a rare piece of good fortune +to get such comfortable quarters free; but the prospect of lying on the +ground all night was far from pleasing to Teddy. + +He looked around for some spot softer than another; but there was no +choice, and he said to himself: + +"There's one satisfaction about it, I'm better off on the ground than I +would have been if Uncle Nathan had succeeded in having me arrested and +put in jail." + +This thought caused the interior of the tent to seem less disagreeable, +and he almost persuaded himself that it would be sport to stay all night +in a museum with a real contortionist as host. + +Dan had thrown himself at full length on the ground where he could watch +the proprietor of this "enormous exhibition" cook his supper on an +oil-stove, and Sam, anxious about other people's affairs as usual, +devoted his entire time to asking questions regarding the business. + +"How do you count on gettin' along when the crowds get here? You can't +sell tickets an' act too." + +"I've got a barker an' a clown coming to-morrow; it was no use to pay +'em wages for layin' around when there was nothing to be done but put up +the tent." + +"What's a 'barker?'" Sam asked, in surprise. + +"Why, the man who stands outside an' does the talking, of course." + +Then, his supper having been cooked and eaten, the host amused himself +and his guests by telling of his experience in the show business; +relating stories and talking of the different fakirs he had met. + +"When I started out," he said, "I made up my mind that a fortune could +be made in one season. I bought a fine tent; had lots of performers, +about twenty animals, and a dozen cases of stuffed birds and other +curiosities. We struck hard luck from the sendoff, an' first the woman +with an iron jaw gave me the shake because she got tired of waiting for +the salary that never came. Two of the bears grew so disgusted with the +bad business that they died, and one after another of the people +skipped, till I was pretty nigh alone. A sheriff in Harmer seized the +cases, another levied on my live stock, and it has only taken two +seasons to bring the show down to where you see it." + +This was not pleasing information for Teddy, who was obliged to make +such a large amount of money in order to free himself from debt, and he +asked: + +"Isn't it possible to make money at every fair? I thought the fakirs got +rich in a little while." + +"So did I before I went into the business. A fellow may make a big stake +this week and lose it all at the next stand. If you strike bad weather, +or a crowd that hasn't got any money, it's up-hill work to pull in the +entrance fee. Now, I have to pay a hundred dollars for this privilege, +because I've got a big tent, and it wouldn't be any more if I had a show +to compare with it in size. It'll take a good many ten-cent pieces to +make that up." + +This plain statement of facts caused Teddy to figure how many nickels he +must receive before the capital invested and stolen would be returned, +and the result was far from gratifying. + +"The eighteen dollars which must be given to Uncle Nathan, the thirty I +owe in Waterville, and ten I paid for the privilege of running the +boards makes eleven hundred and sixty five-cent pieces. I'll never see +so many customers as that, and Aunt Sarah was right when she called me a +fool for thinking of going into the business," he said to himself, as +his companions began to make their preparations for the night. + +It is useless to "cry over spilled milk," however, and this he realized +in time to prevent himself from being plunged into the lowest depths of +despondency. It was barely possible business would be exceptionally +good, he argued mentally, and if hard work could accomplish the desired +result he must be successful. + +Dan was already lying down with his head toward the side of the tent and +his feet near the oil-stove, which had been left burning because of the +dampness, and Teddy crawled over by the side of him. Sam had decided to +sleep by the side of his host, probably with the idea that he might +appear to be on terms of greater intimacy, and all hands gave themselves +up to slumber. + +The excitement of the morning and subsequent labor had so tried Teddy +that, despite the hardness of his bed, he fell asleep in a very few +moments, and it was not yet nine o'clock when all the inmates of the +tent, save the goat, and possibly the alligator and snakes, were wrapped +in blissful unconsciousness. + +Half an hour later a terrific yell from Sam caused the remainder of the +party to spring to their feet in alarm. + +"What's the matter?" Dan cried. + +"Somebody has got into the tent and been poundin' me with a club! I'm +pretty near killed." + +The faint glow cast by the oil-stove was not sufficient to illumine any +portion of the tent, and the host made all haste to light a lantern, +after which Dan proceeded to search for the supposed intruder; but +before he had taken a dozen steps the proprietor of the museum burst +into a hearty laugh. + +"Funny, ain't it?" Sam cried, angrily. "I s'pose you'd laugh if I'd been +killed in your old tent!" + +This savage remark appeared to excite the man's mirth rather than check +it, and while he was thus enjoying himself Teddy and Dan stood gazing at +him in surprise. + +It was several minutes before the man could speak, and then he said, as +he pointed to the goat who stood a short distance away calmly munching +some potato parings: + +"That's the fellow who has been beating your friend with a club. I +always let him loose at night, and he has walked over our dying boy." + +Sam insisted that he had been beaten with a club; but on examining his +clothing two spots of fresh earth were found, showing where the animal +had stepped. A hoof-print on the sleeve and another directly on the +breast of his coat comprised the full amount of damage done. + +The boy who had believed himself so dangerously wounded now grew angry, +and, leaping to his feet, declared he would not remain in the tent +another minute unless the goat was tied. + +"There's nothing to prevent your bunking somewhere else," the owner of +the animal replied, quite sharply. + +"Billy always has had the liberty of the tent at night, and I reckon he +won't lose it now." + +Sam started toward the entrance; but before reaching it he realized that +he would be punishing no one but himself, and slowly turned back, saying +as he approached the stove: + +"It's too late to hunt for lodgings now, an' I s'pose I'll have to make +the best of it." + +"I guess you will," the host replied, quietly, and the angry Sam lay +down on the seat of the baggage wagon, to insure himself against another +visit from "Billy." + +This incident had driven the desire for sleep from the eyelids of Teddy +and Dan, and they remained awake some time after the loud breathing of +their companions told that the visit from the goat had been temporarily +effaced from their minds. + +Now Teddy discovered what a hard, uncomfortable bed the bare earth was, +and after tossing about for half an hour, he whispered to Dan: + +"Do you suppose it would be any better in the wagon?" + +"No; you'll get used to it in a little while, and the ground is softer +than a board." + +Teddy was about to reply when the sound of voices from the outside +attracted his attention, and then came the crackle as of a match being +lighted. + +Two or more men had halted near the canvas within a few feet of where +the boys were lying, evidently that they might be sheltered from the +wind while getting their pipes or cigars in working order. + +A moment later both the listeners heard one of the newcomers say: + +"I don't think it will be safe for you to show up very much while we +stay here." + +"Why not? If them boys recognize me it will be an easy matter to +frighten 'em into holdin' their tongues, and there's goin' to be good +pickin's this week." + +"But what's the use of runnin' any risk? We've made a fairly good haul +already, an' it's better to get safe off with that than stick our noses +where it'll be hard work to pull them back." + +Teddy was in the highest possible excitement. In the tone of the second +speaker's voice he recognized the man who had stolen his money, and he +punched Dan with his elbow to assure himself that the latter was +listening. + +"Keep quiet," Dan whispered, and then the conversation on the outside +was continued. + +"I'll take good care to keep shady, an' you see what can be done +to-morrow." + +[Illustration: The boys crept through the flap of the tent and followed +the two men.] + +"Will you promise not to leave the house till after dark?" + +"I thought you had more nerve; but so long as you haven't I reckon I'll +promise, for this is bound to be a fat thing, and I don't want to lose +the whole of it. + +"When these country jays begin to send their stuff home I'll have ours +shipped, an' there's little danger it'll be overhauled, more especially +since the old man couldn't get a warrant for the only one he suspects. +It's a safe bet that Hazelton has a pretty good idea who did the job, +an' if they make trouble for him he'll most likely tell what he thinks." + +"There's no call to be afraid of him after he has worked a couple of +days, for those he ropes in would do all they could to have him +arrested." + +The last portion of this remark was almost indistinguishable, owing to +the fact that the men were walking away, and when the sound of their +footsteps could no longer be heard Teddy said: + +"Those are the men who robbed Uncle Nathan's store, an' I'm certain one +of them got my money." + +"Would you know their voices if you heard them again?" + +"Sure; but why don't we find out where they are going? It wouldn't be a +hard job." + +"Are you willin' to sneak after them?" + +"Of course I am. Come on!" + +The boys arose softly and crept through the flap of the tent without +awakening the sleepers. + +The night was dark and cloudy, and it was impossible to see any very +great distance in either direction; but Dan had taken especial heed to +the course taken by the men, and he started off without hesitation. + +"We ought to have a club or something to protect ourselves in case they +should see us," Teddy whispered. + +"We won't get near enough to let them do much mischief. Do you see two +sparks over there? They are the lighted ends of cigars, an' our men are +behind them." + +Dan quickened his pace; but he had failed to calculate the distance +correctly, and was much nearer the game than he had suspected. + +"Be careful they don't see us," he said, in a low tone, and in another +instant the boys were directly in front of the men. + +Teddy started back in alarm; but he was too late. In an instant the +sparks flashed before his eyes, and he fell to the ground unconscious +just as Dan succeeded in warding off the blow of a fist which was aimed +at him. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +_THE CLERK._ + + +When Teddy recovered from the vicious blow which had rendered him +unconscious he saw Dan lying on the ground beside him, but no one else +was near. + +It was as if they had been fighting with phantoms of the brain, save for +the fact that both bore the most indisputable signs of having been +assaulted by beings of true flesh and blood. + +One of Dan's eyes was closed as if by a violent blow, and Teddy bled +freely from the ear, the crimson fluid telling eloquently of the exact +location of that superior force which had caused so many stars to dance +before his mental vision. + +"We got through with that part of it mighty quick," Dan said, ruefully, +as he rose to his feet. "There wasn't anything slow about the way they +struck out after we made fools of ourselves by running into them, eh?" + +"I don't understand how it all happened. It wasn't more than three +seconds from the time I first saw them before there was a regular set +of fireworks dancing in front of my eyes." + +"It so happens that they saw us first," Dan replied, as he rubbed his +head. "Those men were the thieves, and what I said showed them that we +were on the scent." + +"Where are they now?" + +"You'll have to ask that question of someone else," Dan said, with a +grimace of pain. "The last thing I know was when the tall fellow landed +one square on my nose, and before I recovered both were out of sight. We +have done harm rather than good, for now they know we overheard the +conversation, an' we'll be mighty lucky if this is all we get before the +fair comes to an end." + +"Suppose we tell the police now?" + +"What can you say to them? We heard those men talking about something +which may have had nothing to do with the robbery, and want to have them +arrested. On what grounds will we ask for a warrant? Besides, if Nathan +Hargreaves was my uncle, I would let him fight his own battles." + +"But I owe him eighteen dollars." + +"What of that? He wouldn't take a penny off if you got your head broke +while trying to find his money, and after all that has happened I think +we have good reason to let him severely alone." + +"I'm willing to go back to the tent," Teddy said, as he began to feel +faint, and Dan aided him during the short walk, both staggering as they +came through the flap, meeting their host near the entrance, who asked, +sharply: + +"What has been going on? I counted on helping a party of boys, rather +than giving my tent up to a lot of roughs, as you appear to be." + +In the fewest possible words Dan explained what had happened, and in +addition told all the story of Teddy's losing his money, together with +the accusation made by Uncle Nathan. + +"I'm sorry I said a word," and the proprietor of the museum did really +appear to be grieved. "It makes no difference whether you got a whipping +or not, the guilty parties are here, and you can count on my help in +turning them up." + +"That's what I'm afraid we sha'n't be able to do," Teddy replied; "we +tried our best to-night, and got the worst of it." + +"There is plenty of time between now and Saturday. I'll do all any man +can, an' it'll be strange if we don't get some proof before the fair +closes." + +"How did you know we were out?" Dan asked. + +"I saw you go, and there was no reason why I should kick; but I began to +be afraid you were up to something crooked. Now I know the whole story, +I'll do my best to help you out of the scrape. Go to sleep, and we'll +talk the whole matter over in the morning." + +This was good advice, but not easily followed. Both the boys began to +feel the effects of the blows received from the thieves, and the pain +resulting therefrom was not conducive to repose. + +They did manage to close their eyes in slumber now and then, however, +and when the day broke Mr. Sweet, the proprietor of the museum, was +standing ready to minister to their necessities. + +"You haven't got exactly the right kind of faces to bring very big +business," he said, cheerily; "but I reckon we can make a change in the +general appearance. Use this plentifully as a bath, and before business +opens you'll be respectable members of society." + +It was certainly necessary for them to do something toward improving +their appearance. Teddy's ear was swollen to nearly twice its natural +size, and Dan had an eye which was rapidly blackening. + +Thanks to the application provided by the owner of the museum, these +evidences of a fight were rapidly reduced, and when Sam awoke they +looked little the worse for wear, although he readily discovered that +something serious had happened while he was wrapped in slumber. + +"What has been goin' on?" he asked, suspiciously. + +"Nothing much," Dan replied, with a forced laugh. "The goat walked over +us, and we're kinder used up, that's all. Are you ready to go to +breakfast?" + +It was evident that Sam did not believe this explanation, but since he +said nothing more about it, the two actors in the previous night's +adventures held their peace; therefore it would not be in his power to +betray any secrets. + +Breakfast was eaten at an early hour, and the young fakirs returned to +the grounds in time for Teddy to meet the first visitors. + +Under Dan's instructions he continued to cry out: + +"Here's where you can get a cane or a knife for nothing! Three rings for +five cents, and every time you throw it over the mark you get what you +ring! Three for five, and every cane or knife you ring is yours!" + +It was yet too early for the exhibits to be opened, therefore Teddy had +the assistance of his friends in reclaiming the rings thrown, and after +nearly four dollars had been taken in with a loss only of a ten cent +cane, the amateur fakir began to understand that it would be necessary +for him to have a clerk. + +"You're bound to do a good business this week," Dan said, at about eight +o'clock. "Sam and I must go now to attend to our own work, an' if you +see some fellow who can be trusted, I advise you to hire him, or +there'll be considerable trade lost, for when these people want to spend +their money they won't wait for you to hunt up assistants." + +"Yes, I reckon there's more'n a thousand who are jest aching to see how +I can row in one of them dandy boats," Master Sam added; "but if you get +into any kind of a scrape, an' don't know how to get out, come to me. +I'll see you through, no matter how good business is." + +These two friends and advisers had hardly left him when a particular +chum from the Run came up, and knowing he could be trusted, Teddy +immediately made a trade for his services. + +Tim Jones accepted the offer of ten cents on each dollar which might be +taken in, and straightway engaged himself as Teddy's clerk, promising +faithfully to account for every penny he should receive. + +"I know you are honest," the proprietor of the board said to his friend, +"and I want you to help me on the square, so I'm willing to give a fair +price, for I may have to be away a good deal of the time." + +"You mean that Nathan Hargreaves is goin' to have you arrested?" + +"Why do you say that?" + +"Because he's tellin' around town at the Run that you know who robbed +his store, an' says he'll have a warrant out, if he has to go to +Waterville for it." + +"That is where he's making a great big mistake, Tim; but if he should do +anything of the kind I expect you to do your best here," and Teddy spoke +very solemnly, for he really believed his uncle would succeed in having +him arrested. "I don't know positively who broke into his store; but Dan +an' I heard enough last night to make us believe we can find the thieves +if we have time to work it out." + +"I'd let him hustle to get the stuff, if it was my pudding," Tim replied +with emphasis, and then as a party of young fellows bent on spending +money approached the board he began to cry, as lustily as might have +been expected from any old fakir: + +"Here's where you get 'em, three rings for a nickel, and every cane or +knife you ring is yours; all for the small sum of five cents!" + +Convinced that he had a capable clerk, who was willing to work hard in +order to earn an additional percentage, Teddy contented himself with +making change for the rush of customers, which continued unabated until +nearly ten o'clock and then came a lull, when he was able to watch the +other fakirs around him. + +Up to this point business had continued in the most promising manner, +and if it held out as well there would be no difficulty in his paying +all the money he owed, even although there might be no very large +profit. + +"I only want to get out square," he said to himself, while nursing his +injured ear; but this experience led him to believe it was possible to +do very much toward helping his mother, and already had he begun to +dream of large returns, despite the fifteen dollars out of which he had +been swindled. + +It was just when his customers had gone to other parts of the ground, +and after Teddy had figured up the amount of money taken in, showing +that there was nearly eight dollars in the treasury with an offset only +of one twenty-cent knife and two ten-cent canes lost, that the young +fakir saw Hazelton standing some distance away beckoning to him. + +"Look out sharp for things, Tim," he cried, as he vaulted over the +railing and ran to the side of the man whom he believed to be a friend. + +"Did anything happen last night?" the latter asked. + +Teddy told him the whole story, keeping back not one incident. + +"I heard quite so much in the hotel where I board. It is Long Jim and +his partner who have done the job of which both you and I are accused. +As for your uncle, he isn't worth a minute's thought; but I'm going to +get to work, an' what he says may go against me, so you and I must turn +those fellows up if we can." + +"Ain't your business honest?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"Well, when we come right down to dots, I don't suppose it is. Watch me +when I leave here, and you'll have a chance to judge for yourself. I +may want to leave my satchel with you for a while, and I reckon you're +willing to take care of it?" + +"Of course I am. I'll do anything you ask." + +"Better wait and see the game first, but don't forget that we've got to +turn up the two men who whipped you and your friend last night, or stand +the chance of being hauled up for the robbery ourselves." + +"Did you say anything to Uncle Nathan to make him think you would break +into his store?" + +"No; I only played him for a jay, as you shall see me do with two or +three hundred of these smart fellows here, and he jumped down on me +because there was no one else on whom to fasten the crime. I've got to +go, now. Don't forget to hurry back to your cane-board when you see I'm +getting through with my first stand, for I want to leave my stuff with +somebody whom I can trust." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +_THE JEWELRY FAKIR._ + + +Teddy's curiosity regarding the kind of business which Hazelton proposed +to do was so great that, for the time being, he forgot his own venture +in watching this supposed friend. + +The jewelry fakir disappeared amid the crowd for a few moments, +reappearing in a carriage drawn by a fancifully decorated horse, and the +gaudy trappings caused the sightseers to stop, believing something +interesting or curious was to be seen. + +Hazelton introduced himself as an agent for a large manufacturing +company, and proposed to dispose of "samples" of their goods in a manner +which would be satisfactory to all. He began by throwing away great +numbers of cheap rings made to imitate gold, and as the boys scrambled +for them he complained that the older members of the throng--those +people whom he particularly wished should test the merits of his +wares--were getting nothing. + +"I can change that," he said, after hesitating a moment, as if to devise +some plan. Then holding up half a dozen pairs of cuff-buttons, he +continued: "I am allowed to give away only six of these. What gentleman +will advance twenty-five cents for one of these sets, knowing the money +will be returned to him? By that means I shall place the goods where +they will do the most good." + +In a short time the necessary number of purchasers was found, each +having paid a quarter of a dollar, and then, with great ostentation, the +fakir returned to every one the money he had given. + +A similar performance was gone through with in the case of ten seal +rings, and by that time the crowd were in a state of high excitement, +for they were getting supposedly valuable goods by simply loaning this +agent their money for a short time. + +The fakir then held up a lot of watch-chains, asking who would give him +a dollar for one, but in this instance he made no mention of returning +the money. + +Believing these also were to be given away, every man scrambled to pass +up his dollar before the supply should be exhausted, and fully two +hundred dollars was taken in by the generous "agent." Then, as the +demand ceased, Hazelton produced from his valise what appeared to be a +heavy gold watch. + +Wrapping it in paper, and attaching it to a chain, he cried: + +"Who wants to take another, and receive as a present what I have +fastened to the end of it; but on the condition that this paper shall +not be removed until I give permission?" + +A young fellow standing near Teddy made all possible haste to pass the +fakir a dollar and receive the prize. + +Then the remainder of the crowd clamored for more to be put up in the +same manner, and Hazelton disposed of at least a hundred before the +clamorous throng could be appeased. + +While this was being done Teddy saw the young fellow slyly remove the +paper and examine his goods. A look of anger and disappointment +overspread his face as a cheap, empty locket, fashioned on the outside +something like the case of a watch, was revealed to view. Twenty cents +would have been an extravagantly high price for what he had paid a +dollar; but it was possible the agent would return the money as he had +done in the previous cases, and the victimized fellow held his peace. + +Hazelton was now ready to take a hurried departure. No more dollars were +passed up, and quickly seizing the reins, he said: + +"I have not represented these goods to be gold; but they are a fine +imitation, and Mr. Nathan Hargreaves, of Peach Bottom Run, will probably +act as my agent for the sale of them. You can get what may be wanted +from him if you need any more." + +The last words were hardly spoken before he drove quickly through the +throng, leaving his dupes in a daze, from which they did not recover +until he was lost to view. + +Now Teddy understood what the "Give-Away" game was, and he also knew +that it was far from being honest, although Hazelton had really made no +promises which he did not fulfill. + +Some of the victims were angry, and vowed to flog "that feller within an +inch of his life" before sunset; others bore their loss philosophically, +and turned away with the remark that the fakir was "a cute one," while +the majority hastened off lest they should be suspected of being +victims. + +Teddy returned to his cane-board feeling sad because he had been so +mistaken in this particular man, and had hardly reached there when +Hazelton, on foot, came from the side of the fair grounds opposite where +he had disappeared, saying hurriedly, as he handed the boy a black +satchel somewhat resembling a sample case: + +"Look out for this! All my money is in it." + +Without waiting for an answer the man was gone, and the young fakir was +in no slight distress at being the custodian of so much wealth. + +After considerable discussion with Tim he decided to leave it behind the +cane-board where it would be screened from view, and then a crowd of +customers suddenly appearing, he was so busy during the next half hour +that he hardly had time to think of that which had been intrusted to his +keeping. + +Not until trade grew dull once more did Hazelton appear, looking +decidedly well pleased with himself, and, standing where the passers-by +could not hear, he asked: + +"Well, what do you think of the give-away game now?" + +"It looks to me like a swindle," Teddy replied, bluntly. "The things you +sold were not worth half what you got for them." + +"Six cents apiece for the chains, and five for the lockets is what I pay +by the quantity," the fakir said, with a laugh. + +"But you made the people think they were getting real watches." + +"I was mighty careful to say nothing of the kind. They thought they saw +a watch, and I told them I would make each purchaser a present of what +was on the chain. Their idea was to get the best of me, and in that I +didn't lose very much. It's a case of setting a thief to catch a thief, +and the smartest man comes out ahead." + +"But why did you leave all the money with me?" + +"Because it sometimes happens that my customers make a kick, and try to +get back their stuff by force, so I don't carry much cash in my pockets +while I am on the fair grounds." + +"Of course you are all through now. You can't expect to do the same +thing over again." + +"That's exactly what I shall do in about an hour, only in a different +portion of the inclosure, and you'll see that I can catch just as many +suckers as before." + +Then, in order to be rid of the satchel, for it seemed as if he was +really concerned in the swindle so long as it remained in his keeping, +Teddy said he wanted to see what Dan and Sam were doing. + +"Go ahead; I'll stay near by where I can keep an eye on the stuff, so +you needn't let that worry you." + +As a matter of fact, the boy was not eager to leave his place of +business; but having said so, it was necessary to go, or let Hazelton +understand exactly why the remark had been made. + +Cautioning Tim to "keep his eyes open for trade," he walked across the +grounds to the building where Dan was employed, and found that young +gentleman displaying the good qualities of a peculiar-looking weapon. + +"This is the Model Pocket Rifle," Dan was saying to a party of +gentlemen. "The shoulder-rest is detachable, and you can buy an +effective weapon for a trifle over fifteen dollars, as---- Hello, Teddy, +how's business?" he added, suddenly, on observing his friend, and the +two had an opportunity for conversation, while the curious ones were +examining the rifle. + +Teddy gave a brief account of what had already been done, and then +asked: + +"Can't you get off a few minutes and go with me to see what Sam is +doing?" + +It was not difficult for Dan to get a short leave of absence, and the +two went directly to the creek where their acquaintance, who proposed to +make himself the central figure of the fair, was rowing around in a +jaunty looking craft. + +Sam wore a sailor's shirt, turned away at the throat, and tied with a +black silk handkerchief, while on the breast of the garment was worked +the name "Davis Boat and Oar Co., Detroit, Mich." The same legend being +printed in gold on the band of his straw hat. + +Sam had evidently been expecting his friends, for he espied them before +they reached the shore, and, rowing to the bank, insisted they should +take a sail. + +"Come on, it's all right," he said. "It don't make any difference +whether I carry passengers or not so long as the boat is kept goin', an' +I want to show you somethin' fine in the way of rowin'." + +Neither of the boys cared very much about accepting the invitation; but +he was so persistent that they finally stepped on board as the easiest +manner of settling the matter. + +"I tell you what it is, fellers," he said, as he pulled out into the +stream, "I'm jest makin' things hum around here. These folks have never +seen any kind of style put into rowin', an' I'm knockin' their eyes +out." + +"Don't give it to them too strong, or they may want to keep you here as +an ornament after the fair closes, and then the rest of the world would +suffer," Dan said, with a laugh, and Sam replied: + +"You fellers can make fun; but what I say is straight," and then he made +preparations for giving an exhibition. "Watch me now, an' you'll learn a +thing or two about boats." + +During the next ten minutes he pulled as if in a race, first up and then +down the stream, until sheer lack of breath forced him to stop. + +"I hope you haven't set the keel on fire," Dan said, solicitously. +"There's no question but that you made good time, though I'm inclined to +think the build of the boat had considerable to do with the speed. This +one looks as if she would row herself." + +"That's all you know about it. If I hadn't been a first-class hand +at----" + +"See there!" Teddy cried, excitedly, as he pointed toward the shore. +"That's the man who got my fifteen dollars. Pull in, Sam, an' pull for +all you are worth!" + +The oarsman delayed only long enough to gaze in the direction indicated, +where he saw the old fakir whom they had met with such great loss at +Waterville, and then he bent himself to the task. + +"Do you believe it will be safe to tackle him after last night?" Dan +asked. + +"I'm going to, and if he don't get away from me I'll ask some of the +crowd to help me have him arrested," Teddy replied, grimly. + +The little craft was a considerable distance from the shore. Sam was so +excited that he only thought of landing in the shortest possible space +of time, and instead of keeping a lookout for other boats, rowed +vigorously, as if he were the only oarsman on the stream. + +Teddy and Dan sat motionless, with their eyes fixed on the man, and thus +it happened that no one on board saw a double ender, in which were three +ladies and two gentlemen, come around a bend in the creek directly in +Sam's course. + +There was a shout from the bank, three shrill screams of terror, and +then a crash as the two craft came together with terrific force. + +The occupants of both boats were thrown into the water as the frail +timbers were splintered, and the spectators on the bank acted as if +panic-stricken. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +_A BRAVE RESCUE._ + + +Sam was a fairly good swimmer, and as soon as he found himself in the +water he struck out for the shore, paying no attention to any one else +until he had assured his own safety. + +One of the gentlemen in the other craft did the same selfish thing, +while the other, unable to help even himself, was trying to keep his +head above water by resting his chin on an oar and piece of planking. + +The women were in imminent danger of being drowned, for there was no +other boat near at hand which could be sent to the rescue, and the +throng of spectators was in that unreasoning state of fear and +excitement which prevents people from being of any service at such a +time. + +When Teddy and Dan came to the surface after having been thrown from +their seats, they were within a few feet of each other, and the latter +asked: + +"Can you swim?" + +"Yes; don't pay any attention to me, but do what you can toward saving +those women." + +"Will you help me?" + +"Of course; but I can't take care of more than one." + +Both boats had disappeared, and nothing save a few fragments showed +where they had gone down. + +Teddy thought only of aiding the struggling women, for there was no +question that the man with the oar could take care of himself, at least +until those on the bank should be sufficiently composed to do something +effective, and he swam to the nearest struggling being, clasping her +firmly under one arm as he said: + +"Don't make a row; but keep perfectly quiet, an' I'll take you ashore." + +Half-unconscious as she was, the woman attempted to grasp him by the +neck, and for several seconds he had all he could do to prevent her from +choking him to death; but after two or three kicks judiciously +administered, he succeeded in making her understand that her life as +well as his own depended upon her remaining passive, and from that +moment all went well. + +The employees of the company which had the boats on exhibition flung +into the water several life-saving arrangements of cork and canvas, and +by dint of much persuading he induced her to trust to one of these while +he went to the assistance of Dan, who had been carried beneath the +surface more than once by the struggles of the woman whom he was trying +to save. + +By this time a boat was brought up from around the point, and as these +two helpless ones were taken on board both the boys swam to the rescue +of the last of the party who had sunk beneath the surface for the third +time. + +Teddy, now nearly exhausted by his efforts, was the first to grasp her; +but if it had not been for Dan the struggle would have been useless, +since his strength was so far spent that he could not have brought her +above the water unaided. + +By their united efforts, however, she was taken on board the boat in a +state of unconsciousness, and they made their way to the shore cheered +by the shouts of the assembled multitude. + +Weak, almost exhausted beyond the power to stand upright, they landed a +few seconds in advance of the craft, and the reception received was +enough to have nerved stronger men to a semblance of strength. + +It was not until they were in the private apartments allotted to the +Davis Company that either fully understood how weak he was, and then +willing hands aided them to recuperate. + +Hot flannels, warm drinks, and dry clothes were contributed by the +different exhibitors, until, as Teddy said, they looked like "circus +clowns;" but they were in fairly good bodily condition, and it appeared +as if the involuntary bath had done them no real injury. + +Outside the building the people were shouting themselves hoarse in +praise of the two boys who had saved three lives, and Sam stood bowing +acknowledgments as if he had been the chief actor in the thrilling +scene. + +The difference between the real and the pretended life-savers was +readily understood, however, when Dan and Teddy made their appearance, +looking decidedly the worse for their struggles, and the cheers which +went up would have been ample reward for the most praise-loving person +in the world. + +They looked like anything rather than reputable employees as they +appeared in the borrowed garments; but as Teddy said, they couldn't stay +in the building until their clothes were dried, and it was absolutely +necessary he should attend to his business. + +Dan's duties necessitated his remaining near the creek; but Teddy was +forced to go back to his cane-board, and the crowd which followed him +was good evidence of the money he would make. + +During two hours after he returned from this thrilling adventure the +cane-board had more customers than could conveniently be attended to, +and it is safe to say that he then handled a larger amount than he had +ever before seen. + +"At this rate it won't take long to square up things, and you shall have +a fair portion of the profits, Tim," he said, when there was an +opportunity for him to speak with his clerk without being overheard by +the customers. + +"It's a lucky thing for us that them boats were smashed," Tim said, +devoutly, as he handed his employer half a dollar to change. "We might +have stood here with our tongues hangin' out all day an' never seen a +quarter of this money if you hadn't known how to swim." + +"You are right to a certain extent; but I can't take all the credit of +this spurt, because more than half the people are trying to get a cane +for nothing." + +"In the same way they thought to swindle Mr. Hazelton out of a watch," Tim +replied, with a smile; "but we won't fight about what brings trade so +long as it comes with the cash." + +Up to this time Teddy had no very definite idea of how much money had +been taken in, and he was thinking it would be a good idea to ascertain, +when a gruff, familiar voice from the rear asked: + +"Are the wages of sin as much as they should be?" + +Turning quickly he saw Uncle Nathan, and replied: + +"I don't know exactly what they should be; but, perhaps, you do." + +"Whatever I may know now, I remember that it was not allowed I should +insult my elders either by plainly spoken words or insinuations," the +old man said, sternly. + +"Neither would I have done such a thing if you had not given me the +provocation; but when I promised to pay three dollars for the use of +fifteen one week, you did not seem to think that amount would be the +wages of sin." + +"At the time I had no idea you would conspire with others to rob me of +my hard-earned savings." + +"You know very well, Uncle Nathan, that I haven't done any such thing. +On the night your store was robbed I staid in the house, and hadn't left +it when you came to tell us the news." + +"Every person of your class has some such excuse ready in case of an +emergency; but that kind of talk will not do with me. If you meant to do +the square thing, why was I not told you lost the money I lent you?" + +"Because I knew you would raise an awful row, thinking possibly it would +not be paid back." + +"Have I yet any assurance that it will be?" the old man asked, in a +fury. + +"Do you need it now?" + +"I always need my own." + +"And in this case, if I pay you at once, do you think it right to charge +me three dollars for the use of fifteen lent two days ago?" + +"That was what you promised, and the world gauges a man by the way he +keeps his word." + +"I owe the storekeeper in Waterville thirty dollars; but I told him you +must be paid first, and so you shall." + +"Then give me the money now," Uncle Nathan snarled. + +"That is exactly what I am willing to do," Teddy replied, calmly; "but +if you can't trust me I have reason to be suspicious of you, so give me +a receipt for the amount, and the matter can be settled." + +The old man literally glared at his nephew for an instant, and then, +eager to have the cash in his possession, he wrote a receipt, handing it +to the young fakir, as he said, angrily: + +"Now, let me see if you can settle the bill." + +Since the mishap on the creek, where Teddy had covered himself with +glory, business had been so good that he had more than twice that +amount, and, emptying the contents of his money bag on a board, he +proceeded to select the required sum. + +Uncle Nathan watched him jealously, his eyes twinkling enviously, and +when the money was placed in his hand he counted it twice over before +delivering up the written acknowledgment. + +"Are you certain all this has been honestly earned, Teddy?" he asked, +gravely. + +"How else could I have got it?" + +"There are many ways. While I would not be willing to take my oath to +it, several of these ten-cent pieces look very much like those I lost +night before last." + +"Do you mean to say I had anything to do with robbing your store?" and +now that this particular debt had been canceled Teddy felt very brave. + +"I know that such an amount of money has not been earned honestly, and, +what is more, my eyes have been opened to the character of your +friends." + +"If you mean Mr. Hazelton, he is as much your friend as mine, for you +were with him all day Sunday." + +"That is exactly who I do mean," Uncle Nathan replied, with provoking +deliberation. "I have seen his method of doing business since I came +into this fair, and know he is nothing more than a deliberate swindler." + +"But one with whom you were perfectly willing to go into partnership," a +voice in the rear of Teddy cried sharply, and the jewelry fakir stepped +directly in front of Uncle Nathan. "I told you exactly how I worked, and +you offered to put up even money with me, growing angry when I said you +would be of no use in the business. If it is swindling, you were mighty +eager to have a hand in the same business." + +"I don't want to talk with you," Uncle Nathan said, as he put Teddy's +eighteen dollars carefully in his pocket. + +"Then why do you come around here trying to bully this boy? He had no +idea of what I was going to do until he saw me work, while you +understood the whole plan. Make any trouble for him, and I will get up +here and tell every person who comes along that you wanted to be my +partner." + +"Do it," the old man said, angrily. "After having cheated so many people +out of their money, who will believe a word you say?" + +At the same time, however, Uncle Nathan took good care to leave this +particular spot, and Hazelton stepped to the rear of the board where he +could talk privately with Teddy. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +_AN ENCOUNTER._ + + +First of all, the jewelry fakir wanted to hear the particulars of the +accident on the lake, and Teddy began by telling him the primary cause +of the trouble. + +"I reckon all three of us lost our heads when we saw that man; I know I +did and we were so eager to get on shore that we paid no attention to +anything else. Have you seen him?" + +"Who? Long Jim? No; but the boys say he is here somewhere running the +swinging ball game." + +"What is that?" + +"A wooden ball is swung on two short uprights about eight inches apart, +and between them, in the center, stands a small peg. You pay ten cents +for the privilege of swinging the ball, and if it hits the peg when it +comes back after leaving your hand, you get a dollar." + +"I should think that would be easy enough to do." + +"Well, don't try it with such an idea or you'll go broke mighty quick. +It looks simple; but it isn't accomplished very often." + +"Have you done anything since I left here?" + +"Yes, and scooped in as much as I had any right to expect. I don't want +to spoil to-morrow's business, so sha'n't make another pitch, but will +spend my time trying to find Jim." + +"What good can that do?" + +"I still count on making him give back your fifteen dollars, if nothing +more. I reckon your Uncle Nathan won't try again to get a warrant out +for us, and so I sha'n't bother my head about learning anything +regarding the robbery." + +"He'll make things just as disagreeable as he can; there's no question +about that." + +"Well, let him, and we'll see who comes out ahead. Trade is beginning to +pick up, and you'd better attend to your customers." + +Hazelton walked away, and from that moment until nearly nightfall Teddy +had all the business both he and his clerk could attend to. + +Nearly every one had something to say about the accident on the creek, +and the young fakir was forced to tell the story over and over again, +until he really got tired of repeating the details. + +When nearly all of the visitors had left the grounds Teddy made up his +cash account, and the sum total surprised both himself and Tim. + +Including the amount paid Uncle Nathan he had taken in fifty-five +dollars and twenty cents. Ten per cent. of this was paid to the clerk, +and he found himself possessed of the magnificent sum of thirty-one +dollars and seventy cents. + +"At this rate we shall be rich before the end of the week," he said, in +a tone of satisfaction. + +"That's a fact; but it don't seem right for me to take so much," Tim +replied, as he wrapped the five dollars and a half which had been given +him in his handkerchief. + +"That was the agreement, an' we'll stick to it." + +"But when you promised ten cents on every dollar neither of us believed +trade would be half so good." + +"You're right; I thought if we got one-third as much business would be +booming; but that has nothing to do with our bargain. You've hung right +on here, without even stopping for anything to eat, an' are entitled to +what you've been paid. Everybody says there'll be a bigger crowd +to-morrow, an' so we stand a chance to make considerable more. Are you +going home to-night, or do you count on staying here?" + +"I've got to let the folks know where I am, for when I left it was +allowed I'd be back by sunset. To-morrow I'll come prepared to stay the +rest of the week." + +"There'll be plenty of stages running, an' you can afford to ride both +ways after this day's work. I want to send some of this money home to +mother, for it ain't safe to carry so much around with me." + +"Am I to take it?" + +"Yes, an' you can tell her all that has happened. Ask her to come over +Thursday, an' see for herself that we're getting rich." + +Twenty-five dollars was tied in a bundle with many wrappings of paper, +and Tim started off, looking almost afraid at being the custodian of so +much wealth. + +It was necessary Teddy should pack up his entire stock until next +morning, and this he proceeded to do as soon as he was alone. Mr. Sweet +had given him permission to bring his goods into the museum tent, and +his only trouble was how everything could be carried without assistance. +Before he was ready for departure, however, Sam came up, and the +question of transportation was settled. + +"Well, how do you feel now?" Teddy asked, cheerily, for the knowledge +that he had already taken in nearly enough to pay his debts caused him +to feel very jolly. + +"I allers get the worst of everything," Sam replied, disconsolately. +"You an' Dan made a big strike when you tumbled into the water, an' I've +had a blowin' up; come mighty near losin' my job into the bargain." + +"Why?" + +"'Cause the boss says that I was careless an' reckless, an' that I +couldn't earn enough in a month to pay for the two boats I've smashed." + +"Are they lost entirely?" + +"No, of course not. We pulled 'em out a little while ago, an' it cost so +very much to fix both. The folks in the other boat were as much to blame +as me." + +"They certainly were not keeping any better lookout, and, as a matter of +fact, I suppose I'm more at fault than any one else, for if I hadn't +sung out about the fakir it wouldn't have happened." + +"That's what I told the boss; but he's chuck full of foolish talk about +the bravery he says you an' Dan showed, an' is tryin' to get up what he +calls a testimonial for you." + +"A what?" Teddy cried, in surprise. + +"I heard him say testimonial; but if you know what that means you can go +to the head." + +"I don't, and I hope it won't amount to anything. I've been paid enough +for what was done by the boom it gave my business." + +"Of course, you an' Dan are bound to have the best end of it." + +"Why didn't you stop an' do the same thing?" + +"'Cause I had sense enough to look out for myself first." + +"But you know how to swim." + +"What of that? It's mighty risky catchin' hold of people in the water, +an' I don't mean to take any chances. How much have you made to-day?" + +When Teddy told him, the expert in rowing looked decidedly envious. + +"You've got all that money in one day?" + +"Yes; but I sent the most of it home to mother." + +"It's funny what luck some folks have, when them as knows the business +twice as well don't much more'n earn their salt," Sam said, as if to +himself, and before he could continue Dan arrived. + +He wore his own clothes, and carried those Teddy had left in the +boat-house. + +"These were dry, so I brought 'em up. You needn't carry back the ones +you borrowed till to-morrow, so Sam's boss says." + +Then Dan asked concerning business, and by the time all three had +finished discussing this very important matter the knives and canes were +packed ready for removal. + +Each boy took a load, carried it to the tent where Mr. Sweet was +figuring up his receipts for the day, and then went to supper, returning +half an hour later so tired that there was no desire on the part of +either to do anything other than sleep. + +The proprietor of the museum was in very good spirits. He had taken in +one hundred and six dollars and eighty cents, and said, in a tone of +satisfaction: + +"I reckon this fair will pan out all right. Trade is bound to be better +to-morrow, and Thursday is always the biggest of the week. I hear you +boys have been distinguishing yourselves. Tell me about it." + +Dan related the incident of the day very modestly, interrupted now and +then by Sam, who was eager to pose as a hero also, and Mr. Sweet +expressed himself as being well satisfied with their behavior. + +"Chasing a thief and getting a whipping in the night, and then saving +the lives of three people the next day is record enough for one week, so +you'd better not try for any more adventures," he said, with a laugh. + +Now that the incident of the previous night had been spoken of so +openly, it was necessary Sam's curiosity should be satisfied, and Dan +was forced to tell the story. + +While he was doing so, and listening to the oarsman's comments, Teddy +had an opportunity to see the "barker" and clown who arrived that +morning. Neither was a very prepossessing-looking man. They were lying +on the ground some distance from the boys, as if bent on minding their +own business, and there was no real reason for an unfavorable opinion +concerning them. + +But little time was spent in conversation on this evening. Every one was +thoroughly tired, and each sought for a soft spot on which to pass the +night. + +As before, Sam crawled up on the wagon to be out of harm's way when the +goat should be unfastened, while Dan and Teddy lay down in very nearly +the same place as before. + +"I don't fancy we shall hear many secrets between now and morning, no +matter how many men come around here to talk," the former said, +laughingly. "It won't take me two minutes to fall asleep, and the noise +that can awaken me then will have to be very great." + +Teddy's only reply was a yawn, and in even less time than Dan had +mentioned he was wrapped in slumber. + +Shortly after the proprietor of the exhibition began to make his +preparations for retiring, and the clown asked: + +"How did that row start this afternoon?" + +"Half a dozen of the village toughs tried to get in without paying, and +I had to polish one of 'em off," the barker replied. + +"You must have done it pretty quick, for when I got out there the thing +was over," Mr. Sweet said. + +"The fellow was more than half-drunk, an' it wasn't a very big job. They +threaten to come back and clean the whole show out." + +"Yes, I've heard such threats made before; but never lost much sleep +worrying about it." + +Ten minutes later all the human occupants of the tent were enjoying a +well-earned rest, and the goat had about concluded it would be a +profitless job to prospect for anything more to eat, when the sound of +footsteps could have been heard from the outside. + +Had Mr. Sweet been awake he would have decided that these late visitors +were trying to find the flap of the tent, for they walked cautiously +around the canvas twice, and then a sharp knife was thrust through the +fabric. + +An instant later Sam awoke his companion with a yell that would have +done credit to any Indian. + +Some one had given him such a blow as sent him from the seat to the +ground, and the remainder of the party leaped to their feet only to be +confronted by a large party of half-drunken toughs who had come to +avenge the insult received during the afternoon. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +_LONG JIM_. + + +Teddy's first thought when he was awakened by Sam's yells was that the +officers of the law were coming to arrest him for the robbery committed +at Uncle Nathan's store; but in a very few seconds he understood that +this was not the case. + +He and Dan had been sleeping some distance from the remainder of the +company; therefore, when the hand-to-hand struggle began they were out +of it entirely, and owing to the darkness could not be seen by the +assailants; but Sam's cries served to show the mob where he was, and one +after another pounded him when they failed to find any of the other +occupants. + +While one might have counted twenty Teddy and Dan stood motionless, +undecided as to what should be done, while the din caused by the +combatants and the screaming boy were almost deafening, and then the +latter said: + +"We've got to take a hand in this row, Teddy. Mr. Sweet has given us the +chance to sleep here, and the least we can do is to help as much as +possible, for it appears to me that his men are getting the worst of +it." + +A broken tent-peg was lying on the ground near at hand, and Dan added, +as he seized it: + +"Try to light one of the lanterns so we can see which is an enemy, and +then sail in." + +It seemed to Teddy as if he would never be able to follow these +instructions. He had plenty of matches; but in his excitement one after +another was extinguished until he fancied half an hour must have elapsed +before the wick was ignited. + +The faint glow of light served to show one of the intruders Teddy's +form, and the latter had but just succeeded in hanging the lantern on +the center-pole when it became necessary to defend himself. + +The drunken bully made a lunge at him, which he managed to avoid by +jumping aside, and in another instant he had seized the man by the +waist, doing his best to throw him. + +From this moment Teddy knew nothing more of the row than that portion in +which he was immediately concerned. He was able to prevent the man from +striking by hugging close to his body, and the two swayed here and there +in the effort to gain the mastery. Now and then they came in contact +with the other combatants, one or both receiving a chance blow, but no +especial injury was done to either. + +Had the man been sober, Teddy must have been overcome in a very short +time; but as he was far from being steady on his feet the odds were +about even, and the boy succeeded in holding his own until the others +had retreated or been so disabled that it was no longer possible for +them to continue the assault. + +Fully thirty minutes had elapsed from the time Sam first sounded the +alarm before the occupants of the tent could count themselves as +victors, and then Mr. Sweet and the clown pulled Teddy's adversary away, +throwing him bodily out of the tent after administering summary +punishment. + +During all this time the other exhibitors who intended to sleep on the +grounds had been gathering around the canvas, but no one cared to risk +his precious body by entering until it was certain the battle had been +ended. + +Then the tent was filled with sympathizing friends, who endeavored to +ascertain the amount of injury done, but were interrupted in the work by +the proprietor, who cried, angrily: + +"Clear out of here, every mother's son! You didn't dare to come in when +it would have been possible to help us, and there's no need of you now. +We were attacked by a crowd of men from the town, who proposed to clean +the show out because we wouldn't let them in free, and that's all there +is to it." + +Not until the last visitor had unwillingly departed did the little +party pay any attention to their wounds, and then the result of the +engagement was ascertained. + +The barker had a broken nose, but it would not prevent him from doing a +full share of talking on the following day. The clown's eye looked +rather bad, and Mr. Sweet's cheek had been cut, but these were only +trifling mishaps. Teddy had come out of the affray comparatively +uninjured; Dan showed nothing worse than a bruise under the left ear, +and while Sam appeared to be unscathed, he declared that he had been +pounded until every inch of his body felt like jelly. + +"You squealed fairly well for a fellow who was so badly done up," Mr. +Sweet said, with a laugh, as he proceeded to dress the barker's wounded +nose, "and I reckon you'll be all right by morning. Light some of the +other lanterns so I can see what I'm about, and during the remainder of +the night we'll stand guard, for no one can say how soon those +scoundrels may attempt to pay us a second visit, although I think they +had a full dose this time." + +How the assailants had fared no one was able to form a very good +opinion. The general belief among the occupants of the tent, however, +was that they had received such severe punishment that there would be no +further attack on this night, at least. + +When the wounds had been dressed, Mr. Sweet said, as he took up a +position near the flap: + +"You fellows had better try to go to sleep now. I'll keep awake for a +while, and then call some one to relieve me. Dan, can't you borrow one +of those queer-looking rifles you are exhibiting, and bring it with you +to-morrow night?" + +"I might get the one I use for shooting at a target; but you wouldn't +think of trying to kill a man, would you, Mr. Sweet?" + +"I could do a good deal toward scaring them, and if a crowd insisted on +forcing an entrance, I'd take mighty good care that one would carry away +a bullet to remember me by." + +"I'll bring the rifle," Dan replied, and Teddy whispered: + +"When I came here to run a cane-board I didn't count on being obliged to +do any fighting." + +"I don't reckon there'll be much more here. The managers of the fair +will see to it that those fellows are put where they can't do any +additional mischief, for the exhibitors must be protected, and we shall +be safe enough, except something else comes up to make a row." + +Then the sore, tired party lay down in search of slumber once more, and, +strange as it may seem after the exciting events, all save the sentinel +were soon wrapped again in slumber. + +Each in turn was aroused to do his share of guard duty before morning +came; but no enemy appeared, and at sunrise the three boys went across +the grounds to the boarding-house, where, as Dan said: "The price was +twice as big as the breakfast." + +Teddy had his place of business ready for the reception of customers +before the first stage-load of visitors arrived, and when Tim came he +had already taken in nearly a dollar. + +"What's the news?" he asked, as the clerk appeared, looking radiant and +happy at the thought of earning as much money as on the previous day. + +"Your mother was pretty nigh wild when I told her what we took in +yesterday, an' says she'll be here sure on Thursday. There's no more +news of your Uncle Nathan's goods, an' he's still tryin' to have you +arrested; but your mother says not to be afraid, 'cause she has talked +with a lawyer, an' don't think there'll be any trouble. I told the folks +at home that the old skinflint made you pay three dollars interest on +the money what was stole, an' everybody in town will know it before +night." + +Tim was forced to stop his story to wait upon a party of young gentlemen +who were eager to get dollar canes for five cents, and the booths +adjoining Teddy's place of business had not yet been opened when he +announced that there were four dollars in the money box. + +"We're bound to have a big day," Tim said, confidently. "The band from +the Run is comin' over this mornin', an' if the city people hear about +it you bet they'll jest crowd in to hear the music. There'll be [----] +of the boys to see you, but take my advice an' don't let 'em have any +rings on credit, for I wouldn't trust the best of the whole lot at fair +time. I'm goin' to stay till Friday; do you s'pose that man will let me +sleep in his tent with you fellers?" + +Teddy promised to inquire, and then advised Tim to have a look at the +grounds before business began to be rushing, and the clerk was glad to +take advantage of the proposition. + +He started off with the air of one who owned the entire inclosure, and +was hardly lost to view amid the fast-gathering throng when Teddy was +literally dazed by seeing Long Jim, the very man who had robbed him in +Waterville, lounging along toward his stand. + +Not until the fakir stood directly in front of the boy did he appear to +recognize him, and then he would have turned quickly away but for the +latter's cry: + +"Somebody hold that man till I get a constable! He stole my money." + +Realizing that a flight across the grounds with hundreds of men and boys +crying "Stop thief!" in full pursuit would be disastrous, Long Jim +turned to face his young accuser. + +"What do you mean by saying such a thing?" he asked, angrily. "If you +wasn't so small I'd make you eat the words." + +"I was big enough for you to steal from, and I want my money." + +It was only natural that a crowd should gather after such an accusation, +and Long Jim looked around for some means of escape, but, realizing that +he could not well get away while so many were near, he stepped close to +Teddy, as he whispered: + +"If you say another word I'll smash your face, you young whelp! Hold +your tongue if you want to leave here alive." + +"I'll say exactly what's true. Give me my money, or I'll find some one +to have you arrested!" + +"The boy is a liar, and, what is more, has just robbed his uncle's +store, if what they say over at the Run be true," the fakir said, +excitedly, as he turned to face the crowd. "I don't want to hurt him; +but I won't be insulted by a thief, so the best thing for me to do is to +leave." + +Saying this, he walked deliberately away, and the curious ones, who a +moment previous had been friendly to Teddy, began to sympathize with the +man. + +"Don't let him off!" the boy cried, starting to follow, and then +remembering that he would be forced to leave his wares at the mercy of +the crowd, turned back, while Long Jim continued straight across the +grounds unmolested. + +"It looks like it was a case of the pot calling the kettle black," an +old farmer said, and his immediate circle of friends laughed heartily, +while the younger portion of the crowd gazed earnestly at Teddy, +believing they saw before them a fullfledged burglar. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +_A DISCOVERY._ + + +With feelings of mingled anger, vexation and disappointment, Teddy stood +silent and motionless for several moments after Long Jim disappeared, +striving to keep the tears from his eyes. + +It seemed hard enough to be swindled out of fifteen dollars, but to be +held up as a thief by the very man who had done him the wrong, and to be +stared at as a criminal by the curious, was an aggravation of +misfortune. + +Just for one instant he made up his mind to tell the whole story to the +bystanders, but before there was time for him to speak he realized that +many of them would think he was trying to shield himself by an untruth +against just accusations, therefore he remained quiet, not making the +slightest effort to influence trade. + +Fortunately he was soon aroused from this very disagreeable frame of +mind by a very pleasing incident. + +The band from the Run arrived, and to the young fakir's surprise marched +directly to his booth, the leader saying, in a tone sufficiently loud to +be heard by every one in the immediate vicinity as the musicians halted +about ten feet away: + +"We have been hired to play on the grounds to-day, Teddy, and left home +half an hour earlier than the specified time for the sole purpose of +giving you a serenade to show that, whatever your uncle may say, the +folks at the Run are positive there isn't a shadow of truth in his +ridiculous story. We know what you are working for, and intend to help +you along as much as possible." + +Then the musicians began to play, while, as a matter of course, every +one who came up wanted to know why the band was there instead of on the +stand built for its especial accommodation, and there were people enough +who had heard the leader's remarks to explain matters to the newcomers. + +The immediate result was that instead of believing him to be a burglar, +the same ones who fancied a few moments previous that he looked guilty, +were now quite positive he was a victim. + +Tim arrived while the serenade was in progress, and when Teddy explained +the situation, he exclaimed, gleefully: + +"Well, by jinks! This jest knocks the spots outer everything! Trade will +hum after this, or I'm a duffer." + +And the clerk's prediction was verified in a very short time. + +When the musicians had concluded the concert they laid aside their +instruments, and during the next ten minutes every man of them threw +rings at the canes or knives so rapidly that both Teddy and his +assistant had all they could do to wait upon the throng. + +Then, giving the signal for the march to be resumed, the leader said to +the young fakir: + +"Don't get discouraged, my boy, no matter what happens. If you have any +trouble it can't last long, for you've plenty of friends at the Run, and +after what happened here yesterday there should be a good many on the +grounds." + +The kind-hearted musicians marched away without giving Teddy an +opportunity to thank them, and as if to atone for their previously +spoken harsh words the bystanders devoted themselves with unusual zest +to the task of winning a cane worth a dollar by an outlay of five cents. + +It was nearly an hour before trade began to grow dull again, and both +the boys were quite willing to rest a few moments. + +"At this rate we stand a chance of getting rich before the fair closes," +Teddy exclaimed, in a tone of satisfaction. "I wonder what Uncle Nathan +would have said if he'd been here to hear the leader?" + +"I'll tell you," a disagreeable but familiar sounding voice replied from +the rear of the stand where its owner had been concealed by an adjoining +booth, and Nathan Hargreaves stalked into view with a comically tragic +air. "Things have come to a pretty pass when a man's own relations, an' +them as he has set up in business with his own hard-earned money, try to +bring scorn and reproach upon him. You are a snake in the grass, Teddy +Hargreaves, an' not content with helpin' rob me, concoct such a +disgraceful scene as I have jest witnessed." + +"What could I have had to do with it?" Teddy cried, in surprise. "I +didn't know they were going to give me a lift." + +"Of course you did; I ain't blind if I am such a fool as to put you in +the way of makin' so much money. There wasn't a man in that band who'd +have countenanced the speech the leader made if you hadn't been workin' +on their sympathies. But your race won't be much longer. Don't think +that I've stopped all proceedings, for it may be that you're shoved into +jail this very day unless you make a clean breast of the whole thing." + +"I've got nothing to tell simply because I don't know anything; but I +believe the same man who took my fifteen dollars robbed your store. Dan +and I heard him and another fellow talking, and in trying to find out +something for your benefit got knocked down." + +"What did they say? Who are they?" the old man asked, eagerly, his +bearing toward Teddy changing very suddenly. "Tell me! Tell your poor, +old uncle, who'll be mighty near the poor-house, if he don't get his own +again." + +This appeal touched Teddy's heart immediately, but Tim said, half to +himself, taking good care Uncle Nathan should hear him, however: + +"More'n a hundred robberies like that wouldn't make him poor. Why, down +at the Run folks say you'd hardly miss what's been taken." + +"Those who make that kind of talk are only shiftless people with never a +dollar of their own, consequently they don't know the value of one," the +old man cried, angrily. "It's all very well for a set of loafers who are +mad with me because I wouldn't give them credit to say such things. Do +you suppose I'd spend my time runnin' around the country huntin' for the +thieves if I hadn't lost a power of money?" + +"You'd be willin' to run pretty far if there was a nickel at the end of +the road," Tim retorted, but before he could say anything more Teddy +motioned for him to be silent. + +"Are you goin' to tell me who the robbers are?" Uncle Nathan asked, in a +wheedling tone, as he turned once more toward his nephew. + +"I don't know the men whom I suspect, except by sight, but it's more +than possible we may find out enough to warrant their arrest before the +fair closes." + +The old man insisted on knowing at once, and alternately coaxed and +threatened, but all to no purpose. + +Teddy positively refused to make a statement until he had more proof, +and recognizing the fact that he might hurt his own cause by insisting, +Uncle Nathan said, in a most affectionate tone: + +"I must go now, Teddy, but I'll see you again before night. If you'll do +all you can to help find them scoundrels I'll never say that you had +anything to do with the crime." + +"You'd no business to make any such talk, for you knew it was impossible +for me to take any hand in it, even if I'd wanted to be a thief." + +"There's a good deal of circumstantial evidence," the old man said, +solemnly, as he turned to leave, "an' it stands you in hand to do all a +boy can to clear your own skirts. I'm goin' to give you a chance, an' +promise there won't be any arrest made to-day at all events." + +"There's a good reason why you promise that," Tim cried, angrily, as +Uncle Nathan walked away. "You tried mighty hard, but couldn't get a +warrant, an' there ain't a justice of the peace between here an' +Waterville as would grant one without any other evidence than what you +can say." + +"Don't make him angry, Tim. He's feeling bad about his money, an' you +can't blame him for trying to find out who has got it." + +"I don't blame him for that, but what I'm kickin' about is that he +keeps naggin' at you when there's no reason for it." + +"Most likely he thinks there is." + +"He can't; it's only the wretched old skinflint's way of gettin' even +with the world, an' so he picks on a feller what he believes can't +strike back." + +"I wish I could find out who the robbers are, and where the goods have +been hidden." + +"Well, I don't. It serves him right to lose 'em, an'---- Hello! here +comes that feller what helps exhibit the rifles! I wonder what he wants +at this time of day, jest when business is beginnin' to be rushin'." + +Dan was evidently in a high state of excitement, for he forced his way +through the crowds, regardless of possible injury to himself or others, +and did not slacken speed until he stood in front of the cane-board, +breathless and panting. + +"What's up?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"The fakir who got your money, an' another man, who I think is the same +one we heard talkin' outside the tent, have jest bought a boat from the +Davis Company. Sam saw 'em, an' ran over to tell me while the bargain +was bein' made. He's watchin' down there till we can get back." + +"I don't believe it would do any good for me to say another word to Long +Jim. He went past here this mornin', an' I only made a bad matter worse +by trying to make him give back what he stole." + +"We ain't countin' on doin' that, but I believe they're gettin' ready to +cart away the goods what were stole from your Uncle Nathan. Perhaps we +can foller without bein' seen, an' get on to the whole snap. Could you +get off for the balance of the day?" + +And now Teddy was quite as excited as Dan. + +"Yes, an' so can Sam." + +"Are you goin' to help find his goods after all that old duffer has +threatened?" Tim asked, impatiently. + +"I'll do what I can," was the decided reply. "Do you think you will be +able to get along alone to-day?" + +"I could do it easy enough by hirin' a boy to pick up the rings, but I +hate to see you make a fool of yourself, Teddy." + +"You'll think different later. Come on, Dan. I'll be back as soon as I +can, Tim," and then the young fakir urged his friend in the direction of +the creek. + +"It won't do to go anywhere near the boat-house," Dan said. "Sam is up +the bank a long piece where the willows hide him. He's keepin' his eye +on the craft they bought, so it can't be taken away without his seein' +it." + +By mingling with the crowd it was possible to make their way to the +desired spot without being seen, save by those with whom they came into +immediate contact, and in a few moments the watcher was joined by his +friends. + +"Now I want you fellers to let me manage this case," Sam said, +pompously. "I know more 'bout detective business than both of you put +together, an' if you'd only told me what was up the other night we'd had +the whole thing settled." + +"Have you seen the men?" Dan asked, impatiently. + +"Lots of times. The old fakir is loafin' around close by the landin', +an' the other one must 'a gone off for somethin'. The Davis Company told +me I could take any of the boats, an' the minute the thieves start we'll +jump right on their trail." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +_AMATEUR DETECTIVES._ + + +It was fated that the thrilling work of running down and capturing the +thieves should not be begun until after considerable delay. + +"Now, I wonder what he is up to?" Dan said, when it was no longer +possible to see the supposed burglar. + +"Why is it that you can't let me do this thing?" Sam asked, angrily. "If +you keep meddlin' we'll never fix matters." + +"I don't see that I'm interfering," Dan replied, in surprise. + +The three boys watched this one particular boat in silence for ten +minutes or more, seeing Long Jim now and then, and just as they believed +he was about to step on board the man walked toward the exhibition +buildings, and was soon lost to view amid the throng of people. + +"You was gettin' ready, too, I could tell that by your eye." + +"I'll have to give in that you're the smartest feller in this section of +the country, Sam, an' that's a fact." + +"Of course it is," the amateur detective replied, complacently, thinking +Dan's sarcasm was really praise. "If I have my own way I can turn up the +biggest thief that ever walked on two legs; but you mustn't bother me, +or things may go wrong." + +If the matter had not been so serious to him Teddy would have laughed +long and often at the dignity and superior knowledge assumed by this +fellow, who, since he made his acquaintance, had done nothing more +difficult than to get himself into trouble; but, under the +circumstances, he was so deeply interested in the outcome of the +business that there was no room in his mind for mirth. + +"Dan," he said, "let you and I walk around two or three minutes. We'll +stay close by so that Sam can give us the signal in case the men show +up, and we may find Hazelton." + +"Don't tell him what we're doin'," the amateur detective cried, sharply. + +"Why not?" + +"'Cause it's likely he'll want to meddle with our business, an' then my +work will be spoiled." + +"I won't say a word to him until after seeing you again," Teddy replied +as he led Dan away, and added when they were where it would be +impossible for Sam to hear them: "See here, it's foolish for us to think +of trying to follow those men if he's to be allowed to make a fool of +himself. With him believing he's the greatest detective in the country, +something wrong is sure to happen, an' we may never get another chance +of finding out about the burglary." + +"Don't fret about that," Dan replied, confidently. "It won't do any harm +to let him swell a little now while he's keeping watch; but when the +real work begins it won't take long to sit on him." + +"Then there will be a row." + +"I'll attend to his case; but I don't think there'll be anything for us +to do yet awhile. The men are evidently in no hurry to leave, and most +likely intend to wait till the crowd begins to go." + +"Then why should all three of us stay on watch?" + +"We won't. Go back to your cane-board, and I'll tell Sam to come for you +when the burglars put in an appearance. He'll have time to do that, an' +while he's gettin' a boat ready you can come for me." + +"Will it be safe to trust him?" + +"Yes, indeed," Dan replied, with a laugh. "He's havin' an awful good +time thinkin' he's the greatest detective in the world, and couldn't be +hired to leave that clump of willows so long as the men keep out of +sight." + +Teddy was not so confident, and insisted on going back with Dan while +the arrangement was made. + +When the matter was explained Sam appeared to be perfectly satisfied. + +"That's all right," he said, readily. "I can see to this thing alone; +but I'll let you fellers know the minute anything happens. Don't tell +any of the constables what I'm up to, or they'll want to have a finger +in the pie." + +Convinced that he would be informed of any change in the situation, +Teddy returned to the cane-board just in time to aid Tim in attending to +a rush of customers who were spending their money liberally. + +"What made you come back?" the clerk asked, in surprise. "I've hired a +feller for a quarter to pick up rings, an' am gettin' along first rate." + +Teddy briefly explained the condition of affairs, and then there was +little opportunity for conversation until considerably past noon, when +trade dropped off very decidedly for a while. + +In order that he might have a glimpse of the other fakirs and rest +himself at the same time, Tim was sent to see if Sam was yet at his +self-selected post of duty, and Teddy took advantage of the opportunity +to ascertain the amount of his receipts. + +To his great surprise he found nearly forty dollars in the money-box, +and from this he took thirty with which to pay the merchant in +Waterville who had given him credit for his stock. + +"It has turned out to be a mighty good venture, even if Aunt Sarah was +so sure I'd make a fool of myself by tryin' it. All the money I make now +will be clear profit, and it looks as if I'd be able to help mother +quite a bit." + +[Illustration: "They're getting ready to start!" he said, breathlessly.] + +"Well, how is business?" a voice asked, in a cheery tone, and, looking +up, Teddy saw his sole remaining creditor. + +"I'm glad you've come," he cried, bundling the thirty dollars up in a +piece of paper. "I'd jest counted this out for you, an' when you take it +I'll be free from debt." + +"But I don't want the money," the merchant replied. "I only came around +to see if you were successful." + +"I've already made more than I reckoned on, an' it'll be a favor if you +take this, 'cause I don't like to have so much around." + +Then Teddy explained the condition of his business affairs, not +forgetting to tell of the accusation made against him by his Uncle +Nathan, and the merchant said, as he concluded: + +"I heard the whole story, my boy, and have already talked with Mr. +Hargreaves, whom I met a few moments ago. I do not think he can do +anything to you, because you have made many friends here. The money I +will take, as it is not well to keep it where it might be stolen; but +can give you no receipt until I get home." + +"That'll be all right," Teddy replied, contentedly; "you trusted me with +the goods, an' it would be funny if I couldn't wait for a receipted +bill. It's through you that I've had the chance to make so much, an' I +want you to know I feel grateful." + +"I believe that, and am more than pleased to have put you in the way of +getting a start in the world. Come to see me when the fair closes, and +it is possible I may show you an opportunity of learning to be a +merchant on a large scale, rather than a fakir whose method of getting a +living is very precarious, regardless of the fact that he sometimes +makes very great profits." + +It can be readily understood that Teddy accepted the invitation, and +then, trade commencing once more, the gentleman walked away, leaving the +proprietor of the cane-board with the pleasing consciousness that he was +free from debt, and with quite a large amount of money in his mother's +keeping. + +Tim returned very shortly after the merchant's departure, and reported +that Sam was still on duty. + +"The boat hasn't been moved nor have the men showed up again," he said. +"That feller acts as if he thought he was bigger than the President. He +told me he could be the greatest detective that ever lived if it wasn't +that folks made him show off at rowin' 'cause he had so much style about +him. I don't think he's so very wonderful; but, of course, I never saw +many out an' out detectives." + +"And you don't see one when you met him. I'm sure he'll get Dan an' me +in trouble before this thing is ended." + +"Then why don't you let him go off alone? That's what I'd do with such a +chump." + +"I can't, because----" + +The sentence was not concluded, for at that moment Dan came up at full +speed. + +"They're gettin' ready to start!" he said, breathlessly. "I saw 'em go +by the buildin', an' run over to tell Sam that I'd fetch you. Our boat +is a long distance up the creek, an' we'll have to hurry, or run the +chance of missing their craft." + +There was no delay on Teddy's part, despite the misgivings he had +regarding Sam. + +One parting injunction to Tim on the subject of business, and then he +followed Dan at full speed toward the creek on such a course as would +bring them fully a quarter of a mile above the boat-house outside the +fair grounds. + +Sam had made everything ready for the journey by the time they arrived, +and was so excited that he could no longer speak of his own wonderful +powers as a thief-catcher. + +"One of you fellers had better row while I steer," he said, seating +himself in the stern sheets and taking the tiller-ropes. "If they see +the way I handle the oars they'll know exactly who's after them, an' +then the game'll be up." + +"Don't worry yourself about that," Dan replied, calmly. "Neither Teddy +nor I knows anything about a boat, except it may be to steer, so you'll +have to hump yourself." + +Sam grumbled considerably about taking so many risks; but he finally +moved over to the bow and his companions took their seats aft. + +"I won't put any style to it, an', perhaps, that'll keep 'em from +knowin' I'm on their trail," he said, and immediately began rowing in +such a bungling fashion that Dan said, sharply: + +"Look here, if you're goin' to pull this boat, do it, or we'll go back. +At this rate, you'll have everybody at the fair watching to see what +kind of chumps have been allowed to risk their lives. We've got no time +to spare, either; for we must get on the other side of the creek where +it will be possible to watch the men without getting too near." + +"I'll take care of that part of the business," Sam replied, loftily, and +Dan immediately put into operation his plan of "sitting" on the amateur +detective. + +"You do your share, and that will be enough. Teddy and I propose to take +a hand in this ourselves." + +"Then I might as well go back." + +"You can, if you want to." + +It so chanced that he had no such desire, and with the air of one whose +feelings have been deeply wounded he rowed steadily on, Dan steering, +until they were where it was possible to have a full view of a long +stretch of the creek. + +[Illustration: "There they are!" Teddy said.] + +"There they are!" Teddy said, pointing down stream to where a boat was +being pulled close to the left bank. "They have stopped, and it looks as +if something was being taken on board!" + +"It is a portion of the goods they stole!" Dan cried. "Stop rowing, Sam, +and if nothing happens we'll soon know where the whole lot is to be +hidden." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +_THE RENDEZVOUS._ + + +That Dan's surmise was correct could be seen a few moments after, while +the boys, partially concealed by the overhanging bank, watched the +proceedings with but little danger of being discovered. + +On the shore were a number of packages in a cart, and these the supposed +burglars loaded into the boat with the utmost haste. + +If this lot comprised all that had been taken from Uncle Nathan his loss +must have been greater than he stated, and Teddy said, after watching +several moments in silence: + +"I reckon this is only part of what they took; but I'm puzzled to know +how it could have been brought so far. The idea of carting goods over +here to find a place in which to hide them is a queer one, when all the +thieves had to do was slip down the river in a skiff, an' before morning +they'd be beyond reach of the officers." + +It surely was strange that the men should have done so much useless +labor, and the only solution to the apparent mystery was offered by Sam, +who said, with an air of superior wisdom: + +"They've done it to throw me off the scent. That fakir we saw in +Waterville must have known who I was." + +"How does it happen he had the nerve to come here when he knew you +counted on showing the people who visited this fair your skill in +rowing?" Dan asked, with a laugh. + +"I reckon he didn't think I was tellin' the truth." + +It was useless to attempt to make Sam acquainted with himself. He had +such a remarkable idea of his own abilities, despite the scrapes he was +constantly getting into, that the most eloquent orator would have been +unable to convince him he was anything more than a very egotistical boy, +with little save his vanity to recommend him to the notice of the +general public. + +In five minutes the boat at the opposite bank had received as much of a +cargo as her owners wished to carry, and then the men began to row +leisurely down the river. + +"Now, go slow, Sam, and don't turn around to look, or they may suspect +we are following them," Dan said, warningly. "I'll keep you posted about +what they are doing, and you can tell us afterward what ought to have +been done. Pull moderately, for we don't want to get very near while it +is light enough for them to see us." + +The chase was not a long one. By keeping the boat's head to the bank and +moving leisurely as boys who were bent only on pleasure might have +done, the pursuers evidently caused no suspicions as to their purpose, +and after about a mile had been traversed the burglars turned up a +narrow waterway which led to a barn or shed built on the meadows for the +storing of marsh hay. + +There were plenty of ditches near at hand into which the amateur +detectives could run their craft unobserved, and as the pursued left the +creek Dan steered into one of these. + +Here their heads hardly came above the bank, and all three could see the +men carrying their cargo to the building. + +"We've got 'em now," said Sam, triumphantly, as the first of the +packages was taken on shore, "an' the sooner we nab both the better." + +"How do you intend to set about such a job?" Teddy asked. + +"Go right up an' tell 'em we've been on their track." + +"And in less than two minutes you would get a worse pounding than the +toughs gave you last night." + +Sam appeared to realize the truth of this statement, for he had no +further suggestions to offer, and Dan said, after some reflection: + +"I think the best thing we can do will be to go back to the fair. If +those fellows find us here the jig will be up; but it isn't likely +they've got the whole of their plunder with them, and intend to come +here again. We'll talk with some one and find out a good plan, or keep +our eyes peeled to learn what they mean to do with the goods. If they +propose simply to hide them until there is a chance to get the lot away +safely, we shall have the key to the situation an' can take plenty of +time deciding what should be done." + +Sam did not again propose to make any attempt at intimidating the men, +and Teddy thought Dan's scheme a wise one. + +"They'll come here more than once before the week is ended; you know +they spoke of moving the stuff when the exhibitors got ready to leave, +an' we'd better go back to the grounds before those fellows have +finished their work." + +Sam pulled out of the water-course into the creek without a murmur; but +when they were on the way back, and he felt at liberty to display his +true "style," courage returned. + +"I knew you fellers wasn't any good on detective work," he said, +scornfully. "If I'd had charge of the case we should have them men tied +hand an' foot in the bottom of this boat." + +"How would you have got 'em there?" Dan asked. + +"That's my business. Jest because I've let you into this thing there's +no reason why I should give all my secrets away, is there?" + +"Not a bit of it, an' you keep them locked up in your heart, for if +Teddy an' I knew the plans we might get into a bad scrape." + +"Well, what are you goin' to do now?" + +"Nothing until after we have talked with those who know more than we do +about such things." + +Sam immediately relapsed into silence. His superior knowledge had been +scorned, and he proposed to let his companions understand that he was +not pleased with them. + +By the time the boys reached the bend in the creek they could see the +boat in which were Long Jim and his companion, half a mile behind, and +Dan said: + +"Those fellows don't know me. When we land you and Sam had better keep +out of sight, while I try to find out where they go after striking the +fair ground." + +"All right. It's time I helped Tim, an' you'll come to the cane-board if +there is anything to tell." + +"So I don't amount to anything, eh?" Sam asked, sulkily. + +"Of course you do; but it would be foolish to make a show of yourself to +Long Jim, who would remember you. Keep rowing around in the boat as if +you were at work, and there'll be no chance for suspicion." + +By this time the little craft was at the landing stage of the +boat-house, and two of the party leaped out, leaving the third feeling +that he had been unjustly deprived of a very large portion of his +rights. + +"If them fellers think they're goin' to get the best of me they're +makin' a big mistake, an' I'll show 'em so before night. They don't know +any more about bein' detectives than a cat; but both will be mightily +surprised before mornin', or I'm mistaken." + +Then, instead of rowing around the creek as Dan had suggested, Sam +pulled out into the middle of the stream, looking wondrous wise and +determined as he awaited the coming of those whose secret he had +partially discovered. + +Meanwhile Teddy and Dan, without the slightest suspicion of what their +friend proposed to do, separated at the landing stage, the former making +all haste to reach his cane-board, where he found Tim doing a thriving +business, and standing near by was Hazelton. + +"Where have you been?" the jewelry fakir asked, solicitously. "I've come +here two or three times without finding you, and had almost begun to +believe old Nathan succeeded in getting a warrant." + +Teddy was undecided as to whether he should tell this acquaintance of +all he had seen or not; but, after some deliberation, and in view of the +fact that he also had been accused of the burglary, concluded to do so. + +"We've found out where Long Jim is hiding the stuff he stole from my +uncle," he said, and then explained what had been done during the last +hour. + +Hazelton was surprised that so much information had been gained; but he +was able to cause Teddy an equal amount of astonishment. + +"I don't believe the packages you saw came from the old man's store. I +heard, about two hours ago, that a store here in town was robbed last +night, and it isn't dead sure, after your uncle's accusations, and what +I have done on the fair grounds, that I sha'n't be arrested on +suspicion. Most likely the goods taken down the creek were stolen here; +but I don't understand why those fellows should work so boldly." + +"Probably they think, as one of them said the other night, while so many +articles are being carried to and fro." + +"Very likely that may be true, and now comes the question of what shall +be done regarding the information you have gained. I stand in a mighty +delicate position, and, quite naturally, want to save myself, if +possible, for even an arrest when there is little or no proof, ain't to +be contemplated calmly." + +"You ought to know better than I how we should go to work. Dan an' I +thought there would be plenty of time, for if those fellows were going +to skip very soon they wouldn't have taken the trouble to carry the +stuff down there, where it could not be gotten away quickly." + +"I'll think the matter over, Teddy, and come back here in a couple of +hours," Hazelton said, after a moment's thought. + +"Don't tell anyone what you found out until after seeing me again." + +This conversation had been carried on at the rear of the cane-board, +where the customers could not overhear it, and when the jewelry fakir +walked toward the exhibition building it was necessary to satisfy Tim's +curiosity regarding what had been accomplished. + +"I don't s'pose it's any of my business," the latter said, when Teddy +concluded the story; "but I wouldn't be afraid to bet all I shall earn +this week that you'll have trouble with that feller before the scrape is +over. He knows so awful much that somethin' tough is bound to happen." + +Teddy did not think there was any good cause for alarm, more especially +since he felt confident Dan would keep an eye on the oarsman, and during +the next two hours he thought of nothing save earning money, for +customers were plenty, and even with the assistance of the boy Tim had +engaged it was all he and his clerk could do to wait upon those who were +anxious to win a cane or knife. + +Now and then some of the other fakirs would visit him; but, as a rule, +all were so busy that there was little time for the exchange of +compliments, and even the cry of "Three rings for five cents, with the +chance to get a dollar cane or knife for nothing!" was not needed to +stimulate trade. + +It was two hours from the time of his return when Dan came up looking +decidedly uneasy, and Teddy did not stop to make change for the man who +had just patronized him, before he asked, hurriedly: + +"Now, what's up?" + +"Sam is missing." + +"What do you mean? How can that be?" + +"He was to row around the creek near the landing; but for the last hour +no one has seen him, and, what is more, the boat can't be found. Long +Jim an' his friend haven't come ashore, as near as I can make out, an' +it looks to me as if that foolish Sam has got into trouble through +trying to play detective." + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +_SAM'S ADVENTURES._ + + +In order to explain Sam's absence, and one or two other incidents in +their regular sequence, it is necessary to go back to the moment when, +his friends having landed, the amateur detective was left to his own +devices. + +His first impulse was to report his arrival to the manager of the boat +exhibit, and then go about his routine duties, but before this very +proper plan could be carried into effect he chanced to see Hazelton on +the shore. + +"Now, what's he layin' around there for?" Sam asked of himself. "I'll +bet Dan or Teddy has given the whole snap away, an' he's come to pull in +the burglars. It's a mighty mean trick for them to play after I've +worked the case so far that there's nothing to do but nab 'em. He'll get +all the praise, an' folks won't know the job was managed by me." + +The longer Sam thought of this apparent ingratitude and treachery on the +part of Teddy and Dan the more angry he grew, and it did not require +many moments' thought for him to succeed in convincing himself that he +had been very shabbily treated. + +Continuing to talk to himself, or rather at the tiller, on which his +eyes were fixed, he added: + +"Folks have said so much about their savin' them women from drownin', +when I mighter done the same thing if I'd been willin' to make a fool of +myself, that they want to scoop in everything; but I could stop this +little game by jest goin' ahead on my own hook. If I sneaked down the +creek an' brought back the stuff them men have been hidin' people would +begin to know how much I understand about detective work." + +This appeared in his mind as the most brilliant scheme he had ever +conceived, and in a very few seconds Sam decided that it should be +carried into effect. + +First, and with no very well-defined idea of why such a course was +necessary, he rowed cautiously to and fro past the landing stage, +scrutinizing closely every face he saw, and mentally hugging himself +because of the excitement which would be caused by his return with the +stolen property. + +Then he turned the boat, and began to row down the creek, stopping every +few seconds to gaze around in such a mysterious manner that the +suspicions of any one who observed him would have been instantly +aroused. + +In this manner, which he believed the only true way for a first-class +detective to approach his prey, Sam had rowed less than half a mile when +he saw Long Jim and his companion returning. + +Now the time had come when true cunning was necessary, and the amateur +detective began to display it by pulling the boat sharply around, +heading her for an indentation on the opposite shore. + +Here he ran her bow aground, and lying at full length in the bottom, +peered out at the men in the most stealthy manner. + +They had already taken notice of his erratic movements, and now regarded +him intently, but, without checking the headway of their own craft, in a +few minutes were beyond sight around the bend. + +"There," Sam said, with a long-drawn breath of relief, as he arose to a +sitting posture, "if Teddy an' Dan had been here them fellers would have +tumbled to the whole racket, but I've put 'em off the scent, an' will +have plenty of time to do my work." + +He pulled out from the shore once more, gazed long and earnestly up and +down the creek, and then, in the same ridiculous manner as before, +continued the journey. + +The trip which should have consumed no more than an hour even with the +most indolent oarsman, was not completed until twice that time had +elapsed, and then fully fifteen minutes were spent by this very cautious +boy in landing. + +He pulled his boat up high out of the water, and, in order to conceal +her, heaped such a pile of dry grass on top of her that it must have +attracted the attention of any one passing, more especially those who +were familiar with the creek. + +This done he went toward the barn after the fashion of an old-time stage +villain, halting at the slightest sound, and peering in every direction, +fancying himself surrounded by foes. + +Not until he had circled completely around the barn twice did he venture +to enter, and then, much to his disappointment, there was nothing to be +seen. The building appeared to be absolutely empty, and even his eagle +eye failed to discover any traces of recent occupancy. + +"Well, this is mighty funny," he said, with a sigh of disappointment. +"Them fellers surely brought a lot of stuff in here, but they must have +carried it out again." + +Having expended so much labor and time in reaching this place, he did +not intend to return until after making a thorough search, however, and +to this end he investigated one possible hiding-place after another, +pulling up the boards of the rude flooring, and peering into places +where nothing larger than a mouse could have been hidden. + +During this time the burglars were returning with all possible speed. +Sam's actions, both as he came down the creek, and also while screening +himself from view, were so suspicious that, guilty as the men were, they +immediately concluded what was very near the truth. + +Long Jim recognized the boy as having been with Teddy when the bargain +for the imaginary cane-board was made, and instead of returning to the +fair grounds the two watched, from a point of vantage on the bank, until +Master Sam had landed. + +His purpose was now evident, and it was necessary the burglars should +resort to desperate measures to prevent the loss of their ill-gotten +gains as well as to save themselves from imprisonment. + +When they arrived where it was possible to look into the barn, Sam was +on his knees scraping away the dirt which appeared to have been recently +disturbed, and they heard him say in a tone of exultation: + +"I've got to it at last, an' now we'll see what Teddy an' Dan have to +say when I flash the whole lot of stuff up with nobody to help me. I +reckon----" + +He did not finish the sentence, for at that moment Long Jim stepped +directly in front of him, as he asked: + +"Did you leave anything here, my son?" + +"No--I--I--that is--you see----" + +Sam was so frightened that he could not say another word. It seemed as +if his tongue was swollen to twice its natural size, while his throat +was parched and dry, and to make bad matters worse, he had entirely +neglected to invent a plausible excuse for his presence there in case of +an interruption. + +"I asked if you'd left anything here?" Long Jim repeated, very mildly. + +"Well--well---- You see I jest come down to--to---- I thought, perhaps, +I might find something, but it's time I was gettin' back to the fair, +'cause the folks will be needin' me." + +As he spoke he attempted to back toward the door, but before taking half +a dozen steps a cry of fear burst from his lips, for a heavy hand was +laid with no gentle force on his shirt collar, and he staggered forward +helplessly. + +"That's an invitation for you to hold on a bit, an' have a little +conversation with two gentlemen who are mighty curious to know why you +came here," Long Jim said, grimly. "You're goin' to tell us the whole +partic'lars, or there won't be enough left of you to be seen under a +microscope." + +Sam made no reply. He was literally dazed with fear, and just at that +moment he thought the life of a detective very disagreeable. + +"Come, speak up, an' be quick about it," the man cried, fiercely. "We've +got no time to waste on sich cubs as you, an' in about two minutes +you'll get worse'n we served out the other night." + +"That wasn't me follerin' you from the museum tent," Sam said, quickly, +thinking possibly this fact might work in his favor. + +"Who was it?" + +"Teddy an' Dan." + +"Who is Dan?" + +"A feller who works for the Stevens Arms Company up at the fair." + +"Why did they follow us?" + +"Teddy wanted to get back the money he gave you to buy a cane-board +with." + +"If he knows what's wise for him he'll stop any such rackets, or he may +get more'n he bargains for." + +Then the second man, who still held firmly to Sam's collar, asked, as he +shook his prisoner vigorously: + +"How did you know we had been here?" + +"Us fellers saw you come down in a boat." + +"So all three are in the secret, eh?" + +Sam's only thought was that he might possibly save his own skin, and he +replied in the affirmative, although he must have known that by such +answer he was destroying his friends' chances of recovering the goods. + +"Where are the fools now?" Long Jim asked, angrily. + +"Up at the fair." + +"What do they intend to do?" + +"Get somebody to arrest you." + +"Then we've got to skip mighty lively, Phil," and Long Jim looked up at +his companion. + +"Yes; but if my advice had been follered we wouldn't be in this scrape. +You was the only one the cubs knew, an' by keepin' out of sight we +mighter finished the work that's been laid out. You're so pig-headed +that a yoke of oxen couldn't keep you in hidin'." + +"There's no use fightin' about it now; for we've got to get a move on us +in short order. It won't do to let this boy have a chance to give the +alarm." + +"Of course not. Lash him up somewhere so he can't make a noise, an' his +chums will come before he starves to death." + +"Don't do that!" Sam cried, in an agony of terror. "I won't say a word +about your catchin' me here, an' I'll do anything you say." + +"Oh, you're a nice plum to make promises, ain't you. It didn't take much +persuadin' to make you go back on your friends, an' that's enough to +show whether you can be trusted. Get the rope out of the boat, Phil, an' +then we'll make ready for a long jump." + +Phil obeyed, grumbling as he went because his partner had refused to +take his advice, thus plunging both of them into danger, and Long Jim +turned his attention to the prisoner once more. + +"Before we leave this part of the country for good I'm goin' to give you +somethin' to remember us by so's you won't go 'round stickin' your nose +into other people's business agin." + +"What are you goin' to do?" Sam asked, his face growing even paler than +before. + +"Give you the worst floggin' a boy ever had. I'd do it now if there +wasn't so much work to be got through." + +Sam had sufficient sense to know that all his pleadings for mercy would +be in vain, and he held his peace until Phil returned with a long coil +of rope which had been used as a boat's painter. + +One of the beams at the end of the barn served as a post to which to +lash the prisoner, and here the amateur detective was made fast in such +a skillful manner that he could not so much as move his arms. + +"Shall we gag him now?" Phil asked, and Long Jim replied: + +"No, there's time enough. + +"He can't make any one hear if he yells his best, an' I've got a little +business to settle before he's trussed up for good." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +_MISSING._ + + +When Dan informed Teddy that Sam was missing, and suggested the +possibility of the burglars having gotten him in their power, both the +boys were decidedly alarmed; but the matter ceased to appear as serious +after it had been discussed in all its bearings. + +"Long Jim wouldn't have dared to spirit him away when there are so many +people around," Teddy said, after a long silence, during which he was +trying to imagine what Sam might have done. "Besides, what would be the +good of taking him if we were left behind?" + +"Perhaps they count on hauling us in, too." + +"That isn't to be thought of for a moment. They don't want to burden +themselves with a lot of boys when every effort must be made to get the +stolen property out of this section of the country before they are +discovered." + +"I'll allow all that sounds reasonable, but where is Sam?" + +"Of course I don't know. Do you think he would dare to go down the +river again after we landed?" + +"No, indeed; he's too much of a coward for that. If there's been any +funny business it was done when the men got back." + +"Then we have no need to worry, for there are hundreds of people on the +bank of the creek all the time, an' Sam would know enough to yell if +anybody tried to steal him." + +The idea that the amateur detective might be stolen seemed so comical to +Dan that he gave way to mirth, and what had promised to be a most +sorrowful visit speedily became a merry one. + +"He had permission to remain away from the exhibition building during +the rest of the day," Teddy finally said, "an' most likely he's goin' to +take advantage of it by roaming around the grounds, exercising his +detective faculties. He'll turn up at the museum to-night all right, +with a big yarn to tell about his supposed adventures." + +"I reckon you're right; but I did get a little rattled when his boss +asked me where he was. I'll come back this way when it's time to go to +supper." + +"Wait a minute. I'm mighty hungry now, an' business has been so good +that I can afford to treat to sandwiches an' lemonade, if you'll go with +me over to the grand stand. I'll bring you back something, Tim," he +added, as he leaped over the railing. + +Dan said he could remain away half an hour from the rifle exhibit, and +Teddy was now so easy in mind concerning money matters that he resolved +to have thirty minutes of sport. + +The boys first made a tour of that portion of the grounds where the +fakirs were congregated, stopping a moment to see the whip dealer +lashing a pine stake to show the quality of his goods, and then watching +the "Great African Dodger," who thrust his woolly head through an +aperture in a canvas screen for all those to throw balls at who were +inclined to pay the price. + +Then they stopped at the "envelope game," where were spread on a stand a +large collection of cheap, gaudy goods, each bearing a printed number, +every one supposed to correspond with those contained in a box of +envelopes, and this fakir was doing a big business, as was shown by the +fact that he could afford to hire a barker, who cried continually at the +full strength of his lungs: + +"Come up now, and try your luck! Here's where we have all prizes and no +blanks! Ten cents buys an envelope, with the privilege of drawing for +yourself, so there can be no job put up against you, and every number +calls for some one of the many valuable articles in the layout. Here's a +gentleman who spends only ten cents and gets a pair of those beautiful, +triple-plated, double-expansion, fine pure metal cuff buttons, worth two +dollars at some stores!" + +"Come on!" Dan said, impatiently. "That fellow is almost as big a snide +as Hazelton." + +"How do you make that out? I can see a lot of things that cost more than +a dollar. Look at the silver watch, and the revolver." + +"That may be all very well; but no one except a fellow who is interested +in the business gets any of those articles." + +"You can select any envelope you choose." + +"That's right; but the ones with the numbers calling for the big prizes +are lying flat in the box where nobody can get them. If you should +accuse the man of cheating he would turn the whole thing upside down, +and then, of course, they could be found. Here comes a fellow who I know +is cappin' for that fakir. Watch how he does it." + +The apparent stranger approached the stand, and after some talk as to +how the game was run, invested ten cents. + +The man did not open the envelope he drew; but handed it to the fakir, +who, pretending to look at the card it contained, shouted: + +"Number fifty-four. The gentleman has drawn that beautiful solid silver +watch worth fifty dollars, and I will give him thirty for his bargain." + +The stranger showed his prize to the crowd that clustered around him, +and business was increased wonderfully, for it had apparently been +proven that the game was conducted fairly. + +"Now watch him," Dan said, as the stranger walked away with his prize +ostentatiously displayed, and the two boys followed a short distance +off, until they saw him halt behind a booth, where he turned the article +won over to a barker who had approached. + +"That's the way it is done," Dan said, "and when we come back you'll see +the same watch on the layout." + +Teddy was rapidly being initiated in the tricks of the fakirs, and the +more he saw the more firmly was he resolved not to follow the business +longer than the present week, although he believed his own game to be an +honest one. + +The cheap jewelry dealer; the man who had been selling the remnants of a +stock of knives made by a manufacturer who "had bankrupted himself by +putting into them too expensive material;" the fakir with the dolls +which were to be knocked down by balls thrown from a certain distance, +with a prize of one cigar if the customer could tumble two over, and the +peanut-candy dealer were visited in turn, and then the boys were +attracted by the sound of Hazelton's voice. + +He was plying his peculiar trade again, and by the appearance of the +crowd was meeting with great success. + +"Let's see how he gets out of it this time," Teddy suggested, and Dan +agreed. + +The fakir had arrived at that point where he was giving away the +supposed watches, and the boys listened until they saw his preparations +for departure. + +"What beats me is how he gets clear every time," Dan whispered. "I +should think after he had swindled four or five hundred, some of them +would lay for a chance to get even with him." + +"He says they do, an' that's why he left his satchel with me." + +Hazelton recognized the boys just as he was telling that Nathan +Hargreaves might possibly act as his agent after the close of the fair, +and nodded pleasantly, as he gathered up the reins; but this was one of +the occasions when he was not to be allowed to go scot free. + +Two stalwart-looking fellows were standing near the head of the horse, +and when the fakir would have driven off they seized the bridle, one of +them shouting: + +"Come down with that money! This is the second time I've seen you do us +countrymen up to-day, and now you've got to square things." + +Hazelton swung his whip around, striking the speaker full in the face, +and causing the horse to plunge and rear, but yet the fellows kept their +hold. + +The whip was pulled from the fakir's hand, and in an instant it appeared +as if a riot had begun. Those who had been content to keep secret the +fact of having been swindled now grew bold as they saw there was a +leader in the movement, and more than a hundred leaped forward to seize +the representative of the alleged jewelry manufacturers. + +"He'll be killed!" Teddy shouted, and would have attempted to go to the +assistance of the man who had been kind to him, despite the fact that he +could not have aided him in any way against so many; but for the fact +that Dan pulled him back, as he shouted: + +"Can't you see that it would be fifty to one if you should go in that +crowd? We couldn't help him, and what's the use of gettin' a big lickin' +for nothing? Besides, what would become of your business if the people +here thought you were his partner?" + +Before Dan ceased speaking Teddy realized how useless would be any +effort of his, and he remained passive, trying to get a glimpse of the +ill-fated fakir. + +The numbers who beset him completely hid Hazelton from view. The +carriage had been overturned by the first desperate rush of the victims, +and the horse was clearing a space around himself by the free use of his +heels. + +"They'll commit murder!" Teddy cried. + +"I don't believe it'll be quite as bad as that; but he won't be likely +to give away any more lockets while this fair lasts." + +As a matter of fact, Hazelton was not left to fight the battle alone. +Like every other fakir engaged in that peculiar business, he had several +partners whose duty it was to mingle with the crowd for the purpose of +intimidating any who might be disposed to make trouble, and these had +closed in upon him, while some of the more timid spectators shouted for +the constables. + +[Illustration: "Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold +of us it'll be a bad job all around!"] + +Once Teddy caught a glimpse of the unfortunate man; his glossy hat was +gone, his clothing torn, and his face covered with blood. + +"I can see him now!" he cried, "and it looks as if they had about used +him up, for----" + +Before he could finish the sentence a stranger rushed toward him, and +showing the familiar black satchel in his hand, said hurriedly: + +"Get out of here with that. Hazelton will see you some time this +evening. Don't stop a minute!" + +Before the boy could reply the stranger was forcing his way through the +struggling, yelling crowd, in order to aid his partner, and Teddy said +in dismay: + +"Now we are in a muss. Here is all his money, an' if anybody sees us +with it we'll have a tough time." + +"You can't throw it away, an' we must sneak off," Dan said, and the +expression on his face told how distressed he was that such a +responsibility had been thrust upon them. + +"Shall we go back to the stand?" + +"No, that would never do, for then they would be sure to vent their +anger on you. Go up to the museum; Mr. Sweet knows Hazelton, an' may be +willin' to help him by keeping the satchel till the row is over." + +These words had been spoken as the boys were trying to make their way +through the fringe of spectators which had hemmed them in since the +fight began, and after some difficulty they succeeded; but at the same +moment one of the combatants, who had received more than his share of +punishment, emerged close by their side. + +He saw Hazelton's satchel, and recognized it. + +"Come here, fellows! two little villains are making off with the money! +That's what we want!" + +He at once started in pursuit, as did several others, and Dan cried, as +he helped carry the burden: + +"Run as you never did before, Teddy, for if they get hold of us it'll be +a bad job all around!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +_A TERRIBLE NIGHT._ + + +At just about the same moment when Teddy and Dan were running with +Hazelton's money at full speed toward the museum tent, with the chance +of escape very much against them, Sam was in a decidedly painful frame +of mind. + +After he had been securely tied the two men conversed in low tones for +several minutes, and then, as if having arrived at some definite +conclusion, began to make preparations for leaving the place. + +At the same spot where Sam had been interrupted while scraping away the +dirt they proceeded to dig with a shovel which Phil procured from +somewhere outside the building, and during this labor the prisoner could +hear fragments of the conversation. + +Once Long Jim ceased his work long enough to say: + +"When you come to look at the matter quietly it doesn't seem as if we'd +got into sich a very bad scrape. You can manage to bring the rest of +the stuff down the creek between now an' Friday mornin' and I've got a +plan for givin' anybody who may come after us a good clue to the boy's +disappearance." + +Phil made some remark which Sam could not hear, and his companion +replied in a louder tone: + +"It can all be done so's to make folks think we've gone up the creek, +an' we've got to lay low for a while, which won't be a hard job while +the weather is warm." + +"But I don't like the idea of totin' that cub with us so long." + +"I'll take care of him, an' will make him earn his board, or somethin's +bound to break." + +From this time until several packages were unearthed Sam could hear +nothing; but what had already been said was sufficient to convince him +that he was to have a very unpleasant experience, and for at least the +hundredth time he fervently wished he had never so much as heard of +detective work. + +After the goods had been brought to light the earth was replaced in the +excavation and pounded down carefully. Then fully half an hour was spent +digging in different places, probably for the purpose of misleading any +one who might come there in search of plunder, for Phil said in a tone +of satisfaction as he ceased the apparently aimless labor: + +"It'll take at least a day before all of these suspicious looking spots +have been investigated, an' in the meanwhile, unless we're chumps, we +shall know what's goin' on. I'll take one load to the boat; make sure +the coast is clear, an' then the three of us can carry the balance. Have +the boy ready for a quick move, an' see to it that he can't give an +alarm." + +"I'll knock his head off if he so much as thinks of such a thing," and +as Phil disappeared with a portion of the plunder Long Jim began to +unfasten Sam's bonds, saying as he did so: + +"We've made up our minds to hold you with us a few days 'cause you're +sich jolly company. If you obey orders an' keep your mouth shut there's +a chance of gettin' outer this scrape mighty easy; but I'd slit your +throat in a jiffy if you tried to give us the slip or made any noise." + +Sam made no reply; but his captor could see very plainly that the boy +was nearly paralyzed with fright, and it was safe to infer he would +follow the instructions given to the letter. + +Phil returned in a very short time and reported: + +"The coast is clear. There's not a craft to be seen on the creek, an' we +can leave without danger." + +The rope had been removed from Sam's limbs, and Long Jim proceeded to +load him down with bundles until he staggered under the weight. + +"Now, see that you walk a chalk line," the burglar said, fiercely. +"Foller Phil, an' I'll keep behind to make sure there are no tricks +played. Remember what I promised!" + +The men could carry the remainder of the goods in one load, and the +three went out of the barn hurriedly, Sam not daring to so much as lift +his eyes from the ground lest Long Jim's threat should be carried into +execution. + +Arriving at the water's edge the boat was loaded, the prisoner ordered +to take his place at the oars, and then the final preparations were +made. + +Phil uncovered the boat in which Sam had come, launched and overturned +her. Then taking the hat from the unresisting boy's head, threw it far +out in the channel, afterward giving the little craft a shove which sent +her a long distance from the shore. Next the two oars were sent after +the hat, and Phil said with a laugh: + +"The current ain't very strong; but with the aid of the wind I reckon +that stuff will drift up to the fair grounds before dark." + +Sam's despair was already so great that it did not seem as if it could +be increased; but the last vestige of hope fled when he realized that +these things had been done in order to make it appear as if he were +dead. + +"Teddy and Dan won't think of huntin' for me after the boat is found," +he thought, "an' these men are sure to kill me before this scrape is +over!" + +The two burglars seated themselves comfortably in the stern-sheets, the +packages being placed at the bow to trim the craft properly, and Long +Jim said, sternly: + +"You've been showin' off your skill as an oarsman for two or three days, +an' we want you to do it now. Put in your best licks, for it'll be tough +if we don't get through the water mighty fast." + +Even Sam's worst enemy would have pitied him at this moment. No galley +slave chained to his seat could have been more utterly helpless, and he +exerted himself to the utmost in order to please those who professed to +be so willing to punish or kill. + +Every stroke of the oars took them farther away from the fair grounds, +and each puff of wind carried the evidences of the prisoner's death +nearer the only ones who might take the trouble to search for him. + +Not until fully an hour had passed did the burglars give any sign of a +desire to end the journey, and then Long Jim said: + +"We must be six miles from the fair grounds by this time, an' that is as +far as you'll want to pull to-night, Phil. There should be plenty of +good hidin'-places in this bit of woods, an' I think we'd better haul +up." + +"All right. Steer her into that ditch over there, an' we'll look +around." + +Thus far in his experience as a detective this was the only thing Sam +had had for which to be thankful. His arms were so tired that it seemed +as if he could not have pulled another stroke, and his clothes were +literally wet from the perspiration that came from his body. + +Phil went ashore, leaving his companion to watch the almost exhausted +prisoner, and in a few moments the former shouted: + +"Load that cub up, an' bring him over here. This is a capital place to +locate in for a couple of days." + +Staggering under the heavy burden Long Jim placed on his shoulders the +amateur detective was forced on through the underbrush in advance of his +captor until the two arrived at a perfect tangle of cedars. + +Phil returned to the boat for the remainder of the goods, and all the +plunder was placed inside the thicket where the foliage was so dense +that one might have passed within a few feet of the spot and not had any +suspicion men were hidden there. + +A tiny brook ran past one side of the hiding-place, and Sam took +advantage of the opportunity to check his raging thirst while the men +were laying plans for the future. + +"I'll go back soon after sunset," Phil said, as he lighted his pipe and +proceeded to make himself comfortable. "We can leave the boy here to +look out for the stuff, an' you'd better come with me up to the barn +so's to learn if any one visits the place. I shall be back before +morning, an' you can let me know if the coast is clear." + +"Shall you try to finish the job we were talkin' about?" + +"No; things are so hot jest now that it won't pay to take any more risks +than are absolutely necessary. What we want is to get out of this +portion of the country as soon as possible." + +"All right. I'll leave you to manage the rest of the business, an' +promise to follow orders." + +"I think it's about time you said that, Jim. If my plans had been +carried out in the first place we wouldn't be in sich a muss; but could +be havin' the cream of the pickin's at the fair." + +"Well, what's the use of harpin' on that all the time? The thing has +been done, an' we've got to make the best of it. Do you think it'll be +safe to leave this cub here alone while we're away?" + +"It will be when I get through with him," was the grim reply, and Sam, +terrified by the vagueness of this remark, more even than he had been by +the plain language previously used, cried, piteously: + +"Please don't leave me here alone to-night! I'll pull the boat, an' do +everything you say, without so much as yippin'." + +"Them as starts out in the detective business have to take what comes, +'specially when their own foolishness brings it about. You joined our +party of your own accord, my son, an' must put up with what we choose to +give." + +Sam said nothing more. He was reaping what he had sowed, and decided +that matters could not be much worse even if he was caught trying to +escape, therefore he resolved to take desperate chances in an effort to +give his captors the slip. + +There was no opportunity to make the attempt, on this night at least, +for when Phil had finished smoking he proceeded in a very methodical +manner to secure the prisoner. + +Sam was ordered to seat himself on the ground, with his back to the +trunk of a cedar-tree, and he was fastened skillfully, with his elbows +tied back in such a manner that he could not bring his hands together. +Both feet were bound, and then, with a sudden movement, Phil forced the +boy's mouth open, shoving into it a short piece of pine wood about an +inch and a half in diameter. + +This was secured in such a manner that the prisoner could not free +himself from the uncomfortable bridle, neither would it be possible for +him to make the slightest outcry. + +"Now, don't shout for help while we are gone, an' unless the bears eat +you up we shall meet again about daybreak," Phil said, with a coarse +laugh as he and Jim went out of the thicket toward the creek. + +Poor Sam had never thought of the possibility that there might be bears +in this section of the country until the burglar suggested it, and he +was so terrified as not to realize it was impossible there could be any +dangerous animals in such a thickly-settled portion of the State. + +Therefore, in addition to the danger to be apprehended from his captors, +he had constantly before his mind this new cause for fear. The rustling +of the leaves, the flight of a bird as it sought a perch for the night, +or the soughing of the wind among the branches were to him so many +proofs that a violent death would be his before morning. + +If the beginning of the hours of darkness was so terrible it can well be +fancied how he suffered before another day dawned. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +_A NARROW ESCAPE._ + + +Neither Teddy nor Dan had any hope of reaching the museum tent before +their pursuers could overtake them, and although both knew what might be +the result if they were taken with the jewelry fakir's money and goods +in their possession, they did not for a moment think of abandoning the +property. + +The cries of those in the rear attracted the attention of the spectators +elsewhere on the grounds, and without waiting to learn the cause of the +trouble hundreds of men and boys joined in the chase, all shouting at +the full strength of their lungs: + +"Stop thief! Stop thief!" + +The distance to be traversed was nearly a quarter of a mile; but the +many turns the boys were forced to make in order to avoid those who were +ready to capture them doubled this, and they were yet very far from the +goal when a burly, red-faced man jumped in front of them. + +It seemed as if capture was inevitable; but Teddy resorted to the last +means of defense, and was successful. + +Letting go his hold of the satchel he lowered his head, leaped forward +with full force, striking the officious stranger full in the stomach. + +The man, not anticipating such an attack at a moment when he almost had +his hands upon the supposed thieves, was bowled over like a nine-pin, +and, jumping quickly aside, Teddy caught hold of the satchel once more. + +By this time both the boys were so nearly winded that speech was well +nigh impossible; but Dan managed to gasp admiringly: + +"You're a dandy, old fellow," and then, with one supreme effort, +increased his pace a trifle. + +It was fortunate that there were no spectators in front of Mr. Sweet's +tent when the boys came in sight of it. The barker was lounging in a +chair outside, and on catching a glimpse of the boys recognized them +immediately. + +The crowd in pursuit would have told a duller man than he professed to +be that there had been some serious trouble, and, running to meet the +boys as if to intercept them, he cried: + +"Circle around the canvas, an' crawl underneath, so's that gang won't +see where you've gone!" + +The fugitives understood the scheme at once, and making a short detour +as if to avoid him, dashed under the guy-ropes at one end, gaining the +interior of the tent before the pursuers arrived. + +Mr. Sweet had just started toward the flap to ascertain the cause of the +commotion when the boys entered, and, thinking himself about to be +attacked, leaped quickly back as he seized an ironbound stake. + +"Oh, it's you, eh?" he said, on recognizing the intruders. "What's up? +Are you the thieves they're yellin' for?" + +Teddy was hardly able to speak; but he held up the satchel, as he +panted: + +"Hazelton's--they're killin' him--he--wants--this--saved." + +"Yes, I understand it now. Jump into the wagon an' get under the stuff +there. I'll take the valise. Them kind of fakirs are bound to come to +grief sooner or later, an' honest people get into a muss tryin' to help +'em. I'd like to see the fair where them kinds of games wasn't allowed; +but don't s'pose I ever shall, although it's always promised." + +While Mr. Sweet had been grumbling, and at the same time concealing the +satchel under the box containing the snakes, the boys were doing their +best to hide themselves beneath the litter of ropes and canvas which had +been carelessly thrown into the wagon. + +In the meantime the pursuers came up, discovered the unpleasant fact +that the fugitives were no longer in sight, and began to parley with the +barker. + +"I tried to catch 'em," the boys heard the latter say; "but they got +around the tent before I had time to find out what the matter was." + +"They've gone inside!" one of the crowd shouted. "Don't let's allow +swindlers to get the best of us so easy!" + +"That's the way to talk!" another cried. "We'll have 'em out if the show +has to come down!" + +At this moment Mr. Sweet, looking calm and undisturbed, emerged from the +flap. + +"Bring out them boys, or down comes your tent!" a man yelled. + +"I reckon the wisest plan for you to pursue is to wait till I find out +what all this means," the proprietor of the museum said loudly, at the +same time beckoning the barker and the clown to his side. "It looks to +me as if this was the same gang who came here last night tryin' to clean +us out, an' warrants for their arrest are in the hands of the constables +now. I paid one hundred dollars for the privilege of exhibitin' here, +an' that means I'm to have all the protection the managers of this fair +and the authorities of the town can give me. I've warned you off; but if +you still want to finish up the work of last night, an' the constables +don't come in time, there are three of us here who are good for twice +that number of your gang, an' when a man gets a tap over the head with +one of these he's not in it any longer!" + +Mr. Sweet flourished the heavy stake as he spoke, and his employes +showed that they were armed in the same manner. + +"We didn't come to disturb you," one of the crowd said, in a milder +tone, as the greater number fell back before the threats made of +invoking the aid of the law. "All we want is a valise two boys brought +here, for in it is quite a pile of our money." + +"How did they get it from you?" the proprietor of the museum asked for +the purpose of gaining time in the hope the constables would put in an +appearance. + +"We were swindled by a jewelry agent, an' are goin' to get back our +own." + +"Oh, you are, eh? Well, I haven't got the stuff; but if you allow +yourselves to be swindled, will you help matters by turning thieves? You +can sue the man who has done you up; but there's a penalty for stealing, +as you will find out if you keep on in this way." + +The less impetuous among the pursuers understood that the showman was +speaking only the truth, and, now that they had an opportunity for +reflection, began to be ashamed of the part they were playing. One by +one walked away without making any further remonstrance, and in a short +time only a dozen or so remained in front of the tent. + +All these were young men, and several had been drinking, therefore the +danger was not yet past. + +"You stand here and brain the first man who attempts to enter," Mr. +Sweet said, as he disappeared inside the tent. Then hurrying to where +Teddy and Dan were hidden, he whispered: + +"It may be possible that in order to avoid a row I shall be obliged to +let this gang in. There is no one behind the canvas, and you can slip +out readily. Go directly back where you belong, an' if anybody accuses +you of being the boys who brought away the valise deny it. I'm goin' to +make a big bluff about lookin' for constables, an' the minute you hear +me talking, move lively." + +"What about Hazelton's money?" Teddy asked. + +"He'll find it here when he dares to come for it." + +An instant later the fugitives heard him say from the outside: + +"I propose to call for help in case you very respectable young gentleman +should take a notion to break in and steal." + +"All we ask is that you'll turn out them boys," one of the party +replied, angrily, "for, whether it's stealing or not, we're bound to +have that fakir's money." + +"That part of it is nothing to me. There are no boys inside, an' if you +want to go in one at a time, so there'll be no chance of gettin' the +best of me an' destroyin' my property, I don't think there'll be any +objection made." + +"Now's our time before they come?" Dan whispered, as he slipped softly +down from the wagon, and Teddy followed. + +It was but the work of a moment to raise the canvas and step out. There +was absolutely no one in sight. The tent had been erected near the edge +of the grounds, and there was nothing in the vicinity to attract the +sightseers. + +"We'll get over the fence, an' come in through the main gate. It's +better to pay for admission than to let people suspect we were the ones +who have been chased." + +"Go on; I'll stay close at your heels." + +Five minutes later they were walking along the dusty road looking as +innocent as possible, and feeling comparatively safe. + +"Do you suppose any one will know us?" Teddy asked after they had +trudged some distance in silence. + +"There can't be much danger of that. All the crowd saw were our backs, +and, besides, after those fellows cool off they'll be ashamed of +themselves. I don't reckon you'll have any trouble; but I may get it hot +from the boss because I've been away so long." + +"I guess there won't be much danger of that; but if anything should +happen come to my stand. After what has happened I reckon I can afford +to whack up with you on some of the profits, especially since every one +says to-morrow is to be such a big day. Where do you suppose Hazelton +is?" + +"He must have had a chance to get off when the men started for us; but +I'll bet he don't look as nice as he did this morning." + +By this time the boys were at the ticket-office, and, paying the price +of admission, they walked into the inclosure without attracting the +slightest attention. + +On the way to his place of business Teddy chanced to think of the errand +on which they had started out, and he bought a generous supply of +sandwiches for Dan, Tim, and himself. + +When the two arrived at the cane-board business was at its height, and +the clerk and his assistant were having quite as much as they could do +to attend to the customers. + +This saved Teddy the necessity of entering into any explanation while +strangers were near, and he immediately went to work, not having an idle +moment until nearly nightfall, when the greater portion of the visitors +had departed. + +"Where did you and Dan go that you staid away so long?" Tim asked as he +and Teddy began to pack up the stock of canes and knives. + +"Oh, it's a long story; I'll tell you all about it while we are eating +supper," Teddy replied, with a significant look in the direction of the +assistant. + +Tim understood that there was some secret regarding the matter, and he +at once proceeded to get rid of a possible eavesdropper by saying to the +assistant: + +"Here's the money I promised. There's no need of your stayin' any +longer." + +"Shall I come to work in the morning?" + +Tim looked toward his employer, and the latter said: + +"Yes, of course, if it is pleasant weather. Everybody says there'll be a +bigger crowd than ever, an' I reckon we shall have work enough for all +hands." + +The boy had but just taken his departure when Dan approached, looking +very mournful. + +"Have you been bounced?" Teddy cried, excitedly. + +"Not a bit of it; but look here," and Dan held up a straw hat. "That's +poor Sam's! His boat has been found bottom up, an' this, with one of the +oars, was fished out of the creek a few moments ago. While we were +talking rough about him the poor boy was drowning!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +_THE ARREST._ + + +Teddy was dazed by the tidings and apparent proof of Sam's death. +Without being able to explain why, it seemed as if the amateur detective +was not the sort of a boy who might be expected to depart this life +suddenly, and the news saddened him wonderfully. + +"Just think," he said, "the poor fellow wouldn't try to save the women +because of the danger of approaching a drowning person, and in such a +short time he himself is at the bottom of the creek." + +"If he has got any folks some word ought to be sent to them." + +"I never heard him say whether he had or not. Will any one search for +the body?" + +"The man who represents the Davis Company says he will have men out in +the morning, if it is possible to hire any; if not, there will be plenty +wanting a job by Saturday, and he can then get all he wants. It's bound +to be a long search, for there's no telling where the boat capsized." + +Nothing save Sam's untimely fate was spoken of during the time they were +packing up the goods and carrying them to the tent, and then Mr. Sweet, +after having been told the sad news, said, without commenting upon it: + +"You boys had better go to supper now, an' get back before dark, for +there's no knowin' but that some of those fellows who called on me may +be waiting to take their revenge out on you." + +"How did you get rid of them?" Dan asked. + +"That part of it was as easy as rollin' off a log, after you boys were +out of sight. I let 'em in one at a time, an' the chumps never tumbled +to the fact that you had gone under the canvas. They came to the +conclusion you must have climbed over the fence, an' we didn't take the +trouble to show them the mistake. It was a close shave, though. At one +time, when I was talkin' so loud about stealing, I thought we'd have the +toughest kind of a row." + +"Is the money all right?" + +"It's jest where I left it, an' won't be touched till he comes to claim +it, unless you boys want to take charge of the property." + +"Indeed we don't," Teddy replied, quickly. "I've had all I want of such +caretaking." + +"Then go to supper, an' hurry back." + +The boys waited only long enough to stow their goods in the wagon, and +then Mr. Sweet's advice was acted upon. + +As a matter of course Tim wanted to know what the proprietor of the +museum had been talking about, and as they were walking across the +grounds Teddy told the whole story, concluding by saying: + +"It was a little the worst scrape I ever got into; but after the money +had been placed in our hands, and the man who left it went off, we +couldn't do different from what we did." + +"That Hazelton had no business to get you into such a row," Tim replied, +indignantly. "Why didn't he hang on to the stuff, an' take his lickin' +like a man?" + +"I don't think he knew it was to be given to us. The fellow who did it +had seen him leave the satchel with us once, most likely, an' when there +was danger of being robbed, believed we could look out for it again. +It's the last time such a thing will happen, for I'm going to tell +Hazelton that I don't want to be mixed up in his business." + +At this point Dan changed the subject of conversation by speculating +upon the way in which Sam met his death, and this topic was such a +mournful one that nothing else was thought of until the party returned +to the tent once more. + +Then came the question of how much money had been taken in during the +day, and after figuring up the amount he had spent, Teddy reckoned the +cash on hand, announcing the result as follows: + +"Countin' what I paid out, we've taken sixty-one dollars an' seventy +cents since morning. It don't seem reasonable, but a feller has to +believe it after seein' the money." + +"You'll have a much better trade to-morrow, if it is fair, and you're +not recognized as one of the boys who helped to get Hazelton's money +away," Mr. Sweet said, cheerily. "I predict that the receipts will +figure up hard on to a hundred dollars." + +Teddy gasped like a person who is suddenly submerged in cold water at +the thought of earning so much, and he realized that if such should be +the case he would be able to assist his mother very materially. + +"I'll pay you, Tim, before I get so dazzled as to forget it," he said, +with a laugh, and the clerk felt almost as rich as his employer when he +received six dollars and seventeen cents for a day's labor which came +very near being sport. + +"I only wish the fair held on for six months," he said gleefully. "It +seems too bad that there are only two days more, for Saturday never +counts." + +"You can go to the Holtown fair, and try it for yourself. I'll give you +what stock we have left on hand." + +"Then I'll do it," Tim replied, emphatically, and straightway he began +to speculate as to the enormous amount of money he would earn. + +Teddy tied his money in as compact a package as possible, intending to +give it to his mother when she should arrive on the morrow, and Mr. +Sweet had advised that all hands "turn in" early, when the flap was +raised, admitting a man who appeared to be covered with adhesive plaster +and bandages. + +Not until the newcomer had approached within the circle of light cast by +the lantern did the occupants of the tent recognize him as the jewelry +fakir, and Teddy cried in surprise: + +"Why, Mr. Hazelton! We didn't expect to see you to-night!" + +"Did you think I was dead?" + +"It looked as if you would be killed for a certainty, and you did get +pretty well done up." + +"Yes; as the reports of the prize fights put it, 'I'm badly disfigured, +but still in the ring.' Was the money taken away all right?" + +"Mr. Sweet has hidden it." + +"And how did you come out of the scrape?" + +"If it hadn't been for the folks here we should have fared about the +same as you did." + +"I'm sorry, my boy, that you were dragged into the matter, and it +wouldn't have happened if I'd understood what Kelly was going to do. He +knew you could be trusted, and so turned it over; but it was a mean +situation to put you in." + +"It wasn't pleasant for any of us," Mr. Sweet said; "but you can thank +the boys for hanging on to the bag as if it had been their own. Most +fellows of their age would have dropped it long before reaching here. +How did you get off?" + +"When the cry was raised that the money had gone the greater portion of +the crowd started in pursuit, an' my partners and I managed to hold our +own until a couple of constables came up. They took charge of the team, +and gave us a chance to slip through the gates." + +"What are you going to do now? Try it to-morrow?" + +"With this face? Well, I should say not. There is a fellow here who has +bought my right to the privilege, and I shall leave Peach Bottom early +in the morning." + +"That's about the best thing you can do, and I'd advise that you don't +spend much time out of doors until then." + +"I'm not intending to. It was necessary to come here, and, unless you +object, I'll stay a while so's they will have time to sober up a bit." + +"You're welcome to what we've got, even if I don't like your way of +doing business." + +"I want to straighten matters with the boys, and if they----" + +Hazelton did not finish the sentence, for at that moment the canvas flap +was pushed aside and a man entered with an unmistakable air of +authority. + +"Hold on there, friend," Mr. Sweet shouted. "We don't allow visitors at +this time of night." + +"I understand that, but reckon you won't make any very big kick when I +tell you that I'm one of the deputy sheriffs of this county, and have +come to serve a warrant." + +"On whom?" + +"Frank Hazelton, who claims to be an agent for a firm of jewelry +manufacturers. I believe you're the man," he added, approaching the +disfigured fakir. + +"You've got that part of it straight enough, but what am I to be +arrested for?" + +"You are suspected of being concerned in the burglary which was +committed in this town last night." + +Hazelton did not express nearly as much surprise as the boys, who were +really dazed by the announcement. + +"So Hargreaves has finally succeeded," the fakir said half to himself, +and the officer replied, quickly: + +"This has nothing to do with old Nathan's affair, although it does look +as if the two burglaries were committed by the same person." + +Hazelton remained silent several seconds, during which time the sheriff +waited patiently for him to say he was ready to go, and then he asked: + +"Can I speak to one of these boys in private. It has nothing to do with +the charge, but I want him to aid me in getting a good lawyer." + +"I am sorry to say I must hear all that is talked about, however +trifling it may be." + +"Well, I don't suppose it can make much difference," and without rising +from his seat, Hazelton continued, "Teddy, you believe I had nothing to +do with this thing?" + +"I can tell what I heard those----" + +"Don't tell anything yet a while; at least, not now. I want you to do +this for me: After the fair closes go to that merchant who was so kind +to you, and explain to him the whole affair, including your suspicions. +Ask him to direct you to the best attorney in the county; get all the +money from Mr. Sweet that may be needed, and pay the lawyer's fee. Send +him to me as soon afterward as possible. It is nothing more serious than +lying in jail a few days, and that won't be such a great hardship, now +I've got this face on me." + +"Shall I----" + +"There is no need of saying anything more," Hazelton interrupted, +fearing the boy was about to speak of the money the proprietor of the +museum had hidden. "The merchant will understand and advise if you tell +him everything--that is, I think he will; but in case he refuses, talk +with some one else whom you can trust." + +As he finished speaking the fakir arose to his feet, motioned to the +officer, and walked directly out of the tent without so much as bidding +the others goodby. + +No one spoke until after he had been absent several minutes, and then +Teddy asked, with a long-drawn sigh: + +"Do you think he will come out all right, Mr. Sweet?" + +"That's hard to say, for I don't know how much proof they may have +against him. It's his business that has done a great deal toward +inducing a magistrate to issue the warrant, for once a man shows himself +to be a swindler, anything else can readily be believed of him." + +"But what about his money?" Dan asked. + +"That is to be handed over to Teddy." + +"What have I got to do with it?" the boy asked, in amazement. + +"He told us that as plainly as he dared to talk before the officer, and +we'll count it out, after which his stock in trade shall be buried, for +I want nothing to do with it." + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +_A PROPOSITION._ + + +Teddy had the most decided objections to taking charge of Hazelton's +money, and for several reasons. In the first place he did not want to +have the responsibility, and again, the fact of its being in his +possession seemed to make him a partner in the business. + +Mr. Sweet was determined, however. He insisted that Hazelton had stated +this as plainly as was possible under the circumstances, and, despite +the boy's protests, immediately began the transfer. + +"It shall be done in such a way that he can't accuse you of having taken +any," the proprietor said, as he pulled the satchel from its +hiding-place and broke the lock open with a hatchet. "We'll count it in +the presence of all hands, and each one shall give Teddy a written +statement of how much was found." + +An exclamation of surprise burst from Tim's lips as the receptacle was +spread out on the ground, for it appeared to be literally crammed with +money. + +Mr. Sweet separated the silver from the bank notes, spreading both on +the ground where they could be seen by every person present, and then he +counted them slowly, taking care that the spectators were following his +every movement. + +"I make it three hundred an' forty-eight dollars," he announced. "If +there's anybody here who ain't sure that's right, say so now." + +Each member of the party had seen the amount counted, and agreed with +the result as declared by Mr. Sweet, who forthwith wrote the following: + + We, the undersigned, have seen a valise belonging to Frank + Hazelton broken open, and certify that three hundred and + forty-eight dollars, the only money found therein, was handed + by Jacob Sweet to Edward Hargreaves in conformance with the + orders, as we understood them, from the said Frank Hazelton. + +"Now I want every one to sign that," Mr. Sweet said, as he handed his +lead-pencil first to the barker, "and then Teddy and I will have some +proof of the amount." + +It required quite a while for all to conform with the wishes of the +proprietor of the museum, owing to the fact that several of the party +were far from being skillful penmen, but the task was finally +accomplished, and as the money was handed to Teddy, the latter asked, +ruefully: + +"What shall I do with it? I'm afraid of losing so much." + +"That's a risk Hazelton is bound to take. Fasten it in your clothes +somehow, an' be sure you don't get into any row where it can be stolen." + +By the aid of many pins, and with the assistance of both Dan and Tim, +Teddy finally succeeded in disposing of the money about his person in +such a way that it was not an unusual burden, and then Mr. Sweet +insisted that all hands should try to get some rest in order to be fresh +for the supposedly enormous amount of work to be done on the following +day. + +Teddy lay down on the ground with the others, but it was many hours +before his eyes were closed in slumber. Sam's untimely death, the +guardianship of so much money, and his own business affairs all served +to keep his eyes open until nearly midnight, when he fell into a sleep +so troubled by frightful dreams that it was far from being restful. + +It seemed as if he had but just lost consciousness when Mr. Sweet +aroused him with the information that the "big" day of the fair was +breaking. + +"Turn out an' get your breakfast before sunrise, for on this morning the +early bird will pick up many a penny while the lazy ones are yet in bed, +an' fakirs must make hay when the sun shines." + +Teddy was on his feet in an instant, and half an hour later, having +broken his fast, he was at the booth with his clerk and Dan, the latter +volunteering his assistance until the exhibition buildings should be +opened. + +The proprietor of the museum had advised him well; the receipts of the +cane and knife boards were nearly five dollars before more than half of +the booths were in condition for trade, because the trains were running +unusually early in order to accommodate the crowds, and when Dan felt +obliged to leave, business was so good that the proprietor, clerk, and +assistant were all working industriously. + +"If I can get off I'll see you about noon," Dan said, as he walked away, +and Teddy replied: + +"Be sure to come, for mother will be here, and I want you to meet her." + +From that time until nine o'clock the crowd increased in numbers, and as +Teddy said during a lull in business, "it seemed as if the grounds were +so full that no more could get in." + +When Mrs. Hargreaves arrived her son could pay little attention to her, +but he proposed that she should amuse herself by looking at the +different exhibits until nearly noon, when he stated that he would take +an hour off, no matter how great a rush of customers might be around his +booth. + +"I earned sixty dollars yesterday, an' before night I'll have a hundred +more, so there's little doubt that this week's work as a fakir will +enable me to pay all you owe on the house," he whispered, triumphantly, +and his mother walked away, hardly daring to believe what Teddy had told +her. + +During the next hour it seemed as if a steady stream of money was +flowing into the box, and Teddy was feeling confident that Mr. Sweet's +prediction would prove to be correct, when the one especial man he +wanted to see came up with a folded paper in his hand. + +It was the merchant from Waterville, and he said, as he handed the +document to the boy: + +"Here is the receipted bill, and I am more than glad to see you doing so +well." + +"Can I talk with you for five minutes?" Teddy asked, hardly noticing the +paper as he put it in his pocket. + +"As long as you want to. What is the matter? Running out of stock?" + +"Oh, no, your clerk made such a good selection for me that I've got all +I shall need. This is something more important." + +Then Teddy hurriedly told the merchant how and where he had first met +Hazelton; explained fully what the latter's business was; of the +accusations made by Uncle Nathan; what he and Dan had heard and seen, +and concluded by repeating the request made by the fakir as he was led +away to jail. + +"Are you willing to do anything for him?" the boy asked, as his story +was finished. + +"I can't say it is a matter which appeals very strongly to my +sympathies, because of the swindles he perpetrated, but if it is an +unjust accusation something should be done to help him. The one lawyer +above all others who can be of assistance came over with me this +morning. I will see him, and later in the day you shall have a call from +us." + +"Before you go I wish you would take this money," Teddy said, earnestly. +"It is too large an amount for me to carry around, and it will be safe +with you." + +The merchant consented to take charge of Hazelton's ill-gotten gains, +and Teddy felt decidedly relieved when the cash was in another's +keeping, and he had nothing of more value than an acknowledgment of the +same to look after. + +"In this matter I shall recognize no other order than yours," the +merchant said when the transaction was concluded, "and if the fakir +should succeed in regaining his liberty he must come to you for the +necessary document. + +"I don't care how it is fixed so long as the money is not in my hands," +Teddy replied, in a tone of satisfaction, and then he was called upon to +attend to another rush of customers, every one of whom was eager to be +waited upon first. + +Another hour passed, and it was more evident than before that Mr. Sweet +had been correct when he stated the sum which should be taken in at the +cane-board. + +Teddy, having breakfasted early, was so hungry that he was on the point +of going out to buy a supply of sandwiches, when another visitor +arrived. + +This was no less a personage than Uncle Nathan, and he greeted his +nephew with the utmost cordiality, as he said: + +"It looks to me as if you were makin' a power of money here, Teddy. I +had no idea these triflin' games would so attract the people." + +Glad to be on pleasant terms with the old man once more, Teddy stated +that they had been at work very hard since the first train arrived, and +concluded by saying: + +"I took over sixty dollars yesterday, and Mr. Sweet says it'll come near +to a hundred to-day." + +"Sixty dollars!" the old man cried. "Are you telling me the truth, Teddy +Hargreaves?" + +"Of course I am, an' I've got the money in my pocket to prove it." + +"Why, at this rate you'll soon be a rich man, for you don't seem to lose +much of the stock." + +"We buy a good many canes or knives back. When a man puts a ring over +one that he don't want we take it in, and give him five more chances. In +that way there is very little goes out compared to the amount of money +received." + +Uncle Nathan looked around at the players for a moment, and then in a +very confidential tone he whispered: + +"See here, Teddy, don't you want a partner? I'll pay for the stock you +bought, an'----" + +"I've already done that out of yesterday's receipts," Teddy cried. "All +the bills are settled, an' what comes in now is clear profit." + +"But suppose I stood here an' called up the people I know, don't you +think it would make business better?" + +"And if it should, do you think we could attend to more customers? Every +minute I talk with you is so much money lost, for the other fellers +can't pick up rings an' make change fast enough." + +"Does that mean you don't want to go into business with me?" the old man +asked, angrily. + +"No; but it means that there would be no reason for doing such a thing. +I've got no debts, an' there are more customers than can be attended to +on so small a board. If you'd made the proposition last Monday it would +have been different, but now you can't expect me, after taking all the +risk, to divide after the work has been done." + +"Who lent you the money to start, Teddy Hargreaves?" Uncle Nathan cried, +his face growing purple with rage. + +"You did." + +"And how have you repaid such generosity? How----" + +"I gave you three dollars for the use of fifteen two days," was the +prompt reply. + +"But how have you repaid me for remaining inactive after my money was +stolen?" + +"That was something which did not concern me, therefore I had nothing to +repay." + +"It has a great deal to do with you, as shall be shown before this day +is ended, unless you consent to take me as an equal partner in this +enterprise. Your friend in crime has been arrested, and I can swear that +he turned over to you his ill-gotten gains. One word from me at this +time and you will be in the same prison." + +The fact of his having been threatened before made Teddy bold, and he +said, quietly: + +"I won't pay you for holding your tongue, Uncle Nathan, so do whatever +you choose." + +"I will inform the authorities of all I have learned this morning, and +we shall see what the result will be," the old man cried, in a fury, as +he walked away, and despite the bold bearing he had assumed Teddy firmly +believed that if the magistrate who issued the warrant for Hazelton's +arrest should know he was in possession of the fakir's money, he would +be brought before a bar of justice to explain matters. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +WITH THE BURGLARS. + + +It is well to look in upon Sam during his enforced vigil of Wednesday +night. + +For at least two hours after the burglars had departed he thought of +nothing save that he would soon be killed, and, perhaps, devoured by +wild animals. Then the pain in his jaw and limbs became so great, owing +to the tightly bound cords and his inability to move, that his +sufferings overcame the fear to a certain extent, and he had not even +the poor consolation of being able to give vent to an audible groan. + +Notwithstanding the mental and bodily torture he did sleep occasionally +during the night, which appeared to be of twenty-four hours' duration, +and never had he heard a sweeter sound than when his captors approached, +the hum of their voices reaching him before the noise of their +footsteps. + +The burglars were laden with packages of what appeared to be +merchandise, and by the faint light of the coming day Sam could see +that they looked heated and tired. + +"Well, how's our detective?" Long Jim asked, with a laugh, as he threw +himself on the ground by the boy's side. "Has he decided to arrest his +victims, or will he give them a little show of leaving the country?" + +As a matter of course Sam could not make any reply; but the expression +in his eyes must have told of the suffering which he was forced to +endure, for Phil said, as he began to untie the rope holding the gag in +place: + +"There's no need of keepin' him trussed up any longer, an' I reckon +it'll be a relief to have a chance to use his tongue once more." + +Even when he was free the prisoner was unable to do more than roll upon +his side. His limbs were so stiff and cramped that he had no power over +them, and he could not have risen to his feet just at that moment if his +life had depended upon it. + +Jim seemed to think all this was very comical, for he laughed loudly at +the prisoner's helplessness, and suggested that if he intended to follow +the business of a detective to practice remaining in one position in +order to avoid such a complete collapse when fortune should again be so +unkind to him as she had been in this particular case. + +When the burglar's mirth finally ceased the two men lighted their pipes, +and proceeded to enjoy a season of repose after so much fatiguing work, +while Sam was left to recover as best he might. + +Fully half an hour elapsed before he succeeded in crawling to the brook +where he quenched his thirst, and then his one desire was for sleep. + +Stretched out on the ground within a few feet of his captors the +blissful unconsciousness of slumber came upon him, and the sun was high +in the heavens before he awoke. + +Long Jim was seated on the turf, his back against a tree, and a quantity +of food spread out in front of him; but Phil was not in sight. + +"Well, it strikes me you've been takin' things mighty comfortable," the +man said, with a grunt. "Don't give yourself so far over to a life of +pleasure as to forget that I promised to give you the greatest floggin' +of your life before we part, for then you won't be so much surprised +when it comes." + +The sight of the food caused Sam to realize how very hungry he was, and, +regardless of the subject introduced by Jim, he asked, timidly: + +"Can't I have somethin' to eat?" + +"I don't think you can, my son. In the first place you haven't earned +it, an' then, again, my partner an' I may need all the grub we've got on +hand." + +Then, as if reconsidering his determination, the man selected two small +crackers, tossing them to Sam as he cut a slice of boiled ham for +himself. + +"That's more'n you deserve," he said, as the prisoner began to devour +them eagerly; "so don't count on gettin' another bite to-day." + +Sam literally devoured the food, and then went once more to the brook to +wash down the dry repast. + +It seemed as if the crackers increased rather than satisfied his hunger, +and he watched Jim eagerly as the latter finished a generous meal of +meat, cheese, and hard-boiled eggs. + +The burglar lighted his pipe, and paid no attention to the hungry boy, +who now had ample time for reflection. + +He remembered that this was the important day of the fair, and pictured +to himself Teddy and Dan at their work enjoying themselves at the same +time they were making money. Then he thought of what he might be doing +if the detective fever had not taken so firm a hold upon him, and, +despite all efforts to prevent it, the tears coursed down his cheeks, +plowing wide furrows in the dirt with which his face was encrusted. + +This painful revery was not prolonged. Shortly before noon Phil came +into the hiding-place, his face wearing an expression of entire +satisfaction. + +"I reckon we needn't be afraid any one will be here lookin' for us now +our detective has been drowned," he exclaimed. + +"What's up?" Jim asked. + +"Hazelton, the fakir, has been arrested for the burglary at Peach +Bottom, an' men are draggin' the creek to find the body of the boy who +worked for the Davis Boat Company." + +Sam actually shuddered at the thought that people were looking for his +corpse, and it gave him an "uncanny" feeling, this idea that he was +numbered with the dead. + +"When was the arrest made?" Jim asked. + +"Last night. Old Nathan from the Run says the fakir turned over a lot of +money to the boy who was goin' to buy your cane-board, an' it looks very +much as if he would be locked up with the man whom people believe is his +partner." + +"Nothin' said about what the cubs saw at the barn?" + +"Not a word." + +"Then we can count on havin' the balance of this week in which to leave +the country." + +"As much as that, if not more. Another load will get the stuff together; +but I've been thinkin' we'd better bury it here, an' not try to move a +thing for a month or two." + +"In that case we'd be obliged to take that specimen along," and Jim +pointed with a contemptuous gesture toward Sam. "It wouldn't do to let +go of him while there was a chance of his givin' the game away." + +"I'll 'tend to that part of it, an' guarantee he won't be in condition +to make us much trouble," Phil said so confidently that Sam began to +shake as with an ague fit, for it seemed positive to him this burglar +had decided upon his murder. + +"If things were so comfortable like why don't you try to make a dollar, +for I reckon there's a big crowd at the fair?" + +"The grounds are packed; but it ain't exactly safe to do much business," +and Phil told of the assault upon Hazelton. "The whole boilin' of 'em +now think everybody's tryin' to work some swindle," he added, "an' the +consequence is that it would go hard with any feller who should slip up. +We've done enough for one week, an' I'd rather not take chances till +this stuff is off our hands." + +"Do you count on goin' back agin to-day?" + +"What's the use?" + +"I only asked, for you're managin' this whole thing now." + +"My idea was to sneak up alone to-night; take on the balance of the +stuff, an' then lay low till Saturday evenin', when we'll make the big +break." + +"It's goin' to be mighty dull business sittin' here with nothin' to do," +Jim replied, in a tone of complaint. + +"I don't see how we can fix it much quicker, unless we go to-morrow, +while there are so many around." + +It was evident Jim did not relish the idea of leaving everything to his +companion, and the latter so understood the expression on his friend's +face, for he said, angrily: + +"You're cookin' up some foolish scheme now, an' in spite of all I can do +to prevent it we'll probably succeed in gettin' nabbed before matters +are arranged as they should be." + +"Oh, you're too smart, that's what ails you. Take all the soft snaps, +an' leave me here to suck my thumbs without even the chance of movin' +around." + +"If you think it's sich a snap to row up there an' back, why don't you +try your hand." + +"That's jest what I'm willin' to do. Anything's better'n stayin' here, +an' I'd like you to have a taste of it." + +Sam, who was expecting each moment to see the thieves come to blows, +understood at once that this arrangement did not please Phil; but he +made no further objection than to say: + +"If you wasn't so blamed careless I'd like to have you do a share of the +hard work; but it's ten to one you'll contrive to let everybody know you +are there." + +"I may not be so all-fired smart as you think you are, but I ain't quite +a fool. Why, I've managed bigger things than this when you was around +beggin' for something' to eat, 'cause you was too chicken-hearted to do +this kind of work." + +"You'd better not say too much; I've stuck by you when worse men would +have a' given you the cold shake, an' don't intend to take any guff, +especially since I've had sich hard work to get us out of the scrape you +jumped into." + +"I shall talk, an' if you don't want to listen, there are plenty of +places to lay off in outside of this." + +Then the two thieves glared at each other several moments in silence, +and finally Phil said, with a mirthless laugh: + +"We won't fight till this job is finished. Go an' get the balance of the +stuff, an' we'll make a break whenever you are ready; but after one pull +up an' back there'll be somebody besides me who'll think it hard work." + +Then, in order to heal the breach which had opened between them, Phil +produced a suspicious looking black bottle from his pocket, and handed +it without comment to his partner. + +"Why didn't you bring this out before, an' then, perhaps, the business +would 'a' looked different?" Jim growled, as he drank long and deep; +"but it won't make any difference about my goin' up the creek." + +"That's all right; I'm satisfied." + +As the two men began to drink a great hope sprang up in Sam's heart that +they would become so stupefied by the liquor that he might make his +escape. They had not thought it necessary to replace the bonds +which had cost him so much suffering, and at the first signs of +unconsciousness he resolved to make one dash for liberty, either by +taking to the boat, or attempting to make his way toward the fair +grounds on that side of the creek. + +There was no such good fortune in store for the prisoner, however. The +men drank themselves into the most friendly humor, and then the supply +of liquor was exhausted. + +After advising Jim not to start until sunset, Phil lay down to sleep, +and Sam thought it wise to feign slumber also, lest the wakeful burglar +should take it into his head to administer the promised flogging in +order to pass the time more agreeably. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +_A DISASTER._ + + +Teddy was decidedly uncomfortable in mind after Uncle Nathan departed. +By a combination of circumstances which could not well have been +avoided, he had been made to appear as a confederate of Hazelton, and if +all the facts concerning his relations with the fakir should become +known public opinion would he against him. + +He did not allow these forebodings to interfere with business, however. +Customers were plenty; the nickels were coming in as rapidly as he could +make change, and Tim had no hesitancy in saying that Mr. Sweet had set +their receipts of one day considerably too low. + +"We've done twice as much as we did yesterday at this time, an' I'm +countin' on gettin' twelve or fifteen dollars as my share of this day's +work." + +"It looks as though you wouldn't be disappointed, and that's a fact. I +wish I knew where we could get a few more canes, for we've lost quite a +good many this morning." + +"There's no time to go to Waterville; but we can shorten the board by +putting the uprights closer together, an' that'll make the layout look +all right. Here comes your mother, an' if you want to go off with her +I'll promise to keep things goin' here." + +That was exactly what Teddy did want to do. He felt that it was +necessary she should know the true condition of affairs, and he could +not talk with her confidentially near the cane-board, therefore when she +came up he proposed that they walk toward the grand stand, where the +Waterville band was doing its best to put in the shade the performances +of the musicians from the Run. + +"You are looking worried, Teddy," Mrs. Hargreaves said, as they moved +away in the proposed direction. "What is the matter? Isn't business as +good as you expected?" + +"It is a great deal better; but Uncle Nathan has been here again, and +this time I'm afraid it is in his power to do me some harm." + +Then Teddy told his mother all that had happened, explaining in detail +the suspicions which might be aroused against him, and she was quite as +disturbed as he when the recital was finished. + +"I will talk with him myself," she said, after some thought. + +"Don't do anything of the kind, for then he will be worse than ever, +thinking he can frighten me into giving half of all I have made, and +that I won't do, no matter how many warrants he gets out." + +"But Teddy, don't you think----" + +Mrs. Hargreaves was interrupted by a cry from a half-intoxicated man who +halted directly in front of the young fakir, and shouted to some of his +companions in the rear: + +"Here he is! This is the sneak who helped take that jewelry swindler's +money away. I saw him then, an' can swear to his face." + +As a matter of course the tone as well as the words was sufficient to +attract a crowd in this place where the throng was so dense that one +could only make his way from one portion of the grounds to the other +with the greatest difficulty, and for a moment, while Teddy stood unable +to decide what should be said or done, every person looked at him +threateningly. + +"His partner has been arrested, an' we'll serve him in the same way," +the man continued, as he advanced toward the boy. + +"Why do you want to talk to me like that?" Teddy cried, looking around +in vain for a friend. "There are plenty of people here who know me, for +I live down at the Run, an' never swindled anybody." + +"That's a lie!" the man replied, fiercely, seizing the boy by the +collar. + +"It's the truth!" Mrs. Hargreaves cried. "I'm his mother, and we have +lived at the Run ever since he was born. Deacon Jones is our neighbor, +and he can answer for the truth of it." + +[Illustration: "I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance"] + +"I'll see whether he can or not," and the bully was about to drag Teddy +away, aided by his half-intoxicated friend, when a familiar voice from +the outskirts of the crowd cried: + +"Hold on there! What are you about?" + +"I've caught the feller what sneaked away the jewelry swindler's money, +an' am goin' to put him with his partner." + +"You are going to take your hand off his collar this instant, or get +yourself into trouble," and the merchant from Waterville forced his way +through the throng until he stood by Teddy's side. + +"Is that you, Mr. Reaves?" the bully asked, in surprise. "Well, you +don't want to interfere in this business, for the boy is a bad one all +the way through. He was deep enough to get the best of us yesterday; but +he won't be so lucky now." + +"I tell you to let go of him. He is an acquaintance of mine whom I would +trust a good deal sooner than some whom I see now." + +"But you are makin' a big mistake, Mr. Reaves, for I saw him makin' off +with the valise where our money had been put." + +It was evident the bully had considerable respect for the merchant, for +he released his hold on Teddy; but was determined that the boy's +alleged character should be made known to all in the vicinity. + +"I happen to know all about that affair," Mr. Reaves replied, as he led +Teddy and his mother out of the throng, "and if you want the full +particulars of the affair come to my store when you are more sober than +now." + +A very large number of those present were acquainted with the merchant, +and for the majority his statement was sufficient to absolve Teddy of +wrongdoing; but a few, among whom were the intoxicated party and his +friends, vowed to sift the matter more thoroughly before the fair came +to an end. + +Mrs. Hargreaves was terribly excited, and at once insisted that Teddy +should go home with her immediately, regardless of how much money he was +making; but Mr. Reaves said in a matter-of-fact tone, as if such +incidents were of everyday occurrence: + +"It would be foolish for him to do that, more especially since it would +be a tacit acknowledgment of guilt, and, besides, his business here is +too valuable to be abandoned simply because a drunken rowdy chooses to +make trouble. I was on my way to see him; I have found a lawyer who will +under-take Hazelton's case, and he can at the same time give Teddy some +good advice." + +Then the merchant introduced Mr. Harvey as the most prominent attorney +in the county, and, offering Mrs. Hargreaves his arm, added: + +"We will go toward the cane-board, and give them an opportunity to talk. + +"There is a great deal to be said which cannot interest us, and when +they are done we shall be readily found." + +The widow could do no less than comply, and as soon as they were +comparatively alone the lawyer said to Teddy: + +"Now, I want you to begin and tell me the whole story from the time your +money was stolen until this minute. Don't omit any particulars because +you may chance to think they are not important; but give every detail, +and thus I shall be made acquainted with your own case as well as that +of Hazelton." + +Teddy obeyed this command to the letter. He dwelt upon the most minute +transaction or trifling movement at sufficient length to give the +listener a clear idea of all that had happened, and laid bare his own +business affairs, even to the extent of making the lawyer acquainted +with the amount of receipts each day. + +"I don't suppose it makes any difference what I think," he said, in +conclusion; "but I am almost certain Mr. Hazelton did not have anything +to do with the robbery, and even if I had suspected him, that which Dan +and I heard while we were in the museum tent would have convinced me +that the men whom we saw on the creek are the thieves." + +"I believe as you do, my boy, and will send a man to the barn you speak +of this very night, although so much time has now elapsed that I have no +hope of finding anything criminating. However, regardless of what may +happen, I believe we can show that the fakir was not the guilty party, +and, to guard against a possible attack by your uncle, it will be +necessary to know exactly where we can get bail in case you should be +arrested." + +"Then he can take me to jail?" Teddy asked, with quivering lips. + +"If he proves what he claims to know there is no question that he will +be able to cause your arrest; but whether he can send you to prison is +an entirely different matter. I would now like to have a talk with Mr. +Reaves, and shall see you before I leave the grounds. Do not be +frightened; but continue your business as usual, and in a few moments I +will give you full particulars as to what must be done in the event +anything happens." + +Teddy understood this to be an intimation that the interview was at an +end, and he started toward the cane-board, the lawyer asking as he +followed him: + +"How shall I find your friend Dan?" + +"Go down to the exhibit of the J. Stevens Arms and Tool Company in that +yellow-roofed building, and you will see him showing model pocket +rifles. I will go with you if you think there is any chance of missing +him." + +"I can find him without difficulty. Do not leave your place of business +until after I have seen you again." + +By this time they had arrived at the cane-board, where Mrs. Hargreaves, +looking decidedly relieved in mind, was talking with Mr. Reaves. + +The lawyer invited the merchant to accompany him, and as the two walked +away Mrs. Hargreaves said: + +"After talking with Mr. Reaves I will take back what I proposed +regarding taking you home. It is not possible that anything but the +right shall conquer in a case like this, and I believe you will come out +all right, as a boy should who has always been as obedient and loving as +you. It is time for me to be going now; but I will come back again in +the morning." + +"Then take this money with you, for I don't want any more in my pockets +than is absolutely necessary," and Teddy counted out the contents of the +box which served him as a "safe." + +There was but little time for any lengthy leave-taking. The customers +were plenty; Tim and his assistant had been working several hours +without cessation, and Teddy felt that it was his duty to relieve them. + +"You can trust Mr. Reaves, whatever happens," his mother said, as she +kissed him goodby, "and I shall be back to-morrow to learn if you are +all right." + +"Don't worry about me," Teddy replied, cheerily. "Uncle Nathan can't +have everything his own way, and he will soon discover that fact." + +It seemed to Teddy that his mother had but just left him, when a party +of young men who had been talking in an apparently friendly manner +directly in front of his place of business, suddenly began to quarrel, +and before he was aware of what had happened his booth was overturned, +and a fierce battle being waged upon the ground which he fancied +belonged temporarily to him because of the money paid to the managers of +the fair as rent. + +Canes, knives, rings, and timbers were thrown violently about, and, +while trying to save the property, Teddy and his clerk received several +severe blows intended for some of the combatants. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +_A SECOND ARREST._ + + +When the fight began Teddy's first thought was that it had been +prearranged by some one who wanted to do him an injury without taking +the chances of being arrested on a charge of malicious mischief. + +Tim believed it to be a scheme for robbing the money box, and while the +combatants were struggling close around him he emptied the contents into +his trousers pockets, regardless of the chance blows received meanwhile. + +That both were wrong in their conjectures could be told later, as the +fight assumed the proportions of a small riot, and the battle ground was +soon shifted to an open space in front of the exhibition buildings. + +It was nothing more than a causeless row such as is often witnessed at +fairs where intoxicating beverages are sold, and which start from +comparatively nothing, illustrating the proverb: "See what a great fire +a little spark can kindle." + +"This is goin' to knock our hundred dollars in the head," Tim said, +ruefully, as he began to gather up the scattered stock when the +combatants had surged to and fro until they were some distance from the +wrecked cane-board. "It'll take an hour to straighten things out, an' +all that time will be the same as lost." + +"It might be worse," Teddy replied, philosophically, "and, besides, we +shouldn't be able to do any business while that row is going on. If you +hadn't thought of the money it might have been lost, for there were so +many close around me that I couldn't get at the box." + +"Oh, if you want to pick somethin' good out of the trouble, I'll help. +This will give us a chance to shorten the board so the stock won't look +quite so small." + +The young fakirs were ready for business in considerably less time than +they had fancied would be the case. Nearly every one on the grounds was +attracted by the riot, and among those who came to the scene of the +conflict was Dan. + +Instead of watching the struggling, yelling throng, he helped Teddy and +Tim restore the booth to order, and with such aid as the assistant could +give the work was done very quickly. + +Before the spectators had quieted down sufficiently to turn their +attention to sport once more everything was ready for business, and when +the constables had taken the ringleaders in the fight away, money began +once more to roll into Teddy's coffers. + +Before Dan returned to his own work he heard of all that had occurred +since morning, and his comments on Uncle Nathan's behavior were more +forcible than polite. + +"He's an old fool what oughter be rode on a rail till he can't see, an' +I'm goin' over to the Run before I start for home jest to give the +duffer a piece of my mind." + +"I don't believe that would do either you or him any good," Teddy +replied, laughingly. + +"I don't know what effect it'll have on him; but I'll feel a mighty +sight better. He shows himself to be the worst swindler on the grounds +when he tries to scare you into givin' him half you've made, for that's +what his talk means." + +"If he don't do any worse than threaten I won't say a word; but he's so +mad there's no knowin' what'll happen." + +"The lawyer will see that you pull through all right; but if trouble +should come, be sure to send for me. I'll manage to get off somehow." + +With this assurance Dan hurried back to the exhibition buildings, and +Teddy was free to assist Tim in waiting upon the customers. + +During the remainder of the afternoon the young fakirs had quite as much +as they could attend to, and then, just as trade had so fallen off that +Tim could wait upon the customers alone with the aid of the assistant, +Teddy received a call from Mr. Harvey, the lawyer. + +"Come here behind the booth where we can talk without being overheard," +he said, peremptorily, and the boy obeyed at once, asking before the +attorney had time to speak: + +"Do you know if Uncle Nathan is goin' to do anything?" + +"He is certainly trying very hard, and in case he should succeed in +getting a warrant, you will demand of the officer who serves it to be +taken directly to Deacon Jones. Mr. Reaves and I have just had a talk +with him, and in our absence he will render such assistance as you may +require." + +"That sounds as if you believed Uncle Nathan would be able to do as he +threatened." + +"It is well to be prepared for any emergency, since no man can say +exactly what may happen. During the night two constables will go to the +barn on the marshes where you saw the burglars carry some of the goods, +although I do not think any good is liable to result from the visit, for +the men have probably been frightened away by this time. Enough may be +found, however, to prove the truth of your story, and that will be +sufficient to give the thick-headed authorities an inkling that their +judgment as to who the burglars are is not infallible." + +"Have you seen Mr. Hazelton yet?" + +"No; but I shall call on him before going home. The best thing which +could happen now for all concerned would be the arrest of the man you +call Long Jim, and to that end both you and Dan must keep a sharp +lookout, for it is barely possible he may be bold enough to come on the +grounds again." + +"But what could we do in case we did see him?" + +"Follow him quietly until you meet a constable, and then insist that he +be arrested for swindling you out of fifteen dollars. There is not +sufficient proof to connect him with the robbery here or at the Run; but +I will take care that he is held long enough as a common swindler to +enable us to sift the other matter. Let me see, you said Dan was with +you at the time of the transaction in Waterville?" + +"No; it was poor Sam, and now that he is dead I'm the only one who saw +Long Jim there. Do you know if they have found Sam's body?" + +"I think not; men have been dragging the creek all day, and the +probabilities now are that some time will elapse before it can be +recovered. I want you to be very careful during the remainder of to-day +and to-night. Go to the tent where you sleep before dark, and do not +venture outside under any provocation, no matter what message may be +brought." + +"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"Nothing particular; I am only taking precautions, that is all. I shall +be here to-morrow, and will see you then." + +The lawyer turned to go, and had just passed out from behind the end of +the booth when Teddy seized his arm, pulling him back very suddenly. +"There's Long Jim now!" he whispered, excitedly. "See! That man over +there by the striking machine!" + +It was indeed the burglar whose partner had warned him against visiting +the fair, or even showing himself in the vicinity during the daytime. It +could be plainly seen that he was decidedly under the influence of +liquor, and he swaggered to and fro as if in his drunken brain was the +idea that no one would dare cause him trouble. + +"Are you certain there is no mistake?" the lawyer asked, as he watched +the man. + +"I'd be able to recognize him anywhere, no matter how he was dressed, +an' so would Dan, for Sam an' me pointed him out two or three times." + +"Then the hardest portion of our work is finished. I shall have him +arrested on the charge of swindling you, and can arrange it without the +formality of first getting a warrant. It is now more necessary than ever +that you should remain where I can find you readily at any hour of the +day or night." + +"Except when I go for supper, I'll be here or in the tent," Teddy +replied, and then there was no further opportunity for conversation. + +Long Jim had started leisurely, and on anything rather than a straight +course, toward the grand stand, and Mr. Harvey followed so near that he +could have placed his hand on the burglar's shoulder. + +Teddy watched until the two were lost to view amid the throng, and then +said to himself, with a sigh: + +"I'll bet the lawyer can't find a constable, an' that Long Jim gets +clear somehow. But what I don't understand is how he dares to come +here." + +He would have run down to tell Dan of the startling news had it not been +for Mr. Harvey's injunction to remain in the places designated, and he +was so nervous that only with the greatest difficulty could he wait upon +an impatient customer. + +An hour passed, and nothing had been heard from either the lawyer or the +burglar. + +The visitors remained later on this day than usual; but the tardy ones +were departing, and it was with a decided sense of relief that Teddy +began to pack up his stock for the night. Dan arrived before the work +was finished, and his excitement was great when he learned of what had +happened. + +"Can't we go somewhere to find out if the man was arrested?" he asked, +eagerly. + +"I promised to be on hand in case the lawyer should want me." + +"Then we'll get the stuff to the tent, go to supper, an' afterward I'll +snoop 'round to hear the news." + +All hands worked rapidly, and in ten minutes the three boys were at the +boarding-house, eating as if each moment were of the utmost importance, +when they overheard a conversation between two men at the next table +which caused them no slight degree of relief and pleasure: + +"Who was that drunken fellow Constable Ford lugged off this evening?" +one of the men asked, and the other replied: + +"A man who swindled a boy over at Waterville out of fifteen dollars." + +"I didn't see any boy in the crowd." + +"He wasn't there. Lawyer Harvey recognized the fellow, and insisted on +his arrest, sayin' that the 'Squire already knew about the case." + +"I thought at first it might be some one who had been robbing the stores +around here." + +"Oh, the burglar has been caught already, an' laid in jail since +yesterday." + +"But he was only arrested on suspicion." + +"There'll be proof enough to convict him, I reckon, an' if there isn't +he ought to be sent to jail for six months because of what he has done +on the grounds." + +Then the conversation was changed to a subject in which the boys had no +interest, and Dan whispered to Teddy: + +"That settles Long Jim, an' now if your lawyer is as smart as he appears +to be it won't take long to show that Hazelton didn't have anything to +do with the burglar tryin' to get me in jail," Teddy replied, with a +sigh. + +"Of course it will. Things are turning out all right after all, an' if +poor Sam hadn't been drowned we'd have a reg'lar celebration to-night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +_A THIRD ARREST._ + + +When the boys returned to the museum tent from supper they had a long +and interesting story to tell Mr. Sweet; but to their surprise, after +the recital was concluded, he said calmly: + +"I knew all of that except about the burglar's arrest." + +"Why, how did you hear it?" Dan asked. + +"The lawyer an' the merchant have been over here twice since noon, +pumpin' me about Hazelton, an' tryin' to find out how you boys have +behaved yourselves." + +"Why did they want to know anything about us?" Teddy asked, in surprise. + +"So's to make sure your stories were straight. When men like them take +hold of a thing they don't want to run any chances of bein' fooled. What +has been done about Sam?" + +Dan could best answer this question, and he replied: + +"The body hasn't been found; but I heard the manager of the Davis Boat +Company's exhibit say that he should keep men at the work of draggin' +the creek till the work was finished. I can't get through my head how he +happened to capsize the craft, for she didn't seem to be cranky." + +"That is something none of us will ever know," Mr. Sweet replied, +solemnly, and then, as if to change the mournful subject, he asked: "How +did business pan out to-day, Teddy?" + +"I'll count up. We must have come pretty near to what you predicted; but +we would have done a great deal better if it hadn't been for the big +row. That made us lose at least an hour, to say nothin' of havin' six +canes broken just when we needed every one in order to make a good +show." + +Then Teddy and Tim emptied the contents of their pockets on a piece of +canvas, and the other occupants of the tent waited patiently for the +result to be announced. + +"It's ninety-four dollars and forty-five cents," the former said, after +counting the money twice as if doubtful of the first result. "That's a +big sum of money, but there's no chance of a mistake." + +"You can figure that the row cost you six dollars," Mr. Sweet replied, +puffing vigorously at his pipe. "I haven't been 'tendin' out on fairs +these eight years without bein' able to name the amount of such a +business as yours." + +"We'd have had twenty-five more but for that row," Tim said, decidedly. + +"You're wrong there, my boy," and the proprietor of the museum wore an +air of one who "knows it all." "That is about as much as two boys can +take in, an' you don't want to kick, for I've seen lots of fakirs come +on to a fair ground with a better cane-board than yours an' not get +expenses. Be thankful for what you've earned, an' hope that you can pay +expenses to-morrow, for there won't be any too much money floatin' +around after such a business as we've had to-day." + +"I'm more than satisfied," Teddy replied, as he set aside the amount due +Tim, and the latter appeared to be more than contented with having +earned nine dollars and forty-four cents so easily. + +"You can suck your thumbs from now out," the barker said, +philosophically, "for the backbone of trade has been broken, an' the +Peach Bottom fair is already numbered with the things of the past." + +"Don't you think we'll do anything more?" Teddy asked. + +"Oh, yes, there'll be a little to pick up until to-morrow night, but it +won't amount to anything near like what has already been done, although +it'll be clear profit." + +"Since I am more than satisfied, there's no chance of being +disappointed," Teddy replied, and at that moment the head of a stranger +appeared between the flaps of canvas. + +"Is there a boy named Teddy here?" the newcomer asked. + +"Well, what do you want of him?" and Mr. Sweet sprang to his feet as if +anticipating trouble. + +"Nothing more than what Hazelton wanted me to say," was the reply, as +the stranger entered, evidently thinking his search was at an end. + +"And what is that?" the proprietor of the museum asked, motioning Teddy +to remain silent. + +"There's no need of all this secrecy with me, for I'm Hazelton's partner +in everything except the give-away game," the stranger said, with a +laugh. "It appears a man has been arrested by a party whom this boy +Teddy knows, and I'm to say that he is to come to jail very early +to-morrow morning." + +Even now Mr. Sweet's suspicions were not allayed, and he asked, +cautiously: + +"Could you tell me what he's wanted for?" + +"Lawyer Harvey will be there, and is going to talk with him where +Hazelton can hear what is said." + +"Is that all?" + +"Everything; and if you see the boy, can I depend on your repeating the +message?" + +"Under the circumstances there can be no harm in taking every +precaution," the proprietor of the museum replied, "and if your errand +is finished, I may as well say that this is the boy Teddy whom Hazelton +sent you to see." + +"That's all right; there was no need of pointing him out; but since you +have done so, I simply want to ask if he can spare the time to do as +Hazelton and the lawyer wish?" + +"Of course I can," and now Teddy spoke for himself. "Say that if nothing +happens I'll be there." + +"Have you heard whether your uncle has succeeded in getting a warrant?" +the stranger asked. + +"No; but Mr. Harvey seemed to think he might be able to do so, and I +don't want to make any promises that can't be carried out." + +"Then I'll count on your being there, but since leaving the jail I've +heard enough to warrant my advising you to remain under cover to-night." + +"Why?" + +"Those fellows who started the fight when you got away with the money +are swearing vengeance. I don't think it's likely they'll attack the +tent, for, owing to the representations made by the lawyer, there'll be +a big force of constables on duty to-night; but if you should venture +outside the grounds it might be impossible to keep any engagement in the +future." + +"I wasn't thinkin' of leaving here," Teddy replied; but the mere fact +that he ought not do so made him feel very uncomfortable. + +"I couldn't be in any worse fix if I had committed some big crime," he +said, bitterly, "and it is tough to feel like a criminal when a fellow +is only trying to earn honest money." + +"It isn't the rule that honest people fare the best," the stranger +replied, with a laugh; "but I hope you'll come out on the top of the +heap. At all events, my business here is finished and I'll go." + +The folds of canvas dropped behind him, and Mr. Sweet said, musingly: + +"It beats all how you boys have succeeded in getting yourselves mixed up +in this affair. If I didn't know all the circumstances I'd say there +must be some fire where there is so much smoke." + +"The smoke isn't of our makin', an' Teddy's uncle can be blamed for the +most of it," Dan said, angrily. "I only wish he was here to know my +opinion of him." + +"Are you talkin' about me?" Uncle Nathan asked, as he pushed aside the +canvas and entered without so much as asking permission. + +"That's exactly what I was doing," Dan replied, without any show of +fear, "an' if you've been sneakin' 'round to listen, there's no need of +my tellin' over ag'in jest what I think of a man who tries to frighten +an honest boy into givin' up half of what he has made." + +"An honest boy?" the old man repeated, with a sneer, and Teddy whispered +to his friend: + +"Don't say anything to make him angry, for I'll only get the worst of +it." + +"Of course you will," Uncle Nathan replied, having overheard the words. +"When an ungrateful wretch like you conspires to rob the hand that has +fed him he must expect to get the worst of it." + +"I never took from you the value of a cent," Teddy said, stoutly, and +Dan cried as he sprang to his feet: + +"If there has been any attempt at robbery, you're the guilty one, for +you've tried to steal half the money he made by threatening to have him +arrested if he didn't divide his profits." + +"That was only a business proposition," the old man replied, not in the +least abashed, "and he has aided others in stealing from me." + +"What do you want here?" Mr. Sweet cried, angrily. "This is my tent; I +have paid for the privilege of putting it upon these grounds, and have +the right to prevent such old hypocrites as you from entering without +paying an admission." + +"Look out that you do not come within reach of the law," Uncle Nathan +replied, threateningly, stepping back quickly, as if expecting an +attack. "I am here armed with the right to take this boy, and shall +exercise it despite all that may be said. Come in, Mr. Officer." + +In response to this call a constable entered, and Teddy's heart sank +within him, for he understood that the long-deferred arrest was about to +be made. + +"There is your prisoner," the old man said, vindictively, as he +pointed to the boy, "and the sooner you take him to jail where he +belongs the sooner we shall be rid of a viper." + +[Illustration: As the constable approached him, Teddy said, "I demand to +be first taken to Deacon Jones!"] + +Teddy's grief and fear were so great that he could not speak, and even +Dan appeared to have been made dumb by this show of authority; but Mr. +Sweet was somewhat accustomed to such scenes, and he demanded: + +"Show me the warrant. I do not propose to let any one be taken out of my +tent by such an old reprobate as that until I am satisfied it is done +under the sanction of the law." + +"Convince yourself," Uncle Nathan replied, as the constable held out a +folded document. "That will show under what authority we act." + +Sweet read it carefully, and handed it to the officer as he said to the +old man: + +"This shows that the constable has the right to take Teddy to prison; +but as certain as there will be a sun in the sky to-morrow so certain +will I aid him in making you suffer for doing this thing. You know he +had nothing to do with the burglary committed at your store, and have +only had this issued in the hope of defrauding him of what he has earned +honestly." + +"Talk is cheap," Uncle Nathan said, impatiently. "Officer, take your +prisoner away unless you count on stayin' here all night." + +The short parley between the proprietor of the museum and the accuser +gave Teddy time to think of what the lawyer had said, and he added, as +the constable approached him: + +"I demand to be first carried to Deacon Jones'." + +"Now what kind of a bee have you got in your bonnet?" the old man cried, +displaying both surprise and fear. "I say you are to go to jail, an' +that settles it." + +"If he wants to see the deacon I'm bound to take him there," the +constable said. + +"Who's been makin' sich foolish talk to you?" Uncle Nathan screamed. + +"Lawyer Harvey told me what the law was, an' I don't intend to get into +any fuss by deprivin' a prisoner of his rights," was the stolid reply. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +ON BAIL. + + +When Uncle Nathan learned that the celebrated lawyer had made +preparations for this move on his part he was literally beside himself +with rage, and vowed that the warrant should be served and the prisoner +taken to jail immediately, or he would see to it that the constable was +deprived of his commission without delay. + +"I've served the warrant," the man said, quietly, "an' now the prisoner +is in my custody. You have no more to say what shall be done with him +than that goat, so shut your mouth." + +"I'll shut yours so close it won't be opened again for a month!" the old +man screamed. "Do as I tell you, or take the consequences." + +"And I'm goin' to give you the same advice," Mr. Sweet cried, as he +advanced toward Uncle Nathan threateningly. "Now the boy has been +arrested, you are an intruder here, an' I'll give you thirty seconds in +which to get out; after that we'll make an example of such a reprobate." + +"I'll go when I get ready, an' not a minute before. Lay a hand on me +an' I'll have a warrant for you." + +"If you can get it, well and good. I now order you out for the last +time. In thirty seconds I'll guarantee you won't be in condition to +walk." + +While their employer had been speaking the barker and the clown silently +ranged themselves by his side, ready for any commands which might be +given, and the infuriated old man had sufficient sense left to let him +understand it would be unsafe to linger. + +"I'll serve you out before this thing is ended," he cried, shaking his +fist in impotent rage as he went toward the flap, and Dan, who could +control himself no longer, replied: + +"You'd better begin on me, for I'm goin' to tell this thing to everybody +who comes to the fair to-morrow, an' from what I've heard it wouldn't +take much coaxin' to get the band from the Run up here, so's I could +sing it. You're havin' a good time now; but there'll be a different side +to the matter to-morrow." + +Mr. Sweet had followed Uncle Nathan so closely, literally turning him +out, that he could not reply while inside the canvas; but once in the +open air, he made threats that would have frightened any one who did not +know the motive by which they had been inspired. + +Meanwhile the constable appeared disposed to take matters in the most +comfortable manner. He asked Teddy why he wished to see Deacon Jones, +and the boy said: + +"I don't know; but Mr. Harvey told me that if anything happened to-night +I was to see the deacon." + +"Then we'll go there. Are you ready?" + +Teddy thought of his money, and, fearing lest it might be taken from +him, asked if he could hand something to Mr. Sweet. + +"I think not," was the undecided reply. "The deacon will know, an' +whatever he says I'll stand by." + +"Don't bother about anything just now," the proprietor of the museum +said. "We'll all go with you, an' there'll be plenty of time to make +necessary arrangements before you're taken to jail." + +Although the lawyer had assured him he could be involved in no serious +trouble, the mere fact that he was under arrest sufficed to make Teddy +wretched, and like one under sentence of death, he prepared to accompany +the constable. + +Dan and Tim intended to join the party, as was shown by their remaining +very close to the prisoner, and only the barker and the clown were left +to care for the tent. + +Uncle Nathan was met on the outside, and he immediately began to insist +that the boy be taken to jail at once; but the officer paid no attention +to his ravings. + +"If you don't hold your tongue I'll knock the whole top of your head +off," Mr. Sweet whispered, brandishing his fists in the most threatening +manner, and the old man cried, excitedly: + +"Mr. Officer, I call upon you to bear witness that this man is +threatening my life, and insist that you protect me from insult." + +"I've nothing to do with you," the constable replied, with a laugh. "The +warrant has been served, an' all you've got to do is hold your horses +till the case is called up in court." + +"Wait till I get home once more, an' then we'll see that he's got a good +deal to do with the case," Tim cried. "I'll spend every minute from then +for a week tellin' the folks that he only did this to make Teddy give up +half of what he made, an' it'll be a pretty poor kind of a chump who'll +do any more tradin' at his store." + +Uncle Nathan stepped toward the boy who had spoken so boldly as if he +would inflict the direst punishment then and there; but he probably +realized that this would prejudice his case, and contented himself by +saying: + +"We'll see whether the people at the Run will believe a couple of boys +who have been in league with burglars, for you mustn't forget, Tim +Jones, that I have proof you helped Teddy to carry away the burglar's +money." + +"If it'll do you any good I'll own up to the fact now," the boy +replied. "It can't be so bad to do that as it is to arrest your own +nephew because he won't give you half his money." + +"Don't say anything more," Teddy whispered to his friend. "It's only +makin' matters worse, an' he's got the upper hand of us all jest now." + +"I don't know whether he has or not," the valiant Tim replied; "but at +the same time it'll do him a world of good to let him hear the truth." + +At this point Uncle Nathan appeared to understand that he was not coming +out victor in this battle of tongues, and he wisely held his peace, +saying not another word until the little party arrived at the home of +Deacon Jones. + +The manager of the fair was resting after a particularly hard day's +work. More than one of the citizens of Peach Bottom had openly said he +was responsible for the riot by allowing liquor to be sold on the +grounds, and his greeting of the visitors was not calculated to assure +the frightened Teddy. + +"Well, what do you want?" he cried, roughly, as they entered his +library. "If it's anything concerning the fair I won't open my mouth. A +man can't be driven to death with work and then disturbed at all hours +of the night, simply to give the fools in this town a chance to make +trouble." + +"All I know about it is that I arrested this boy, and he insisted on +being brought to you, saying it was Lawyer Harvey's advice," the +constable began, and the angry deacon immediately began to appear +interested. + +"Is this your nephew, Nathan?" he asked of the old man, who now had a +smirk of confidence on his face. + +"I'm sorry he is, deacon, an' after I set him up in business he goes +ag'in me by givin' information to burglars, who rob me." + +"And you have had him arrested?" + +"I felt obliged to in the interest of society." + +"That's a lie," Mr. Sweet interrupted, angrily. "He tried to make the +boy pay him half he earned on the fair grounds, and has done this thing +only because Teddy refused." + +"We won't go into the details of the case, because I am not a +magistrate," the deacon replied, with a majestic wave of the hand. "Mr. +Officer, tell the 'Squire that I am prepared to go bail to any amount, +and ask if the business can't be conducted here, for I'm too tired to go +out of doors unless it is absolutely necessary." + +"What?" the old man screamed. "Will you answer for that little villain's +appearance at court?" + +"That's what I said, Nathan. This affair is none of my business other +than I have stated; but I must say you are goin' a leetle too far, not +only in my opinion, but in that of others, an' it may prove a costly job +for somebody before it's finished." + +The old man was literally speechless. + +He could not understand why the deacon should have turned against him so +suddenly, and the last words made him decidedly uneasy. + +He was not to be silenced without a struggle, however. After the first +surprise had died away he said, with a comical assumption of dignity: + +"I will see whether I'm to be browbeaten in this manner. The 'Squire +does not dare to release the boy on bail, and I shall tell him so." + +With these words he left the house hurriedly, and the constable said to +the deacon: + +"If you will write a line to the 'Squire, saying that you're ready to go +bail, I do not think there will be any necessity of troubling you again +to-night." + +This suggestion was immediately acted upon, and the weary manager of the +fair penned the following words: + + I am ready to enter security to any amount for the appearance + at court of Edward Hargreaves, and if you should not consider + my bond sufficient, I am empowered to say that John Reaves, of + Waterville, will add his name, therefore there can be no good + reason for committing him to jail, since we are both + responsible for the prisoner until the bond can be executed. + + A. JONES. + +Having received this the constable departed with the prisoner and his +friends, and once on the outside he said, confidently: + +"The matter is settled, no matter how much old Nathan may rave. Both Mr. +Reaves an' the deacon have got the 'Squire by the nose, and he must +dance to their fiddlin'." + +That this assertion was correct Teddy realized a few moments later when +he was ushered into the 'Squire's dining-room, and the latter, without +paying the slightest attention to the prisoner, said to the officer: + +"I have just heard that you served the warrant I issued, and then took +the boy to Deacon Jones' house. Is that correct?" + +"Straight as a string, 'Squire. Lawyer Harvey told him if anything +happened to go there, an' I thought he had a right to look up bail +before being lugged off to jail. Here's what the deacon's got to say +about it." + +The 'Squire took the paper which the officer held out, and after reading +it, said benignly: + +"You were quite correct in doing what you did, Mr. Constable. This is +quite sufficient guarantee that he will be produced when wanted, and you +may let him go. Give me the papers, and I will indorse them." + +After this formality had been gone through with the constable said to +Mr. Sweet: + +"That settles the matter so far as Teddy is concerned, and with such men +as the deacon, Mr. Reaves, and Lawyer Harvey to back him, I don't +believe old Nathan will make any too much out of this job." + +"You are free to go where you please," the 'Squire added, and the young +fakir with his friends left the house, wondering very much at the amount +of influence which, unsolicited, had been exerted in Teddy's behalf. + +As for the boy himself, he was far from feeling comfortable in mind. +Unless the burglary could be brought home to Long Jim it did not seem +possible that Hazelton could be set free, and this last was absolutely +necessary in order to establish his own innocence. + +It was a great consolation for him to be with such good friends, +however, and each in turn tried to cheer him, but without success until +Mr. Sweet said: + +"There's no question of your getting out of the scrape with flying +colors, and to celebrate I'm goin' to give a regular dinner party to +every decent fakir on the grounds. Come over, boys, an' help me get +ready. Business has been so good to-day that I can afford to indulge in +a little extravagance." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +_THE FAKIRS' PARTY._ + + +The idea of a party in the museum tent, where there would be no guests +save fakirs, struck Teddy as being very comical, and he laughed heartily +despite the fact that he was still virtually a prisoner in the meshes of +the law; but at the same time he did not think Mr. Sweet was really in +earnest when he made the proposition. + +It was not many moments, however, before he understood that the party +was to be given in the most elaborate manner possible. + +On arriving at the tent Mr. Sweet sent the bouncer out with invitations +to such of the fakirs as remained on the grounds all night, or lived in +the immediate vicinity, and at the same time the clown started for the +town in order to purchase refreshments. + +"Now, you boys are to take right hold an' help the best you know how," +the proprietor of the museum said as he pulled off his coat and vest +preparatory to making ready for the feast. "If them as comes want to sit +down it must be on the ground, owing to the lack of chairs, therefore +it don't make much difference if the table is a trifle high." + +[Illustration: "We have only one knife," said Mr. Sweet, to the +amusement of the boys, "and it must serve for all hands."] + +To the surprise of the boys he proceeded to convert the wagon into a +"festal board" by first pulling it into the center of the tent, and then +removing the sides. Over the floor of this newspapers were spread, and +two plates, three forks, one knife, and four tin dippers were placed on +the impromptu cloth. + +"The provisions will be cut ready for eating," Mr. Sweet explained, "so +one knife must serve for all hands, and it won't hurt any of the crowd +if they're obliged to take turns using the dippers." + +The clown returned before the guests began to assemble. He brought cold +sausage, sliced ham, cold fried potatoes, sweet crackers, cake, pie, and +a quantity of lemons and sugar. + +Contrary to his expectations, Mr. Sweet did not think this assortment +sufficient for the kind of a dinner he proposed to give, and the +messenger was forced to return in search of cheese, pickled pig's feet, +sardines, and milk for the coffee. + +Matters were in a decided state of confusion when the first of the +guests arrived. Mr. Sweet, not troubled by the absence of dishes, had +placed the various articles on the wagon-table in the brown paper +coverings as they had been received, and it was upon his skill as a +maker of coffee that he based his reputation as a host. + +Therefore everything was neglected for this one important thing, and the +proprietor was standing over the oil stove with a look of grave +responsibility on his face when the owner of the envelope game and his +assistant arrived. + +"The boys will take care of you," he said, hurriedly, bending over the +huge pot to inhale the odor, in order to know exactly how the berries +were adapting themselves to the infusion, and, much to his surprise, +Teddy found himself the one especial feature of the party. + +All on the ground had evidently heard of his arrest, for each new +arrival asked concerning the events of the evening, and, what was more +to the purpose, so far as he was concerned, all seemed to think his +troubles were only temporary. + +"You'll come out of it all right," the manager of the largest sandwich +booth said, confidently, as he entered with his hat on one side of his +head and a cigar held in his mouth at an angle of forty-five degrees. "I +heard of your uncle last year, when he tried to make trouble for a +friend of mine in the spittoon game, an' you can bet your bottom dollar +that the people here are not going to take much stock in what he says." + +"It seems they did, so far as to issue a warrant for my arrest," Teddy +replied, with a mirthless smile. + +"But that won't amount to anything. I hear you have got John Reaves as +a friend, an' he comes pretty near runnin' things to suit himself in +Peach Bottom. He helped my friend out of the scrape your uncle put him +into, an' folks say there's no love lost between him an' Nathan +Hargreaves." + +"I want to get out of my trouble simply on the ground that I am not +guilty," Teddy replied. "If I am charged with aiding burglars, there's +precious little consolation in being set free simply because people do +not like the man who made the charge." + +"Nobody believes you guilty, and for the matter of that I'm certain +Hazelton had nothing to do with the job. His game ain't exactly square; +but he don't go around breaking into stores." + +Teddy was on the point of telling that Long Jim had been arrested +because of the burglaries committed; but he remembered in time that this +fact was as yet a secret, and remained silent. + +The man who leased the only "Great African Dodger" was the next to +arrive, and he also seemed to think it necessary to condole with the +young fakir in his troubles, as did the remainder of the guests, and by +the time all were assembled Teddy began to think his experience was only +such as every other person in the tent had undergone at some time in his +career. + +"You see this is the way the matter stands," the whip man said, +confidentially, while Mr. Sweet was bending all his energies to mixing +the lemonade. "People think fakirs are the worst class of men in the +world, whereas, if the matter was sifted right down, they'd find the +class as a whole was honest because they couldn't afford to be +otherwise. I'm not talking now about those who run strong games, like +Hazelton; but ourselves who do a legitimate business. You've got canes +an' knives to sell, while I deal in whips; now all we want is a fair +show to dispose of our goods, an' we know everything must be done on the +square, or there's bound to be trouble sooner or later, consequently we +keep straight, an' take all the abuse which those who have come to +swindle the folks deserve. Why, what, I ask you, would the managers of +these fairs do if they couldn't get us to come up with our money for +privileges? They couldn't pay expenses, an' that's the whole amount of +the story. They run after us, an' yet when we come there's the same old +howl about swindlers." + +The man talked until he was literally forced to stop for lack of breath, +and Teddy had not so much as spoken; but proved a good listener, which +was all his condoler appeared to expect of him. + +When the clown returned with the last installment of eatables there was +nothing to prevent the assembled crowd from partaking of Mr. Sweet's +hospitality. The coffee was done to a turn; the lemonade was neither too +sour nor too sweet, and the proprietor of the museum summoned his +guests to the feast by saying: + +"Now turn to an' fill yourselves up. It ain't often I do this sort of +thing; but somehow or other I've got a reg'lar admiration for our +cane-board fakir, an' after comin' out as he has to-night it seems only +right we should kinder spread ourselves. There's no liquor in the tent, +which is as it should be, for I'm a temperance man, an' them as wants it +can make hogs of themselves somewhere else. Take hold hearty, an' +remember that this layout is in honor of them as did a good turn to the +whole gang by savin' the lives of the women what would likely have +drowned if there hadn't been any fakirs in the country." + +This was an unusually long speech for the proprietor of the museum, and +when it was ended he set an example to his guests by attacking the +eatables as if he had not indulged in a square meal since the fair was +opened. + +Each person present imitated him, and Tim whispered to Teddy, when his +mouth was so full of cake that it was only with the greatest difficulty +his words could be understood: + +"This is what I call a great snap, an' when I've been fakin' at the +fairs long enough to get some money ahead I'll give fellers like us a +good chance to fill up, the same as Mr. Sweet has done." + +Dan was equally enthusiastic. In all his experience, which extended +over two years at the very least, he declared that he had never seen so +much done for a boy, and concluded by saying: + +"There's no question, Teddy, but that you're a big gun here, an' I'll +advise you to keep right on in this business." + +"I've had enough of it," was the reply. "Such times as these are very +nice; but think of what may happen when I'm brought up for trial. Who +knows but Uncle Nathan can succeed in makin' folks think I'm guilty of +helpin' the burglars, an' then what'll be the consequences?" + +"I know he can't do anything of the kind, an' that's enough," was the +confident reply; but yet it failed to satisfy the boy who had been bound +over to appear at court. + +The entire party appeared to be having the jolliest kind of a jolly +time; but ever before Teddy's mental vision came the picture of himself +in prison, and even the fact that Long Jim had been arrested failed to +render him confident as to the final result. + +Again and again was he called upon to reply as one after another wished +him good luck in the case, and the amount of lemonade which was consumed +on each occasion caused the clown to make a third visit to the town in +order to purchase the wherewithal to satisfy the demands of the guests. + +It was nearly midnight when the last of the revelers departed and the +boys were called upon to help set the interior of the tent to rights. + +"It hasn't been sich a bad time after all," Mr. Sweet said, musingly, as +Teddy and Dan aided him in wheeling the wagon into place. "A man can +remember an evening like this with pleasure, when liquor has been kept +out of the bill of fare, an' who shall say that we're not better off +than if our legs were so tangled as to make walking an impossibility?" + +The barker's red nose was slightly elevated, much as if its owner could +explain why spirits were superior to lemon-juice and water; but Mr. +Sweet's question remained unanswered, and the party set about making the +final preparations for the night. + +"Poor Sam ain't here to be troubled by the goat, so we can set him +loose," the proprietor of the museum said as he unfastened the rope from +the neck of his pet. + +"He'll have a great time pickin' up odds an' ends between now an' +daylight, an' then feel so lazy that it'll be hard work to make him do +his tricks." + +"Do you suppose Uncle Nathan will be around in the morning?" Teddy asked +as he lay down by the side of Dan and Tim. + +"Not a bit of it; he got sich a dose to-night that I don't count on +seem' him ag'in till this fair is ended, an' then I'm going to take a +trip over to the Run for the express purpose of givin' him a piece of +my mind." + +"But suppose he should come, what shall I say?" + +"Pay no attention to the old fool, an' above all, don't let him trap you +into talking. Mr. Harvey will be here to-morrow, an' he can post you +better than ever I could." + +"Don't fuss about the thing at all," Dan replied, philosophically. +"There's plenty here who know you hadn't anything to do with the +burglaries, an' he won't have as much as a friend by the time the trial +is ended." + +"Dan comes pretty nigh being right," Mr. Sweet added, "an' now I want +all hands to go to sleep, for there's one more day of this fair, an' we +need to be somewhere near fresh, because to-morrow the dollars won't +tumble without a good deal of coaxing. Good-night." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +_IN HIDING._ + + +That the incidents may be related as nearly as possible in the order of +their occurrence it is time to return to the spot where the burglars are +in hiding. + +It will be remembered that we last saw Sam after Phil had fallen asleep, +and he was feigning unconsciousness lest Long Jim, having nothing else +to do, should take it into his ugly head to administer the promised +flogging. + +Although Sam's eyes were apparently closed, he took good care to keep +strict watch on the burglar; but for what seemed a very long time he saw +nothing to cause any apprehensions, and was just on the point of going +to sleep in reality when Jim asked, as he gave the boy a vicious kick on +the side: + +"Where's the grub?" + +"I don't know. You put it away after finishing your dinner." + +"Oh, I remember now," and the burglar, still considerably more than half +stupefied by the amount of liquor he had drunk, arose to his feet so +unsteadily that it seemed as if only the lightest touch would be +necessary to send him headlong. + +After a short search the man found that which he wanted, and proceeded +to make a hearty meal, regardless of the hungry glances which the boy +bestowed upon him. + +"Don't think I'm goin' to give you any," he said, with a leer, as he +concluded the repast, "You're lucky to be alive, an' that's enough for +sich a duffer. I'll put this stuff back, an' you'll have every bone in +your body broken if you so much as smell of it." + +Sam made no reply. He had already learned that there are very many times +when silence is indeed "golden." + +"I've made up my mind to see what can be done at the fair," Jim said, as +he lighted his pipe with great deliberation. "Phil thinks he's the only +smart man in the world, an' it's time to show him what a mistake he's +been makin' all his life. Why don't you say something?" he cried, +angrily, as Sam continued silent. + +"I don't know what you want me to say. If you're goin' that settles it; +I sha'n't be any better off." + +"You can stake your life on that, for while I'm a gentleman an' behave +myself as such, Phil is a reg'lar brute, an' will make things mighty +uncomfortable for a sneak like you." + +Sam thought, but was very careful not to say, that it was hardly +possible for a boy to have a worse master than the alleged gentleman in +front of him, and the burglar continued, as he arose to his feet: + +"I want to leave without wakin' Phil, but you must do it as soon as I +push off from the shore, for we don't intend to give you a chance of +slipping away. I shall watch mighty close, an' if he isn't on his feet +before I'm a dozen yards out into the creek you'll get a reminder from +this," and the man ostentatiously displayed a revolver. + +"I don't count on runnin' off," Sam, replied, thoroughly frightened by +the threat. "I can stay here till you get ready to let me go, because +I've got to, an' I'm not sich a fool as to git into any worse scrape." + +"Now you're talkin' somethin' like sense, an' if you keep on in this way +I'll see to it that you don't have any harder time than a detective +oughter expect; Phil will be on his ear when he knows I've gone, an' you +must tell me all he says. Remember that if he isn't on his feet before +I've got beyond range, I'll use your head for a target." + +With this threat the burglar staggered out of the thicket, and Sam began +to speculate as to whether he should make one supreme effort to escape +before his other captor awakened. + +A second glance at the weapon decided him in the negative, however, and +he meekly stepped to the edge of the woods in order to obey the +instructions given. + +Despite Jim's apparent intoxication he watched the boy closely, still +holding the revolver ready for use, and after pushing the boat into the +stream he cried: + +"Now go ahead, an' let me see him in about two minutes, or I'll fill you +full of bullets." + +If Sam had been a brave boy he would have made a dash for liberty at +this moment; but he was in nearly every sense of the word a coward, and +obeyed the order literally. + +"Who's there?" Phil asked, angrily, as the boy shook him vigorously. + +"Jim told me to make you get up, or he'd shoot," Sam replied, meekly. + +"Make me get up? What time is it?" + +"I don't know; but it doesn't seem to be more than three o'clock." + +"Where's Jim?" + +"Jest startin' for the fair grounds, an' if you don't show yourself +pretty soon he's sure to shoot me." + +"There wouldn't be any particular harm in that, for you deserve it; but +it can't be possible the fool is goin' to show himself in daylight when +more than one is lookin' for him." + +"That's what he said," and Sam, fearing lest the half-drunken burglar +would begin his pistol practice, seated himself behind the largest tree +that might protect him from the bullets. + +Now that Phil was awake, he did not lose any further time in talking, +but ran out to where he could command a view of the creek, and once more +Sam had an opportunity for escape which he did not dare to embrace. + +"Come back here, an' don't make a fool of yourself," Jim's partner +cried, angrily, as he saw the man pulling leisurely from the bank. + +"What's crawlin' on you? Don't I know my business?" + +"Not if you count on goin' up there before dark." + +"That's jest what I intend to do, so don't screech so much." + +"Come back, I tell you, or it'll be all up for both of us!" + +"I've been in this business long enough to know it," was the reply, as +Jim continued to row, increasing each instant the distance between +himself and the shore. + +"Now, don't spoil a good thing," Phil said, pleadingly, and, +understanding that this conversation might be continued for a short +time, Sam plucked up sufficient courage to make an attack upon the +provisions. + +He took from the general store a large piece of cheese, some crackers +and as much meat as he believed would suffice to make a hearty meal, +after which he hid the lot near the tree behind which he was hiding. + +Then he crept back to his former position, and listened to the +conversation between his captors. + +Phil alternately coaxed and threatened his partner; but all to no +purpose, as could be told by the tones of the latter's voice while he +pulled up stream, and the baffled burglar returned to the camping place +absolutely furious with rage. + +"This comes of my bein' so foolish as to bring that fool liquor," he +said half to himself. "It's mighty lucky he didn't know I had more than +one bottle." + +Then he took from one of his pockets a second flask, refreshing himself +with a portion of the contents before asking: + +"What did he say to you?" + +"Nothin' except that he was goin' up to the fair," Sam replied, timidly. + +"But what made him tell you to waken me?" + +"I s'pose that was so I couldn't have a chance to run away." + +"What else did he say?" + +"That I was to tell him jest how you took his leavin'." + +"Well, if he's lucky enough to get back, tell him I said he was the +biggest fool that ever walked on two legs. Them chums of your'n are sure +to spot him, an' it's ten to one he's pinched before sunset." + +Sam did not understand what the man meant by the term "pinched," but +under the circumstances he hardly thought it safe to inquire, and the +angry burglar continued: + +"We'll make ready to get out of this if he isn't back by daylight, an' +while there's nothin' else to do you'd better put that stuff under +ground, for there's no knowin' now when we'll be able to take it away." + +The spade was near at hand ready for use, and while Phil alternately +smoked and drank from the bottle, Sam set about burying the plunder. + +This man was quite as hard a taskmaster as the one who had just +departed, and the boy was forced to work as he had probably never done +before, until sufficient of an excavation had been made to conceal the +goods. + +Under the direction of the burglar Sam covered the different packages +with earth; did his best to hide all traces of his work, and when it was +so dark that he could no longer see to move about was allowed to rest. + +During this time Phil had been drinking and smoking, with the result +that he could hardly speak plainly when the task was accomplished, and +so intoxicated did he appear to be that Sam thought it safe to eat the +food he had concealed. + +"Keep on talkin' so's I'll know where you are, or on goes the ropes an' +gag again," Phil cried, and the boy obeyed, repeating over and over the +same words in order to satisfy his suspicious captor. + +After eating a hearty meal, Sam succeeded in mustering sufficient +courage to admit of his thinking about attempting to escape. + +From the manner in which the burglar spoke he knew it could not be very +much longer before the man would be so completely under the influence of +liquor as to render him helpless, and he said to himself: + +"If I could get the rope around his hands an' legs I'd soon be out of +this place." + +"What's that you are saying?" Phil cried, angrily. + +"Nothin'; I was only doin' as you told me, talkin' so's you'd know where +I was." + +"I'll save all that trouble," and the man lurched to his feet as he +picked up the rope. + +"Please don't tie me ag'in," Sam pleaded. "I won't try to git away." + +"I'll go bail that you don't after I'm through with you. Put out your +hands." + +Phil was yet capable of mischief, even though his brain was clouded, and +Sam did not dare to disobey. + +He suffered himself to be tied without making any remonstrance, and as +the burglar staggered to his former resting place, the boy tested the +bonds. + +Previously he had been lashed in such a manner that it was impossible to +move hand or foot, but now he soon realized that he could do both, and +the happy thought came that he might free himself with but little +difficulty if a favorable opportunity for escape should present itself. + +"Now you're fixed," Phil said, half to himself, "an' I may as well take +things comfortable till we're certain that that fool of a Jim is +settled." + +"Are you goin' to leave here to-night?" Sam asked, more for the purpose +of learning how far the man was on the road to intoxication than for +information. + +"If he ain't here by twelve o'clock we'll know the jig is up, an' skip +so's to be out of the way before any one can come sneakin' around for +the stuff." + +"Then if Jim isn't back by that time, an' he keeps on drinkin', I'll +take all the chances," Sam said to himself, and from that instant he +strained every nerve to learn how nearly the burglar had succeeded in +making a worse brute of himself than nature intended. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +_A FAILURE._ + + +Tired though Teddy was, a long time elapsed after the conclusion of the +fakirs' feast before he could close his eyes in slumber. + +Now that the excitement of the party had died away, the fact that he was +a prisoner, suffered to remain outside the prison only because men of +wealth were willing to guarantee he would respond to the call of the +court, came into his mind even more vividly than at the time of the +arrest, and despite all the words of cheer which had been spoken he +really began to believe Uncle Nathan could show plausible proof of his +guilt. + +Under almost any other circumstances he would have speculated upon what +should be done with the large amount of money he had already earned, and +rejoiced at the thought that he could supply his mother with what she +might need for the present, at all events. + +The profits of the cane and knife boards were hardly thought of on this +night while the one painful fact stood before him so prominently and +menacingly. + +His companions had been asleep many hours before slumber visited his +eyelids, and so heavy was his heart even while in dreamland that he +awoke with the first dawn of day, and aroused the others to the last +day's work they would be called upon to do at the Peach Bottom fair +during the present season. + +"Why is it that you have turned out so early?" Mr. Sweet asked, in a +sleepy tone, rising to his feet as the only effectual method of driving +the drowsiness from his eyelids. + +"I sha'n't feel much like sleeping till I know how the case is coming +out," Teddy replied, sadly. + +"There is no need to worry with such friends as you have got. Put it +right out of your mind until business closes to-night, for there's a big +pile of work to be done if you expect to make much money." + +"I wish I could," Teddy said, with a long-drawn sigh as he aroused Tim +and Dan. + +Half an hour later the three boys were eating what it was believed would +be their last meal in the very unsatisfactory boarding-house, and +Teddy's place of business was the first opened on that morning. + +There were no more early visitors; but the fakirs who had been present +at the feast on the evening previous gathered around, all appearing +very eager to spend money, and trade was as lively as it had been on any +other morning. + +The crowd bought rings and threw them recklessly until each man had +spent considerably more than a dollar, when Teddy suddenly realized that +this sudden passion for canes only arose from a desire to aid him. Then +he said, decidedly: + +"There's no need of you fellows doin' this. I know you want to see me +out of the scrape; but I've made a lot of money already, an' don't want +to take yours." + +"You can't have too much, my boy," one of them said with a laugh, "and +we want to see you go away with a pile. Trade has been boomin' for all +hands, an' it would be kinder rough if we couldn't have a little fun now +the fair is the same as over." + +This did not satisfy Teddy, and he continued to expostulate against the +generosity; but all to no purpose. The fakirs played until a sufficient +number of visitors had arrived to warrant their opening the other +booths, and then Tim and Teddy were left alone, Dan having started for +the exhibition building some time previous. + +Until ten o'clock there was no more than work enough to keep one boy +moderately busy, and Teddy experienced a deep sense of relief as Mr. +Harvey came up to the stand with a cheery "good morning." + +"I hear that your Uncle Nathan succeeded in carrying out his threat," +the visitor said, as if speaking about what was a very trifling matter. + +"Yes, sir; an' do you think he can send me to prison?" + +"Not a bit of it. You are under bail, and I venture to predict that he +will not carry it to court, for he has sufficient sense to know it may +prove a very expensive job. We sent our men to the barn on the marshes +last night." + +"What did you find?" Teddy asked, eagerly. + +"More than I expected. There were no goods in the building, but some +have evidently been buried there, and this fact, together with the +evidence that boats have been drawn up on the shore recently, proves +your story as to what was seen when you boys followed the two men to be +correct." + +"The other fellow has run away, I suppose." + +"I think he is yet in the immediate vicinity, otherwise Jim would be +willing to talk." + +"Have you seen him since he was arrested?" + +"I have just come from the jail. I told him of the evidence we already +had to connect him with the burglary, and that we should push him hard +in the interest of you and Hazelton. He understands that there is an +opportunity to turn State's witness, but he absolutely refuses to speak +on any subject. Therefore I fancy his partner has not yet got away." + +"Then there has been no good done in arresting him," Teddy said, +mournfully. + +"That is where you are making a mistake. I have prepared an affidavit +for you and Dan to swear to, and shall endeavor to have a warrant issued +at once charging him with burglary, so he can't give us the slip in case +he gets clear in the matter of swindling." + +"Do you want Dan an' I now?" + +"Yes; go after him. I will only keep you ten or fifteen minutes." + +Teddy turned to go toward the exhibition buildings, but halted an +instant to ask: + +"Have you seen my uncle this morning?" + +"No, but I shall do so later in the day, and after we have a little +conversation I do not think he will be so eager to see you in prison." + +The lawyer's confident manner had very much to do with taking the load +of sorrow from Teddy's mind, and he looked almost cheerful as he asked +of the manager of the Stevens exhibit that Dan be allowed to accompany +him, explaining the reason for making the request. + +"Of course he can go," the gentleman replied, readily. "Trade won't be +so good to-day but that he can be spared as well as not, and even if it +was rushing, he should have permission to leave." + +When the boys were at the cane-board once more Mr. Harvey hurried them +away to the magistrate's office, and there a long document was read, +which described in detail all they had seen on the day when Sam first +gave an exhibition of his skill as a detective. + +They marveled not a little that the lawyer should have remembered so +well every trifling incident. Nothing, however apparently unimportant, +had escaped him, and, as Dan said: + +"It is written down better than if he had really been with us." + +This document was sworn to and signed by both, after which Mr. Harvey +told them that they might return to work, adding as he turned to Teddy: + +"The man who has been arrested on your complaint will have a hearing +to-morrow, and it is absolutely necessary you should be at this office +as early as nine o'clock. I don't know whether Dan will be allowed to +tell what he has heard Sam say regarding the matter, but he had better +come with you." + +"I'll be on hand," the young fakir replied. "Do you know when I'm to be +tried?" + +"That case won't come up for some time in view of the evidence your +lawyer is collecting," the 'Squire said. + +"Don't worry about it, for I think the real burglars will soon be +caught." + +"An' does Mr. Hazelton have to stay in jail all the time?" + +"There is no other way out of it, since he hasn't got friends who can go +bail for him." + +Teddy wanted very much to ask permission to see the prisoner, but +inasmuch as he was accused of being equally guilty with the fakir it +hardly seemed just the proper thing to make the request, and he left the +office, followed by Dan, who said, as they gained the open air: + +"You ain't goin' to have half so much trouble as you think, Teddy. +Anybody can see that even the 'Squire is on your side, although he did +issue the warrant, an' the proof must be mighty strong to make any of +'em believe you did anything against the old miser. But this keeps us +here on the grounds another day, doesn't it?" + +"Yes, an' if Mr. Sweet packs up his tent to-night, we'll have to hunt +for a place to sleep in the village." + +"That don't worry me very much. I've made a good week's work out of the +fair, an' can afford to spend a little money." + +"I shall pay all the bills, of course," Teddy replied, quickly. "It +wouldn't be any more'n right because you are goin' to stay to help me." + +Dan was quite positive he would pay his own bills, and his companion +equally certain he should not; but there was little chance for +discussion, since they had arrived opposite the grand stand by this +time, and were hailed by Deacon Jones, who looked as if he considered +himself the one important personage on the grounds as he said: + +"I want both of you boys to be here at exactly two o'clock. Don't fail +to come, no matter how much business you may have on hand." + +"What's the matter?" Teddy asked, immediately thinking some new trouble +threatened him. + +"There will be plenty of time for explanation after you get here," was +the mysterious reply, and then the deacon signified that the interview +was at an end by turning to speak with some gentlemen who had been +watching the boys closely. + +"What do you suppose is up now?" Teddy asked with a sigh, and Dan +replied, mournfully: + +"I'm sure I don't know," but in his own mind he was convinced that the +deacon intended to surrender the boy whose surety he had appeared +willing to become on the evening previous. + +Teddy was so disturbed by dismal forebodings that Dan was very careful +to hide his suspicions, since it could do only harm to discuss them, and +the two parted, feeling as if Uncle Nathan had outwitted Mr. Harvey. + +On retuning to his place of business Teddy did not have the heart to +wait upon the customers, and after telling Tim what had been said to +him, he added: + +"I can't work; it's no use to try. There must have been something new +come up, an' I won't be able to show that I'm innocent of robbing the +store." + +Dan could give him no consolation, for he also felt that matters were +approaching a dangerous crisis, and he simply said: + +"Loaf around, old fellow, an' I'll look out for the work here. Try to +put it out of your mind, for things won't be made better by worryin' +over 'em." + +Just at this moment Teddy's mother arrived. She had heard all the +particulars concerning the arrest and subsequent release, therefore +began at once to sympathize with her son. + +"Then you know what the deacon is goin' to do?" Teddy asked. + +This was something of which Mrs. Hargreaves was ignorant, but upon being +told, appeared even more distressed than her son, thus increasing +instead of lightening his troubles. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +_THE TESTIMONIAL._ + + +It was impossible for Teddy to follow Tim's advice to "loaf around." + +His heart was so full of sorrow that his greatest desire was to go where +those who might believe he had been a partner of the burglars could not +see him; but since that was impossible, if he intended to obey the +deacon's injunctions and present himself at the grand stand at the +specified time, the next best thing was to remain behind the booth where +his mother tried her best to cheer him. + +"It can't be possible that anything to your disadvantage has occurred, +Teddy," she said as she held his hand for mutual sympathy. "Mr. Reaves +would have sent me word at once if that had happened." + +"Perhaps he doesn't know about it. Uncle Nathan may have been talking +with the deacon again, an' turned him against me." + +"I don't believe it would be possible for him to do such a thing. His +reputation is not so good that people could put faith in all he says, +more especially in regard to this case." + +"Then if he didn't do it some one else has, an' that makes it all the +worse," Teddy replied, as he tried to force back the tears. + +At this moment the sorrowing ones were startled by hearing the voice of +the man whom they had every reason to call their enemy, and an instant +later Uncle Nathan stood before them. + +"Well," he said in what sounded more like a snarl than anything else, +"you see the old skinflint did jest what he promised, an' he'll see to +it that the deacon don't stay on your bail very long unless I get my +rights." + +"What do you mean by your rights?" Mrs. Hargreaves asked. + +"I lent this ungrateful boy the money to start him in a business where +he's made more in a week than I ever could in a year. Then he helped +people to rob me, an' after all that I made what any man must call a +fair offer. See how much I've lost by him, an' then think of my offerin' +to straighten everything out by goin' in as his partner." + +"Why didn't you do this before the fair opened?" + +"I couldn't tell how it would turn out," the old man began, and then +realizing that he was admitting something to his discredit, he added, +quickly, "I mean I hadn't lost my money then, an' never suspected how he +would wrong me." + +It seemed as if these last words drove Teddy to desperation, and he no +longer-remembered the respect due to age. + +"Look here," he cried, angrily, rising, and standing directly in front +of Uncle Nathan, "if you believe I'm a burglar, you can't want to be my +partner. It was only after the fact of my having made considerable money +was known that you offered any trade. If the venture had been a losing +one you are the last person who would have taken hold of it. Now I'm +under arrest on a charge made by you, who know I am innocent, an' we'll +put an end to all this talk. Don't come where my mother and I am; do the +very worst you can, an' some day I'll have my innings." + +"You threaten, eh?" + +"That's exactly what I'm doing. I have leased this piece of ground until +to-morrow, and warn you that it'll be mighty uncomfortable if you show +your nose here again. Go now an' go quick!" + +"That's right, Teddy," Tim shouted in a tone of delight from the +opposite side of the booth. "Give it to him hot, an' I'll do my share. +If you don't want to tackle the job till after the trial, say the word +an' I'll sail in, for it gives me a pain to see him around." + +Teddy made no reply to this generous offer; but Uncle Nathan stepped +back very quickly as if fearing an immediate attack. + +"You won't be so bold to-morrow," he snarled, shaking his fist in +impotent rage, and then he disappeared from view amid the crowd that had +begun to gather. + +Both Teddy and his clerk thought it very singular that business should +be so good on this day, when the majority of the other fakirs were +comparatively idle, and also in view of what had been said against the +proprietor of the cane-board. + +Yet the people gathered around by scores, all intent on patronizing the +boys, and at the same time embracing every opportunity to display their +good will. + +Teddy and his mother remained partially screened from the gaze of the +curious until nearly two o'clock, when Dan, looking decidedly troubled, +arrived. + +"I suppose we've got to go to the grand stand an' find out what the +deacon wants," he said, mournfully. "My boss told me that we must be +there on time, an' we might as well start." + +"I want to have it over as soon as possible," Teddy replied. "Nothin' +that comes can be any worse than waitin' here thinkin' of what may +happen." + +The two boys walked either side of Mrs. Hargreaves as they went to meet +the deacon, and it seemed very much as if the majority of the people +present knew what was about to occur, for the sad-visaged party was +followed by crowds of the visitors as they walked steadily onward. + +It was exactly two o'clock when they arrived at the stairway leading to +the grand stand, and there they were met by the leader of the band from +the Run, who said with a mysterious manner as he opened a gate leading +to the track in front of the judges' stand: + +"You are to come this way." + +"Where's the deacon?" Teddy asked. + +"Waiting for you." + +Without further explanation the musician led the three to a spot where +all could see them, and to the intense surprise of the sorrowful-looking +party, the throng assembled on the benches greeted them with the most +hearty applause. + +"You are to come with me, Mrs. Hargreaves," the conductor said, as he +escorted her to one of the front seats, and Teddy and Dan stood as if +stupefied, gazing in dismay at the sea of faces in front of them. + +Before the boys had sufficiently recovered from their bewilderment to be +able to speculate upon what was to happen Deacon Jones came down the +steps until he reached a place where all could see him and there began a +speech which caused at least two of that assemblage to gaze at him in +open-mouthed astonishment. + +The manager of the fair did not intend to neglect any opportunity of +making himself conspicuous, and he delivered an eloquent address, +looking first at the boys and then at the audience, which cannot be +given here because of lack of space. + +He first explained to the spectators that Teddy had taken upon himself +the business of fakir simply that he might aid his widowed mother. Then +he detailed the loss of the fifteen dollars, and finally broached the +one important matter, that of the scene on the creek, when the three +women were rescued from drowning. + +By this time the cheeks of Teddy and Dan were flaming red, and if he had +been charging them with the most atrocious crimes they could not have +looked more guilty or uncomfortable. + +"As you all know," he said, in conclusion, "we have met here to see +bravery and a spirit of self-sacrifice rewarded. On behalf of the ladies +whose lives were saved by these little heroes I am about to present +Edward Hargreaves and Daniel Summers with one hundred dollars each. In +addition to that amount the managers of the fair and several gentlemen +who do not care to have their names made public, have made up a purse of +one hundred and eighty dollars to be divided equally between them. It is +most gratifying to me that I have been selected as the instrument +through whom this testimonial is presented, and in behalf of my brother +officers as well as myself I will state that these brave boys have the +freedom of the grounds whenever the Peach Bottom fair is open." + +As he concluded, the deacon walked with a majestic bearing down to the +bewildered boys, presented each with a well-filled pocketbook and then +waved his hand as a signal for the band, every member of which did his +best to make the music heard above the rounds of applause intended for +the blushing fakirs. + +In the meantime the people came down from the benches to congratulate +the life-savers, and for fully an hour the two were forced to remain +there listening to words of praise which they felt were not warranted by +their exploit on the creek. + +Among the most welcome of these enthusiastic visitors was Jacob Sweet, +and he said, heartily: + +"I heard of this little performance jest in time to get here before that +long-winded speech was begun; but what pleases me the most is that I was +ahead of the whole gang, an' started our little blow-out when it wasn't +known you had so many friends. I'll see you to-night, of course, an' I +must go now, for the bouncer has been around tellin' that you've been +sleepin' in my tent, an' I count on a good payin' crowd this afternoon." + +It was considerably past three o'clock when the boys and Mrs. Hargreaves +returned to the cane-board, looking very much different than when they +left it, and Tim cried as they came up: + +"I've heard all about it, an' what I want to know is, where was old +Nathan while that speechifyin' was goin' on?" + +"I saw him when we first arrived," Mrs. Hargreaves replied, "but he left +a few moments later, although I have no doubt that he remained where he +could hear all that was said without being seen." + +"That's where he was wise. It wouldn't be very pleasant for him to show +himself now, 'cause everybody is down on him after what the deacon +said." + +Dan was obliged to return to his duties, and he whispered to Teddy +before leaving: + +"I tell you what it is, old feller, this has been a reg'lar puddin' for +us, an' I'd give a good deal to see another jest like it." + +"You're all right, but I expect after this Uncle Nathan will be so mad +he'll make me a pile of trouble." + +"Don't worry about that; his claws are cut now. I'll be back in time to +go to supper." + +When he departed Teddy had an opportunity to say a few words to his +mother before she returned home on the stage, which was advertised to +leave at four o'clock, and while he did this all thought of being under +arrest was put far from his mind because of the joy at what he was now +able to perform. + +"Never mind what happens to me," he whispered. "I've now got nearly +money enough to pay off all we owe, an' it has been earned honestly, +too, although I believe they paid a big price for what Dan an' I did on +the creek." + +"I'm thinking more of the praise you earned than the money, Teddy. It +was very sweet to hear the deacon say so much to you before all those +people." + +"Then both of us will be awfully jolly to-night, an' to-morrow I'll be +home, an' bring Dan with me." + +"Invite him to stay just as long as he wishes, and I will have a nice +supper ready when the last stage arrives." + +Teddy gave his mother nearly all the money he had, including the +"testimonial," and as she walked away he said to Tim: + +"I'm willin' to be arrested, an' put into jail a good many days for the +sake of being able to help her as I can do now." + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +_THE TRIAL._ + + +It was only natural that both Teddy and Dan should feel highly elated +after this public expression of admiration which culminated in the +presentation of the purse, but they immediately returned to attend to +their several duties when the ceremonies were finished. + +Dan went back to the exhibition as if he had done nothing worth +remembering, and in less than half an hour from the time the deacon +concluded his flowery speech it would have required a very ardent +student of humanity to discover that anything out of the natural course +of events had taken place. + +At the cane-board Teddy waited upon his customers as before, and without +the slightest sign of having been honored by the magnates of the fair, +while Dan fired at the target as if he had been a boy with no other +claim upon the public's attention than his ability to hit a mark. + +Yet it must be confessed that both experienced a very pleasing sense of +having satisfied the public, and each, in his own peculiar way, knew he +had risen a little above the average boy. + +There can be no question that any one placed in the same position must +have felt gratified by the many expressions of friendship and good-will +with which these two were literally overwhelmed, and it would have been +more than could be expected of human nature had they remained unmoved +under the extravagant flattery which was showered upon them immediately +after the close of Deacon Jones' speech. + +Although there was not quite as much money flowing into the box as on +the day previous, Teddy was more than pleased with the receipts, because +every penny seemed to express just such an amount of good-will. + +Until nearly nightfall he remained at the booth, answering questions +upon the same subject till it seemed to have been worn threadbare, and +then, however great his desire to earn money, he felt a positive sense +of relief that his connection with the Peach Bottom fair had finally +come to an end. + +"This is the last time you an' I will pack up the stuff," he said to Tim +as they put into condition for removal the cane and knife boards. "I +promised to give you all that was left, and you're more than welcome to +it." + +"But you surely don't mean to give me the whole lot," Tim cried in +surprise. + +"That's exactly what I'm going to do, and I sincerely hope when you make +a stand you'll meet with the same good friends I have here." + +"I can't take these things unless you'll allow me to pay something +toward what they cost." + +"Look here, Tim," Teddy said, earnestly, "you have shown yourself to be +a friend of mine, an' every cent that has come in here you've accounted +for. Now, whatever may happen, I'm through bein' a fakir; but if you +want to follow the business, I can only hope you'll come out all right. +We'll carry this to Mr. Sweet's tent, an' I'll only be so much the +better pleased, and in case you don't, I'm bound to help you in every +way. Besides, I promised to pay a certain percentage on the profits; +that is yet to be settled." + +"It never will be," Tim replied in the most decided tone. "If I take +these goods I've got more than a fair share, an' won't listen to +anything else." + +"Very well, we'll leave it that way. You now own everything, an' I owe +you lots of good-will." + +On this basis the remnants of the two boards were packed up for removal, +and when they were about to take the goods to Mr. Sweet's tent Dan +arrived. + +"How much business did you do to-day?" he asked. + +Teddy delayed sufficiently long to count the receipts, and then +replied: + +"Forty-one dollars and fifteen cents. That gives Tim four-eleven, an' I +get more than would have been the case but for the testimonial this +afternoon. The folks crowded around to see me, rather than to get the +canes, an' so business has picked up better than any one expected." + +"It don't make any difference how the money came in so long as you have +got it," Dan replied, philosophically, "an' now the question is what are +we to do for supper, since we paid our bill at the boarding-house this +afternoon?" + +"Have you got any idea?" + +"Of course, or else I wouldn't have asked the question. Let's invite Mr. +Sweet, the bouncer, and the clown to some restaurant down town, an' try +to give them as good a time as we had last night." + +This proposition met with Teddy's approval, and the party was made up as +he suggested, the cost being divided between the two boys who had been +the recipients of the public testimonial. + +Not until a late hour in the evening did these festivities come to an +end, and then the party retired to the museum tent, where they remained +undisturbed until the present season of the Peach Bottom fair had come +to an end. + +It was an unusually late hour for fakirs to arise when Mr. Sweet +awakened the boys as he said: + +"Turn out now, lads, an' get your stuff ready for removal. I'm sorry to +part company, but we can't stay here forever, an' the museum must be +forty miles the other side of Waterville by Monday morning." + +Dan had completed and been paid for his work with the Stevens Company, +therefore he had nothing to do; Teddy no longer claimed any interest in +the canes and knives left over from the week's work; consequently he was +free to go where he pleased, and Tim had his goods in such a condition +that they could be removed at any moment, which prevented him from +feeling any anxiety regarding the future. + +Thus it was that all three of the boys were at liberty to assist the +proprietor of the museum, and this they did with a will until the +arrival of Lawyer Harvey caused them to think of what had almost been +forgotten in the bustle and confusion of breaking camp. + +"We are due at the 'Squire's office at nine o'clock, and it is time you +boys were getting over that way," he said, briskly; "our case won't come +up to-day, but it has been decided to give Hazelton a hearing, and I am +very much afraid he's going to get the worst of it." + +"What do you mean?" Teddy asked, anxiously. + +"Well, you see I have not been able to get any information in addition +to what you boys furnished, and there seems little doubt that the +'Squire must perforce bind him over for trial. The fact that he has +deliberately swindled so many people will work against him, and we can +do very little to save him." + +"What will be the result of his being bound over?" Teddy asked. + +"He must remain in jail, unless he can get bail, until next fall." + +"But that in itself will be a terrible punishment." + +"True; yet it cannot be avoided. If he had worked honestly the case +would be different; but now he will be fortunate even to get out in the +fall." + +"Yet Uncle Nathan says I am equally guilty." + +"We can easily show you had nothing to do with the robbery, and that is +our only care this morning." + +"What about Long Jim?" + +"He remains silent, refusing to answer the simplest questions, and +unless he speaks Hazelton must be bound over; the 'Squire can pursue no +other course." + +Believing as they did that Hazelton was innocent of the charge upon +which he had been arrested, both Teddy and Dan felt it was a great +hardship for the fakir to remain so long in prison; but since it was +beyond their power to give him any relief, neither expressed an opinion +other than has been recorded. + +Mr. Harvey had come for them to accompany him to the Squire's office, +and since there was nothing to detain them they set out, after first +bidding Mr. Sweet a cordial 'goodby, for he had announced his intention +of leaving Peach Bottom on the noon train. + +"I shall see one or both of you at some time in the future," he said, +with considerable feeling, "an' there'll be no complaint to make if I +never fall in with worse boys." + +The bouncer and the clown also had something to say in the form of an +adieu, and when the boys left the proprietor of the alleged wonderful +museum it was like parting with an old friend, for he had shown himself +to be a "very present help in time of trouble." + +Tim did not propose to start for the Run until his companions had +concluded their business; his goods were packed ready for removal, and +there was nothing better for him to do than accompany them to the +court-room where it seemed as if all they might say would result only in +a long term of imprisonment for Hazelton before he could be tried on the +baseless charge brought against him, simply because of the disreputable +business in which he was engaged. + +Mr. Harvey had little or nothing to say during the walk to the 'Squire's +office, and arriving there the jewelry fakir was seen looking thoroughly +despondent. + +"Can I speak with him?" Teddy asked the lawyer. "What do you want to +say?" + +"Nothing in particular, except to tell him how bad I feel because we +could do nothing to clear him." + +"Very well; but do not talk long, for it may prejudice your own case. +The people whom he has swindled are here to see that some form of +punishment is meted out to him, and it can do you no good to be seen +acting as a consoler." + +This possibility troubled Teddy very little since he was confident of +his own innocence, and he approached the prisoner as he said: + +"I wish I could do something, Mr. Hazelton, to prove you as innocent as +I believe you to be." + +"There's no need of that, my boy. I've put you in a hole already, and +you've done more for me than some others who call themselves friends." + +"I know it was Long Jim who committed the burglary; but how can it be +proven now?" + +"There was only one way, and that was to catch the real thieves with +their plunder. Mr. Harvey tells me his attempt was a failure, an' it +wouldn't surprise me if I was not only remanded for trial, but received +a sentence for something of which I am absolutely innocent. I don't +profess to be very good, my boy, as you may understand after seeing me +work on the fair grounds; but I never yet descended to do such things as +I am charged with now." + +"I am certain of that," and Teddy pressed the prisoner's hand in token +of friendship, "and only wish it was possible to aid you." + +"You have already done more than my partners did," was the grateful +reply, and then further conversation was prevented as the 'Squire called +the assembly to order. + +It was not a regular court of law; but one would have thought it the +most dignified judicial body in the country had he seen the air with +which the 'Squire took his seat at the head of the long table as he +called the case. + +"That settles Hazelton," Dan whispered as Teddy left the prisoner and +rejoined his friends. "Somebody has got to suffer in order to make the +law come out square, an' he's the feller what'll have to stand the brunt +of everything." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +_AN ARRIVAL._ + + +Lawyer Harvey did not neglect anything which might work to the advantage +of his client; but in the face of the evidence his efforts appeared to +be in vain. + +Uncle Nathan, who arrived just as the case was called, swore to the fact +that Hazelton had been in his store on the Sunday afternoon prior to the +robbery, and that he had told the prisoner of his keeping large amounts +of money in the building, because of the difficulty and expense of +sending the cash to the Waterville bank. + +He also testified that Hazelton seemed unusually interested in +everything pertaining to the store, and asked many questions relative to +his (the witness') habits, such as the time when business usually began, +how late he remained in the building at night, as well as several other +things which now seemed as if the information had been sought simply for +the purpose of knowing when would be the safest time to commit the +crime. + +"How much did you lose?" Mr. Harvey asked. + +"I don't know for certain; but I stand willin' to give fifty dollars if +the goods can be recovered, an' if my nephew would tell all he +knows----" + +"That will do, Mr. Hargreaves," the lawyer said, sharply. "Teddy is not +under examination, and until he is we do not care to hear your opinion +concerning him." + +"I reckon I can tell what I want to, can't I, 'Squire?" + +"You must confine yourself to this particular case. As to whether there +is sufficient evidence to bind the prisoner over does not concern the +charge against your nephew, at least not to the extent of your telling +what you think." + +"I thought, perhaps, if he heard me say I'd give fifty dollars to know +where the goods were, an' knew I'd swear to it, he might confess, for he +has shown himself to be powerful fond of a dollar." + +"That appears to be a peculiarity of some of his relatives," Mr. Harvey +said, dryly, and at this remark the spectators laughed heartily, while +the old man growled: + +"I didn't come here to be told that I was a miser; but it seems even men +who call themselves gentlemen think sich things are all right." + +"If you have no other evidence to give we will not detain you," the +lawyer said, sharply; and as Uncle Nathan returned to his chair near the +door the proprietor of the hotel at the Run was called upon to testify. + +What he said was in favor of the prisoner rather than otherwise. + +He swore to the fact that the prisoner spent the night on which the +burglary was committed at his house; that he pretended to retire at an +early hour, and started for Peach Bottom on the first stage. + +Under Mr. Harvey's skillful cross-examination the landlord admitted that +unless a man got out of the window he could not have left the house +without the knowledge of the watchman, who kept the keys and remained in +the office all night. It was also shown that Hazelton brought and +carried away with him, so far as was known at the hotel, nothing but a +small traveling satchel. + +Then several people from the Run were called to prove that the fakir was +really in the town on this particular Sunday, and the driver of the +stage testified that the prisoner rode with him the entire distance to +Peach Bottom. The landlord of the hotel where Hazelton boarded during +the fair week, or so much of it as he was at liberty, swore to the fact +that the prisoner had never brought any quantity of baggage to his +house, and appeared to be very regular in his habits. So far as he (the +landlord) knew, the fakir remained in his room nearly all the time, +except while on the exhibition grounds. + +This ended the testimony, and Mr. Harvey argued that there was really +no evidence to connect the prisoner with the crime. + +"That he conducted a game which could hardly be called honest is +admitted," he said; "but it has nothing to do with the case. Prejudice +should not be allowed to take the place of facts, and I insist that my +client be released." + +"I reckon there's sufficient ground for suspicion," the 'Squire replied, +"an' I don't see any other way out of it. A jury must decide, an' I +shall hold him in the sum of three thousand----" + +At this moment the dignity of the court received a severe shock, as a +most unseemly disturbance suddenly occurred at the door, and the 'Squire +paused to learn who was so bold as to disturb the representative of the +law at the very instant when he was delivering an opinion. + +"It's nobody but a boy," Uncle Nathan replied as he held the door firmly +closed, while the would-be visitor kicked so vigorously as to threaten +the destruction of the panels. + +"Bring him in here, an' we'll see whether such a row can be kicked up in +a court of law with impunity." + +"Better let me throw him into the street," Uncle Nathan snarled. + +"Mr. Constable, bring that boy before me," the 'Squire said, sternly, +and an instant later, to the consternation of all those who had seen +him, the boy who was supposed to have been drowned two days before +entered, looking decidedly the worse for having existed so long without +water and soap. + +"Why, it's Sam, an' he ain't dead!" Teddy cried as he rose to his feet. + +"Of course I ain't; but it wouldn't been many days before I turned into +a corpse if I hadn't got away from them thieves," the amateur detective +replied. + +"Who are you, an' what do you want here?" the 'Squire asked, sternly, as +he rapped on the table for the spectators to remain silent. + +"Why, I'm Sam Balderston, the feller who come to the fair to work for +the Davis Boat an' Oar Company of Detroit, an' if what Long Jim told me +was true, folks have been tryin' to find me in the creek." + +"This is the boy who was reported to have been drowned on the day when +those lads," here the lawyer pointed to Teddy and Dan, "claim to have +seen two men carrying goods into an old barn on the marshes. I fancy he +can give us information relative to the true burglars." + +"You bet I can," and now that he was the central figure in the scene, +all Sam's old assurance returned. "If you mean the fellers what broke +into Teddy's uncle's store, I can flash one of them up. The other come +to the fair an' didn't get back, so Phil thought he was arrested." + +"Who do you mean by the other fellow?" Mr. Harvey asked. + +"Why, Long Jim, the same man what swindled Teddy out of his fifteen +dollars at Waterville." + +"Have you been with him since your disappearance?" + +"Most of the time he hung around, an' then ag'in Phil was there." + +"Who is Phil?" + +"Long Jim's partner. They've got a slat of stuff what has been stole +'round here, an' I know where all of it is." + +"Tell the 'Squire the whole story." + +This was Sam's opportunity, and, in order to cover himself with glory, +he slaughtered the truth in the most shocking manner. + +"Well," he said, in a consequential way, "when Dan an' me an' Teddy saw +the thieves carryin' stuff down to that old barn I wanted to rush in an' +arrest both; but the other fellows was scared an' come ashore to talk +with Hazelton so's he'd tell 'em what to do. Then I jes' made up my mind +to carry on the job myself, an' went back." + +"Where?" the 'Squire asked. + +"To the barn to get the stuff. While I was diggin' it up the men come +back, an' the minute they saw who was on their trail they got +frightened." + +"And who was on their trail?" the 'Squire interrupted. + +"Why, me, of course. They rushed in, an' I had the awfullest row; but it +was two to one, an' so I got the worst of it. They had to work mighty +hard before gettin' me tired, an' then all the stuff was dug up an' put +in the boat. My craft was upset an' sent adrift, so's to make it look as +if I was dead, an' we went down the creek six or seven miles, where we +hid in the woods. Phil came back here after more goods what had been +stolen, an' they was goin' to skip the country, when there was a big +row, an' Long Jim allowed he'd come to the fair once more. Phil was mad, +an' got pretty drunk, an' after that I had my innings. I turned to an' +lashed him up same's I'd been; but we had an' awful fight. It takes +more'n one man to git away with me." + +"Where is this fellow now?" the 'Squire interrupted again. + +"Down the creek, tied up so's he can't hardly breathe, an' he must be +pretty near sober by this time." + +"If he was very drunk I do not understand how he could have fought so +hard." + +"Well, he did; but I got the best of him, an' what's more, I know where +all the stuff that's been stolen is hid." + +"Mr. Constable, bring into court the prisoner who is charged with +swindling, and let us see if this extraordinary boy can identify him," +the 'Squire said, with an unusual amount of dignity. + +"If it's Long Jim, you bet I can," Sam said, as he turned toward the +spectators that they might have a good opportunity of seeing such a +wonderful detective as he claimed to be. + +Teddy and Dan could hardly control their impatience to speak privately +with Sam. As a matter of course, they understood that he was +embellishing the story, and both were eager to make him tell the exact +truth. + +Just at that moment, however, Sam had no time to spend on ordinary boys. +He had come out of a bad scrape with apparently flying colors, and +intended to enjoy his triumph to the utmost before sinking back to his +rightful plane. + +The jail was near at hand, and Sam had not exhibited himself as much as +he desired when Long Jim was brought in. + +On seeing the boy the burglar gave a start of surprise, and allowed the +incriminating question to escape his lips: + +"Has Phil been pinched, too?" + +"I took care of that business, an' we'll bring him in some time to-day. +Say, what about that awful lickin' you was goin' to give me?" + +"I'll cut your throat before this job is finished," was the angry reply, +and there was no longer any necessity of asking Sam if he recognized the +prisoner. + +"You say you can show us the stolen goods, and the other burglar is +where the officers can get him?" Mr. Harvey asked. + +"That's just what I can do," Sam replied, proudly. + +"Then you will have earned fifty dollars, for Mr. Hargreaves has +promised, even sworn, that he will pay that amount for the return of his +property," Mr. Harvey continued. + +"He might as well give me the money now, for I'm ready to turn the stuff +up, an' when there's more big detective work to be done, come to me." + +"I don't know about payin' any reward till I'm certain the little +villain isn't one of the thieves himself, an' is doin' this to swindle +me," Uncle Nathan cried, quickly. + +"He shall have the reward if the story is true," the 'Squire replied. +"You can't go back on what you've sworn to, an' must pay up. Mr. +Constable, get two or three men an' go with this boy. Don't lose sight +of him for a minute until he has given all the information in his +power." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +_IN CONCLUSION._ + + +Sam was led away before either Teddy or Dan could speak privately with +him; but they went at once to congratulate Hazelton on his apparently +happy escape, and, in response to Mr. Harvey's request, the 'Squire +said: + +"The prisoner can remain here, or in your custody, until the party +returns. If the boy has told the truth there is nothing for me to do but +discharge him, and I am really glad that he has come out so +fortunately." + +"Don't think I'll ever forget what you've done for me," Hazelton +whispered to Teddy. + +"But it isn't me at all. Sam seems to have fixed everything." + +"I've got an idea that I know pretty near the truth of the whole story, +never mind how he tells it. At all events, we've no reason to complain, +for if the goods and the other burglar are found, we are out of our +trouble. Your uncle's charges can't hold after that." + +It was, as Teddy now realized for the first time, a happy conclusion to +the troubles of both, and his heart was lighter than it had been at any +time since the accusation was made. + +There was no question that those who had gone with Sam would be absent +several hours, and the little party in the court-room had more time at +their disposal than could well be occupied by the discussion of their +affairs. + +After the different phases of the case had been gone over in detail, +Hazelton asked Teddy: + +"How did you come out at the fair?" + +"I haven't figured up; but I know I've made a good deal, an' it must be +almost enough, countin' the money Deacon Jones gave us, to pay the debt +on the place." + +Until this moment Teddy had had so much on his mind that the principal +cause of his turning fakir was absent from his mind; but now, with +nothing better to do, he began to count up the week's work, announcing +the result a few moments later by saying: + +"I took in two hundred an' fifty-two dollars an' fifty cents during the +week. Out of that must come the money I lost at Waterville, what I paid +Uncle Nathan, the privilege, the money I paid Mr. Reaves for the stock, +Tim's wages, an' my board. That leaves one hundred an' forty-five +dollars an' ninety-eight cents. With what came in from the testimonial +I'll have enough to pay off the debt on the house, an' pretty near +eight dollars for myself, which is what I call a big week's work." + +"I'm glad you have made it," Hazelton replied, heartily. "There is a +little matter between you an' I which yet remains to be settled, and +when that has been done you should be considerably better off." + +"I don't want you to do a thing," Teddy said, quickly. "So many people +have helped me since the fair opened that it seems as if I was nothing +more or less than a beggar." + +"You come very far from deserving that title," the fakir replied, and +then the entrance of Mr. Reaves interrupted the conversation. After +talking with the lawyer, the merchant said to Teddy: + +"I am more than pleased to learn that you will be freed from all your +troubles in a short time. Next week I shall be in need of a clerk, and +if you wish to take the situation it shall be left open until you are +ready to go to work. The wages are six dollars a week for the first +year, with an increase as soon as you can earn it, and I will really be +pleased to have you in my employ." + +"I'd like to come," Teddy replied; "but it don't seem just right to +leave mother." + +"There is no necessity of doing so. You can ride back and forth on the +stage, unless your mother should decide, as I think she will eventually, +to make her home in Waterville." + +"If she approves of the plan I'll come to work next week." + +"Make it two weeks, so that there'll be plenty of time to arrange +matters, and I will expect you," the merchant replied in a tone which +showed that he was more than satisfied with the arrangement. "I only +came over to see if you needed any assistance; but Mr. Harvey says +you'll soon be free from the charge your uncle made, therefore I will go +back at once." + +About an hour after the merchant departed Sam and the constables +returned with Phil and the stolen goods. + +The amateur detective was in the best possible spirits, and now that the +burglar had been apprehended through his assistance the boy felt +absolutely certain he was the greatest detective in the country. + +As a matter of course, there was nothing the 'Squire could do save +discharge Hazelton from custody, and after Mr. Harvey had given his word +that he would take care Sam should appear when wanted as a witness, the +boy rejoined his friends, saying as he did so: + +"If you fellers had done as I wanted you'd be way up now, the same as I +am. Of course, I don't blame you for being afraid; but when you go out +on such work the only way is to hold on." + +"I wonder how long you'd have held on if the men hadn't made you stay +with them?" Dan asked. + +"Who told you that?" Sam said. "If I staid, it was because I knowed it +wouldn't be long until I got the upper hand of the gang, an I've done +it." + +Before the party separated, and while Uncle Nathan was identifying the +goods which had been stolen from him, Mr. Harvey insisted that the +reward should be paid, and although it was very much like drawing a +tooth, the old man was finally induced to make his word good. + +"It's a pile of money, but I earned it," Sam said, as he tucked Uncle +Nathan's grudgingly bestowed cash in his trousers pocket. "There ain't +many 'round this part of the country who could have done what I did, an' +it's only right detectives should be well paid." + +Then, with many protestations of friendship, the lawyer started for +home, after returning to Hazelton the money which Teddy had given Mr. +Reaves for safekeeping, and the fakir said as he walked out of the +court-room with the four boys: + +"Now, I want you to come with me, until my business is settled, and then +I'll shake the dust of Peach Bottom from my feet in the shortest +possible time." + +Not understanding what he meant, the boys accompanied him to the nearest +jewelry store, and there he bought two silver watches, which he +presented to Teddy and Dan, as he said: + +"These are only to remind you that I am grateful for what has been done. +It isn't much of a present; but it will suffice to show I'm not +ungrateful. Some time in the future I may meet you again, and then the +full debt shall be paid if I'm solid enough to do it." + +He was gone almost before the astonished boys could thank him, and with +his departure this story should properly be concluded, since Teddy has +made his last appearance as a fakir. + +A few more words, and "the end" shall be written. + +Sam, still believing himself especially designed for a detective, is yet +displaying his "style" as an oarsman in the employ of the Davis Boat and +Oar Company, and he believes he has guessed the weight of the yacht +which is so soon to be given away. + +Dan accepted an offer from Mr. Reaves last week, and he and Teddy are +learning the same business, both looking forward to the time when they +shall own a store equally as large. + +Uncle Nathan is still at the Run, but his trade has decreased very +materially, and Hazelton has not been seen since the day he left Peach +Bottom; but it is quite possible that when the fair opens this season +all the fakirs may again meet the country boy who made such a successful +venture at the country fair. + + + [THE END.] + + + +[Illustration: 53 STATE ST. + 19 KILBY ST.] + + +CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON. + +RIDPATH'S UNITED STATES. + +Cloth 3.75 Sheep 5.00 Half Morocco 6.00 + +Size of Volumes 7-1/2 x 10-1/4 Inches. + + +[Illustration: THE UNITED STATES A HISTORY +JOHN CLARK RIDPATH L.L.D.] + +_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._ + +FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE +PUBLISHERS. + + +CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS BOSTON. + +HALL'S IRELAND, 3 VOLS. IN 1. + +Cloth 3.75 Sheep 5.00 Half Morocco 6.00 + +Size of Volumes 7 1/2 x 10 1/4 Inches. + + +[Illustration: IRELAND ITS HISTORY SCENERY AND PEOPLE] + +_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._ + +FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE +PUBLISHERS. + + +CHARLES E. BROWN & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS, BOSTON. + +MISS PARLOA'S COOK BOOK. + +Cloth, silver and black Side and Back 1.25 + +Size of Volumes 5-1/4 x 7-3/4 Inches. + + +[Illustration: MISS PARLOA'S COOK BOOK] + +_Fac-simile Volume Reduced._ + + +FOR SALE BY ALL BOOKSELLERS OR SENT UPON RECEIPT OF PRICE BY THE +PUBLISHERS. + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +Transcriber's Note: + +[----] denotes a word missing in the original text. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A COUNTRY BOY AT A +COUNTRY FAIR*** + + +******* This file should be named 37647.txt or 37647.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/7/6/4/37647 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/37647.zip b/37647.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d5e36b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/37647.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5df1858 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #37647 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/37647) |
